ARIB

STD-T95

OFDMA/TDMA TDD
Broadband Wireless Access System(XGP)

ARIB STANDARD

ARIB STD-T95 Version 3.1
Version 1.0 December 12th 2007
Version 1.1 June
6th 2008
Version 1.2 March
18th 2009
Version 1.3 December 16th 2009
Version 2.0 July
7th 2011
Version 2.1 February 14th 2012
Version 2.2 December 18th 2012
Version 3.0 July
3rd 2013
Version 3.1 March
18th 2014

Association of Radio Industries and Businesses

General Notes to ARIB Standards and Technical Reports.
1. The copyright of this document is ascribed to the Association of Radio Industries and Businesses(ARIB).
2. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, ortransmitted, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of ARIB.
3. Attachment 3 is reproduced with the consent of XGP Forum which owns the copyright in it.
4. The establishment, revision and abolishment of ARIB Standards are approved at the ARIB Standard
Assembly which meets several times a year. Approved ARIB Standards in their original language
are made publicly available in hard copy, CDs or through web posting, generally in about one monthafter the date of approval.
5. The note about IPR (Industrial Property Rights) of the standard applies to the use of Essential IPR
for the ARIB Standard in Japan. If the ARIB Standard is adopted outside Japan, Essential IPR willbe treated in accordance with policies stated by each IPR owner. The IPR owners are, however,expected to apply the rules of the preface of the "Guidelines for Treatment of Industrial Property
Rights in connection with the ARIB standard” (September 5, 1995, approved by the 1st Standard
Assembly Meeting). In the preface of the Guidelines, it is stated that it is "desirable that the
Essential IPR which relates to any or all parts of the contents of the ARIB Standards should be used
free of charge by anyone and that it would not block the uses of such Essential IPR in any othercountry where such an ARIB Standard is adopted"

ARIB STD-T95

Preface

Introduction
Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (hereinafter ARIB) investigates andsummarizes the basic technical requirements for various radio systems in the form of “technicalstandard (ARIB STD)”. These standards are being developed with the participation of, andthrough discussions amongst various radio equipment manufacturers, operators and users.
ARIB standards include “government technical standards” (mandatory standards) that are
set for the purpose of encouraging effective use of frequency resources and preventing
interference, and “private technical standards” (voluntary standards) that are defined in orderto guarantee compatibility between radio facilities, to secure adequate transmission quality as
well as to offer greater convenience to radio equipment manufacturers and users, etc.
An ARIB STANDARD herein is published as "OFDMA/TDMA TDD Broadband WirelessAccess System (XGP)".

In order to ensure fairness and transparency in the defining stage, thestandard was set by consensus of the standard council with participation of interested parties
including radio equipment manufacturers, telecommunications operators, broadcasters, testingorganizations, general users, etc. with impartiality.
ARIB sincerely hopes that this standard be utilized actively by radio equipment
manufacturers, telecommunications operators, and users, etc.

ARIB STD-T95

INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPRs)
Although this ARIB Standard contains no specific reference to any Essential Industrial
Property Rights relating thereto, the holders of such Essential Industrial Property Rights state
to the effect that the rights listed in Attachment 1 and 2, which are the Industrial Property
Rights relating to this standard, are held by the parties also listed therein, and that to the usersof this standard, in the case of Attachment 1 (selection of option 1), such holders shall not assert
any rights and shall unconditionally grant a license to practice such Industrial Property Rights
contained therein, and in the case of Attachment 2 (selection of option 2), the holders shall grant,
under the reasonable terms and conditions, a non-exclusive and non-discriminatory license topractice the Industrial Property Rights contained therein. However, this does not apply toanyone who uses this ARIB Standard and also owns and lays claim to any other Essential
Industrial Property Rights of which is covered in whole or part in the contents of provisions of
this ARIB Standard.

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs)
The lists of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs) are shown in the following
attachments.

Attachment 1 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 1)
Attachment 2 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 2)

ARIB STD-T95

Contents
Preface
INTRODUCTION
INDUSTRIAL PROPERTY RIGHTS (IPRs)
List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (IPRs)
Chapter 1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................................... 1
1.1 Overview...............................................................................................................................1
1.2 Scope of the Standard .......................................................................................................... 1
1.3 Reference Regulations ......................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Reference Documents........................................................................................................... 2
Chapter 2 Technical Requirements for Radio Facilities .................................................................. 3
2.1 General Conditions .............................................................................................................. 3
2.1.1 System Structure (ORE,Article 49.29) ......................................................................... 3
2.1.2 Radio Frequency Band (ORE,Article 49.29) ................................................................. 3
2.1.3 Modulation Method (ORE,Article 49.29) ...................................................................... 3
2.1.4 General Requirement (ORE,Article 49.29)................................................................... 3
2.2 Conditions Relating to Transmitter and Receiver .............................................................. 5
2.2.1 Transmission Characteristics ....................................................................................... 5
2.2.1.1 Transmission Power (ORE,Article 49.29) (ORE.Article 14) (NT No.651, 2007)... 5
2.2.1.2 Adjacent Channel Power (NT No.651, 2007) ......................................................... 7
2.2.1.3 Transmission Intermodulation (NT No.651, 2007) ............................................... 8
2.2.1.4 Transmission Synchronization (NT No. 651, 2007) ............................................... 9
2.2.1.5 Carrier off Time Leakage Power (ORE,Article 49.29) ......................................... 10
2.2.1.6 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain(NT No.651, 2007) ................................................................................................. 10
2.2.1.7 Allowed Value for Occupied Bandwidth (ORE, Article 6,Table 2)....................... 13
2.2.1.8 Frequency Stability (ORE, Article 5,Table 1) ...................................................... 13
2.2.1.9 Transmission Antennas (ORE,Article 49.29) ....................................................... 13
2.2.1.10 SAR (ORE,Article 14.2) (NT 653, 2007) ............................................................. 13
2.2.2 Reception Characteristics ........................................................................................... 14
2.2.2.1 Sensitivity ............................................................................................................. 14
2.2.2.2 Adjacent Channel Selectivity ............................................................................... 15
2.2.2.3 Intermodulation Characteristic ........................................................................... 15-i-

ARIB STD-T95

2.2.2.4 Spurious Response Immunity .............................................................................. 16
2.2.2.5 Conducted Spurious Component (ORE,Article 24) ............................................. 16
Chapter 3 Physical and MAC Layer Specifications ....................................................................... 20
Chapter 4 Japanese specific matters ............................................................................................. 21
Chapter 5 Measurement Method ................................................................................................... 22
Attachment
Attachment 1 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 1)
Attachment 2 List of Essential Industrial Property Rights (selection of option 2)
Attachment 3 XGP specifications
Change History-ii-

ARIB STD-T95

Chapter 1 General Descriptions

1.1 Overview
This standard specifies requirements of the radio equipment of radio stations stipulated in
the Ministry of Internal Affair and Communications (MIC), Ordinance Regulating Radio
Equipment, Article 49.29 (this refers to the radio equipment of radio stations of OFDMA/TDMA
or SC-FDMA/TDMA TDD Broadband Wireless Access System using 2.5 GHz band. XGP, which
is defined as the technology for personal wireless broadband services based on all-IP core
network.
The standard shall be in accordance with MIC Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment,
Article 49.29 (including related notifications) when XGP facilities are used in Japan.

1.2 Scope of the Standard
XGP Network consists of Mobile Station (MS), Base Station (BS) and IP networks, and thescope of the standard is shown in Figure 1.1.

MS

BS

MS

BS

MS

BS

GateWay

IP CoreNetwork

Scope of the standard

Figure 1.1 Configuration of XGP Network
Mobile Station (MS) is used by the end users to access the network. XGP Network comprises
base stations (BS) and Gateways. BS is responsible for providing the air interface to MS, while
Gateway typically acts as IP layer transporter to Network.
This standard defines the minimum level of specifications required for connection andservices for XGP. This consists of two different specifications, i.e., Japanese regulatory-1-

ARIB STD-T95

specifications applied for radio systems, and Physical and MAC layers specifications. The
Japanese regulatory specifications are developed by national regulatory administration, i.e. theMinistry of Internal Affair and Communications (MIC). The physical and MAC layers
specifications are developed by international standard organization, i.e., XGP Forum.
This standard is intended to combine the national regulations and the international
specifications, however in case of inconsistency between them, the national regulations shallprevail. The national regulations are the mandatory requirements for operation of XGP in
Japan.

1.3 Reference Regulations
The acronyms of the referenced regulations used in this standard are as follows;
RERL : Regulations for Enforcement of Radio Law
ORE : Ordinance Regulating Radio Equipment
OTRCC: Ordinance Concerning Technical Regulations Conformity Certification etc. ofSpecified Radio Equipment.
OTF: Ordinance Concerning Terminal Facilities etc.
RTCCA: Rules Concerning the Technical Conditions Compliance approval etc. for Terminal
Equipment.
NT: “Notification” refers to a Notification of the Ministry of Internal Affairs andCommunications.

1.4 Reference Documents- A-GN4.00-03-TS “XGP Specifications”-2-

ARIB STD-T95

Chapter 2 Technical Requirements for Radio Facilities
This chapter has regulations regarding the technical requirements for radio facilities for theradio station of XGP in Japan.
MIC Ordinances and related Notifications contained in the chapter 2 are translated into
English from the original Japanese regulations of MIC Ordinances and related Notifications.
The original Japanese regulations shall prevail if any ambiguity exists between therequirements and the original in Japanese.

2.1 General Conditions
2.1.1 System Structure (ORE,Article 49.29)(1) Base Station (BS)(2) Mobile Station (MS)(3) Low Power Repeater
Low Power Repeaters is Mobile Station that relays between BS and MS.
(4) Relay Station (RS)For the technical requirement of RS, the radio equipment (uplink) which communicateswith BS complies with the technical requirement of MS and the radio equipment(downlink) which communicates with MS complies with the technical requirement of BS.
(5) Radio station which establishes communication and other operation for maintenance ofradio equipment
If communication is not possible between a radio station which establishes
communication to maintain or adjust a radio equipment of BS in OFDM / TDM access
scheme broadband mobile radio access system or such BS and MS which is a partner ofsuch BS in communication, it means a radio station operating as RS.

2.1.2 Radio Frequency Band (ORE,Article 49.29)
The radio frequency band is the 2.5 GHz band (over 2,545 MHz - 2,655 MHz or less).

2.1.3 Modulation Method (ORE,Article 49.29)
The modulation methods are BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 32QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM.

2.1.4 General Requirement (ORE,Article 49.29)(1) Communication method shall be as follows:- For transmission from BS or RS to MS, or from BS to RS, from Low Power Repeater to-3-

ARIB STD-T95

MS; (downlink)
The multiplexing method is a combination of OFDM and TDM, or OFDM, TDM and
SDM.
- For transmission from MS or RS to BS, or from MS to RS, from Low Power Repeater toBS; (uplink)
The access method is a combination of OFDMA and TDMA, a combination of OFDMA,
TDMA and SDMA, or a combination of SC-FDMA and TDMA, a combination of
SC-FDMA, TDMA and SDMA.
(2) Transmission equipment of each MS which establishes communication with BS or RS
shall be automatically identified.
(3) Switching from a traffic channel of one BS or RS to a traffic channel of other BS shall be
automatically performed. (Except that communication system is configured by MS withabsolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi.)(4) Radio equipment of BS shall be connectable to telecommunication circuit equipment.
(5) The power supply of radio equipment in MS with absolute gain of transmission antennaof over 4 dBi to 10 dBi or less shall be AC (alternate current) power.
(6) The radio frequency transmitted from MS shall be automatically selected by receiving
the radio wave from its partner BS or radio station which establishes communication totest the radio equipment in this system.
(7) In addition to the above items, radio equipment shall comply with the technicalrequirement separately notified by Minister for Internal Affairs and Communications.
(8) Type of repeating shall be as follows: (only Low Power Repeater)
The repeater shall be of Non-regenerative and Generative repeating type.
Table 2.1 Type of Repeating
Type of Repeating
Relay frequency

Non-regenerative repeating

Generative repeating

Same

Different

Same

Different

frequency

frequency

frequency

frequency

Number of channels

3 channels (max)

3 channels (max)Configuration

Integrated or separated type

Integrated or separated type-4-

ARIB STD-T95

2.2 Conditions Relating to Transmitter and Receiver
2.2.1 Transmission Characteristics
2.2.1.1 Transmission Power (ORE,Article 49.29) (ORE.Article 14) (NT No.651, 2007)(1) The transmission power of BS shall be as follows.
Table 2.2 Transmission Power of BS
The absolute gain of transmission antenna

The transmission power

17 dBi or less (Note1)

2.5/5/10MHz System: 20 W or less
20MHz system: 40 W or lessOver 17 dBi to 20 dBi or less (Note1, 2)

20 W or lessOver 20 dBi to 23 dBi or less (Note1, 2)

5 W or lessOver 23 dBi to 25 dBi or less (Note1, 2)

3.2 W or less

Note1: The following transmitter shall be limited for use in depopulated areas, mountainvillages, isolated island areas or the areas authorized by Minister of Internal Affairs
and Communications; The transmitter in BS that communicates with MS or RS of which absolute gain oftransmission antenna exceeds 4 dBi.
; The transmitter in BS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 17 dBi.
Note2: The BS with absolute gain of transmitting antenna of over 17 dBi shall communicate
with only one radio station.
(2) The MS that communicates with BS of which absolute gain of transmission antenna beequal to 17 dBi or less shall be as follows.
Table 2.3 Transmission Power of MS (1)The absolute gain of transmission antenna

The transmission power

4 dBi or less (Note3, Note4)

200 mW or lessOver 4 dBi to 10 dBi or less (Note1, 2 )200 mW or lessOver 10 dBi to 20 dBi or less (Note2,)

200 mW or lessOver 20 dBi to 23 dBi or less (Note2)

100 mW or lessOver 23 dBi to 25 dBi or less (Note2)

63 mW or less

Note1: The transmitter in MS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi to
10 dBi or less is restricted to use in doors or the place where screening effect of radio
wave is equal to indoor.

-5-

ARIB STD-T95

Note2: The transmitter in MS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi
shall be limited for use in depopulated areas, mountain villages, isolated islands orthe areas authorized by Minister of Internal Affairs and Communications, also shallnot communicate with the BS which is installed except in the above places.
Note3: In Case of Regenerative repeating, a maximum transmission power per carrier is
200mW or less.
Note4: In Case of Non-regenerative repeating, a maximum transmission power is theaggregate of the output power. And the maximum number of the transmission
channel is 3, when operated simultaneously.
(3) The MS that communicates with BS of which absolute gain of transmission antenna beover 17 dBi shall be as follows.
Table 2.4 Transmission Power of MS (2)The absolute gain of transmission antenna

The transmission power

23 dBi or less

200 mW or lessOver 23 dBi to 25 dBi or less

126 mW or lessNote: The transmitter in MS shall be limited for use in depopulated areas, mountainvillages, isolated islands or the areas authorized by Minister of Internal Affairs andCommunications, and shall not communicate with the BS which is installed except
in the above places.
(4) The transmitter in RS- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.2 and Table 2.3 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.1 should be referred.
Tolerance for transmission power:
BS: Within +87 %, -47 %MS: Within +87 %, -47 %Low Power Repeater: Within +87 %, -47 %-6-

ARIB STD-T95

2.2.1.2 Adjacent Channel Power (NT No.651, 2007)(1) Standards
The adjacent channel power of the transmitter in RS shall apply as follows.
- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.4 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.5 should be referred.
Table 2.5 Adjacent Channel Power of MS and Low Power Repeater
Channel spacing

Allowed value for adjacent channel power

2.5 MHz(1) For the band of ±1.25 MHz in the mistuned frequency of 2.5 MHz: 2
dBm or less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 3.75 MHz to less than
6.25 MHz: -10 dBm /MHz or less.

5 MHz(1) For the band of ±2.5 MHz in the mistuned frequency of 5 MHz: 2dBm or
less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 7.5 MHz to less than 12.5
MHz: -10 dBm/MHz or less

10 MHz(1) For the band of ±5MHz in the mistuned frequency of 10 MHz: 2 dBm or
less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 15 MHz to less than 20
MHz: - 25dBm/MHz or less(3) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 20 MHz to less than 25
MHz: -30 dBm/MHz or less

20 MHz(1) For the band of ±10MHz in the mistuned frequency of 20 MHz: 3 dBmor less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 30 MHz to less than 35
MHz: -25 dBm/MHz or less(3) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 35 MHz to less than 50
MHz: -30 dBm/MHz or less
Table 2.6 Adjacent Channel Power of BS

Channel spacing

Allowed value for adjacent channel power

2.5 MHz(1) For the band of ±1.25 MHz in the mistuned frequency of 2.5 MHz: 3-7-

ARIB STD-T95

dBm or less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 3.75 MHz to less than
6.25 MHz: -5.25 dBm/MHz or less
5 MHz

(1) For the band of ±2.5 MHz in the mistuned frequency of 5 MHz: 3 dBmor less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 7.5 MHz to less than 12.5
MHz: -15.7 dBm/MHz or less

10 MHz(1) For the band of ±5 MHz in the mistuned frequency of 10 MHz: 3 dBm or
less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 15 MHz to less than 25
MHz: -22 dBm/MHz or less

20 MHz(1) For the band of ±10MHz in the mistuned frequency of 20 MHz: 6 dBmor less(2) For the band in the mistuned frequency from 30 MHz to less than 50
MHz: - 22 dBm/MHz or less2.2.1.3 Transmission Intermodulation (NT No.651, 2007)

Intermodulation characteristic of BS and RS (only RS transmitted to MS) shall be as follows.
(1) Channel spacing of 2.5 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-2.5
MHz and +/-5 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of 30
dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed theallowed value of adjacent channel power (2.2.1.2 adjacent channel power).
(2) Channel spacing of 5 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-5
MHz and +/-10 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed value of adjacent channel power (2.2.1.2 adjacent channel power).
(3) Channel spacing of 10 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-10
MHz and +/-20 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed value of adjacent channel power (2.2.1.2 adjacent channel power).

-8-

ARIB STD-T95(4) Channel spacing of 20 MHz
Under the condition of rated output desired wave, when the interference wave of +/-20
MHz and +/-40 MHz away from the desired wave is added by the transmission power of
30 dB lower than the rated output desired wave, intermodulation power shall not exceed
the allowed value of adjacent channel power (2.2.1.2 adjacent channel power).

2.2.1.4 Transmission Synchronization (NT No. 651, 2007)(1) Transmission burst cycle
Within 2.5 msec, 5 msec, 10 msec
(2) Transmission burst length
Transmission burst length shall be as follows.
Table 2.7 Transmission Burst Length
BS andMS andLow Power Repeater to MS

Low Power Repeater to BS

Within M×625μs (Note1)

Within N×625μs (Note1)

Within P×1,000μs (Note2)

Within Q×1,000μs (Note2)

Note1: M+N=4, 8, or 16 (M, N is a positive integer)
Note2: P+Q=5, or 10 (P, Q is a positive number, including the decimal)
Note3: Transmission burst length for the radio frequency of over 2575 MHz to 2595 MHz orless shall be equal to the transmission burst length for the radio equipment in BS
and MS for the use of the frequency of over 2545 MHz to 2575 MHz or less or over2595 MHz to 2625 MHz.
Note4: The transmitter in RS- Transmission to BS should be referring the value for MS.
- Transmission to MS should be referring the value for BS.
Note5: Such burst length is not defined in the standard of XGP referred to Chapter 3 at this
time.

-9-

ARIB STD-T95

2.2.1.5 Carrier off Time Leakage Power (ORE,Article 49.29)(1) Standardsa) MS: -30 dBm or lessb) BS: -30 dBm or lessc) Low Power Repeater: -30 dBm or less2.2.1.6 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain (NT No.651,
2007)(1) Standards
The tolerance limits of the intensity of unwanted emission of the transmitter in RS shallapply as follows.
- Transmission to BS:
The value for MS shown in the Table 2.8 should be referred.
- Transmission to MS:
The value for BS shown in the Table 2.9 should be referred.
Table 2.8 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain of MS
and Low Power Repeater

Frequency
From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz
From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz
From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz
From 1000 MHz to less than 2505 MHz

Tolerance limits of the intensity
Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is-13 dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.
1. The MS that communicates with BS ofwhich absolute gain of transmission antenna

From 2505 MHz to less than 2530 MHz

be equal to 17 dBi or less(i) The absolute gain of transmission antennais equal to 4 dBi or less-10-

ARIB STD-T95

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -30
dBm or less.
(ii) The absolute gain of transmission antenna
is over 4 dBi to 10 dBi or less
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -70
dBm or less.
(iii) The absolute gain of transmission antenna
is over 10 dBi
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -68
dBm or less.
2. The MS that communicates with BS ofwhich absolute gain of transmission antenna
exceed 17 dBi.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -61
dBm or less.
1. The MS that communicates with BS ofwhich absolute gain of transmission antenna
be equal to 17 dBi or less.
(i) The absolute gain of transmission antennais equal to 4 dBi or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band isequal to -25 dBm or less
F shall be within the frequency band describedin the left column.
From 2530 MHz to less than 2535 MHz(ii) The absolute gain of transmission antenna
is over 4 dBi to 10 dBi or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -70
dBm or less.
(iii) The absolute gain of transmission antenna
is over 10 dBi.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -68
dBm or less.
2. The MS that communicates with BS ofwhich absolute gain of transmission antenna
exceed 17 dBi.

-11-

ARIB STD-T95

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -61
dBm or less.
From 2535 MHz to less than 2655 MHz (Note)

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -30
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13

2655 MHz or more

dBm or less.

(Note) Frequency band shall be limited as follows:- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 2.5 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 6.25 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 5 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 12.5 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 10 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 25 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 20 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 50 MHz or
more
Table 2.9 Tolerance Limits of the Intensity of Unwanted Emission in Spurious Domain of BS

Frequency
From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz
From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz
From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz
From 1000 MHz to less than 2505 MHz
From 2505 MHz to less than 2535 MHz
From 2535 MHz to less than 2655 MHz (Note)
2655 MHz or moreTolerance limits of the intensity
Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is-13 dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -42
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -22
dBm or less.
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is -13
dBm or less.

(Note) Frequency band shall be limited as follows:-12-

ARIB STD-T95- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 2.5 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 6.25 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 5 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 12.5 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 10 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 25 MHz or
more- For radio equipment with channel spacing of 20 MHz: Mistuned frequency of 50 MHz or
more

2.2.1.7 Allowed Value for Occupied Bandwidth (ORE, Article 6,Table 2)(1) Standards
2.5 MHz system: 2.5 MHz or less
5 MHz system: 5 MHz or less
10 MHz system: 10 MHz or less
20 MHz system: 20 MHz or lessIf this allowed value is applied, it shall be added to the types of radio wave as prefix.

2.2.1.8 Frequency Stability (ORE, Article 5,Table 1)(1) Standards
Frequency error:
MS: ±3 × 10-6 or less
BS: ±3 × 10-6 or less
Low Power Repeater: ±3 × 10-6 or less2.2.1.9 Transmission Antennas (ORE,Article 49.29)
a) MS: 25 dBi or lessb) BS: 25 dBi or lessc) Low Power Repeater: 4 dBi or less2.2.1.10 SAR (ORE,Article 14.2) (NT 653, 2007)
MS shall ensure that specific absorption rate (SAR) of the radio wave emitted from a MS in
the head of a human body is 2 watts per kilogram or less. SAR means the value that theenergy which a body tissue of 10 grams exposed to radio wave absorbed for 6 minutes is-13-

ARIB STD-T95

divided by 10 grams and 6 minutes.
But MS which stipulated in the NT is not applicable.

2.2.1.11 System condition (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater)
Maximum number of repeaters per BS would be about 100.

2.2.1.12 Out of band gain (only Non-regenerative repeating of Low Power Repeater)
In case of Non-regenerative repeating, out of band gain refers to the gain of the repeater
outside the pass band. The gain outside the pass band shall not exceed the maximum levelspecified in the Table 2.10.
Table 2.10 Out of band gain limits
Frequency Offset from the Edge Frequency, f_offset

Maximum Gain

5MHz

35dB

10MHz

20dB

40MHz

0dB

2.2.2 Reception Characteristics
2.2.2.1 Sensitivity(1) Definition
Reception sensitivity is the minimum receiving power measured by antenna terminal
which is required to receive QPSK modulated signal with the specified quality (morethan 95% of the maximum throughput). It shall not exceed the following value(reference sensitivity) in static characteristic.
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: -94 dBm or less
BS: -101.5 dBm or less
Low Power Repeater: -94 dBm or less (only regenerative repeating)-14-

ARIB STD-T95

2.2.2.2 Adjacent Channel Selectivity(1) Definition
Adjacent channel selectivity is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired
signal in the existence of modulated interference signal assigned to adjacent carrier
frequency. When the desired signal and modulated interference signal in adjacentfrequency band are added by the following condition, QPSK modulated signal shall bereceived with the specified quality (more than 95% of the maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal reference sensitivity +14 dB, modulated interference signal -54.5
dBm
BS: desired signal reference sensitivity +6 dB, modulated interference signal -52 dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal reference sensitivity +14 dB, modulated
interference signal -54.5 dBm (only regenerative repeating)

2.2.2.3 Intermodulation Characteristic(1) Definition
Intermodulation characteristic is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired
signal in the existence of two non-modulated interference signals which are equal inpower and can generate the third-order intermodulation or either modulated
interference signal of such two interference signals. When the desired signal and both of
non-modulated and modulated interference signals, which can generate the third-orderintermodulation, are added by the following condition, QPSK modulated signal shall bereceived with the specified quality (more than 95% of the maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal: reference sensitivity +9 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -46dBm
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -46dBm
BS: desired signal: reference sensitivity +6 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -52 dBm
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -52 dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal: reference sensitivity +9 dB
non-modulated interference signal (adjacent channel): -46dBm
modulated interference signal (second adjacent channel): -46dBm-15-

ARIB STD-T95(only regenerative repeating)

2.2.2.4 Spurious Response Immunity(1) Definition
Spurious response is a measure of the receiver ability to receive a desired signal in theexistence of a non-modulated interference signal. When the desired signal andnon-modulated interference signal are added by the following condition, QPSK
modulated signal shall be received with the specified quality (more than 95% of the
maximum throughput).
(2) Standards
In static characteristic,
MS: desired signal reference sensitivity +9 dB, non-modulated interference signal: -44
dBm
BS: desired signal reference sensitivity +6 dB, non-modulated interference signal: -45
dBm
Low Power Repeater: desired signal reference sensitivity +9 dB, non-modulated
interference signal: -44 dBm (only regenerative repeating)

2.2.2.5 Conducted Spurious Component (ORE,Article 24)(1) Definition
Conducted spurious component is spurious emissions while reception, which are any
emissions present at the antenna terminals of the equipment.
(2) Standardsa) Only BS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of 17 dBi or less, MS withabsolute gain of transmission antenna of 4 dBi or less, and RS with absolute gain for
BS of 4 dBi or less.
Table 2.11 BS (with Antenna of 17 dBi or less) and MS(with Antenna of 4dBi or less)Frequency bands

Conducted spurious component

From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz

Average power for arbitrary 1 kHz band is-54 dBm or less.

From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz

Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is-54 dBm or less.

From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz

Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is-16-

ARIB STD-T95-54 dBm or less.
1000 MHz or more

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-47 dBm or less.

b) Receiving equipment in BS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 17
dBi, MS with absolute gain of transmission antenna of over 4 dBi, and a land mobile
relay station with absolute gain of transmission antenna for BS of over 4 dBi shallcomply with the requirement described in the following table.

-17-

ARIB STD-T95

Table 2.12 BS (with Antenna of over 17 dBi) and MS (with Antenna of over 4dBi)
Frequency band

Conducted spurious component

From 9 kHz to less than 150 kHz

Average power for arbitrary 1 KHz band is-54 dBm or less.

From 150 kHz to less than 30 MHz

Average power for arbitrary 10 kHz band is-54 dBm or less.

From 30 MHz to less than 1000 MHz

Average power for arbitrary 100 kHz band is-54 dBm or less.

From 1000 MHz to less than 2505 MHz

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-47 dBm or less.

From 2505 MHz to less than 2535 MHzi) BS
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-61 dBm or less.
ii) MS(1) MS with absolute gain of transmission
antenna of over 4 dBi to 10 dBi or less (onlya MS that communicate with the BS ofwhich

absolute

gainoftransmission

antenna is equal to 17 dBi or less)
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-70 dBm or less.
(2) MS with absolute gain of transmission
antenna of over 10 dBi (only MS that
communicate with BS of which absolute
gain of transmission antenna is equal to 17
dBi or less)
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-68

dBm or less.

(3) MS other than above (1) and (2) (only a
MS that communicate with BS of which
absolute gain of transmission antenna
exceeds 17 dBi)
Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-18-

ARIB STD-T95-61 dBm or less.
iii) RS(1) RS with absolute gain of transmission
antenna to BS of over 10 dBi (only RS that
communicate with BS of which absolute
gain of transmission antenna is equal to 17
dBi or less),items ii) (2) shall apply forreceiving the radio wave from BS and a)item
shall apply for receiving the radio wave fromMS.
(2) RS other than above (1) (only RS that
communicate with BS of which absolute
gain of transmission antenna exceeds 17dBi), items ii) (3) shall apply for receiving
the radio wave from BS and items i) shallapply for receiving the radio wave from MS.
2535 MHz or more

Average power for arbitrary 1 MHz band is-47 dBm or less.

-19-

ARIB STD-T95

Chapter 3 Physical and MAC Layer Specifications
In this chapter, Physical and MAC layer of XGP in Japan is specified.
This specification is defined by following Attachment 3.
Attachment 3：“XGP Specifications”

This Attachment 3 is reproduced from "A-GN4.00-03-TS “XGP Specifications” which isstandardized by XGP Forum.
This Attachment 3 is reproduced without any modification from original document.

-20-

ARIB STD-T95

Chapter 4 Japanese specific matters
In this chapter, it is listed the items of Attachment 3 which are not adopted by this standard.
The following items are not adopted in this standard because they do not comply with theJapanese Regulations.
Table 4.1 Points of difference
Attachment 3

Marks

section number
2.3.1

There is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.

2.3.4

There is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.

2.4.1

Table 2.2, there is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth in“Number of subchannels”.

2.4.3.2

Figure 2.8, there is an expression of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.

2.5

Figure 2.11, m equal 22/24/27/28/29/30 express 22.5/25/30 MHz system
bandwidth.
Table 2.3, there is a description of 22/5,25/30 MHz system bandwidth.

2.6

Figure 2.12, m equal 22/24/27/28/29/30 express 22.5/25/30 MHz system
bandwidth

3.2.3

Table 3.1, there is a description of 22.5/25/30 MHz system bandwidth.

5.5.6.1.2“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth

5.5.6.1.3“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth

5.5.6.1.4“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth

5.5.6.1.5“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth

5.5.6.1.6“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth

7.3.3.6“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth

7.3.3.7“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth

7.3.3.8“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth

7.3.3.15“Assignment PRU Number = 128” express 30MHz system bandwidth“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth

7.3.3.22“SCH = 128” in MAP Origin express 30MHz system bandwidth10

FDD description in reference documents do not comply with theJapanese Regulations

Annex X

They comply with the Taiwan Regulations-21-

ARIB STD-T95

Chapter 5 Measurement Method
As for the items stipulated in Ordinance Concerning Technical Regulations Conformity
Certification etc. of Specified Radio Equipment Appendix Table No.1 item 1(3), measurement
methods are specified by MIC Notification (Note) or a method that surpasses or is equal to themethod.
Note: This Notification refers to MIC Notification No.88 “The Testing Method for theCharacteristics Examination” (January 26, 2004) as of the date of the revision of this standard
version 2.0 (issued at July, 2011). Thereafter, the latest version of Notification would be applied
if this Notification or contents of this Notification would be revised.

-22-

Attachment 1

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 1)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

(N/A)

(N/A)

(N/A)

(N/A)

AT1-1
ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER
Hitachi, Ltd.*10

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTKYOCERA*10

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0

NetIndex Inc. *10

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKSNTT DoCoMo Inc.*10 A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
AT2-1

Oki ElectricIndustry Co.,Ltd.*10

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0

Qualcomm Inc.*10

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0

SANYO Electric
Co.;Ltd*10.

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0

WILLCOM Inc.*10

A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
ARIB STD-T95*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERTOSHIBACORPORATION.*10

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB
STD-T95 Ver.1.0
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Approved by the 70th Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

AT2-2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT㈱日立コミュニケーシ インタリーブ方法及び無線通信装置
ョンテクノロジー *10(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

特願2007-223384*10:These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

AT2-3
ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *10

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

AT2-4

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2003-529971

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS 20080008136, US 7,289,473,
BR, CN, DE, EP, ES, FI, FR, GB,
HK, IT, KR, SE, WO

Reducing radio link supervision time in a high data
rate system

JP2003-524965

AU, BR, CA, CN, DE, EP, FI, FR,
GB, HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO,
RU, SE, SG, TW, UA, US, WO

A method and an apparatus for a quick
retransmission of signals in a communication system

JP2003-533078

US 6,694,469, US 7,127,654, US
20070168825, AU, BR, CA, CN,
EP, HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO,
WO, RU, SG, TW, UA

Method and apparatus for fast closed-loop rate
adaptation in a high rate packet data transmission

JP2004-515932

US 7,245,594, US 20070064646,
US 20070263655, AU, BR, CA, CN,
EP, HK, ID, IL, IN, JP, KR, MX,
NO, RU, SG, TW, UA, WO

Method and apparatus for controlling data rate in awireless communication system

JP2005-507208

US, CN, DE, EP, ES, FI, FR, GB,
IT, KR, SE, SG, TW, WO

Method and Apparatus for High Rate Packet Data
and Low Delay Data Transmissions

JP 2004-514369

US 7,068,683, US 20060187877,
AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID, IL,
IN, KR, MX, NO, RU, SG, TW, UA,
WO

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Synchronized Pilot Reference Transmission for a
Wireless Communication System*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Approved by the 73rd Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *10

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-5

備考
（出願国名）REMARKSUS 6,961,388, US 20050276344,
BR, CN, EP, HK, KR, TW, WO

Closed-Loop Rate Control for a Multi-Channel
Communication System

JP2006-504372

US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, RU, TW, UA, WO

Multicarrier Transmission Using a Plurality ofSymbol Lengths

JP2006-504367

US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, RU, TW, UA, WO

Method, Station and Medium Storing a Program for a
Priority Based Scheduler with Variable Scheduling
Periods and Variable Scheduled Periods

JP2007-508791

US, BR, CA, CN, EP, HK, IN, KR,
RU, TW, WO

System and method for diversity interleaving

JP2008-508815

US, AU, BR, CA, CN, EG, EP, HK,
ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, NO, NZ, PH,
RU, SG, UA, VN, WO, ZA

Unified pulse shaping for multi-carrier andsingle-carrier waveforms

JP2008-511208

US, AR, CA, CN, EP, HK, IN, KR,
MY, TW, WO

Pilot Transmission and Channel Estimation for a
Communication System Utilizing Frequency Division
Multiplexing

JP2008-536359

US, AR, AU, BR, CA, CL, CN, EP,
HK, ID, IL, IN, KR, MX, MY, NO,
NZ, PH, RU, SG, TW, UA, VN, WO

Power control for serving sector

JP B0008P0995

US, AR, AU, BR, CA, CN, EP, ID,
IL, IN, KR, MX, MY, NO, NZ, PH,
RU, SG, TW, UA, VN, WO

Coding scheme for a wireless communication system*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2004-535694

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *10

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-6

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO07101041

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS, BR, CA, CN, EP, IN, JP, KR,
RU, SG, TW

Method and apparatus for efficient reporting of
information in a wireless communication system

WO07075744

US, CN, EP, IN, JP, KR, TW

Mapping of subpackets to resources in acommunication system

WO08086074

US, TW

Apparatus and method for uplink power control ofwireless communications

WO08101053

US, TW

A power control subsystem

JP2002-501689

US 5,991,284, CN, DE, US
6,240,071, US 20010010684, EP,
FR, GB, HK, JP, KR, WO

Apparatus and Method for Reducing Power
Consumption in a Mobile Communications ReceiverJP3193380

US 5,509,015, AU, BR, BG, CA, DE,
DK, KP, EP, FI, FR, GB, HK, HU,
IE, IL, IT, KR, MX, NL, WO, CN,
RU, ZA, SE, SK

Channel structure for communication systems

JP4152584

US 6,377,809, US 09/503,401, US
6,167,270, US 6,526,030, AU, BR,
CA, CL, RU, DE, EP, FI, FR, GB,
HK, ID, IT, KR, MX, NO, WO, CN,
TW, SE, SG, UA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for sending signaling
information via channel IDS*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *13

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Approved by the 75th Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.1.3.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS*13: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.3.

AT2-7
ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.2.0.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*20: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Approved by the 80th Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

AT2-8

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Approved by the 83rd Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95
Ver.2.1.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS*21: This patent is applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

AT2-9
ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-10

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2004-506206

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US6,775,802; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; SG; VN

Method for performing radio resource level registration
in a wireless communication system

JP4607411

US7,155,222; US7,773,987;
US8,010,104; BE; BR; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IT; KR;
NL; SE; TW

Handoff method for digital base stations with different
spectral capabilities

JP4795608

US6,535,739; US6,853,843;
US7,151,933; US7,373,149; AU; BE;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA

Multiplexing of real time services and non-real time
services for OFDM systems

JP2004-503181

US6,952,454; US7,751,492;
US7,813,441; US7,664,193;
US20100142638; BR; CN; EP; HK;
KR; TW

Method and apparatus for adaptive transmission control
in a high data rate communication system

JP2003-531518

US7,088,701; BR; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; IT; KR; NL; SE; TW

Method and Apparatus for Multiplexing High-Speed
Packet Data Transmission with Voice/Data
Transmission

JP4068455

US6,775,254; US20040240401; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NO;
RU; SG; TW; UA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method, Apparatus and System for Signal Prediction*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-11

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4018535

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,254,402; USRE42,543; AU; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; SG;VN

Method and Apparatus for Gated ACK/NAK Channel ina Communication System

JP2004-512708

US7,042,869; AU; BR; CA; CL; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL;
IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; NZ; RU; SE;
SG; TW; UA

Method and apparatus for satellite positioning system
based time measurement

JP4316676

US5,812,087; US6,052,081;
US6,239,742; JP; BR; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE;
PT; SE

Method and system for using altitude information in asatellite positioning system

JP2002-532679

US6,061,018; US6,307,504; JP; AU;
BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
NL; SE; SG

Method and apparatus for operating a satellite
positioning system receiver

JP2002-530628

US6,104,338; JP; AU; BE; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID;
IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; SG

Satellite positioning system augmentation with wirelesscommunication signals

JP2002-512373

US5,999,124; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL;
IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; SG

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTGPS Satellite Signal Acquisition Assistance System andMethod in a Wireless Communications Network

ARIB STD-T95*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

Attachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4083578

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US6,973,098; US20050254465; AT;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; ID; IE;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; PT; RU;
SE; SG; TW; UA

Method and apparatus for handoff of a wireless packet
data services connection

JP4194840

US7,079,511; US7,860,061;
US7,561,555; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA

Method and apparatus for utilizing channel state
information in a wireless communication system

JP4593878

US6,771,706; US7,590,182;
US7,949,060; US7,411,929; JP; BE;
BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; IE; IT; KR; LU; NL; SE; TW

Method and apparatus for link quality feedback in awireless communication system

JP4723617

US6,985,453; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IE;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; RU; SG;
TW; UA

Method and apparatus for testing assisted position
location capable devices

JP4593925

US6,760,582; AU; BR; CN; EP; HK;
IL; IN; KR; RU

Synchronization of stored service parameters in acommunication system

JP4426187

US7,499,698; US7,881,714;
US7,747,283; US7,778,631; JP; BE;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; SE; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for determining a data rate in ahigh rate packet data wireless communications system

AT2-12*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-13

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,103,021; US7,924,781;
US20110243082; BR; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR; NO; TW

Method and apparatus for call setup latency reduction

JP2005-525713

US7,180,879; US7,417,976;
US20070086391; US7,986,674;
US7,894,403; JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE; TW

Method and apparatus for time-aligning transmissions
from multiple base stations in a CDMA communication
System

JP4546081

US6,775,242; AU; BE; BG; BR; CA;
CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; ID; IE; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO;
SE; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
system

JP4282992

US20020141591; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; KR; MX; TW

Method and system for signaling in broadcast
communication system

JP4307998

US6,980,820; US7,415,283;
US7,689,226; JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE; TW

Method and apparatus for data packet transport in awireless communications system using an internet
protocolJP2008-211793

US7,697,523; US20100142432; JP;
BR; CN; EP; HK; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
systemJP4732687

US7,352,868; US20080226073; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; RU; SG; TW

Ceasing transmission of data rate control information ina CDMA communication system when the mobile stationtransmits to the idle open state*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4236579

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-14

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4274942

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US7,649,829; US20100107041;
US20100272124; BR; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; IT; KR; NL; TW

Method and system for a multicast service initiation in acommunication system

JP4847603

US6,876,636; US20050169203; JP;
BE; BG; BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IT; KR; NL;
PL; RO; SE; TW

Handoff in a hybrid communication network

JP4554212

JP; AR; CL; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MY; SG; TH; TW; ZA

Frame formatting, coding and transmit power control
method for a multicast/broadcast system

JP4508865

US7,177,658; US7,583,977;
US20100172279; US7,593,746; JP;
BR; CN; EP; HK; KR; TW

Handoff in dormant mode in a packet data network

JP4472528

US7,110,377; US8,023,464; JP; AU;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR; GB;
HK; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; RU; SE;
TW; UAKey generation in a communication system

JP2010-213305

US7,190,793; US20070269048; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
RU; TW

Beam-steering and beam-forming for wideband
MIMO/MISO systems

JP2005-537751

US6,940,917; US7,194,040; JP; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; RU; TW; UA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Concatenated encoding and decoding for multilayer
communication protocol*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-15

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2006-504335

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20040082356; US20080285488;
US20080285669; US20080285670;
AU; BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; ID; IE;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; RO; RU; SE;
TW; UA

Uplink pilot and signaling transmission in wirelesscommunication systems

JP2006-505230

US6,928,062; US7,042,857;
US20060279435; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH; RU;
SG; TW; ZA

Transmission Schemes for Multi-AntennaCommunication Systems Utilizing Multi-Carrier
Modulation

JP4833830

US7,095,790; US7,606,326;
US20100003931; BR; CA; CL; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; SG;
TW; VN

Pilots for MIMO communication systems

JP4657918

US7,986,742; US20110235744; JP;
AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK;
HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL;
PT; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA

Rate adaptive transmission scheme for MIMO systems

JP2006-503522

US6,873,606; US7,675,886;
US20100119005; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NZ; RU; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTMIMO WLAN System

ARIB STD-T95*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

Attachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-16

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4472531

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US7,043,239; US7,292,852;
US20080085705; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; RO; RU; SE; TW; UA

Pilot transmission schemes for wireless multi-carrier
communication systems

JP2006-517759

US7,280,467; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
RU; TW; UA

Hybrid protocol to support communications with multiple
networks

JP4806068

US7,916,715; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus to count broadcast content
recipients in a wireless telephone network

JP4376898

US7,062,272; US7,409,212;
US7,251,487; US7,813,732; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
RU; TW; UA

System and method for managing reverse linkcommunication resources in a distributed
communication system and corresponding apparatus

JP4713470

US7,979,078; US7,197,319;
US8,000,717; JP; CN; EP; HK; KR;TW

Variable packet lengths for high packet data rate
communications

JP4537382

US7,280,562; JP; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; TW; UA

Incremental redundancy transmission in a MIMO
communication system

JP4741495

US20050052991; JP; AR; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NL; PH; PL; RO; RU;
SE; SG; TW; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Download and display of system tags in wirelesscommunication systems*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-529147

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20050010774; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; RU;
SG; TH; TW; VN

Method and apparatus for providing an efficient control
channel structure in a wireless communication system

JP4409576

US20050120097; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EG; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN;
ZA

Mimo system with multiple spatial multiplexing modes

JP4860924

US20040136349; US20100119001;
US20080267098; US20080267138;
JP; AU; BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; ID;
IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; RO; RU;
SE; TW; UA

Transmit diversity processing for a multi-antenna
communication system

JP4739952

US7,002,900; US20060039275;
US20100208841; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU;
TW; UA

Method and apparatus for security in a data processing
system

JP2007-531337

US20040120527; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH; RU;
SG; TH; TW; VN

Method and apparatus for automatic configuration of
wireless communication networks

JP2008-533857

US20060203746; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and method for a secure broadcast system

AT2-17

ARIB STD-T95*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

Attachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-18

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-519368

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,339,999; US20080152033;
US8,027,399; JP; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; PH;
RU; SG; TH; TW; VN

Outer coding methods for broadcast/multicast content
and related apparatus

JP4768615

US7,318,187; US20080098283;
US20080151805; US20080141097;
JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;
MX; TW

Method and apparatus for acknowledging reverse linktransmissions in a communications system

JP4668908

US7,957,263; JP; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; MX; TW

Systems and methods for multiplexing control data For
multiple data channels onto a single control channel

JP4382817

US7,613,144; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; RU; TW; UA

Systems and methods for communicating control datausing multiple slot formats

JP4409574

US7,474,643; US8,023,474; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NL; PL; RO; RU; SE; TW;UA

Spatial spreading in a multi-antenna communication
system

JP4607901

US20050175115; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Staggered pilot transmission for channel estimation andtime tracking

JP2007-536803

US7,457,231; US7,907,593; JP; BE;
BG; CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL;
PL; RO; SE; TH; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Pilot transmission and channel estimation for an OFDM
system with excess delay spread*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-19

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070049274; CN; DE; EP; FR;
GB; IN; KR

Transmission of signaling information for broadcast andmulticast services

JP4705048

US20050195852; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NZ; RU; SE; TW; UA

System and method for power control in wirelesscommunication systems

JP2007-527677

US20050201180; US20080200204;
JP; BE; BG; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; NL; PL; RO; SE

Methods and apparatus for mitigating multi-antennacorrelation effect in communication systems

JP2008-526116

US7,974,359; AR; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system

JP4763692

US8,027,372; JP; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TH; VN

Multiplexing for a multi-carrier cellular communication
systemJP4791459

US7,724,777; US20100195360; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CL; CN; EG; EP; HK;
ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN; ZA

OFDM system with code spreading of signalling data

JP2008-511269

US7,852,746; US20110069737; JP;
AR; CA; CL; EP; MY; TW

A method of providing a gap indication during a sticky
assignment

JP4834174

US20060034173; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
HU; ID; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; UA; VN

Hard handoff from a wireless local area network to acellular telephone network*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-507429

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-20

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4643632

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20050265275; US20090290657;
JP; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; MY;TW

Systems and methods for reducing uplink resources toprovide channel performance feedback for adjustmentof downlink MIMO channel data rates

JP4796122

US20060205357; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Connected-state radio session transfer in wirelesscommunication systems

JP4542140

US20050266847; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; MX; MY; TW

Method and apparatus for performing position
determination with pre-session action

JP4653180

US7,747,258; US20100261483; JP;
EP; HK; IL; KR; SG

Dynamic assignment of home agent and home addressin wireless communications

JP4787250

US20060002356; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MX; TW

Coded-bit scrambling for multi-stream communication ina MIMO channel

JP2008-512053

JP; BE; BG; BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW

Shared signaling channel for a communication system

JP2008-507896

US20060018347; CA; CL; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; TW

Efficient signaling over access channel

JP4625079

US20060018336; JP; AR; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; NL; PH; PL; RO; RU; SE;
SG; TH; TW; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Continuous beamforming for a MIMO-OFDM system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-21

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20060046690; CA; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; MY; TH; TW

Default configurations with differential encoding in awireless communication system

JP2008-510395

US20060040645; JP; BR; CN; DE;
EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IT; KR;
MX; RU; SE; TW; UA

Apparatus, system, and method for managing
transmission power in a wireless communication system

JP4598074

US7,899,480; US20110165907; JP;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; MX;TW

Minimizing feedback by sending a quality indicator for a
non-restrictive reuse set and a vectored quality
indicator for other reuse sets

JP4664378

US7,548,752; US20100002597; JP;
AR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for enhancing signal-to-noise
ratio of position location measurements

JP2008-537387

US7,920,544; US20110149922; JP;
CA; EP; HK; RU

Method of communicating a frame having a plurality ofmodulation schemes

JP2011-193484

US20060133455; CA; CL; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; MY; TW; VE

Interference control in a wireless communication system

JP2011-156772

US20060209721; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Method and apparatus for high rate data transmission in
wireless communication

JP2008-538061

US20060221883; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; MY; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for pseudo-secret key generation
to generate a response to a challenge received fromservice provider*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-123713

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-22

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521192

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,893,873; US20110149863;
US7,876,265; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; TW

Wireless handoffs between multiple wireless networks

JP2008-541512

US20060245395; CN; EP; IN; KR

Systems and methods for control channel signaling

JP4752003

US20060223449; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for enhanced file distribution in
multicast or broadcast

JP2008-536405

US20060248090; JP; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; MY; TW

Multi-carrier operation in data transmission systems

JP4750843

US7,961,700; JP; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN

Ciphering and re-ordering packets in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2008-539678

US20070041382; CN; EP; IN; KR;
MY; TW

Code division multiplexing in a single-carrier frequency
division multiple access system

JP2009-505504

US20070041404; CL; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for adaptive registration andpaging area determination

JP2008-547279

US20060286982; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

VOIP emergency call handlingJP2009-505455

US20070060097; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; KR; RU; SG; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and systems for providing enhanced position
location in wireless communications*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-23

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,899,004; AR; BR; CN; EP; HK;
ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Efficient periodic location reporting in a radio accessnetwork

JP2009-513036

US20060293066; JP; BR; CA; EP;HK; IL; IN; KR; RU; SGMethods and apparatus for efficient providing ofscheduling information

JP4787319

US20060285515; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for selection of virtual antennas

JP4819897

US8,073,068; JP; AR; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
RU; TH; TW; UA; VN

Inter-system handover using legacy interface

JP2009-503941

US20070021120; CN; EP; IN; KR;
MY; TW

Method and apparatus for pilot multiplexing in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2009-524362

US20070195906; US20100142490;
BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU; SG;TW

Method and apparatus for packet communications inwireless systems

JP2009-508372

US20070133479; US20110026462;
JP; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW

System and method for multi-network coverage

JP2009-529838

US20070211675; US20080304461;
US20100110993; JP; AR; CN; EP;
IN; KR

A method and apparatus for pre-coding frequency
division duplexing system

JP4763797

US20070097889; BR; CA; CL; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; TH; TW; UA; VN

Distributed protocol over a wireless connection*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-506649

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-24

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-516942

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070097856; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Pilot symbol transmission in wireless communication
systems

JP2009-514447

US20070098050; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

Precoding for segment sensitive scheduling in wirelesscommunication systems

JP2009-514400

US20070098099; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

Resource allocation during tune-away

JP4814334

US20070099614; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; RU; TW;
UA; VNA method and apparatus for bootstraping information in
a communication system

JP2009-514452

US20070097897; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for saving power by designating
frame interlaces in communication systems

JP4824766

US20070097894; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; RU;
SG; TH; UA; VN

Shared signaling channel

JP2009-514450

US20070097853; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Method and apparatus for achieving flexible bandwidth
using variable guard bands

JP2009-514397

US20070147226; JP; AR; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; SG; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Unitary precoding based on randomized FFT matrices*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-25

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
BR; CN; EP; HK; IN; RU; SG

Efficient transmission on a shared data channel for
wireless communication

JP2008-514485

US20070177569; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Data state transition during handoff

JP4843052

US20070177547; AR; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW

FLEXIBLE MEDIUM ACCESS CONTROL (MAC) FOR
AD HOC DEPLOYED WIRELESS NETWORKS

JP2009-514441

US20070105575; US20090176503;
US20100260133; AR; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; KR; RU; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus for determining the location of amobile device in an OFDM wireless network

JP4819910

US7,706,328; US20090117917; BR;
CN; EP; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Privacy protection in communications systems

JP2009-523396

US20070168662; BR; EP; IN; KR;
RU; TW

Global navigation satellite system

JP2008-550408

US7,768,449; US20110187589; CN;
EP; IN; KR

Selection of an access point in a communications
system

JP2010-502156

US20080049702; JP; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW

Open loop power offset update

JP2010-532646

US7,957,757; US20110256902; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Frequency hopping of pilot tones*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-538058

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-26

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-529251

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070183361; BE; BG; BR; CA;
CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX;
MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO; RU;
SE; TW; VN

Methods and apparatuses for transmitting
non-decodable packets

JP2010-521162

AU; BR; CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Orthogonal frequency division multiplexing based
spread spectrum multiple access

JP3703002

US6,473,418; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; ID; IN; IT; KR

Communications system employing orthogonalfrequency division multiplexing based spread spectrum
multiple access

JP4593767

US6,553,019; AU; BE; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; SE

Methods and apparatus of providing transmit and/or
receive diversity with multiple antennas in wirelesscommunication systems

JP4685789

US7,039,370; US7,610,024;
US20100041355; JP; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR

Efficient paging in a wireless communication system

JP4638497

US7,711,377; US20100190514;
US20100178942; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN; ZA

Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information which can be used forinterference control purposes

JP4791592

US20060083161; BR; CN; EG; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; VN; ZA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
An apparatus and method for fast access in a wirelesscommunication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-27

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070159969; AR; AT; BE; CH;
CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; NO;
PL; PT; RO; SE; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus of implementing and/or using a
dedicated control channel

JP2009-521847

US20070149227; AR; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus for flexible reporting of control
information

JP2009-521852

US20070149228; BE; BG; CL; CN;
CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating and/or usingtransmission power information

JP4801172

US20070149238; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Grouping of users for MIMO transmission in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2009-530987

US20070223423; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; TW; UA; VN

Resource allocation to support single-user andmulti-user MIMO transmissions

JP2009-530988

US8,059,609; US13/295,381; BR;
CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
VN

Uplink channel estimation using a signaling channel

JP2009-530992

US20080032630; AR; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for supporting mobile virtual
network

JP2009-533980

US20070245007; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission
backlog information*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521850

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-28

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-533981

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070242764; AR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Pseudo wires for mobility management

JP2009-533985

US20070242637; CN; EP; IN; KR

Feedback of channel state information for MIMO andsub-band scheduling in a wireless communication
system

JP2009-531993

US8,014,455; US13/214,621; AR;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT;
KR; NL; PL; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW

An apparatus and method for fast access in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2009-530990

US20080019306; AU; BR; CA; CL;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Expedited handoff

JP2009-544252

US8,064,401; US13/275,138; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for quick-paging of terminals in awireless communication system

JP2009-544244

US20080014969; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Uplink access request in an OFDM communication
environment

JP2009-544241

US7,869,421; US20110075639; CN;
EP; IN; KR

Method and apparatus for enhanced paging

JP2009-535941

US20070254679; US20110201361;
JP; AU; BE; BG; BR; CA; CL; CN;
CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK;
HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY;
NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO; RU; SE;
SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus related to using a wirelessterminal scrambling identifier*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-29

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080090528; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Propagating session state changes to network functionsin an active set

JP2009-540695

US20070286206; BR; CA; CN; EP;
HK; KR; RU; SG; TW

Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system

JP2009-538576

US20080285526; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TH; TW

Signal acquisition for wireless communication systems

JP2009-544178

US20070281642; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Preamble structure and acquisition for a wirelesscommunication system

JP2009-540769

US20080279220; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN

Using codewords in a wireless communication system

JP2010-518761

US7,839,308; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Data routing via lower layers in a communication system

JP2009-542119

US20080101356; CN; EP; HK; IN;KR

Method and apparatus for selection mechanism
between OFDM-MIMO and LFDM-SIMO

JP2009-542164

US20080095263; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Dynamic frequency allocation and modulation scheme
for control information*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-543528

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-30

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-544189

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080089286; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Frequency selective and frequency diversity
transmissions in a wireless communication system

JP2009-544258

US20080013599; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Variable control channel for a wireless communication
system

JP2010-512033

US20080095106; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH;
PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Method and apparatus for sending signaling for datatransmission in a wireless communication system

JP2009-545276

US20080025267; US20100284377;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU;
SG; TW

Method and apparatus for random access in an
orthogonal multiple-access communication system

JP2010-502120

US20080273610; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for power allocation and/or rate
selection for UL MIMO/SIMO operations with PAR
considerations

JP2010-509863

US20100029320; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Feedback of precoding control indication (PCI) andchannel quality indication (CQI) in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-502114

US20080043867; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Frequency hopping in an SC-FDMA environment*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-31

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080089312; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Semi-persistent scheduling for traffic spurts in wirelesscommunication

JP2010-502127

US20080117891; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Acquisition in frequency division multiple accesssystems

JP2010-502128

US20080089282; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Systems and methods for key management for wirelesscommunications systems

JP2010-502132

US20080070577; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for acknowledgment repetition inorthogonal systems

JP2010-503291

US20080095109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Signaling transmission with localized spreading for
wireless communication

JP2010-503348

US20080101441; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Codeword permutation and reduced feedback forgrouped antennas

JP2010-503335

US20080080641; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for preparing connection transfer
between an IP based communication system (LTE/SAE)
and a PDP context based communication system(UMTS/GPRS)

JP2010-506462

US7,920,522; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for flexible pilot pattern*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-502118

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-32

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-506502

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110002430; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Sub-band dependent resource management

JP2010-508792

US20100027502; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Random access signaling transmission for systemaccess in wireless communication

JP2010-506508

US20100309877; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Re-synchronization of temporary UE IDS in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-506504

US20100189071; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for handling user equipment
capability information

JP2010-510694

US20090093280; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Frequency domain PN sequence

JP2011-525199

US20100054211; BR; CN; EP; IL;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Method and apparatus for increasing ack resources fora wireless communication system

JP2010-508783

US20100034156; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Space division multiple access channelization in
wireless communication systems

JP2010-506546

US7,903,615; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

A method and apparatus for setting reverse link CQIreporting modes in wireless communication system

JP2009-514417

US7,924,800; US20110280183; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Synchronization transmissions in a wirelesscommunication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,864,819; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR

Reverse link resource assignment and reverse link
power control for wireless communication systems

JP2010-507288

US8,050,701; US13/230,761; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA;
VN

Apparatus and method of random access for wirelesscommunication

JP2010-508785

US20100093386; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Reliable uplink resource request

JP2010-508786

US20100074193; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for hybrid FDM-CDM structure
for single carrier based control channels

JP2010-508777

US20100118855; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Systems and methods for using internet mobility
protocols with non internet mobility protocols

JP2010-507936

US20080175201; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Multiplexing of control and data with varying power
offsets in a SC-FDMA system

JP2010-508778

US20100027450; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Frame structures for wireless communication systems.

JP2010-507993

US20090232079; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

A method and apparatus for bit demultiplexing in awireless communication systems

AT2-33*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4785930

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-34

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-508720

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,961,640; US20110222627; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
VNInter-enode B handover procedure

JP2009-535426

US20100238903; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Selective phase connection establishment

JP2010-528497

US20080310378; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

MIMO transmission with layer permutation in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-509861

US20100027697; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method for transmit power control dependent on
subband load

JP2010-509866

US20100093363; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

Uplink timing control

JP2010-522505

US20080279131; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Providing antenna diversity in a wireless communication
system

JP2010-509875

US20080117999; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Codeword level scrambling for MIMO transmission

JP2010-509860

US20100074350; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for codebook exchange in a
multiple access wireless communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,995,534; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; RU; SG

System selection based on application requirements
and preferences

JP2010-531565

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for implementing proxy mobile
IP in foreign agent care-of address mode

JP2010-510728

US20080159227; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for transferring a mobile device
from a source eNB to a target eNB

JP2010-512125

US20080130580; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for RLC re-transmission
schemes

JP2010-512691

US20080139113; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

MIMO transmission with rank-dependent precoding

JP2010-518763

US7,995,671; US20110280342; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Using DTX and DRX in a wireless communication
system

JP2010-516208

US20090122736; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

Fast cell searchJP2010-516204

US20090131037; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for SRNS relocation in wirelesscommunication systems

AT2-35*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-509870

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

Attachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-36

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-535433

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080167042; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Pilot transmission in a wireless communication system

JP2010-516121

US20080165969; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

CQI reporting for MIMO transmission in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-516198

US20080188259;
US201102866353; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Transmission of information using cyclically shiftedsequences

JP2010-516203

US20080165893; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Pilot structure with multiplexed unicast and SFN
transmissions

JP2010-516201

US8,077,801; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

A method and apparatus for new key derivation upon
handoff in wireless networks

JP2010-525764

US20080267407; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Mapping uplink acknowledgement transmission basedon downlink virtual resource blocks

JP2010-517445

US20080205348; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

Flexible DTX and DRX in a wireless communication
system

JP2010-519793

US20080186892; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTRadio resource connection (RRC) establishment for
wireless systems*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080227428; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Demodulation of a subset of available link assignment
blocks

JP2010-517489

US20080182585; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method an apparatus for power control during DTX
operation

JP2010-518705

US7,881,742; US8,060,130; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Hopping structures for broadband pilot signals

JP2010-518755

US20080187027; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for inter-system handoverJP2010-519855

US20110206009; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for performing channel tree
operations

JP2010-523057

US20080239992; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for handoff between accesssystems

JP2010-521924

US20080259869; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Hybrid pilot configuration

JP2010-521890

US20080225993; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for emergency broadcast using
an emergency broadcast-multicast service

AT2-37*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-518709

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-38

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-521897

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080227449; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for polling in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-521933

US20080225824; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Connection independent session handoff from source
session reference network controller to target SRNC

JP2010-522509

US20080261598; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VNApparatus and method of performing a handoff in acommunication network

JP2010-524301

US20080240039; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for determining broadcast
messages in wireless signals

JP2010-522523

US20080232294; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Circular buffer based rate matching

JP2010-523064

US20090049359; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Handoff of data attachment point

JP2010-524359

US8,059,595; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Enhanced pilot signal

JP2010-529721

US20090124265; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTPICH-HS timing and operation*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-39

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080259873; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Postition location for wireless communication systems

JP2010-529419

US20080274753; CN; EP; IN; KR

Flexible signaling of resources on a control channel

JP2010-526499

US20090325585; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for UL ACK allocation

JP2010-527543

US20080273513; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Mobile IP home agent discovery

JP2010-529790

US20090010206; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Scrambling methods for synchronization channels

JP2010-528565

US7,920,598; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR;TW

Method and apparatus for sending schedulinginformation for broadcast and multicast services in acellular communication system

JP2010-530662

US20090046617; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Pseudo-random sequence mapping in wirelesscommunications

JP2010-530667

US20080305788; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Quality of service information configuration

JP2010-531097

US20080310303; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Method and apparatus for providing gateway relocation
when performing a handover*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-525681

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-40

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-530723

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080311914; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Rate matching with multiple code block sizes

JP2010-512361

US20090041110; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for PDCP reordering at handoff

JP2010-531115

US20080310367; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Delivery of handover command

JP2010-531117

US20090046656; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Multiplexing of sounding singals in ACK and CQIchannels

JP2010-530724

US20090073955; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for fast inter-system handoverJP2010-531116

US20090016300; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Control channel format indicator frequency mapping

JP2010-531119

US20090022235; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Encryption of the scheduled uplink message in random
access procedure

JP2010-531582

US20090041246; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus for neighbor discovery of basestations in a communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-41

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090029706; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN

Scrambling codes for secondary sychronization codes inwireless communication systems

JP2011-501517

US20090122839; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

MIP/PMIP concatenation when overlapping address
space are used

JP2010-534034

US20090016270; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Mobile IP multiple registrations and PCC interactions

JP2011-511602

US20090196231; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Methods and systems for CDMA network switching
notification in a WIMAX network

JP2011-523812

US20090285186; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Methods and apparatus for resolving pilot
pseudorandom noise code conflicts in a communication
system

JP2010-534036

US20090023464; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Optimizing in-order delivery of data packets during
wireless communication handoverJP2010-537505

US20090052397; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods, apparatuses and computer program products
for inter-system handoff implementing tunnelingbetween source and target access systems

JP2010-534046

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Recovery from handoff error due to false detection of
handoff completion signal at access terminal*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-531627

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-42

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-534453

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090040981; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Multiplexing and transmission of traffic data and control
information in a wireless communication system

JP2010-536260

US20090073922; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Quality of service continuity

JP2011-514746

US20090201884; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Frequency diverse transmissions in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-537501

US20090073929; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for supporting broadcast andmulticast services in a wireless communication system

JP2010-538503

US20090047942; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Mimo transmission with spatial pre-coding

JP2011-517373

US20090046800; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; VN

Secondary synchronization codebook for E-UTRAN

JP2010-537497

BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU; SG;TW

Resource scaling in wireless communication systems

JP2011-504326

US20090116389; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus for in-order delivery of data
packets during handoff*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-43

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090061851; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Resolving node identifier confusion

JP2011-504060

US20090132674; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Configuring an access point of a FEMTO cell

JP2011-504352

US20090129354; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for including communication
mode information (TDD or FDD) in a transmission frame
for system acquisition

JP2010-539799

US7,860,036; US20110064007; AU;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PL;
RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN

FEMTO cell synchronization and pilot searchmethodology

JP2011-501526

US20090097452; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus of power control for a public
warning system

JP2011-501885

US20090130972; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Integrity protection and/or ciphering for UE registration
with a wireless network

JP2011-525207

US20100054472; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Paging user devices in a wireless access network

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-538584

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-44

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-514778

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090221283; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Medium access control header format

JP2010-541495

US20090141670; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; VN

Method and apparatus for implementing LTE RLC
header formats

JP2010-528104

US20090086710; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Efficient system identification schemes forcommunication systems

JP2011-504310

US20090129298; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for self configuring network
relationsJP2011-504674

US20090191866; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Arrangement and method for transmitting control
information in wireless communication systems

JP2011-502436

US20090110038; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Buffer status report triggers in wireless communications

US20100070814*

TW

Methods and systems for HFN handling at inter-basestation handover in mobile communication networks

JP2011-502438

US20090122762; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Assisted initial network acquisition and systemdetermination*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-45

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090116399; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VNTime slot reservation for a dominant interference
scenario in a wirelesscommunication network through direct communication
between interferred andInterfering base station

JP2011-504062

US20090131065; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Interference management in a wireless communication
system using adaptive path loss adjustment

JP2011-517863

US20090137241; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Concurrent transmission of ACK/NACK, CQI and CQIfrom user equipment

US20100232311*

Control information allocation method in acommunications system

JP2011-514727

US20090196247; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for sending and receiving
random access response in a wireless communication
system

JP2011-509565

US20090156194; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for transfer of a message on acommon control channel for random access in awireless communication network

JP2011-508538

US20090163211; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

System information modification notification anddetection in wireless communications

JP2011-512709

US20090181661; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Service data unit discard timers*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-504675

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-514029

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090182883; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

JP2011-514716

US20090196277; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA

JP2011-504351

US20090129291; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Enhanced multiplexing system and technique for uplink
control channels

JP2011-511603

US20090201869; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Policy control for encapsulated data flows

JP2011-517864

US20090199268; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus for controlling transmission of abase station

JP2011-514758

US20090213825; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and systems for parallel acquistion of system
information from multiple base stations

JP2011-527905

US20100067448; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Transmission and reception of dedicated reference
signals

JP2011-519509

US20100062783; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Policy control and charging (PCC) rules based on
mobility protocol

Wireless network synchronization

Configuring an identifier for an access point of
FEMTO cell

AT2-46*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

aARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090232019; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Dynamic assignment of ACK resource in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2011-517191

US20090245194; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method of network management by assistance fromterminal using control-plane signaling between terminal
and network

JP2011-515955

US20090257353; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VNFiltering semi-persistent scheduling false alarms

JP2011-515959

US20090257385; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for resource management in awireless communication system

JP2011-517892

US20090238131; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Cell selection and reselection in deployments with home
nodeBs

JP2011-518472

US20090238114; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Dynamic home network

JP2011-519198

US20090238099; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

JP2011-517186

US20090245176; AU; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Providing multiple levels of service for wirelesscommunication

AT2-47
assignment

Device managed access point lists in wirelesscommunications*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-519195

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-48

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-518496

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090245284; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for mapping virtual resources tophysical resources in a wireless communication system

JP2011-516006

US20090245193; AU; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Scrambling and modulation to constrain theconstellation size of ACK/NAK transmission on the datachannelJP2011-516008

US20090245421; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for resource allocation in
wireless communication systems

JP2011-519200

US20090279493; AU; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods of reliably sending control signal

JP2011-519205

US20090257449; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and system for facilitating execution of
automatic neighbor relation functions

JP2011-517905

US20090247159; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Determinative segmentation resegmentation andpadding in radio link control (RLC) service data units(SDU)

JP2011-517904

US20090252182; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VNGeneric positioning protocol

JP2011-523244

US20090253440; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Encoding and decoding of control information for
wireless communication*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-49

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090252077; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Systems and methods to define control channels using
reserved resource blocks

JP2011-517234

US20090257388; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Selective bearer establishment in evolved universal
terrestrial radio access (E-UTRA) and evolved packet
system (EPS)

JP2011-517217

US20090252132; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for management of automaticneighbor relation function in wireless networks

JP2011-518531

US20090264130; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatuses for uplink control and datatransmission in a mixed single and multiple carrier
network

WO2011011636*

US20110176498; TW

Partial radio link control status report

JP2011-521537

US20090268683; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for uplink ACK/NACK resource
allocation

JP2011-520360

US20090274109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Autonomous downlink code selection for FEMTO cells

JP2011-522468

US20100118801; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Using multicast broadcast single frequency network(MBSFN) subframes to send unicast information*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-521512

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-50

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-523074

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100034163; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Multi-carrier design for control and procedures
comprising pairing of carriers

JP2011-523073

US20100035625; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Downlink grants in a multicarrier wirelesscommunication system

JP2011-523072

US20100034303; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; IL; IN; KR; NZ; PH; RU; SG;TW

Multi-carrier grant design

JP2011-523142

US20100040004; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

A method and apparatus for PCC enhancement for flow
based mobility

JP2011-523332

US20090305701; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Correlating registrations originating from a device

JP2011-522247

US20100197305; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Using identifiers to establish communication

JP2011-504690

US20090132675; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Registration and access control in FEMTO cell
deployments

JP2011-523308

US20090305699; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Anchor carrier in a multiple carrier wirelesscommunication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-51

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090310503; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Apparatus and method for generating performancemeasurements in wireless networks

JP2011-525326

US20090310501; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Conveying session continuity information in a
multi-component communication session

JP2011-525752

US20090319676; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

System and method for network management

JP2011-520241

US20100022263; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Coordinated transmission between cells of a basestation in a wireless communications system

JP2011-522228

US20100035600; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for power control of first datatransmission in random access procedure of FDMA
communication system

JP2011-525786

US20100041428; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Network element configuration scheme

JP2011-527162

US20100002603; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for handling measurement gaps
in wireless networks

JP2011-522282

US20100034126; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for initiating random accessprocedure in wireless networks

JP2011-522187

US20100034141; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for managing interaction
between DRX cycles and paging cycles*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-524693

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-52

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528785

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100013701; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Cell identifier assignment and selection

JP2011-520240

US20100020710; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

RNTI-dependent scrambling sequence initialization

JP2011-522275

US20100034161; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Processing polling requests from radio link control peers

JP2011-522293

US20100034095; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Intra-frequency cell reselection restriction in wirelesscommunications

JP2011-522074

US20100035615; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Utilizing HARQ for uplink grants received in wirelesscommunications

JP2011-522283

US20100037113; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatuses for processing measurement
gaps in a wireless communication system

JP2011-523125

US20100034158; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

System, methods and apparatus for facilitating buffer
status report robustness

JP2011-523123

US20100034147; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatuses for requesting/providing
assistance data associated with various satellite
positioning systems in wireless communication
networks*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-53

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100040001; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

Control plane solution for location service to support
wireless access

JP2011-523916

US20100041418; CA; EP; TW

Efficiently identifying system waveform in uplinktransmission

JP2011-527009

US20100067591; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW

Interference management for different wirelesscommunication technologies

JP2011-527008

US20100067469; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for managing a new data
indicator in a wireless communication system

JP2011-526311

US20100067468; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Reference signal design for LTE advanced

JP2011-528017

US20100075706; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
SG; TW; ZA

Apparatus and method for facilitating transmit diversity
for communications

JP2011-529195

US20100074210; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TW; ZA

Highly detectable pilot structureJP2011-529193

US20100074344; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Synchronizing a base station in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2011-528005

US20100074180; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IN; KR; PH; RU; TW; ZA

Handling uplink grant in random access response*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-523141

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-54

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528018

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100074109; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for reducing successive
pre-registration attempts by access terminals

JP2011-529197

US20100075680; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Synchronizing bearer context

JP2011-529333

US20100081444; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TW;
VN; ZA

System and methods to facilitate connections to accessnetworks

JP2011-542279

US20100205099; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; UA; VN; ZA

Methods and apparatus for system selection in a
multimode wireless device

JP2011-533345

US20100099412; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; UA;
VN; ZA

Support for multiple access modes for home basestations

JP2011-534829

US20100112980; AE; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA

A method and apparatus for supporting the large service
data unit (SDU)

JP2011-535760

US20100135212; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW

Transport block size (TBS) signaling enhancement

JP3850826

US7,289,452; AU; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; HU; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; RO; RU; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Network and mobile device initiated quality of service*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-55

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,158,579; US7,623,590;
US20100098187; BE; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FR; GB; ID; IE; IN; IT; KR;
NL; SE

Signalling method

JP3502604

US6,751,227; USRE41,773; AT; AU;
BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; TR

Transporting QoS Mapping Information in a Packet
Radio Network

JP3625769

US7,167,447; US20060126547; AU;
BE; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; MX

Measurement reporting in a telecommunication system

JP4122132

US7,003,290; US7,499,701; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IT;
NL; SE

Services on demand in mobile communications system

JP2009-144220

US6,957,063; US7,266,366;
US7,873,354; BE; CN; DE; EP; ES;
FI; FR; GB; IE; IT; NL; SE

A method for controlling connections to a mobile station

JP3515073

US6,807,421; US7,684,361; JP; BE;
BR; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IT;
NL; SERadio resource management

JP4619621

US7,072,663; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; FR; GB; IT; NL; RU

A method for initiating in a terminal of a cellular network
the measurement of power levels of signals and aterminal

JP2006-129531

US7,096,021; AT; BR; CA; CH; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IT; KR; NL;
SE*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Diversity transmitter and diversity transmission method

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP3978426

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-56

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010129605*

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110110296; JP; CN; IN; TW

Hearability improvements for reference signals

JP2011-544681

US20100172311; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; MX; PH; RU; TW; ZA

Provision of inter-frequency subframe configuration in
wireless communication

JP2011-544663

US20100172272; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Method and apparatus for computing and reporting
channel quality indication (CQI)

JP2011-545483

US20100177653; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Frequency hopping in a wireless communication
network

JP2011-547927

US20100189032; CA; CN; EP; ID;
IN; KR; MY; RU; TW; UA; ZA

Flexible data and control multiplexing

US20100214938*

JP; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; PH;
RU; TW; ZA

Antenna virtualization in a wireless communication
environment

JP2011-548403

US20100202560; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA

PCFICH design for multicarrier operation

WO2010127292*

US20110096734; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Systems, methods and apparatus for facilitating
discontinuous reception in a multi-carrier wirelesscommunication system

WO2010129597*

US20110105069; JP; CN; EP; IN;TW

Method and apparatus for maintaining location
continuity for a UE following handoverJP2011-549340

US20100202407; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Data and control multiplexing in wirelesscommunications*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-57

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100202559; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Managing access control to closed subscriber groups

JP2011-549342

US20100203865; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Fall back using mobile device assisted terminating
access domain selection

WO2010115045*

US20100303012; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; PH; RU; UA; ZA

Timing adjustment for synchronous operation in awireless network

US20100222068*

JP; BR; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW

Discontinuous uplink transmission operation andinterference avoidance for a multi-carrier system

US20100260121*

JP; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for adjacent channelinterference mitigation in access point base stations

WO2010105232*

US20100234040; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for handling inconsistent control
information in a wireless communication system

US20100238823*

JP; AE; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN;
KR; MY; PH; RU; TH; TW; ZA

Method and apparatus for uplink power control in a
multicarrier wireless communication system

WO2010129616*

US20110111788; JP; AE; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; MY; PH; TW; ZA

Re-establishment procedure for an emergency call

WO2010115155*

US20100255807; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for generation and use ofreference signals in a communications system

WO2010120530*

US20100246527; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; RU; TH;
TW; ZA

Multiplexing and coding schemes for multiple transmit
antennas in a wireless communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-549336

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-58

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010118261*

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100260168; JP; AU; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; TH; TW; ZA

Minimizing the impact of self synchronization on
wireless communication devices

WO2010118260*

US20100260169; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW

Control of radio links in a multiple carrier system

WO2010120981*

US20100271939; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Method, apparatus and computer program product for
determining QOS of communications based on CSG
membership

WO2010121198*

US20100265827; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW

Systems, methods, and devices to enable selection ofradio access technology

WO2010123924*

US20100265914; JP; AE; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; MY; RU; TW;
VN; ZA

Method and apparatus for control and data multiplexing
in a MIMO communication system

WO2010124244*

US20110103498; JP; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH; TH; TW; ZA

Establishing packet data network connectivity for local
internet protocol access traffic

WO2010123643*

US20100272013; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; TH; TW; VN;
ZA

Systems, apparatus and methods for facilitating
emergency call service in wireless communication
systems

WO2010127331*

US20100279648; JP; AE; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; TH; TW; ZA

Transmission and detection of overhead channels andsignals in a wireless network

WO2010127332*

US20100278132; JP; BR; CN; EP;
IN; KR; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Conveying synchronization stratum information*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-59

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110110316; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Semi-persistent scheduling for multi-carrier wirelesscommunication

WO2010129617*

US20110116454; JP; CN; IN; TW

Multicarrier retransmission feedback

WO2010129810*

US20110116457; JP; BR; CA; CN;
EP; IN; MY; PH; TH; TW; ZA

Transaction management

WO2010135473*

US20110130157; JP; AE; CA; CN;
EP; IN; MY; PH; SG; TW

Method and apparatus for assisted positioning in awireless communication system

US20110117925*

Downlink control channel for relay resource allocation

WO2011005787*

US20110164550; TW

Low reuse preamble

WO2011008878*

US20110013531; TW

Synchronization of devices in a wireless communication
network

WO2011011760*

US20110176483; TW

Determining control region parameters for multiple
transmission points

WO2011014829*

US20110026473; TW

Resource specification for broadcast/multicast services

WO2011019977*

US20110194477; TW

Method and apparatus for uplink power control for
multiple transmit antennas

WO2011017462*

US20110044296; TW

PDCCH search space design for LTE-A multi-carrier
operation*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010127300*

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-60

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2011032035*

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110070845; TW

Signaling identification of machine to machine devices
and services

WO2011041459*

US20110256896; TW

Uplink control channel resource allocation for transmit
diversity

WO2011041445*

US20110228731; TW

UE-RS sequence initialization forcommunication systems

WO2011041544*

US20110237267; TW

Methods and apparatuses for rate adaption in responseto network congestion

WO2011041519*

US20110075563; TW

Carrier indicator field for cross carrier assignments

WO2011044038*

US20110080883; TW

Resource management and admission control for
non-members of a closed subscriber group in homeradio access networks

WO2011059764*

US20110218004; TW

Method, apparatuses and computer program product fora circuit switched fallback procedure handling conflict
when handover occurs during CS fallback

WO2011053849*

US20110216645; TW

Method and apparatus for managing a select IP traffic
offload for mobile communications based on user
location

WO2011069119*

US20110235546; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Multiple carrier indication and downlink control
information interaction

wireless*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-61

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,826,415; AU; EP; IN; KR

Method for configuring and managing channel in awireless communication system using AMC channel anddiversity channel, transmission/reception apparatus
therefor, and system thereof

JP2008-541548

US20060268983; AU; BR; IN; KR;
RU

Methods and apparatus for channel quality indication
feedback in a communication system

JP2011-509559

US20090163142; CN; EP; IN; KR

Method and apparatus for multiplexing data and control
information in wireless communication systems basedon frequency division multiple accessJP4319665

US7,613,245; US7,697,631;
US7,929,590; US20110170533; AU;
CN; EP; IN; KR; RUAppareil et procede de generation de turbocodes quasi
complimentaires

JP3636708

US7,093,185; US7,200,796; JP; AU;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR; GB; IN;
IT; KR; RU; SE

Method and apparatus for managing local internet
protocol offload

WO2011130294*

US13/080,479; AR; TW

Method and apparatus for transmitting the sync channel
message in a multi-carrier communication system

JP4499299

US6,925,067; US7,486,653;
US7,447,189; US7,508,790;
US20090059893; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IN; KR; MX; NO; RU;
SG; TW; UA

Apparatus and method for assigning frequency tosupport high-speed downlink packet access service inorthogonal frequency division multiplexing mobile
communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4243264

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-62

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4668491

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US6,397,070; BR; CN; EP; HK; KR;TW

Method and apparatus for beamforming in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2011-055507

US6,778,507; JP; BR; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR; TW

Method and apparatus for providing mobility within a
network

JP4638109

US6,366,561; US7,272,138; JP; AU;
BR; CN; DE; EP; FR; GB; HK; KR

Method and apparatus for concurrently processing
multiple calls in a spread spectrum communications
system

JP4307772

US6,625,198; US7,184,459;
US7,466,741; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW;
UA

Transmission method in multiplex-antenna
communications system, base station, and themultiplex-antenna communications system

JP4851124

US6,473,467; JP; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; GR; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; TW;UA

An Improved GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication
Link

JP2000-506348

US5,841,396; US6,064,336; JP; CH;
DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR;
HK; IE; IT; KR; NL; PT; SE

Method and apparatus for determining time for GPS
receivers

JP2001-505665

US5,945,944; US6,150,980;
US6,433,734; JP; BE; CH; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE; IT;
KR; LI; NL; PT; SE

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for estimating reverse linkloading in a wireless communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-63

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS6,133,874; AU; BE; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; ID; IE;
IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE; SG

Method and apparatus for satellite positioning system(SPS) time measurement

JP2003-523500

US6,377,209; US6,583,757; JP; AU;
BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; IE; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; SE

Call setup latency reduction by encapsulating signalling
messages

JP4163108

US6,952,411; BE; BG; CN; CZ; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN; IT;
KR; NL; SE; TW

Method and apparatus for secure data transmission in a
mobile communication system

JP2005-537713

US7,185,362; US20070116282; JP;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; MX;TW

Method and apparatus for data packet transport in awireless communications system using an internet
protocolJP2005-534202

US7,184,789; JP; BE; BG; BR; CA;
CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO;
SE; SG; TW

Packet flow processing in a communication system

JP2005-529554

US20060256719; US20110273984;
JP; BR; CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; KR;TW

User terminal-initiated hard handoff from a wireless local
area network to a cellular network

JP2009-512354

US7,706,796; US20110064058; JP;
CN; EP; IN; KR

Power control using erasure techniques

JP4643636

US7,536,626; JP; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN; ZA

Method and apparatus for acquiring satellite positioning
system signals*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2002-532724

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-64

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4575442

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,197,692; US20070150799;
US20110296279; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN;
ZA

Power control for a wireless communication systemutilizing orthogonal multiplexing

JP4616339

US20060019694; US20090023466;
US20080214121; JP; AR; AU; BE;
BG; BR; CA; CL; CN; CZ; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL;
RO; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN; ZA

Systems and methods for providing channel quality
feedback for downlink MIMO transmission adjustment

JP2010-502121

US20070105503; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Multiplexing of W-CDMA and OFDM signals in awireless communication system

JP2008-502225

US7,920,884; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
TW; UA

Transmission of overhead information for broadcast andmulticast services in a wireless communication system

JP4653165

US20060018269; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; RU;
TW; UA

Wireless communication system with configurable cyclic
prefix length

JP4612046

US20060013325; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA

Coding and modulation for broadcast and multicast
services in a wireless communication system

JP2008-502220

US20060013168; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
RU; TW; UA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Robust erasure detection and erasure-rate-based
closed loop power control*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-65

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20060013186; US20090304120;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; RU; TW; UA

Interference control in a wireless communication system

JP2008-533924

US20060285503; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; TW; UA;
VN

Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system

JP2009-514459

US20060209732; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; GB; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system

JP2008-533928

US20060209670; BR; CA; CL; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TH; TW

Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system

JP2008533927

US20060209973; JP; AR; BE; BG;
BR; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; MY; NL; PL;
RO; RU; SE; SG; TW

Systems and methods for beamforming in multi-input
multi-output communication systems

JP4723632

US20060203794; JP; AR; AU; BR;
CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX;
MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Systems and methods for beamforming and rate control
in a multi-input multi-output communication systems

JP4768805

US20060203891; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TH; UA; VN

Multicarrier Modulation System with Cyclic Delay
Diversity*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-502223

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-66

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-538488

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20060233124; US13/299,898;
JP; BE; BG; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL;
PL; RO; SE; TW

Method and Apparatus for Locating a Wireless Local
Area Network in a Wide Area Network

JP4791545

US20070019586; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and Apparatus for Maintaining a Fingerprint fora Wireless Network

JP4791546

US20070021126; AR; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Resource allocation for shared signalin channels in
OFDM

JP2009-514455

AU; BR; CA; CL; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL;
IN; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN

Global navigation satellite system

JP2010-533862

US7,893,869; US20110187593; CN;
EP; IN; KR

Enhanced techniques for using core based nodes forstate transfer

JP2011-125049

US7,668,541; US20110019614; JP;
CA; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR

Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information including loading factors forinterference control

JP4782841

US20070140168; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information including loading factors forinterference control

JP2009-512357

US20070104164; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Frequency hopping design for IFDMA, LFDMA and
OFDMA systems*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-67

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US11/549,617; CN; EP; IN; KR

Methods and apparatus for broadcasting loading
information corresponding to neighboring base stations

JP2009-512360

US20070253355; CL; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus for controlling a base station'stransmission power

JP4782842

US20070253385; CL; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TH; TW

Communications methods and apparatus using physicalattachment point identifiers

JP2009-521846

US20070147377; BR; CA; CL; CN;
EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TH; TW

Communications methods and apparatus using physicalattachment point identifiers which support dual
communications links

JP2009-521866

US20070147286; AR; BR; CN; DE;
EP; GB; IN; KR; RU; TW

Method and apparatus for end node assisted neighbordiscovery

JP4733190

US20070147283; AR; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW

Methods and apparatus for reporting and/or using
control information

JP2009-521861

US20070149128; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating backlog
related information

JP2009-521856

US20070258365; AR; CN; EP; HK;
IN; KR; TH; TW

Methods and apparatus related to selecting reporting
alternative in a request report

JP2009-521897

US20070253358; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW

Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating
and using information which can be used forinterference control purposes*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-507284

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-68

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521858

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070253357; CN; DE; EP; GB;
HK; IN; KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating transmission
backlog information

JP2009-521870

US20070149129; US20100220626;
BE; BG; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; IE; IN; IT; KR; NL; PL;
RO; SE; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating control
information

JP2009-521855

US20070149137; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW

Methods and apparatus for communicating information
utilizing a plurality of dictionaries

JP2009-521873

US20070149138; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for selecting control channel
reporting formats

JP2009-521871

US20070149132; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and apparatus of implementing and/or using a
dedicated control channel

JP2009-521859

US20070149131; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; SE; TW

Method and apparatus for selecting between a pluralityof dictionaries

JP2009-521860

US20070249287; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; HU; IE;
IN; IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE; TW

Methods and apparatus for determining,communicating, and/or using delay information in awireless communications system

JP2009-521853

US20070249360; AR; CN; DE; EP;
GB; HK; IN; KR; TH; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatus related to selecting a request
group for a request report*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-69

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20070253449; CN; DE; EP; GB;
HK; IN; KR; TH; TW

Provision of a move indication to a rescource requester

JP2009-509466

US20070086389; CN; EP; IN; KR

Packet routing in a wireless communications
environment

JP2009-509468

US20070076653; BE; BG; CN; CZ;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HU; IE; IN;
IT; KR; NL; PL; RO; SE

Provision of QOS treatment based upon multiple
requests

JP2009-509467

US20070076658; JP; CN; EP; IN;KR

Methods and apparatus for supporting quality of service
in communication systems

JP2009-533982

US20070243879; CN; EP; IN; KR

Providing quality of service for various traffic flows in acommunications environment

JP2009-533984

US7,907,970; AR; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Methods and systems for processing overhead
reduction for control channel packets

JP2009-542126

US20110255522; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; NO; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; VN

Method and apparatus for low-overhead packet datatransmission and control of reception mode

JP2010-501148

US20080056229; AU; BE; BG; BR;
CA; CN; CZ; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH; PL; RO;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system

JP2010-508788

US20100103906; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Methods and apparatus determining, communicating,and/or using delay information*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2009-521872

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-70

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-508789

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100035611; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NO;
NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Resource requests for a wireless communication
system

JP2010-517490

US20080186931; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Control channel constraints in wireless communications

JP2010-517491

US20080188233; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; IN; KR; RU; SG; TW

Cyclic delay diversity and precoding for wirelesscommunication

JP2010-519794

US20080247364; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VNApparatus and method for MIMO transmission with
explicit and implicit cyclic delays

JP2010-518757

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN

Preamble based uplink power control for LTE

JP2010-518787

US7,986,959; US20110294530; AU;
BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR;
MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Uplink power control for LTE

JP2010-518788

US20080280638; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Positioning using enhanced pilot signal

JP2011-511502

US20090203386; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Reference signal design for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-71

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080287155; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Pilot structures for ACK and CQI in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-528534

US20080298502; CN; EP; HK; IN;
KR; TW

Apparatus and method of determining a precoding
matrix in a multi-input multi-output (MIMO) system

JP2010-537515

US8,014,265; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for beamforming of control
information in a wireless communication system

JP2010-537516

US8,009,617; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Utilizing restriction codes in wireless access pointconnection attempts

JP2011-504055

US20090137228; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Favoring access points in wireless communications

JP2011-504056

US20090137249; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Utilizing broadcast signals to convey restrictedassociation information

JP2011-504057

US20090129338; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Classifying access points using pilot identifiers

JP2011-504059

US20090135784; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for multiplexing and power
control of uplink control channels in a wirelesscommunication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-529720

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-72

Sector identification using sector parameters signatures

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-504689

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090129327; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Access management for wireless communication

JP2010-541514

US20090094680; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Provisioning communication nodes

JP2011-501917

US20090093232; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Access terminal configuration and access control

JP2010-541515

US20090094351; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Method and apparatus for supporting positioning forterminals in a wireless network

WO2010124011*

US20110098057; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MY; PH; SG;
TH; TW; VN; ZA

Supporting version negotiation for positioning forterminals in a wireless network

US20110212733*

Wireless communication paging utilizing multiple typesof node identifiers

JP2011-512070

US20090181672; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Wireless communication paging and registration utilizing
multiple types of node identifiers

JP2011-512071

US20100069062; AU; BR; CN; EP;HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-73

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20090316657; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wirelessnetwork connections

JP2011-525785

US20090316604; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wirelessnetwork connections

JP2011-526457

US20090316629; AT; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO; NZ; PH;
PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
VN

Access terminal assisted node identifier confusion
resolution using a time gap

JP2011-525341

US20090316654; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ;
PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Access terminal assisted node identifier confusion
resolution

JP2011-525342

US20090316655; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Techinques for supporting relay operation in wirelesscommunication systems

JP2011-530148

US20100080139; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Techniques for supporting relay operation in wirelesscommunication systems

JP2011-530149

US20100080166; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Cell relay network attachment procedures

JP2011-533385

US20100103857; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Concentrator for multiplexing access point to wirelessnetwork connections*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-526137

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-74

Bearer QoS mapping for cell relays

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-533388

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100103863; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Header compression for cell relay communications

JP2011-533413

US20100103865; CN; EP; IN; KR;
TW

Transmission of feedback information for multi-carrier
operation

WO2010129618*

US20110110246; JP; CN; IN; TW

Transmission of feedback information in multi-carriers
systems and determination of up-link ACK/NACK
resources from down-link CCE of the down-link grant

WO2010129619*

US20110116455; JP; AU; CA; CN;
ID; IN; TW; VN; ZA

Switching wireless network selection modes in
conjunction with selection of a wireless cell set

JP2011-535628

US20100113020; AE; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; PH; RU; TW; VN; ZA

Selection of wireless network in conjunction withselection of a wireless cell set

JP2011-535629

US20100110987; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Maintaining closed subscriber group information foraccess control

JP2011-543661

US20100161794; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

A technique for compressing a header field in a data
packetJP4159287

US6,680,955; JP; AU; BE; BR; CA;
CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; IE; IN;
IT; KR; MX; NL; RU; SE

Radio link failure reporting

JP2011-536569

US20100124173; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-75

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100124918; BR; CA; CN; EP;
ID; IN; KR; RU; TW; ZA

Access point handover control based on closed
subscriber group subscription information

JP2011-543663

US20100157943; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Handover control based on closed subscriber groupsubscription information

JP2011-543664

US20100157944; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Handover failure messaging schemes

JP2011-545410

US20100173633; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Adaption of handover parametersJP2011-545411

US20100173626; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Method and apparatus for enabling multiple
transmission modes based on multiple search spaces

JP2011-545529

US20100177700; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

Method and apparatus for enabling multiple
transmission modes in a wireless communication
system

JP2011-545531

US20100177810; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

CSG membership indication

JP2011-548355

US20100197285; BR; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Access control for access terminals at access points
associated with closed subscriber groups

JP2011-548358

US20100197307; CN; EP; IN; KR;TW

QOS mapping for relay nodes

WO2010118426*

US20100260129; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Mobility management based on radio link failure
reporting*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-536568

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-76

Header compression for IP relay nodes

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010118431*

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100260098; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Device mobility for split-cell relay networks

WO2010120828*

US20100260097; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Minimizing interference to non-associated users

WO2010135466*

US20100298005; JP; CN; EP; IN;TW

Minimizing interference to non-associated users

WO2010135471*

US20100297997; JP; CN; EP; IN;TW

Maintaining controllee information in collaborative
sessions

WO2010132820*

US20100312834; JP; CN; EP; IN;TW

Controlling media and informing controller status incollaborative sessions

WO2010132824*

US20100312841; JP; CN; EP; IN;TW

Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation

WO2010124248*

US20110103510; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation

WO2010124252*

US20110110455; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Rank and precoding indication for MIMO operation

WO2010124254*

US20110105137; JP; CN; EP; IN;
KR; TW

Access mode-based access control

WO2010129612*

US20100278147; JP; CN; IN; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100279687; JP; BR; CN; IN;
KR; TW

Domain selection for mobile-originated message service

WO2011019771*

US20110191430; TW

Identifying a domain for delivery of message service
information

WO2011019772*

US20110188448; TW

Apparatus and Method for Reducing Message Collision
Between Mobile Stations Simultaneously Accessing a
Base Station in a CDMA Cellular Communications
System

JP3152353

US5,544,196; US6,615,050;
US6,985,728; US20060121897;
US7,734,260; US7,426,391; AT; AU;
BE; BG; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; IE;
IL; IT; KP; KR; MX; NL; PT; RU; SE;
SK; ZAHigh data rate CDMA wireless communication system

JP4263749

US5,930,230; US6,535,496;
US6,728,230; US6,424,619; JP; AT;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; NL; PT; SE;
SG; TW; ZA

A subscriber unit and method for use in a wirelesscommunication system

JP4132088

US7,715,461; US20100177744;
US6,678,311; US6,621,875; AR; AT;
AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN; CY;
CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; IE; IL; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX;
NL; NO; NZ; PT; RU; SE; SG; VN

AT2-77*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Access mode-based access control

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010129613*

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-78

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4130484

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US6,549,525; US6,396,804; JP; AU;
BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN; DE; EP;
ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; ID; IE; IL;
IN; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; MY; NL;
NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA

Subscriber Unit for a CDMA Wireless Communication
SystemJP3998716

US5,926,500; AR; AT; AU; BR; CA;
CH; CL; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR;
GB; GR; HK; IE; IT; KR; NL; PT; SE

A wireless communication device and method

JP4790879

US6,011,978; JP; AU; BR; CA; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IL; IT;
KR; MX; NO; RU; SE; SG

Method for acquiring an alternate communication
system

JP4542176

US6,463,298; JP; AM; AR; AU; AZ;
BR; BY; CA; EA; IL; IN; KG; KR; KZ;
MD; MY; RU; SG; TJ; TM

Method of and apparatus for encrypting signals fortransmission

JP4260896

US6,075,859; US6,385,316;
US6,768,797; US7,995,751;
US13/206,300; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IE; IN; IT;
KR; MX; MY; NL; RO; RU; SE; ZA

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
A subscriber unit and method for use in a wirelesscommunication system*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US6,832,094; US20050064880;
US8,046,005; US7,983,695;
US7,970,420; US7,555,302;
US8,068,859; US6,393,295; JP; AR;
AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CL; CN;
CY; CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; LI;
LU; MC; MX; MY; NL; NZ; PL; PT;
RU; SE; SG; TW; UA; ZA

Method and apparatus for high rate packet datatransmission

JP4339508

US6,574,211; US7,079,550;
US7,184,426; US20060280160;
US7,848,284; US8,077,655;
US8,005,042; US7,848,283;
US8,009,625; US20070025267;
US7,848,285; US7,499,427;
US7,848,282; US7,995,531;
US20090310588; US20070025320;
JP; AR; AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH;
CL; CN; CY; CZ; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; ID; IE; IL; IN;
IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; MY; NL; NO;
NZ; PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; UA;
VN; ZA

Method and apparatus for coordinating transmission ofshort messages with hard handoff searches in awireless communications system

JP4833898

US6,535,563; US7,010,068;
US7,664,209; US7,653,157; JP; AU;
BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; FI; FR; GB;
HK; IL; IT; KR; MX; NO; SE; SG; TW

A Method of and Apparatus for Paging a WirelessTerminal in a Wireless Telecommunications System

AT2-79*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP3983818

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20(selection of option 2)

AT2-80

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4499285

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS6,275,478; US7,286,499;
US20080102878; JP; CN; DE; EP;
FR; GB; HK; KR; TW

Distributed infrastructure for wireless cata
communications

JP4673435

US6,215,779; JP; CN; DE; EP; FR;
GB; HK; KR

Distributed infrastructure for wireless data
communications

JP2004-525578

US7,248,572; US7,715,356;
US20100220688; JP; AT; BE; BR;
CA; CH; CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR;
MX; NL; NO; PT; RU; SE; SG; UA

Method for robust handoff in wireless communication
system

JP4536926

US6,360,100; US7,233,794;
US20070105584; JP; AU; BE; BR;
CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
HK; ID; IE; IL; IT; KR; MX; NL; NO;
RU; SE; SG; UA

Reservation multiple accessJP4485687

US6,256,301; CN; EP; HK; KR

Reservation multiple accessJP4638052

US6,987,982; US7,613,462;
US8,014,805; US6,788,937; JP; CN;
DE; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; HK; IT; KR;
NL; SE

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Methods and apparatuses for fast power control ofsignals transmitted on a mulitple access channel*20: These patents are applied to the revised part of ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized
Inter-RAT Handover(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-16345

AT2-81JP2012-5959

Method, System and Device for Processing Circuit Switched
Services in an Evolved Packet Network

JP2012-6889

METHOD ANDSCHEDULINGRESOURCE

JP2011-277483

METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SERVICES FOR
USER

JP2011-245402

A DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM

JP2011-165390

RELAY TRANSMISSION METHOD AND NETWORK NODE

JP2011-534997

Method and system for allocating communication resources

JP2011-90014

METHOD, DEVICE, AND SYSTEM FOR MANAGING UPLINKCARRIER FREQUENCIES

JP2011-546577

METHODFOR
SIGNALLINGCOMMUNICATION SYSTEMWIRELESSJP2011-542652

Method and Apparatus for Binding Redundancy Versions with a
System Frame Number and Subframe Numbers

JP2011-527189

SYSTEM

FOR

MEDIA

IN

A

*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR IMPLEMENTINGINTERCONNECTION BETWEEN IP DOMAINS

備考（出願国名）REMARKSList of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

Method, User Equipment and Server for Multimedia Session
Transfer
System and Method for SR-VCC of IMS Emergency Sessions
Method and System for Session Controlling

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-528175
JP2011-517742
JP2011-517741

APN

JP2011-546576

Tunnel Management Method, Tunnel Management Apparatus,
and Communications System

JP2011-517739

PAGING METHOD, NETWORK ELEMENT, MANAGEMENTNETWORK ELEMENT AND COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

JP2011-521426

Method, Apparatus and System for Paging Processing andInformation Displaying

JP2011-534994

Access Control Method, Access Control Apparatus andCommunication System

JP2011-532484

DECISION-MAKING METHOD, DECISION-MAKING SYSTEM,
AND POLICY DECISION FUNCTION

JP2010-541686

METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR REPORTING USE AMOUNT OFDATA SERVICE, MEDIA PROCESSOR AND MEDIACONTROLLER

JP2010-542508

Method, Device, and System for Controlling User Equipment toRelease Uplink Resources

JP2010-541009

METHOD AND APPARATUS FORSUBSCRIPTION CONFIGURATIONUPDATING

AT2-82*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

SIGNAL ENCODING METHOD AND DEVICE, METHOD FOR
ENCODING JOINT FEEDBACK SIGNAL(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2011-550400

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

Method, Apparatus and System for Recommending Media JP2011-515070
Content

AT2-83

Method, System and Device for Processing Circuit Switched
Services in an Evolved Packet Network

JP2010-542499

POLICY AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION MANAGEMENTMETHOD, MANAGEMENT NETWORK ELEMENT, AND
NETWORK SYSTEM

JP2010-530265

METHOD AND DEVICERELEASE PROCESSING

JP2010-533424

OF

NETWORKRESOURCE

JP2010-536314

Method for controlling charging of packet data service

JP2010-091482

System and method for providing RBT in communication network

JP2010-003407

Method and Apparatus for Accessing Old Network throughTemporary ID of Evolved Network

JP2010-521290

COMMUNICATION SYSTEM, MOBILITY MANAGEMENTNETWORK ELEMENT, METHOD FOR PROCESSINGRESOURCE

JP2010-535203

Method and Device for Obtaining Media Description Information JP2010-530255
of IPTV Services*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

METHOD AND DEVICE FOR HOLDING CALLS

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

METHOD, SYSTEM, AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING
BIDDING DOWN ATTACKS DURING MOTION OF USEREQUIPMENT(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-520411

AT2-84

Policy Decision Function Addressing Method, Network Element
and Network System

JP2010-526137

Method, Device and System for Implementing Optimized
Inter-RAT HandoverJP2010-512499

METHOD, APPARATUS AND MOBILE COMMUNICATIONSYSTEM OF DETERMINING A SET OF ZERO CORRELATIONZONE LENGTHS

JP2010-504427

METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING USER JP2010-517260
EQUIPMENT, AND METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING AND
ALLOCATING A TEMPORARY IDENTIFIER
BEARER SUSPENSION METHOD, BEARER RESUMPTION JP2010-516358
METHOD, AND GATEWAY AGENTMETHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR MULTICAST SERVICE JP2010-509662
AUTHORIZATION CONTROLCONTROL METHOD, SYSTEM AND FUNCTION ENTITY FORREPORTING BEARER EVENT OF SIGNALING IP FLOW

JP2009-553894

METHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING JP2010-500058
MULTICAST BEARER RESOURCES*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
TIME-SHIFT TV SERVICE ESTABLISHMENT METHOD AND JP2009-550196
TIME-SHIFT TV MEDIA FUNCTION ENTITY
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

Method and Network Device for Creating and Deleting JP2009-551096
Resources
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR IDLE MODE SIGNALING JP2010-512500
REDUCTION

AT2-85MEDIUM RESOURCE RESERVATION METHOD, SERVICE JP2010-534353
PACKAGE INFORMATION OBTAINING METHOD AND
APPARATUSMETHOD, SYSTEM, TERMINAL, ACCESS NODE AND JP2009-545801
GATEWAY FOR HANDING OVER TERMINAL TO
MACROCELLMETHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR NEGOTIATING JP2010-513633
SECURITY CAPABILITY WHEN TERMINAL MOVESMETHOD, DEVICE AND SYSTEM FOR ASSIGNING ACK JP2010-509668
CHANNELS TO USERS
Method and System for Implementing Multimedia Ring Back
Tone Service and Multimedia Caller Identification Service
andProcessing JP2009-546637

A MEDIA GATEWAY AND METHOD FOR REPORTING THE JP2008-547830
TERMINAL STATISTIC PARAMETER VALUE*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

Method and Apparatus for Allocating
Sequences in Communication System

JP2009-552993

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR IDENTIFYING AND OBTAINING JP2010-534347
AUTHORITY INFORMATION IN SDP PROTOCOL
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTSERVICE PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM, AND JP2009-546630
POLICY CONTROL AND CHARGING RULES FUNCTION
A interactive method of reporting the location report by target ue JP2006-508100
in the location service

AT2-86CALLING METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR VIDEO PHONE

JP2009-549763

Multimedia Session Call Control Method and Application Server

JP2010-531404

ENCODING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FRAME JP2009-552052
SYNCHRONIZATION SIGNAL
Method and Apparatus for Feeding Back and Receiving JP2010-536315
Acknowledgement Information of Semi-Persistent Scheduling
Data Packets
SYSTEM, METHOD, AND APPARATUS FOR IMPLEMENTING JP2009-537470
MULTIMEDIA CALL CONTINUITYCALL CONTROL METHOD, CIRCUIT-SWITCHED DOMAIN JP2009-551095
ADAPTERMETHOD, APPARATUS AND SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING
JP2010-532417
WORKING MODE OF HSDPA SYSTEM*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
METHODAND
APPARATUSFOR
SEQUENCE JP2009-529504
DISTRIBUTING AND SEQUENCE PROCESSING INCOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

SECURITY CAPABILITY NEGOTIATION METHOD, SYSTEM, JP2009-553896
AND EQUIPMENT

AT2-87A DATA PROCESSING METHOD AND SYSTEM

JP2009-524069

Method and Apparatus for Updating Serving Cell

JP2009-524870

Method, System and Device for Accessing Network

JP2009-519782

METHOD FOR REDUCING FEEDBACK INFORMATIONOVERHEAD N PRECODED MIMO-OFDM SYSTEMS

JP2009-515687

METHOD AND APPARATUS OF ESTABLISHING A JP2009-547518
SYNCHRONISATION SIGNAL IN A COMMUNICATIONSYSTEM
METHOD, SYSTEM AND APPARATUS OF CHARGING FOR JP2009-505705
GROUP MODE SERVICEMETHOD ANDSCHEDULINGSYSTEMFORMEDIA

RESOURCE JP2008-554581*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

Streaming Media Network System, Streaming Media Service JP2008-554582
Realization Method and Streaming Media Service Enabler

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
System, Method and Apparatus for Establishing Interactive JP2008-554583
Media Session Based on IP Multimedia Subsystem
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

Method for Improving Synchronization
Transmission in a Communication System

andInformation JP2008-550603

Method and System for Synchronization in Communication JP2008-550604
SystemMETHOD,
DEVICERETRANSMISSIONANDSYSTEMFORDATA JP2008-542582

AT2-88

Method for Activating Multimedia Broadcast/Multicast Service

JP2007-521776

Method, Devices and System for Implementing a Time-shift JP2008-534853
Television
Method of handling periodic location information request

JP2006-540137

RESOURCE ADMISSION CONTROL PROCESSING METHOD JP2006-237314
AND RESOURCE ADMISSION CONTROL PROCESSOR
A

method of implementing multicasting service

Method for multimedia broadcast/multicast service registration*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

JP2006-537040
JP2006-548078

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2007-545822

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method for information transmission

備考（出願国名）REMARKSRESOURCE REVOKING METHOD BASED ON RACS, AND
JP2006-238214
NETWORK DEVICEA METHOD FOR PROCESSING LOCATION
OF CHANGE OF AREA EVENTREQUEST JP2006-515637

Method ,system and device for implementing interconnection JP2007-530574
between IP domains

AT2-89A fast interactive method of user terminal in the wireless local
area network selecting access mobile network

JP2006-529561

Method for controlling charging of packet data service

JP2007-503178

A METHOD OF USER ACCESS AUTHORIZATION IN THE JP2006-508099
WLAN
method for activating multimedia broadcast/multicast service

JP2007-505357

A method for processing requests for location

JP2006-549838

Method for releasing a service tunnel in a wireless local area JP2006-548074
network

ARIB STD-T95*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

特許出願人PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights
出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
Method and apparatus for controlling power of uplink physical JP2007-216412
channel
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

An optimized interworking method for a wlan user terminal JP2006-521374
selecting a mobile network to accessInteractive processing method for network selection information JP2006-517939
of user terminal in wireless local area network
System and method for providing RBT in communication JP2006-529557
network

AT2-90

Method and apparatus for coding of e-dch dedicated physical JP2007-531571
control channel
Method for implementing data segmentation and concatenation JP2007-543684
and reassembly and transmitter thereof
Method for processing the re-authentication based on the JP2007-524161
charging of the packet data flow
Method, device and system for terminating a user session in a JP2006-178630
multicast service
Method and apparatus for service identifying and routing in JP2007-528567
multimedia broadcast/multicast service system*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

(selection of option 2)
備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
Enhanced charging rule for packet data service data service JP2007-502176
and operation method thereof
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

Method for wireless network re-selection in a plurality of JP2006-549835
networks environment
Method of obtaining the user identification for the network
application entity

JP2006-548082

A processing method based on charging trigger event and JP2007-501099
re-authentication event of packet data flow

AT2-91A METHOD OF LIMITING QUANTITY OF FLOW OF JP2006-504209
LOCATION INFORMATION REQUEST IN LOCATIONSERVICECOLLECTION APPARATUS OF DATA SERVICE BILLING JP2006-537037
INFORMATION AND BILLING METHOD
Method of informing a network of change of user equipment JP2007-515766
capability
Method and system for allocating communication resources

JP2008-516102

Method for verifying the validity of a user

JP2006-538634*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

Method and system for WLAN user equipment accessing new JP2006-549836
operation network特許出願人PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
METHOD, SYSTEM AND DEVICE FOR DISTRIBUTING JP2008-550615
RESOURCE OF BASE STATION NODE
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTMETHOD AND DEVICE FOR PROVIDING SERVICES FOR JP2010-542504
USER
Method for processing network selection information of user JP2006-517940
terminal in wireless local area network

AT2-92SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR MANAGINGEQUIPMENT TO ACCESS NETWORKS BY
GENERIC ,AUTHENTICATION ARCHITECTURE

USER JP2007-509860
USING

service transmission method for multimedia broadcast/multicast JP2007-525151
service
METHODFOR
PROCESSING
INFORMATION REQUEST IN LICATIONLOCATION JP2006-517938
SERVICEMETHOD OF INTER-FREQUENCY/SYSTEM MEASUREMENT JP2008-508057
AND METHOD OF DETERMINING MEASUREMENTPERFORMANCE REQUIREMENT THEREOF
A method for reducing interface load of home subscriber server

JP2006-548075

A method for notifying changes of cell information in multimedia
JP2007-509861
broadcast/multicast service*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Attachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERHUAWEITECHNOLOGIES
CO.,LTD. *21

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
Method of counting the number of multimedia broadcasting JP2007-507646
multicast service subscribers
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKSA method, a system and a terminal for realizing presenting JP2004-549031
information interaction of the wireless lan users
A Process Method about A Process Method about the Service JP2004-557750
Connection between the Wireless Local Area Network and User
Terminal

AT2-93WLAN SERVICE SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR CHARGING JP2004-557747
BASED ON USER DATA FLOW
Method for generation of training sequence in channel
estimation

JP2002-511499

A method for processing create packet data protocol context JP2006-523507
requestMethod for processing a location service

JP2006-548079*21: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.1.

ARIB STD-T95

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

出願番号等
REGISTRATIONNO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2

Approved by the 86th Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

AT2-94

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-95

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
AU; BE; BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; HK; ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; JP; KR;
MX; NL; NO; RU; SE; SG; TW; UA;
US6,694,469;
US7,127,654;
US7,613,978; US20100046497

Method, user agent, application gateway and program forsoft handoff across different networks assisted by an
end-to-end application protocol

JP2011-125033

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
JP; KR; MX; RU; TW; UA;
US8,037,188; US20110317667

Adaptive pilot insertion for a MIMO-OFDM system

JP4690401

CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IN;
IT; KR; MY; TW; US8,000,221;
US20100067590

Initial pilot frequency selection

JP4950068

CL; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; HK; IN;
IT; KR; TW; US8,009,551

Semi-connected operations for wireless communications

JP2010-541330

BR; CA; CN; DE; EP; ES; FR; GB; IN;
IT; JP; KR; RU; SG; TW;
US20090082072

Mobile access in a diverse access point network

JP2010-541487

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090088131

Access point configuration based on received access point
signals

JP2011-504328

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090122773

Bundling of ACK information in a wireless communication
system

JP2011-520394

AT; AU; BE; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE;
DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU;
ID; IE; IL; IN; IT; KR; MX; MY; NL; NO;
NZ; PL; PT; RO; RU; SE; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090279460

A method for initiating in a terminal of a cellular network themeasurement of power levels of signals and a terminal

JP4933099

AT; BR; CA; CH; CN; DE; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; IT; KR; NL; SE; US7,096,021

A method and an apparatus for a quick retransmission of
signals in a communication system

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2003-533078

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

AT2-96

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-517912

備考（出願国名）REMARKSCN; EP; IN; KR; TW; US20110158200

Method and apparatus for communicating antenna port
assignments

JP2012-519589

CN; EP; IN; KR; TW; US20110158351

Extension of UE-RS to DWPTS

JP2012-523740

AE; AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; ID; IN; KR;
RU; TW; VN; ZA; US20110205954

Method and apparatus for supporting single-user
multiple-input multiple-output (SU-MIMO) and multi-user
mimo (MU-MIMO)JP2012-524885

BR; CN; EP;
US20110194504

IN;

KR;

TW;

MIMO related signaling in wireless communication

JP2012-525646

BR; CN; EP;
US20110188587

IN;

KR;

TW;

Method and apparatus for determining time for GPS
receivers

JP2001-505665

BE; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB;
GR; HK; IE; IT; JP; KR; LI; NL; PT;SE;
US5,945,944;
US6,150,980;
US6,433,734

Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system

JP2010-508788

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
JP; KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU;
SG; TW; UA; VN; US20100103906

Reference signal design for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system

JP2010-508789

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG;
TW; UA; VN; US20100035611

Cyclic delay diversity
communication

wireless

JP2010-519794

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20080247364

Apparatus and method for MIMO transmission with explicit
and implicit cyclic delays

JP2010-518757

AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; MY; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW;
UA; VN; US20090197546

Transmitter Power Control System

JP2935896

AT; AU; BG; BR; CA; CH; DE; DK;
EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR; HK; HU; IE;
IL; IT; KR; LU; MC; MX; NL; RO; SE;
TW; ZA; US5,485,486

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Positioning reference signals in a telecommunication systemandprecodingfor

ARIB STD-T95[Ver. 2.1]

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights

Approved by the 88th Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)[Ver. 3.0]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

出願番号等
REGISTRATIONNO./APPLICATION NO.
A comprehensive confirmation form has been submitted with regard to ARIB STD-T95.
発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

AT2-97
ARIB STD-T95

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-98

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2008-541671

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110216704;US8,077,692;JP;EP;BE;BG;CL;CZ;DE;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;
HU;IE;IN;IT;KR;MY;NL;PL;RO;TW

Reverse link power control for an OFDMA system

JP2009-506654

US20100027451;US20100034315;US7,965,789;JP;EP;AR;AT;BE;CH;CN;
DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;HU;IE;IN;IT;
KR;NL;PL;PT;RO;SE;TH;TW

A broadcast channel for E-UTRA

JP5215291

US20080072269;JP;EP;AR;BR;CA;C
N;HK;IN;KR;RU;TW

Method and apparatus for fragmenting a control message
in a wireless communication system

JP5096495

US8,000,326;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for data symbol and control symbol
multiplexing

JP4903872

US20130136112;US8,363,606;NO;E
P;BR;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;NZ;PH;
RU;UA;VN

Dynamic channel quality
communication systemwireless

JP5021748

US8,068,427;JP;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;KR;RU;TW

Method and apparatus for processing primary andsecondarysynchronization
signalsforwireless
communication

JP5038427

US13/900,727;US20100182979;EP;B
R;CA;CN;DE;ES;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;RU;
TW

Uplink ACK transmission for SDMA in a wirelesscommunication system

JP4995916

US8,300,582;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TW

Method and apparatus for utilizing other sector interference(OSI) indication

JP2010-516113

US13/853,283;US8,433,357;EP;BR;C
A;CN;DE;ES;FR;GB;HK;IN;IT;KR;NL;
RU;SG;TW

Scheduling of dynamic broadcast channel

JP2010-521895

US13/889,095;US8,457,093;EP;AU;B
R;CA;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;
PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN

Configurable acknowledgement processing in a wirelesscommunication system

JP2010-524282

US20080253318;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW

Pilot transmission by relay stations in a multihop relay
communication system

JP2010-521928

US20080227386;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Enhanced frequency division multiple access for wirelesscommunication

reportingina

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 2[Ver. 2.2]

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-99

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20080233967;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;TW

Method and apparatus for efficient support for multiple
authentications

JP5144751

US8,145,905;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;KR;R
U;TW

Self-configuration for femtocells

JP2011-514566

US8,467,304;EP;BR;CN;ID;IL;IN;KR;
MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;TW;VN

Fast carrier allocation in multi-carrier systems

JP2011-517895

US20090257387;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;
SG;TW;UA;VN

Interference reduction between OFDM carriers by carrier
spacing optimization

JP5204302

US20090304100;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TWInterference mitigation by transmitting on a second, lower,
power level

JP2011-526468

US20090325626;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;
SG;TW;UA;VN

Method and apparatus for downlink data arrival

JP2011-521540

US20090274077;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Management of UE
communication system

multi-carrier

JP2011-525782

US8,184,599;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN

Synchronous TDM-based communication in dominantinterference scenarios

JP2011-527876

US13/888,292;US13/888,320;US201
00008282;NO;JP;EP;AT;AU;BE;BR;C
A;CH;CN;DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;GR;H
K;HU;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;MY;NL;NZ;PH;PL;PT;RO;RU;SE;SG;TW;UA;VN

Wireless communication channel blanking

JP2012-544484

US20110151790;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Relay architecture frameworkJP2012-501155

US20100046418;EP;BR;CA;CN;IN;K
R;RU;SG;TW

Supporting multiple access technologies in a wirelessenvironment

JP2012-501603

US20130094462;US8,325,661;JP;EP;AU;BR;CA;CN;HK;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;M
Y;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN

Channel quality feedback in multicarrier systems

JP2012-508543

US20100118817;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IN;KR;MY;RU;TW;ZA

Backhaul communication for interference management

operation

ina

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2010-522516

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-100

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-509026

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS8,457,599;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;TWDGNSS correction for positioning

JP2012-509463

US8,259,008;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for synchronization during ahandover failure in a wireless communication system

JP2012-514428

US20100165835;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Position location using multiple carriers

JP2012-521181

US20100240396;EP;CN;IN;KR

Apparatus and method for dual-cell high-speed uplink
packet access

JP2012-521178

US8,416,706;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Error-correcting multi-stage code generator and decoder
for communication systems having single transmitters or
multiple transmitters

JP4773356

US20090158114;US7,139,960;US7,4
51,377;JP;EP;CN;DE;FR;GB;HK;IN;KR

Control information signaling

JP2013-506383

US8,433,251;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;TW

Dynamic selection of subframe formats in a wirelessnetwork

JP2012-528547

US20100303013;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IN;KR;PH;RU;TW;UA;ZA

Hybrid automatic repeat request operation and decoding
status signaling for uplink multiple-input multiple-output

JP2013-501419

US20110026622;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Adaptive transmissions in coordinated multiple point
communications

JP2013-501409

US20110026421;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Method and apparatus for physical uplink control channel(PUCCH) resource mapping with transmit diversity

JP2013-501418

US20110026631;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Methods and apparatus for subframe interlacing inheterogeneous networks

JP2013-504984

US20110188481;EP;BR;CA;CN;HK;I
D;IL;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;TW;VN;ZA

Method and apparatus for conducting measurements when
multiple carriers are supported

JP2013-507074

US20110242999;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;TW

MBSFN subframe generation and processing for unicast

JP2013-507834

US20110103286;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Downlink control information for efficient decoding

JP2013-507843

US20130128838;US8,379,536;EP;C
N;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for using channel state informationreference signal in wireless communication system

JP2013-507846

US20110244877;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Apparatus and method for establishing a data connection
between a remote station and a wireless network

ARIB STD-T95[Ver. 2.2]

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-101

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110085513;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for reference signal resource
allocation

JP2013-509042

US20110249767;EP;CN;IN;KR

Improved downlink association set for uplink ACK/NACK intime division duplex system

JP2013-509035

US20110255484;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for uplink multi-carrier power
amplifier/antenna operation and channel prioritization

JP2013-509098

US20110092219;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

TDM-FDM relay backhaul channel for LTE advanced

JP2013-509848

US20110103296;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Apparatus and method for providing relay backhaul
communications in a wireless communication system

JP2013-509834

US20110103295;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Apparatus and method for joint encoding of user specificreference signal information in wireless communication

JP2013-509847

US20110268050;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Restricting access point transmissions

JP2013-510518

US20110275361;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Sounding reference signal enhancements for wirelesscommunication

JP2012-542195

US20110294529;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Apparatus and method for transmit-response timing forrelay operation in wireless communications

JP2012-544926

US20110149774;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Cross-carrier signaling in a multi-carrier system

JP2012-547177

US20120009923;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;TW;VN;ZAInteraction between accumulative power control andminimum/maximum transmit power in LTE systems

JP2012-547172

US20110159914;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Multiplexing demodulation reference signals in wirelesscommunications

JP2012-549012

US20120014318;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TW;ZA

Channel feedback based on reference signal

JP2012-549141

US20120020230;EP;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TW;ZA

Method and apparatus for power scaling for mutli-carrier
wireless terminals

JP2012-550147

US20120020286;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Aperiodic sounding reference signal transmission method
and apparatus

JP2012-553004

US20110199944;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Uplink resource allocation for LTE advanced

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-507840

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

Methods and systems for uplink transmit diversity

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2012-554041

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20120044881;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Resource block mapping for cross-carrier assignments

JP2012-554068

US20120045014;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Channel state information reference signals

JP2012-555120

US20120058791;EP;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;SG;TW;VN;ZA

Method and apparatus for channel quality indicator (CQI)
enhancements

JP2012-556245

US20110216682;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Methods of resolving PDCCH payload size ambiguity inLTE

JP2013-500195

US20110228732;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Random access design in a multiple component carrier
communication network

JP2013-500220

US20120063302;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

User-specificoperation

multi-carrier

JP2013-500204

US20110228724;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Data radio bearer mapping in a telecommunication networkwith relays

JP2013-501526

US20110235514;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Feedback of control information for multiple carriers

JP2013-503860

US20110243012;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Aperiodic channel state information request in wirelesscommunication

JP2013-503855

US20120076017;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Power headroom reporting

JP2013-503859

US20120082041;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Method and apparatus for signaling user equipment
capabilities

JP2013-503857

US20110243083;EP;CN;IN;KR

Methods and apparatuses for radio resource management
measurements of a user equipment in a heterogeneous
network

JP2013-505116

US13/851,815;US20120088516;EP;A
E;BR;CA;CN;IL;IN;KR;MX;PH;RU;TH;UA;ZA

CQI estimation in a wireless communication network

JP2013-505086

US20110250919;EP;AE;AU;BR;CA;C
N;HK;IN;KR;MY;RU;TH;TW;ZA

Channel state information
communication network

JP2013-505089

US20110249643;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;ZA

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

AT2-102

searchspace

designreporting

for

in

a

wireless

ARIB STD-T95[Ver. 2.2]

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-103

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20110249584;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;VN;ZA

Radio link monitoring (RLM) and reference signal received
power (RSRP) measurement for heterogeneous networks

JP2013-505188

US20110256861;EP;AE;BR;CA;CN;H
K;IL;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;TW;ZA

Determination of radio link failure withinterference coordination and cancellation

enhanced

JP2013-505110

US20120087250;EP;AE;AR;BR;CA;C
N;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;RU;TH;TW;ZA

Resource
partitioning
interference coordination

enhanced

JP2013-505112

US13/897,214;US20110275394;EP;A
E;BR;CA;CN;ID;IN;KR;PH;RU;TH;UA;
VN;ZA

Adaptive resource negotiation between base stations forenhanced interference coordination

JP2013-505109

US20110249642;EP;CN;IN;KR

Resource availability for physical downlink shared channel(PDSCH) in relay backhaul transmissions

JP2013-509192

US20110268064;EP;CN;IN;KR

Methods and systems for SRS power scaling in carrier
aggregation

JP2013-509274

US20110275335;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Method and apparatus for control and data multiplexing inwireless communication

JP2013-509185

US20110268080;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Uplink power control in aggregated carrier communication
systems

JP2013-510183

US20110275403;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Transmission of control information on uplink channels

JP2013-510187

US20120113832;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Methods and apparatuses for downlink channel resource
assignment

JP2013-511242

US20120120882;EP;CN;IN;KR

System, apparatus and method for control channel
configuration in wireless communication systems

JP2013-510311

US20110280201;EP;CN;IN;KR

Power headroom reporting for multicarrier LTE systems

JP2013-513255

US20110292874;EP;CN;IN;KR

Methods and apparatuses facilitating synchronization of
security configurations

JP2013-515563

US20110312299;EP;AR;AU;BR;CA;C
N;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;PH;RU;SG;TH;TW;UA;VN;ZA

Method and apparatus for relay node management andauthorization

JP2013-515562

US20110314522;EP;AR;CN;IN;KR;TW

Aperiodic CQI reporting in a wireless communication
network

information

for

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-505092

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-104

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-516678

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20120155362;EP;CN;IN;KRInteraction between maximum power reduction and power
scaling in wireless networks

JP2013-518541

US20110319120;EP;CN;IN;KR

Resource utilization measurements for heterogeneous
networks

JP2013-518576

US20110319090;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

System, apparatus, and method for utilizing network
access parameters in wireless communication systems

JP2013-516805

US20110317661;EP;CN;IN;KR

Demodulation reference signals (DM-RS) for PHICH or
PDCCH based retransmission in LTE-A wirelesscommunication

JP2013-518661

US20110317646;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Apparatus and methods for inter-user equipment transfers*US20120137008

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Aperiodic channel quality indicator report in carrier
aggregation*US20120039199

JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Power control on a deactivated component carrier*US20120058797

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Channel state information feedback for carrier aggregation*US20120039252

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Physical uplink control channel
multiple component carriers

resource allocation for*US20120039275

JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KRInterleaving for relay physical downlink control channel(R-PDCCH)*US20120039220

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Search space design for relay physical downlink control
channel (R-PDCCH)*US20120039283

JP;EP;CN;IN;KRUE receiver reference signal processing that utilizes
resource partitioning information*US20120057480

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Uplink control channel resource mapping for carrier
aggregation*US20120236771

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR;TW

Aperiodic SRS for carrier aggregation*US20120257582

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Power headroom for simultaneous voice and long term
evolution*US20120082046

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Rate matching for data and control channels in wirelesscommunication systems

ARIB STD-T95[Ver. 2.2]

Attachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-105

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Control channel resources for multi-bit ACK/NAK*US20120263121

JP;EP;CN;IN;KR

Resource assignments for uplink control channel*WO2012051119

US20120263124;JP;EP;CN;KR;TW

Restricted resource in a wireless network*WO2012061030

US20120275322;JP;EP;AE;AU;BR;C
A;ID;IN;KR;MY;PH;TH;VN

CQI-only transmission on the PUSCH*WO2012064731

US20120113849;JP;EP;IN

Method and apparatus for improving uplink transmission
mode configuration*WO2012064783

US20120113869;JP

Improved acknowledgement / negative acknowledgement
feedback for TDD*WO2012064935

US20120287828;JP;EP;IN

Methodandapparatusfor
improvingacknowledgement/negative acknowledgement feedback*WO2012068141

US20120294204;JP;CN;IN;TW

Method and apparatus for determining timing information
for cells*WO2012100200

US20120190373

Uplink transmit antenna selection in carrier aggregation*WO2012116091

US20120213154

Devices, methods, and apparatuses for mobile device
acquisition assistance*US13/732,071

US61/678,021

Method and apparatus for supervising a potentially gatedsignal in a wireless communication system

JP4773009

US7,054,284;NO;JP;EP;AT;AU;BE;B
R;CA;CH;CN;DE;DK;ES;FI;FR;GB;G
R;HK;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KR;MX;NL;PT;RU;SE;SG;TW;UAPN code based addressing methods, computer readable
medium and apparatus for airlink communications

JP4955762

US8,134,952;EP;BR;CA;CL;CN;DE;E
S;FR;GB;IN;IT;KR;RU;TW

Method of communicating between an access terminal anda femto node, wireless communication apparatus, andcomputer program product

JP5108150

US20100040019;EP;AU;BR;CA;CN;H
K;ID;IL;IN;KR;MX;MY;NZ;PH;RU;SG;TW;UA;VN

Method and apparatus to control visited network access fordevices

JP2012-557136

US20110217978;EP;CN;IN;KR

Method and apparatus to control local internet protocol
access for devices

JP2012-557137

US20120057574;EP;CN;IN;KR

ARIB STD-T95

Method and apparatus for PUCCH and PUSCH encoding

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
*US20120082075

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTAttachment 2

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights(selection of option 2)

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP2013-503926

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20120076106;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR;T
W

Reference signal patterns

JP2013-513333

US20120134273;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

ACK/NACK transmission for multi-carrier operation*US20120039279

JP;EP;BR;CN;IN;KR

Method and apparatus for performing mobile assisted hardhandoff between communication sSystems

JP4234209

US5,940,761;US6,304,755;US6,810,
254;EP;AM;AU;AZ;BR;BY;CA;CL;CN;
DE;EA;ES;FI;FR;GB;HK;ID;IE;IL;IN;IT;KG;KR;KZ;MD;MX;NL;NZ;RU;SE;SG;TJ;TM;TW;UA;ZA

Method and apparatus for sequentially synchronizednetwork

JP2003-505977

US6,671,291;JP

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Muting schemes for channel state information reference
signal and signaling thereof

AT2-106*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still be
filed or granted in Japan.

ARIB STD-T95[Ver. 2.2]

Attachment 2

Approved by the 91st Standard Assembly(selection of option 2)

List of Essential Industrial Property Rights[Ver. 3.0]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-107

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
JP4727986

備考（出願国名）REMARKSUS7,796,631; JP; AT; BE; BR; CH;
CN; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI; FR; GB; GR;
HK; HU; IE; IT; KR; NL; PT; RO; SE;TW

Method and systemcommunication system

JP4546475

US7,912,485; US20110170470; JP;
AU; BR; CA; CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN;
KR; MX; RU; TW; UA

Method and apparatus for providing antenna diversity in awireless communication system

JP2009-506656

US20070041457; US20120140798;
US20120140838; US20120120925;
JP; CL; CN; EP; HK; IN; KR; TH; TW

Acknowledgement of control messages in a wirelesscommunication system

JP5059870

US8,477,684; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN;
KR; RU; TW

Method and apparatus for cell search in an orthogonal
wireless communication system

JP2010-508788

US20100103906; JP; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY;
NO; NZ; PH; RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

Cyclic delay diversity
communication

wireless

JP5180233

US20080247364; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

User profile, policy, and PMIP key distribution in a wirelesscommunication network

JP4965671

US20080263631; BR; CA; CN; EP;
IN; KR; RU; TW

Methods and apparatus for mobility support and IP
multimedia subsytem (IMS) registration in a multimodenetwork environment

JP5329550

US20090103455; AU; BR; CA; CN;
EP; HK; ID; IL; IN; KR; MX; MY; PH;
RU; SG; TW; UA; VN

System and method for cell search and selection in awireless communication system

JP5209789

US8,588,773; US14/056,641; CN; EP;
IN; KR

Support for optional system parameter values

JP2013-501427

US20110182234; CN; EP; IN; KR; TW

Methods and apparatus for employing different capabilities
for different duplexing modes

US20120218922*

JP; CN; EP; IN; KR

Methods and apparatus for updating the UE capability in an
E-UTRANWO2013063793*

US13/823,706

for

and

signalinginprecodingforbroadcast*The deadline for filing of a Japan counterpart of this patent application has not yet passed. Therefore a Japanese counterpart may still be
filed or granted in Japan.

ARIB STD-T95

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and system for a multicast service initiation in acommunication system

ARIB STD-T95(Intentionally blanked)

AT2-108

ARIB STD-T95

Reference
This is the list of Essential Industrial Property Rights(IPRs) filed or applied to countries other than Japan.
These are listed here as a reference, as the companies
voluntarily informed ARIB of these IPRs.

AT2-109

Approved by the 73rd Standard Assembly
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *10

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and Apparatus for Radio Link Control of
Signaling Messages and Short Message Data Services
in a Communication System

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US 7,142,565

Packet Flow Processing in a Communication System

US 7,277,455

Reverse Link Automatic Repeat Request

US 20040100927

System and method for scheduling transmissions in awireless communication system

US 20050003843

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

AT2-110Signaling method in an OFDM multiple access system PCT/US2001/028314

US 7,295,509, US 20080063099,
US 20050254416, EP, TW

OFDM communications methods and apparatus

PCT/US2001/028315

US, EP, TW

Methods and apparatuses for resource allocation
randomization

US 61/021,005*10: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.1.0.

ARIB STD-T95(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

Approved by the 83rd Standard Assembly(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENTGPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link

備考
（出願国名）REMARKS

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US5,874,914

AT2-111

US6,236,354

Channel allocations in a communications system

US7,826,414

Method and apparatus for message segmentation in awireless communication system

US7,542,482

Data transfer procedure for transferring data of a data
sequence between a transmitting entity and a receiving
entityUS7,720,079

BR; GB; HK; IL; IN; KR; SG

Scheduled and Autonomous Transmission andAcknowledgement

US7,155,236

US20060264220; AU; BR; CA;
CN; EP; HK; ID; IL; KR; MX; RU;
TW; UA

Methods and apparatus for content based notification
using hierarchical groups

US20070073820

Method and apparatus for seamless and efficient
wireless handoffs

US8,059,581

TW

Control channel assignment in a wirelesscommunication network

US20060133262

AR; AU; BR; IL; MX; PH; RU; SG;
TH; TW; VN

Methods and apparatus for mobile terminal-based radio
resource management and wireless network
optimization

US20080032677*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Reducing Satellite Signal Interference in a Global
Positioning System Receiver(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

AT2-112

Mobile device-initiated measurement gap request

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US20070097914

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
AR; BR; CA; CN; EP; IN; KR; RU;
SG; TW

Allocating a channel resource in a system

CA2547913

EP

Apparatus and method for use in effecting automatic
repeat requests in wireless multiple access
communications systems

CA2547910

EP

Method for extending mobile IP and AAA to enable
integrated support for local access and roaming accessconnectivity

US6,785,256

Method to convey uplink traffic information

US7,382,755

Methods and apparatus for the utilization of core based
nodes for state transfer

US6,862,446

US6,990,337; US7,369,855;
US7,962,142; AU; CA; CN; EP; IN

Methods and apparatus for operating mobile nodes in
multiple states

US6,788,963

TW

Method and apparatus for optimization of SIGCOMP
UDVM performanceUS7,685,293

Generation and detection of synchronization signal in awireless communication system

US20080273522

Cell detection for mobile location with grouping diversity

US20100227612

TW

Reprioritization of wireless networks for reselection to
support voice call

US20100113010

TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

AT2-113

Data transmission in a TDMA system

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US7,158,489

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
AT; DE; EP; FR; GB

Channel allocation for communication system

US7,986,660

AT; BE; CH; DE; DK; EP; ES; FI;
FR; GB; GR; IE; IT; NL; PT; RU;
SE

Transmission of reference signal on non-contiguous
clusters of resources

WO2011005536

US20110141982; IN; TW

Random access channel (RACH) optimization for aself-organizing network (SON)US20100232318

TW

Joint layer 3 signalling coding for multicarrier operation

WO2010127316

US20110110441; TW

Downlink assignment indicator design for multi-carrier
wireless communication

WO2010141607

US20110128922; AE; AU; CA;
CN; IN; SG; TW; ZA

Method and apparatus for facilitating radio linkmonitoring and recovery

WO2010144601

US20110143675; IN; TW

Data prioritization for a power-limited UE in a wirelesscommunication system

WO2010144864

US20110141959; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

US20110141926; IL; MY; TW

Method and apparatus for network optimization using
SON solutions

WO2011005524

US20100325267; TW

Managing video adaptation algorithms

WO2010148048

US20100316066; TW*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

A method and apparatus for dispatching a channel
WO2010144875
quality indicator feedback in multicarrier system using ananchor carrier scheme

(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

AT2-114

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010148403

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100322079; TW

Selecting a quality of service class identifier for a bearer

WO2011005546

US20100322069; TW

Transport of LCS-related messages for LTE access

WO2011005516

US20110143771; TW

GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link

US6,421,002

GPS Receiver Utilizing a Communication Link

US6,400,314

Method and Apparatus for Utilizing Channel State
Information in a Wireless Communication System

US7,006,848

Method and apparatus for time-aligning transmissions
from multiple base stations in a CDMA communication
system

US7,433,321

Signal acquisition in a wireless communication system

US8,068,530

Method of providing a gap indication during a sticky
assignment

US20060164993

Pilot signal transmission for an orthogonal frequency
division wireless communication system

US20090213950

Resource allocation for shared signaling channels

US20070211616

Method and apparatus for performing position
determination with a short circuit call flow

US7,974,639

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus that facilitates measurement
procedures in multicarrier operation*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

TW

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Controlling hand-off in a mobile node with two mobile IP
clients

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US7,020,465

AT2-115

Methods and apparatus for tunneling between different
addressing domains

US7,366,147

Methods and apparatus for extending mobile IP

US7,623,497

Methods and apparatus for aggregating MIP and AAA
messages

US7,564,824

Packet forwarding methods for use in handoffs

US20030193912

Multiple access wireless communications system using
a multisector configuration

US7,388,845

Beacon signaling in a wireless system

US6,985,498

CN; EP; HK; IN; KR

Synchronization Techniques for a Wireless System

US7,133,354

CA

Beacon signaling in a wireless system

US7,366,200

Methods and apparatus for determining, communicating US20060092881
and using information which can be used for interference
control purposes
US7,363,039

Power and timing control methods and apparatus

US7,778,643

Wireless timing and power control

US7,668,573*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

US20080182580; CA; EP
ARIB STD-T95

Method of creating and utilizing diversity in a multiple
carrier communication system

(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

QUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Method and apparatus for operating mobile nodes in
multiple states

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
CA2534851

備考（出願国名）REMARKSCN; EP; HK; IN; KR; RU; ZA

AT2-116

Seamless context switching for radio link protocol

US20080186920

MIMO transmission with explicit and implicit cyclic
delays

US20090197546

Method and apparatus for handoff between source andtarget access systems

US20080318575

Secondary synchronization codebook for E-UTRAN

US8,009,701

Data transmission via a relay station in a wirelesscommunication system

US20100097978

EP

Cell relay packet routing

US20100103861

TW

Device attachment and bearer activation using cell
relays

US20100103862

TW

Cell relay mobility procedures

US20100103845

TW

Cell relay protocol

US20100103864

TW

Data transmission in a TDMA system

US6,819,937

Selectively including allowed CSG list in page message

US20100195573

TW

Optimized inter-access point packet routing for IP relay
nodes

WO2010118428

US20100260109; TW*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

特許出願人
PATENT HOLDER

(Reference : Not applied in Japan)
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated *20

Split-cell relay application protocol

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
WO2010120826

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20100260096; TW

Split-cell relay packet routing

WO2010120827

US20100260126; TW

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

Mobile Station Assisted Soft Handoff in a CDMA Cellular US5,640,414
Communications System

AT2-117Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method

US5,588,043

Dual Channel Slotted Paging

US6,111,865

Method and Apparatus for Transmitting and Receiving
Data Multiplexed onto Multiple Code Channels,
Frequencies and Base Stations

US6,215,777

Method and Apparatus for Performing Mobile Station
Assisted Hard Handoff Using Error Correction Codes

US6,553,064*20: These patents are applied to the part defined by ARIB STD-T95 Ver.2.0.

ARIB STD-T95

Approved by the 86th Standard Assembly[Ver. 2.1]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US5,629,975

Method and Apparatus for Controlling Transmission
Power in a CDMA Cellular Mobile Telephone System

MY-110833-A

Comprehensive Mobile Communications Device
Registration Method

US5,588,043

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US5,621,784; US5,642,398

ARIB STD-T95(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

AT2-118

Approved by the 88th Standard Assembly(Reference : Not applied in Japan)[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

AT2-119

備考（出願国名）REMARKS
US20060109890

Dedicated reference signal

US20110280333

TW

Devices for determining a reference subframe anddetermining a mode

US20120082049

EP;CN;IN;KR

Reference signal configuration and relay downlink
control channel

WO2012048203

US20120087299;EPHybrid automatic repeat request feedback transmission
in a multi component-carrier communication systemusing scheduling request resources

WO2012061257

US20120134305;EP;IN;TW

Method and apparatus for rate matching with muting

WO2012061521

US20120113917;EP;AE;BR;CA;I
N;MY;PH;TH

Method and apparatus for specific absorption rate
backoff in power headroom report

WO2012061582

US20120147801;EP;AR;IN;KR;T
W

Inter-frequency measurement control in a multi-carriersystemWO2012064780

US20120113866;BR;IN

System and method for assisting in powering on
sleeping network entities

WO2013002825

US20120142328;IN

Carrier grouping for power headroom report

WO2012064872

US20120115537;INInterference randomization for uplink signaling

WO2012088444

US20120163159

Method and System for Data and Voice Transmission
Over Shared and Dedicated Channels

ARIB STD-T95

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US6,985,510

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT

[Ver. 2.2]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Cross-carrier/cross-subframe indication
in a multi-carrier wireless network
Method for Using Only Two Base Stations for
Determining the Position of a Mobile Subscriber in a
CDMA Cellular Telephone System

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US20110105050
US6,034,635

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

ARIB STD-T95(Reference : Not applied in Japan)

AT2-120

Approved by the 91st Standard Assembly(Reference : Not applied in Japan)[Ver. 3.0]
特許出願人
PATENT HOLDERQUALCOMM
Incorporated

発明の名称
NAME OF PATENT
Synchronization of wireless nodes

出願番号等
REGISTRATION NO./APPLICATION NO.
US8,374,163

備考（出願国名）REMARKS

AT2-121
ARIB STD-T95

ARIB STD-T95

Attachment 3

XGP specifications

Note:

This Document is reproduced without any modification from the XGP Forum
Technical Standard; “A-GN4.00-03-TS XGP Specifications” under theagreement with ARIB and XGP Forum.

XGP Forum Document
A-GN4.00-03-TS

Title: XGP Specifications
Version:03

Date:
XGP Forum Classification: Unrestricted
List of contents:
Abbreviations and Acronyms.
Chapter 0 Scope and Introduction.
Chapter 1 General
Chapter 2 System Overview
Chapter 3 Physical Channel Specification
Chapter 4 Individual Channel Specification
Chapter 5 Common Channel Specification
Chapter 6 Channel Assignment
Chapter 7 Message Format and Information Elements
Chapter 8 Sequence
Chapter 9 Access Phase
Chapter 10 Global mode
Annex X Regional Condition
Appendix A: Full Subcarrier Mode
Appendix B: Modulation
Appendix C: Training Sequence
Appendix D: TCCH Sequence
Appendix E: Network Interface Requirements
Appendix F: Improvement for CCH link budget

Number of pages: 737

XGP Forum
c/o Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB)
11F, Nittochi Bldg., 4-1, Kasumigaseki 1-choume, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0013, Japan
TEL +81-3-5510-8599
FAX +81-3-3592-1103© XGP Forum2010

History of Re v ised Ve rsions/Revis ions
Version01

Revision01

Date
August22, 2007
September13, 2007
October
26, 2007

01

02

01

03

01

04

April
3, 2009

OutlineApproved by 20th General Meeting.
Established
Approved by 22nd General Meeting.
Revised.
Approved by NWG on October 26, 2007.
Corrected typographical, grammatical, editorial, andclerical errors.
Approved by TWG on April 3, 2009.
Revised.

02

01

02

02

02

03

02

04

03

00

October
5, 2010April
26, 2011
January
12, 2012
November
14, 2012May
15, 2013

Approved by Letter Voting.
Revised.
Approved by 27th Extra General Meeting.
Revised.
Approved by Letter Voting.
Revised.
Approved by 29th General Meeting.
Revised.
Approved by Letter Voting.
Revised.

Remarks
1. The definition.
1.1. Version:
A major change such as changing of basic specifications or adding new sections that would be unable to achieve only withexisting technologies, or methods written into the former version. The change made to a new version shall only beauthorized by General Meeting.
1.2. Revision:
A minor change such as partial changing, or adding some words which shall not affect the basics. The change made to a
new revision shall be authorized by each WG, and reported to the latest General Meeting.

2. Copyright Notice.
XGP Forum reserves all rights concerning the copyright to this document. The XGP Forum reserves the right to modify oramend this document in its own discretion without notice.

3. IPR Policy.
This document adopts fully the IPR policy of XGP Forum specified separately on its website.

4. Limitation of Liability
NOTHING IN THIS DOCUMENT CREATES ANY WARRANTIES OF TITLE OR NONINFRINGEMENT WITHRESPECT TO ANY TECHNOLOGIES, STANDARDS OR SPECIFICATIONS REFERENCED OR INCORPORATEDINTO THIS DOCUMENT.
IN NO EVENT SHALL THE XGP FORUM OR ANY MEMBER BE LIABLE TO THE USER OR TO A THIRDPARTY FOR ANY CLAIM ARISING FROM OR RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING,WITHOUT LIMITATION, A CLAIM THAT SUCH USE INFRINGES A THIRD PARTY’S INTELLECTUAL
PROPERTY RIGHTS OR THAT IT FAILS TO COMPLY WITH APPLICABLE LAWS OR REGULATIONS. BY USE
OF THIS DOCUMENT, THE USER WAIVES ANY SUCH CLAIM AGAINST THE XGP FORUM AND ITSMEMBERS RELATING TO THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT.

Abbreviations and Acronyms ....................................................................................................... 39
Chapter 0 Scope and Introduction ............................................................................................... 43
Scope ...................................................................................................................................... 43
Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 43
Chapter 1 General ....................................................................................................................... 45
1.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 45
1.2 Application Scope .............................................................................................................. 45
1.3 Mandatory and Optional .................................................................................................... 46
1.4 Public Mode and Private Mode .......................................................................................... 46
Chapter 2 System Overview ........................................................................................................ 47
2.1 System Structure ............................................................................................................... 47
2.1.1 Mobile Station (MS) .................................................................................................... 47
2.1.2 Base Station (BS) ....................................................................................................... 47
2.1.3 Relay Station (RS)...................................................................................................... 47
2.2 Interface Definition ............................................................................................................. 48
2.3 Frequency Structure .......................................................................................................... 49
2.3.1 System Bandwidth (SBW) .......................................................................................... 49
2.3.2 Effective Channel Bandwidth (ECBW) ....................................................................... 49
2.3.3 Guard Bandwidth (GBW) ............................................................................................ 49
2.3.4 Frequency Structure Parameters ............................................................................... 50
2.4 Access Method .................................................................................................................. 51
2.4.1 Transmission Method ................................................................................................. 51
2.4.2 TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access) ...................................................................... 52
2.4.2.1 TDMA Slot........................................................................................................... 53
2.4.2.2 TDMA Frame ...................................................................................................... 53
2.4.2.3 Mandatory TDMA frame structure ....................................................................... 54
2.4.2.4 Limitation for expanded TDMA frame structure ................................................... 54
2.4.3 OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access) ........................................ 55
2.4.3.1 Subcarrier Spacing ............................................................................................. 56
2.4.3.2 Subchannel (SCH) .............................................................................................. 56
2.4.3.3 DC Carrier ........................................................................................................... 59
2.4.3.4 Guard Carrier ...................................................................................................... 59
2.4.4 OFDMA and TDMA .................................................................................................... 59
2.4.5 Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) Mode Coexistence with
OFDMA UL.......................................................................................................................... 60
2.5 Physical Resource Unit (PRU) ........................................................................................... 62
2.6 Frame Structure................................................................................................................. 63
A-GN4.00-03-TS

1

2.7 Full Subcarrier Mode ......................................................................................................... 65
2.8 Multiple Input and Multiple Output Control ......................................................................... 65
2.9 Protocol Model................................................................................................................... 66
2.9.1 Link Establishment Phase .......................................................................................... 66
2.9.2 Access Establishment Phase ..................................................................................... 66
2.9.3 Access Phase ............................................................................................................ 66
2.9.4 Optional Protocol Model ............................................................................................. 66
2.9.4.1 User plane........................................................................................................... 66
2.9.4.2 Control plane....................................................................................................... 66
2.10 Correspondence of PRU, Function Channel and Physical Channel ................................ 68
2.11 Service Description .......................................................................................................... 70
2.12 Protocol Structure ............................................................................................................ 70
Chapter 3 Physical Channel Specification ................................................................................... 71
3.1 Overview............................................................................................................................ 71
3.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer .................................................................. 72
3.2.1 OFDM Burst Structure ................................................................................................ 72
3.2.2 OFDM Symbol Structure for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing .......................................... 72
3.2.2.1 Guard Interval ..................................................................................................... 73
3.2.2.2 Windowing .......................................................................................................... 73
3.2.3 OFDM Parameters for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing ................................................... 74
3.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer ....................................................................... 77
3.3.1 SC Burst Structure ..................................................................................................... 77
3.3.2 SC Block Structure ..................................................................................................... 77
3.3.2.1 Guard Interval ..................................................................................................... 77
3.3.2.2 Pulse Shaping Filter ............................................................................................ 78
3.3.3 SC Parameters ........................................................................................................... 79
3.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer ........................................................................................................ 80
3.4.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame ................................................................................. 80
3.4.1.1 CRC .................................................................................................................... 81
3.4.1.2 Scrambling .......................................................................................................... 82
3.4.1.3 Encoding ............................................................................................................. 84
3.4.1.3.1 Error Correction Encoding ........................................................................... 85
3.4.1.3.1.1 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/2) (Mandatory)............................ 85
3.4.1.3.1.1.1 Convolutional Encoder .................................................................. 85
3.4.1.3.1.1.2 Puncturing Pattern ........................................................................ 85
3.4.1.3.1.2 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/3) (Optional) ............................... 86
3.4.1.3.1.2.1 Convolutional Encoder .................................................................. 86
A-GN4.00-03-TS2

3.4.1.3.1.3 Tail Biting Convolutional Code ............................................................. 87
3.4.1.3.1.4 Turbo Code (Optional).......................................................................... 88
3.4.1.3.1.4.1 Turbo Encoder .............................................................................. 88
3.4.1.3.1.4.2 Turbo Code Termination ............................................................... 89
3.4.1.3.1.4.3 Turbo Interleaver ........................................................................... 90
3.4.1.3.1.4.4 Puncturing pattern ......................................................................... 92
3.4.1.4 Bit-interleaving .................................................................................................... 95
3.4.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure ............................................................................... 95
3.4.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method ............................................................................. 96
3.4.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for OFDM................................................................ 97
3.4.1.4.4 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver .................................................................. 101
3.4.1.4.5 Bit-interleaving and Rate matching ............................................................ 101
3.4.1.4.5.1 Bit-interleaver Structure...................................................................... 101
3.4.1.4.5.2 Block Interleaver Method .................................................................... 101
3.4.1.4.5.3 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver........................................................... 102
3.4.1.5 Modulation Method ........................................................................................... 103
3.4.1.6 Precoding Method ............................................................................................. 103
3.4.1.6.1 STBC-MIMO .............................................................................................. 104
3.4.1.6.1.1 2 Layer STBC-MIMO .......................................................................... 104
3.4.1.6.1.2 4 Layer STBC-MIMO .......................................................................... 104
3.4.1.6.2 SM-MIMO .................................................................................................. 104
3.4.1.6.2.1 2 Layer SM-MIMO .............................................................................. 105
3.4.1.6.2.2 4 Layer SM-MIMO .............................................................................. 105
3.4.1.6.3 EMB-MIMO ................................................................................................ 106
3.4.1.6.3.1 Transmission Weight Calculation ....................................................... 106
3.4.1.6.3.2 2 Layer EMB-MIMO............................................................................ 107
3.4.1.6.3.3 4 Layer EMB-MIMO............................................................................ 107
3.4.1.6.4 Optional Precoding Method ....................................................................... 107
3.4.1.6.4.1 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port .......................... 107
3.4.1.6.4.2 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with BS-specificpilot ...................................................................................................................... 107
3.4.1.6.4.2.1 Precoding without CDD ............................................................... 108
3.4.1.6.4.2.2 Precoding for large delay CDD ................................................... 108
3.4.1.6.4.2.3 Codebook for precoding .............................................................. 109
3.4.1.6.4.3 Precoding for transmit diversity .......................................................... 109
3.4.1.6.4.4 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with MS-specificpilot ...................................................................................................................... 109
A-GN4.00-03-TS3

3.4.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU ...................................................................... 110
3.4.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method for CCCH, ANCH and CSCH ............................ 110
3.4.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH ........................................................... 111
3.4.1.7.2.1 Symbol Mapping without DTX Symbol ............................................... 111
3.4.1.7.2.2 Symbol Mapping with DTX Symbol .................................................... 112
3.4.1.7.3 Symbol Mapping Method for MIMO ........................................................... 113
3.4.1.7.3.1 Symbol Mapping Method for STBC-MIMO ......................................... 113
3.4.1.7.3.2 Symbol Mapping Method for SM-MIMO ............................................. 113
3.4.1.7.3.3 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO ........................................... 114
3.4.1.7.3.4 Symbol Mapping in case that p is not 0 .............................................. 114
3.4.1.7.4 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission of CC-HARQ ....................... 116
3.4.1.7.4.1 Symbol Mapping Method except for EMB-MIMO ............................... 116
3.4.1.7.4.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO ........................................... 117
3.4.1.7.4.3 Symbol Mapping Method in case of full subcarrier mode ................... 118
3.4.1.7.5 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU for Optional Physical Channel............... 120
3.4.1.7.5.1 Advanced Physical broadcast channel ............................................... 120
3.4.1.7.5.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel ....................... 120
3.4.1.7.5.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH ................................................................. 121
3.4.1.7.5.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel........................... 122
3.4.1.8 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding ........................................................... 123
3.4.2 Training Format for DL OFDM .................................................................................. 124
3.4.2.1 Training Format................................................................................................. 124
3.4.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH ............................................................................. 124
3.4.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH ......................................................................... 124
3.4.2.2 Training Sequence ............................................................................................ 125
3.4.2.3 Training Index ................................................................................................... 125
3.4.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH ........................................................................... 125
3.4.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH................................................................................ 125
3.4.2.3.2.1 Training Index for SISO ...................................................................... 125
3.4.2.3.2.2 Training Index for MIMO ..................................................................... 126
3.4.2.3.2.3 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO ...................................................... 126
3.4.2.4 Advanced Synchronization Signal..................................................................... 128
3.4.2.4.1 Advanced primary synchronization signal.................................................. 128
3.4.2.4.1.1 Sequence generation ......................................................................... 128
3.4.2.4.1.2 Mapping to resource units .................................................................. 128
3.4.2.4.2 Advanced secondary synchronization signal ............................................. 128
3.4.2.4.2.1 Sequence generation ......................................................................... 128
A-GN4.00-03-TS4

3.4.2.4.2.2 Mapping to resource elements ........................................................... 129
3.4.3 Pilot for DL OFDM .................................................................................................... 130
3.4.3.1 Pilot for DL CCCH ............................................................................................. 130
3.4.3.2 Pilot for DL ICH ................................................................................................. 130
3.4.3.3 Optional Pilots for DL OFDM............................................................................. 130
3.4.3.3.1 BS-specific pilots ....................................................................................... 130
3.4.3.3.1.1 Sequence generation ......................................................................... 130
3.4.3.3.1.2 Mapping to resource elements ........................................................... 131
3.4.3.3.2 MS-specific pilots ....................................................................................... 131
3.4.3.3.2.1 Sequence generation ......................................................................... 131
3.4.3.3.2.2 Mapping to resource elements ........................................................... 132
3.4.3.3.3 Positioning pilots........................................................................................ 133
3.4.3.3.3.1 Sequence generation ......................................................................... 133
3.4.3.3.3.2 Mapping to resource elements ........................................................... 133
3.4.3.3.3.3 Positioning pilot slot configuration ...................................................... 134
3.4.4 Training and Pilot Boosting ...................................................................................... 134
3.4.4.1 1 Layer Format SISO/SDMA ............................................................................. 134
3.4.4.2 2 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA ........................................................... 135
3.4.4.3 4 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA ........................................................... 137
3.4.4.4 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting .......................................................... 138
3.4.4.5 Optional Downlink Pilot boosting....................................................................... 138
3.4.5 Signal for DL OFDM ................................................................................................. 138
3.4.5.1 Encoding and Small Scrambling ....................................................................... 138
3.4.5.1.1 (8,4)-Hamming Coding .............................................................................. 139
3.4.5.1.2 Small Scrambling Pattern .......................................................................... 139
3.4.5.2 Modulation for Signal ........................................................................................ 140
3.4.5.3 Signal for Optional DL Physical Channel .......................................................... 140
3.4.5.3.1 Advanced Physical Broadcast Channel ..................................................... 140
3.4.5.3.1.1 Scrambling ......................................................................................... 140
3.4.5.3.1.2 Modulation.......................................................................................... 140
3.4.5.3.1.3 Layer mapping and precoding ............................................................ 141
3.4.5.3.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Indicator Channel ........................................... 141
3.4.5.3.2.1 Scrambling ......................................................................................... 141
3.4.5.3.2.2 Modulation.......................................................................................... 141
3.4.5.3.2.3 Layer mapping and precoding ............................................................ 141
3.4.5.3.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH ........................................................................ 142
3.4.5.3.3.1 ADECCH formats ............................................................................... 142
A-GN4.00-03-TS5

3.4.5.3.3.2 ADECCH multiplexing and scrambling ............................................... 142
3.4.5.3.3.3 Modulation .......................................................................................... 143
3.4.5.3.3.4 Layer mapping and precoding ............................................................ 143
3.4.5.3.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel .................................. 143
3.4.5.3.4.1 Modulation.......................................................................................... 144
3.4.5.3.4.2 Resource group alignment, layer mapping and precoding ................. 145
3.4.6 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard carrier) for DL OFDM .................................................. 145
3.4.7 TCCH Format for DL OFDM ..................................................................................... 145
3.4.8 PRU Structure for DL OFDM .................................................................................... 146
3.4.8.1 CCH for DL OFDM ............................................................................................ 146
3.4.8.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH................................................................ 146
3.4.8.1.2 ICH for DL OFDM ...................................................................................... 147
3.4.8.1.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH ........................................................ 147
3.4.8.1.3 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH ................................................................ 152
3.4.8.1.4 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH ................................................................ 161
3.5 UL OFDM PHY Layer ...................................................................................................... 162
3.5.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame ............................................................................... 162
3.5.1.1 CRC .................................................................................................................. 162
3.5.1.2 Scrambling ........................................................................................................ 162
3.5.1.3 Encoding ........................................................................................................... 162
3.5.1.4 Bit-interleaving .................................................................................................. 163
3.5.1.5 Modulation Method ........................................................................................... 163
3.5.1.6 Precoding Method ............................................................................................. 163
3.5.1.6.1 MS Transmission Antenna Switching ........................................................ 163
3.5.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU ...................................................................... 164
3.5.1.8 Summary of OFDM UL Channel Coding ........................................................... 164
3.5.1.9 Training for UL OFDM ....................................................................................... 164
3.5.1.10 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission frame antenna switching ............ 164
3.5.1.11 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission slot antenna switching ................ 164
3.5.2 Pilot for UL OFDM .................................................................................................... 164
3.5.3 Signal for UL OFDM ................................................................................................. 164
3.5.4 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard Carrier) for UL OFDM ................................................. 164
3.5.5 TCCH Format for UL OFDM ..................................................................................... 165
3.5.5.1 TCCH Format.................................................................................................... 165
3.5.5.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot ............................................................... 165
3.5.6 PRU Structure for UL OFDM .................................................................................... 166
3.5.6.1 CCH for UL OFDM ............................................................................................ 166
A-GN4.00-03-TS6

3.5.6.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH................................................................ 166
3.5.6.1.2 OFDM PRU Structure for TCCH ................................................................ 166
3.5.6.2 ICH for UL OFDM ............................................................................................. 168
3.5.6.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH ................................................................ 168
3.5.6.2.2 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH ................................................................ 168
3.5.6.2.3 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH ................................................................ 171
3.6 UL SC PHY Layer ............................................................................................................ 171
3.6.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame ............................................................................... 171
3.6.1.1 CRC .................................................................................................................. 172
3.6.1.2 Scrambling ........................................................................................................ 172
3.6.1.3 Encoding ........................................................................................................... 173
3.6.1.4 Bit-interleaving .................................................................................................. 173
3.6.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure ............................................................................. 173
3.6.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method ........................................................................... 173
3.6.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for UL SC.............................................................. 173
3.6.1.4.4 Rate Matching Method............................................................................... 175
3.6.1.4.5 Output-bits After Bit-interleaver ................................................................. 182
3.6.1.5 Modulation Method ........................................................................................... 183
3.6.1.6 Symbol Mapping Method for Data Block ........................................................... 183
3.6.1.6.1 Data Block ................................................................................................. 184
3.6.1.6.2 Data Block with Virtual GI Extension ......................................................... 184
3.6.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst .............................................................. 186
3.6.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method without DTX Symbol .......................................... 186
3.6.1.7.1.1 Symbol Mapping Method with DTX Symbol ....................................... 187
3.6.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission (CC-HARQ) ........................ 187
3.6.1.8 Summary of SC UL Channel Coding ................................................................ 189
3.6.1.9 Optional Channel Coding for PHY Frame ......................................................... 190
3.6.1.9.1 CRC ........................................................................................................... 190
3.6.1.9.2 Channel coding .......................................................................................... 190
3.6.1.9.2.1 Tail biting convolutional coding........................................................... 190
3.6.1.9.2.2 Turbo coding ...................................................................................... 190
3.6.1.9.3 Rate matching ........................................................................................... 191
3.6.1.9.4 Code block concatenation ......................................................................... 191
3.6.1.9.5 Channel Coding of UL Channels ............................................................... 191
3.6.1.9.5.1 Coding of data and control information on AUEDCH .......................... 191
3.6.1.9.5.2 Coding of Uplink control information on AUANCH .............................. 191
3.6.1.9.5.3 Uplink control information on AUEDCH without traffic data ................ 192
A-GN4.00-03-TS7

3.6.2 Training for UL SC.................................................................................................... 192
3.6.2.1 Training Block Format ....................................................................................... 192
3.6.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH ............................................................................. 192
3.6.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH ......................................................................... 193
3.6.2.2 Training Sequence ............................................................................................ 193
3.6.2.3 Training Index ................................................................................................... 193
3.6.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH ........................................................................... 193
3.6.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH................................................................................ 194
3.6.3 Pilot for UL SC ......................................................................................................... 194
3.6.3.1 Pilot Index ......................................................................................................... 195
3.6.3.2 Pilot for CCCH .................................................................................................. 195
3.6.3.3 Pilot for ICH....................................................................................................... 195
3.6.3.3.1 Pilot for ANCH ........................................................................................... 195
3.6.3.3.2 Pilot for EXCH ........................................................................................... 195
3.6.3.3.3 Pilot for CSCH ........................................................................................... 196
3.6.3.4 Advanced Optional Pilot Signals ....................................................................... 196
3.6.3.4.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal ......................................................... 196
3.6.3.4.1.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal sequence.................................. 196
3.6.3.4.1.2 Mapping to physical resources ........................................................... 197
3.6.3.4.2 Advanced Sounding Pilot signal ................................................................ 197
3.6.3.4.2.1 Advanced Souding Pilot signal sequence .......................................... 197
3.6.3.4.3 Mapping to physical resources .................................................................. 197
3.6.4 Signal for UL SC....................................................................................................... 198
3.6.4.1 Signal Encoding ................................................................................................ 198
3.6.4.1.1 (8,4) Hamming Encoding ........................................................................... 199
3.6.4.1.2 Small Scrambling ....................................................................................... 199
3.6.4.2 Modulation for Signal ........................................................................................ 199
3.6.5 Null (DTX) for UL SC ................................................................................................ 200
3.6.6 TCCH for UL SC....................................................................................................... 201
3.6.6.1.1 TCCH Format ............................................................................................ 201
3.6.6.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot ............................................................... 202
3.6.6.3 ATCCH for UL SC ............................................................................................. 202
3.6.6.3.1 Time and frequency structure .................................................................... 202
3.6.6.3.2 Access sequence generation..................................................................... 204
3.6.6.3.3 Baseband signal generation ...................................................................... 205
3.6.7 SC Burst Structure for UL SC ................................................................................... 205
3.6.7.1 CCH for UL SC ................................................................................................. 205
A-GN4.00-03-TS8

3.6.7.1.1 SC Burst Structure for CCCH .................................................................... 205
3.6.7.1.2 SC Burst Structure for TCCH ..................................................................... 206
3.6.7.2 ICH for UL SC ................................................................................................... 207
3.6.7.2.1 SC Burst Structure for ANCH .................................................................... 207
3.6.7.2.2 SC Burst Structure for EXCH ..................................................................... 208
3.6.7.2.3 SC Burst Structure for CSCH .................................................................... 211
3.6.7.3 CRC Unit for UL SC .......................................................................................... 214
3.6.7.4 Transmission Timing of SC Burst for UL SC ..................................................... 214
3.6.7.5 Optional SC Burst Structure for UL SC ............................................................. 215
Chapter 4 Individual Channel Specification ............................................................................... 216
4.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 216
4.1.1 Usage of PRU .......................................................................................................... 216
4.1.1.1 Common Channel (CCH) .................................................................................. 217
4.1.1.2 Individual Channel (ICH) ................................................................................... 217
4.1.1.2.1 PRU Numbering ........................................................................................ 218
4.1.1.2.2 PRU Numbering for Asymmetric frame...................................................... 219
4.1.2 QoS Class (Access Mode) ....................................................................................... 220
4.1.2.1 Fast Access Channel Based on Map (FM-Mode) ............................................. 220
4.1.2.2 High Quality Channel Based on Carrier Sensing (QS-Mode)............................ 220
4.1.3 XGP Protocol Outline ............................................................................................... 221
4.1.3.1 Frame Structure ................................................................................................ 221
4.1.3.2 Protocol Structure ............................................................................................. 222
4.2 Functional Channel .......................................................................................................... 224
4.2.1 Channel Composition ............................................................................................... 224
4.2.1.1 Individual Control Channel (ICCH) .................................................................... 225
4.2.1.2 EXCH Control Channel (ECCH)........................................................................ 225
4.2.1.3 EXCH Data Channel (EDCH) ............................................................................ 225
4.2.1.4 CSCH Data Channel (CDCH) ........................................................................... 226
4.2.1.5 Traffic Channel (TCH) ....................................................................................... 226
4.2.1.6 Accompanied Control Channel (ACCH) ............................................................ 226
4.3 Optional Functional Control Channel ............................................................................... 226
4.3.1 DL Control Channel Composition ............................................................................. 227
4.3.1.1 Advanced Downlink EXCH Control Channel (ADECCH) .................................. 227
4.3.1.1.1 Function of ADECCH ................................................................................. 227
4.3.1.1.2 Blind detection for ADECCH ...................................................................... 227
4.3.1.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel (ADEFICH) ................... 228
4.3.1.3 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel (ADHICH) ........................ 228
A-GN4.00-03-TS

9

4.3.2 Uplink Control Channel Composition........................................................................ 228
4.3.2.1 AUANCH/RCH .................................................................................................. 228
4.3.2.2 AUANCH/ACKCH ............................................................................................. 228
4.3.2.3 AUANCH/CQICH .............................................................................................. 228
4.4 PHY Layer Structure and Frame Format ......................................................................... 229
4.4.1 PHY Frame Structure ............................................................................................... 229
4.4.1.1 ANCH/ICCH ...................................................................................................... 230
4.4.1.2 ANCH/ECCH..................................................................................................... 231
4.4.1.3 EXCH/EDCH ..................................................................................................... 232
4.4.1.3.1 PRU Combining ......................................................................................... 233
4.4.1.4 CSCH/TCH ....................................................................................................... 234
4.4.1.5 CSCH/CDCH .................................................................................................... 235
4.4.1.6 AUANCH/RCH .................................................................................................. 235
4.4.1.7 AUANCH/ACKCH ............................................................................................. 237
4.4.1.8 AUANCH/CQICH .............................................................................................. 238
4.4.2 Signal Symbol .......................................................................................................... 239
4.4.2.1 Signal Symbol Structure.................................................................................... 239
4.4.3 PHY Header ............................................................................................................. 240
4.4.3.1 PHY Header Structure ...................................................................................... 240
4.4.3.1.1 ANCH/ECCH PHY Header Structure ......................................................... 240
4.4.3.1.2 ANCH/ICCH PHY Header Structure .......................................................... 241
4.4.3.1.3 CSCH/CDCH PHY Header Structure......................................................... 242
4.4.3.1.4 CSCH/TCH PHY Header Structure............................................................ 242
4.4.3.1.5 ECCH PHY Header Structure .................................................................... 243
4.4.3.2 ECCH................................................................................................................ 244
4.4.3.2.1 CRC Error Happening on the ANCH.......................................................... 244
4.4.4 PHY Payload ............................................................................................................ 246
4.4.4.1 PHY Payload Structure ..................................................................................... 246
4.4.5 PHY Trailer............................................................................................................... 246
4.4.5.1 CRC .................................................................................................................. 246
4.4.5.2 TAIL .................................................................................................................. 246
4.4.6 PHY Control Layer ................................................................................................... 246
4.4.6.1 Channel Identifier (CI) ....................................................................................... 246
4.4.6.1.1 CI of ANCH ................................................................................................ 247
4.4.6.1.2 CI of CSCH ................................................................................................ 247
4.4.6.2 Shift Direction (SD) ........................................................................................... 247
4.4.6.3 ANCH Power Control (APC) ............................................................................. 248
A-GN4.00-03-TS

10

4.4.6.4 Power Control (PC) ........................................................................................... 248
4.4.6.5 MCS Indicator (MI) and MCS Request (MR) ..................................................... 249
4.4.6.5.1 MI and MR in ECCH .................................................................................. 250
4.4.6.5.1.1 MI Indication Timing of DL .................................................................. 252
4.4.6.5.1.2 MI Indication Timing of UL .................................................................. 253
4.4.6.5.2 MI and MR in CSCH .................................................................................. 254
4.4.6.5.2.1 MI Indication Timing of DL .................................................................. 254
4.4.6.5.2.2 MI Indication Timing of UL .................................................................. 254
4.4.6.6 Acknowledgement (ACK) .................................................................................. 255
4.4.6.6.1 ACK in ECCH ............................................................................................ 255
4.4.6.6.1.1 Response Timing of DL ACK.............................................................. 256
4.4.6.6.1.2 Response Timing of UL ACK.............................................................. 257
4.4.6.6.2 ACK in CDCH ............................................................................................ 257
4.4.6.6.2.1 Response Timing of DL ACK.............................................................. 257
4.4.6.6.2.2 Response Timing of UL ACK.............................................................. 258
4.4.6.6.3 ACK in AUANCH/ACKCH .......................................................................... 258
4.4.6.6.3.1 Response Timing of UL ACK.............................................................. 258
4.4.6.6.3.2 ACK/NACK bundling .......................................................................... 259
4.4.6.6.3.3 ACK/NACK multiplexing ..................................................................... 259
4.4.6.6.4 ACK in ADHICH......................................................................................... 261
4.4.6.6.4.1 Response Timing of DL ACK.............................................................. 261
4.4.6.7 Channel quality report ....................................................................................... 261
4.4.6.7.1 CQI definition ............................................................................................. 262
4.4.6.7.2 PMI definition ............................................................................................. 263
4.4.6.7.3 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on CQICH .................................................. 263
4.4.6.8 MAP .................................................................................................................. 266
4.4.6.8.1 Response Timing of MAP .......................................................................... 268
4.4.6.9 Validity (V)......................................................................................................... 269
4.4.6.9.1 V Indication Timing of DL........................................................................... 273
4.4.6.9.2 V Indication Timing of UL........................................................................... 274
4.4.6.10 HARQ Cancel (HC) ......................................................................................... 275
4.4.6.10.1 HC Indication Timing of DL ...................................................................... 275
4.4.6.10.2 HC Indication Timing of UL ...................................................................... 277
4.4.6.11 Request Channel (RCH) ................................................................................. 278
4.4.6.11.1 UL Data Size Notification ......................................................................... 278
4.4.6.11.2 Transmission Power Margin Notification .................................................. 279
4.4.6.12 Request Channel (RCH) ................................................................................. 279
A-GN4.00-03-TS

11

4.4.6.12.1 Optional UL Data Size Notification........................................................... 279
4.4.6.12.2 Advanced Transmission Power Margin Notification (ATPMN) Report ..... 280
4.4.6.13 ANCH MCS Indicator (AMI) ............................................................................ 281
4.4.6.14 ANCH MCS Request (AMR) ........................................................................... 282
4.4.6.15 MIMO type for EXCH (MT) .............................................................................. 282
4.4.6.16 Stream Indicator for EXCH (SI) ....................................................................... 283
4.4.6.17 MIMO type for EXCH (SR) .............................................................................. 283
4.4.6.18 Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH (BI) .................................................................. 283
4.4.7 PHY Control Layer for ADECCH .............................................................................. 285
4.4.7.1 ADECI format 0 ................................................................................................. 285
4.4.7.1.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation ................................................... 285
4.4.7.1.2 Hopping flag .............................................................................................. 285
4.4.7.1.3 Resource unit assignment and hopping resource allocation ...................... 285
4.4.7.1.4 Modulation and coding scheme and redundancy version .......................... 286
4.4.7.1.5 Advanced New Data Indicator (ANDI) ....................................................... 286
4.4.7.1.6 TPC command for scheduled AUEDCH .................................................... 286
4.4.7.1.7 Cyclic shift for DM RS ................................................................................ 286
4.4.7.1.8 UL index .................................................................................................... 286
4.4.7.1.9 Downlink assignment index for uplink control signaling ............................. 287
4.4.7.1.10 CQI request ............................................................................................. 287
4.4.7.2 ADECI format 1 ................................................................................................. 288
4.4.7.2.1 Resource allocation header ....................................................................... 288
4.4.7.2.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 288
4.4.7.2.3 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 288
4.4.7.2.4 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 288
4.4.7.2.5 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 289
4.4.7.2.6 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 289
4.4.7.2.7 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 289
4.4.7.2.8 Downlink assignment index in downlink control signaling .......................... 289
4.4.7.3 ADECI format 1A .............................................................................................. 289
4.4.7.3.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation ................................................... 289
4.4.7.3.2 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag ............................................... 290
4.4.7.3.3 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 290
4.4.7.3.4 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 290
4.4.7.3.5 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 290
4.4.7.3.6 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 290
4.4.7.3.7 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 290
A-GN4.00-03-TS

12

4.4.7.3.8 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 290
4.4.7.3.9 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling ........................ 290
4.4.7.4 ADECI format 1B .............................................................................................. 291
4.4.7.4.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag ............................................... 291
4.4.7.4.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 291
4.4.7.4.3 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 291
4.4.7.4.4 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 291
4.4.7.4.5 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 291
4.4.7.4.6 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 291
4.4.7.4.7 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 291
4.4.7.4.8 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling ........................ 291
4.4.7.4.9 TPMI information for precoding ................................................................. 292
4.4.7.4.10 PMI confirmation for precoding ................................................................ 292
4.4.7.5 ADECI format 1C .............................................................................................. 292
4.4.7.5.1 Gap value .................................................................................................. 292
4.4.7.5.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 292
4.4.7.5.3 Transport block size index ......................................................................... 292
4.4.7.6 ADECI format 1D .............................................................................................. 292
4.4.7.6.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag ............................................... 293
4.4.7.6.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 293
4.4.7.6.3 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 293
4.4.7.6.4 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 293
4.4.7.6.5 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 293
4.4.7.6.6 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 293
4.4.7.6.7 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 293
4.4.7.6.8 Downlink assignment index for DL control signaling .................................. 293
4.4.7.6.9 TPMI information for precoding ................................................................. 293
4.4.7.6.10 Downlink power offset.............................................................................. 294
4.4.7.7 ADECI format 2 ................................................................................................. 294
4.4.7.7.1 Resource allocation header ....................................................................... 294
4.4.7.7.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 294
4.4.7.7.3 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 294
4.4.7.7.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling ........................ 294
4.4.7.7.5 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 294
4.4.7.7.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag ..................................................... 295
4.4.7.7.7 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 295
4.4.7.7.8 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 295
A-GN4.00-03-TS

13

4.4.7.7.9 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 295
4.4.7.7.10 Precoding information .............................................................................. 295
4.4.7.8 ADECI format 2A .............................................................................................. 296
4.4.7.8.1 Resource allocation header ....................................................................... 296
4.4.7.8.2 Resource unit assignment ......................................................................... 296
4.4.7.8.3 TPC command for AUANCH ..................................................................... 296
4.4.7.8.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling ........................ 296
4.4.7.8.5 HARQ process number.............................................................................. 296
4.4.7.8.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag ..................................................... 296
4.4.7.8.7 Modulation and coding scheme ................................................................. 296
4.4.7.8.8 ANDI .......................................................................................................... 297
4.4.7.8.9 Redundancy version .................................................................................. 297
4.4.7.8.10 Precoding information .............................................................................. 297
4.4.7.9 ADECI format 3 ................................................................................................. 297
4.4.7.9.1 TPC command........................................................................................... 297
4.4.7.10 ADECI format 3A ............................................................................................ 297
4.4.7.10.1 TPC command ......................................................................................... 298
4.4.8 Summary of PHY Frame Format .............................................................................. 298
4.5 MAC Layer Structure and Frame Format......................................................................... 300
4.5.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 300
4.5.1.1 Format Regulations........................................................................................... 300
4.5.1.2 MAC Frame Composition .................................................................................. 301
4.5.2 MAC Frame Format.................................................................................................. 302
4.5.2.1 MAC Frame Structure ....................................................................................... 303
4.5.2.1.1 ICCH, EDCH and CDCH ........................................................................... 303
4.5.2.1.2 TCH ........................................................................................................... 303
4.5.2.1.3 ACCH ........................................................................................................ 304
4.5.2.1.3.1 Frame Structure ................................................................................. 304
4.5.2.1.3.2 ACCH Layer 2 Frame Signal Structure .............................................. 304
4.5.2.2 MAC Header ..................................................................................................... 307
4.5.2.2.1 Each Field of MAC Header ........................................................................ 309
4.5.2.2.1.1 Frame Division Information (B) ........................................................... 309
4.5.2.2.1.2 Data Type (CD) .................................................................................. 310
4.5.2.2.1.3 Data Part Sharing (MD) ...................................................................... 310
4.5.2.2.1.4 Bit of Payload Length Identification (F) ............................................... 311
4.5.2.2.1.5 QCS-ID (QI)........................................................................................ 311
4.5.2.2.1.6 Sequence Number (N) ....................................................................... 311
A-GN4.00-03-TS

14

4.5.2.2.1.7 Index (IX)............................................................................................ 312
4.5.2.2.1.8 Data Part Length (L) ........................................................................... 312
4.5.2.2.1.9 User Data Length (Ln) ........................................................................ 313
4.5.2.2.1.10 Information Area (DATA) .................................................................. 313
4.5.2.3 MAC Payload .................................................................................................... 313
4.5.2.3.1 Upper Layer Data ...................................................................................... 313
4.5.2.3.2 MAC Control Information ........................................................................... 314
4.5.3 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation ......................................................... 314
4.5.3.1 Upper Layer Data Segmentation ....................................................................... 314
4.5.3.2 MAC Frame Segmentation in case of Retransmission ...................................... 315
4.5.3.3 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload ...................... 316
4.5.3.4 MAC Frame Concatenation............................................................................... 317
4.5.4 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation ......................................................... 318
4.5.5 MAC Control Layer ................................................................................................... 319
4.5.5.1 MAC Control Protocol ....................................................................................... 320
4.5.5.1.1 Receive Ready (RR) .................................................................................. 320
4.5.5.1.2 Receive Not Ready (RNR) ......................................................................... 321
4.5.5.1.3 Frame Reject (FRMR) ............................................................................... 322
4.5.5.1.4 Selective Reject (SREJ) ............................................................................ 322
4.5.5.1.5 Reject (REJ) .............................................................................................. 323
4.5.5.2 Control Operation Elements .............................................................................. 323
4.5.5.2.1 Poll bit ........................................................................................................ 323
4.5.5.2.2 Variables.................................................................................................... 324
4.5.5.2.2.1 The range of a sequence number and variable .................................. 324
4.5.5.2.2.2 Send state variable V(S) .................................................................... 324
4.5.5.2.2.3 Acknowledge state variable V(A)........................................................ 324
4.5.5.2.2.4 Send sequence number N(S) ............................................................. 324
4.5.5.2.2.5 Receive state variable V(R) ................................................................ 324
4.5.5.2.2.6 Receive sequence number N(R) ........................................................ 324
4.5.5.2.3 Timers........................................................................................................ 324
4.5.5.2.3.1 Response acknowledge timer T1 ....................................................... 324
4.5.5.2.3.2 Response transfer timer T2 ................................................................ 325
4.5.5.2.3.3 Peer station busy supervisory timer T3 .............................................. 325
4.5.5.2.3.4 Link alive check timer T4 .................................................................... 325
4.5.5.3 Access Establishment Phase Control Protocol ................................................. 325
4.6 Optional MAC Layer Structure and sub-layer .................................................................. 325
4.6.1 Overview .................................................................................................................. 325
A-GN4.00-03-TS

15

4.6.2 MAC sub-layer1 (MSL1) ........................................................................................... 325
4.6.3 MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2) ........................................................................................... 328
4.6.3.1 TMD PDU.......................................................................................................... 329
4.6.3.2 UMD PDU ......................................................................................................... 329
4.6.3.3 AMD PDU ......................................................................................................... 329
4.6.3.4 AMD PDU segment........................................................................................... 330
4.6.3.5 State variables parameter and timers ............................................................... 330
4.6.4 MAC sublayer 3 (MSL3) ........................................................................................... 332
4.6.4.1 Overview ........................................................................................................... 332
4.6.4.2 UL Data Transfer Procedures ........................................................................... 333
4.6.4.3 DL Data Transfer Procedures ........................................................................... 333
4.6.4.4 MSL 3 chuck ..................................................................................................... 334
4.6.4.5 Header Compression and Decompression ....................................................... 334
4.6.4.6 Ciphering and Deciphering................................................................................ 335
4.6.4.7 Integrity Protection and Verification .................................................................. 335
4.6.4.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data ....................... 335
4.6.4.9 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................... 335
4.6.4.10 Formats ........................................................................................................... 336
4.6.4.10.1 General .................................................................................................... 336
4.6.4.11 Parameters ..................................................................................................... 336
4.6.4.12 State variables ................................................................................................ 336
4.6.4.13 Timers ............................................................................................................. 337
4.6.4.14 Constants ........................................................................................................ 337
Chapter 5 Common Channel Specification ................................................................................ 338
5.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 338
5.2 Common Channel (CCH)................................................................................................. 338
5.2.1 Logical Common Channel (LCCH) ........................................................................... 340
5.2.2 Definition of Superframe ........................................................................................... 341
5.2.3 Superframe Structure of DL LCCH ........................................................................... 341
5.2.3.1 LCCH Interval Value (n) .................................................................................... 341
5.2.3.2 Frame Basic Unit Length (nSUB) ........................................................................ 342
5.2.3.3 Number of Same Paging Groups (nSG) ............................................................. 342
5.2.3.4 PCH Number (nPCH) .......................................................................................... 342
5.2.3.5 Paging Grouping Factor (nGROUP) ...................................................................... 342
5.2.3.6 Battery Saving Cycle Maximum value (nBS) ...................................................... 342
5.2.3.7 The Relationship Among Profile Data ............................................................... 343
5.2.3.8 Paging Group Calculation Rules ....................................................................... 343
A-GN4.00-03-TS

16

5.2.3.9 Optional Paging Group Calculation Rules ......................................................... 344
5.2.3.10 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH ........................................................ 344
5.2.4 Structure of UL LCCH .............................................................................................. 345
5.2.5 Structure of DL LCCH .............................................................................................. 345
5.2.6 LCCH Multiplexing.................................................................................................... 346
5.2.6.1 When PCH Paging Groups Being Independent ................................................ 347
5.2.6.2 When PCH Paging Groups Being Inter-related ................................................. 347
5.3 PHY Frame Format ......................................................................................................... 348
5.3.1 BCCH ....................................................................................................................... 348
5.3.2 PCH.......................................................................................................................... 349
5.3.3 TCCH ....................................................................................................................... 349
5.3.4 SCCH ....................................................................................................................... 349
5.3.4.1 DL SCCH .......................................................................................................... 349
5.3.4.2 UL SCCH for OFDMA ....................................................................................... 350
5.3.4.3 UL SCCH for SC ............................................................................................... 350
5.4 Control Field Format ........................................................................................................ 351
5.4.1 Channel Identifier (CI) .............................................................................................. 351
5.4.2 BS Information (BS-Info) .......................................................................................... 351
5.4.2.1 Base Station ID (BSID) ..................................................................................... 352
5.4.2.1.1 System Type.............................................................................................. 352
5.4.2.1.2 Operator ID ................................................................................................ 352
5.4.2.1.3 System Additional ID ................................................................................. 352
5.4.2.1.3.1 Paging Area Number .......................................................................... 352
5.4.2.1.3.2 Sequence Number ............................................................................. 352
5.4.2.2 BS Additional ID ................................................................................................ 352
5.4.3 Common Control Information (CCI) .......................................................................... 353
5.4.3.1 Absolute Slot Number ....................................................................................... 353
5.4.4 Mobile Station ID (MSID) .......................................................................................... 353
5.5 MSG Field........................................................................................................................ 354
5.5.1 Message Type List ................................................................................................... 354
5.5.2 MSG (BCCH) ........................................................................................................... 355
5.5.2.1 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message........................................ 355
5.5.2.2 "System Information Broadcasting" Message ................................................... 362
5.5.2.3 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message .................................................. 365
5.5.3 MSG (Optional BCCH) ............................................................................................. 366
5.5.3.1 MSG (BCCH) .................................................................................................... 366
5.5.4 MSG (PCH) .............................................................................................................. 367
A-GN4.00-03-TS

17

5.5.4.1 “No Paging” Message ....................................................................................... 369
5.5.4.2 "Paging Type 1" Message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID) .......................... 371
5.5.4.3 "Paging Type 2" Message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID) .......................... 373
5.5.4.4 "Paging Type 3" Message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID) .......................... 375
5.5.4.5 "Paging Type 4" Message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID) ..................... 377
5.5.4.6 "Paging Type 5" Message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID) ..................... 380
5.5.4.7 "Paging Type 6" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits' Paging ID) .. 382
5.5.4.8 "Paging Type 7" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits' Paging ID) .. 385
5.5.5 MSG (Optional PCCH) ............................................................................................. 387
5.5.6 MSG (SCCH) ........................................................................................................... 388
5.5.6.1 DL SCCH .......................................................................................................... 388
5.5.6.1.1 "Idle" Message ........................................................................................... 389
5.5.6.1.2 "LCH Assignment 1" Message ................................................................... 390
5.5.6.1.3 "LCH Assignment 2" Message ................................................................... 394
5.5.6.1.4 "LCH Assignment 3" Message ................................................................... 399
5.5.6.1.5 "LCH Assignment Standby" Message........................................................ 404
5.5.6.1.6 "LCH Assignment Reject" Message........................................................... 409
5.5.6.2 UL SCCH .......................................................................................................... 414
5.5.6.2.1 "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message ................................................... 415
Chapter 6 Channel Assignment ................................................................................................. 417
6.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 417
6.2 Link Establishment Control .............................................................................................. 417
6.3 Channel Assignment Control ........................................................................................... 419
6.4 Connection Control .......................................................................................................... 420
6.4.1 FM-Mode .................................................................................................................. 420
6.4.1.1 Connection Control ........................................................................................... 420
6.4.1.1.1 Access Timing ........................................................................................... 422
6.4.1.1.1.1 Overview ............................................................................................ 422
6.4.1.1.1.2 5ms frame unit.................................................................................... 422
6.4.1.1.1.3 2.5ms frame unit................................................................................. 424
6.4.1.1.1.4 10ms frame unit.................................................................................. 425
6.4.1.1.1.5 MS processing capabilities ................................................................. 427
6.4.1.1.2 Bandwidth Request by MS ........................................................................ 428
6.4.1.1.3 DL EXCH Holding Duration ....................................................................... 428
6.4.1.2 Channel Selection ............................................................................................. 429
6.4.1.2.1 Vacant PRU Judgment by UL Carrier Sensing .......................................... 429
6.4.1.2.2 ANCH Allocation ........................................................................................ 430
A-GN4.00-03-TS

18

6.4.1.2.3 EXCH Allocation ........................................................................................ 430
6.4.2 QS-Mode .................................................................................................................. 431
6.4.2.1 Channel Selection ............................................................................................. 431
6.4.2.1.1 CSCH Allocation ........................................................................................ 431
6.5 Radio State Management ................................................................................................ 432
6.5.1 Idle State .................................................................................................................. 433
6.5.2 Active State .............................................................................................................. 434
6.5.3 Sleep State............................................................................................................... 435
6.6 Optional Radio State Management .................................................................................. 436
6.6.1 Idle State .................................................................................................................. 437
6.6.2 Active State .............................................................................................................. 437
6.7 ICH continuation transmission ......................................................................................... 438
6.8 Optional Random access procedure................................................................................ 438
6.9 Summary of Parameters .................................................................................................. 440
Chapter 7 Message Format and Information Elements .............................................................. 442
7.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 442
7.2 Message Format.............................................................................................................. 442
7.2.1 Format Regulations .................................................................................................. 442
7.2.2 Message Type .......................................................................................................... 443
7.2.2.1 Link Setup Request ........................................................................................... 444
7.2.2.2 Link Setup Request (SC) .................................................................................. 445
7.2.2.3 Link Setup Response ........................................................................................ 446
7.2.2.4 Extension Function Request ............................................................................. 447
7.2.2.5 Extension Function Response .......................................................................... 448
7.2.2.6 Connection Request ......................................................................................... 449
7.2.2.7 Connection Response ....................................................................................... 450
7.2.2.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation ............................................................... 451
7.2.2.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication .................................................................... 452
7.2.2.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request .................................................................... 453
7.2.2.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection .................................................................. 454
7.2.2.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request ................................................................ 455
7.2.2.13 TDMA Slot Limitation Request ........................................................................ 456
7.2.2.14 CQI Report ...................................................................................................... 456
7.2.2.15 CQI Report Indication ..................................................................................... 457
7.2.2.16 Additional LCH Confirmation ........................................................................... 457
7.2.2.17 Additional LCH Indication ................................................................................ 458
7.2.2.18 Additional QCS Request ................................................................................. 458
A-GN4.00-03-TS

19

7.2.2.19 Additional QCS Request Indication ................................................................. 459
7.2.2.20 Additional QCS Response .............................................................................. 459
7.2.2.21 Additional QCS Rejection................................................................................ 460
7.2.2.22 Additional QCS Re-request ............................................................................. 460
7.2.2.23 Connection Release ........................................................................................ 461
7.2.2.24 Connection Release Acknowledgement.......................................................... 462
7.2.2.25 QCS Release .................................................................................................. 462
7.2.2.26 QCS Release Acknowledgement .................................................................... 463
7.2.2.27 Authentication Information 1 ........................................................................... 463
7.2.2.28 Authentication Information 2 ........................................................................... 464
7.2.2.29 Encryption Key Indication................................................................................ 464
7.2.2.30 QCS Status Enquiry Response ....................................................................... 465
7.2.2.31 QCS Status Enquiry Request.......................................................................... 465
7.3 Information Element Format ............................................................................................ 466
7.3.1 Format Regulations .................................................................................................. 466
7.3.2 Single Octet Information Element Identifier .............................................................. 467
7.3.2.1 Channel Type.................................................................................................... 467
7.3.2.2 Connection Type ............................................................................................... 468
7.3.2.3 Extension Function Sequence .......................................................................... 468
7.3.2.4 Result of Location Registration ......................................................................... 469
7.3.2.5 TDMA Slot Specification ................................................................................... 470
7.3.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Identifier ............................................................ 471
7.3.3.1 Area Information ............................................................................................... 473
7.3.3.2 Authentication Information 1 ............................................................................. 476
7.3.3.2.1 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Request) ........................... 476
7.3.3.2.2 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Acknowledge) ................... 477
7.3.3.2.3 Authentication Data 1 (Transparent control information) ........................... 477
7.3.3.2.4 Authentication Data 1 (Encryption Indication) ............................................ 478
7.3.3.3 Authentication Information 2 ............................................................................. 479
7.3.3.3.1 Authentication Data 2 (Authentication method Response) ........................ 480
7.3.3.3.2 Authentication Data 2 (Transparent control information) ........................... 481
7.3.3.3.3 Authentication Data 2 (Re-Authentication Request) .................................. 481
7.3.3.3.4 Authentication Data 2 (Encryption Request) .............................................. 481
7.3.3.4 Cause ............................................................................................................... 482
7.3.3.5 CCH Superframe Configuration ........................................................................ 484
7.3.3.6 Communication Parameter ............................................................................... 489
7.3.3.7 Connection-ID ................................................................................................... 494
A-GN4.00-03-TS

20

7.3.3.8 CQI ................................................................................................................... 494
7.3.3.9 Disconnection Type .......................................................................................... 496
7.3.3.10 Encryption Key Set ......................................................................................... 497
7.3.3.11 Extension Function Number ............................................................................ 497
7.3.3.12 MS Performance ............................................................................................. 499
7.3.3.13 MSID ............................................................................................................... 505
7.3.3.14 Protocol Version.............................................................................................. 507
7.3.3.15 PRU Information ............................................................................................. 507
7.3.3.16 QCS Information ............................................................................................. 509
7.3.3.17 QoS................................................................................................................. 510
7.3.3.18 QCS Status ..................................................................................................... 510
7.3.3.19 Scheduling Information ................................................................................... 512
7.3.3.20 Source BS-info ................................................................................................ 513
7.3.3.21 Target BS-info ................................................................................................. 514
7.3.3.22 MAP Origin...................................................................................................... 514
7.3.3.23 MSID (SC)....................................................................................................... 515
7.3.3.24 Power Report .................................................................................................. 518
7.3.3.25 Report Indication ............................................................................................. 518
7.3.3.26 Encryption Key Information ............................................................................. 519
7.3.3.27 MIMO Information ........................................................................................... 519
7.3.3.28 ICH Continuation Transmission Information.................................................... 521
7.3.4 Information Element Rules ....................................................................................... 522
7.3.4.1 Error process .................................................................................................... 522
7.3.4.1.1 Protocol Identifier ....................................................................................... 522
7.3.4.1.2 Incomplete message.................................................................................. 522
7.3.4.1.3 Unexpected message type or message sequence error ............................ 522
7.3.4.1.4 Mandatory information element error ......................................................... 522
7.3.4.1.4.1 Missing mandatory information element ............................................. 522
7.3.4.1.4.2 Invalid mandatory information element ............................................... 522
7.3.4.1.4.3 Unexpected mandatory information element ...................................... 523
7.3.4.1.4.4 Unrecognized mandatory information element ................................... 523
7.3.4.1.5 Optional information element error ............................................................ 523
7.3.4.2 Information elements order ............................................................................... 523
7.3.4.3 Duplicated information elements ....................................................................... 524
Chapter 8 Sequence .................................................................................................................. 525
8.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 525
8.2 Sequence ........................................................................................................................ 525
A-GN4.00-03-TS

21

8.2.1 Outgoing Call ........................................................................................................... 525
8.2.2 Incoming Call ........................................................................................................... 527
8.2.3 Release .................................................................................................................... 529
8.2.3.1 Connection Release .......................................................................................... 529
8.2.3.1.1 Connection Release from MS .................................................................... 529
8.2.3.1.2 Connection Release from BS .................................................................... 530
8.2.3.2 QCS Release .................................................................................................... 530
8.2.3.2.1 QCS Release Triggered by MS ................................................................. 530
8.2.3.2.2 QCS Release Triggered by BS .................................................................. 531
8.2.4 Location Registration................................................................................................ 532
8.2.5 ANCH/CSCH Switching............................................................................................ 534
8.2.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS ......................................................... 534
8.2.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS.......................................................... 535
8.2.5.3 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection .................................................................... 536
8.2.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request .................................................................. 537
8.2.6 Handover.................................................................................................................. 538
8.2.6.1 Normal Handover Triggered by BS ................................................................... 538
8.2.6.2 Normal Handover Triggered by MS .................................................................. 540
8.2.6.3 Seamless Handover.......................................................................................... 542
8.2.7 Link Channel Establishment ..................................................................................... 544
8.2.7.1 Link Channel Assignment ................................................................................. 544
8.2.7.2 Link Channel Assignment Standby ................................................................... 544
8.2.7.3 Link Channel Re-request Sequence ................................................................. 545
8.2.7.4 Link Channel Request Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request...... 545
8.2.7.5 Link Channel Assignment Rejection ................................................................. 546
8.2.8 Additional QCS ......................................................................................................... 547
8.2.8.1 Additional QCS ................................................................................................. 547
8.2.8.2 Additional QCS Request Indication ................................................................... 547
8.2.8.3 Additional QCS Rejection.................................................................................. 548
8.2.8.4 Additional QCS with Extra LCH......................................................................... 548
8.2.8.5 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH .................................................. 549
8.2.9 Status Check ............................................................................................................ 550
8.2.9.1 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS ................................................................ 550
8.2.9.2 QCS Status Check Triggered by BS ................................................................. 550
8.2.10 CQI Transmission................................................................................................... 551
8.2.10.1 CQI Report ...................................................................................................... 551
8.2.10.2 CQI Report Indication ..................................................................................... 551
A-GN4.00-03-TS

22

8.3 Radio Connection Management Sequence ..................................................................... 551
8.3.1 Paging ...................................................................................................................... 552
8.3.2 Radio connection establishment............................................................................... 552
8.3.2.1 Radio connectionSetupComplete...................................................................... 553
8.3.3 Radio connection reconfiguration ............................................................................. 554
8.3.4 Radio connection re-establishment .......................................................................... 555
8.3.5 Radio connection release ......................................................................................... 556
8.3.6 Radio Link Failure .................................................................................................... 556
8.4 Optional Mobility sequence.............................................................................................. 557
8.4.1 Mobility Management in IDLE State ......................................................................... 557
8.4.1.1 Cell selection..................................................................................................... 557
8.4.1.2 Cell reselection ................................................................................................. 558
8.4.2 Mobility Management in active state ........................................................................ 559
8.4.2.1 General ............................................................................................................. 559
8.4.2.2 Handover .......................................................................................................... 560
8.4.3 Measurements ......................................................................................................... 562
8.4.3.1 Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements ................................................ 563
8.4.3.2 Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements ................................................ 563
8.4.3.3 measurement configuration............................................................................... 563
8.4.3.4 Measurement reporting ..................................................................................... 564
Chapter 9 Access Phase ........................................................................................................... 565
9.1 Overview.......................................................................................................................... 565
9.2 Retransmission Control Method ...................................................................................... 565
9.2.1 ARQ ......................................................................................................................... 565
9.2.1.1 Procedure of ARQ............................................................................................. 565
9.2.1.2 Setting the Timing for Transmission of the ACK Field in CDCH ........................ 565
9.2.1.3 Timing of Retransmission.................................................................................. 566
9.2.1.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission ...................................................................... 566
9.2.1.5 Example of Sequence ....................................................................................... 567
9.2.1.6 About the Switch of ARQ and the Adaptive Modulation .................................... 568
9.2.2 HARQ ....................................................................................................................... 568
9.2.2.1 Procedure of HARQ .......................................................................................... 568
9.2.2.2 Retransmission Rule in FM-Mode ..................................................................... 569
9.2.2.3 HARQ Approval Condition ................................................................................ 571
9.2.2.4 HARQ Cancel Condition ................................................................................... 571
9.2.2.5 Setting the Timing for the Transmission of the ACK Field in the ANCH ............ 572
9.2.2.6 Timing of Retransmission.................................................................................. 574
A-GN4.00-03-TS

23

9.2.2.6.1 HARQ Retransmission Timing for High Performance MS .......................... 574
9.2.2.6.2 HARQ Retransmission Timing for Low Performance MS .......................... 575
9.2.2.7 Example of HARQ Retransmission ................................................................... 576
9.2.2.8 Example of Sequence ....................................................................................... 577
9.2.2.9 Switch of HARQ and the Adaptive Modulation .................................................. 578
9.2.2.10 Increment Redundancy (IR) Method ............................................................... 579
9.2.2.11 Retransmission Count ..................................................................................... 580
9.3 Optional Retransmission Control Method ........................................................................ 580
9.3.1 HARQ ....................................................................................................................... 580
9.3.2 ARQ ......................................................................................................................... 582
9.3.2.1 ARQ Retransmission procedure ....................................................................... 582
9.3.2.2 Polling ............................................................................................................... 584
9.3.2.3 Status report ..................................................................................................... 585
9.4 QCS and Connection ....................................................................................................... 586
9.4.1 Service Class ........................................................................................................... 588
9.4.2 QoS Parameter ........................................................................................................ 589
9.4.2.1 Forwarding Delay .............................................................................................. 589
9.4.2.2 Jitter .................................................................................................................. 589
9.4.2.3 Frame Error Rate (FER).................................................................................... 590
9.4.2.4 Guarantee Bandwidth ....................................................................................... 590
9.4.2.5 Average Bit Rate ............................................................................................... 590
9.4.2.6 Traffic Priority .................................................................................................... 590
9.5 Access Phase Control ..................................................................................................... 591
9.5.1 Power Control .......................................................................................................... 591
9.5.2 Timing Control .......................................................................................................... 592
9.5.3 Link Adaptation Control ............................................................................................ 594
9.5.3.1 MCS Switching.................................................................................................. 594
9.5.3.1.1 Decision of Transmission MCS .................................................................. 594
9.5.3.1.2 Decision of The Reception of Demodulation MCS ..................................... 594
9.5.3.1.3 Setup of Modulation Method in MR Field for Transmission ....................... 594
9.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Scheduling Control ............................................................................. 596
9.5.5 Interference Avoidance Control ................................................................................ 597
9.5.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Disconnect Detection .................................................................. 597
9.5.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching .................................................................................... 598
9.5.5.2.1 MS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching ............................................................ 599
9.5.5.2.2 BS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching ............................................................. 600
9.5.5.2.3 Retransmission of ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication ............................... 601
A-GN4.00-03-TS

24

9.5.5.2.4 Switchback Operation ................................................................................ 601
9.5.6 Handover Control ..................................................................................................... 603
9.5.6.1 Normal Handover .............................................................................................. 603
9.5.6.2 Seamless Handover.......................................................................................... 604
9.6 MAC Layer Control .......................................................................................................... 605
9.6.1 Window Control ........................................................................................................ 605
9.6.2 Flow Control ............................................................................................................. 607
9.6.3 Retransmission Control by SR Method .................................................................... 609
9.6.4 Notification and Recovery of Error Condition............................................................ 611
9.7 Encryption Field ............................................................................................................... 612
9.8 Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) .................................................................................. 612
Chapter 10 Global Mode ............................................................................................................ 613
10.1 Introduction .................................................................................................................... 613
10.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms for Global Mode ............................................................... 613
10.3 XGP unique optional feature.......................................................................................... 615
10.3.1 Public Waning System (PWS) ................................................................................ 615
10.3.1.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 615
10.3.1.2 Reception of the Paging message by the UE.................................................. 615
10.3.1.3 Actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 message ......... 616
10.3.1.4 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType10 message ............. 616
10.3.1.5 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType11 message ............. 616
10.3.1.6 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType12 message ............. 616
10.3.1.7 Paging message update ................................................................................. 616
10.4 Specification - referring to “Release 8 of 3GPP” ............................................................ 617
10.4.1 System Overview ................................................................................................... 618
10.4.1.1 System Structure ............................................................................................ 618
10.4.1.2 Interface Definition .......................................................................................... 618
10.4.1.3 Frequency structure ........................................................................................ 619
10.4.1.4 Access Method ............................................................................................... 619
10.4.1.5 Frame Structure .............................................................................................. 619
10.4.1.6 Physical Resource Unit (PRU) ........................................................................ 619
10.4.1.7 MAC and Radio Connection for Global Mode ................................................. 620
10.4.1.8 Protocol Model ................................................................................................ 620
10.4.1.9 RF characteristics ........................................................................................... 620
10.4.1.9.1 Operating bands ...................................................................................... 621
10.4.1.9.2 Operation bands of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are recommended as
defined in section 5 of [2] and [1] respectively. Besides, the XGP Global Mode must
A-GN4.00-03-TS

25

support other operating bands defined by the operation country/region.Transmittercharacteristics........................................................................................................... 621
10.4.1.9.3 Receiver characteristics........................................................................... 621
10.4.1.9.4 Performance requirement ........................................................................ 621
10.4.2 Physical Channel Specification .............................................................................. 622
10.4.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................... 622
10.4.2.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer ............................................... 622
10.4.2.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer ..................................................... 622
10.4.2.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer ..................................................................................... 622
10.4.2.4.1 General structure for downlink physical channels .................................... 622
10.4.2.4.2 Channel Coding ....................................................................................... 623
10.4.2.4.3 Advanced Downlink EDCH ...................................................................... 623
10.4.2.4.4 Advanced Broadcast Control Channel ..................................................... 623
10.4.2.4.5 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel ............................. 623
10.4.2.4.6 Advanced Downlink ECCH ...................................................................... 624
10.4.2.4.7 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel ................................ 624
10.4.2.4.8 Pilots ........................................................................................................ 624
10.4.2.4.9 Synchronization signals ........................................................................... 624
10.4.2.5 UL SC PHY Layer ........................................................................................... 625
10.4.2.5.1 General structure for uplink physical channels ........................................ 625
10.4.2.5.1 Channel Coding ....................................................................................... 625
10.4.2.5.2 Advanced Uplink EDCH........................................................................... 625
10.4.2.5.3 Advanced Uplink ANCH........................................................................... 625
10.4.2.5.4 Advanced Timing Correct Channel .......................................................... 625
10.4.2.5.5 Pilots ........................................................................................................ 626
10.4.2.6 Modulation mapper ......................................................................................... 626
10.4.2.7 Pseudo-random sequence generation ............................................................ 626
10.4.3 Individual Channel Specification............................................................................. 626
10.4.3.1 Functional Channel Composition .................................................................... 626
10.4.3.2 Mapping to physical channels ......................................................................... 627
10.4.3.3 PHY control procedures .................................................................................. 627
10.4.3.3.1 Advanced Downlink ECCH procedures ................................................... 627
10.4.3.3.2 Advanced Downlink EDCH related procedures ....................................... 627
10.4.3.3.3 Advanced Uplink ANCH related procedures ............................................ 627
10.4.3.3.4 Advanced Uplink EDCH related procedures ............................................ 627
10.4.3.3.5 UL Power Control .................................................................................... 628
10.4.3.4 MAC Layer Control ......................................................................................... 628
A-GN4.00-03-TS

26

10.4.3.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 628
10.4.3.4.2 MAC sub-layer1 ....................................................................................... 628
10.4.3.4.3 MAC sub-layer2 ....................................................................................... 628
10.4.3.4.4 MAC sub-layer3 ....................................................................................... 628
10.4.4 Common Channel Specification ............................................................................. 629
10.4.4.1 Common control channel Composition ........................................................... 629
10.4.4.2 Common control channel reception ................................................................ 629
10.4.4.3 Paging Group Calculation Rules ..................................................................... 629
10.4.5 Channel Assignment .............................................................................................. 629
10.4.5.1 Radio State Management ............................................................................... 629
10.4.5.2 Random Access procedure ............................................................................. 630
10.4.6 Message Format and Information Elements ........................................................... 630
10.4.6.1 ADECI format .................................................................................................. 630
10.4.6.2 MSG (BCCH) .................................................................................................. 630
10.4.6.3 MSG (PCCH) .................................................................................................. 630
10.4.7 Sequence ............................................................................................................... 631
10.4.7.1 Radio Connection Management Sequence..................................................... 631
10.4.7.1.1 Paging ..................................................................................................... 631
10.4.7.1.2 Radio connection establishment .............................................................. 631
10.4.7.1.3 Radio connection reconfiguration ............................................................ 631
10.4.7.1.4 Radio connection re-establishment.......................................................... 632
10.4.7.1.5 Radio connection release ........................................................................ 632
10.4.7.1.6 Radio Link Failure .................................................................................... 632
10.4.7.2 Mobility sequence ........................................................................................... 633
10.4.7.2.1 Mobility Management in Idle State ........................................................... 633
10.4.7.2.2 Mobility Management in Active State ....................................................... 633
10.4.7.3 Measurements ................................................................................................ 633
10.4.8 Access Phase ........................................................................................................ 634
10.4.8.1 Retransmission Control Method ...................................................................... 634
10.4.8.1.1 HARQ ...................................................................................................... 634
10.4.8.1.2 ARQ ......................................................................................................... 634
10.4.8.2 Semi-Persistent Scheduling ............................................................................ 634
10.5 Specification - referring to “Release 9 of 3GPP” ............................................................ 634
10.5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 636
10.5.1.1 Overall architecture ......................................................................................... 636
10.5.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 .................................................................................. 636
10.5.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 .......................................................... 636
A-GN4.00-03-TS

27

10.5.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3 ....................................................................................... 637
10.5.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ......................................................................................... 637
10.5.1.6 ARQ and HARQ .............................................................................................. 637
10.5.1.7 Mobility ............................................................................................................ 637
10.5.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control .......................................................................... 637
10.5.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................... 637
10.5.1.10 QoS............................................................................................................... 638
10.5.1.11 Security ......................................................................................................... 638
10.5.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects ......................................................... 638
10.5.1.13 Operation bands ........................................................................................... 638
10.5.1.14 UE capabilities .............................................................................................. 638
10.5.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimization ...................................... 638
10.5.2 Physical layer ......................................................................................................... 639
10.5.2.1 General description ......................................................................................... 639
10.5.2.1.1 Relation to other layers ............................................................................ 639
10.5.2.1.2 General description of Layer 1 ................................................................. 639
10.5.2.2 Frame Structure .............................................................................................. 639
10.5.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation ...................................................... 639
10.5.2.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 639
10.5.2.3.2 Slot structure and physical resources ...................................................... 640
10.5.2.3.3 Physical uplink shared channel ............................................................... 640
10.5.2.3.4 Physical uplink control channel ................................................................ 640
10.5.2.3.5 Reference signals .................................................................................... 640
10.5.2.3.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation ................................................... 641
10.5.2.3.7 Physical random access channel............................................................. 641
10.5.2.3.8 Modulation and upconversion .................................................................. 641
10.5.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation.................................................. 641
10.5.2.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 641
10.5.2.4.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements ........................................ 641
10.5.2.4.3 General structure for downlink physical channels .................................... 642
10.5.2.4.4 Physical downlink shared channel ........................................................... 642
10.5.2.4.5 Physical broadcast channel ..................................................................... 642
10.5.2.4.6 Physical Multicast Channel ...................................................................... 642
10.5.2.4.7 Physical control format indicator channel ................................................ 642
10.5.2.4.8 Physical downlink control channel ........................................................... 643
10.5.2.4.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel .................................................... 643
10.5.2.4.10 Reference signals .................................................................................. 643
A-GN4.00-03-TS

28

10.5.2.4.11 Synchronization signals ......................................................................... 643
10.5.2.4.12 OFDM baseband signal generation ....................................................... 643
10.5.2.4.13 Modulation and upconversion ................................................................ 643
10.5.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ................................................ 644
10.5.2.5.1 Generic procedures ................................................................................. 644
10.5.2.5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information ................................... 644
10.5.2.5.2.1 Uplink shared channel ...................................................................... 644
10.5.2.5.2.2 Uplink control information on PUCCH .............................................. 644
10.5.2.5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data ............ 644
10.5.2.5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information .............................. 645
10.5.2.5.3.1 Broadcast channel............................................................................ 645
10.5.2.5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel ... 645
10.5.2.5.3.3 Downlink control information ............................................................ 645
10.5.2.5.3.4 Control format indicator .................................................................... 645
10.5.2.5.3.5 HARQ indicator (HI) ......................................................................... 645
10.5.2.6 Physical layer procedures ............................................................................... 645
10.5.2.6.1 Synchronization procedures .................................................................... 645
10.5.2.6.2 Power control........................................................................................... 646
10.5.2.6.2.1 Uplink power control ......................................................................... 646
10.5.2.6.2.2 Downlink power allocation ................................................................ 646
10.5.2.6.3 Random access procedure ...................................................................... 646
10.5.2.6.4 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures ............................ 646
10.5.2.6.4.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel ... 646
10.5.2.6.4.2 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding
matrix indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI) ..................................................... 647
10.5.2.6.4.3 UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK ............................................ 647
10.5.2.6.5 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures ................................. 647
10.5.2.6.6 Physical downlink control channel procedures ........................................ 647
10.5.2.6.7 Physical uplink control channel procedures ............................................. 647
10.5.2.7 Measurements ................................................................................................ 648
10.5.2.7.1 UE measurement capabilities .................................................................. 648
10.5.2.7.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities ............................................................. 648
10.5.3 MAC layer – MSL1 ................................................................................................. 648
10.5.3.1 General ........................................................................................................... 648
10.5.3.1.1 MAC architecture ..................................................................................... 648
10.5.3.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 648
10.5.3.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 648
A-GN4.00-03-TS

29

10.5.3.1.4 Channel structure .................................................................................... 648
10.5.3.1.4.1 Transport Channels .......................................................................... 648
10.5.3.1.4.2 Logical Channels .............................................................................. 648
10.5.3.1.4.3 Mapping of Transport Channels to Logical Channels ....................... 649
10.5.3.2 MAC procedures ............................................................................................. 649
10.5.3.2.1 Random Access procedure ..................................................................... 649
10.5.3.2.2 Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment ................................................... 649
10.5.3.2.3 DL-SCH data transfer .............................................................................. 649
10.5.3.2.4 UL-SCH data transfer .............................................................................. 649
10.5.3.2.5 PCH reception ......................................................................................... 649
10.5.3.2.6 BCH reception ......................................................................................... 649
10.5.3.2.7 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) .............................................................. 650
10.5.3.2.8 MAC reconfiguration ................................................................................ 650
10.5.3.2.9 MAC Reset .............................................................................................. 650
10.5.3.2.10 Semi-Persistent Scheduling ................................................................... 650
10.5.3.2.11 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data ............ 650
10.5.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters ................................................. 650
10.5.3.3.1 Protocol Data Units .................................................................................. 650
10.5.3.3.2 Formats and parameters ......................................................................... 650
10.5.3.4 Variables and constants .................................................................................. 650
10.5.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 ................................................................. 651
10.5.4.1 General ........................................................................................................... 651
10.5.4.1.1 RLC architecture ...................................................................................... 651
10.5.4.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 651
10.5.4.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 651
10.5.4.1.4 Data available for transmission ................................................................ 651
10.5.4.2 Procedures...................................................................................................... 651
10.5.4.2.1 Data transfer procedures ......................................................................... 651
10.5.4.2.2 ARQ procedures ...................................................................................... 651
10.5.4.2.3 SDU discard procedures.......................................................................... 652
10.5.4.2.4 Re-establishment procedure.................................................................... 652
10.5.4.2.5 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data .............. 652
10.5.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 652
10.5.4.3.1 Protocol data units ................................................................................... 652
10.5.4.3.2 Formats and parameters ......................................................................... 652
10.5.4.4 Variables, constants and timers ...................................................................... 652
10.5.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 .................................... 652
A-GN4.00-03-TS30

10.5.5.1 General ........................................................................................................... 652
10.5.5.1.1 PDCP architecture ................................................................................... 652
10.5.5.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 653
10.5.5.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 653
10.5.5.1.4 Data available for transmission ................................................................ 653
10.5.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................... 653
10.5.5.2.1 PDCP Data Transfer Procedures............................................................. 653
10.5.5.2.2 Re-establishment procedure.................................................................... 653
10.5.5.2.3 PDCP Status Report ................................................................................ 653
10.5.5.2.4 PDCP discard .......................................................................................... 653
10.5.5.2.5 Header Compression and Decompression .............................................. 653
10.5.5.2.6 Ciphering and Deciphering ...................................................................... 653
10.5.5.2.7 Integrity Protection and Verification ......................................................... 654
10.5.5.2.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data .............. 654
10.5.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 654
10.5.5.3.1 Protocol data units ................................................................................... 654
10.5.5.3.2 Formats ................................................................................................... 654
10.5.5.3.3 Parameters .............................................................................................. 654
10.5.5.4 Variables, constants and timers ...................................................................... 654
10.5.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ..................................................................... 655
10.5.6.1 General ........................................................................................................... 655
10.5.6.1.1 Architecture ............................................................................................. 655
10.5.6.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 655
10.5.6.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 655
10.5.6.2 Procedures...................................................................................................... 655
10.5.6.2.1 General .................................................................................................... 655
10.5.6.2.2 System information .................................................................................. 655
10.5.6.2.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 655
10.5.6.2.2.2 System information acquisition ......................................................... 655
10.5.6.2.2.3 Acquisition of an SI message ........................................................... 656
10.5.6.2.3 Connection control ................................................................................... 656
10.5.6.2.3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 656
10.5.6.2.3.2 Paging .............................................................................................. 656
10.5.6.2.3.3 RRC connection establishment ........................................................ 656
10.5.6.2.3.4 Initial security activation ................................................................... 656
10.5.6.2.3.5 RRC connection reconfiguration....................................................... 656
10.5.6.2.3.6 Counter check .................................................................................. 657
A-GN4.00-03-TS

31

10.5.6.2.3.7 RRC connection re-establishment .................................................... 657
10.5.6.2.3.8 RRC connection release .................................................................. 657
10.5.6.2.3.9 RRC connection release requested by upper layers ........................ 657
10.5.6.2.3.10 Radio resource configuration.......................................................... 657
10.5.6.2.3.11 Radio link failure related actions ..................................................... 657
10.5.6.2.3.12 UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED ............................... 658
10.5.6.2.3.13 UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request ............................ 658
10.5.6.2.3.14 Proximity indication ........................................................................ 658
10.5.6.2.4 Inter-RAT mobility .................................................................................... 658
10.5.6.2.5 Measurements ......................................................................................... 658
10.5.6.2.6 Other procedures ..................................................................................... 658
10.5.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 659
10.5.6.3.1 RRC messages ....................................................................................... 659
10.5.6.3.2 RRC information elements....................................................................... 659
10.5.6.3.3 RRC multiplicity and type constraint values ............................................. 659
10.5.6.4 Variables and constants .................................................................................. 659
10.5.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ................................................................... 659
10.5.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations ...................................................... 659
10.5.6.6.1 Specified configurations........................................................................... 659
10.5.6.6.2 Default radio configurations ..................................................................... 660
10.5.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ...................... 660
10.5.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ................... 660
10.6 Specification - referring to “Release 10 of 3GPP” .......................................................... 660
10.6.1 Overview ................................................................................................................ 661
10.6.1.1 Overall architecture ......................................................................................... 661
10.6.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1 .................................................................................. 664
10.6.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2 .......................................................... 664
10.6.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3 ....................................................................................... 664
10.6.1.5 E-UTRAN identities ......................................................................................... 665
10.6.1.6 ARQ and HARQ .............................................................................................. 665
10.6.1.7 Mobility ............................................................................................................ 665
10.6.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control .......................................................................... 665
10.6.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED ........................................................................... 666
10.6.1.10 QoS............................................................................................................... 666
10.6.1.11 Security ......................................................................................................... 666
10.6.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects ......................................................... 667
10.6.1.13 Operation bands ........................................................................................... 667
A-GN4.00-03-TS

32

10.6.1.14 UE capabilities .............................................................................................. 667
10.6.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation ...................................... 667
10.6.1.16 Deployment Scenarios for CA ....................................................................... 667
10.6.2 Physical layer ......................................................................................................... 668
10.6.2.1 General description ......................................................................................... 668
10.6.2.1.1 Relation to other layers ............................................................................ 668
10.6.2.1.2 General description of Layer 1 ................................................................. 668
10.6.2.2 Frame Structure .............................................................................................. 668
10.6.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation ...................................................... 668
10.6.2.3.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 668
10.6.2.3.2 Slot structure and physical resources ...................................................... 669
10.6.2.3.3 Physical uplink shared channel ............................................................... 669
10.6.2.3.4 Physical uplink control channel ................................................................ 670
10.6.2.3.5 Reference signals .................................................................................... 670
10.6.2.3.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation ................................................... 670
10.6.2.3.7 Physical random access channel............................................................. 670
10.6.2.3.8 Modulation and upconversion .................................................................. 670
10.6.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation.................................................. 671
10.6.2.4.1 Overview.................................................................................................. 671
10.6.2.4.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements ........................................ 671
10.6.2.4.3 General structure for downlink physical channels .................................... 671
10.6.2.4.4 Physical downlink shared channel ........................................................... 672
10.6.2.4.5 Physical broadcast channel ..................................................................... 672
10.6.2.4.6 Physical Multicast Channel ...................................................................... 672
10.6.2.4.7 Physical control format indicator channel ................................................ 672
10.6.2.4.8 Physical downlink control channel ........................................................... 672
10.6.2.4.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel .................................................... 673
10.6.2.4.10 Reference signals .................................................................................. 673
10.6.2.4.11 Synchronization signals ......................................................................... 673
10.6.2.4.12 OFDM baseband signal generation ....................................................... 674
10.6.2.4.13 Modulation and upconversion ................................................................ 674
10.6.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving ................................................ 674
10.6.2.5.1 Generic procedures ................................................................................. 674
10.6.2.5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information ................................... 674
10.6.2.5.2.1 Uplink shared channel ...................................................................... 674
10.6.2.5.2.2 Uplink control information on PUCCH .............................................. 675
10.6.2.5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data ............ 675
A-GN4.00-03-TS

33

10.6.2.5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information .............................. 675
10.6.2.5.3.1 Broadcast channel............................................................................ 675
10.6.2.5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel ... 676
10.6.2.5.3.3 Downlink control information ............................................................ 676
10.6.2.5.3.4 Control format indicator .................................................................... 676
10.6.2.5.3.5 HARQ indicator (HI) ......................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6 Physical layer procedures ............................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6.1 Synchronisation procedures .................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6.2 Power control........................................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6.2.1 Uplink power control ......................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6.2.2 Downlink power allocation ................................................................ 677
10.6.2.6.3 Random access procedure ...................................................................... 677
10.6.2.6.4 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures ............................ 677
10.6.2.6.4.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel ... 677
10.6.2.6.4.2 UE procedure for reporting Channel State Information (CSI) ........... 678
10.6.2.6.4.3 UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK ............................................ 678
10.6.2.6.5 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures ................................. 678
10.6.2.6.6 Physical downlink control channel procedures ........................................ 679
10.6.2.6.7 Physical uplink control channel procedures ............................................. 679
10.6.2.7 Measurements ................................................................................................ 679
10.6.2.7.1 UE measurement capabilities .................................................................. 679
10.6.2.7.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities ............................................................. 679
10.6.3 MAC layer – MSL1 ................................................................................................. 680
10.6.3.1 General ........................................................................................................... 680
10.6.3.1.1 MAC architecture ..................................................................................... 680
10.6.3.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 680
10.6.3.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 680
10.6.3.1.4 Channel structure .................................................................................... 680
10.6.3.1.4.1 Transport Channels .......................................................................... 680
10.6.3.1.4.2 Logical Channels .............................................................................. 680
10.6.3.1.4.3 Mapping of Transport Channels to Logical Channels ....................... 680
10.6.3.2 MAC procedures ............................................................................................. 681
10.6.3.2.1 Random Access procedure ..................................................................... 681
10.6.3.2.2 Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment ................................................... 681
10.6.3.2.3 DL-SCH data transfer .............................................................................. 681
10.6.3.2.4 UL-SCH data transfer .............................................................................. 681
10.6.3.2.5 PCH reception ......................................................................................... 681
A-GN4.00-03-TS

34

10.6.3.2.6 BCH reception ......................................................................................... 681
10.6.3.2.7 Discontinuous Reception (DRX) .............................................................. 681
10.6.3.2.8 MAC reconfiguration ................................................................................ 682
10.6.3.2.9 MAC Reset .............................................................................................. 682
10.6.3.2.10 Semi-Persistent Scheduling ................................................................... 682
10.6.3.2.11 Activation/Deactivation of SCells ........................................................... 682
10.6.3.2.12 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data ............ 682
10.6.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters ................................................. 682
10.6.3.3.1 Protocol Data Units .................................................................................. 682
10.6.3.3.2 Formats and parameters ......................................................................... 682
10.6.3.4 Variables and constants .................................................................................. 683
10.6.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2 ................................................................. 683
10.6.4.1 General ........................................................................................................... 683
10.6.4.1.1 RLC architecture ...................................................................................... 683
10.6.4.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 683
10.6.4.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 683
10.6.4.1.4 Data available for transmission ................................................................ 683
10.6.4.2 Procedures...................................................................................................... 683
10.6.4.2.1 Data transfer procedures ......................................................................... 683
10.6.4.2.2 ARQ procedures ...................................................................................... 684
10.6.4.2.3 SDU discard procedures.......................................................................... 684
10.6.4.2.4 Re-establishment procedure.................................................................... 684
10.6.4.2.5 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data .............. 684
10.6.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 684
10.6.4.3.1 Protocol data units ................................................................................... 684
10.6.4.3.2 Formats and parameters ......................................................................... 684
10.6.4.4 Variables, constants and timers ...................................................................... 684
10.6.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3 .................................... 685
10.6.5.1 General ........................................................................................................... 685
10.6.5.1.1 PDCP architecture ................................................................................... 685
10.6.5.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 685
10.6.5.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 685
10.6.5.1.4 Data available for transmission ................................................................ 685
10.6.5.2 PDCP procedures ........................................................................................... 685
10.6.5.2.1 PDCP Data Transfer Procedures............................................................. 685
10.6.5.2.2 Re-establishment procedure.................................................................... 685
10.6.5.2.3 PDCP Status Report ................................................................................ 685
A-GN4.00-03-TS

35

10.6.5.2.4 PDCP discard .......................................................................................... 685
10.6.5.2.5 Header Compression and Decompression .............................................. 686
10.6.5.2.6 Ciphering and Deciphering ...................................................................... 686
10.6.5.2.7 Integrity Protection and Verification ......................................................... 686
10.6.5.2.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data .............. 686
10.6.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 686
10.6.5.3.1 Protocol data units ................................................................................... 686
10.6.5.3.2 Formats ................................................................................................... 686
10.6.5.3.3 Parameters .............................................................................................. 686
10.6.5.4 Variables, constants and timers ...................................................................... 687
10.6.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer ..................................................................... 687
10.6.6.1 General ........................................................................................................... 687
10.6.6.1.1 Architecture ............................................................................................. 687
10.6.6.1.2 Services ................................................................................................... 687
10.6.6.1.3 Functions ................................................................................................. 687
10.6.6.2 Procedures...................................................................................................... 687
10.6.6.2.1 General .................................................................................................... 687
10.6.6.2.2 System information .................................................................................. 687
10.6.6.2.2.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 687
10.6.6.2.2.2 System information acquisition ......................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.2.3 Acquisition of an SI message ........................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.3 Connection control ................................................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.3.1 Introduction ...................................................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.3.2 Paging .............................................................................................. 688
10.6.6.2.3.3 RRC connection establishment ........................................................ 688
10.6.6.2.3.4 Initial security activation ................................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.3.5 RRC connection reconfiguration....................................................... 688
10.6.6.2.3.6 Counter check .................................................................................. 689
10.6.6.2.3.7 RRC connection re-establishment .................................................... 689
10.6.6.2.3.8 RRC connection release .................................................................. 689
10.6.6.2.3.9 RRC connection release requested by upper layers ........................ 689
10.6.6.2.3.10 Radio resource configuration.......................................................... 689
10.6.6.2.3.11 Radio link failure related actions..................................................... 690
10.6.6.2.3.12 UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED ............................... 690
10.6.6.2.3.13 UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request ............................ 690
10.6.6.2.3.14 Proximity indication ........................................................................ 690
10.6.6.2.4 Inter-RAT mobility .................................................................................... 690
A-GN4.00-03-TS

36

10.6.6.2.5 Measurements ......................................................................................... 690
10.6.6.2.6 Other procedures ..................................................................................... 691
10.6.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters .................................................. 691
10.6.6.3.1 RRC messages ....................................................................................... 691
10.6.6.3.2 RRC information elements....................................................................... 691
10.6.6.3.3 RRC multiplicity and type constraint values ............................................. 691
10.6.6.4 Variables and constants .................................................................................. 692
10.6.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax ................................................................... 692
10.6.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations ...................................................... 692
10.6.6.6.1 Specified configurations........................................................................... 692
10.6.6.6.2 Default radio configurations ..................................................................... 692
10.6.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes ...................... 692
10.6.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements ................... 692
Annex X: Regional Condition ..................................................................................................... 693
X.1 Scope .............................................................................................................................. 693
X.2 The Radio Band .............................................................................................................. 693
X.2.1 Taiwan Condition ..................................................................................................... 693
X.3 The Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP) ............................................................... 693
X.3.1 Taiwan Condition ..................................................................................................... 693
Appendix A: Full Subcarrier Mode ............................................................................................. 694
A.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 694
A.2 Definition of Full Subcarrier Mode ................................................................................... 694
Appendix B: Modulation ............................................................................................................. 695
B.1 BPSK .............................................................................................................................. 695
B.2 π/2 - BPSK ...................................................................................................................... 696
B.3 QPSK .............................................................................................................................. 697
B.4 π/4 - QPSK...................................................................................................................... 698
B.5 8PSK ............................................................................................................................... 699
B.6 16QAM ............................................................................................................................ 700
B.7 64QAM ............................................................................................................................ 702
B.8 256QAM .......................................................................................................................... 705
B.9 16PSK ............................................................................................................................. 711
B.10 Optional Modulation Method ......................................................................................... 712
B.10.1 BPSK ..................................................................................................................... 712
B.10.2 QPSK ..................................................................................................................... 713
B.10.3 16QAM................................................................................................................... 714
B.10.4 64QAM................................................................................................................... 716
A-GN4.00-03-TS

37

Appendix C: Training Sequence ................................................................................................ 719
C.1 OFDM Training Sequence .............................................................................................. 719
C.2 SC Training Sequence .................................................................................................... 724
Appendix D: TCCH Sequence ................................................................................................... 729
D.1 OFDM TCCH Sequence ................................................................................................. 729
D.2 SC TCCH sequence........................................................................................................ 730
Appendix E: Network Interface Requirements ........................................................................... 731
E.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 731
E.2 Network Functions .......................................................................................................... 731
E.2.1 Paging Function ....................................................................................................... 731
E.2.1.1 Paging Area ...................................................................................................... 732
E.2.1.2 The Recognition of Paging Area ....................................................................... 732
E.2.1.3 Paging Group ................................................................................................... 733
E.2.1.4 Incoming Call .................................................................................................... 733
E.2.2 Home Location Register (HLR) Function ................................................................. 733
E.2.3 Handover Functions ................................................................................................. 734
E.2.4 Authentication Authorization Accounting (AAA) Function ........................................ 734
E.2.4.1 Authentication Procedure ................................................................................. 734
E.2.4.2 Authentication Timing ....................................................................................... 735
Appendix F: Improvement for CCH linkbudget ........................................................................... 736
F.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 736
F.2 Dual CCH ........................................................................................................................ 736
F.3 CCH Continuation Transmission ..................................................................................... 736

A-GN4.00-03-TS

38

Abbreviations and Acronyms
AAA
AAS
ABCCH
ACCH
ACK
ACS
ADC
ADECCHADECIADECFII
ADEDCHADEFICHADHICHADPCM
AGTal-VRC
AMI
AMT
AMR
ANCH
ANDI
ATCCH
ATPMN
AUANCH
AUEDCH
BCCH
BER
BI
BPSK
BS
BSID
CB
CC
CCH
CCCH
CC-HARQ
CCI
CDCH
CI
CQI
CRC
CSCH
CSI

Authentication, Authorization, Accounting
Adaptive array Antenna System
Advanced Broadcast Control Channel
Accompanied Control Channel
Acknowledgment
Advanced Cyclic Shift
Advanced Direct Current
Advanced Downlink ECCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Control Information
Advanced Downlink ECCH Control Format Indicator Information
Advanced Downlink EDCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation
Advanced Guard Time
allowable Packet loss and Variable Rate ClassANCH MCS Indicator
Advanced MIMO Type
ANCH MCS Request
Anchor Channel
Advanced New Data Indicator
Advanced Timing Correct Channel
Advanced Transmission Power Margin Notification
Advanced Uplink ANCH
Advanced Uplink EDCH
Broadcast Control Channel
Bit Error Rate
Bandwidth Indication
Binary Phase Shift Keying
Base Station
BS Identification
Code block
Convolutional CodeCommon Channel
Common Control Channel
Chase Combining -HARQ
Common Control Information
CSCH Data Channel
Channel Identifier
Channel Quality Indicator
Cyclic Redundancy CodeCircuit Switching Channel
Channel State Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

39

DSI
DSS
DTX
DL
ECBW
ECCH
EDCH
EMB
EMI
EPRP
EXCH
FCID
FER
FFT
FM-Mode
FRMR
GBW
GI
HARQ
HC
HLR
IBI
ICCH
ICH
ICI
IFFT
IL
IP
IR-HARQ
ISI
LAC
LCH
LCCH
LD-BE
LDPC
LPF
LSB
MAC
MCS
MI
MIMO
MM
MR
MS
MSB
MSID

Downlink Scheduling Index
Downlink Special Slot
Discontinuous Transmission
DownLink
Effective Channel Bandwidth
EXCH Control Channel
EXCH Data Channel
Eigen Mode Based
EMB-MIMO MCS Indicator
Engergy Per Resource Point
Extra Channel
Function Channel ID
Frame Error Rate
Fast Fourier Transform
Fast access channel based on MAP -ModeFrame Reject
Guard Bandwidth
Guard IntervalHybrid Automatic Repeat Request
HARQ Cancel
Home Location Register
Inter-Block Interference
Individual Control Channel
Individual Channel
Inter-Carrier Interference
Inverse Fast Fourier Transform
Information Link bit
Internet Protocol
Incremental Redundancy -HARQ
Inter-Symbol Interference
Leave Alone Class
Link Channel
Logical Common Channel
Low - Delay Best Effort Class
Low Density Parity Check
Low Pass Filter
Least Significant Bit
Media Access Control
Modulation and Coding Scheme
MCS Indicator
Multiple Input Multiple Output
Mobility Management
MCS Request
Mobile Station
Most Significant Bit
MS Identification

A-GN4.00-03-TS

40

MT
NACK
NCL
NGN
nl-VRC
OFDMA
PAD
PAPR
PC
PCH
PDU
PHY
PLC
PN
PRU
PSP
QAM
QCS
QoS
QPSK
QS-Mode
RAN
RB
RCH
REJ
RIL
RNR
RP
RR
RROF
RS
RSSI
RT
RU
SBW
SC
SCCH
SC-FDMA
SCH
SD
SDMA
SFBC
SINR
SI
SISO
SM

MIMO Type
Negative ACK
Neighbour Cell List
Next Generation Network
no Packet loss and Variable Rate Class
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple AccessPadding
Peak to Average Power Ratio
Power Control
Paging Channel
Protocol Data Unit
Physical layer
Private Line Class
Pseudo Noise
Physical Resource Unit
Primary Synchronization Pilot
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QoS Control Session
Quality of Service
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
high Quality channel based on carrier Sensing -ModeRadio Access Network
Radio Bearer
Request Channel
RejectRemaining Information Length indication bit
Receive Not Ready
Resource Point
Receive Ready
Root Roll-Off Filter
Relay Station
Received Signal Strength Indicator/Indication
Radio frequency Transmission management
Resource Unit
System BandwidthSingle Carrier
Signaling Control Channel
Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access
Subchannel
Shift Direction
Space Division Multiple AccessSpace Frequency Block Coding
Signal to Interference and Noise Ratio
Stream Indication
Single Input Single Output
Spatial Multiplexing

A-GN4.00-03-TS

41

SR
SR
SREJ
SSP
STBC
SVD
TB
TCCH
TCH
TDD
TDMA
UL
USS
V
VoIP
VRC
VRU
XGP

Selective Repeat
Stream Request
Selective Reject
Secondary Synchronization Pilot
Space Time Block Coding
Singular Value Decomposition
Transport block
Timing Correct Channel
Traffic Channel
Time Division Duplex
Time Division Multiple Access
UpLinkUplink Special Slot
Validity
Voice over IP
Variable Rate Class
Virtual Resource UniteXtended Global Platform / neXt Genernation PHS

A-GN4.00-03-TS

42

Chapter 0 Scope and Introduction
ScopeThis standard is being established principally for “eXtended Global Platform / neXt Genernation
PHS (XGP)”. In order to ensure the fairness and the openness among all parties involved indeveloping this system, the radio equipment manufacturers, telecommunications operators andthe users were invited openly to the Standard Assembly so as to gain this standard with the total
agreement of all parties involved in developing standard.
The scope of application of this standard covers the minimum requirements for the service andcommunication provided by this system.
This standard of XGP is promoted by the XGP Forum (formerly PHS MoU Group, PHS means
Personal Handy phone System.), PHS MoU Group was established in 1995; for the purpose of
expanding PHS service to all over the world.
Introduction
XGP is one of the future Broadband Wireless Access systems (BWA), and also a migration
standard of Original PHS based on all-IP core network, which will realize the high speed data
communication and large capacity data communication with mobile communication network. This“XGP standard” shows the developed future status of “Original PHS standard”. The description
for this system will be added to “Original PHS standard” in order to develop “XGP standard”.
Original PHS is the standard of Association of Radio Industries and Business (ARIB), which has
been standardized since 1993. The XGP standard is in compliance with ARIB standards too.
However, to apply it as an international convention, the standard is also adopted by XGP Forum.
And being a global platform, the XGP standard is being established to ensure the applicability forworldwide deployment. Some specific requirements regarded for complying with regional
regulations are therefore specified in “Annex X: Regional Condition”. XGP will support all theservices that Original PHS is now supplying. It will also display further technical potentiality forsubscribers to enjoy better services that might be requested by future PHS users.
Especially, the major expanded features of “XGP” which is aimed to realize are as follows.
- Expanded function variety and performance of Original PHS.
- Co-existence with Original PHS- Higher capacity for traffic density- Higher data transfer throughput- Flexibility for cell mapping for various cell types- Higher capability for mobility service
XGP is constructed on the same mobile communication structure as Original PHS. It is absolutely
possible to operate Original PHS and XGP in the co-existing network and to supply both services
within the same area.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

43

The concept of co-existence situation is shown in Figure 0. The MS for Original PHS can makecommunication to Original PHS and Dual type Base Station (BS). The Mobile Station (MS) for
XGP can make communication to XGP and Dual type BS. The Dual type MS can makecommunication to all kinds of BS. It is possible for both systems to be on service in the same
network.

Original PHS
MS1
(PHS)

BS1
(PHS)

MS2
(Dual)

Access Network

BS2(Dual)

XGP
BS3
(XGP)

MS3
(XGP)

MS: Mobile Station
BS: Base Station
PHS: Original PHS
XGP: eXtended Global Platform
Dual: Hybrid of Original PHS and XGP
Figure 0 Concept of Co-existence with Original PHS
Original PHS specifications is compliance with the reference document 1-1.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

44

Chapter 1 General
1.1 Overview
The standard is provided to specify the radio interface of communication systems that performs
XGP.
1.2 Application Scope
XGP is composed of MS, BS and Relay Station (RS) (radio stations which relay communication
between BS and MS) shown in Figure 1.1.
This standard specifies the radio interface between BS and MS, as shown in Figure 1.1, for XGP.

MobileMSstation

MobileMSstation

BaseBS
stationAccessEquipment
Network

Regulated Point (Um Point)

Relay
RS
stationRegulated Point (Um Point)

BaseBS
stationAccess Network
Equipment

Figure 1.1 Structure of XGP

A-GN4.00-03-TS

45

1.3 Mandatory and Optional
This standard includes both mandatory and optional descriptions.
The items necessary for system interface are defined as mandatory, and the items that dependon the manufacture are defined as optional.
1.4 Public Mode and Private Mode
Original PHS takes both service forms in public mode and in private mode. Because Original PHS
concept is that it is utilized both in public system such as office extension line and in private
system such as home circuit, XGP will have the same function of public mode and private mode.
The standard of private mode will be defined in the future.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

46

Chapter 2 System Overview
2.1 System Structure
XGP consists of MS, BS and relay station which relays communications between BS and MS(hereinafter, referred to as RS).
2.1.1 Mobile Station (MS)A mobile station, or a subscriber communication terminal, is used to make mobile radio
communication to either mobile station or base station.
A mobile station consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitter and receiver; interface toexternal equipments, voice encoding equipment, control equipment, and a sending/receiving
handset etc.
In addition, the terminal, such as personal computer, can be connected to the MS if needed.
2.1.2 Base Station (BS)A base station carries out mobile radio communication with mobile stations.
A base station consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitter and receiver and control
equipment.
2.1.3 Relay Station (RS)A relay station relays mobile radio communication between BS and MS. The detail specificationof RS will be defined in the future.
Counterpart of relay station to BS or MS consists of radio equipment with antenna, transmitterand receiver and control equipment.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

47

2.2 Interface Definition
There is “Um” interface point for XGP, as shown in Figure 2.1.
Scope of Specifications
BS

Access Network
Equipment

MS2

BS

Access Network
Equipment

MS3

RS

MS0

MS1

Um
- Um Point: Interface point between MS and BS, interface point between RS and BS orMS, or interface point between MS and MS.

- MS0, MS1, MS2, MS3: MS, including integrated man/machine interface with terminals etc.

Figure 2.1 Interface Points

A-GN4.00-03-TS

48

2.3 Frequency Structure
Figure 2.2 shows relation among system bandwidth, effective channel bandwidth and guard
bandwidth.
See more details in the following sections.
Guard Bandwidth

Guard Bandwidth

Effective Channel Bandwidth

Frequency

System Bandwidth

Figure 2.2 Frequency Structure
2.3.1 System Bandwidth (SBW)
System bandwidth is defined as total bandwidth including guard bandwidth and effective channel
bandwidth and can be chosen from 1.25MHz, 2.5 MHz, 5 MHz, 10 MHz, 20MHz, 22.5MHz,
25MHz and 30 MHz.
2.3.2 Effective Channel Bandwidth (ECBW)
Effective channel bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth excluding guard bandwidth from system
bandwidth. One or more users can exist in this bandwidth.
2.3.3 Guard Bandwidth (GBW)
Guard bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth to prevent interference into/from the adjacentsystem.
The structure in frequency domain for XGP is shown in Figure 2.2. Half of GBW is set to eachside of frequency that is either lower or higher than ECBW.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

49

2.3.4 Frequency Structure Parameters
Summary of actual values which is explained in Section 2.3 is shown in Table 2.1.
Table 2.1 Frequency Structure Parameters
System Bandwidth [MHz]

1.25

2.5

Effective Channel Bandwidth [MHz]Guard Bandwidth [MHz]Frequency Division Downlink (DL)Multiple Access
Uplink (UL)
Method

0.9
0.35

1.8
0.7

System Bandwidth [MHz]22.5

Effective Channel Bandwidth [MHz]Guard Bandwidth [MHz]Frequency Division Downlink (DL)Multiple Access
Uplink (UL)
Method

19.8
2.7

5
3.6
1.4

10

20

4.5 8.1 9
0.5 1.9 1
OFDMA

16.2
3.8

17.1 18
2.9 2

OFDMA/SC-FDMA
25
21.6
3.4

30
22.5
2.5

24.3 25.2
5.7
4.8
OFDMA

26.1
3.9

27
3

OFDMA/SC-FDMA

A-GN4.00-03-TS

50

2.4 Access Method
The access method of DL for XGP is OFDMA/TDMA-TDD.
The access method of UL for XGP is OFDMA/TDMA-TDD or SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD.
TDD frame period is 2.5ms, 5 ms and 10ms.
The ratio between transmission and the reception slots are variable and their combination are
repeated.
Each slot time is 625 us and TDMA access, and is operated by single carrier for Original PHS.
XGP has the same frame format as Original PHS, and adopts the OFDMA for frequency divisionmultiple access.
UL
FrequencyDL

5 ms/frame
Time

UL
Frequency

TDMA-TDD (Original PHS)
DL

Time

1 frameFigure 2.3 OFDMA/SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD (XGP) in case of 5ms frame and UL/DL equal ratio
2.4.1 Transmission Method
The basic configurations for XGP are shown in Table 2.2.
Table 2.2 Basic Configuration of XGP
Basic Configuration
Duplex Method
DL Access Method
UL Access Method
TDMA Frame Period
Sub-carrier Spacing

Contents
TDD
OFDMA/TDMA
OFDMA, SC-FDMA/TDMA
2.5, 5, 10 ms
10.94kHz,12.5 kHz,15 kHz, 37.5 kHz

A-GN4.00-03-TS

51

Number of Slots in One Frame

The number of slot is adopted 4, 8 and 16 slots
per 1 frame and the structure is symmetly orasymmetry.
- 4 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 1 to 3.
- 8 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 1 to 7.
- 16 slots : Both of transmission and reception
slots are between 2 to 14.

Number of Subchannels-1 subchannel in 1.25 MHz system bandwidth-2 subchannels in 2.5 MHz system bandwidth-4 subchannels in 5 MHz system bandwidth-9 subchannels or 10 subchannels in 10 MHz
system bandwidth-18 subchannels, 19 subchannels or 20
subchannels in 20 MHz system bandwidth-22 subchannels in 22.5 MHz
system bandwidth-24 subchannels or 25 subchannels in 25 MHz
system bandwidth-27 subchannels, 28 subchannels, 29
subchannels or 30 subchannels in 30 MHz
system bandwidth

Refer to Sections 2.4.2, 2.4.2.1 and 2.4.2.2 for TDMA slot and TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 2.4.3.2 for subchannel.
2.4.2 TDMA (Time Division Multiple Access)Figure 2.4 shows an example of TDMA slot arrangement in the light of appropriate
sending/receiving slot separation in TDD transmission.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

52

5 ms
2.5 ms

2.5 ms625 us
MS→BS

V

U2

V

U4

V

D2

V

D4

MS(1)→BS

V

U2

V

V

V

D2

V

V

MS(2)→BS

V

V

V

U4

V

V

V

D4

U: UL, D : DL, V : VacantUi - Di : Corresponding UL / DL slot
Figure 2.4 TDMA Slot Arrangement in case of 5ms symmetrical frame
2.4.2.1 TDMA Slot
A slot is a minimum unit that composes TDMA, and its period is 625 us. This period is the sameas Original PHS.
2.4.2.2 TDMA Frame
A frame is composed one of 4, 8 or 16 slots. A frame structure is symmetly or asymmetry
depended on the ration between UL and DL. The structure should be calculated as follows.
1 frame = 625us  ( NUSL + N DSL )UL slot " NUSL": 1  NUSL  14
DL slot " N DSL": 1  N DSL  14
Total number of slot : NUSL + N DSL = 4, 8 or 16
Transmission burst lengths for UL and DL are below.
UL：625us× NUSL or under （1≤NUSL≤14）
DL：625us× NDSL or under （1≤NDSL≤14）

A-GN4.00-03-TS

53

Frame : 2.5, 5 or 10 ms
UL Subframe : 625 us x N USL ms

DL Subframe : 625 us x N DSL ms

Slot :
625 usSlot1.......

Slot
N USL

Slot1

.......

Slot
N DSL

Figure 2.5 TDMA frame structure
Figure 2.5 shows the TDMA frame structure.
Example for 1 frame is composed 16 slots, NUSL is 4 slots and NDSL is 12 slots, UL time per 1
frame is 2.5ms and DL‟s is 7.5ms.
Transmission burst lengths tolerance is less than or equal to +5us/+5us, and greater than orequal to -30us/-50us for BS/MS.
2.4.2.3 Mandatory TDMA frame structure
Both of MS and BS should be supported the following TDMA structure. And the other is optional- Frame length: 5ms- The number of UL slot “NUSL”: 4 slots- The number of DL slot “NDSL”: 4 slots
2.4.2.4 Limitation for expanded TDMA frame structure
Expanded frame structure as asymmetry, 2.5ms and 10 ms described in section 2.4.2.2 has alimitation as follows.
- Supported System Bandwidth is 1.25, 2.5, 5 and 10MHz.
- MIMO is not supported
More expansion will be specified in the future.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

54

2.4.3 OFDMA (Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access)Figure 2.6 shows the OFDMA subchannel structure.
Subcarrier Spacing

Guard Carrier

DC Carrier

Subcarrier

Frequency
Subchannel

Subcarrier
number

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17 19 21 23 Frequency
18 20 22
24

Figure 2.6 OFDMA Structure

A-GN4.00-03-TS

55

Figure 2.7 shows an example of OFDMA subchannel arrangement for a specificsending/receiving slot in which multiple access is realized in frequency domain.

Effective Channel Bandwidth
SCH 1 SCH 2 SCH 3 SCH 4 SCH 5
BS→MS

CH1

V

CH2

V

CH3

SCH i
V

SCH i : Subchannel Number V : Vacant
CH N : CHannel transmission/reception
MS(1)→BS CH1

V

V

V

V

V

MS(2)→BS

V

V

CH2

V

V

V

MS(3)→BS

V

V

V

V

CH3

V

Figure 2.7 OFDMA Frequency Arrangement
2.4.3.1 Subcarrier Spacing
Subcarrier is defined as a “carrier” of OFDM in XGP.
In addition, plural subcarriers can be used as one block at the same time.
Subcarrier spacing is defined at 10.94kHz,12.5kHz,15kHz or 37.5 kHz as a space between
neighboring subcarriers.
2.4.3.2 Subchannel (SCH)
Subchannel is defined as a group of subcarriers with 900 kHz bandwidth. Subchannel iscomposed of 24 subcarriers. The lowest frequency subcarrier included in one subchannel isdefined as subcarrier No. 1. The highest frequency subcarrier included in one subchannel isdefined as subcarrier No. 24. Figure 2.8 shows subchannel number in each ECBW.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

56

SBW = 1.25 MHz, ECBW = 900 kHz
SCH
1900 kHz

Frequency

SBW = 2.5 MHz, ECBW = 1.8 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2
Frequency

SBW = 5 MHz, ECBW = 3.6 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4
Frequency

SBW = 10 MHz, ECBW = 8.1 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4

SCH
9
Frequency

SBW = 10 MHz, ECBW = 9 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4

SCH
9

SCH
10
Frequency

SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 16.2 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4

SCH
9

SCH
10

SCH
18
Frequency

SCH
9

SCH
10

SCH
18

SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 17.1 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4

SCH
19
Frequency

SBW = 20 MHz, ECBW = 18 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
2

SCH
3

SCH
4

SCH
9

SCH
10

SCH
18

SCH SCH
19
20
Frequency

A-GN4.00-03-TS

57

SBW = 22.5 MHz, ECBW = 19.8 MHz
kHz
SCH
SCH
1
900 kHz

22
Frequency

SBW = 25 MHz, ECBW = 21.6 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SCH
24
Frequency

SBW = 25 MHz, ECBW = 22.5 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SCH
24

SCH
25
Frequency

SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 24.3 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SCH
24

SCH
25

SCH
27
Frequency

SCH
25

SCH
27

SCH
28
Frequency

SCH
24

SCH
25

SCH
27

SCH
28

SCH
29
Frequency

SCH
24

SCH
25

SCH
27

SCH
28

SCH
29

SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 25.2 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SCH
24

SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 26.1 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SBW = 30 MHz, ECBW = 27 MHz
SCH
1

SCH
22

SCH
23

SCH
30
Frequency

Figure 2.8 Definition of Subchannel Number in each ECBW

A-GN4.00-03-TS

58

2.4.3.3 DC Carrier
DC carrier is not used for data transmission. When one subchannel is in use, DC carrier is set at
subcarrier No. 13 as shown in Figure 2.6. The way to set DC carrier for the improvement of data
throughput is described in Section 2.7.
2.4.3.4 Guard Carrier
To avoid the interference between subcarriers used by different MS, the guard carrier is not used
for data transmission. Guard carrier insertion depends on the DL/UL subchannel format. Whenone subchannel is in use, guard carrier is set at subcarrier No. 1 as shown in Figure 2.6. The way
to set guard carrier for the improvement of data throughput is described in Section 2.7.
2.4.4 OFDMA and TDMA
This XGP allows both frequency division multiple access and time division multiple access. Figure
2.9 shows the example of the combination of OFDMA/TDMA access. The detail of channel
assignment is defined in 0.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

59

Time
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3

V
V
V

V
V
V

V

SCH i

U1

V

V

V
U2

V

Frequency

V
V
V

V
V
V

V

D1

V

V

V
D2

V

BS→MS
U : UL D : DL V : VacantUi – Di : Corresponding UL/DL Slot

SCH1

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

SCH2
SCH3

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

SCH i

U1

V

V

V

D1

V

V

V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V

V

V

V

V

MS(1)→BS

SCH1
SCH2
SCH3

V
V
V

V
V
V

V

SCH i

V

V

V

V
U2

V

D2

V

MS(2)→BS

Figure 2.9 OFDMA/TDMA Slot Arrangement

2.4.5 Single Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) Mode Coexistence with
OFDMA ULXGP has SC-FDMA mode in UL, and allows the coexistence of SC-FDMA and OFDMA. Figure
2.10 shows the example of the combination of OFDMA and SC-FDMA UL access.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

60

Time
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3

V
V
V

V
V
V

V

SCH i

U1

U2

V

V
U3

V

V
V
V

V
V
V

VI

D1

D2

V

VI
D3

V

BS→MS(OFDMA and SC-FDMA UL)U : UL D : DL V : VacantFrequency

Ui – Di : Corresponding UL/DL Slot
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3

SCH i

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V
V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

V

U1

V

V

V

D1

V

V

V

MS(1)(OFDMA)→BS
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

V
V
V

SCH i

V

U2

V

V

V

D2

V

V

V

V

V

V

V
V

V
V

V

V

MS(2)(SC-FDMA)→BS
SCH1

V

V

SCH2
SCH3

V
V

V
V

SCH i

V

V

V

V
U3

V

V

D3

V

V

MS(2)(OFDMA)→BS
Figure 2.10 OFDMA and SC-FDMA Slot Arrangement

A-GN4.00-03-TS

61

2.5 Physical Resource Unit (PRU)
The word PRU defined in XGP stands for a block divided by the time axis unit (TDMA slot 625 us)
and the frequency axis unit (OFDM subchannel 900 kHz) for 37.5kHz Subcarrier Spacing. Figure
2.11 shows the correspondence between subchannel number and PRU number.

UL 2.5 ms

DL 2.5 ms

Time

SCH1

PRU

PRU

PRU

PRU

PRU

PRU

PRU

PRU

1

2

3

4

1

2

SCH2

PRU
5

PRU
6

PRU
7

PRU
8

PRU
5

PRU
6

3
PRU
7

4
PRU
8

SCH i

PRU
n-3

PRU
n-2

PRU
n-1

PRU
n

PRU
n-3

PRU
n-2

PRU
n-1

PRU
n

Frequency

Subchannel
TDMA Slot

SCH i : Subchannel Number (i = 1~m, m=1,2,4,9,10,18,19,20,22,24,25,27,28,29, 30)
PRU n : PRU number (n = 4*m)
Figure 2.11 Correspondence between Subchannel Number and PRU Number in case of 5ms
symmetric frame
Table 2.3 PRU
System Bandwidth [MHz]

1.25

2.5

5

10

20

Effective Channel Bandwidth[MHz]
Subchannel Bandwidth [kHz]Number of Subchannels

0.9

1.8

3.6 4.5

8.1

9

16.2

17.1

18

1

2

4

-

900
9
10

18

19

20

Total Number of PRU (in caseof 4 slots)
TDMA Slot Period [us]

4

8

16

25

36

72

76

80

40

625

A-GN4.00-03-TS

62

System Bandwidth [MHz]22.5

Effective Channel Bandwidth[MHz]
Subchannel Bandwidth [kHz]Number of Subchannels
Total Number of PRU
TDMA Slot Period [us]

19.8

22
88

25
21.6

24
96

30
22.5

24.3

25.2

26.1

27

25
100

900
27
108
625

28
112

29
116

30
120

For 10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz Subcarrier Spacing, PRU defined in XGP stands for a blockDL

divided by the frequency axis unit ( N scRU consecutive subcarriers) and time axis unit ( N symb DL
UL
consecutive OFDM symbols or N symb
consecutive OFDM symbols). The parameters of PRU for

10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz are given in Table 2.4.
Table 2.4 Physical Resource Units Parameters for △f =10.94kHz, 12.5kHz and 15kHz
Subcarrier Spacing Configuration

RU
N sc

DL
N symb(or

10.94 kHz18

6

12.5 kHz126

15 KHz

12

7

UL
N symb)

A virtual resource unit is of the same size as a physical resource unit. Two types of virtual
resource units are defined:- Virtual resource units of localized type
- Virtual resource units of distributed typeFor each type of virtual resource units, a pair of virtual resource units over two half-slots in a slot
is assigned together by a single virtual resource unit number, nVRU .

2.6 Frame Structure
Figure 2.12 shows the frame structure in each ECBW in case of 5ms symmetrical frame.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

63

900kHz
PRU 4

PRU 5

PRU 6

PRU 7

PRU 8

PRU 5

PRU 6

PRU 7

PRU 8

PRU 9

PRU 10PRU 11

PRU 12PRU 9

PRU 10PRU 11

PRU 12

PRU 13

PRU 14

PRU 15

PRU 16

PRU 13

PRU 14

PRU 15

PRU 16

PRU 33

PRU 34

PRU 35

PRU 36

PRU 33

PRU 34

PRU 35

PRU 36

PRU 37

PRU 38

PRU 39PRU 40PRU 37

PRU 38

PRU 39PRU 40PRU 69PRU 70PRU 71

PRU 72

PRU 69PRU 70PRU 71

PRU 72

PRU 73

PRU 74

PRU 75

PRU 76

PRU 73

PRU 74

PRU 75

PRU 76

PRU 77

PRU 78

PRU 79PRU 80PRU 77

PRU 78

PRU 79PRU 80PRU 85

PRU 86

PRU 87

PRU 88

PRU 85

PRU 86

PRU 87

PRU 88

PRU 93

PRU 94

PRU 95

PRU 96

PRU 93

PRU 94

PRU 95

PRU 96

PRU 97

PRU 98

PRU 99PRU 100

PRU 97

PRU 98

PRU 99PRU 100

16.2 MHz
19.8MHz
21.6MHz22.5 MHz
24.3 MHzPRU 105 PRU 106 PRU 107 PRU 108 PRU 105 PRU 106 PRU 107 PRU 108
PRU 109 PRU 110 PRU 111 PRU 112 PRU 109 PRU 110 PRU 111 PRU 112
PRU 113 PRU 114 PRU 115 PRU 116 PRU 113 PRU 114 PRU 115 PRU 116

18 MHzPRU 3

17.1 MHzPRU 2

27 MHzPRU 1

26.1 MHz

PRU 4

9 MHz

PRU 3

25.2 MHz

PRU 2

8.1

PRU 1

3.6

DL

1.8MHzUL

PRU 117 PRU 118 PRU 119 PRU 120 PRU 117 PRU 118 PRU 119 PRU 120

Frequency

UL PRUDL PRU

Figure 2.12 Frame Structure in case of 5ms symmetrical frame
Figure 2.13. shows the frame structure in case of 10ms frame. Each frame consists of two 5ms
half-frames. Each half-frame consists of five slots of length 1ms. Each slot is defined as two
half-slots of length 0.5ms. Downlink slot is reserved for downlink transmissions, uplink slot isreserved for uplink transmissions.
The special slot exists in both half-frames. Slot 1 and Slot 6 are reserved for special slot with thethree fields DSS, AGT and USS. Two special slot configuration can be used according to different
deployment scenario. For the first slot configuration, the length of DSS isof USS is103
ms and the length
480

137
343
ms . For the second slot configuration, the length of DSS is
ms and the960
480

A-GN4.00-03-TS64

length of USS is

137
ms .
960

There are four supported uplink-downlink configurations. Slot 0 and 5 and DSS are always
reserved for downlink transmission. USS and the slot immediately following the special slot (Slot
2 and Slot 7) are always reserved for uplink transmission.For Uplink-downlink configuration 0,
Slot 3,4,8 and 9 are configured for uplink transmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 1, Slot 4
and 9 are configured for downlink transmission and slot 3 and 8 are configured for uplinktransmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 2, Slot 3,4,8 and 9 are configured for downlink
transmission. For Uplink-downlink configuration 3, Slot 9 is configured for downlink transmission
and slot 3,4 and 8 are configured for uplink transmission.
Frame: 10 ms
half-frame: 5ms

half-frame: 5ms

half-slot
0.5ms

Slot #0

Slot #1

Slot #2

Slot #3

Slot #4

Slot #5

Slot #6

Slot #7

Slot #8

Slot #9

One slot
1ms

Figure 2.13.

Frame structure for 10ms frame

Transmission burst lengths for UL and DL generally correspond to those of described in section
2.4.2.2 “TDMA Frame”.
e.g. Lengths of the configuration 1 are correspond to the lengths in case of “NUSL=4, NDSL=4”.
Lengths of the configuration 2 (some patterns) are correspond to the lengths in cases of“NUSL=3, NDSL=5 and NUSL=2, NDSL=6”
2.7 Full Subcarrier Mode
Full subcarrier mode is optional and is used only in DL. When full subcarrier mode is used, all of
DC carriers and guard carriers except central subcarrier are replaced with data symbols. Details
are described in Appendix A.
2.8 Multiple Input and Multiple Output Control
Multiple Input and Multiple Output (MIMO), compared with Single Input and Single Output (SISO),is a technique to increase the data throughput without additional bandwidth. MIMO transfers
multiple data streams in parallel by using multiple antennas at the transmitter and receiver. In
addition, it has an effect to provide stable communications by the transmission diversity function.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

65

2.9 Protocol Model
Protocol model is composed of link establishment phase, access establishment phase andaccess phase.
2.9.1 Link Establishment Phase
Link establishment phase is defined as the stage to use common channel (CCH) functions to
select the protocol type required in the next phase.
2.9.2 Access Establishment Phase
Access establishment phase is defined as the stage to use functions which is obtained in the linkestablishment phase to select the protocol type required in the next phase.
2.9.3 Access Phase
In the access phase, it is possible to employ the optimum channel and the optimum protocol foreach service.
2.9.4 Optional Protocol Model
2.9.4.1 User plane
Figure 2.14 shows the protocol stack for the user-plane, where MSL 1, MSL 2 and MSL 3
sublayers (terminated in BS on the network side) perform the functions listed for the user plane,e.g. header compression, ciphering, scheduling, ARQ and HARQ;
MS

BS
MSL 3

MSL 3

MSL 2

MSL 2

MSL 1

MSL 1

PHY

PHY

Figure 2.14 User-plane protocol stack
2.9.4.2 Control plane
The figure below shows the protocol stack for the control-plane, where:

A-GN4.00-03-TS66

- MSL 3 (terminated in BS on the network side) performs the functions, e.g. ciphering andintegrity protection;- MSL 2 and MSL 1 sublayers (terminated in BS on the network side) perform the samefunctions as for the user plane;- Radio connection (terminated in BS on the network side) performs the function,
e.g.:Broadcast, Paging, Radio connection management, Mobility functions, MS
measurement reporting and control.
MS

BS
Radio
connection

Radio
connection

MSL 3

MSL 3

MSL 2

MSL 2

MSL 1

MSL 1

PHY

PHY

Figure 2.15 Control-plane protocol stackA-GN4.00-03-TS

67

2.10 Correspondence of PRU, Function Channel and Physical Channel
Figure 2.16 shows function channel classification.
ICH (Individual Channel)

CCH(Common Channel)

BCCH (Broadcast Control Channel)
ABCCH(Advanced BCCH)ECCH (EXCH Control Channel)
ADECCH(Advanced DL ECCH)AUANCH(Advanced UL ANCHl)
For Control

PCH (Paging Channel)

ICCH (Individual Control Channel)
ADEFICH(ADECCH Format Indicator)
ADHICH(Advanced DL HARQ Indicator)

SCCH (Signaling Control Channel)

ACCH (Accompanied Control Channel)

TCCH (Timing Correct Channel)
ATCCH(Advanced TCCH)EDCH (EXCH Data Channel)
ADEDCH(Advanced DL EDCH)
AUEDCH(Advanced UL EDCH)

For Control orCommunication

CDCH (CSCH Data Channel)
TCH (Traffic Channel)

Figure 2.16 Function Channel Classification
Table 2.5 explains function channel.
Table 2.5 Function Channel Description
Channel Name
BCCH
ABCCH
PCH
CCH
SCCH
TCCH
ATCCH

Function Description
BCCH is a DL channel to broadcast the control information fromBS to MS.
ABCCH is a optinal Advanced DL channel to broadcast the control
information from BS to MS.
PCH is a DL channel to inform the paging information from BS to
MS.
SCCH is both DL and UL channel for LCH assignment. DL SCCH
notifies allocation of an individual channel to MS. And, UL SCCH
requests LCH re-assignment to BS.
TCCH is an UL channel to detect UL transmission timing. Also,
MS requires LCH establishment using TCCH.
ATCCH is an UL channel to detect and correct UL transmission
timingA-GN4.00-03-TS

68

Channel NameECCHADECCH
AUANCHADEFICHADHICH
ICCH
ICH

ACCH
EDCH
ADEDCH
AUEDCH
CDCH
TCH

Function Description
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which put into ANCH. It has
some information to control channel allocation, modulation
method, transmission power and timing and others for EXCH.
Advanced Downlink ECCH
Advanced Uplink ANCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel, used forindicating the region of ADECCH in XGP mode 2
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel, used forsending ACK/NACK of UL data
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which put into ANCH. It
transmits the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional control channel which accompanies TCH in
CSCH. It transmits the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into EXCH. It transmits user
traffic data or the signaling message.
DL channel transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL channel transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into allocated CSCH. It
transmits user traffic data or the signaling message.
UL/DL bidirectional channel which put into CSCH. It transmits user
traffic data.

Figure 2.17 shows the correspondence of between PHY PRU and function channel in each
protocol phase.

PRU

Protocol Link Establishment
Phase Phase
UL

SCCH
TCCH

DL

BCCH
PCH
SCCH

CCH

ICH

AccessEstablishment
Phase

Access Phase

ICCH

ECCH
ICCH
ACCH
EDCH
CDCH
TCH

Figure 2.17 Correspondence between PHY PRU and Function Channel in Each Protocol Phase

A-GN4.00-03-TS69

2.11 Service Description
XGP provides various wireless telecommunication services. There are not only bearer of voice
but also packet data communication such as VoIP, Video-phone, Streaming and Multi-castservice. The services are based on a network constructed with IP etc, and providing packet
transporter for air-interface.
2.12 Protocol Structure
The protocol structure of XGP is shown in
Figure 2.18. The protocol layer between MS and BS consists of PHY and MAC layer.
PHY layer controls physical wireless line between MS and BS. It defines the modulation method,
physical frame format etc. The details are described in Chapter 3.
MAC layer controls link establishment, channel assignment, channel quality maintenance etc.
The detail function is described in Chapter 4 and 5.
The upper network layer is based on IP protocols etc. This document complies with thespecification of PHY and MAC layer between MS and BS.

(Network
layer)(Network layer)
Scope of specification
XGP MACXGP MAC

MAC

MAC

XGP PHYXGP PHY

PHY

PHY

MS

BS
Figure 2.18 Protocol Stack for XGP

Network

A-GN4.00-03-TS

70

Chapter 3 Physical Channel Specification
3.1 Overview
This chapter describes the technical requirements applied to radio transmission facilities for XGP.
The following physical (PHY) layer specification is designed to satisfy the functional requirementsthat have been defined for XGP. It incorporates many aspects of existing standards in order toensure reliable operation in the targeted 1 GHz to 3 GHz frequency band. In addition, PHY layer
was designed with a high degree of flexibility in order to provide operators in different regulatory
domains with the ability to optimize system deployments with respect to cell planning, costconsiderations, radio capabilities, offered services, and capacity requirements.
The DL PHY layer described in this chapter is based on Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
and Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access (OFDMA) modulation. The general conditionof OFDM PHY layer is described in Section 3.2. The details of the DL PHY layer are described in
Section 3.4.
The UL PHY layer described in this chapter is based on TDMA and OFDMA modulation or TDMA
and Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) modulation. UL PHY layer incompliance with this standard shall support at least either OFDMA or SC-FDMA. The generalcondition of SC PHY layer is described in Section 3.3. The detail of the UL OFDM PHY layer is
described in Section 3.5. The details of the UL SC PHY layer are described in Section 3.6.
Physical channel is composed of two channels - Common Channel (CCH) and Individual Channel(ICH). CCH is composed of two channels – Common Control Channel (CCCH) and Timing
Correct Channel (TCCH). ICH is composed of three channels - Anchor Channel (ANCH), Extra
Channel (EXCH) and Circuit Switching Channel (CSCH). CCCH format is described in Sections
3.4.8.1.1, 3.5.6.1.1 and 3.6.7.1.1. TCCH format is described in Sections 3.5.6.1.2 and 3.6.7.1.2.
ANCH is described in Sections 3.4.8.1.2, 3.5.6.2.1 and 3.6.7.2.1. EXCH format is described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.3, 3.5.6.2.2 and 3.6.7.2.2. CSCH format is described in Sections 3.4.8.1.4,
3.5.7.2.3 and 3.6.7.2.3. The detail of ICH is described in Chapter 4. The detail of CCH is
described in Chapter 5. Additional optional DL Physical channels are composed of: ADEDCH,ABCCH, ADEFICH, ADECCH and ADHICH. Additional optional UL Physical channel arecomposed of: AUEDCH, AUANCH and ATCCH.
Subcarrier spacing in frequency is dictated by the multipath characteristics of the channels inwhich XGP is designated to operate. As the channel propagation characteristics depend on the
topography of the area and on the cell radius, the amount of carriers into which the channels are
subdivided depends on the overall channel width and the carrier spacing. This PHY layer
specification contains the programmability to deal with this range of applications.
Generally, several MIMO types have been already established. The effect achieved by the MIMO
technology includes array gain, space diversity, spatial multiplexing, and interference reduction.
In this document, the MIMO functions up to four streams is defined. The MIMO function relates to
A-GN4.00-03-TS

71

STBC, SM and EMB-MIMO method.
3.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer
3.2.1 OFDM Burst Structure
Figure 3.1 describes a frame structure for OFDM transmission method. As shown in the figure,
OFDM burst consists of 19 OFDM symbols and OFDM burst length is defined as 573.33 us and
580 us in one slot of UL and DL, respectively. Guard time is the time between the OFDM burst
and subsequent OFDM burst. And the total guard time length is defined as 51.67 us and 45 us in
one slot. For OFDM, a modulated symbol is mapped and then is sent in each subcarrier. In one
frame, several units of data are processed in symbols.
Frame : 2.5, 5 or 10 ms
UL Subframe : 625 us x N UL ms

DL Subframe : 625 us x N DL ms

Slot :
625 usSlot1
UL: 21.67 us
DL: 15 us.......

Slot N UL

Slot1.......

UL OFDM Burst : 573.33 us
DL OFDM Burst : 580 us

Guard Time

OFDM Burst

Slot N DL

30.00 us
Guard TimeS1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
OFDM Symbol
GI

OFDM Data

Figure 3.1 OFDM Symbols
Another optional downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with 10ms
duration. Each radio frame consists of two half-frames. Each half-frame consists of five slots.
Each slot i is defined as two half-slots. Please refer to section 2.6.
3.2.2 OFDM Symbol Structure for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing
OFDM symbol is composed of OFDM data and Guard Interval (GI) as shown in Figure 3.2.
OFDM data length is defined as the reciprocal of subcarrier spacing and is 26.67 us for 37.5 kHz

A-GN4.00-03-TS

72

subcarrier spacing. GI is described in Section 3.2.2.1. There are two OFDM symbol lengths in
one OFDM burst. The first OFDM symbol (S1) length is defined as 33.33 and 40 us for DL and
UL, respectively. Other symbols (S2-S19) length is defined as 30 us.
3.2.2.1 Guard Interval
Guard Interval (GI) is defined as a time interval between OFDM symbols in order to avoid theinterference caused by delay spread. GI is the cyclic extension of the OFDM symbols itself. In
addition, the guard interval ratio is defined as the ratio of Data length and guard interval length.
As shown in Figure 3.2, GI for the first OFDM symbol (S1) in UL and DL is defined as 6.66 us and13.33 us, respectively. The GI ratio is defined as 1/4 and 1/2. For other symbols (S2-S19), GI is
defined as 3.33 us and GI ratio is defined as 1/8 as shown in Figure 3.3.

6.66 us33.33 us26.67 us40 us
13.33 usGI

OFDM Data

GI

26.67 us
OFDM Data

Copy

Copy

(a) UL(b) DL
Figure 3.2 Guard Interval (S1)

3.33 usGI

30.00 us26.67 us
OFDM Data
Copy

Figure 3.3 Guard Interval (S2-S19)

3.2.2.2 Windowing
Windowing may be used to alleviate discontinuity between symbols as shown in Figure 3.4. The
windowing function w(t) depends on the value of the duration parameter. Twin is the windowinginterval. Tgi and Tdata is guard interval duration and OFDM data duration. Figure 3.4. illustrates
smoothed transitions by applying the windowing function shown as follows.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

73


0

 0.5  0.5 cos    t  3Twin 2 
Twin w(t )   1  Twin 

0.5  0.5 cos T  t  Tgi  Tdata  2 
 win


0


Tgi

Twin

Tdata

GI

T
, t   win
2Twin
T t  win
,
2
2
T
T
, win  t  Tgi  Tdata  win
2
2
Twin
T
 t  Tgi  Tdata  win, Tgi  Tdata 
2
2
Twin
t
, Tgi  Tdata 
2

Twin

OFDM Data

t=0
GI

OFDM DataGI

OFDM Data

Figure 3.4 Windowing
3.2.3 OFDM Parameters for 37.5 kHz subcarrier spacing
OFDM parameters for XGP are shown in Table 3.1. One of 14 types, Type 1 to Type 14, can bechosen on slot-by-slot basis for MS and can be chosen on the system basis for BS.

Table 3.1 OFDM Parameters
Parameter

Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

System Bandwidth
[MHz]

2.5

5

10

10

20

20

20

Effective Channel
Bandwidth
[MHz]

1.8

3.6

8.1

9.0

16.2

17.1

18.0

A-GN4.00-03-TS

74

Used Subcarrier
Number(*1)

48

96

216

240

Subcarrier Spacing [kHz]37.5

SCH Bandwidth [kHz]900

Guard Interval Length [us]OFDM Data Length [us]OFDM Symbol Length [us]Guard Interval Ratio

432

456

480

6.66 (UL S1), 13.33 (DL S1)
3.33 (S2-S19)
26.67
33.33 (UL S1), 40 (DL S1)
30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (UL S1) 1/2 (DL S1)
1/8 (S2-S19)

Total Guard Time [us]51.67 (21.67 + 30; UL), 45 (15 + 30; DL)

OFDM Symbol Number
per Subcarrier

19

Windowing(*2)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

75

Parameter

Type Type Type Type Type Type Type
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

System Bandwidth
[MHz]

22.5

25

25

30

30

30

30

Effective Channel
Bandwidth
[MHz]

19.8

21.6

22.5

24.3

25.2

26.1

27.0

528

576

600

648

672

696

720

Used Subcarrier
Number(*1)
Subcarrier Spacing [kHz]37.5

SCH Bandwidth [kHz]900
6.66 (UL S1), 13.33 (DL S1)

Guard Interval Length [us]3.33 (S2-S19)

OFDM Data Length [us]26.67
33.33 (UL S1), 40 (DL S1)

OFDM Symbol Length [us]30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (UL S1) 1/2 (DL S1)

Guard Interval Ratio

1/8 (S2-S19)

Total Guard Time [us]51.67 (21.67 + 30; UL), 45 (15 + 30; DL)

OFDM Symbol Number
per Subcarrier

19

Windowing(*2)(*1) Include DC carrier and Guard carrier(*2) Refer to Section 3.2.2.2.
Although the length of 3.33 us, 6.66 us, 13.33 us, 26.67 us, 33.33 us, 21.67 us or 51.67 us isused in this document as either of GI length, OFDM data length, OFDM symbol length or guard
time for notational convenience, the corresponding length is precisely represented by 10/3 us,
20/3 us, 40/3 us, 80/3 us, 100/3 us, 65/3 us or 155/3 us, respectively.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

76

3.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer
3.3.1 SC Burst Structure
Figure 3.5 describes a frame structure for SC transmission method. As shown in the figure, one
SC burst consists of 19 SC blocks and SC burst length is defined as 573.33 us in one slot. Guard
time is the time between the SC burst and subsequent SC burst. Total guard time length isdefined as 51.67 us in one slot. For SC transmission method, modulated symbols are mapped
into SC blocks.
Frame : 5 ms
UL Subframe : 2.5 ms

DL Subframe : 2.5 ms

Slot :
625 us
Slot1

Slot2

Slot3

21.67 us

Slot4

S2

Slot2

Slot3

SC Burst : 573.33 us

Guard Time

S1

Slot1

30.00 usSC Burst

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8 S9

Slot4

Guard Time

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

SC Block with GIGI

SC Block

Figure 3.5 Structure of SC Burst for SC Transmission Method

3.3.2 SC Block Structure
SC block is composed of plural symbols. Guard Interval (GI) precedes the SC block as shown in
Figure 3.6. SC block length is 26.67 us without GI. GI is described in Section 3.3.2.1. There are
two GI lengths for SC block in one SC burst. The length of the first SC block with GI (S1) isdefined as 33.33 us. The length of other SC blocks with GI (S2-S19) is defined as 30 us.
3.3.2.1 Guard Interval

A-GN4.00-03-TS

77

GI is defined as a cyclic extension of the SC block in order to avoid the interference caused bydelay spread. Guard interval ratio is defined as the ratio of SC block and guard interval length. As
shown in Figure 3.6, GI length is defined as 6.66 us and GI ratio is defined as 1/4 for the first SC
block (S1). For other SC blocks (S2-S19), GI length is defined as 3.33 us and GI ratio is definedas 1/8 as shown in Figure 3.7.
33.33 us6.66 usGI

26.67 usSC Block
Copy

Figure 3.6 SC Block with Guard Interval (S1)

3.33 usGI

30.00 us26.67 usSC Block
Copy

Figure 3.7 SC Block with Guard Interval (S2 – S19)
3.3.2.2 Pulse Shaping Filter
Pulse shaping filter should be applied to a SC burst at the transmitter. Type of pulse shaping filter
should be Root Roll-Off Filter (RROF). Roll-off factor of RROF  is 0.45 for symbol rate of 0.6
Msps and 1.2 Msps, and is 0.36 for symbol rate of 2.4 Msps, 4.8 Msps and 9.6 Msps. Equation
3.1 shows the function of RROF pulse shaping filter.


t  T
t 
cos 1      s sin 1    
T
4

t
T
2
s
s


Pt  2
 Ts
 4t 1  
 Ts 

(3.1)

In this equation, Ts is the reciprocal of the symbol rate.

A-GN4.00-03-TS78

3.3.3 SC Parameters
SC Parameters for XGP are shown in Table 3.2. One of five types, Type 1 to Type 5, can bechosen on slot-by-slot basis. In this table, SC block size is defined as the number of symbols in a
SC block. GI size is defined as the number of symbols in GI.
Center frequencies for Type 1 to Type 5 are defined by referring to the PRU structure defined in
Section 3.4.8. A center frequency is represented as (m, n) indicating the n-th subcarrier (Fn) in
the m-th PRU. The PRUs, which are occupied by SC signal, are incrementally numbered fromlower frequency to higher frequency, and the initial value for m is 1. The center frequencies are(m,n)=(1,13) for type 1, (2,1) for type 2, (3,1) for type 3, (5,1) for type 4 and (9,1) for type 5.
Table 3.2 SC Parameters
Parameter

Type 1

Type 2Type 3

Type 4

Type 5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

Bandwidth [MHz]

0.9

1.8

3.6

7.2

14.4

Number of PRUs

1

2

4

8

16

Number of CRC Units

1

1

2

4

8

SC Block Size [symbol]

16

32

64

128

256

4 (S1)

8 (S1)

16 (S1)32 (S1)64 (S1)

GI Size [symbol]

2 (S2-S19) 4 (S2-S19) 8 (S2-S19) 16 (S2-S19) 32(S2-S19)
6.66 (S1)

Guard Interval Length [us]3.33 (S2-S19)

SC Block Length [us]26.67
33.33 (S1)

Length of SC Block with GI [us]30 (S2-S19)
1/4 (S1)

Guard Interval Ratio

1/8 (S2-S19)

Total Guard Time [us]51.67 (21.67 + 30)

Pulse Shaping Filter

Root Roll-off Filter

Roll-off Factor

0.45

0.45

0.36

0.36

0.36

Although the length of 3.33 us, 6.66 us, 26.67 us, 33.33 us, 21.67 us or 51.67 us is used in thisdocument as either of GI length, SC block length, SC block with GI length or guard time fornotational convenience, the corresponding length is precisely represented by 10/3 us, 20/3 us,80/3 us, 100/3 us, 65/3 us or 155/3 us, respectively.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

79

3.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer
Figure 3.8 describes a transmitter block diagram for OFDM transmission method.

Null

Modulation

S(t)

...

...

...

Sel

Training

Modulation

CRC
Attachment

Bit-Interleaving

S/P Conv (OFDM / TDM)

Encoding

Data

...

Modulation...

User A

IFFT

Pilot

P/S coverter

Scrambling

Guard interval insertion

Encoding

AAS / MIMO Precoding

SignalModulation

Scrambling

User B

Antenna 1
Antenna 2
Antenna Y
Channel Coding

Sel

...
User X

Sel

Figure 3.8 Transmitter Block Diagram
3.4.1 Channel Coding for PHY FramePHY frame consists of one or more Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) data unit(s). CRC-bits are
first appended to the CRC data unit. Then tail-bits are appended to the CRC data unit with
CRC-bits after performing scrambling. CRC unit is defined as the scrambled CRC data unit with
CRC-bits and tail-bits. The size of CRC unit is described in Chapter 4. The CRC unit is encoded
according to error-correcting code. Then, bit -interleaving is performed for error-correcting coded
bits, and the output bits of bit-interleaving are converted to IQ signals by modulation method.
Then, MIMO precoding is performed for IQ signals.
Figure 3.9 describes the channel coding block diagram for DL OFDM of Figure 3.8.
Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.9 Channel Coding

A-GN4.00-03-TS

80

Figure 3.10 describes an optional channel coding block diagram for DL transmission.
CRC
Attachment

Encoding

Rate Matching

Scrambing

Modulation

Layer Mapping

PrecodingFigure 3.10 Optinal Channel Coding

3.4.1.1 CRC

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Bitinterleaving

Encoding

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.11 CRC Attachment
CRC-bits are appended to each CRC data unit. CRC-bits are generated by either of the following
generation polynomials.
CRC-8: 1+X+X^3+ X^4+ X^7+ X^8
CRC-16 : 1 + X^5 + X^12 + X^16
CRC-24(A): 1+X+X^3+X^4 +X^5 + X^6+ X^7 + X^10+ X^11 + X^14++ X^17 + X^18+
X^23 + X^24
CRC-24(B) : 1 + X + X^5 + X^6 + X^23 + X^24 (Optional)
Figure 3.12 shows the method of CRC code for CRC-16. The Initial values of shift register SR1SR16 are set to all 1. Figure 3.13 shows the method of CRC code for CRC-24(B). The Initialvalues of shift register SR1-SR24 are set to all 1. The shift register of CRC encoder is initialized
for each CRC data unit. In case of Figure 3.12 and Figure 3.13, T1 is switched to the lower side
and T2 is closed when CRC-bits are calculated in CRC encoder. After all of data is input into
CRC encoder, T1 is switched to the upper side and T2 is opened to output CRC code.

SR1

...

SR5

SR6

...

SR12

...

SR13

SR16

T1
T2
: Exclusive OR

Data out

Data inFigure 3.12 The Method of CRC Code for CRC-16

A-GN4.00-03-TS

81

SR1

SR2

...

SR5

SR6

SR7

...

SR23

SR24

T1
T2

Data out

Data inFigure 3.13 The Method of CRC Code for CRC-24
CRC size depends on MAC described in Chapter 4. Application range of CRC is described in
Chapter 4.
CRC Unit

CRC-bits

Application Range

Reset

Figure 3.14 CRC Unit with CRC-bits
The Initial values of shift register for CRC-8, CRC-24(A) or CRC-24(B) should be set to all 0 for
Optional Channel Coding. If length of the input bit sequence is larger than the maximum code
block size 6144, segmentation of the input bit sequence is performed and an additional CRC
sequence is attached to each code block using the generator polynomial CRC-24(B).
3.4.1.2 Scrambling

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.15 Scrambling
The scramble pattern is identical for DL and UL transmission. The generation polynomial isdefined as follows:X^16 + X^12 + X^3 + X + 1
Figure 3.16 shows the structure of scrambling. Initial values of shift register SR16-SR1 are set tothe values shown in Table 3.3. The shift register of scrambler is initialized for each CRC data unit.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

82

Data In
SR1

SR2

SR3

SR4

SR5

SR6

SR7

SR8

SR9

SR10

SR11

SR12

SR13

SR14

SR15

SR16

Data Out

Figure 3.16 Scrambling
Table 3.3 Initial Value of Shift Register SR16-SR1 for Scrambling
Physical Channel

Initial Value of Shift Register SR16-SR1

CCH (for protocol version 1)

All 1

CCH (for protocol version 2)

1010 1010 1010 1010

ICH (EXCH only)

1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor MSID lower 15 bit

ICH(except for EXCH after confirmation of MSID)

1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor MSID lower 15 bit xor (SCH number – 1)
(*1)

ICH
(except for EXCH before confirmation of MSID)(*1) SCH number: Refer to Section 2.4.3.2.

1000 0000 0000 0000 xor BSID lower 15 bit
xor (SCH number – 1) (*1)

Application range of scrambling is CRC data unit and CRC-bits as shown in Figure 3.17.
CRC Data Unit
Reset

CRC-bits

Scrambling Application Range
Figure 3.17 Scrambling Application Range

Codeword is a block of coded bits to be transmitted on an optional physical channel. Eachcodeword shall be scrambled prior to modulation. The scrambling sequence is a length-31 Goldsequence and the generator shall be initialised at the start of each slot, where the initialisation
value of cinit depends on the transport channel type according toBScinit  nMSID  214  q  213  ns 2  29  N ID
where nMSID corresponds to the MSID associated with the ADEDCH transmission.

A-GN4.00-03-TS83

3.4.1.3 Encoding
Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.18 Encoding
Error correction code methods are defined as described below.
(a) Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/2) (Mandatory)(b) Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/3) (Optional)(c) Tail Biting Convolutional code (coding rate r=1/3)(d) Turbo code (Optional)
Table 3.4 summarizes the error correction code for physical channel.
Table 3.4 The Error Correction Code for Physical Channel
Physical channel
CCCH
ANCH
EXCH
CSCH

Error correction code
Convolutional code
Convolutional code
Convolutional/Turbo code
Convolutional code

A-GN4.00-03-TS

84

3.4.1.3.1 Error Correction Encoding
3.4.1.3.1.1 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/2) (Mandatory)
3.4.1.3.1.1.1 Convolutional Encoder
Constraint length of convolutional encoder is 7. Generation polynomials are G1=133 and G2=171
in octal representation. Figure 3.19 illustrates the constitution of convolutional encoder. For thisfigure, coding rate of convolutional coding becomes 1/2. The initial value of shift register inencoder is 6-bit 0. As an input to the encoder, tail-bits, which consist of 6-bit 0, are appended tothe end of scrambled data bits.
A(k)

I(k)

D

D

D

D

D

D

B(k)

INPUT I(k)Scrambled Data

6bit

Reset
OUTPUT A(k)tail-bits

A(k)OUTPUT B(k)B(k)
Figure 3.19 Generation Polynomial and Application Range of Convolutional Code

3.4.1.3.1.1.2 Puncturing Pattern
Encoded bits are punctured in order to change coding rate. Table 3.5 describes puncturing
pattern related with puncturing rate. In this table, 1 denotes the bits selected and 0 denotes thebits punctured. Figure 3.20 illustrates the puncturing procedure.
Table 3.5 Puncturing Pattern of Convolutional CodeA-GN4.00-03-TS

85

A
B

P uncturing rate R 2
3/4
4/6
6/10
11
110
11010
10
101
10101

1
1
1

R 2=3/4 I(1) I(2)A (1) A (2)B (1) B (2)R 2=4/6 I(1) I(2) I(3)8/1411110101000101

A (1) B (1) A (2)A (1) A (2) A (3)B (1) B (2) B (3)R 2=6/10 I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5)A (1) B (1) A (2) B (3)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5)A (1) B (1) A (2) B (3) A (4) B (5)R 2=8/14 I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7)A (1) B (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) B (5) A (6) B (7)Figure 3.20 Puncturing Procedure for Convolutional Code
3.4.1.3.1.2 Convolutional Code (coding rate r=1/3) (Optional)
3.4.1.3.1.2.1 Convolutional Encoder
Constraint length of convolutional encoder is 7. Generation polynomials are G1=133, G2=171
and G3=165 in octal representation. Figure 3.21 illustrates the constitution of convolutional
encoder. For this figure, coding rate of convolutional coding becomes 1/3. The initial value of shift
register in encoder is 6-bit 0. As an input to the encoder, tail-bits, which consist of 6-bit 0, areappended to the end of scrambled data bits.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

86

A(k)

I(k)

D

D

D

D

D

D

B(k)

C(k)

INPUT I(k)Scrambled Data

6bit
tail-bits

Reset
OUTPUT A(k)A(k)
OUTPUT B(k)B(k)
OUTPUT C(k)C(k)
Figure 3.21 Generation Polynomial and Application Range of Convolutional Code
3.4.1.3.1.3 Tail Biting Convolutional CodeA tail biting convolutional code with constraint length 7 and coding rate 1/3 is defined.
The configuration of the convolutional encoder is presented in Figure 3.22.
The initial value of the shift register of the encoder shall be set to the values corresponding to thelast 6 information bits in the input stream so that the initial and final states of the shift register are
the same. Therefore, denoting the shift register of the encoder by s 0 , s1 , s 2 ,...,s5 , then the initialvalue of the shift register shall be set to si  I K 1i  .

A-GN4.00-03-TS

87

Ik

D

D

D

D

D

D
Ak

G0 = 133 (octal)

Bk

G1 = 171 (octal)

Ck

G2 = 165 (octal)

Figure 3.22 Rate 1/3 Tail Biting Convolutional Encoder
The encoder output streams Ak , Bk and Ck correspond to the first, second and third parity
streams, respectively as shown in Figure 3.22.
3.4.1.3.1.4 Turbo Code (Optional)
3.4.1.3.1.4.1 Turbo Encoder
Turbo encoder consists of two recursive systematic convolutional encoders connected in parallel,with an interleaver, which is called turbo interleaver, preceding the second constituent encoder.
Output bits from turbo encoder consist of systematic bits I(k) and parity bits A(k) and B(k) fromeach constituent encoder. The two constituent encoders have the same structure as follows.
Generation polynomials of each constituent encoder are G1 = 15 and G2 = 13, which denote
feedforward and feedback polynomial in octal representation respectively. Figure 3.23 illustrates
the constitution of turbo encoder. For this figure, coding rate of turbo coding becomes 1/3.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

88

1st constituent encoder

I(k)
A(k)

I(k)
D

D

D

Turbo
Interleaver

2nd constituent encoder

I'(k)
B(k)

D

D

D

Figure 3.23 Structure of Turbo Encoder
3.4.1.3.1.4.2 Turbo Code Termination
After all information bits are encoded, trellis termination is performed by padding 6 tail-bits. First,
by setting switches to the down position, each encoder outputs 3 systematic bits and 3 parity bits.
If the number of information bits is N, outputs of 1st and 2nd constituent encoders are as follows:I(N+1), A(N+1), I(N+2), A(N+2), I(N+3), A(N+3) from 1st constituent encoder
I‟(N+1), B(N+1), I‟(N+2), B(N+2), I‟(N+3), B(N+3) from 2nd constituent encoder
Next, to generate rate-1/3 encoder outputs corresponding to the 6 tail-bits, every systematic bit isrepeated and 18 encoded bits are generated as follows:I(N+1), I(N+1), A(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+2), A(N+2), I(N+3), I(N+3), A(N+3),
I‟(N+1), I‟(N+1), B(N+1), I‟(N+2), I‟(N+2), B(N+2), I‟(N+3), I‟(N+3), B(N+3)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

89

After performing this repetition process, these tail-corresponding bits are rearranged and added
after I(N), A(N) and B(N) as follows:I(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+3), I‟(N+1), I‟(N+2) and I‟(N+3) are added after I(N),
I(N+1), I(N+2), I(N+3), I‟(N+1), I‟(N+2) and I‟(N+3) are added after A(N),A(N+1), A(N+2), A(N+3), B(N+1), B(N+2) and B(N+3) are added after B(N).
3.4.1.3.1.4.3 Turbo Interleaver
Turbo interleaver interleaves with input information bits, and transmits the interleaved bits to thesecond constituent encoder. Turbo interleaving is equivalent to a process, in which the entire
sequence of input information bits are written sequentially into an array, and then read out by thegiven procedure. The input bits to the turbo interleaver are denoted by I(1), I(2),…,I(d), where d isthe length of input bits. The procedure of interleaving is described as follows:
1. Determine the turbo interleaver parameter M and N as shown in Table 3.6.
Table 3.6 Turbo Interleaver Parameter M and N
Payload size

M

N

372

20

19

744

28

27

1116

34

33

1488

41

37

2232

48

47

2976

57

53

4464

69

65

5952

78

77

6696

83

81

8928

95

94

2. Write the input information bits into the M rows N columns matrix row by row starting with bit
a1,1 in column 1 of row 1 as shown in Figure 3.24.

a1,1

a1,2

a1,3

a1,N

a2,1

a2,2

a2,3

a2,N

A-GN4.00-03-TS

90

a3,1

a3,2

a3,3

a3,N

aM-1,1aM-1,2aM-1,3aM-1,N

aM,1

aM,2

aM,3

aM,N

Figure 3.24 Turbo Interleaver Matrix (Write-in)

If MN>d, dummy bits are padded in aM,N-MN+d+1 through aM,N. These dummy bits are pruned awayfrom read-out sequence.
3. Read out the interleaved bits as follows. First, set i=M and j=1. After reading out the bit ai,j, i isdecremented by 1 and j is incremented by 1. If i=0, then i is set to M. If j=N+1, then j is set to 1.
These process is repeated until M*N bits are read out. The order of reading out is described in
Figure 3.25.
a1,1

a1,2

a1,3

a1,N

a2,1

a2,2

a2,3

a2,N

a3,1

a3,2

a3,3

a3,N

aM-1,1aM-1,2aM-1,3aM-1,N

aM,1

aM,2

aM,3

aM,N

Figure 3.25 Turbo Interleaver Matrix (Read-out)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

91

Another optional procedure of interleaving is described as follows: the output index j and the input
index I(j) of the Turbo Interleaver satisfies the following quadratic form:
I ( j )   f1  j  f 2  j 2 mod K
Where the parameters f1 and f 2 depend on the block size K. The block size K is from 40 to
6144.
4. Remove the dummy bits padded in 2.
The number of the read-out bits is M*N after reading out all the written bits, and the number ofdummy bits is M*N-d after deleting the padded dummy bits. Hence, the total number of output bits
becomes d.
3.4.1.3.1.4.4 Puncturing pattern
Punctured turbo encoded bits consist of systematic bits and punctured parity bits. Assume thatcoding rate R2 is k/(k+1), while k is 1, 2, 3, 5 and 7 parity bits are selected in every 2*k parity bits
at each constituent encoder, except for the case of k being 7. In case of k being 7, puncturing
pattern has to be specified so that all trellis state will be appeared because period of feedback
polynomial at each constituent encoder is 7. Table 3.7 describes puncturing patterns at eachcoding rate. P(m1 m2 … ,n1 n2 …) represents that (m1,m2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every
2*k parity bits at the first constituent encoder and (n1,n2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every
2*k parity bits at the second constituent encoder, while k is 1, 2, 3 and 5. While k is 7,(m1,m2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every 98 parity bits at the first constituent encoder and(n1,n2,…)-th parity bits are selected in every 98 parity bits at the second constituent encoder.
Figure 3.26 illustrates the punctured turbo procedure with encoded bits while R2 is 1/2, 2/3, 3/4
and 5/6. Figure 3.27 illustrates the punctured turbo coding procedure while R2 is 7/8. As shown in
Figure 3.27, a parity bit is selected from every 15 bits in 98 parity bits at each constituent
encoder.
Table 3.7 Coding Rate and Puncturing Pattern
Coding Rate
1/2
2/3
3/4
5/6
7/8

Puncturing PatternP(1,2)
P(1,3)
P(1,4)
P(1,6)
P(1 16 31 46 61 76 91,8 23 38 53 68 83 98)

A-GN4.00-03-TS92

R 2=1/2

I(1) I(2)A (1) A (2)B (1) B (2)I(1) I(2)A (1) A (2)B (1) B (2)R 2=2/3

I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4)R 2=3/4

I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6)R 2=5/6

I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)I(1) A (1) I(2) B (2)I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4)I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) B (3) I(4)I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6)I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) B (4) I(5) I(6)I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) B (6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10)Figure 3.26 Puncturing Procedure while R2 is 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 and 5/6

A-GN4.00-03-TS

93

I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)A (11)A (12)A (13)A (14)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)B (11)B (12)B (13)B (14)…

I(15) I(16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)A (15)A (16)A (17)A (18)A (19)A (20)A (21)A (22)A (23)A (24)A (25)A (26)A (27)A (28)B (15)B (16)B (17)B (18)B (19)B (20)B (21)B (22)B (23)B (24)B (25)B (26)B (27)B (28)I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) I(84)A (71)A (72)A (73)A (74)A (75)A (76)A (77)A (78)A (79)A (80)A (81)A (82)A (83)A (84)B (71)B (72)B (73)B (74)B (75)B (76)B (77)B (78)B (79)B (80)B (81)B (82)B (83)B (84)I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98)A (85)A (86)A (87)A (88)A (89)A (90)A (91)A (92)A (93)A (94)A (95)A (96)A (97)A (98)B (85)B (86)B (87)B (88)B (89)B (90)B (91)B (92)B (93)B (94)B (95)B (96)B (97)B (98)I(1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)A (1) A (2) A (3) A (4) A (5) A (6) A (7) A (8) A (9) A (10)A (11)A (12)A (13)A (14)B (1) B (2) B (3) B (4) B (5) B (6) B (7) B (8) B (9) B (10)B (11)B (12)B (13)B (14)I(15) I(16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)A (15)A (16)A (17)A (18)A (19)A (20)A (21)A (22)A (23)A (24)A (25)A (26)A (27)A (28)B (15)B (16)B (17)B (18)B (19)B (20)B (21)B (22)B (23)B (24)B (25)B (26)B (27)B (28)…
I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) I(84)A (71)A (72)A (73)A (74)A (75)A (76)A (77)A (78)A (79)A (80)A (81)A (82)A (83)A (84)B (71)B (72)B (73)B (74)B (75)B (76)B (77)B (78)B (79)B (80)B (81)B (82)B (83)B (84)I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98)A (85)A (86)A (87)A (88)A (89)A (90)A (91)A (92)A (93)A (94)A (95)A (96)A (97)A (98)B (85)B (86)B (87)B (88)B (89)B (90)B (91)B (92)B (93)B (94)B (95)B (96)B (97)B (98)I(1) A (1) I(2) I(3) I(4) I(5) I(6) I(7) I(8) B (8) I(9) I(10) I(11) I(12) I(13) I(14)I(15) I(16) A (16) I(17) I(18) I(19) I(20) I(21) I(22) I(23) B (23) I(24) I(25) I(26) I(27) I(28)…

R 2=7/8

I(71) I(72) I(73) I(74) I(75) I(76) A (76) I(77) I(78) I(79) I(80) I(81) I(82) I(83) B (83) I(84)I(85) I(86) I(87) I(88) I(89) I(90) I(91) A (91) I(92) I(93) I(94) I(95) I(96) I(97) I(98) B (98)

Figure 3.27 Puncturing Procedure while R2 is 7/8

A-GN4.00-03-TS

94

3.4.1.4 Bit-interleaving
Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.28 Interleaving
3.4.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure

Figure 3.29 illustrates the application range of bit-interleaving. In this figure, the parameterb(1),…,b(xy) is the bit series after encoding. The number of input bits to the interleaver is x*y,where the parameter x is the number of bits in a symbol and the parameter y is the number ofsymbols(*1). The bit-interleaver unit consists of x block interleavers. Each block interleaver
interleaves y bits separately. The details on the block interleaver are described in Section
3.4.1.4.2.
(*1) In case of BPSK or π/2-BPSK with coding rate of 2/3 for CSCH, one dummy bit of 0 isappended to the end of the punctured bits. In other cases, the punctured bits equal to the input
bits of bit-interleaver.
The Number of Input Bits to Bit-interleaverb(1) … b(y)b(y+1) … b(2y)…

Bit-interleaver Unit 1b((x-1)y+1)…b(xy)Bit-interleaver Unit x

Start Bit

Bit-interleaver Unit 1(Block Interleaver)…
Figure 3.29 Application Range of Bit-interleaving
A-GN4.00-03-TS

95

3.4.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method
Block interleaver is used for each y bits in each column as explained in

Figure 3.29. Input bits are written sequentially into an array per bit in symbol, and then read out
by the given procedure. The number of input bits to the interleaver depends on symbol size ofphysical channel and modulation class. The procedure of interleaving is described as follows:
1. Determine the interleaver parameter x and y based on the number of input bits andmodulation class.
2. Determine the block interleaver parameter N and M for each physical channel, where y= N*M,
N is column size, and M is row size.
3. Write the input information bits into the M-row N-column matrix row. Write starting position
shall be set according to bit position i (i=1,…,x) in a symbol. Figure 3.30 illustrates blockinterleaver matrix for writing in case of n being 1.
4. Read the written bits from the M-row N-column matrix row to interleave each bit in symbol
and each symbol. Read starting position shall be set according to bit position in a symbol.
Figure 3.31 illustrates a block interleaver matrix for reading in case n being 1.
Position toStart
Writing

a1,1

a1,2

a1,3

a1,N

a2,1

a2,2

a2,3

a2,N

a3,1

a3,2

a3,3

a3,N

aM-1,1aM-1,2aM-1,3aM-1,N

aM,1

aM,2

aM,3

aM,N

Figure 3.30 Interleaver Matrix (Write-in) in case of n being 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

96

Position to Start Reading

a1,1

a1,2

a1,3

a1,N

a2,1

a2,2

a2,3

a2,N

a3,1

a3,2

a3,3

a3,N

aM-1,1aM-1,2aM-1,3aM-1,N

aM,1

aM,2

aM,3

aM,N

Figure 3.31 Interleaver Matrix (Read-out) in case of n being 1

3.4.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for OFDM
Table 3.8 and Table 3.9 summarize the parameters of the interleaver for input bit size andmodulation class.
The value of M and N in Table 3.8 are decided by the following processing.
1. Determine the interleaver parameter x and y based on the number of input bits andmodulation class, where x stands for coded bits per symbol and y stands for the number ofsymbol.
2. Determine the block interleaver parameter N and M, where any CRC unit size “A” use thelargest valid interleaving matrix y=M*N that does not exceed A with N restricted to the range[12.18]. Wasted allocated “P” symbol exist in case that y is not equal to M*N. Number of

A-GN4.00-03-TS

97

columns “N” is determined by choosing N from [13,12,18,17,16,15,14], such that
P=y-floor(y/N)*N is minimized. If N that P is minimized exists more than one value, N selects
first number of permutation [13,12,18,17,16,15,14]. The number of row “M” is defined byequation M=floor(y/N). M*N denotes size of a block interleaver.
Note: It is not P=0 in case of y=358 and 366 as shown Table 3.8. This means the number of data
symbols “y” is not the same as interleave size “M*N”. In this case, “y-M*N” data symbols areprocessed as DTX.

Table 3.8 Interleaver Parameter M, N and P
Number of Symbols
y
324
340
348
358
364
366
372
384
390
408
696
744
750
768
780
798
816

M

N

P

27
20
29
21
28
28
31
32
30
34
58
62
50
64
60
57
68

12
17
12
17
13
13
12
12
13
12
12
12
15
12
13
14
12

0
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

Table 3.9 Interleaver Parameter
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

The Number of Block Interleavers
1
2
4
6
8

Table 3.10 summarizes the definition of bit position i (i=1,..,x) in a symbol.
Table 3.10 The Definition of Bit Position i in a Symbol

A-GN4.00-03-TS

98

Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

Bit Position i in a Symboli = (1)i = (1,2)i = (1,2,3,4)i = (1,2,3,4,5,6)i = (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)

Table 3.11 summarizes the position to start writing and the position to start reading forinterleaver.
Table 3.11 Starting Position for Interleaver
Bit position i in a Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Position to Start Writing
a1,1
a3,1
a5,1
a7,1
a9,1
a11,1
a13,1
a15,1

Position to Start Reading
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,4
a1,5
a1,6
a1,7
a1,8

If this interleaver is represented by equation, the permutation of the i-th block interleaver isdefined as following.
lout = [{N*(j-1) mod M*N + (floor((j-1)/M)+(c-1)) mod N +N*(M-(r-1))} mod M*N] + (i-1)*M*N+1
y = M*Nj = 1,..,yi = 1,..,x
lin = 1,..,xy
The function floor() denotes the largest integer not exceeding the parameter.
lout : the permutation after interleaver
r : Write starting position ar,1 in bit position of a symbolc : Read starting position a1,c in bit position of a symbol
y : the number of symbolx : the number in a symbol
M : row of block interleaver
N : column of block interleaver
lin : the permutation before interleaver : j + (i-1)*yA-GN4.00-03-TS

99

For the parameter r and c, refer to Table 3.11 and Table 3.39.
The procedure of interleaving is performed as following:
1. Set j = 1 and i = 1. Then increase j to y.
2. Set j = 1 and i = i +1. Then increase j to y.
3. Repeat 2 until i equals to x.

A-GN4.00-03-TS100

3.4.1.4.4 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver
The IQ data symbol is generated by using x bits, each of which is taken from each blockinterleaver. Denote the output bits from i-th block interleaver by z(i,1), z(i,2), …, z(i,y). Thus, thej-th IQ data symbol is converted from the bit series z(p 1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j), where pi is an offset
value to circulate the order of input bits to the modulator. The process is defined as follows:
Input bits to the modulator: z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j)Offset value: pi = ( (i+j-2) mod x)+1
3.4.1.4.5 Bit-interleaving and Rate matching
3.4.1.4.5.1 Bit-interleaver Structure
The rate matching for convolutionally coded transport channels and control information consistsof interleaving the three bit streams, d k(0) , d k(1) and d k( 2) , followed by the collection of bits andthe generation of a circular buffer. The bit stream d k(0) is interleaved according to the sub-blockinterleaver with an output sequence defined as v0(0) , v1(0) , v 2(0) ,...,v K(0) 1 .The bit stream d k(1) isinterleaved according to the sub-block interleaver with an output sequence defined
as v0(1) , v1(1) , v 2(1) ,...,v K(1) 1 . The bit stream d k( 2) is interleaved according to the sub-blockinterleaver with an output sequence defined as v0(2) , v1(2) , v 2(2) ,...,v K(2) 1 .
3.4.1.4.5.2 Block Interleaver Method
The output bit sequence from the block interleaver is derived as follows:(1) D is the number of bits input to the block interleaver.Determine the number of rows of thematrix R, by finding minimum integer R such that D  R  C  .
(2) If R  C   D , then N D  R  C  D  dummy bits are padded.

y N D  k  d k(i ), k = 0,

1,…, D-1, and the bit sequence yk is written into the matrix row by row starting with bit y0 incolumn 0 of row 0.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

101

(3) Perform the inter-column permutation for the matrix based on the pattern P(0), P(1),..., P(31)  = < 1, 17, 9, 25, 5, 21, 13, 29, 3, 19, 11, 27, 7, 23, 15, 31, 0, 16,
8, 24, 4, 20, 12, 28, 2, 18, 10, 26, 6, 22, 14, 30 >.
(4) The output of the block interleaver is the bit sequence read out column by column from theinter-column permuted matrix.
This block interleaver is also used in interleaving ADEDCH modulation symbols. In that case, theinput bit sequence consists of ADEDCH symbol quadruplets.
3.4.1.4.5.3 Output-bits after Bit-interleaver
The circular buffer of length K w  3K  is generated as follows:
wk  v k(0) , wK  k  v k(1) ,w2 K  k  v k( 2) ,for k = 0,…, K   1

Denoting by E the rate matching output sequence length, the rate matching output bit sequenceis ek , k = 0,1,..., E  1 . The procedure of ek is shown as Figure 3.32.

K=0,j=0

K<E?

N

Y
end

w j mod K w  NULL NYek  w j mod K w ,k  k 1j  j 1

Figure 3.32 Procedure of Rate Matching Output Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS

102

3.4.1.5 Modulation Method
Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

MIMO
Precoding

Data (symbol)

Figure 3.33 Modulation
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol.
The constellation mapping for each modulation (BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM) is
shown in Appendix B.
a) BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.1.
b) QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.3.
c) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
d) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
e) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
For optional Channel Coding, the block of scrambled bits in each codeword shall be modulatedusing one of the modulation schemes {BPSK, QPSK, 16QAM, 64QAM, 256QAM }, refer toAppendix B.10, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols.

3.4.1.6 Precoding Method
MIMO Precoding is performed after first modulation and before symbol mapping as shown in
Figure 3.34. Since precoding method for SISO and SDMA is the same as protocol version 1, thissection describes precoding method for STBC, SM and EMB-MIMO.
1stModulation

MIMO
PrecodingSymbolPattern

Figure 3.34 MIMO Precoding
Precoded data Xk(t) of antenna number k with data number t is generally represented asnos

X k t   Vk ,i Si t i 1

, where Si(t) means first modulation output of i-th stream with data number t (=1 to the number ofdata symbol in a CRC unit). V is the transmit vector, and nos is the number of streams. Antenna
A-GN4.00-03-TS

103

number is defined as logical antenna number. The number of logical antenna is the same as thenumber of layer. Note that the number of physical antenna is equal to or more than that of logicalantenna.
3.4.1.6.1 STBC-MIMO
Only 1 stream is defined for STBC-MIMO because it is MIMO technology to obtain stability.
STBC-MIMO with 2 and 4 transmission antennas is described in this section.
3.4.1.6.1.1 2 Layer STBC-MIMO
Precoding for 2 Layer STBC-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined as* X 1 t1  X 1 t 2 
1  S1 t1   S1 t 2 
 X t  X t  *
2 S1 t 2  S1 t1  
2 2 
 2 1

, where * represents complex conjugate.1“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than thecase of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol.
1 This equation assumes that the number of symbol in a PRU is even.

3.4.1.6.1.2 4 Layer STBC-MIMO
Precoding for 4 Layer STBC-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as X 1 t1 
 X t 
 2 1
 X 3 t1  X 4 t1 

X 1 t 2 
X 2 t 2 
X 3 t 2 
X 4 t 2 

X 1 t 3 
X 2 t 3 
X 3 t 3 
X 4 t 3  S1 t1   S1* t 2 
X 1 t 4 
0
0 



*
X 2 t 4 
00 
1  S1 t 2  S1 t1 
*
X 3 t 4 
0
S1 t 3   S1 t 4 
2 0



*
X 4 t 4 
0
S1 t 4  S1 t 3   0

, where * represents complex conjugate.2“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than thecase of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol.
2 This equation assumes that the number of symbol in a PRU is even.

3.4.1.6.2 SM-MIMO
SM-MIMO is a technique to increase user throughput. SM-MIMO with 2 and 4 transmission

A-GN4.00-03-TS

104

antennas is described in this section. The same MCS should be selected in all streams.
SM-MIMO performs vertical encoding. For example, 1st stream data is precoded and mapped toeach antenna at first, and then 2nd stream data is precoded after 1st stream data.
3.4.1.6.2.1 2 Layer SM-MIMO
Precoding for 2 Layer SM-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined as X 1 t1  X 1 t 2 
1  S1 t1  S1 t 3 
 X t  X t  
2 S1 t 2  S1 t 4 
2 2 
 2 1
“1/ 2 ” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 3dB lower signal than thecase of SISO because 2 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training
symbols are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbol. Figure 3.35 shows SM-MIMO precoding for 2
antennas. Antenna 1 and 2 transmit stream 1 data, respectively, and then they transmit stream 2
data, respectively.
Stream 1
Stream 2

S1(1)
S2(1)

S1(2)
S2(2)

S1(3)
S2(3)

S1(4)
S2(4)

…



S1(t-1)S2(t-1)

S1(t)
S2(t)

t

…

S2(t-1)
S2(t)

t

1
2

Antenna Port 1
Antenna Port 2

S1(1)
S1(2)

S1(3)
S1(4)

…

S1(t-1)
S1(t)

S2(1)
S2(2)

S2(3)
S2(4)

Figure 3.35 SM-MIMO Precoding for 2 antennas

3.4.1.6.2.2 4 Layer SM-MIMO
Precoding for 4 Layer SM-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as X 1 t1  X 1 t 2  X 1 t3  X 1 t 4 
 S1 t1 
 X t  X t  X t  X t 

1 S t 
2 2
2 3
2 4 
 2 1
  1 2
 X 3 t1  X 3 t 2  X 3 t3  X 3 t 4  2  S1 t3  X 4 t1  X 4 t 2  X 4 t3  X 4 t 4 
 S1 t 4 

S1 t5  S1 t9  S1 t13 S1 t6  S1 t10  S1 t14 S1 t7  S1 t11  S1 t15 S1 t8  S1 t12  S1 t16 “1/2” described in the right side means that 1 antenna transmits 6dB lower signal than the case of
SISO because 4 stream data symbols are multiplexed. In addition, the pilot and training symbols
are transmitted with regular intervals in frequency. Therefore, the training and pilot symbols are
8.5dB higher than data symbol. Figure 3.36 shows SM-MIMO precoding for 4 antennas. Antenna
1, 2, 3, and 4 transmit stream 1 data, respectively, and then they transmit stream 2, 3, 4 data aswith stream 1.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

105

S1(1)
S2(1)
S3(1)
S4(1)

Stream 1
Stream 2
Stream 3
Stream 4

S1(2)
S2(2)
S3(2)
S4(2)

S1(3)
S2(3)
S3(3)
S4(3)

S1(4)
S2(4)
S3(4)
S4(4)

…


S1(1)
S1(2)
S1(3)
S1(4)

Antenna Port 1
Antenna Port 2
Antenna Port 3
Antenna Port 4

S1(t-3)S1(t-2)
S1(t-1)
S1(t)

…

S2(1)
S2(2)
S2(3)
S2(4)

…

S2(t-3)S2(t-2)S2(t-1)S2(t)S1(t-1)S2(t-1)S3(t-1)S4(t-1)

S1(t)
S2(t)
S3(t)
S4(t)

t

…

S4(t-3)S4(t-2)S4(t-1)
S4(t)

t

1
2

S3(1)
S3(2)
S3(3)
S3(4)

…

S3(t-3)S3(t-2)S3(t-1)
S3(t)

S4(1)
S4(2)
S4(3)
S4(4)

Figure 3.36 SM-MIMO Precoding for 4 antennas

3.4.1.6.3 EMB-MIMO
EMB-MIMO is a technique to increase user throughput and adopted only for DL in protocol
version 2. EMB-MIMO block diagram is shown in Figure 3.37. Channel information obtained on
reception side is decomposed using SVD. Resultant unitary matrix is used as transmission weight.
However, the channel information is not limited to the above expression as long as that can
improve the reception at the receiver.
ChannelEstimationin Rx sideH k ,i Tx Weights Vk ,iCalculationSi

1stModulation

Tx PowerCalculation

EMB-MIMO
PrecodingPk ,iX k ,i

Symbol
Mapping

Figure 3.37 EMB-MIMO block diagram
3.4.1.6.3.1 Transmission Weight Calculation
Tx weight V is obtained by k-by-i channel response matrix (Hk,i) using SVD on reception side.
SVD of channel response matrix is represented as

H k ,i  U k ,i i ,iVk ,i
i ,i  diagH   1

nos

Wk ,i  Vk ,i  Ck
H

H

A-GN4.00-03-TS

106

, where U and V are unitary matrices, and Σ is diagonal matrix with nonnegative numbers on the
diagonal. H means complex conjugate transposed. nos is the number of streams. C is calibration
vector. W is transmission weights. However, the transmission weight W is not limited to the above
expression as long as that can improve the reception at the receiver.
3.4.1.6.3.2 2 Layer EMB-MIMO
EMB precoding with 2 antennas is defined as X 1 t  W11 t  W12 t   P1 S1 t   X t   W t  W t  22
 2   21
  P2 S 2 t Note that data, training, pilot and signal symbols are also weighted by transmission power.
Regarding signal symbols, transmission weight W and P are applied after STBC coded signal
Si(t).
3.4.1.6.3.3 4 Layer EMB-MIMO
EMB precoding with 4 antennas is defined as X 1 t  W11 t 
 X t  W t 
 2    21
 X 3 t  W31 t  
 X 4 t  W41 t 

W12 t 
W22 t 
W32 t 
W42 t 

W13 t 
W23 t 
W33 t 
W43 t 

W14 t  

W24 t  
W34 t  
W44 t  

P1 S1 t  P2 S 2 t 
P3 S 3 t 

P4 S 4 t Note that data, training, pilot and signal symbols are also weighted by transmission power.
Regarding signal symbols, transmission weight W and P are applied after STBC coded signal
Si(t).
3.4.1.6.4 Optional Precoding Method
3.4.1.6.4.1 Precoding for transmission on a single antenna port
For transmission on a single antenna port, y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna
port p , p  0,4,5,7,8 is the number of the single antenna port used for transmission of the





T

physical channel, x(i )  x ( 0) (i ) ... x ( l 1) (i ) , i  0,1,..., M layer  1 is input block ofvectors from the layer mapping. precoding for transmission on a signle antenna port is defined byy ( p) (i)  x (0) (i) .
3.4.1.6.4.2 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with BS-specific pilot

A-GN4.00-03-TS

107

Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with cell-specific pilot is only used in
combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplexing supports two or fourantenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is p  0,1 or p  0,1,2,3 , respectively.
3.4.1.6.4.2.1 Precoding without CDD
Without cyclic delay diversity (CDD), precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by
Y (i )  W (i ) X (i ) ,where the precoding matrix W (i) is of size P  and i  0,1,...,M symb  1 ,M symb  M layer . For spatial multiplexing, the values of

W (i) shall be selected among theprecoder elements in the codebook configured in the BS and the MS. The BS can further confine
the precoder selection in the MS to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook
subset restrictions.
3.4.1.6.4.2.2 Precoding for large delay CDD
For large-delay CDD, precoding for spatial multiplexing is defined by
Y (i )  W (i ) D(i )U X (i ) ,where the precoding matrix W (i) is of size P  l andi  0,1,...,M symb  1 M symb  M layer,. The diagonal matrix D(i) supporting cyclic delay diversity
and the matrix U are different for different numbers of layers l .

1 
1 1
1 e  j 2 2 2Matrix U is11
1 e  j 2 41
2 1 e  j 4 4
 j 6 4
1 e

e

0
1
0 e  j 2i 3

0
0




 j 4i 3
efor 3 layers and1e  j 4 4e  j 8 4
 j12 4001 e  j 6 4 e  j12 4 e  j18 4 

for 2 layers,for 4 layers.
010 e  j 2i 4

0
0

0
0

1
1
1 
 j 2 31e
3  j 4 3
1 e

1 e  j 4 3 e  j 8 3 Matrix D(i) is00e  j 4i 4
0

for 3 layers and0 
10 e  j 2i 2 







 j 6i 4 e

for 2 layers,000

for 4 layers.

The values of the precoding matrix W shall be selected among the precoder elements in thecodebook configured in the BS and the MS. The BS can further confine the precoder selection in
the MS to a subset of the elements in the codebook using codebook subset restriction.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

108

3.4.1.6.4.2.3 Codebook for precoding
For transmission on two antenna ports, the precoding matrix W shall be selected
from

1 1

2 1

,

1 1
 
2 1

,1 1  
2  j

1 1 2  j or a subset thereof for 1 layer. For 2 layers, the1 1 0 1 1 1  1 1 1 






precoding matrix W (i) shall be selected from 2 0 1 , 2 1 1 , 2  j  j  or a subset

thereof . For the closed-loop spatial multiplexing transmission mode, the codebook index 0 is not
used when the number layers is 2. For transmission on four antenna ports, the precoding matrix
W shall be selected from a 16-matrix set or a subset thereof for different layer configuration.
3.4.1.6.4.3 Precoding for transmit diversity
For 2 antennas transmit diversity,SFBC is adopted,and for 4 antennas transmit diversity,SFBC
and FSTD are applied. f i denotes the subcarrier index.
-

2 Layer SFBC-MIMO

Precoding for 2 Layer SFBC-MIMO with 2 antennas is defined asS2  f 2 
 X 1  f1  X 1  f 2 
1  S1  f1 
 X  f  X  f  
 S *  f  S *  f  , where * represents complex conjugate.
2 2 1
2
2 
1
2 
 2 1

-

4 Layer SFBC-MIMO

Precoding for 4 Layer SFBC-MIMO with 4 antennas is defined as X 1  f1 X  f 
 2 1
 X 3  f1 
 X 4  f1 

X 1  f 2  X 1  f3  X 1  f 4 
S2  f 2 00  S1  f1 X 2  f 2  X 2  f3  X 2  f 4 
0S3  f 3 
S4  f 4   ,
1  0

*
*
X 3  f 2  X 3  f3  X 3  f 4 
00 
2  S2  f1  S1  f 2 



*
*
 S4  f3  S3  f 4 
X 4  f 2  X 4  f3  X 4  f 4 0
 0

where * represents complex conjugate.
3.4.1.6.4.4 Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with MS-specific pilot
Precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with MS-specific pilot is only used in
combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing. Spatial multiplexing using antenna ports
with MS-specific pilot supports two antenna ports and the set of antenna ports used is p  7,8 .
For transmission on two antenna ports, p  7,8 , the precoding operation is defined byy ( 7 ) (i )  x ( 0) (i ) and y (8) (i )  x (1) (i ) .

A-GN4.00-03-TS

109

3.4.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU
As described in section 3.4.1.6, Xk(t) represents MIMO-precoded data, where k and t meanantenna number and data number, respectively. When the number of transmission antenna is 2,
X1(t) is mapped to transmission antenna 1 and X2(t) is mapped to transmission antenna 2. Whenthe number of transmission antenna is 4, X1(t) to X4(t) are mapped to transmission antenna 1 to 4
in the same way. Since symbol mapping method of single and multiple antenna case can beconsidered to be the same, the following sections describe symbol mapping method to PRU forsingle antenna.
Symbol mapping methods depend on physical channel type (CCCH, ANCH, EXCH and CSCH)
and MIMO type. Although STBC-MIMO has unique mapping method, data symbols are mappedsuch that lower numbered OFDM symbol, subchannel and subcarrier are occupied first, that is,data symbols are mapped along frequency axis from the earlier timing OFDM symbol in principle.
The detail of the mapping method is described later.
3.4.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method for CCCH, ANCH and CSCH
As shown in Figure 3.38, the data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols
along frequency axis, and then aligning them along time axis per PRU.

PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
CCH, ANCH, CSCH@1PRU

900 kHz

Starting PointTime
Frequency

625 usFigure 3.38 Data Symbol Mapping Method for CCCH, ANCH and CSCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

110

3.4.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH
3.4.1.7.2.1 Symbol Mapping without DTX Symbol
As shown in Figure 3.39, the data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols
along frequency axis, and then along time axis. The data symbols of the first CRC unit are
inserted firstly, and the symbols of the second CRC unit are inserted next.

PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit

The Second CRC Unit

EXCH@4 PRUs

The second CRC Unit

900 kHz

Starting Point(The first CRC Unit)

Time

Frequency
625 usFigure 3.39 Data Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In Case of PRU being 4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

111

3.4.1.7.2.2 Symbol Mapping with DTX Symbol
DTX symbol is used in case of EXCH. As shown in Figure 3.40, when PHY frame is fewer than
PRU total size, all data symbols are inserted, and then DTX symbol is inserted to the last.
The definition of DTX is described in Section 3.4.6.

DTX

PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit
EXCH @ 4 PRUs

All DTX symbol is inserted to thelast.

900 kHz

Starting Point(The first CRC Unit)

Time
Frequency

625 usFigure 3.40 DTX Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In Case of PRU being 4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

112

3.4.1.7.3 Symbol Mapping Method for MIMO
Symbol mapping method for EXCH except for EMB-MIMO is carried out slot by slot. Symbol
mapping method for EMB-MIMO is carried out within one PRU.
3.4.1.7.3.1 Symbol Mapping Method for STBC-MIMO
Data symbols except for STBC-MIMO are mapped to allocated PRU as shown in Figure 3.38,
Figure 3.39. Data symbols of STBC are mapped to allocated PRU as shown in Figure 3.41. The
difference from other MIMO types is that odd numbered data symbols X1(todd) are mapped toeven numbered OFDM symbols such as S2, S4,…, S18, and even numbered data symbols
X1(teven) are mapped to odd numbered OFDM symbols such as S3,S5,…,S19. There is nodifference in STBC symbol mapping method between 2 and 4 antenna transmissions.

SCH
900kHzSubcarrier F1
Subcarrier F2
Subcarrier F3.
.
.
Subcarrier F23
Subcarrier F24

Even numbered
OFDM symbol(Seven:[S2,…,S18])
X1 t1  1
X1 t3 

Odd numbered
OFDM symbol(Sodd:[S3,…,S19])
X1 t2  2
X1 t4 

47

48

Figure 3.41 Symbol Mapping Method for STBC-MIMO
3.4.1.7.3.2 Symbol Mapping Method for SM-MIMO
Figure 3.42 shows the symbol mapping method of EXCH. Data symbol mapping method for
EXCH is carried out to frequency direction independently for each slot. DTX symbol is transmitted
when there is no data to be transmitted. EXCH data symbol and DTX symbol can not betransmitted from each antenna at the same time when MIMO type is SM-MIMO regarding EXCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

113

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
ANCH Signal Symbol
ANCH Data Symbol
EXCH Data Symbol
DTX Symbol

Figure 3.42 Symbol Mapping Method for SM-MIMO

3.4.1.7.3.3 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO
Figure 3.43 shows the symbol mapping method of EXCH. Data symbol mapping method for
EXCH is carried out from a SCH with smaller SCH number and smaller slot number. DTX symbol
is transmitted when there is no data to be transmitted or when propagation environment is worse.
1st Stream

SLOT1

SLOT2

SLOT3

SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9

SLOT4

2nd Stream
SLOT1
SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9

SLOT2

SLOT3

SLOT4

ANCH Signal Symbol
ANCH Data Symbol
EXCH Signal Symbol
EXCH Data Symbol
DTX Symbol
No AreaFigure 3.43 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO

3.4.1.7.3.4 Symbol Mapping in case that p is not 0
The rest of “p=y-M*N” symbols are transmitted as DTX after data symbols are transmitted in one
CRC unit in case that p is not 0.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

114

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

“p=y-MN” data symbols are transmitted as DTX.

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol(Antenna2)

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

Data Symbol

aaaa

Figure 3.44 Symbol Mapping in case that p is not 0

A-GN4.00-03-TS

115

3.4.1.7.4 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission of CC-HARQ
3.4.1.7.4.1 Symbol Mapping Method except for EMB-MIMO
In case of EXCH retransmission, the retransmission data is mapped in an order from a head byeach layer and each slot. The example of retransmission by only 1 layer is shown in Figure 3.45.
The example of retransmission by some layers is shown in Figure 3.46.
1 Layer

CRC Unit 1 (NACK)

1 Layer

PRU1

CRC Unit 2 (ACK)

PRU2

PRU3

CRC Unit 3 (NACK)

PRU4

PRU5

Transmission

1 Layer

Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 1

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 3

New Data

Figure 3.45 In case of Retransmission of except for EMB-MIMO(only 1 layer)

1 Layer

CRC Unit 1 (NACK)CRC Unit 2 (NACK)CRC Unit 3 (ACK)

2 Layer

CRC Unit 4 (NACK)CRC Unit 5 (ACK)CRC Unit 6 (NACK)

1 Layer

PRU1

PRU2

PRU3

PRU4

PRU5

2 Layer

PRU1

PRU2

PRU3

PRU4

PRU5

Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 2

New Data

Transmission

1 Layer

Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 1

2 Layer

Retransmission Data of CRC Unit 4

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 6

New Data

Figure 3.46 In case of Retransmission of except for EMB-MIMO(some layers)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

116

3.4.1.7.4.2 Symbol Mapping Method for EMB-MIMO
In case of EXCH retransmission, EMB-MIMO is retransmitted by each PRU. The example ofretransmission of EMB-MIMO is shown in Figure 3.47.
1 Layer

CRC Unit 1 (NACK)CRC Unit 2 (ACK)CRC Unit 3 (NACK)CRC Unit 4 (NACK)

2 Layer

CRC Unit 6 (ACK)CRC Unit 7 (NACK)CRC Unit 8 (ACK)CRC Unit 9 (ACK)CRC Unit 5 (ACK)CRC Unit 10 (NACK)

1 Layer

PRU1

PRU2

PRU3

PRU4

PRU5

2 Layer

PRU1

PRU2

PRU3

PRU4

PRU5

Transmission

1 Layer

Retransmission of
CRC Unit 1

2 Layer

New CRC Unit

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 3

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 4

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 7

New CRC Unit

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Dataof CRC Unit 10

Figure 3.47 In case of Retransmission of EMB-MIMO

A-GN4.00-03-TS

117

3.4.1.7.4.3 Symbol Mapping Method in case of full subcarrier mode
It is necessary to consider full subcarrier mode except for EMB-MIMO. The retransmission CRC
unit size is not necessarily the same as the PRU size in case of PRU allocation. (a) explains thecase that the retransmission CRC unit size equals to the retransmission PRU size. (b) explains
the case that the retransmission CRC unit size is smaller than the retransmission PRU size. (c)explains the case that the retransmission CRC unit size is larger than the retransmission PRU
size.
(a) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.48 and Figure 3.49 illustrate the case that retransmission CRC unit size equals to theretransmission PRU size. Figure 3.48 shows the case that retransmission data 2 and PRU size 2
equal to retransmission data 1 and PRU size 1. Figure 3.49 shows the case that retransmission
data1 and PRU size 1 differ from retransmission data 2 and PRU size 2, when full subcarriermode is used.
Retransimission CRC Unit

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

New Data

PRU 1

PRU 2

PRU 3

Transmission
Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

New Data

Figure 3.48 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
(1)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

118

Retransimission CRC Unit

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

New Data

PRU 1

PRU 2

PRU 3

Transmission
Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

New Data

Figure 3.49 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to Retransmission PRU Size
(2)(b) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is smaller than Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.50 illustrates the case that retransmission CRC unit size is smaller than retransmission
PRU size. As shown in this figure, the rest of PRU 4 is used as DTX symbols.
The First Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1

PRU 1

Retransmission Data 2

PRU 2

The Second Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 3

PRU 3

Retransmission Data 4

PRU 4

New CRC Unit
New Data

PRU 5

Transmission
Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

Retransmission Data 3

Retransmission Data 4

New Data
DTX Symbol

Figure 3.50 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is smaller than Retransmission PRU
Size

A-GN4.00-03-TS

119

(c) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than Retransmission PRU Size
Figure 3.51 illustrates the case that retransmission CRC unit size is larger than retransmission
PRU size. As shown in the figure, a part of retransmission data 4 takes up the symbols that canbe used by DTX symbols. In addition, a part of retransmission data 4 might also take up a part of
the guard time.
The First Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

PRU 1

PRU 2

Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

The Second Retransimission CRC Unit
Retransmission Data 3

PRU 3

New CRC Unit

Retransmission Data 4

PRU 4

Retransmission Data 3

New Data

PRU 5

Retransmission Data 4

Transmission
Retransmission Data 1

Retransmission Data 2

Retransmission Data 3

Retransmission Data 4

New Data

Figure 3.51 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is lager than Retransmission PRU
Size
3.4.1.7.5 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU for Optional Physical Channel
3.4.1.7.5.1 Advanced Physical broadcast channel
The block of complex-valued symbols y ( p ) (i ) with length Msymb for each antenna port istransmitted during 4 consecutive radio frames starting in each radio frame fulfilling nf mod 4  0
and shall be mapped in sequence starting with y(0) to resource elements k, l  . The mapping
to resource elements k, l  not reserved for transmission of pilots shall be in increasing order offirst the index k , then the index l in slot 1 in slot 0 and finally the radio frame number. The
resource-element indices are given by

k

DL
N RU
N scRU 36  k ' ,2

k '  0,1,...,71, l  0,1,...,3

where resource units reserved for pilots shall be excluded. The mapping operation shall assume
BS-specific pilots for antenna ports 0-3 being present irrespective of the actual configuration. The
MS shall assume that the resource units assumed to be reserved for pilots in the mapping
operation above but not used for transmission of pilot are not available for ADEDCH
transmission.
3.4.1.7.5.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel

A-GN4.00-03-TS

120

The mapping to resource units is defined in terms of quadruplets of complex-valued symbols.
For
each
of
the
antenna
ports,
symbolquadrupletsA( p ) (i )  y ( p ) (4i ), y ( p ) (4i  1), y ( p ) (4i  2), y ( p ) (4i  3) shall be mapped in increasing order of i tothe four resource-point groups in the first OFDM symbol in a downlink slot with the representative
resource-unit. A( p ) (i ) is mapped to the resource-unit group represented by
BS
DL
DL
RU
 and N IDBS is themod 2 N RUk  k  i  N RU
/ 2 N SC
/ 2 , where k  NscRU 2 N ID

physical-layer BS identity.
3.4.1.7.5.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH
The mapping to resource units is defined by operations on quadruplets of complex-valued
symbols.The block of quadrupletsw( p) (0),...,w( p) (M quad  1)

A( p ) (0),..., A( p ) ( M quad  1)

( p)

. The block of quadruplets w

shall be permuted resulting inshall be cyclically shifted, resulting in

( p)
( p)
BS
w ( p ) , where M quad  M symb 4 and w (i )  w ((i  N ID ) mod M quad ) .

Mapping of the block of quadruplets w ( p ) is defined in terms of resource-point groups,
according to steps as shown in Figure 3.52:

A-GN4.00-03-TS

121m  0, k '  0

l'  0resource-point group ( k , l ) assigned
to ADEFICH or ADHICH ?

YN

Map symbol-quadruplet
to the( p)resource-point groupw ( m' )for each antennam( k , l )
by 1
port p, Increasel'  l '  1

l ' than number of OFDM symbols
lessused for ADANCH transmission

NYk'  k ' 1DL
k '  N RU
 N scRU

Figure 3.52 Mapping of the block of quadruplets w ( p )3.4.1.7.5.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
The sequence y ( p ) (n) with length M symb for each of the ADHICH groups is the sum is over all
( p)
( p)
ADHICHs in the ADHICH group yi (n) , where yi (n) represents the symbol sequence fromthe i ADHICH in the ADHICH group.ADHICH groups are mapped to ADHICH mapping units.
( p)~ ( p)The mapping of ADHICH group m to ADHICH mapping unit m' is defined by ym' (n)  ym (n)Where m'  m  0,1,...,mi  N ADHICH  1 ,group

mi equals to 1 for normal ADHICH duration and equals
A-GN4.00-03-TS122

to 2 (slot 1 and 6) or 3 (other slots) for extend ADHICH duration. The ADHICH duration is
configurable by higher layers. The duration configured puts a lower limit on the size of the control
region signalled by the ADEFICH.
A( p ) (i )  ~y ( p ) (4i ), ~y ( p ) (4i  1), ~y ( p ) (4i  2), ~y ( p ) (4i  3)

Mapping

to resource units is defined in terms ofsymbol quadruplets according to steps as below:
1) Number the resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH in OFDM symbol l from 0
to nl  1 , starting from the resource-point group with the lowest frequency-domain index.
2) Symbol-quadruplet A( p ) (i ) from ADHICH mapping unit m' is mapped to theresource-point group represented by (k , l )i ,where the indices





BS
ki'  N ID
 nli n1   m' i  nli 3 mod nli ,li equals to 0 for normal ADHICH duration andequals to ( m' / 2  i  1) mod 2 for extended ADHICH in slot 1,6 and equals to i forother cases.
3.4.1.8 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding
Combinations of coding and modulation are shown in Table 3.12. Also, the efficiency of eachcombination is shown in the same table.
The OFDM DL channel coding for XGP is summarized in Table 3.12.
Table 3.12 Summary of OFDM DL Channel Coding
Modulation

Scaling
Factor

BPSK

1

QPSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

Coding rate R1@convolutional coding

1/√2
1/√10
1/√42
1/√170

1/2

Puncturing
rate R2

Coding rate R@totalEfficiency

1

1/2

0.5

3/4

2/3

0.67

1

1/2

1

4/6

3/4

1.5

1

1/2

2

4/6

3/4

3

3/4

4/6

4

6 / 10

5/6

5

4/6

6/8

6

8 / 14

7/8

7

A-GN4.00-03-TS123

3.4.2 Training Format for DL OFDM
Training format is used mainly for synchronization, frequency offset estimation, automatic gain
control or weight calculation of beam-forming. Training format is composed of pre-defined data
(Refer to Appendix C.1). The details of training format, training sequence, and training pattern are
described in Sections 3.4.2.1, 3.4.2.2 and 3.4.2.3.
3.4.2.1 Training Format
Training format is used for ICH and CCCH as described in Sections 3.4.2.1.1 and 3.4.2.1.2.
Training format for ICH and the format for CCCH are chosen according to the training index asdefined in Section 3.4.2.3.
3.4.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. As shown in Figure 3.53, 1/4 or 1/2 of the original
training data is copied ahead of the data. This training format is used for ICH. As described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.2 and 3.5.6.1.2, training symbol S1 is used for ICH.

6.66 us33.33 us26.67 us13.33 us40 us26.67 usGI

Original
training dataGI

Original
training data

Copy

Copy

(a) UL(b) DL

Figure 3.53 Training Format for Single Symbol (S1)
3.4.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH
As shown in Figure 3.54, 3/8 or 5/8 of the original training data (the second OFDM data) is copied
ahead of the first OFDM data. The phase of this format must be consecutive. As described in
Sections 3.4.8.1.1 and 3.5.6.1.1, training symbols S1 and S2 are used for CCCH.
10 us

63.33 us53.33 us16.67 us70 us53.33 us

The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data

The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data

Original
Training Data

Original
Training Data

Copy

Copy

(a) UL(b) DL
A-GN4.00-03-TS

124

Figure 3.54 Training Format for Two Symbols
3.4.2.2 Training Sequence
The training sequence of each SCH is decided by the training core-sequence number and theoffset value number that is described in Sections 3.4.2.3.1 and 3.4.2.3.2. The calculatedcore-sequence is chosen from 12 core-sequences defined in Table C.1 to Table C.3 in Appendix
C. The calculated offset value number chooses the offset sample as shown in Table C.4. The
offset sample shifts the core-sequence cyclically. To generate the training sequence of each SCH,
the core-sequence and the offset sample are substituted in Equation C.1. The example ofgeneration is shown in Table C.5. When offset value number is 1, the training sequence becomes
the same as the core-sequence. Offset value depends on the number of SCHs. Training symbol
should be boosted by 2.5 dB (=4/3) compared with data symbol. And further boosting power(over2.5dB) is optional in case that MCS is lower as BPSK and QPSK.
3.4.2.3 Training Index
As described in Section 3.4.2.2, there are 12 core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift
values). Training index is numbered as follows:
Training Index = Core-sequence Number + (Offset Value Number-1)*12
3.4.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for CCCH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number: 2 for UL, 1 for DL: 2 for UL, 1 for DL:1

3.4.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH
3.4.2.3.2.1 Training Index for SISO
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for ICH are defined as follows:
Training Index: (x + (y-1)*12
Core-sequence Number: x=[A MOD 12] + 1
Offset Value Number: y(m)=[{B + m} MOD (n-1)] + 2
n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = SCH number : 1, 2,…,nA = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID

A-GN4.00-03-TS

125

3.4.2.3.2.2 Training Index for MIMO
Training index, core sequence number and offset value number for MIMO are defined as follows:
Training index: x + (y-1)*12
Core-sequence number: x(k)=[{A + k -1} MOD 12] + 1
Offset value number: y(m)=[{B + m} MOD (n-1)] + 2
k = SDMA-MIMO stream number (k=1,2,…)n = maximum number of SCH in a slot
m = SCH number : 2,…,nA = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
Note: The parameter k is used only for SDMA-MIMO. In other cases, SM-MIMO, EMB-MIMO andSTBC-MIMO,k is 1 regardless of MIMO stream number.
3.4.2.3.2.3 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO
The generated training pattern is mapped to each layer, as shown in Figure 3.55. Figure 3.56
shows method of training layer mapping except for full subcarrier mode. Figure 3.57 shows
method of training layer mapping for full subcarrier mode.

Training
Coresequence

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1

Copy

Calculated by
Training Offset
Value Number

Copy

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1

1 LayerFormat24 kind ofTraining
Pattern

Training Layer

Mapping

2 LayerFormat4 LayerFormatFigure 3.55 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO

A-GN4.00-03-TS

126

1 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

2 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

4 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

Training Symbol(Antenna2)

Training Symbol(Antenna4)

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier

Training Symbol(Antenna3)

Figure 3.56 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO except for full subcarrier mode
1 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
Training Symbol(Antenna1)

2 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

4 Layer Mapping
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Training Symbol(Antenna2)

Training Symbol(Antenna3)

Training Symbol(Antenna4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

127

Figure 3.57 Training Layer Mapping for MIMO for full subcarrier mode
3.4.2.4 Advanced Synchronization Signal
3.4.2.4.1 Advanced primary synchronization signal
3.4.2.4.1.1 Sequence generation
The sequence d (n) used for the advanced primary synchronization signal is generated from afrequency-domain Zadoff-Chu sequence according to( n 1)  j un63 ed u (n )   u ( n 1)( n 2 )
j
63
e

n  0,1,...,30n  31,32,...,61

where the Zadoff-Chu root sequence index u is 25, 29 and 34 for NID =0,1,2 repectively.
3.4.2.4.1.2 Mapping to resource units
The mapping of the sequence to resource units depends on the frame structure. The MS shall notassume that the advanced primary synchronization signal is transmitted on the same antenna
port as any of the downlink pilots. The MS shall not assume that any transmission instance of theadvanced primary synchronization signal is transmitted on the same antenna port, or ports used
for any other transmission instance of the advanced primary synchronization signal.
The sequence d n  shall be mapped to the resource elements according to
ak ,l  d n , n  0,...,61, k  n  31 DL
N RU
N scRU2

The advanced primary synchronization signal shall be mapped to the third OFDM symbol in slots
1 and 6. Resource elements (k , l ) in the OFDM symbols used for transmission of the advanced
primary synchronization signal wherek  n  31 DL
N RU
N scRU, n  5,4,...,1,62,63,...66
2

are reserved and not used for transmission of the advanced primary synchronization signal.
3.4.2.4.2 Advanced secondary synchronization signal
3.4.2.4.2.1 Sequence generation
The sequence d (0),..., d (61) used for the advanced second synchronization signal is aninterleaved concatenation of two length-31 binary sequences. The concatenated sequence is

A-GN4.00-03-TS

128

scrambled with a scrambling sequence given by the advanced primary synchronization signal.
The combination of two length-31 sequences defining the secondary synchronization signal isd (2n)  s0( m0 ) (n)c0 (n),d (2n  1)  s1( m1 ) (n)c1 (n) z1( m0 ) (n)d (2n  1)  s0( m0 ) (n)c1(n) z1( m1 ) (n)

for

slot

0

and

d (2n)  s1( m1 ) (n)c0 (n),for slot 5,where 0  n  30 . The indices m 0 and m1 are(1)derived from the physical-layer BS-identification group N ID .
( m0 )The two sequences s0( n)( m1 )and s1are defined as two different cyclic shifts of the

( n)

(m )
~
~
(m )
~
m-sequence s (n) according to s0 (n)  s (n  m0 ) mod 31 and s1 (n)  s (n  m1 ) mod 31 ,01~where s (i)  1  2 x(i) , 0  i  30 .The two scrambling sequences c0 (n) and c1 (n) depend on
the advanced primary synchronization signal and are defined by two different cyclic shifts of the~~m-sequence c (n) according to c0 (n)  c ((n  N ID ) mod 31) and
( 2)

( 2)
( 2)
 0,1,2 is the physical-layer identification withinc1 (n)  c~((n  N ID
 3) mod 31) , where N ID~
(1)
the physical-layer BS identification group N ID and c (i)  1  2 x(i) , 0  i  30 . x(i ) is definedby x(i  5)  x(i  3)  x(i )mod 2, 0  i  25with initial conditions x(0)  0, x(1)  0, x(2)  0, x(3)  0, x(4)  1 .
( m0 )()

z1 m1 (n)The scrambling sequences z1

( n)

and

~

( m0 )(n)  ~z (( n  (m0 mod 8)) mod 31) andm-sequence z (n) according to z1
z1( m1 ) (n)  ~z (( n  (m1 mod 8)) mod 31)

are defined by a cyclic shift of the.

3.4.2.4.2.2 Mapping to resource elements
In a half-frame, the same antenna port as for the advanced primary synchronization signal shallbe used for the advanced secondary synchronization signal. The sequence d n  shall bemapped to resource elements according to:k ,l  d (n), n  0,...,61; k  n  31 DL
N RU
N scRUDL, l  N symb
1
2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

129

3.4.3 Pilot for DL OFDM
Pilot is used mainly for channel estimation. Pilot symbol is identical to the training symbol in thesame subcarrier in a PRU. Pilot symbol should be boosted by 2.5 dB (=4/3) compared with data
symbol. And further boosting power(over 2.5dB) is optional in case that MCS is lower as BPSK
and QPSK.
3.4.3.1 Pilot for DL CCCH
Pilot symbol uses the same training index for CCH. As described in Section 3.4.8.1.1, Pilot
symbols (S3- S19) in the same subcarrier (F7 and F19) copy training symbol S2. Pilot symbols(S5, S9, S13 and S17) in the same subcarrier (F3, F11, F15 and F23) copy training symbol S2.
3.4.3.2 Pilot for DL ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. Pilot symbol uses the same training index for ICH.
Pilot symbols (S5, S9 S13 and S17) in the same subcarrier (F3, F7, F11, F15, F19 and F23) copy
training symbol S1.
3.4.3.3 Optional Pilots for DL OFDM
Three types of optional downlink pilots are defined:BS-specific pilots, MS-specific pilots andPositioning pilots
There is one pilot transmitted per downlink antenna port.
3.4.3.3.1 BS-specific pilots
BS-specific pilots shall be transmitted in all downlink slots in a BS supporting ADEDCH
transmission.BS-specific pilots are transmitted on one or several of antenna ports 0 to 3.
3.4.3.3.1.1 Sequence generation
The reference-signal sequence rl ,ns (m) is defined byrl ,ns (m) 

12

1  2  c(2m)  j 1 1  2  c(2m  1),2

max,DLm  0,1,...,2 N RU
1

where ns is the half slot number within a radio frame and l is the OFDM symbol number
within the half slot. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised withBS
BS
cinit  210   7   ns  1  l  1   2  N ID
 1  2  N ID
 NGI at the start of each OFDM symbol

where N GI  1 .

A-GN4.00-03-TS

130

3.4.3.3.1.2 Mapping to resource elements
The pilot sequence rl ,ns (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl)used as reference symbols for antenna port p in half slot ns according to ak( ,pl)  rl ,ns (m' ) ,k  6m  v  vshift  mod 6 ,wheremax,DLDLm  m  N RU
 N RUDLm  0,1,...,2  N RU
1 ,

and

DL
0, N symb
 3 if p  0,1 .
l
if p  2,3
1

The variables v and vshift define the position in the frequency domain for the different pilots
is given byv  0 if p  0 and l  0 and
if p  1 and l  0
if p  0 and l  0 andv  3(ns mod 2) if p  2
if p  1 and l  0 ,BSv  3  3( ns mod 2) if p  3 .The BS-specific frequency shift is given by vshift  NID
mod 6 .

where
v3

v

,
,

Resource units k, l  used for pilot transmission on any of the antenna ports in a half slot shallnot be used for any transmission on any other antenna port in the same half slot and set to zero.
3.4.3.3.2 MS-specific pilots
MS-specific pilots are supported for single-antenna-port transmission of ADEDCH and aretransmitted on antenna port 5, 7, or 8. MS-specific pilots are also supported for spatial
multiplexing on antenna ports 7 and 8. MS specific pilots are present and are a valid reference for
ADEDCH demodulation only if the ADEDCH transmission is associated with the corresponding
antenna port. MS-specific pilots are transmitted only on the resource units upon which thecorresponding ADEDCH is mapped. The MS-specific pilot is not transmitted in resource elements
k, l  in which one of the physical channels or physical signals other than MS-specific pilot
defined in 6.1 are transmitted using resource elements with the same index pair k, l regardless of their antenna port p .
3.4.3.3.2.1 Sequence generation
For antenna port 5, the MS-specific reference-signal sequence rns (m) is defined byrns (m) 

where

ADEDCHN RU

transmission.
Cinit  

12

1  2  c(2m)  j 1 1  2  c(2m  1),2

ADEDCHm  0,1,...,12 N RU
1denotes the bandwidth in resource units of the corresponding ADEDCH

The

 

pseudo-randomBSns / 2  1  2 N ID
 1  216  nMSID

sequence generator
at the start of each slot.

shall

be

initialised

with

A-GN4.00-03-TS

131

For antenna ports 7 and 8, the reference-signal sequence r (m) is defined byr ( m) The

12

1  2  c(2m)  j 1 1  2  c(2m  1),2

pseudo-random

sequence

generator

max,DLm  0,1,...,12 N RU
1 .

shall

be

initialisedBS
cinit   ns / 2  1   2 NID
 1  216  nSCID at the start of each slot, where nSCID iswith
0 or 1

according to the most recent ADECI format 2B associated with the ADEDCH transmission. If
there is no ADECI format 2B associated with the ADEDCH transmission, the MS shall assume
that nSCID is zero.
3.4.3.3.2.2 Mapping to resource elements
For antenna port 5, in a physical resource unit with frequency-domain index nPRU assigned forthe corresponding ADEDCH transmission, the pilot sequence
complex-valued
tomodulation

symbols

ADEDCHak( ,pl )  rns (3  l   N RU
 m' )

if l  2,3
 4m'vshiftk  
4m' (2  vshift ) mod 4 if l  5,6,

respectively. m'  0,1,...,3N RU

ADEDCH,wherewithp5

rns (m)shall be mapped to

in

a

slot

accordingk  (k ) mod NscRU  NscRU  nPRU,,

 0,1 if ns mod 2  0l  
2,3 if ns mod 2  1 and l  3,6,2,5 for l '  0,1,2,3

 1 is the counter of MS-specific pilot resource elements withina respective OFDM symbol of the ADEDCH transmission.The BS-specific frequency shift is given
by vshift  NIDBS mod 3 . The mapping shall be in increasing order of the frequency-domain index
nPRU

of the physical resource units assigned for the corresponding ADEDCH transmission. The

ADEDCHquantity N RU
denotes the bandwidth in resource units of the corresponding ADEDCH

transmission.
The notation R p is used to denote a resource unit used for pilot transmission on antenna
port p .For antenna ports 7 and 8, in a physical resource unit with frequency-domain index nPRU
assigned for the corresponding ADEDCH transmission, a part of the pilot sequence r (m) shallA-GN4.00-03-TS132

be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl) with p {7,8} .
3.4.3.3.3 Positioning pilots
Positioning pilots shall only be transmitted in resource units in downlink slots configured for
positioning pilot transmission. In a slot configured for positioning pilot transmission, the starting
positions of the OFDM symbols configured for positioning pilot transmission shall be identical tothose in a slot in which all OFDM symbols have the same guard interval length as the OFDM
symbols configured for positioning pilot transmission.
Positioning pilots are transmitted on antenna port 6.
The positioning pilots shall not be mapped to resource elements k, l  allocated to ABCCH,APSS or ASSS regardless of their antenna port p .
3.4.3.3.3.1 Sequence generation
The reference-signal sequence rl , ns (m) is defined byrl ,ns (m) 

12

1  2  c(2m)  j 1 1  2  c(2m  1),2

max,DLm  0,1,...,2 N RU
1

where ns is the half slot number within a radio frame, l is the OFDM symbol number within
the half slot. The pseudo-random sequence generator shall be initialised withBS
BS
cinit  210   7   ns  1  l  1   2  NID
 1  2  NID
 NGI at the start of each OFDM symbol where

N GI  1 .

3.4.3.3.3.2 Mapping to resource elements
The pilot sequence rl ,ns (m) shall be mapped to complex-valued modulation symbols ak( ,pl)used as pilot for antenna port p  6 in half slot ns according to ak( ,pl)  rl , ns (m' ) , whereDL
PRS  6  l  vshift mod 6 , m  0,1,,2  N RUPRS  1,
k  6m  N RU
 N RU

A-GN4.00-03-TS133

3,5,6

if ns mod 2  0

2,3,5,6


if ns mod 2  1 and 4 ABCCH antenna ports

max,DLPRS
and l  1,2,3,5,6 if ns mod 2  1 and 1 or 2 ABCCH antenna ports .
m  m  N RU
 N RUPRS
is configured by higher layers and the
The bandwidth for positioning pilots and N RU
ID
mod 6 .
BS-specific frequency shift is given by vshift  NBS

3.4.3.3.3.3 Positioning pilot slot configuration
The PRS configuration index I PRS is configured by higher layers. The BS specific slot
configuration period TPRS and the BS specific slot offset  PRS for the transmission of
positioning pilots is determined by I PRS . If I PRS is from 1 to 159, TPRS is 160 and  PRS  I PRS .
If I PRS is from 160 to 479, TPRS is 320 and  PRS  I PRS  160 . If I PRS is from 480 to 1119,
TPRS is 640 and  PRS  I PRS  480 . If I PRS is from 1120 to 2399, TPRS is 1280 and PRS  I PRS  1120 . Positioning pilots are transmitted only in configured DL slots. Positioning

pilots shall not be transmitted in special slots. Positioning pilots shall be transmitted in N PRS
consecutive downlink slots, where N PRS is configured by higher layers.
The positioning pilot instances, for the first slot of the N PRS downlink slots, shall satisfy
10  nf  ns / 2  PRS  mod TPRS  0 .
3.4.4 Training and Pilot Boosting
Boosting of training and pilot symbol should be defined to improve accuracy of channel estimation
as with protocol version 1. Transmission power should be always constant even if MIMO isapplied. Training and pilot boosting should change the boosting value of each layer because"Total power of total antenna in one PRU" is the same as "Total power of single antenna in one
PRU". The power of the training and pilot symbol should equate in any case including MIMO inconsideration of the carrier sense. These boosting values defined in this section should bedefault.
3.4.4.1 1 Layer Format SISO/SDMA
Figure 3.58 shows training and pilot boosting for 1 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 2.5dB higher than data symbols as default.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

134

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Antenna1

Data Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier

2.5dB Up
S1
f

2.5dB Up
S5
f
Tx Power

2.5dB Up
Total PowerTime

Figure 3.58 Training and Pilot boosting for 1 Layer format
3.4.4.2 2 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA
Figure 3.59 shows training and pilot boosting for 2 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 5.5dB higher than data symbols because data symbols are multiplexed, but training
and pilot are skipped with regular intervals.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

135

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Antenna1

Antenna2

Data Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier

5.5dB Up
S1
f

5.5dB Up
S5
f

Tx Power

2.5dB Up
5.5dB Up
Total Power is same as SISO

Time

Figure 3.59 Training and Pilot boosting for 2 Layer format

A-GN4.00-03-TS

136

3.4.4.3 4 Layer MIMO Format except for SDMA
Figure 3.60 shows training and pilot boosting for 4 layer format. In this case, training and pilot
symbols are 8.5dB higher than data symbols because data symbols are multiplexed, but training
and pilot are skipped with regular intervals.
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Antenna1

Antenna2

Data Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier

Antenna3

Antenna4

8.5dB Up
S1
f

8.5dB Up
S5
f
Tx Power

2.5dB Up
8.5dB Up
Total Power is same as SISO

Time

Figure 3.60 Training and Pilot boosting for 4 Layer format

A-GN4.00-03-TS

137

3.4.4.4 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting
The amount of training and pilot boosting depends on the MIMO type. Table 3.13 summarizes therelation between MIMO type and training and pilot boosting.
Table 3.13 Summary for Training and Pilot Boosting (Default)
SISO/SDMA
STBC
SM/EMB

1 Layer Format
2.5dB-

2 Layer Format 4 Layer Format
5.5dB
5.5dB
8.5dB

3.4.4.5 Optional Downlink Pilot boosting
The BS determines the downlink transmit energy per resource element.
A MS may assume downlink BS-specific RS EPRP is constant across the downlink system
bandwidth and constant across all slots until different BS-specific RS power information isreceived. The downlink reference-signal transmit power is defined as the linear average over the
power contributions (in [W]) of all resource elements that carry BS-specific pilots within theoperating system bandwidth.
The ratio of ADEDCH EPRP to BS-specific RS EPRP among ADEDCH REs for each OFDM
symbol is denoted by either  A or  B according to the OFDM symbol index.  A and  B are
MS-specific. If the number of antenna ports is 1 or 2,  A is from {1,2,3,5,6} and  B is 0 or 4. If
the number of antenna ports is 4,  A is from {2,3,5,6} and  B is from {0,1,4}.
3.4.5 Signal for DL OFDM
Figure 3.61 describes the channel coding block diagram for DL signal symbol.

Signal Data(bit)

Encoding

Small
Scramblingng
ng

Coded Signal Data(symbol)
Modulation

Figure 3.61 Signal Block Diagram
3.4.5.1 Encoding and Small Scrambling
Error correction code method is defined as hamming coding.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

138

Hamming codes can detect and correct 1-bit errors, and can detect (but not correct) 2-bit errors.
Hamming codes can work at high speed, because it can be calculated simply. Small scramblingis applied for PAPR reduction.

Signal Data

Hamming(8,4)

Small Scrambling

Figure 3.62 Process for Applying Hamming Code and Scrambling for Symbols
3.4.5.1.1 (8,4)-Hamming Coding
Actual data (4 bits)
 X 1 X２

X3

Coded data (8 bits)
X 1 X 2 X 3 X 4

X4

C1

C2

C3

C4 

Generation polynomial
C1  X 1  X 2  X 3

C 2  X1  X 2  X 4
C 3  X1  X 3  X 4
C4  X 2  X3  X4
INPUT
Hamming Encoder

OUTPUT
Figure 3.63 Generation Polynomial
3.4.5.1.2 Small Scrambling Pattern
The generation polynomial is defined as follows;X^5 + X^2 + 1
Figure 3.64 shows the structure of small scrambling.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

139

Data in
SR5

SR4

SR3

SR2

Data out

SR1

Figure 3.64 Small Scrambling for Hamming CodeInitial values of shift register SR5-SR1 are set to the lower 5 bits of SCH number(*1). The shift
register of scrambler is initialized for each Hamming code.
(*1)SCH number : Refer to Section 2.4.3.2.
3.4.5.2 Modulation for Signal
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol. The
modulation for signal is used as BPSK except for EMB-MIMO. In case of EMB-MIMO, QPSK
modulation is carried out for signal. Refer to Appendix B.1.1 for BPSK and B.1.3 for QPSK.
3.4.5.3 Signal for Optional DL Physical Channel
3.4.5.3.1 Advanced Physical Broadcast Channel
3.4.5.3.1.1 Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),...,b(M bit 1) shall be scrambled with a BS-specific sequence prior to~~modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bitsb (0),...,b (M bit  1) according to~b (i)  b(i)  c(i) mod 2 . M bit equals 1920,The scrambling sequence shall be initialised withBS
cinit  NID
in each radio frame fulfillingnf mod 4  0 .

3.4.5.3.1.2 Modulation~~

The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (M bit  1) shall be modulated, resulting in a block ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) . B.10.2 QPSK is used for the physicalbroadcast channel.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

140

3.4.5.3.1.3 Layer mapping and precoding
The block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers with





T

( 0)
M symb
 M symb and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P 1) (i) ,i  0,...,M symb  1 ,where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p and wherep  0,...,P  1 and the number of antenna ports for BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 .

3.4.5.3.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Indicator Channel
The ADEFICH shall be transmitted when the number of OFDM symbols for ADECCH is greaterthan zero. 1 or 2 OFDM symbols are used for ADECCH in slot 1 and 6,. 1,2 or 3 OFDM symbols
are used for ADECCH in slots (except slot 6) configured with Positioning pilots,
3.4.5.3.2.1 Scrambling
The block of bits b(0),...,b(31) transmitted in one slot shall be scrambled with a BS-specific~~sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (31) according
to b (i)  b(i)  c(i) mod 2 . The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised with~BSBS
at the start of each slot.
cinit   ns 2  1   2 NID
 1  29  NID

3.4.5.3.2.2 Modulation~~

The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (31) shall be modulated, resulting in a block ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (15) . QPSK is used for the ADEFICH.
3.4.5.3.2.3 Layer mapping and precoding( 0) 16 andThe block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (15) shall be mapped to layers with M symb

precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P1) (i) , i  0,...,15 , whereT

represents the signal for antenna port p and where p  0,...,P  1 and the number ofantenna ports for BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 . The ADEFICH shall be transmitted on the samey ( p ) (i)A-GN4.00-03-TS

141

set of antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.5.3.3 Advanced Downlink ECCH
3.4.5.3.3.1 ADECCH formats
An ADECCH is transmitted on an aggregation of one or several consecutive RP(Resource Point)groups. The number of resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH or ADHICH is N RPG .
The cluster of RP groups available in the system are numbered from 0 and NC RPG  1 , where
NC RPG  N RPG / 9 . An ADECCH consisting of n consecutive RPGs may only start on a RPG

fulfilling i mod n  0 , where i is the RPG number. Multiple ADECCHs can be transmitted in a slot.
N C  RPG is 1,3,4,8, N RPG is 9,18,36,72 and Number of ADECCH bits is 72,144,288,576 for

ADECCH format 0,1,2,3 respectively.
3.4.5.3.3.2 ADECCH multiplexing and scrambling(i)b (i ) (0),...,b (i ) (M bit 1)

The block of bits
slot, where
shall

(i)
M bit

on each of the control channels to be transmitted in ais the number of bits in one slot to be transmitted on ADECCH number i ,bemultiplexed,

resulting

in

a

block

(nADECCH -1)(0)(1)b(0) (0),..., b(0) (M bit1), b(1) (0),..., b(1) (M bit
1),..., b( nADECCH 1) (0),..., b( nADECCH 1) ( M bit
1)

is

the

numberof

ADECCHstransmitted

in

the

slot.

The

of

bits

,wherenADECCH

block

of

bits

(nADECCH -1)(0)(1)b(0) (0),..., b(0) (M bit1), b(1) (0),..., b(1) (M bit
1),..., b( nADECCH 1) (0),..., b( nADECCH 1) ( M bit
1) shall bescrambled with a BS-specific sequence prior to modulation, resulting in a block of scrambled bits~~b (0),...,b (M tot  1)

according to b (i)  b(i)  c(i) mod 2 .
~A-GN4.00-03-TS

142

The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised withBS
cinit  ns 2 29  NID

at the start ofeach slot.Cluster of RP group number n corresponds to bits b(72n), b(72n  1),...,b(72n  71) . If
necessary, <NIL> units shall be inserted in the block of bits prior to scrambling to ensure that the
ADECCHs starts at the CCE positions to ensure that the length of the scrambled block of bits
matches the amount of resource-point groups not assigned to ADEFICH or ADHICH.
3.4.5.3.3.3 Modulation~~

The block of scrambled bits b (0),...,b (M tot  1) shall be modulated, resulting in a block ofcomplex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) . QPSK is used for the ADECCH.
3.4.5.3.3.4 Layer mapping and precoding
The block of modulation symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers



with



T

( 0)
M symb
 M symb and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P 1) (i) ,i  0,...,M symb  1 to be mapped onto resources on the antenna ports used for transmission,

where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p . The ADECCH shall be transmitted on
the same set of antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.5.3.4 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
Multiple ADHICHs mapped to the same set of resource elements constitute a ADHICH group,
where ADHICHs within the same ADHICH group are separated through different orthogonal
group
seq
, nADHICH
sequences. An ADHICH resource is identified by the index pair  nADHICH
 , where

group
seq
nADHICH
is the ADHICH group number and nADHICH
is the orthogonal sequence index withingroup
the group. The index nADHICH
in a downlink slot with non-zero ADHICH resources ranges from0 to q  N ADHICH  1 .The number of ADHICH groups may vary between downlink slots and is
group

group
group
given by q  N ADHICH, where q is given by Table 3.14 and N ADHICH
by the expression

A-GN4.00-03-TS143

above.
Table 3.14

value of factor q

Uplink-downlink
Slot Number
Configuration
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0

2 1 -

-

1

0 1 -

- 1 0 1 -2

0 0 - 1 0 0 0 - 1 0

3

1 1 -

-

- 2 1 -

- 1 1 -

-

-

- 1
- 1

3.4.5.3.4.1 Modulation
The block of bits b(0),...,b(M bit 1) transmitted on one ADHICH in one slot shall be modulated,
resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols z(0),...,z(M s  1) , where M s  M bit .
BPSK is used for the advanced downlink hybrid ARQ indicator channel.
The block of modulation symbols z(0),...,z(M s  1) shall be symbol-wise multiplied with an
orthogonal sequence and scrambled, resulting in a sequence of modulation symbols
d (0),...,d (M symb  1)

according to d (i)  w  i mod NSFADHICH   1  2c(i)   z  i NSFADHICH   , where
ADHICHADHICHM symb  N SF
.M s , N SF
 4 andi  0,..., M symb  1 ,c(i )is a BS-specificscrambling sequence generated. The scrambling sequence generator shall be initialised withBS
BS
cinit   ns 2  1   2 NID
 1  29  NID
at the start of each slot.

The sequence  w(0)ADHICHw( NSF 1)  is given by Table 3.15 where the sequenceseq
index nADHICH
corresponds to the ADHICH number within the ADHICH group.

Table 3.15 Orthogonal Sequences [ w(i )] for ADHICH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

144

Sequence Index

Orthogonal Sequences

seq
ADHICHADHICH
NSF
4

n

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

 1  1  1  1
 1 1  1 1
 1  1 1 1
 1 1 1  1 j  j  j  j 
 j  j  j  j 
 j  j  j  j 
 j  j  j  j 

3.4.5.3.4.2 Resource group alignment, layer mapping and precoding
The block of symbols d (0),...,d (M symb  1) should be first aligned with resource point group size,
resulting in a block of symbols d (0) (0),...,d (0) (c  M symb  1) , where c  1 , d (0) (i)  d (i) , fori  0,...,M symb  1 .The block of symbols

d (0) (0),...,d (0) (c  M symb  1) shall be mapped to layers

and precoded, resulting in a block of vectors y(i)  y (0) (i) ... y ( P1) (i) , i  0,...,c  M symb  1 ,T

where y ( p) (i) represents the signal for antenna port p , p  0,...,P  1 and the number ofantenna ports for BS-specific pilots P  1,2,4 . The layer mapping and precoding operation
depends on the number of antenna ports used for transmission of the ADHICH. The ADHICH
shall be transmitted on the same set of antenna ports as the ABCCH.
3.4.6 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard carrier) for DL OFDM
Null symbol is defined as 0 + 0j. It includes Discontinuous Transmission (DTX), DC carrier andGuard carrier. The details of DTX are described in Section 3.4.1.7.
3.4.7 TCCH Format for DL OFDM
TCCH format is not used for DL.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

145

3.4.8 PRU Structure for DL OFDM
The PRU structure for DL OFDM defined in this chapter is shown in Table 3.16.
Table 3.16 PRU Structure for DL OFDM
Channel Name
CCH

CCCH

ANCH

Common Control Channel

Anchor Channel

ICH
EXCH

CSCH

Extra Channel

Circuit Switching Channel

Format
Type

Layer

-

1

format 1

1

format 2

1

format 3

2

format 44format 1

1

format 22

format 44format 3

2

format 54-

1

3.4.8.1 CCH for DL OFDM
3.4.8.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.65 is the diagram about CCCH for DL. As shown in the
figure and Table 3.17, CCCH is composed of data symbols, pilot symbols, training symbols andnull symbols (DC carrier, guard carrier).

A-GN4.00-03-TS

146

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier

Training Symbol

Figure 3.65 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
Table 3.17 Composition of CCCH
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

324

Training Symbol

44

Pilot Symbol

50

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)
3.4.8.1.2 ICH for DL OFDM
3.4.8.1.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH38

The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.66, Figure 3.67, Figure 3.68, and Figure 3.69 are thediagrams about ANCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are four kinds of ANCH formats.
ANCH format (1) and (2) are used in case of 1 layer, ANCH format (3) and (4) are used in case of
2 and 4 layers for STBC-MIMO.
When one antenna transmits pilot and training symbols, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot
and training symbols but null symbols. The data and signal symbols are transmitted from eachantenna.
format (1)A-GN4.00-03-TS

147

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Data Symbol
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Figure 3.66 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (1)Table 3.18 Composition of ANCH format (1)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

372

Training Symbol

22

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

148

format (2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Pilot Symbol
Training Symbol
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Figure 3.67 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (2)Table 3.19 Composition of ANCH format (2)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol364

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol

22

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

149

format (3)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Signal Symbol

Training Symbol (Antenna1)

DC Carrier, Guard Carrier
Guard Time
Training Symbol (Antenna2)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Figure 3.68 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (3)Table 3.20 Composition of ANCH format (3)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol340

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

12Training Symbol(Antenna2)

10

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

24

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

150

format (4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Signal Symbol

DC Carrier, Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Training Symbol (Antenna1)

Training Symbol (Antenna2)

Training Symbol (Antenna3)

Training Symbol (Antenna4)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)

Figure 3.69 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH format (4)Table 3.21 Composition of ANCH format (4)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol340

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

6Training Symbol(Antenna2)6Training Symbol(Antenna3)6Training Symbol(Antenna4)4

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)

12Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

151

3.4.8.1.3 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH
The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.70, Figure 3.71, Figure 3.73, Figure 3.74 and Figure 3.72
are the diagrams about EXCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are five kinds of EXCH
formats. EXCH format (a-1), (a-2), (a-3), (a-4) and (a-5) have always DC carrier and guard carrier.
These formats are the cases that full subcarrier mode is not used.
The PRU diagrams shown in Figure 3.75, Figure 3.76 and Figure 3.77 are the diagrams about
EXCH for DL. As shown in these figures, there are three kinds of EXCH formats. EXCH formats(b), (c) and (d) are the case that full subcarrier mode is used. EXCH format (b) is used for all
SCHs except central SCH to which EXCH format (c) or (d) is applied.
EXCH Format (a-1) is used in case of 1 layer. EXCH Format (a-2) and (a-4) are used in case of 2
and 4 layers for SM and STBC-MIMO. EXCH Format (a-3) and (a-5) are used in case of 2 and 4
layers for EMB and STBC-MIMO.
There are two and four kinds of arrangement for pilot and training symbols. When one antennatransmits pilot and training symbols, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot and training symbols
but null symbols. The data and signal symbols are transmitted from each antenna.
As for training symbol for EXCH format (b), (c), (d), refer to 3.4.2.3.2.3.
EXCH data size depends on EXCH format and MCS which is indicated by ANCH/ECCH.
Moreover, each EXCH data size shall be equal to the number of bits which can beaccommodated in one or two PRU.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

152

format (a-1)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Training Symbol

Figure 3.70 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-1)
Table 3.22 Composition of EXCH format (a-1)
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

372

Training Symbol

22

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

153format (a-2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Training Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Training Symbol (Antenna2)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Figure 3.71 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-2)
Table 3.23 Composition of EXCH format (a-2)
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

348

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

12Training Symbol(Antenna2)

10

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

24

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

154

format (a-3)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time

Signal Symbol

Training Symbol (Antenna1)

Training Symbol (Antenna2)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Figure 3.72 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-3)
Table 3.24 Composition of EXCH format (a-3)
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol340

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

12Training Symbol(Antenna2)

10

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

24

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

155

format (a-4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time

Data Symbol
Training Symbol(Antenna1)
Training Symbol(Antenna4)

Training Symbol(Antenna2)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)

Training Symbol(Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Figure 3.73 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-4)
Table 3.25 Composition of EXCH format (a-4)
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

348

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

6Training Symbol(Antenna2)6Training Symbol(Antenna3)6Training Symbol(Antenna4)4

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)

12Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

156

format (a-5)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier, Guard Carrier, Guard Time
Data Symbol
Signal Symbol
Training Symbol
Training Symbol
Training Symbol(Antenna1)(Antenna2)(Antenna3)
Training Symbol
Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)(Antenna4)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna3)
Pilot Symbol (Antenna4)

Figure 3.74 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (a-5)
Table 3.26 Composition of EXCH format (a-5)
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol340

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol(Antenna1)

6Training Symbol(Antenna2)6Training Symbol(Antenna3)6Training Symbol(Antenna4)4

Pilot Symbol(Antenna1)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna2)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna3)

12

Pilot Symbol(Antenna4)

12Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

157

As shown in Figure 3.75, the training symbol of F1 is a copy of F12. The training symbol of F13 isa copy of F24.
format (b)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Copy

Copy

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

Guard Time

Training Symbol

Figure 3.75 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (b)Table 3.27 Composition of EXCH format (b)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

408

Training Symbol

24

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol0

A-GN4.00-03-TS

158

As shown in Figure 3.76, the training symbol of F1 is a copy of F12.
format (c)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Copy

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

Training Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Time

Figure 3.76 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (c)Table 3.28 Composition of EXCH format (c)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol390

Training Symbol

23

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier)

19

A-GN4.00-03-TS

159

As shown in Figure 3.77, the training symbol of F13 is a copy of F24.
format (d)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Copy

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Training Symbol

Figure 3.77 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (d)Table 3.29 Composition of EXCH format (d)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol390

Training Symbol

23

Pilot Symbol

24

Null symbol (Guard Carrier)

19

A-GN4.00-03-TS

160

3.4.8.1.4 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.78 is the diagram about CSCH for DL. As shown in the
figure and Table 3.30, CSCH is composed of data symbols, signal symbols, pilot symbols,
training symbols and null symbols (DC carrier, Guard carrier).
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

Training Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Signal Symbol

Figure 3.78 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
Table 3.30 Composition of CSCH
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol364

Signal Symbol

8

Training Symbol

22

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC Carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

161

3.5 UL OFDM PHY Layer
Figure 3.79 describes a transmitter block diagram for OFDM transmission method.
TCCH

Modulation

Null
SignalEncoding

Scrambling

Training

Modulation

Encoding

Data

CRC
Attachment

Bitinterleaving

Modulation

S/P
Conv
(OFDM
/ TDM)

P/S converter

Sel

IFFT

User A

Guard interval insertion

Modulation

AAS / MIMO Precoding (*1)

Pilot

Modulation

S(t)Scrambling

Channel Coding(*1) : Option

Figure 3.79 Transmitter Block Diagram
3.5.1 Channel Coding for PHY Frame
Refer to Section 3.4.1.
3.5.1.1 CRC
Refer to Section 3.4.1.1.
3.5.1.2 Scrambling
Refer to Section 3.4.1.2.
3.5.1.3 Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.3.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

162

3.5.1.4 Bit-interleaving
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.
3.5.1.5 Modulation Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.5.
a) BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.1.
b) QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.3.
c) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
d) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
e) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
3.5.1.6 Precoding Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.6
3.5.1.6.1 MS Transmission Antenna SwitchingThis function is applied to the MIMO method for which CSI is necessary in the transmitting side.
For example, MS has one RF transmitter and plural RF receivers as shown in Figure 3.80.
Transmission antenna switching can be used in such a case to achieve multiple streams for one
MS. Antenna switching timing, i.e. switching every slot or every frame, is negotiated in negotiation
phase.

BS

Ant #1MSRF

Ant #1Ant #2

SW

Rx-RF

SW

Tx-RF

SW

Rx-RF

RF
Ant #3RF
Ant #4

Ant #2RF

Figure 3.80 Multiple streams for MS with one Tx-RF and plural Rx-RF

A-GN4.00-03-TS

163

3.5.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method to PRU
Refer to Section 3.4.1.7.
3.5.1.8 Summary of OFDM UL Channel Coding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.8.
3.5.1.9 Training for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.2.
3.5.1.10 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission frame antenna switching
When the number of MS transmitter is one and the number of MS transmission antenna is two or
more and MS supports antenna switching, UL core-sequence number for MS transmission frame
antenna switching is calculated as follows:
UL Core-sequence Number : x = [(A+{Fk -1 MOD 4}) MOD 12] + 1
Fk = active frame number (Fk=1,2,…)
Fk is incremented every frame. Fk shall be initialized each scheduling term.
The parameter except for UL core-sequence number is same as Section 3.4.2.3.2.2.
3.5.1.11 UL Training Sequence for MS transmission slot antenna switching
When the number of MS transmitter is one and the number of MS transmission antenna is two or
more and MS supports antenna switching, UL core-sequence number for MS transmission slot
antenna switching is calculated as follows:
UL Core-sequence Number : x = [(A+{Sk -1 MOD 4}) MOD 12] + 1
Sk = absolute slot number (Sk=1,2,3,4)
The parameter except for UL core-sequence number is same as Section 3.4.2.3.2.2.
3.5.2 Pilot for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.3.
3.5.3 Signal for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.5.
3.5.4 Null (DTX/DC Carrier/Guard Carrier) for UL OFDM
Refer to Section 3.4.6.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

164

3.5.5 TCCH Format for UL OFDM
3.5.5.1 TCCH Format
TCCH is mainly used to request connection of individual channel from MS to BS, and to correcttransmission timing and transmission power according to measurement result at the channel
concerned. As shown in Figure 3.81, 3/8 of TCCH original data (the third OFDM data) is copied
ahead of the first OFDM data. The phase of this format must be consecutive. As described in
Section 3.5.6.1.2, TCCH symbols ({S3, S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9}, {S11, S12, S13} and {S15, 16,S17}) are used for TCCH. TCCH original data (the third OFDM data) is decided by the TCCH
core-sequence number as described in Section 3.5.5.2.
90 us
10 us

80 us
The First OFDM Data The Second OFDM Data TheThird OFDM Data

TCCH
original data
Copy
Figure 3.81 TCCH Format for OFDM
3.5.5.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot
TCCH core-sequence number is described in Appendix D.1. TCCH sub-slots number is describedin Section 3.5.6.1.2. The application patterns of TCCH core-sequence number and TCCH
sub-slot number are described in Chapter 5.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

165

3.5.6 PRU Structure for UL OFDM
The PRU structure for UL OFDM defined in this chapter is shown in Table 3.16.
Table 3.31 PRU Structure for UL OFDM
Channel Name
CCH

Format
Type

Layer

CCCH

Common Control Channel

-

1

TCCH

Timing Correct Channel--

format 1

1

format 2

1

format 3

2

format 44format 1

1

format 22

format 4

4

-

1

ANCH

Anchor Channel

ICH
EXCH
CSCH

Extra Channel
Circuit Switching Channel

3.5.6.1 CCH for UL OFDM
3.5.6.1.1 OFDM PRU Structure for CCCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.1.
3.5.6.1.2 OFDM PRU Structure for TCCH
The PRU diagram shown in Figure 3.82 is the diagram about TCCH for UL. As shown in the
figure, there are four sub-slots for TCCH, each of which is composed of three TCCH symbols({S3,S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9}, {S11, S12, S13} and {S15, S16, S17}).

A-GN4.00-03-TS

166

F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

Sub-slot 1

Sub-slot 2

Sub-slot 3

Sub-slot 4

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

TCCH Symbol

Figure 3.82 OFDM PRU Structure for TCCH
Table 3.32 Composition of TCCH
Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

TCCH Symbol

66 x 4 sub-slots

A-GN4.00-03-TS

167

3.5.6.2 ICH for UL OFDM
3.5.6.2.1 OFDM PRU Structure for ANCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.2.
3.5.6.2.2 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH
The PRU diagrams in shown Figure 3.83, Figure 3.84 and Figure 3.86 are the diagrams about
EXCH for UL. As shown in these figures, there are three kinds of EXCH formats. EXCH format (1)is used in case of 1 layer. EXCH Format (2) and (4) are used in case of 2 and 4 layers for SM and
STBC-MIMO. There are two and four kinds of arrangement for pilot and training symbols. Whenone antenna transmits the reference symbol, the other antenna(s) transmits not pilot and training
symbols but null symbol. The data symbols are transmitted from each antenna. Note that fullsubcarrier mode is not used for UL.
format (1)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Pilot Symbol

DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Training Symbol

Figure 3.83 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (1a)Table 3.33 Composition of EXCH format (1)A-GN4.00-03-TS

168

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

372

Training Symbol

22

Pilot Symbol

24

Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)38

format (2)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
Data Symbol

Training Symbol (Antenna1)

Pilot Symbol (Antenna1)

Training Symbol (Antenna2)
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Pilot Symbol (Antenna2)

Figure 3.84 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (2)Table 3.34 Composition of EXCH format (2)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

348

Training Symbol(Antenna 1)

12Training Symbol(Antenna 2)

10

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 1)

24

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 2)

24

Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

169

format (4)
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
F7
F8
F9
F10
F11
F12
F13
F14
F15
F16
F17
F18
F19
F20
F21
F22
F23
F24
S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8 S9 S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19
DC Carrier
Guard Carrier
Guard Time

Data Symbol
Training Symbol(Antenna 1)
Training Symbol(Antenna 4)

Training Symbol(Antenna 2)
Pilot Symbol(Antenna 1)

Pilot Symbol(Antenna 3)

Pilot Symbol(Antenna 4)

Training Symbol(Antenna 3)
Pilot Symbol(Antenna 2)

Figure 3.85 OFDM PRU Structure for EXCH format (4)Table 3.35 Composition of EXCH format (4)Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

348

Training Symbol(Anntenna 1)

6Training Symbol(Anntenna 2)

6Training Symbol(Anntenna 3)6Training Symbol(Anntenna 4)

4

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 1)

12

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 2)

12

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 3)

12

Pilot Symbol(Anntenna 4)

12Null Symbol (DC carrier, Guard Carrier)

38

A-GN4.00-03-TS

170

3.5.6.2.3 OFDM PRU Structure for CSCH
Refer to Section 3.4.8.1.4.
3.6 UL SC PHY Layer
Figure 3.86 describes a transmitter block diagram for SC transmission method.
TCCH

Modulation

Null
SignalScrambling

Encoding

Modulation

Pilot

Modulation

Sel

Guard
Interval
Insertion

SC Block
Construction

User A
Training

S(t)Modulation

Bit-interleaving

Data

Pulse
Shaping
FilterCRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Modulation

Encoding

Channel Coding

Figure 3.86 Transmitter Block Diagram for SC Transmission Method
Figure 3.87 describes an optional transmitter block diagram for SC transmission method.

Coded symbol rate= R

DFTSub-carrier
MappingGIinsertion

IFFT

NTX symbols

Size-NTX

Size-NFFT

Figure 3.87 Transmitter structure for SC-FDMA
3.6.1 Channel Coding for PHY FramePHY frame consists of one or more Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) data unit(s). CRC-bits are
first appended to the CRC data unit. Then tail-bits are appended to the CRC data unit with
A-GN4.00-03-TS

171

CRC-bits after performing scrambling. CRC unit is defined as the scrambled CRC data unit with
CRC-bits and tail-bits. The size of CRC unit is described in Section 3.6.7.3. The CRC unit isencoded according to error correction code. Then, bit-interleaving is performed for error
correction coded bits. When performing bit-interleaving, rate matching shall be applied bypuncturing some of coded bits if virtual GI extension is used. Then, the output bits of
bit-interleaving are converted to IQ signals by modulation method.
Figure 3.88 describes the channel coding block diagram for UL SC from Figure 3.86.

CRC

Data (bit)

Scrambling

Attachment

Bit-

Encoding

Data (symbol)

Modulation

Interleaving

Figure 3.88 Channel Coding for SC

3.6.1.1 CRC

CRC

Data (bit)Attachment

Scrambling

Bit-

Encoding

Data (symbol)

Interleaving

Modulation

Figure 3.89 CRC Attachment
Refer to Section 3.4.1.1.
3.6.1.2 Scrambling

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

BitInterleaving

Data (symbol)

Modulation

Figure 3.90 Scrambling

Refer to Section 3.4.1.2.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

172

3.6.1.3 Encoding

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

BitInterleaving

Data (symbol)

Modulation

Figure 3.91 Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.1.3.
3.6.1.4 Bit-interleaving

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

BitInterleaving

Data (symbol)

Modulation

Figure 3.92 Bit-interleaving
3.6.1.4.1 Bit-interleaver Structure
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.1.
3.6.1.4.2 Block Interleaver Method
Refer to Section 3.4.1.4.5.2.
3.6.1.4.3 Interleaver Parameters for UL SC
Table 3.36 to Table 3.39 summarize the parameters of the interleaver for input bit size andmodulation class. In Table 3.28, position to start reading (A) is used when the puncturing rate R2
is 1 or 4/6 at the convolutional encoder. Position to start reading (B) is used when the puncturing
rate R2 is 3/4 or 6/10 at the convolutional encoder.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

173

Table 3.36 Interleaver Parameter M and N
Physical Channel

Number of
Symbols: y

M

N

CCH
ICH (One PRU)
ICH (Otherwise)

240
256
512

15
16
32

16
16
16

Table 3.37 Interleaver Parameter
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

The Number of Block Interleavers
1
2
3
4
6
8

Table 3.38 The Definition of Bit Position i in a Symbol
Modulation
BPSK
QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

Bit Position i in a Symboli = (1)i = (1,2)i = (1,2,3)i = (1,2,3,4)i = (1,2,3,4,5,6)i = (1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8)

Table 3.39 Starting Position for Interleaver
Bit Position i in a
Symbol
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Position to Start
Writing
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1
a1,1

Position to Start
Reading (A)
a1,1
a1,2
a1,3
a1,4
a1,8
a1,9
a1,10
a1,7

Position to Start
Reading (B)
a1,1
a1,1
a1,2
a1,2
a1,2
a1,1
N/A
N/A

A-GN4.00-03-TS

174

3.6.1.4.4 Rate Matching Method
Rate matching is applied only when the virtual GI extension is used for SC. Table 3.40 shows thematching rate of Rate Matching (Rm) for different symbol rates. Figure 3.93 shows the deleting bit
positions of rate matching for CCH defined in the form of block interleaver matrix of 16-column
and 15-row (N=16, M=15). Figure 3.94 shows the deleting bit positions of rate matching pattern A
for ICH in the form of block interleaver matrix of 16-column and 16-row (N=16, M=16). Figure
3.95 to Figure 3.97 show the deleting bit positions of rate matching pattern B1 to B3 for ICH in theform of block interleaver matrix of 16-column and 16-row, respectively.
For ICH, when the puncturing rate R2 is 1 or 4/6 at convolutional encoder, pattern A is used.
When the puncturing rate R2 is 3/4 or 6/10 at convolutional encoder, patterns B1, B2 and B3 areperiodically used in an order such as B1 for the first block interleaver, B2 for the second blockinterleaver, B3 for the third block interleaver and so on.
When the number of input bits is 512, two rate matching patterns are simply concatenated todefine the pattern for the block interleaver of 16-column and 32-row (N=16 and M=32). Whenusing pattern B1, B2 and B3, appropriate pairs are (B1, B2), (B3, B1) and (B2, B3). These pairs(B1, B2), (B3, B1) and (B2, B3) are periodically used in an order such as (B1, B2) for the first
block interleaver, (B3, B1) for the second block interleaver, (B2, B3) for the third block interleaverand so on. The pattern (Bi, Bj) means that Bi spans the first 16-row and Bj spans the last 16-rowof the block interleaver matrix.
Table 3.41 to Table 3.44 summarize the deleting bit numbers when a1,1 is the starting position toread out of the block interleaver. When the coding rate R is 7/8 at the convolutional encoder,virtual GI extension is not applied.

Table 3.40 Rate Matching Parameters
Parameter

Type1

Type2

Type3

Type4

Type5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

206/240220/256

N/A
238/256

N/A
251/256

N/A
N/A

N/A
N/A

Matching Rate: Rm

CCH
ICH

(*) N/A: Not Available

A-GN4.00-03-TS

175

N=16
1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1
1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1
1

1

1

1
M=15

1

1

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=206/240

Figure 3.93 Deleting Bit Position for CCH: Pattern A

A-GN4.00-03-TS

176

N=16
1

2

1

2

1

3

1

2

1

2

1

3

1
M=16

1

2

2

1

2

1

3

1

2

1

1

2

1

3

1

2

1

2

1

2

1

3
2

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256

2Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256

3

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256

Figure 3.94 Deleting Bit Position for ICH: Pattern A

A-GN4.00-03-TS

177

N=16
1
1

2
1

1

3
2

1

2
2

1

3
2

1
1

M=16

2
1

1

3
2

1
1

2
1

1

3
2

1
1

2
2

1

3
2

1

2

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256

2Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256

3

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256

Figure 3.95 Deleting Bit Position for ICH: Pattern B1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

178

N=16
1
1

2
2

1
1

2
2

1

3
2

1
1

2
1

1

M=16

3
2

1
1

2
1

1

3
2

1

2
2

1

3
2

1
1

2
1

3

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256

2Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256

3

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256

Figure 3.96 Deleting Bit Position of ICH: Pattern B2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

179

N=16
1

2
1

1

2
1

1

3
2

1
1

2
2

1

3
2

1

M=16

2
1

1

3
2

1
1

2
1

1

3
2

1
1

2
2

1

3
2

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256

2Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256 and 238/256

3

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256

Figure 3.97 Deleting Bit Position of ICH: Pattern B3

A-GN4.00-03-TS

180

Table 3.41 Rate Matching Pattern for CCH
Rm

Puncturing Rate@CC

206/240

1

Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 240)A

76-90, 138, 142, 146, 150, 196-210

Table 3.42 Rate Matching Pattern 1 for ICH
Rm

Puncturing Rate@CC
1, 4/6220/256

3/4, 6/10

Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)A

81-96, 147, 151, 155, 159, 209-224

B150, 56, 59, 62, 83, 86, 89, 92, 95, 113, 116,
119, 122, 125, 128, 146, 149, 152, 155, 158,
179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 209, 212, 215, 218,
221, 224, 242, 245, 248, 251, 254

B252, 55, 58, 64, 82, 85, 88, 91, 94, 115, 118,
121, 124, 127, 145, 148, 151, 154, 157, 160,
178, 181, 184, 187, 190, 211, 214, 217, 220,
223, 241, 244, 247, 250, 253, 256

B351, 54, 60, 63, 81, 84, 87, 90, 93, 96, 114,
117, 120, 123, 126, 147, 150, 153, 156, 159,
177, 180, 183, 186, 189, 192, 210, 213, 216,
219, 222, 243, 246, 249, 252, 255

A-GN4.00-03-TS

181

Table 3.43 Rate Matching Pattern 2 for ICH
Rm

Puncturing Rate@CC

Pattern Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)

1, 4/6238/256

3/4, 6/10

A

151, 159, 209-224

B1149, 158, 179, 182, 185, 188, 191, 209, 212,
215, 218, 221, 224, 242, 245, 248, 251, 254

B2
B3148, 157, 178, 181, 184, 187, 190, 211, 214,
217, 220, 223, 241, 244, 247, 250, 253, 256
150, 159, 177, 180, 183, 186, 189, 192, 210,
213, 216, 219, 222, 243, 246, 249, 252, 255

Table 3.44 Rate Matching Pattern 3 for ICH
Rm

251/256

Puncturing Rate@CC

Pattern

1, 4/6

A

211, 214, 217, 220, 223

B1242, 245, 248, 251, 254

B2244, 247, 250, 253, 256

B3243, 246, 249, 252, 255

3/4, 6/10

Deleting Bit Number (1 - 256)3.6.1.4.5 Output-bits After Bit-interleaver
The IQ data symbol is generated by using x bits, each of which is taken from each blockinterleaver after applying the rate matching. Denote the output bits from i-th block interleaver byz(i,1), z(i,2), …, z(i,y‟), where y‟ is Rm*y with rate matching or y‟ is y without rate matching. Thus,
the j-th IQ data symbol is converted from the bit series z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j), where pi is a offset
value to circulate the order of input bits to the modulator, and is defined as follows:
Input bits to the modulator: z(p1,j), z(p2,j),…,z(px,j)Offset value: pi = ( (i+j-2) mod x)+1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

182

3.6.1.5 Modulation Method

Data (bit)CRC
Attachment

Scrambling

Encoding

BitInterleaving

Data (symbol)

Modulation

Figure 3.98 Modulation
The serial signal input after interleaving is converted to IQ Data symbol on each symbol. The
modulation (π/2-BPSK, π/4-QPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM, 64QAM and 256QAM) is shown in Appendix
B.
a) π/2-BPSK
Refer to Appendix B.2.
b) π/4-QPSK
Refer to Appendix B.4.
c) 8PSK
Refer to Appendix B.5.
d) 16QAM
Refer to Appendix B.6.
e) 64QAM
Refer to Appendix B.7.
f) 256QAM
Refer to Appendix B.8.
3.6.1.6 Symbol Mapping Method for Data Block
Symbol mapping methods depend on the types of physical channel (CCH, ANCH, EXCH and
CSCH). The detail of the mapping method is described below.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

183

3.6.1.6.1 Data Block
Figure 3.99 illustrates a data block structure for UL SC. Data block is a SC block composed ofdata symbols, in which N is the SC block size and G1 is the GI size. Data symbol mapping is
performed by aligning the data symbols along the time axis. That is, data symbols from themodulator are mapped into the SC block by the order of D(1), D(2), …, D(N).

D(N)

D(4)

..

D(3)

..

D(2)

26.67 usD(1)3.33 us

D(N)

D(N-G1+1)

30.00 us

Copy

Figure 3.99 Symbol Mapping onto SC Block without Virtual GI Extension

3.6.1.6.2 Data Block with Virtual GI Extension
When the virtual GI extension is used, some symbols in the preceding SC block are copied into a
data block. Figure 3.100 shows the SC block format (n-th SC block) in the case that virtual GI
extension is used for data blocks (except for S8 and S16). In addition to this, data blocks S8 andS16 include copies of the pilot symbols from S9 and S17 respectively with virtual GI extension.
Figure 3.101 shows the SC block format (n-th SC block) with virtual GI extension for data blocks
S8 and S16. Parameters for virtual GI extension are summarized in Table 3.45. Virtual GI lengthis defined as the time length of SC block to which preceding or succeeding SC block is copied.
Virtual GI size is defined as the number of symbols in the virtual GI length.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

184

Virtual GI Length(n-1)-th SC Block26.67 usGI
3.33 us3.33 usn-th SC Block26.67 us

Copy
Figure 3.100 Symbol Mapping of SC Block with Virtual GI Extension (Data Blocks Except for S8
and S16)

Virtual GI Length(n-1)-th SC Block26.67 usGI
3.33 us3.33 usn-th SC Block26.67 us

Copy(n+1)-th SC Block(Pilot Block)26.67 us

Virtual GI Length

3.33 usFigure 3.101 Symbol Mapping of SC Block with Virtual GI Extension (S8 and S16)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

185

Table 3.45 Parameters for Virtual GI Extension for UL SC
Parameter

Type 1

Type 2Type 3

Type 4

Type 5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

Virtual GI Length [us]Virtual GI Size [symbol]

3.33
2

1.67
2

0.417
1

0
0

0
0

3.6.1.7 Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst
3.6.1.7.1 Symbol Mapping Method without DTX Symbol
Figure 3.102, data symbol mapping is performed by aligning the data symbols along time axis in
the SC burst except for the copied symbols in GI and virtual GI as described in Section 3.6.1.6.

PHY Frame
The Second CRC Unit

The First CRC Unit

EXCH or CSCH@4PRUs

2.4 MHz

Starting Point

The First CRC Unit

The Second CRC UnitTime
SC Burst

Frequency

Figure 3.102 Data Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst without DXT Symbols (2.4 Msps)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

186

3.6.1.7.1.1 Symbol Mapping Method with DTX Symbol
DTX symbol is used in EXCH and CSCH when the SC burst can accommodate more CRC units
than the number of CRC units to be transmitted as shown in Figure 3.103. All data blocks after
mapping all CRC units in the SC burst are DTX symbols. Details of DTX symbol are described in
Section 3.6.5.

PHY Frame
The First CRC Unit

Starting Point

DTX

EXCH or CSCH@4PRUs

2.4 MHzDTX symbols are inserted to data blocks.
DTX

The first CRC UnitTime
SC Burst

Frequency

Figure 3.103 Data Symbol Mapping Method for SC Burst with DTX Symbols (2.4 Msps)

3.6.1.7.2 Symbol Mapping Method for Retransmission (CC-HARQ)
Figure 3.104 to Figure 3.106 illustrate the retransmission of CRC unit, in which retransmission
CRC unit size is equal to, smaller than or larger than the available CRC unit size forretransmission respectively.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

187

(a) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to available CRC Unit Size

Retransmission Data

New Data

CRC Unit 1

CRC Unit 2

Transmission
Retransmission Data

New Data

Figure 3.104 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size equals to available CRC Unit Size(b) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is less than available CRC Unit Size
As shown in Figure 3.105, the rest of CRC Unit 1 is used as DTX symbols.
Retransmission Data

CRC Unit 1

New Data
CRC Unit 2

Transmission
Retransmission Data

New Data
DTX Symbols

Figure 3.105 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is less than available CRC Unit Size(c) The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than available CRC Unit Size
As shown in Figure 3.106, ,a part of retransmission data takes up the symbols that can be usedby DTX symbols. In addition, a part of retransmission data might also take up the part that can beused by the guard time.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

188

Retransmission Data

CRC Unit 1

New Data

CRC Unit 2

Retransmission Data
Transmission
Retransmission Data

New Data
DTX Symbols (Null)

Figure 3.106 The case when Retransmission CRC Unit Size is larger than available CRC Unit
Size
3.6.1.8 Summary of SC UL Channel Coding
Combinations of coding and modulation are shown in Table 3.46 for UL SC. Efficiency of eachcombination is shown in the same table. Efficiency is defined as the number of information bits
carried by one data symbol in the SC burst. Efficiency and total coding rate are calculated
assuming no virtual GI extension in the table. Note that actual efficiency becomes higher with
virtual GI extension.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

189

Table 3.46 Summary of UL SC Channel Coding
Modulation

Scaling
Factor1

π/2-BPSK
π/4-QPSK

1/√2

8PSK

1

16QAM

1/√10

64QAM
256QAM

Coding Rate
@Convolutional
Coding1/2

1/√42
1/√170

Puncturing
Rate R2

Total Coding
Rate R

Efficiency

1

1/2

0.5

3/4

2/3

0.67

1

1/2

1

4/6

3/4

1.5

3/4

2/3

2

1

1/2

2

4/6

3/4

3

3/4

4/6

4

6 / 10

5/6

5

4/6

6/8

6

8 / 14

7/8

7

A-GN4.00-03-TS

190

3.6.1.9 Optional Channel Coding for PHY Frame
3.6.1.9.1 CRC
Refer to 3.4.1.1.
3.6.1.9.2 Channel coding
3.6.1.9.2.1 Tail biting convolutional coding
Refer to 3.4.1.3.1.3.
3.6.1.9.2.2 Turbo coding
Refer to 3.4.1.3.1.4.

3.6.1.9.3 Rate matching
Refer to 3.4.1.4.5
3.6.1.9.4 Code block concatenation
The code block concatenation consists of sequentially concatenating the rate matching outputs
for the different code blocks.
3.6.1.9.5 Channel Coding of UL Channels
3.6.1.9.5.1 Coding of data and control information on AUEDCH
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of a maximum of one transport block everytransmission time interval (TTI). The following coding steps for the AUEDCH can be identified: Add CRC to the transport block Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment
 Channel coding of data and control information
 Rate matching Code block concatenation
 Multiplexing of data and control information
 Channel interleaver

Control data arrives at the coding unit in the form of channel quality information (CQI and/or PMI),HARQ-ACK and rank indication. Different coding rates for the control information are achieved byallocating different number of coded symbols for its transmission. When control data aretransmitted in the AUEDCH, the channel coding for HARQ-ACK, rank indication and channel
quality information is done independently.
3.6.1.9.5.2 Coding of Uplink control information on AUANCH
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of indicators for measurement indication, scheduling
request and HARQ acknowledgement. Three forms of channel coding are used, one for thechannel quality information CQI/PMI, another for HARQ-ACK (acknowledgement) and scheduling
A-GN4.00-03-TS

191

request and another for combination of CQI/PMI and HARQ-ACK.
3.6.1.9.5.3 Uplink control information on AUEDCH without traffic data
When control data are sent via AUEDCH without traffic data, the following coding steps can be
identified: Channel coding of control information
 Control information mapping Channel interleaver
3.6.2 Training for UL SC
Training block is a SC block used mainly for synchronization, frequency offset estimation,
automatic gain control or weight calculation of beam-forming. Training block is composed ofpredefined data (Refer to Appendix C.2). The details of training block, training sequence andtraining pattern are described in Sections 3.6.2.1, 3.6.2.2, and 3.6.2.3.
3.6.2.1 Training Block Format
Training block is constructed by training symbols, T(1) – T(N) as defined in Appendix C.2.
Training symbols are chosen according to the training index as defined in Section 3.6.2.3.
3.6.2.1.1 Training Format for ICH
Figure 3.107 illustrates the training block format for ICH, in which N is the SC block size and G2
is the GI size. In case of ICH, training data is the first SC block S1.

T(N)

T(4)

..

T(3)

..

T(2)

26.67 usT(1)6.67 us

T(N)

T(N-G2+1)

33.33 us (S1)

Copy

Figure 3.107 Training Format for ICH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

192

3.6.2.1.2 Training Format for CCCH
Figure 3.108 illustrates the training format for CCCH. In case of CCCH, two training blocks S1and S2 are used. Training symbols, T(1) – T(16), are mapped into S1 and S2 so that the training
sequence repeats itself during the two SC blocks (S1 and S2) as shown in the figure.
10.00 us53.33 us30.00 us (S2)

T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)

33.33 us (S1)Training Sequence

Training Sequence

Copy

Figure 3.108 Training format for CCH

3.6.2.2 Training Sequence
Refer to Appendix C.2 for training sequence and offset values.
Eight core-sequences are defined in Table C.5 to Table C.10. These core-sequences are on theconstellation of 8PSK or 16PSK as shown in Appendix B.5 or Appendix B.9. In addition to thesecore-sequences, cyclic-shifted versions of them are also used for constructing training for ICH
and CCH as shown in Table C.12.
3.6.2.3 Training Index
As described in Section 3.6.2.2, there are 8 core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift values).
Training index is numbered as follows:
Training Index = Core-sequence Number + (Offset Value Number-1)*8
3.6.2.3.1 Training Index for CCCH
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for CCH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number

:2
:2
:1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

193

3.6.2.3.2 Training Index for ICH
ICH is composed of ANCH, EXCH and CSCH. Training index, core-sequence number and offset
value number for ICH are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number: x + (y-1)*8: x=[A MOD 8]+ 1: y=[{B+m} MOD (n-1)]+ 2

n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = the smallest SCH number assigned to the MS in the slot (m=1,2,3,…)
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
Training index, core-sequence number and offset value number for MIMO are defined as follows:
Training Index
Core-sequence Number
Offset Value Number: x + (y-1)*8: x=[{A+k-1} MOD 8]+ 1: y=[{B+m} MOD (n-1)]+ 2

k =MIMO stream number (k=1,2,…)n = maximum number of SCHs in a slot
m = the smallest SCH number assigned to the MS in the slot (m=1,2,3,…)
A = 1st to 5th bits including LSB in BSID
B = 1st to 5th bits next to A in BSID
3.6.3 Pilot for UL SC
Figure 3.109 illustrates a pilot block format. Pilot block is a SC block used mainly for channel
estimation. Pilot block consists of N pilot symbols, P(1) – P(N), as shown in this figure.

P(N)

P(4)

..

P(3)

..

P(2)

26.67 usP(1)3.33 us

P(N)P(N-G1+1)

30.00 us (S9 and S17)

Copy

Figure 3.109 Pilot Block Format
A-GN4.00-03-TS

194

3.6.3.1 Pilot Index
Pilot index is defined by eight core-sequences and offset values (cyclic-shift value) in the same
way as training index described in Section 3.6.2.3. Pilot index is numbered as follows:
Pilot index = core-sequence number + (offset value number-1)*8
3.6.3.2 Pilot for CCCH
SC burst for CCCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(16) in the both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(16) in the training block S2 respectively. Pilot index is the same as training index in thesame SC burst.
3.6.3.3 Pilot for ICH
3.6.3.3.1 Pilot for ANCH
SC burst for ANCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(16) in both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(16) in the training block S1 correspondingly. Pilot index is the same as training index in
the same SC burst.
3.6.3.3.2 Pilot for EXCH
SC burst for EXCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot block consists of 16 pilot symbols.
Pilot symbols P(1) – P(N) in the both pilot blocks (S9 and S17) are the same as training symbols
T(1) – T(N) in the training block S1 correspondingly. Pilot index is the same as training index in
the same SC burst.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

195

3.6.3.3.3 Pilot for CSCH
SC burst for CSCH has two pilot blocks at S9 and S17. Pilot symbols P(1) – P(N) in the pilot
block S17 are the same as training symbols T(1) – T(N) in the training block S1 correspondingly.
Pilot block S9 is different from as S17 for CSCH. For the symbol rate of 0.6 Msps (N=16), pilot
symbols P(1) – P(N) in S9 are selected from Table C.5 in Appendix C.2 with the same pilot index.
For 1.2 Msps and above (N>=32), pilot symbols in S9 are constructed by repeating the pilot blockof half-length (N/2) with the same pilot index twice. Pilot block S9 is then modulated in order tomultiplex signaling bits as described in Section 3.6.4.2.
3.6.3.4 Advanced Optional Pilot Signals
Two types of uplink pilot signals are supported:- Advanced Demodulation Pilot Signal, associated with transmission of AUEDCH or
AUANCH- Advanced Sounding Pilot Signal
The same set of base sequences is used for Advanced Demodulation Pilot Signal and Advanced
Sounding Pilot Signals.
Pilot signal sequence ru(,v ) (n) is defined by a cyclic shift  of a base sequence ru ,v (n)according to ru(,v ) (n)  e jn ru,v (n), 0  n  M scPilot ,where M scPilot  mN scRU is the length of themax,ULtrainning signal sequence and 1  m  N RU
. Multiple pilot signal sequences are defined from asingle base sequence through different values of  .
Base sequences ru ,v (n) are divided into groups, where u  0,1,...,29 is the group number andis the base sequence number within the group, such that each group contains one basesequence ( v  0 ) of each length M scPilot  mN scRU , 1  m  5 and two base sequences ( v  0,1 )max,UL
of each length M scPilot  mN scRU , 6  m  N RU.
The definition of the base sequence
Pilot
Pilot
ru,v (0),...,ru,v ( M sc  1) depends on the sequence length M sc.
v

3.6.3.4.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal
3.6.3.4.1.1 Advanced Demodulation Pilot signal sequence
The aAdvanced Demodulation Pilot Signal sequence r AUEDCH  for AUEDCH is definedby r AUEDCH m  M scPilot  n  ru(,v ) n  , where m  0,1 ; n  0,..., M scPilot  1 and M scRS  M scAUEDCH .
The aAdvanced Demodulation Pilot Signal sequence r AUANCH  for AUANCH is defined by

AUANCH
Pilot
Pilot
r AUANCH m' N Pilot
M sc
 mM sc n  w (m) z(m)ru(,v ) n 

A-GN4.00-03-TS

196

AUANCH
where m  0,..., N Pilot 1 , n  0,..., M scPilot  1 and m'  0,1 .For CQICH, z (m) equalsd (10) for m  1 . For all other cases, z (m)  1.

3.6.3.4.1.2 Mapping to physical resources
The sequence r AUEDCH  shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor  AUEDCH andmapped in sequence starting with r AUEDCH (0) to the same set of physical resource blockunits
used for the corresponding AUEDCH transmission.
3.6.3.4.2 Advanced Sounding Pilot signal
3.6.3.4.2.1 Advanced Souding Pilot signal sequence
The aAdvanced Sounding Pilot signal sequence rSP n   ru(,v ) n  ,where u is the AUANCH
sequence-group number and  is the base sequence number. The cyclic shift  of theAdvanced Sounding Pilot signal is given as   2

cs
nSP
cs
, where nSP
is configured for each MS
8cs
by higher layers and nATS
 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7 .

The BS-specific slot configuration period TSFC and the BS-specific slot offset  SFC for thetransmission of advanced Sounding Pilot signals are determined by the higher layers parameterSoundingPilot-SlotConfig. Advanced Sounding Pilot signal slots are the slots
satisfying ns / 2 modTSFC  SFC . Advanced Sounding Pilot signal is transmitted only in configured
UL slots or USS. When SoundingPilot-SlotConfig is from 0 to 7, TSFC is 5 slots while TSFC is 10
slots for SoundingPilot-SlotConfig from 8 to 15.  SFC is {1}, {1,2}, {1,3}, {1,4}, {1,2,3}, {1,2,4},{1,3,4}, {1,2,3,4}, {1,2,6}, {1,3,6}, {1,6,7},
SoundingPilot-SlotConfig from 0 to 13 respectively.

{1,2,6,8},{1,3,6,9},{1,4,6,7}

for

3.6.3.4.3 Mapping to physical resources
For all slots other than special slots, the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal shall be transmitted in
the last symbol of the slot.
The sequence shall be multiplied with the amplitude scaling factor  SRS in order to conform to
the transmit power PSRS , and mapped in sequence starting with r SRS (0) to resource elements(k , l ) according toSP r SRS (k ) k  0,1,...,M sc,b 1
a2k k0 ,l   SRS
0otherwiseA-GN4.00-03-TS

197

where k 0 is the frequency-domain starting position of the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal
SPis the length of the Advanced Sounding Pilot signal sequence indicated by BS-specificM sc,bparameter and MS-specific parameter given by higher layers for each uplink bandwidth.

3.6.4 Signal for UL SC
Figure 3.110 describes the coding block diagram for signal data for UL SC.
Signal Data(bit)
Encoding

Pilot (symbol)

Small
Scramblingng
ng

Pilot with Signal (Symbol)
Modulation

Figure 3.110 Signal Encoding Block Diagram for UL SC
3.6.4.1 Signal Encoding

Signal Bits

4-bit

DI

Hamming

Repetition-1

Encoding

X r1

k-bit (k=0 – 3)

Repetition-2
X r2

Concatenation

Figure 3.111 illustrates the signal encoding for SC, which consists of (8,4) Hamming encoding
and repetition process. Table 3.47 summarizes the parameters for signal encoding for eachsymbol rate. In this figure, signal data (4-bit) is first encoded by (8,4) Hamming encoding, andthen repeated r1 times. DI (0 – 3 bits) are simply repeated r2 times. Then, output bits from therepetition-1 are followed by the output bits from the repetition-2 to form the encoded signal bits
(m-bit). DI indicates the number of CRC units filled with DTX symbols. Refer to Section 3.6.5 for
DTX symbols.

Coded Signal Bits
m-bit

Figure 3.111 Signal Encoding for SC

A-GN4.00-03-TS

198

Table 3.47 Parameters for Signal Encoding
Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5
Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

Number of Signal Bits

4

4

4

4

4

Number of DI Bits: k

0

0

1

2

3

Repetition Factor: r1

1

2

3

6

12

Repetition Factor: r2

N/A

N/A

8

16

32

Number of Coded Signal Bits: m

8

16

32

64

128

3.6.4.1.1 (8,4) Hamming Encoding
Refer to Section 3.4.5.1.1.
3.6.4.1.2 Small Scrambling
Refer to Section 3.4.5.1.2.
3.6.4.2 Modulation for Signal
Figure 3.112 illustrates the pilot block S9 modulated by encoded signal bits for CSCH. Encodedsignal bits of N/2-bit are multiplexed into the pilot block S9 of N-symbol. When the n-th encodedsignal bit c(n) (n=1,2,…,N/2) is 0, the pilot symbol P(n) is sent as it is, while the pilot symbolP(N/2+n) is rotated by π/2 [rad]. When the n-th encoded signal bit c(n) (n=1,2,…,N/2) is 1, thepilot symbol P(N/2+n) is sent as it is, while the pilot symbol P(n) is rotated by π/2 [rad]. This isequivalent to frequency-multiplexing BPSK symbols modulated by encoded signal bits and pilot
symbols, in which each BPSK symbol is rotated by the angle of corresponding pilot symbol.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

199

30 us (S9)

3

4

..

N/2 N/2+1

P(N) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2)))

P(4) *exp(j/2*c(4))

2

P(N/2+1) *exp(j/2*(1-c(1)))P(3) *exp(j/2*c(3))

1..

P(N/2) *exp(j/2*c(N/2))

P(1)*exp(j/2*c(1))P(2) *exp(j/2*c(2))..

26.67 us

P(N) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2)))

P(N-G1+1) *exp(j/2*(1-c(N/2-G1+1)))

3.33 us

..

..

N

Copy
Figure 3.112 Pilot Block with Signaling Bits for CSCH

3.6.5 Null (DTX) for UL SC
Null symbol is defined as 0 + 0j. Null symbol is the same as DTX symbol. DTX symbol is used in
EXCH and CSCH when the SC burst can accommodate more CRC units than the number of
CRC units to be transmitted. All data blocks after mapping all CRC units in the SC burst are DTX
symbols. When all data symbols in S8 or S16 are DTX symbols, symbols in the GI of S8 or S16
should be DTX symbols with or without virtual GI extension.
Figure 3.113 shows the example of DTX symbol mapping for EXCH in case of 2.4 Msps, in which
one CRC unit is to be transmitted.

A-GN4.00-03-TS200

625 us

2.4 MHz

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Training Block

Pilot Block

Data Block

Guard Time

sS

sS

sS

sS

DTX Block (Data Block with DTX Symbols)sS

Figure 3.113 DTX Symbol Mapping Method for EXCH (In case of 2.4 Msps)
3.6.6 TCCH for UL SC
3.6.6.1.1 TCCH Format
TCCH is used mainly for transmission timing adjustment and for initial access to BS. Figure 3.114
shows the TCCH format. TCCH is composed of 3 consecutive SC blocks. TCCH symbols T(1) –T(16) are decided by the TCCH core-sequence number as explained in Section 3.6.6.2.
90.00 usSC Block b

SC Block c

T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)
T(1)
T(2)
T(3)
T(4)
T(5)
T(6)
T(7)
T(8)
T(9)
T(10)
T(11)
T(12)
T(13)
T(14)
T(15)
T(16)

SC Block a

10.00 us

Training Sequence

Training Sequence

Training Sequence

Copy
Figure 3.114 TCCH Block Structure

A-GN4.00-03-TS

201

3.6.6.2 TCCH Sequence and TCCH Sub-slot
TCCH core-sequence number is described in Appendix D.2. TCCH sub-slots number is describedin Section 3.6.7.1.2. The application patterns of TCCH core-sequence number and TCCH
sub-slot number are described in Chapter 5.
3.6.6.3 ATCCH for UL SC
3.6.6.3.1 Time and frequency structure
The physical layer random access sequence, illustrated in Figure 3.115, consists of a guardinterval of length TGI and a sequence part of length TSEQ . The parameter values depend on theframe structure and the random access configuration. Higher layers control the access sequence
format. TGI is
TSEQ

33
219
ms and TSEQ is 0.8 ms for access sequence format 0. TGI is
ms and320
320

is 0.8 ms for access sequence format 1. TGI issequence format 2. TGI is39
ms and TSEQ is 1.6 ms for access64219
ms and TSEQ is 1.6 ms for access sequence format 3. TGI is
320

72
ms and TSEQ is
ms for access sequence format 4.
480
15

GI

Sequence

TGI

TSEQ

Figure 3.115 Random access sequence format
The transmission of a random access sequence, if triggered by the MAC layer, is restricted tocertain time and frequency resources. These resources are enumerated in increasing order of theslot number within the radio frame and the physical resource units in the frequency domain suchthat index 0 correspond to the lowest numbered physical resource unit and slot within the radio
frame. ATCCH resources within the radio frame are indicated by a ATCCH Resource Index.
There might be multiple random access resources in an UL slot (or USS for access sequence
format 4) depending on the UL/DL configuration. The 6 bits parameter
ATCCH-ConfigurationIndex given by higher layers indicates a triplet <access sequence format,

A-GN4.00-03-TS

202

Density Per 10 ms DATCCH , Version rATCCH >, where access sequence format, DATCCH andrATCCH are indicated by ATCCH-ConfigurationIndex value from 0 to 57 with mapping in sequenceto {0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,1,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,2,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,3,4,4,4,
4,4,4,4,4,4,4}, {0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,1,2,2,2,3,3,3,4,4,4,5,5,5,6,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,5,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,
1,1,2,3,4,5,6,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,0.5,0.5,0.5,1,1,2,3,4,5,6} and {0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,0,1,2,
0,1,2,0,1,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0,0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0, 0,1,2,0,1,0,0,0,0,0} respectively.
The ATCCH opportunities are allocated in time first and then in frequency if and only if time
multiplexing is not sufficient to hold all opportunities of a configuration without overlap in time.
Then the location of random access resource for a certain ATCCH opportunity can be indicated02
by time location triplet t ATCCH
and frequency location k ATCCH .
, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

0
For time location, t ATCCH
 0,1,2 indicates the random access resource is located in every, evenor odd radio frame, respectively; t1ATCCH  0,1 indicates the random access resource is located2in the first half frame or in the second half frame of a radio frame, respectively; and t ATCCH

counting from 0 at the first UL slot (for access sequence format 0 to 3) or at USS (for accesssequence format 4) in a half frame, indicates which UL slot or USS the random access resource
0
2starts from in a half frame. The time location triplet t ATCCH, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

is given by0t ATCCH 2 DATCCH  mod 21  rATCCH DATCCH   d  mod 2

t1ATCCH  mind
ATCCH mod 2
ind
 
2
UL , HF 1
t ATCCH     mATCCH
t ATCCH N slot  1 LATCCH
 2  

UL , HF
where d is index of ATCCH opportunities and 0  d  DATCCH   1 , N slot
i  is the number

of UL slots (for access sequence format 0 to 3) or USS (for access sequence format 4) in the 1st( i  0 ) or the 2nd ( i  1 ) half frame, LATCCH is the number of slots occupied by the accesssequence, which equals to (TGI  TSEQ )  103 . For access sequence format 0 and DATCCH  4 , rATCCH DATCCH   d 
indmind
ATCCH is defined by m ATCCH   , otherwise
1  2 DATCCH  mod 2 

A-GN4.00-03-TS

203

1
 rATCCH DATCCH   d 
 N UL,HF i 
mind
mod   slot
ATCCH  .
i 0  LATCCH 1  2 DATCCH  mod 2 

For access sequence format 0 to 3, the start of the random access sequence shall be alignedwith the start of the corresponding uplink slot at the MS assuming a timing advance of zero. For
access sequence format 4, the access sequence shall start 166.67s before the end of the
USS at the MS.
For frequency location, k ATCCH indicates the first resource block allocated to a certain ATCCH
opportunity. For access sequence format 0-3, k ATCCH is given by f ATCCH 
if f ATCCH mod 2  0
k ATCCH  6 2 ,k ATCCH  
 f ATCCH  N UL  6  k , otherwise
RU
ATCCH  6 
 2 
where k ATCCH indicates the first resource block available for ATCCH, f ATCCH is the index of
ATCCH opportunities in frequency domain and

02
  1,
0  f ATCCH  N ATCCH t ATCCH, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

02
 is the number of ATCCH opportunities with identical time
where N ATCCH t ATCCH, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

02
location specified by triplet t ATCCH. For access sequence format 4, k ATCCH is, t1ATCCH , t ATCCH

given by

if t1ATCCH mod 2  0
k ATCCH  6 f ATCCH ,k ATCCH   UL
 N RU  k ATCCH  6  6 f ATCCH , otherwise

where nf is the system frame number.Each random access sequence occupies a bandwidthcorresponding to 6 consecutive resource blocks.
3.6.6.3.2 Access sequence generation
The random access sequences are generated from Zadoff-Chu sequences with zero correlation
zone, generated from one or several root Zadoff-Chu sequences. The network configures the setof access sequences the MS is allowed to use.
There are 64 access sequences available in each cell. The set of 64 access sequences in a cell
is found by including first, in the order of increasing cyclic shift. Additional access sequences, incase 64 Access sequences cannot be generated from a single root Zadoff-Chu sequence, are

A-GN4.00-03-TS

204

obtained from the root sequences with the consecutive logical indexes until all the 64 sequences
are found.
The u

th

root Zadoff-Chu sequence is defined by xu n  ejun( n 1)
N ZC, 0  n  N ZC  1 .The length

N ZC of the Zadoff-Chu sequence is 839 for access sequence format 0~3 and is 139 for accesssequence format 4.
3.6.6.3.3 Baseband signal generation
The time-continuous random access signal s(t ) is defined by
N ZC 1 N ZC 1st    ATCCH   xu ,v (n)  e
k 0

j

2nk
N ZC

 e j 2 k   K k0  2 f ATCCH t TGI  ,1n 0

where 0  t  TSEQ  TGI ,  ATCCH is an amplitude scaling factor in order to conform to the transmit
ATCCH
UL
power PATCCH , and k0  nPRU
NscRU  N RU
NscRU 2 . The location in the frequency domain is

ATCCH
controlled by the parameter nPRU
. The factor K  f f ATCCH accounts for the difference insubcarrier spacing between the random access sequence and uplink data transmission. The
variable f ATCCH , the subcarrier spacing for the random access sequence, and the variable  , afixed offset determining the frequency-domain location of the random access sequence within thephysical resource units. f ATCCH is 1250 Hz and  is 7 for access sequence format 0~3 while
f ATCCH is 7500 Hz and  is 2 for access sequence format .
3.6.7 SC Burst Structure for UL SC
SC burst is composed of training block, pilot block, data block, DTX symbol and guard time.
3.6.7.1 CCH for UL SC
3.6.7.1.1 SC Burst Structure for CCCH
Figure 3.116 illustrates the SC burst structure for CCCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in thetable. Table 3.48 summarizes the composition of CCCH. The number of CRC units is always 1 in
CCCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

205

625 us

900 kHz

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Training Block

Pilot Block

Data Block

Guard Time

sS

sS

sS

sS

Figure 3.116 SC Burst Structure for CCCH
Table 3.48 Composition of CCCH
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

240

230

Distinct Data Symbol

240

206

Training Symbol

32

34

Pilot Symbol

32

40

Total

304

304

3.6.7.1.2 SC Burst Structure for TCCH
Figure 3.117 describes the SC burst format for TCCH for UL SC. Within a slot time, there are four
sub-slots, each of which is composed of three SC blocks. They are {S3, S4, S5}, {S7, S8, S9},
{S11, S12, S13} and {S15, S16, S17}. TCCH block defined in Section 3.6.6 is sent in one of thefour sub-slots. Table 3.49 summarizes the composition of TCCH. Symbols in GI are not counted
in the table.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

206

625 us

900 kHz

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

Sub-slot1

S8

S9

Sub-slot2

TCCH Block sS

sS
Guard TimesS

sS

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Sub-slot3

Sub-slot4

sS

sS

Figure 3.117 SC Burst Structure for TCCH
Table 3.49 Composition of TCCH
Symbol NameTCCH Symbol

Number of Symbols
48*4 sub-slots

3.6.7.2 ICH for UL SC
3.6.7.2.1 SC Burst Structure for ANCH
Figure 3.118 describes a SC burst format for ANCH.
Table 3.50 summarizes the composition of ANCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in the table.
The number of CRC units is always 1 in ANCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

207

625 us

900 kHz

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Pilot Block

Training Block

Guard Time

sS

sS

sS

Figure 3.118 SC Burst Structure for ANCH
Table 3.50 Composition of ANCH
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

256

246

Distinct Data Symbol

256

220

Training Symbol

16

18

Pilot Symbol

32

40

Total

304

304

3.6.7.2.2 SC Burst Structure for EXCH
Figure 3.119 illustrates a SC burst format for EXCH. Table 3.51 to Table 3.55 summarize thecomposition of EXCH for different symbol rates.
Table 3.56 summarizes the composition of CRC unit in EXCH. Symbols in GI are not counted inthese tables.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

208

625 us900*n kHz (n=1,2,4,8,16)

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Data Block

Pilot Block

Training Block

Guard Time

sS

sS

sS

sS

Figure 3.119 SC Burst Structure for EXCH
Table 3.51 Composition of EXCH (0.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

256

246

Distinct Data Symbol

256

220

Training Symbol

16

18

Pilot Symbol

32

40

Total

304

304

Table 3.52 Composition of EXCH (1.2 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

512

502

Distinct Data Symbol

512

476

Training Symbol

32

34

Pilot Symbol

64

72

Total

608

608

A-GN4.00-03-TS

209

Table 3.53 Composition of EXCH (2.4 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

1024

1019

Distinct Data Symbol

1024

1006

Training Symbol

64

65

Pilot Symbol

128

132

Total

1216

1216

Table 3.54 Composition of EXCH (4.8 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

2048

N/A

Distinct Data Symbol

2048

N/A

Training Symbol

128

N/A

Pilot Symbol

256

N/A

Total

2432

N/A

Table 3.55 Composition of EXCH (9.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

4096

N/A

Distinct Data Symbol

4096

N/A

Training Symbol

256

N/A

Pilot Symbol

512

N/A

Total

4864

N/A

A-GN4.00-03-TS

210

Table 3.56 CRC Unit for EXCH

Parameter

Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

Number of CRC Units

1

1

2

4

8

Number of Data Symbols w/o Virtual GI Extension
per CRC Unit
with Virtual GI Extension

256

512

512

512

512

250

506

510

N/A

N/A

Number of Distinct Data

w/o Virtual GI Extension

256

512

512

512

512

Symbols per CRC Unit

with Virtual GI Extension

220

476

503

N/A

N/A

3.6.7.2.3 SC Burst Structure for CSCH
Figure 3.120 describes a SC burst format for CSCH. Table 3.57 to Table 3.61 summarize thecomposition of CSCH for different symbol rates. Table 3.62 summarizes the composition of CRC
unit in CSCH. Symbols in GI are not counted in these tables. Note that EXCH and CSCH havethe same compositions except for S9.
625 us

900*n kHz (n=1,2,4,8,16)

573.3 us

S1

S2

S3

S4

S5

S6

S7

S8

S9

S10 S11 S12 S13 S14 S15 S16 S17 S18 S19

Data Block

Pilot Block

Pilot with Signal

Training Block

Guard Time

sS

sS

data

sS

sS

sS

Figure 3.120 SC Burst Structure for CSCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

211

Table 3.57 Composition of CSCH (0.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

256

246

Distinct Data Symbol

256

220

Training Symbol

16

18

Pilot Symbol

32

40

Coded Signal Bit

8

8

304

304

Total*(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.

Table 3.58 Composition of CSCH (1.2 Msps)
w/o virtual GI Extension

with virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

512

502

Distinct Data Symbol

512

476

Training Symbol

32

34

Pilot Symbol

64

72

Coded Signal Bit

16

16

608

608

Total*(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.

Table 3.59 Composition of CSCH (2.4 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

1024

1019

Distinct Data Symbol

1024

1006

Training Symbol

64

65

Pilot Symbol

128

132

Coded Signal Bit

32

32

1216

1216

Total*(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

212

Table 3.60 Composition of CSCH (4.8 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

2048

N/A

Distinct Data Symbol

2048

N/A

Training Symbol

128

N/A

Pilot Symbol

256

N/A

Coded Signal Bit

64

N/A

2432

N/A

Total*(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.

Table 3.61 Composition of CSCH (9.6 Msps)
w/o Virtual GI Extension

with Virtual GI Extension

Symbol Name

Number of Symbols

Number of Symbols

Data Symbol

4096

N/A

Distinct Data Symbol

4096

N/A

Training Symbol

256

N/A

Pilot Symbol

512

N/A

Coded Signal Bit

256

N/A

4864

N/A

Total*(*) No encoded signal bit is counted in total.

Table 3.62 CRC Unit for CSCH
Parameter

Type1 Type2 Type3 Type4 Type5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

Number of CRC Units

1

1

2

4

8

Number of Data Symbols w/o Virtual GI Extension
per CRC Unit
with Virtual GI Extension

256

512

512

512

512

250

506

510

N/A

N/A

Number of Distinct Data
Symbols per CRC Unit

w/o Virtual GI Extension

256

512

512

512

512

with Virtual GI Extension

220

476

503

N/A

N/A

A-GN4.00-03-TS

213

3.6.7.3 CRC Unit for UL SC
Table 3.63 summarizes the CRC unit size for each symbol rate and channel format. In this table,
CRC unit size means the number of bits in one CRC unit. Hence, the actual number of input bits
to the CRC attachment (CRC unit) is 22-bit less than these numbers. Refer to the definition of
CRC unit in Section 3.6.1.
Table 3.63 CRC Unit Size for UL SC
Modulation Total Coding Rate Efficiency Channel(*)

Symbol Rate [Msps]
0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

1/2

0.5

CC

120

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1/2

0.5

A,E,CS

128

256

256

256

256

2/3

0.67

170

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

1/2

1

256

512

512

512

512

3/4

1.5

384

768

768

768

768

8PSK

2/3

2

512

1024 1024 1024 1024

16QAM

1 /2

2

512

1024 1024 1024 1024

3/4

3

768

1536 1536 1536 1536

4/6

41024 2048 2048 2048 2048

5/6

51280 2560 2560 2560 2560

6/8

61536 3072 3072 3072 3072

π/2-BPSK

π/4-QPSK

64QAM
256QAM

E,CS

7/8
7(*) CC: CCCH, A: ANCH, E: EXCH, CS: CSCH

1792 3584 3584 3584 3584

3.6.7.4 Transmission Timing of SC Burst for UL SC
Transmission timing is controlled by the BS in ANCH as described in Chapter 4. Since the symbol
rate of EXCH can be different from that of ANCH, relative transmission timing of SC burst should
be changed according to the symbol rate and virtual GI extension size in order to minimize theinter-carrier interference at BS. Relative transmission timing of the target SC burst (EXCH) iscalculated from the reference SC burst (ANCH) using the following equation.
ts = 0.5( g1-vg1-1)/r1- 0.5(g2-vg2-1)/r2.
r1: Symbol rate of the reference SC burst
g1: GI size of the reference SC burst
vg1: Virtual GI size of the reference SC burst
r2: Symbol rate of the target SC burst
g2: GI size of the target SC burst

A-GN4.00-03-TS

214

vg2: Virtual GI size of the target SC burst
Table 3.64 to Table 3.65 show the relative transmission timing for different symbol rates with orwithout virtual GI extension respectively.
Table 3.64 Relative Transmission Timing of SC Burst
Type1

Type2

Type3

Type4

Type5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

GI Size [symbol]

2

4

8

16

32

Virtual GI Size [symbol]

0

0

0

0

0

Relative Timing [us]0-0.417-0.625-0.729-0.781

Table 3.65 Relative Transmission Timing of SC Burst with Virtual GI Extension
Type1

Type2

Type3

Type4

Type5

Symbol Rate [Msps]

0.6

1.2

2.4

4.8

9.6

GI size [symbol]

2

4

8

16

32

Virtual GI Size [symbol]

2

2

1

0

0

Relative Timing [us]

0

-1.25

-2.083-2.396-2.4483.6.7.5 Optional SC Burst Structure for UL SC
ULRefer to 2.5. The quantity N RU
depends on the uplink transmission bandwidth configured in the
min,ULUL
max,UL
min,UL
max,ULcell and shall fulfil N RU  N RU
, where N RU
 N RU 6 and N RU
 110 are thesmallest and largest uplink bandwidths, respectively. The number of SC-FDMA symbols in a slot
depends on the Guard Interval length configured by the higher layer parameter.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

215

Chapter 4 Individual Channel Specification
4.1 Overview
This chapter describes the service and operation requirements applied to radio transmission
facilities for XGP.
The concept of protocol structure is described in Chapter 2 based on the ALL-IP network. The
detail of the PHY layer for physical specification including several definitions of physical frame
requirements is described in Chapter 3.
4.1.1 Usage of PRU
XGP carries out control on information transmission necessary for call connection by making useof common channel (CCH). XGP also carries out control on information to individual user and onuser traffic transmission by making use of individual channel (ICH).
Figure 4.1 shows the access units of the entire channel bandwidth. Time duration of the TDMA
frame is 2.5, 5 or 10 ms and each TDMA frame is divided into UL and DL slots on the time axis.
Their ratio is valiable and the equation for a frame structure is shown in section 2.4.2.2. Effective
channel bandwidth is divided into 900 kHz each to obtain FDMA slots. One unit, covering area of
625 us x 900 kHz, is defined as one physical resource unit (PRU).

TDMA Slots

1
2
3

UL

DL

...

...

900 kHz

Effective
ChannelBandwidth

Subchannels
n-2
n-1
n
625
us

...

...
PRU

2.5, 5 or 10 ms

Figure 4.1 OFDMA/SC-FDMA/TDMA-TDD

A-GN4.00-03-TS

216

Generally, a certain fixed subchannel will be fit into common channel (CCH). Other FDMA slots
will be used as individual channel (ICH).
4.1.1.1 Common Channel (CCH)
Generally, a certain fixed subchannel is used for the CCH. One PRU pair out of eight PRUs isused for a BS as CCH. One is in DL and the other is in UL.
4.1.1.2 Individual Channel (ICH)ICH consists of an anchor channel (ANCH) which is used as a dedicated control channel, extra
channels (EXCH) which are mainly used for the user data transmission, and circuit switching
channels (CSCH) which are used for the user data and control transmission.
Figure 4.2 shows an example to use ICH. The figure shows that four users: User 1, User 2, User3, and User 4 are connected to a BS. A1 is ANCH for User 1. E1 is EXCH for User 1. A2 is ANCH
for User 2. E2 is EXCH for User 2. C3 is CSCH for User 3. C4 is CSCH for User 4. The figure
shows that User 1 is using four EXCHs, User 2 is using two EXCHs, and User 3 and User 4 areusing one CSCH each.
TDMA Slots

1

UL
2

3

4

1

DL
2

3

4

1

CCH

ICH

C3
E1
E1

C3
E1
A1

C4

E2

E2
E1

E1
E1
A2

E1
A1

C4

E2

E2
E1

A2

…

…

PRU

2
3
4
5
6
7

Figure 4.2 Example of ICH Usage
Every active user is allocated with one PRU as ANCH or CSCH, and it may also be allocated witheither one or more PRU(s) as EXCH. The ANCH and CSCH for every active user is allocated withthe same PRU on every TDMA frame. However, the EXCH PRU allocation will be changed
dynamically in every TDMA frame.
When UL and DL subframe ratio is equal, PRUs of ICH are allocated symmetrically. Symmetrical
PRU stands for a PRU of same TDMA slot, same PRU on both UL and DL. As for ANCH, CSCH
and EXCH, the allocation control is performed in each PRU. In other case, PRUs of ICH are
allocated most asymmetrically in same frame because the number of assigned PRU is difference
between UL and DL.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

217

4.1.1.2.1 PRU Numbering
Figure 4.3 shows the PRU numbering rule. “NSLS” is the number of slot per 1 subframe.
All the given system bands are numbered and are defined as PRU number. MS is given a part ofeffective channel bandwidth, and the PRU number in the given band is called logical PRU
number. First PRU means the PRU of the earliest timing and lowest frequency. PRU number iscounted in the direction of a time-axis by order.

Time Axis
SCH1

1

2

SCH2

1+NSLS

2+NSLS

...

NSLS
2NSLS

Frequency Axis

MAP
OriginSCH(M-1)

1+(M-2)x NSLS

2+(M-2)x NSLS

SCH M

1+(M-1)x NSLS

2+(M-1)x NSLS...

(M-1)
x NSLS

1

2

1+NSLS

2+NSLS

1+(K-2)x NSLS

2+(K-2)x NSLS

1+(K-1)x NSLS

2+(K-1)x NSLSM x NSLS

...

NSLS
2NSLS

...

(K-1)
x NSLSK x NSLS

Logical PRU Numbering

TDMA Subframe
PRU Numbering

Figure 4.3 Rule of PRU Numbering

A-GN4.00-03-TS

218

4.1.1.2.2 PRU Numbering for Asymmetric frame
When TDMA frame structure is asymmetry, MAP needs to indicate larger number of slots either
DL or UL slots. But Logical PRU number is difference between UL and DL. The lower slot‟s link,
DL or UL, should interpret same Logical PRU number itself as the othrer link.
Figure 4.4 shows PRU Numbering in case of asymmetric frame. In this case, the ratio of UL to DL
is 1 to 3. PRU numbering and Logical PRU numbering should be interpreted that their numbering
is same as DL. But the number of UL slot is only 2 not 6, Both valid numbering for UL are only 2
slots from leading UL.

Valid slot

Invalid slot

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

M -11 M -10 M -9

M -8

M -7

M -6

M -5

M -4

M -3

M -2

M -1

M

3

4

5

6

...

M AP Origin

1

2

1

2

Logical PRU Number

7

8

7

8

9

10

11

12

1

2

1

2

3

4

5

6

13

14

13

14

15

16

17

18

7

8

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

13

14

15

16

17

18

K-11 K-10 K-11 K-10

K-9

K-8

K-7

K-6

K-5

K-3

K-2

K-1

K

Effective
ChannelBandwidth

Frequency Axis

M -11 M -10 M -11 M -10 M -9

M -8

M -7

M -6

M -5

M -2

M -1

M

M -4

UL TDMA
Slots

M -5

M -4

M -3

DL TDMA
Slots

K-4

K-5

PRU Number

K-4

MAP

Figure 4.4 PRU Numbering in case of asymmetric frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

219

4.1.2 QoS Class (Access Mode)
XGP provides multiple QoS class for user traffic transmission.
4.1.2.1 Fast Access Channel Based on Map (FM-Mode)
Four services of QoS class except PLC (Private Line Class) service are provided using acommunication control method called FM-Mode. In FM-Mode, BS assigns an ANCH as control
channel to MS. BS also assigns EXCH dynamically as traffic channel for data communication. BS
assigns EXCH using information elements in ANCH which changes according to the traffic, radio
conditions etc. In FM-Mode, control information is transmitted by stealing data channel or control
channel as required.
MIMO is expected to use only FM mode.
4.1.2.2 High Quality Channel Based on Carrier Sensing (QS-Mode)
PLC service of QoS class is provided using a communication control method called QS-Mode.
QS-Mode is achieved by making use of a channel called CSCH. BS makes sure that thefrequency band of CSCH resembles circuit switching connection. In addition, CSCH is a highquality PRU as the result of the carrier sensing on UL and DL are both positive on assigningPRU.
In QS-Mode, BS transmits control information instead of data to MS as required. BS uses control
channel at CSCH transmission of QS-Mode, which accompanies respective data PRU at all
times.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

220

4.1.3 XGP Protocol Outline
4.1.3.1 Frame Structure
The frame of each layer consists of a header and one data unit or more. Table 4.1 shows thecompositions of the PHY and MAC layer frame.
Table 4.1 Name of Frame Composition
Composition

PHY Layer

MAC Layer

Frame

PHY Frame

MAC Frame

HeaderPHY Header

MAC Header

Data Unit

PHY Data Unit MAC Data Unit

Figure 4.5 shows the composition of the PHY and MAC layer frames. In each frame, a header is
put at top of the frame, and is followed by one or more data units. Figure 4.5 shows the order ofbits and octets. Transmission and reception are carried out from the upper bit. First transmission
and reception begin from the Octet 1.
Frame
PHY
PHY Header
Frame

PHY Payload

PHY Trailer

PHY Payload

PHY Data Unit

MAC
Frame

MAC Header

PHY Trailer

PHY Data Unit

MAC Payload

PHY Payload

PHY Trailer

PHY Data Unit

PAD

MAC Data Unit

Bit

8 765 4 3 21Bit
8 765 4 3 21Octet 1

Octet 2
Figure 4.5 General Frame Structure

A-GN4.00-03-TS

221

4.1.3.2 Protocol Structure
The protocol structure is shown in Figure 4.6. Basically, protocol layer between MS and BS
consists of a PHY and MAC layer. The PHY layer controls physical wireless line between MS andBS.
MAC layer controls link establishment, channel assignment, channel quality maintenance etc.
The upper network layer is based on IP protocols. This document describes the specification of
PHY and MAC layer between MS and BS.

(Network
Layer)(Network
Layer)

Scope of Specification

XGP-MACXGP-MAC

MAC

MAC

XGP-PHYXGP-PHY

PHY

PHY

MS

BS

Network

Figure 4.6 Protocol Stack for XGP

Figure 4.7 shows the protocol structure for MAC control layer. The control messages aretransferred on the MAC-CNT (MAC control) layer of the XGP-MAC layer. These messages are
categorized functionally as mobility Management (MM), and radio frequency transmission
management (RT). In this specification, the message format on MAC layer level is defined in
Section 4.5.4.
Control messages processed between MS and network are transparently sent though on BS
MAC layer.
The packet data is transparently transferred to between MS and network.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

222

(Network
Layer)
MAC-CNT

Scope of Specification
MAC-CNTXGP-MACXGP-MAC

XGP-PHYXGP-PHYMS(Network
Layer)
MAC

MAC

PHY

PHY
Network

BS
Figure 4.7 Protocol Stack for XGP (MAC Control)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

223

4.2 Functional Channel
The channel classified according to the information it carries is defined as a functional channel.
4.2.1 Channel Composition
Figure 4.8 shows channel hierarchy composition. ICH contains CSCH, ANCH and EXCH. ICH isclassified into six functional channels, which are ICCH, ECCH, EDCH, CDCH, TCH and ACCH.
ICH

Individual Channel
For Control

For Control
or Communication

ICCH

Individual Control Channel

ECCH

EXCH Control Channel

ACCH

Accompanied Control Channel

EDCH

EXCH Data Channel

CDCH

CSCH Data Channel

TCH

Traffic Channel

Figure 4.8 Composition of Channels

The correspondence between the functional channels and protocol phase as well as PRU isshown in Figure 4.9.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

224

PRU

ProtocolPhase Access Establishment Phase

ANCH
ICH

ICCH

Access Phase
ECCH
ICCH

EXCH

EDCH

CSCH

CDCH, ACCH, TCH

Figure 4.9 PRU, Protocol Phase and Functional Channel Correspondence
4.2.1.1 Individual Control Channel (ICCH)ICCH is an UL/DL bidirectional control channel which is put into allocated PRU as ANCH. It
transmits control information.
ICCH is used with the communication method in both FM-Mode and QS-Mode. And ICCH is usedat not only access establishment phase but also access phase.
4.2.1.2 EXCH Control Channel (ECCH)
ECCH is an UL/DL bidirectional control channel which is put into allocated PRU as ANCH. It
contains some data that can be applied to control channel allocation for EXCH, MCS,transmission power and timing etc.
ECCH is used in FM-Mode at access phase. ECCH is logically connected with EDCH(s). It
operates like the header of the connected format.
The MCS of ECCH is a fixed rate of BPSK-1/2 for OFDM and π/2-BPSK-1/2 for SC.
4.2.1.3 EXCH Data Channel (EDCH)
EDCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as EXCH. It transmits
user traffic data.
EDCH is used in access phase.
EDCH can change a modulation method in accordance with the state of radio wave
fundamentally, and can execute communication function.
EDCH is used in FM-Mode and it is put into allocated PRU as EXCH. One or more EDCHs areconnected to one ECCH logically to form one format. Then, EDCH operates like the data payloadof the connected format.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

225

4.2.1.4 CSCH Data Channel (CDCH)
CDCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as CSCH. It transmits
user traffic data.
CDCH is used in access phase.
CDCH can change a modulation method in accordance with the state of radio wave
fundamentally, and can execute communication function.
It is replaced in order to transmit control information constantly.
CDCH is used for the data communications in QS-Mode. It is put into allocated PRU as CSCH.
4.2.1.5 Traffic Channel (TCH)
TCH is an UL/DL bidirectional channel which is put into allocated PRU as CSCH.
TCH is used in QS-Mode at access phase to transmit bearer constant rate data fundamentally.
The MCS of TCH is pre-defined and retransmission control is not performed. TCH is transmitted
by the same PRU as ACCH which contains control information.
4.2.1.6 Accompanied Control Channel (ACCH)
ACCH is UL/DL bidirectional control channel which accompanies TCH in allocated PRU as CSCH.
It transmits control information.
ACCH is used by access phase in QS-Mode. Like TCH, the MCS of ACCH is the same as thepayload and retransmission control is not performed.
4.3 Optional Functional Control Channel
The following functional control channels are optional.
Figure 4.10 shows the downlink and uplink control channel composition.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

226

Optional Control Channels for PHY Layer
For Downlink Control

For Uplink Control(AUANCH)ADECCH

Advanced Downlink ECCHADEFICH

Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel

ADHICH

Advanced Downlink Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

RCH

Scheduling Request Channel

ACKCH

ACK/NACK Channel

CQICH

CQI Channel

Figure 4.10 Composition of Optional Control Channels
4.3.1 DL Control Channel Composition
4.3.1.1 Advanced Downlink EXCH Control Channel (ADECCH)
4.3.1.1.1 Function of ADECCHADECCH is a downlink control channel carrying different Advanced Downlink ECCH Control
Information (ADECI) as defined in 4.4.7 and shall support semi-persistent scheduling. Totally four
ADECCH formats e.g. format 0/1/2/3 are supported and the number of ADECCH bits
corresponding to each format is 72/144/288/576.
4.3.1.1.2 Blind detection for ADECCH
The MS shall monitor two search space (common search space and MS-specific search space) in
the ADECCH region and attempt to decode the different ADECI formats carried on ADECCH
blindly in some certain candidate locations. The common search space carries on common
control information such as system information, paging information, and power control information.
The MS-specific search space carries on the uplink and downlink data scheduling information andother control information for a certain MS. The candidate locations for ADECI format detection are
decided by the start location and different ADECCH formats. for the MS-specific search space
and is a fixed value for the common search space.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

227

The ADECI formats that the MS shall monitor depend on the configured AMT as defined in the
ADEDCH part.
4.3.1.2 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel (ADEFICH)ADEFICH is a downlink control channel carrying the information about the number of OFDM
symbols used for transmission of ADECCH in a slot. The set of OFDM symbols possibly used for
ADECCH in a slot is given in Table 4.2.
Table 4.2 Number of OFDM Symbols Used for ADECCH
Slot

Number of OFDM
Symbols for ADECCHDL
when N RU
 10Slot 1 and 6

1, 2

All Other Cases

1, 2, 34.3.1.3 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel (ADHICH)ADHICH is a downlink control channel which carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NAK for UL data.
4.3.2 Uplink Control Channel Composition
4.3.2.1 AUANCH/RCH
RCH carries the Scheduling Request (SR) indication. The SR is received from higher layers.
4.3.2.2 AUANCH/ACKCHACKCH carries the uplink acknowledgement (ACK) field of corresponding received data indownlink.
4.3.2.3 AUANCH/CQICH

CQICH carries the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). CQICH also carries the Rank Indication (RI)and Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) in case of MIMO.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

228

4.4 PHY Layer Structure and Frame Format
4.4.1 PHY Frame Structure
There are three PHY frame types including ANCH, EXCH, and CSCH.
ICCH, ECCH, EDCH, CDCH, TCH and ACCH are functional channels put into PHY frame.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

229

4.4.1.1 ANCH/ICCH
Figure 4.11 shows ANCH frame structure which contains ICCH for protocol version 1. The ANCH
contains PHY header, ICCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
Fixed Modulation, Interleave Unit

ICCH

PHY Header

TAIL

PHY Header

CRC

Scramble
Area
CRC CalculationArea

PHY Data Unit

Figure 4.11 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.12 shows ANCH frame structure which contains ICCH for protocol version 2. The ANCH
contains PHY header, ICCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.

SignalSymbolPHY
Control

Scramble

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave Unit

PHY Header
PHY Header

ICCH

TAIL

Data
SymbolCRC

Scramble
Area
CRC CalculationArea

PHY Data Unit

Figure 4.12 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

230

4.4.1.2 ANCH/ECCH
Figure 4.13 shows the ANCH frame structure which contains ECCH for protocol version 1. The
ANCH contains PHY header, ECCH, CRC and TAIL bits.

Fixed Modulation, Interleave Unit

ECCH

PHY Header

TAIL

PHY Header

CRC

Scramble
Area
CRC CalculationArea

PHY Data Unit

Figure 4.13 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ECCH for protocol version 1

Figure 4.14 shows the ANCH frame structure which contains ECCH for protocol version 2. The
ANCH contains PHY header, ECCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.

SignalSymbolPHY
Control

Scramble

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
ScramblePHY Header
PHY Header

ECCH

TAIL

Data
SymbolCRC

Area
CRC CalculationArea

PHY Data Unit

A-GN4.00-03-TS

231

Figure 4.14 PHY Frame Format of ANCH/ECCH for protocol version 2

4.4.1.3 EXCH/EDCH
Figure 4.15 shows EXCH/EDCH frame structure which consists of one or more EXCH(s) except
for EMB-MIMO. The EXCH contains EDCH, CRC and TAIL bits.

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
Scramble

EDCH

TAIL

CRC

Area
CRC Calculation
Area

One or Two PRUsPHY Data Unit

Figure 4.15 PHY Frame Format of EXCH/EDCH except for EMB-MIMO
Figure 4.16 shows EXCH/EDCH frame structure which consists of one or more EXCH(s) for
EMB-MIMO. The EXCH contains EDCH, CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.

SignalSymbolPHY
Control

Scramble

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave

EDCH

TAIL

Data
SymbolCRC

Unit
Scramble
Area
CRC CalculationArea

One PRUPHY Data Unit

A-GN4.00-03-TS

232

Figure 4.16 PHY Frame Format of EXCH/EDCH for EMB-MIMO
4.4.1.3.1 PRU Combining
The PHY frame is made up of one or more PRUs. UL and DL PHY frame format is defined in thefollowing sections. PHY frame is created by combining the payloads of PRU(s) specified by the
MAP field. (Refer to Section 4.4.6.8 for MAP field). Figure 4.17 shows order of constructing PHY
frame. PRUs specified with MAP are connected in the direction of frequency.
Time Axis

Frequency
Axis
TDMA
Slots
Figure 4.17 Order of Logical PRU Combining

A-GN4.00-03-TS

233

4.4.1.4 CSCH/TCH
Figure 4.18 shows CSCH frame structure. CSCH/TCH consists of a PHY header, ACCH, TCH,
CRC and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.

SignalSymbolPHY
Control

Scramble

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
Scramble
Area
CRC CalculationArea
PHY Control
PHY Header

ACCH
PayloaTCH

TAIL

SymbolCRC

Data

PHY Data UnitdFigure 4.18 PHY Frame Format
of CSCH/TCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

234

4.4.1.5 CSCH/CDCH
Figure 4.19 shows CSCH frame structure. CSCH/CDCH consists of a PHY header, CDCH, CRC
and TAIL bits.
A part of PHY control is used as signal symbol with hamming code. (Refer to Section 3.4.5). The
signal symbol is not included in the application range of CRC calculation.

SignalSymbolPHY
Control

Scramble

Adaptive Modulation, Interleave
Unit
Scramble

PHY Control
PHY Header

CDCH

TAIL

Data
SymbolCRC

Area
CRC CalculationArea

PHY Data Unit

Figure 4.19 PHY Frame Format of CSCH/CDCH
4.4.1.6 AUANCH/RCH
RCH carries the Scheduling Request (SR) indication. The SR is received from higher layers. For
SR, information is carried by the presence/absence of transmission of RCH from the MS.
d (0)  1 shall be assumed in case of the presence of transmission of RCH.
Figure 4.20 illustrates the half-slot structure for RCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

235

180 kHz500 us

Pilot Block

Data BlocksSsS

Figure 4.20 Half-slot Structure for RCH
In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding pilot and RCH, the last data block on RCH shallbe punctured within the slot.
The symbol d (0) shall be transmitted on all data blocks. Two block-wise spread codes areapplied to the pilot blocks and the data blocks within each half-slot, respectively. Table 4.3 andTable 4.4 show the block-wise spread codes for the data blocks with a length of 4 and 3
respectively. Table 4.5 shows the block-wise spread codes for the pilot blocks.
Table 4.3

Block-wise Spread Codes for Data Blocks with a Length of 4
Code Index Block Codes
0[+1, +1, +1, +1]
1[+1, -1, +1, -1]
2[+1, -1, -1, +1]

Table 4.4

Block-wise Spread Codes for Data Blocks with a Length of 3
Code Index
Block Codes
0[+1, +1, +1]
1[1, e j 2 / 3 , e j 4 / 3 ][1, e j 4 / 3 , e j 2 / 3 ]2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

236

Table 4.5 Block-wise spread codes for pilot blocks
Code index
Block codes
0[+1, +1, +1]
1[1, e j 2 / 3 , e j 4 / 3 ]2[1, e j 4 / 3 , e j 2 / 3 ]The SR shall be transmitted on the RCH resource which is MS specific and configured by higher
layers. The higher layer configured parameters include SR transmission periodicity SRPeriodicity andslot offset NOFFSET,SR. SR transmission instances are the slots satisfying

10  n  n / 2  N
fs

OFFSET , SRmod SR

Periodicity

 0 , where n f is the system frame number,and ns = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame.

4.4.1.7 AUANCH/ACKCHACKCH carries the uplink acknowledgement (ACK) field of corresponding received data indownlink. This field is used for the acknowledgement of PHY layer retransmission control, such
as HARQ. The ACK/NACK bits are received per codeword from higher layers.
Figure 4.21 illustrates the half-slot structure for ACKCH.

180 kHz

500 us

Pilot Block

Data BlocksSsS

A-GN4.00-03-TS

237

Figure 4.21 Half-slot Structure for ACKCH
In case of simultaneous transmission of sounding pilot and ACKCH, the last SC-FDMA symbol on
ACKCH shall be punctured.
For ACKCH, one or two explicit bits are transmitted, respectively. The block of bitsb(0),..., b(M bit  1) shall be modulated as described in Table 4.6, resulting in a complex-valued
symbol d (0) . The symbol d (0) shall be transmitted on all data blocks. Two block-wise spread
codes are applied to the pilot blocks and the data blocks respectively. Table 4.3 and Table 4.4
show the block-wise spread codes for the data blocks with a length of 4 and 3 respectively. Table
4.5 shows the block-wise spread codes for the pilot blocks.
Table 4.6

Modulation Symbol d (0) for ACKCH
b(0),...,b(M bit  1)

0
1
00
01
10
11

d (0)

1
1
1
j
j
1

4.4.1.8 AUANCH/CQICH
CQICH carries the Channel Quality Indicator (CQI). CQICH also carries the Rank Indication (RI)and Precoding Matrix Indicator (PMI) in case of MIMO.
Figure 4.22 illustrates the half-slot structure for CQICH

A-GN4.00-03-TS238

180 kHz500 us

Pilot Block

Data BlocksSsS

Figure 4.22 Half-slot Structure for CQICH
The channel quality bits input to the channel coding block are denoted by a0 , a1 , a 2 , a3 ,...,a A1
where A is the number of bits. The number of channel quality bits depends on the transmission
format.
The channel quality indication is coded with the (20, A) code.
The block of coded bits b(0),..., b(19) shall firstly be QPSK modulated as described in Appendix
B.10.2, resulting in a block of complex-valued modulation symbols d (0),...,d (9) . The i-th
modulated symbol is transmitted on the i-th data block within the slot.

4.4.2 Signal Symbol
4.4.2.1 Signal Symbol Structure
Figure 4.23 shows signal symbol structure for CSCH. It consists of MI only.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for MI field.
MSB

LSB

MI(4)
SignalSymbolFigure 4.23 Signal Symbol Structure for CSCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

239

Figure 4.24 shows signal symbol structure for ANCH in case of protocol version 2. It consists of
AMI only.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for AMI field.
MSB

LSB

AMI(4)
SignalSymbolFigure 4.24 Signal Symbol Structure for ANCH(protocol version 2)
Figure 4.25 shows signal symbol structure for EDCH in case of EMB-MIMO. It consists of EMI
only.
MSB

LSB

EMI(8)
SignalSymbolFigure 4.25 Signal Symbol Structure in case of EMB-MIMO
4.4.3 PHY Header
4.4.3.1 PHY Header Structure
A PRU format, functional channel type, and the direction of a link determine the format of a PHY
header.
4.4.3.1.1 ANCH/ECCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.26 shows ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure. It consists of only CI.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for CI field.
MSB

LSB
CI(2)
PHY
Header

A-GN4.00-03-TS

240

Figure 4.26 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ECCH

4.4.3.1.2 ANCH/ICCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.27 shows ANCH/ICCH PHY header format for protocol version 1. DL ANCH/ICCH PHY
header format consists of CI, SD and APC. UL ANCH/ICCH PHY header format consists of CI
and APC.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
MSB

LSB
CI(2)

SD(2)

CI(2)

APC
(1)

DL
UL

APC
(1)

Reserved(3)

Reserved(5)PHY Header

Figure 4.27 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 1
Figure 4.28 shows ANCH/ICCH PHY header format for protocol version 2. DL ANCH/ICCH PHY
header format consists of CI, SD, APC and AMR. UL ANCH/ICCH PHY header format consists of
CI, APC and AMR.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
MSB

LSB
CI(2)

SD(2)

APC
(1)

AMR
(4)

CI(2)

APC
(1)

AMR
(4)

Reserved(1)DL
UL

Reserved(7)

PHY Header
PHY Header

Figure 4.28 PHY Header Structure of ANCH/ICCH for protocol version 2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

241

4.4.3.1.3 CSCH/CDCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.29 shows the structure of UL/DL CSCH/CDCH PHY header.
DL CSCH/CDCH PHY header contains CI, MR, SD, PC and ACK. UL CSCH/CDCH PHY header
contains CI, MR, PC and ACK.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
LSB

MSB

DL

UL
linkLink

CI(2)

MR(4)

SD(2)

PC(1)

ACK(1) Reserved
(6)

CI(2)

MR(4)

PC(1)

ACK(1)

Reserved(8)

PHY Header

Figure 4.29 PHY Header Structure of CSCH/CDCH
4.4.3.1.4 CSCH/TCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.30 shows the structure of UL/DL PHY header of CSCH/TCH. CI, MR, SD, and PC arecontained in DL PHY header. CI, MR and PC are contained in UL PHY header.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
MSB

DL

UL

LSB

CI(2)

MR(4)

SD(2)

CI(2)

MR(4)

PC(1)

PC(1)

Reserved(7)

Reserved(9)

PHY Header

Figure 4.30 PHY Header Structure of CSCH/TCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

242

4.4.3.1.5 ECCH PHY Header Structure
Figure 4.31 shows the configuration of the ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure for protocol
version 1.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.
PHY Header
ECCH
MSB

LSB

DL ANCHPHY Payload Structure

MAP
(72)

SD
(2)

APC
(1)

PC
(4)

ACK
(36)

V
(7)

MI MR
(16) (16)HC(1)

Reserved(7)

UL OFDM ANCHPHY Payload Structure

RCH
(7)

APC
(1)

PC
(1)

ACK
(36)

V
MI
(20) (16)

MR
(16)

HC
(1)

Reserved(64)

UL SC ANCHPHY Payload Structure

RCH
(7)

APC
(1)

PC
(1)

ACK
(36)

V
MI
(20) (16)

MR
(16)

HC
(1)

Reserved(6)

Figure 4.31 Configuration of ANCH for protocol version 1

Figure 4.32 shows the configuration of the ANCH/ECCH PHY header structure for protocol
version 2.
Refer to Section 4.4.6 for each field.

PHY Header
ECCH
MSB

LSB

DL ANCHPHY Payload
Structure

SD APC PC HC AMR MT MI MR(2) (1) ( * ) (1) ( 4) (2) ( * ) ( * )SI(2)

UL OFDM ANCHPHY Payload
Structure

APC PC HC AMR MT MI MR(1) (1) (1) (4) (2) ( * ) ( * )SR RCH(2) (7)

SI
(2)

SR BI
(2) (10)

MAP,ACK,V
and Reserved(*)

ACK,V and Reserved(*)( * ) Depended on TDMA frame structure and ANCH MCS

Figure 4.32 Configuration of ANCH for protocol version 2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

243

4.4.3.2 ECCH
ECCH is used as PHY header (Refer to Section 4.4.3.1.5).
4.4.3.2.1 CRC Error Happening on the ANCH
Table 4.7 shows the processing of MS when the CRC error happens on the DL ANCH.
MS cannot recognize the MAP field indicated by DL ANCH when it is an error. As a result, MS
cannot transmit UL EXCH in the frame that the MAP cannot recognize. Then, MS sets V to 0 in
UL ANCH of the frame, and it cannot recognize the ACK field indicated by DL ANCH when it is anerror either. As a result, MS cannot recognize the receiving state of UL EXCH in a corresponding
frame. In this case, MS will set HC to 1 in the UL ANCH, and will inform that HARQ is canceled toBS.
Furthermore, MS cannot recognize the DL EXCH assignment by DL ANCH when it is an error. As
a result, MS sets all bits of ACK to 1 in the corresponding UL ANCH.
Table 4.7 Processing when CRC Error Happens in DL ANCH
Name
MAP
ACK
SD
PC, APC
V
HC
MI
MR
AMI
AMR
MT
SI
SR
BI

Processing
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
It is impossible to identify whether ACK or NACK.
Current transmission timing is maintained.
A current TX power is maintained.
It treats as 0.
It is set HARQ cancel.(HC=1)
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid MR most recently received is used.
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid AMR most recently received is used.
It treats as 0.
It treats as 0.
Valid SR most recently received is used.
Valid BI most recently received is used.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

244

Table 4.8 shows the processing when the CRC error happens on the UL ANCH.
BS cannot recognize the ACK field indicated by UL ANCH when it is an error. Therefore, BS
cannot recognize the receiving state of DL EXCH in a corresponding frame. In this case, BS willset HC to 1 in the DL ANCH of the timing which retransmits data, and will inform that HARQ iscanceled to MS.
Additionally, BS cannot recognize the MI and V field indicated by UL ANCH when it is an error.
AS a result, BS cannot receive UL EXCH in the frame. Then, BS sets all bits of ACK to 1 in thecorresponding DL ANCH.
Table 4.8 Processing when Error Happens in UL ANCH
Name
RCH
ACK
PC , APC
V
HC
MI
MR
AMI
AMR
MT
SI
SR

Processing
Act as if no bandwidth assignment request has been sent.
If CRC error happens, it is impossible to identify whether it is.
A current TX power is maintained.
It treats as 0.
It is set HARQ cancel.(HC=1)
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid MR most recently received is used.
Act as no bandwidth is allocated.
Valid AMR most recently received is used.
It treats as 0.
It treats as 0.
Valid SR most recently received is used.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

245

4.4.4 PHY Payload
4.4.4.1 PHY Payload Structure
Figure 4.33 shows the configuration of PHY payload.
PHY Payload
MAC Frame

Figure 4.33 Configuration of PHY Payload
4.4.5 PHY Trailer
4.4.5.1 CRC
The PHY payload length and CRC length are changed flexibly according to the MCS. In thissection, PHY payload length, and CRC length is defined according to the MCS and the PHY dataunit.
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Code) 16 is inserted. Section 4.4.1 shows the range of the CRC
calculation.
4.4.5.2 TAIL
TAIL field is inserted so that the state of the shift register of the convolutional encoding module
becomes empty. Assuming K is the constraint length of error correction, then TAIL bit length isK-1 bits. Number of TAIL bits is 6.
4.4.6 PHY Control Layer
This section explains each field in the PHY frame.
4.4.6.1 Channel Identifier (CI)CI shows what kind of information has been transmitted by PRU.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

246

4.4.6.1.1 CI of ANCH
It indicates the channel identifier of PHY payload in FM-Mode. Table 4.9 shows the values of theCI field.
Table 4.9 Value of CI Field
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

Channel Identifier of PHY Payload

1
0
1
0
1

ANCH/ICCH
ANCH/ECCH
Reserved
Reserved

4.4.6.1.2 CI of CSCH
It indicates the channel identifier of PHY payload indicated in QS-Mode. Table 4.10 shows thevalue of the CI field.
Table 4.10 Value of CI Field
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

Channel Identifier of PHY Payload

1
0
1
0
1

CSCH/TCH
CSCH/CDCH
Reserved
Reserved

4.4.6.2 Shift Direction (SD)SD controls the UL transmission timing of the MS. Table 4.11 specifies the value of the SD field
and its corresponding processing. (Refer to Section 9.5.2).
Table 4.11 Value of SD Field
Bit

Operation of MS
2
1
0
0
Stay
0
1
One Step Backward
1
0
Two Steps Forward
1
1
One Step Forward(Note) Unit = 30 / (512 + 64) us

A-GN4.00-03-TS

247

4.4.6.3 ANCH Power Control (APC)
APC controls the transmission power of the ANCH of the MS so that signals from different MSs
will be received by BS at the same level. Because once UL radio wave which has different
reception level is detected, BS will control the UL transmission power either by increasing or
decreasing APC field according to the UL reception level for each MS. (Refer to Section 9.5.1).
Table 4.12 Value of APC Field
APC
Operation of MS
Value
0
Decrease transmission power.
1
Increase transmission power.
(Note) Unit = 1 dB
4.4.6.4 Power Control (PC)
PC controls the transmission power of the EXCH or CSCH of the MS so that signals fromdifferent MSs will be received by BS at the same level. Because once UL radio wave which hasdifferent reception level is detected, BS will control the UL transmission power either byincreasing or decreasing PC field according to the UL reception level for each MS. (Refer to
Section 9.5.1).
Table 4.13 Value of PC Field
PC Value
Operation of MS
0
Decrease transmission power.
1
Increase transmission power.
(Note) Unit = 1 dB

A-GN4.00-03-TS

248

UL ECCH contains power control fields for 1 frame by 1 bit, and DL ECCH contains power control
fields for each slot, and controls each slot separately. Table 4.14 shows the PC field of each slot.
This field length of DL ECCH is depended on TDMA frame structure as the number of UL slots“NUSL”.
Table 4.14 PC Field Composition

Controlled SlotFirst Bit
Slot 1

Second Bit
Slot 2…
…

Last Bit
Slot NUSL

Uplink power control controls the transmit power of the different optional uplink physical channels.
The current maximum power can not exceed the configured MS transmitted power. The MS
Transmit power for the AUEDCH transmission is mainly determined by the bandwidth of the
AUEDCH resource assignment, pathloss and the value configured in TPC command. TPC
command is included in ADECCH with ADECI format 0 or jointly coded with other TPC
commands in ADECCH with ADECI format 3/3A whose CRC parity bits are scrambled with
TPC-AUEDCH-MSID. The MS Transmit power for the Sounding Pilot transmission is based on
the MS Transmit power for the AUEDCH transmission and some adjustment is introduced.
The MS Transmit power for the AUANCH transmission is mainly determined by a AUANCH
format dependent value and TPC command. TPC command is included in a ADECCH withADECI format 1A/1B/1D/1/2A/2 or sent jointly coded with other MS specific AUANCH correction
values on a ADECCH with ADECI format 3/3A whose CRC parity bits are scrambled with
TPC-AUANCH-MSID.
4.4.6.5 MCS Indicator (MI) and MCS Request (MR)The MI field indicates the MCS of the adaptive modulation part in the DL PHY frame. The MR
field indicates the UL MCS requested by the MS according to the result of the UL signal
monitoring. Table 4.15 and Table 4.16 show the correspondence between each field and the
MCS.
Table 4.15 MCSs for OFDM
Bit
4 3 2 10 0 0 00 0 0 10 0 1 00 0 1 1Modulation Class
BPSK
QPSK

Puncturing Rate

Efficiency

1

0.5

3/4

0.67

1

1

4/6

1.5

0 1 0 0Reserved--

0 1 0 1

16QAM

1

2

A-GN4.00-03-TS

249

Bit
4 3 2 1Modulation Class0 1 1 00 1 1 1
1 0 0 01 0 0 11 0 1 064QAM
256QAM

Puncturing Rate

Efficiency

4/6

3

3/4

4

6/10

5

4/6

6

8/14

7

Table 4.16 MCSs for SCBit
4 3 2 10 0 0 00 0 0 10 0 1 00 0 1 10 1 0 00 1 0 10 1 1 00 1 1 1
1 0 0 01 0 0 11 0 1 0Modulation Class
π/2-BPSK
π/4-QPSK
8PSK
16QAM
64QAM
256QAM

Puncturing Rate

Efficiency

1

0.5

3/4

0.67

1

1

4/6

1.5

3/4

2

1

2

4/6

3

3/4

4

6/10

5

4/6

6

8/14

7

4.4.6.5.1 MI and MR in ECCHIn ECCH MI and MR are specified for every slot. Figure 4.34 shows the structure of the MI/MR
field in ECCH. This field length is depended on TDMA frame structure as the number of UL slots“NUSL“ and DL slots “NDSL”.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

250

MSB

Slot 1 MI
4

LSB
MI

MR

4 x the number of slots N

4 x the number of slots N

Slot 2 MI
4…

Slot N MI Slot 1 MR Slot 2 MR
4
4
4

…

Slot N MR
4

Figure 4.34 MI and MR Indication in ECCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS251

4.4.6.5.1.1 MI Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.35 shows an example of MI indication timing. DL MI applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points in case of 5ms frame. DL MI indicates MCS of DL EXCH of one
frame after in case of (a) timing 1, and indicates MCS of DL EXCH two frames after in the case of(b) timing 2. The definitions of timing 1 and 2 refer to Section 6.4.1.1.1.
The response timing between MS and BS is negotiated in access establishment phase.

MAP and MI

ANCH

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 Allocation

ANCH

MAP and MI

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 Allocation

Figure 4.35 Example of DL MI Indication Timing in ECCH on 5 ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

252

4.4.6.5.1.2 MI Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.36 shows an example of MI indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL
MI applies to UL EXCH of the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the MI.

5 ms
MAP

ANCH

Time
MI

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 Allocation

5 ms
Time
MI

DL
UL

MAP

ANCH

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 Allocation

Figure 4.36 Example of UL MI Indication Timing in ECCH on 5ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

253

4.4.6.5.2 MI and MR in CSCHIn CSCH, MI and MR show the MCS of the PRU itself under communication.
4.4.6.5.2.1 MI Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.37 shows the frame position where MI field of DL PHY header is applied. MI applies tothe DL PHY payload following DL PHY header in the same frame.

MI

5 ms
DL
UL

Time

Figure 4.37 DL MI Indication Timing in CSCH
4.4.6.5.2.2 MI Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.38 shows the frame position where MI field of UL PHY header is applied. MI applies tothe UL PHY payload following UL PHY header in the same frame.

5 ms
Time
MI

DL
UL

Figure 4.38 UL MI Indication Timing in CSCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

254

4.4.6.6 Acknowledgement (ACK)This field indicates the acknowledgement of corresponding received data.
Table 4.17 shows the value of the ACK field. This field is used for the acknowledgement of PHY
layer retransmission control, such as HARQ. Each ACK is encoded as a binary „1‟ and each
NACK is encoded as a binary „0‟.
Table 4.17 Value of ACK Field
ACK Value
Description
0
0 stands for NACK.
1
1 stands for ACK.
4.4.6.6.1 ACK in ECCH
This field indicates the acknowledgement of the data. The acknowledgement bit and the EDCHs
correspond to each other in connected order of the PRU. The acknowledgement bits are allottedfrom the head corresponding to the EDCHs of the frame. (Refer to Section 9.2). The frame
corresponds to the acknowledgement concerned transmission frame. ACK bits corresponding to
the unused acknowledgement field are assumed invalid.

ECCH

EDCH

EDCH
MSB

ACK Field
First bit

1

EDCH......

LSB

2

3

....
Time

Figure 4.39 Correspondence between EDCH and ACK Field

A-GN4.00-03-TS

255

The number of DL ACK “NDACK” and UL ACK “NUACK” for protocol version 1 is defined as 36bits.
ACK for protocol version 2 depends on the number of effective SCH and the number of “reverse
link stream” and TDMA frame structure. The number of ACK for protocol version 2 should be
calculated as follows.

N 
N DACK  N SL   SCH   NUST
 2 
N 
NUACK  N SL   SCH   N DST 2 ,where “NDST” denotes the number of stream (SI) for DL. “NUST” denotes the number of stream(SI) for UL. ,where “NSL” denotes larger number of DL and UL slots, either “NDSL” or “NUSL”.
  denotes ceil function.
4.4.6.6.1.1 Response Timing of DL ACKDL ACK is generated based on CRC calculation and sent in the DL ANCH that comes threeframes after UL EXCH reception.
5 ms

ACK

ANCH
DL
UL

Time

EXC
Time

DL
UL

Figure 4.40 DL ACK Response Timing

A-GN4.00-03-TS

256

4.4.6.6.1.2 Response Timing of UL ACK
Figure 4.41 shows UL ACK response timing. UL ACK is generated based on CRC calculation andsent in UL ANCH which comes two frames after DL EXCH reception.

5 ms

ANCH

Time
ACK

DL
UL
EXCH

Time

DL
UL

Figure 4.41 UL ACK Response Timing

4.4.6.6.2 ACK in CDCH
This field indicates the acknowledgement of the data.
4.4.6.6.2.1 Response Timing of DL ACK
Figure 4.42 shows the frame position where ACK field of DL PHY header is applied. DL ACK isgenerated based on CRC calculation and sent in the DL CDCH that comes 7.5 ms after UL
CDCH reception.

DL
UL

ACK

5 ms
Time

Figure 4.42 DL ACK Response Timing

A-GN4.00-03-TS

257

4.4.6.6.2.2 Response Timing of UL ACK
Figure 4.43 shows the frame position where ACK field of UL PHY header is applied. UL ACK isgenerated based on CRC calculation and sent in the UL CDCH that comes 7.5 ms after UL
CDCH reception.
5 ms
Time
ACK

DL
UL

Figure 4.43 UL ACK Response Timing
4.4.6.6.3 ACK in AUANCH/ACKCHThis field indicates the ACK response of the received downlink data. The ACK/NACK bits arereceived per codeword from higher layers.
Two ACK/NACK feedback modes are supported on ACKCH through higher layer configuration.
- ACK/NACK bundling and- ACK/NACK multiplexing
4.4.6.6.3.1 Response Timing of UL ACK
The MS shall upon detection of a ADEDCH transmission or a ADECCH indicating downlink SPS
release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18 intended for the MS
and for which ACK/NACK response shall be provided, transmit the ACK/NACK response in UL
slot n.
Table 4.18 Downlink association set index K  k0 , k1 ,kM 1
UL-DL
Configuration 0 1

Slot n2

3 4 5 6

7

8 9

0

-

-

6

- 4 -

-

6

- 4

1

-

-

7, 6

4 -

-

-

7, 6

4 -

2

-

- 8, 7, 4, 6 --- 8, 7, 4, 6 -

3

-

-

7

-

7 5 -

-

7

-

7 -

A-GN4.00-03-TS

258

4.4.6.6.3.2 ACK/NACK bundling
ACK/NACK bundling is performed per codeword across M multiple DL slots associated with asingle UL slot n, where M is the number of elements in the set K defined in Table 4.18, by alogical AND operation of all the individual ADEDCH transmission (with and without corresponding
ADECCH) ACK/NACKs and ACK in response to ADECCH indicating downlink SPS release. The
bundled 1 or 2 ACK/NACK bits are transmitted using ACKCH.
(1)For ACK/NACK bundling, the MS shall use ACKCH resource nACKCH
for transmission of ACK

response in slot n , where- If there is ADEDCH transmission indicated by the detection of corresponding ADECCH orthere is ADECCH indicating DL SPS release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K is a set of M
elements k0 ,k1 , kM 1 depending on the slot n and the UL-DL configuration, the MS first
selects a p value out of {0, 1, 2, 3} which makes N p  n1C  N p 1 and shall use
(1)
(1)
(1)
, where K is defined in Table 4.18, nACKCH
isnACKCH (M - m -1)  N p  m  Np 1  n1C  NACKCH
DL
configured by higher layers, N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36 , and n1C is thenumber of the first cluster of RP group used for transmission of the corresponding ADECCH
in slot n  km and the corresponding m, where k m is the smallest value in set K such thatMS detects a ADECCH in slot n  km .
- If there is only a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected(1)
iswithin slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18, the value of nACKCH

determined according to higher layer configuration.
For ACK/NACK bundling, if the MS detects that at least one downlink assignment has been
missed, the MS shall not transmit ACK/NACK in case the MS is not transmitting on AUEDCH.
4.4.6.6.3.3 ACK/NACK multiplexing
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1 , where M is the number of elements in theset K defined in Table 4.18, spatial ACK/NACK bundling across multiple codewords within a
DL slot is performed by a logical AND operation of all the corresponding individual ACK/NACKs
and ACKCH with channel selection is used. For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1,
spatial ACK/NACK bundling across multiple codewords within a DL slot is not performed, 1 or 2
ACK/NACK bits are transmitted using ACKCH.
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and a slot n with M  1 where M is the number of elements in

A-GN4.00-03-TS

259

(1)
the set K defined in Table 4.18, the MS shall use ACKCH resource nACKCH
for transmissionof ACK response in slot n , where- If there is ADEDCH transmission indicated by the detection of corresponding ADECCH orthere is ADECCH indicating DL SPS release within slot(s) n  k , where k  K is a set of Melements k0 , k1 ,  k M 1 depending on the slot n and the UL-DL configuration, the MS first
selects a p value out of {0, 1, 2, 3} which makes N p  n1C  N p1 and shall use
1)(1), where K is defined in Tablen (ACKCH ( M  m  1)  N p  m  N p1  n1C  N ACKCH(1)DL
4.18, nACKCH
is configured by higher layers, N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36, and

n1C is the number of the first cluster of RP group used for transmission of the corresponding

ADECCH in slot n  km and the corresponding m, wherekmis the smallest value in set

K such that MS detects a ADECCH in slot n  k m .

- If there is only a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected(1)
within slot(s) n  k , where k  K and K is defined in Table 4.18, the value of nACKCH
isdetermined according to higher layer configuration.
For ACK/NACK multiplexing and slot n with M  1, where M is the number of elements in(1)
the set K defined in Table 4.18, denote nACKCH,
i as the ACKCH resource derived from slotn ki and HARQ-ACK(i) as the ACK response from slot n  ki , where ki  K (defined inTable 4.18) and 0  i  M  1.
- For a ADEDCH transmission or a ADECCH indicating downlink SPS release in slot n  ki
1)
(1)
p is
where ki  K , n (ACKCH,i  ( M  i  1)  N p  i  N p 1  n1C ,i  N ACKCH , whereselected

from

{0,

1,

2,

3}

such

that

N p  n1C  N p1,

DL
N p  max 0, [ N RU
 ( N scRU  p  4)] / 36, n1C,i is the number of the first cluster of RP group

A-GN4.00-03-TS

260

(1)
used for transmission of the corresponding ADECCH in slot n  ki , and N ACKCH
isconfigured by higher layers.
- For a ADEDCH transmission where there is not a corresponding ADECCH detected in slot
(1)n  ki , the value of nACKCH,
i is determined according to higher layer configuration.

For ACK/NACK multiplexing and slot n with M  1, the MS shall transmit a QPSK symbol on a(1)
in slot n according to the M ACK responses. The ACKCH
selected ACKCH resource nACKCH

resource(1)(1)
is selected from the derived ACKCH resources nACKCH,nACKCHi.

4.4.6.6.4 ACK in ADHICH
This field indicates the ACK response of the received uplink data.
4.4.6.6.4.1 Response Timing of DL ACK
For scheduled UL data transmissions in slot n, a MS shall determine the corresponding ADHICH
resource carrying ACK/NACK in slot n+kADHICH, where kADHICH is given in Table 4.19.
Table 4.19 kADHICH value
UL/DL
UL slot index n
Configuration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0

4 7 6

4 7 6

1

4 6

4 6

2

6

6

3

4 6 6

4 7

4.4.6.7 Channel quality report
The time and frequency resources that can be used by the MS to report CQI, PMI, and RI are
controlled by the BS. In an optional way, for spatial multiplexing, the MS shall determine a RI
corresponding to the number of useful transmission layers. For transmit diversity, RI is equal toone.
A MS shall transmit periodic CQI/PMI, or RI reporting on CQICH in slots with no AUEDCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

261

allocation. A MS shall transmit periodic CQI/PMI or RI reporting on AUEDCH in slots with
AUEDCH allocation.
The set of subbands (S) a MS shall evaluate for CQI reporting spans the entire downlink system
bandwidth. A subband is a set of k contiguous PRUs where k is a function of system bandwidth.
DL.
Note the last subband in set S may have fewer than k contiguous PRUs depending on N RU
DL
DL
The number of subbands for system bandwidth given by N RU
is defined by N  N RU/ k .

The subbands shall be indexed in the order of increasing frequency and non-increasing sizes
starting at the lowest frequency.
4.4.6.7.1 CQI definition
Each CQI consists of a 4-bit CQI index, which indicates a suggested modulation order and coding
rate. CQI index 0 is used tor indicating out of range. Based on an unrestricted observation intervalin time and frequency, the MS shall derive for each CQI value reported in uplink slot n the highest
CQI index between 1 and 15, which satisfies the following condition, or CQI index 0 if CQI index 1
does not satisfy the condition:- A single ADEDCH transport block with a combination of modulation scheme andtransport block size corresponding to the CQI index, and occupying a group of downlink
physical resource units termed the CQI reference resource, could be received with atransport block error probability not exceeding 0.1.
A combination of modulation scheme and transport block size corresponds to a CQI index if:- the combination could be signalled for transmission on the ADEDCH in the CQI reference
resource according to the relevant Transport Block Size table, and-the modulation scheme is indicated by the CQI index, and-the combination of transport block size and modulation scheme when applied to thereference resource results in the code rate which is the closest possible to the code rate
indicated by the CQI index. If more than one combination of transport block size andmodulation scheme results in a code rate equally close to the code rate indicated by the
CQI index, only the combination with the smallest of such transport block sizes isrelevant.

The CQI reference resource is defined as follows:- In the frequency domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by the group of downlink
physical resource units corresponding to the band to which the derived CQI value relates.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

262

-

In the time domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by a single downlink slot
n-nCQI_ref,o where for periodic CQI reporting nCQI_ref is the smallest value greater than orequal to 4, such that it corresponds to a valid downlink slot;
A downlink slot shall be considered to be valid if:
 it is configured as a downlink slot for that MS, and

it does not contain a DSS field in case the length of DSS is 7680  Ts
and less, and

-it does not fall within a configured measurement gap for that MS.

If there is no valid downlink slot for the CQI reference resource, CQI reporting isomitted in uplink slot n.
In the layer domain, the CQI reference resource is defined by any RI and PMI on which
the CQI is conditioned.

4.4.6.7.2 PMI definition
For AMTs 4, 5, and 6, precoding feedback is used for channel dependent codebook based
precoding and relies on MSs reporting PMI. A MS shall report PMI based on the feedback modes.
Each PMI value corresponds to a codebook index.
For other AMTs, PMI reporting is not supported.
4.4.6.7.3 Periodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting on CQICHA MS is semi-statically configured by higher layers to periodically feed back different CQI, PMI,and RI on the CQICH. Multiple reporting modes, namely 1-0, 1-1, 2-0 and 2-1, are supported. In
reporting mode 1-0, only a wideband CQI will be reported. In reporting mode 1-1, a wideband CQI
and a single PMI will be reported. In reporting mode 2-0, both wideband CQI and subbamd CQI
will be reported. In reporting mode 2-1, wideband CQI, subband CQI and a signle PMI will bereported.
The periodic CQI reporting mode is given by the parameter cqi-FormatIndicatorPeriodic which is
configured by higher-layer signaling.
For subband CQI, a CQI report in a certain slot describes the channel quality in a particular partor in particular parts of the bandwidth described subsequently as bandwidth part (BP) or parts.
The bandwidth parts shall be indexed in the order of increasing frequency and non-increasing
sizes starting at the lowest frequency. For subband CQI, the MS selects a single subband out of
A-GN4.00-03-TS263

N j subbands of a bandwidth part, and reports its CQI index along with a corresponding L-bit
DLlabel indexed in the order of increasing frequency, where L  log 2 N RU/ k / J  .

Four CQI/PMI and RI reporting types with distinct periods and offsets are supported for each
CQICH reporting mode:Type 1 report supports CQI feedback for the MS selected sub-bands
Type 2 report supports wideband CQI and PMI feedback.
Type 3 report supports RI feedbackType 4 report supports wideband CQIIn the case where wideband CQI/PMI reporting is configured:ThereportinginstancesforwidebandCQI/PMI

are

slots

satisfying

10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI mod N P  0 , where n f is the system frame number, andn s = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame, and NOFFSET,CQI is thecorresponding wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset (in slots) and NP is the wideband
CQI/PMI period (in slots).
In case RI reporting is configured, the reporting interval of the RI reporting is an integer
multiple MRI of wideband CQI/PMI period NP (in slots).
o Thereportinginstances
for
RI
are
slots
satisfying

10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI  N OFFSET ,RI modN P  M RI   0 , where NOFFSET,RI
is the corresponding relative RI offset to the wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset(in slots).
o The reporting offset for RI NOFFSET,RI takes values from the set {0, −1, …,−(NP−1)}.
o In case of collision of RI and wideband CQI/PMI the wideband CQI/PMI is
dropped.


The periodicity NP and offset NOFFSET,CQI for wideband CQI/PMI reporting are determinedbased on the parameter configured by higher layer signaling. The periodicity MRI, andoffset NOFFSET,RI for RI reporting are determined based on the parameter configured byhigher layer signaling.

In the case where both wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI reporting are configured:A-GN4.00-03-TS

264



The reporting instances for wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI are slots satisfying

10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI mod N P  0 , where n f is the system frame number, andn s = {0,1,…, 19} is the half-slot index within the frame, NOFFSET,CQI is the corresponding

wideband CQI/PMI reporting offset (in slots) , and NP is the period of CQI/PMI reporting
instance (in slots).
 The wideband CQI/PMI report has period H*NP, and is reported on the slots
satisfying 10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI modH  N P   0 . The integer H isdefined as H=J*K+1, where J is the number of bandwidth parts.


Between every two consecutive wideband CQI/PMI reports, the remaining J*K
reporting instances are used in sequence for subband CQI reports on K fullcycles of bandwidth parts except when the gap between two consecutive
wideband CQI/PMI reports contains less than J*K reporting instances due to asystem frame number transition to 0, in which case the MS shall not transmit theremainder of the subband CQI reports which have not been transmitted before
the second of the two wideband CQI/PMI reports. Each full cycle of bandwidthparts shall be in increasing order starting from bandwidth part 0 to bandwidthpart J-1.

In case RI reporting is configured, the reporting interval of RI is MRI times the wideband
CQI/PMI period, and RI is reported on the same CQICH cyclic shift resource as both the
wideband CQI/PMI and subband CQI reports.
The

reportinginstances

for

RI

are

slots

satisfying

10  n f  ns / 2  N OFFSET ,CQI  N OFFSET ,RI modH  N P  M RI   0 .


In case of collision between RI and wideband CQI/PMI or subband CQI, thewideband CQI/PMI or subband CQI is dropped.

 The parameter K is configured by higher-layer and the parameter NOFFSET,RI is selectedfrom the set {0, -1, …,-( NP -1), - NP }.
 The periodicity NP and offset NOFFSET,CQI for CQI reporting are determined based on theparameter configured by higher layer signaling. The periodicity MRI, and offset NOFFSET,RI
for RI reporting are determined based on the parameter configured by higher layer
signaling.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

265

The CQI/PMI or RI report shall be transmitted on the CQICH resource which is MS specific andconfigured by higher layers.
For periodic CQI/PMI reporting, the following periodicity values apply depending on the UL/DL
configuration:o The reporting period of NP = 1 is only applicable to UL/DL configurations 0, 1 and 3,
where all UL slots in a radio frame are used for CQI/PMI reporting.
o The reporting period of NP = 5 is only applicable to UL/DL configurations 0, 1, 2 and
3.
o The reporting periods of NP = {10, 20, 40, 80, 160} are applicable to all UL/DL
configurations.
A RI report in a periodic reporting mode is valid only for CQI/PMI report on that periodic reportingmode.
For the calculation of CQI/PMI conditioned on the last reported RI, in the absence of a lastreported RI the MS shall conduct the CQI/PMI calculation conditioned on the lowest possible RI
as given by the bitmap parameter codebookSubsetRestriction .

4.4.6.8 MAP
The PRU numbers are assigned as shown in Figure 4.44. This number is called logical PRU
number. MAP indicates logical PRU number, which includes CCH PRU(s). As for logical PRU
number, refer to section 4.1.1.2.1, 4.1.1.2.2 and .4.1.1.2.2.
MAP origin indicates the starting point of the logical PRU number for the MS. BS decides MAP
origin by negotiating with MS at access establishment phase.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

266

Logical PRU Number
M AP Origin

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

9

10

11

12

9

10

11

12

9

10

11

12

M -7

M -6

M -5

M -4

M -7

M -6

M -5

M -4

M -3

M -2

M -1

M

M -3

M -2

M -1

M

K-7

K-6

K-5

K-4

K-7

K-6

K-5

K-4

K-3

K-2

K-1

K

K-3

K-2

K-1

K

Effective
ChannelBandwidth

Frequency Axis

UL TDMASlots

DL TDMASlots

PRU Number

MAP

Figure 4.44 Logical PRU Numbering in case of symmetric frame
While the number of MAP “NMAP” for protocol version 1 is fixed value as 72bits, the number of
MAP for protocol version 2 should be calculated as follows.
N MAP  N SL  N SCH,where “NSL” denotes larger number of slots, either “NDSL” or “NUSL”. “NSCH” denotes the number of
SCH.
Figure 4.45 shows the relationship between logical PRU number and the bit assignment in the
MAP field. Logical PRU number is assigned from the top of the MAP field. 1 stands for the
allocated PRU and 0 stands for not allocated ones.

Time
(MSB)

1

(LSB)

2

3

4

5











First Bit
Figure 4.45 Correspondence between Logical PRU Number and Bit Position in the MAP Field

A-GN4.00-03-TS

267

4.4.6.8.1 Response Timing of MAP
Figure 4.46 shows MAP indication timing. BS determines this response time for each MS bynegotiating with the MS at access establishment phase.
MAP field indicates the PRU which can be used as EXCH one frame after in case of (a) timing 1.
It indicates the PRU which can be used as EXCH two frames after in case of (b) timing 2.

5 ms
MAP

ANCH
DL
UL

Time

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 Allocation

5 ms

DL
UL

MAP

ANCH

Time

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 Allocation

Figure 4.46 Example of MAP Indication Timing

A-GN4.00-03-TS

268

4.4.6.9 Validity (V)This field shows the number of the PRU(s) that contains the valid data in a TDMA frame. The
data is then transmitted from the beginning of the PHY frame. In case when no data is transmitted,
DTX instead of user data will be put into the data symbols.
Figure 4.47 and Figure 4.48 show V field each DL and UL ECCH for protocol version 1. Figure
4.49 shows V field both of DL and UL ECCH for protocol version 2.
V means effective PRU. The number of DL V “NDV” for protocol version 1 is fixed value as 7 bits,
and the number of UL V “NUV” is 20bits. On the other hand, control method of DL V for protocol
version 2 should be controlled slot-by-slot as with UL V for protocol version 1. In addition, both
value of “NDV” and “NUV” are related on TDMA frame structure as the number of slot. The
number of V, “NUV” and “NDV”, for protocol version 2 should be calculated as follows.
N DV  N DSL  log 2 N SCH  1  N DST 
NUV  NUSL  log 2 N SCH  1  NUST ,where “NDST” denotes the number of stream (SI) for DL. “NUST” denotes the number of stream(SI) for UL. “NUSL“ denotes the number of UL slot. “NDSL“ denotes the number of DL slot.
  denotes ceil function. “NSCH” denotes the number of SCH.
MSB

LSB
TDMA Frame
V Field
V Field (7)Figure 4.47 V field Structure in DL ECCH for protocol version 1

MSB
Slot 1V Field5

LSB
Slot 2V Field
5

Slot 3
V Field
5

Slot 4
V Field
5

V Field (20)Figure 4.48 V Field Structure in UL ECCH for protocol version 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

269

MSB

LSB

Slot 1V Field

Slot 2V Field

1~7

1~7

….

Slot NV Field
1~7

V Field (N~7N)

Figure 4.49 V field Structure in UL / DL ECCH for protocol version 2 (the number of SCH between
1 to 30)

Figure 4.50 shows an example of transmitting with DL OFDM when V field is 5. PRU(s) indicatedby the V field is recognized as a PHY data unit. Remaining PRU(s) will carry DTX.
PRU Assigned MAP
Time Axis
MAP Origin
EXCH 1

EXCH 5Frequency Axis

EXCH 3
EXCH 2ANCH
EXCH 6EXCH 8EXCH 4EXCH 7 EXCH 9…
TDMA Slots
DL ANCH In Case of V=5
ANCH

EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4First PHY
Data Unit

Second PHY
Data Unit
Data (5)EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7 EXCH 8 EXCH 9

Third PHY Data Unit
DTX (4)

Figure 4.50 Example of Recognition Method of Data Burst and DTX from MAP Field for V as 5
(Case of DL V field for protocol version 1)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

270

Figure 4.51 shows an example of transmitting with UL OFDM when V fields are (Slot 1=2, Slot
2=0, Slot 3=1, Slot 4=2) respectively. PRU(s) indicated by the V field is recognized as a PHY data
unit. Remaining PRU(s) will carry DTX.
PRU Assigned MAP
Time Axis
MAP Origin
Frequency Axis

EXCH 1

EXCH 5EXCH 3

EXCH 2ANCH
EXCH 6EXCH 8EXCH 4EXCH 7 EXCH 9…
TDMA Slots
UL ANCH In Case of V=(2 0 1 2)
Slot 1(V=2)
Slot 3(V=1)

EXCH 1

EXCH 2

Data (2)EXCH 5

Data (1)

EXCH 6EXCH 7

DTX (2)

Slot 2(V=0)

Slot 4(V=2)

EXCH 3

EXCH 4

DTX (2)
EXCH 8EXCH 9

Data (2)Figure 4.51 Example of Recognition Method of Data Burst and DTX from MAP Field for V as
(2,0,1,2) (Case of UL V field for protocol version 1 and DL / UL V field for protocol version 2)
Used PRU numbers and positions when performing HARQ retransmission are specified in HARQ
rule described in section 9.2.2.2, so sender and receiver share these structure. V indicates PRU
number for HARQ retransmission data and new data (includes MAC-ARQ retransmission data); V
ignores DTX PRUs.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

271

Figure 4.52 shows an example of V value of DL in case of performing HARQ. In this case, 15
PRUs are assigned in the MAP in ANCH. There is a PRU of new data and 5 PRUs of HARQ
retransmission data. HARQ data are pushed into smaller numbered SCHs in each slot. V
indicates PRU number that has valid data.
MAP=15, V=6
SCH1
ANCH

HARQ

HARQ

HARQ

SCH2

HARQ

HARQ

DTX

DTX

SCH3

Data

DTX

DTX

DTX

SCH4

DTX

DTX

DTX

DTX

SCH5
:

Figure 4.52 Example of V value of DL in case of performing HARQ

A-GN4.00-03-TS

272

4.4.6.9.1 V Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.53 shows an example of V indication timing. DL V applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points.
DL V field indicates the number of valid EDCH(s) one frame after in the case of (a) timing 1. It
indicates the number of valid EDCH(s) two frames after in the case of (b) timing 2.

MAP and V

ANCH

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation

ANCH

MAP and V

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation

Figure 4.53 V Indication Timing in DL ECCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

273

4.4.6.9.2 V Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.54 shows an example of V indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL V
applies to the UL EXCH of the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the V. The MAP
response time for each MS is determined by negotiation at access establishment phase.

5 ms
MAP

ANCH

Time
V

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation

5 ms
Time
V

DL
UL

MAP

ANCH

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation

Figure 4.54 V Indication Timing in UL ECCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

274

4.4.6.10 HARQ Cancel (HC)This field indicates cancellation of HARQ. HARQ can be activated when some conditions are
fulfilled. MS or BS received set-to-1 HC field, cancels the HARQ process. Refer to Section
4.4.3.2.1.
Table 4.20 Value of HC Field
HC Value0
1

Description
HARQ Enable
HARQ Cancel

4.4.6.10.1 HC Indication Timing of DL
Figure 4.55 shows an example of HC indication timing. DL HC applies to the EXCH to which the
MAP is in the same ANCH points.
DL HC field indicates whether HARQ one frame later is valid or not in case of (a) timing 1. It
indicates whether HARQ two frames later is valid or not in case of (b) timing 2.

ANCH

MAP and HC

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation

A-GN4.00-03-TS

275

ANCH

MAP and HC

5 ms
Time

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation

Figure 4.55 HC Indication Timing in DL ECCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

276

4.4.6.10.2 HC Indication Timing of UL
Figure 4.56 shows an example of HC indication timing. Regardless of MAP allocation timing, UL
HC applies to the UL EXCH in the same frame as the UL ANCH that contains the HC.

5 ms
MAP

ANCH

Time
HC

DL
UL

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(a) Timing 1 MAP Allocation

5 ms
Time
HC

DL
UL

MAP

ANCH

EXCH
Time

DL
UL

(b) Timing 2 MAP Allocation

Figure 4.56 HC Indication Timing in UL ECCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

277

4.4.6.11 Request Channel (RCH)This field is used for the bandwidth allocation request or transmission power margin notificationfrom the MS to BS. The type of content is distinguished by identifier in RCH field. MS informs BSof data size to be sent.
Figure 4.57 shows structure of the RCH field.
Bit 7

6

5

Identifier

4

3

2

1

Data

Figure 4.57 RCH field
Table 4.21 Value of Identifier Field
Bit
7
0
0
1
1

Data Identifier of RCH Field

6
0
1
0
1

UL Data Size Notification
Transmission Power Margin Notification
Reserved
Reserved

4.4.6.11.1 UL Data Size Notification
Figure 4.58 shows UL Data Size Notification format. This field is used for the bandwidth
allocation request from the MS to BS. MS informs BS of data size to be sent.
Bit 7

6

5

0

0

Unit

4

3

2

1

Data Length

Figure 4.58 UL Data Size Notification
Table 4.22 Unit Field
Unit
Bit
5
0
0
1
1

4
0
1
0
1

MAC layer control message
100 bytes
1 kbytes
10 kbytes

For example, Unit=”0 1” (100 bytes), Data Length=”1 0 0” then it indicates 400 bytes. Note that it
does not show accurate value.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

278

4.4.6.11.2 Transmission Power Margin Notification
Figure 4.59 shows Transmission Power Margin Notification format. This field is used for the
notification of transmission power margin from MS to BS. BS may refer to this value when BS
allocates PRU.
Bit 7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0

1

Transmission Power Margin
Notification

Figure 4.59 Transmission Power Margin Notification

Table 4.23 Transmission Power Margin Notification
Bit
5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

3
0
0
0
:
1

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

0 dB
1 dB
2 dB

1

1

31 dB

4.4.6.12 Request Channel (RCH)
Request Channel (RCH) is allocated in MSL1(MSL1).
4.4.6.12.1 Optional UL Data Size Notification
UL Data Size Notification MSL1 control elements consist of either: Short UL Data Size
Notification and Truncated UL Data Size Notification format : one FCG ID field and one
corresponding UL Data Size (Figure 4.60); or Long UL Data Size Notification format : four UL
Data Size, corresponding to FCG IDs #0 through #3 (Figure 4.61).
The UL Data Size Notification formats are identified by MSL1 PDU subheaders with FCIDs as
specified in Table 4.58. The fields FCG ID and UL Data Size are defined as follow:- FCG ID: The function Channel Group ID field identifies the group of function channel(s)which UL Data Size is being reported. The length of the field is 2 bits;-

UL Data Size: The UL Data Size field identifies the total amount of data available across allfunction channels of a function channel group after the MSL1 PDU has been built. The
amount of data is indicated in number of bytes. The length of this field is 6 bits.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

279

FCG IDUL Data Size

Oct 1Figure 4.60: Short UL Data Size Notification and Truncated UL Data Size Notification MSL1
control element
UL
Data
Size #1
UL Data Size #2

UL Data Size #0

UL Data Size #1
UL
Data
UL Data Size #3
Size #2

Oct 1
Oct 2
Oct 3

Figure 4.61:Long UL Data Size Notification MSL1 control element
4.4.6.12.2 Advanced Transmission Power Margin Notification (ATPMN) Report
The ATPMN MSL1 control element is identified by a MSL1 PDU subheader with FCID as
specified in Table 4.58. It has a fixed size and consists of a single octet defined as follows (Figure4.62):-

R: reserved bit, set to "0";-Power Margin (PM): this field indicates the power margin level. The length of the field is 6
bits. The reported PM and the corresponding margin levels are shown in Table 4.24 below.

R

R

PM

Oct 1

Figure 4.62: ATPMN MSL1 control element

Table 4.24: Power Margin Levels for ATPMN

A-GN4.00-03-TS

280

PM

Power Margin Level

0

Power_Margin_0

1

Power_Margin_1

2

Power_Margin_2

3Power_Margin_3

…

…

60

Power_Margin_60

61Power_Margin_61

62

Power_Margin_62

63Power_Margin_63

4.4.6.13 ANCH MCS Indicator (AMI)
There are two purposes to adopt AMI (ANCH MCS Indicator) field. One is adaptive modulation for
ANCH/ECCH. ANCH/ECCH should select MCS that can send necessary and minimum volume ofcontrol information because the volume of control information depends on the MIMO method andsystem bandwidth.
MCS for ANCH/ECCH should be selected from BPSK 1/2 to QPAK 3/4. Another is link adaptation
for ANCH/ICCH. MCS for ANCH/ICCH should be selected from BPSK 1/2 to 256QAM 7/8
because of throughput improvement when one PRU is assigned for a user. Table 4.25 shows
applicative range of AMI.
When continuous transmission mode is selected, any information in retransmission data is notchanged from the first data in order to soft-combine both signal field and data filed at received
side.
Table 4.25 AMI Field
ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

AMI
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 2/3
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
Reserved
16QAM 1/2
16QAM 3/4
64QAM 2/3
64QAM 5/6
256QAM 3/4
256QAM 7/8

Reserved

Note
ICCH/ECCH-ICCH only-

A-GN4.00-03-TS

281

4.4.6.14 ANCH MCS Request (AMR)
AMR means ANCH MCS Request. AMR notifies maximum ANCH MCS which is judged fromRSSI and SINR etc. AMI selects same MCS or smaller MCS compared with received AMR incase of ANCH/ICCH. Minimum MCS is selected to send the amount of control information in caseof ANCH/ECCH. If CRC is error, AMR is not known. If HARQ is applied to ANCH/ICCH, AMR of
HARQ frame is set at the same AMR as the initial frame to perform soft-combing at receive side.
Table 4.26 shows AMR table.
Table 4.26 AMR Field

ID
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

AMR
BPSK 1/2
BPSK 2/3
QPSK 1/2
QPSK 3/4
Reserved
16QAM 1/2
16QAM 3/4
64QAM 2/3
64QAM 5/6
256QAM 3/4
256QAM 7/8
Reserved

4.4.6.15 MIMO type for EXCH (MT)MT means MIMO type for EXCH. MT should be switched frame-by-frame. Table 4.27 shows
information element of MT. MT must be selected from MIMO performance that is decided innegotiation phase. SISO (AAS) is chosen when “MIMO type is SDMA” and “number of stream is
1”.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

282

Table 4.27 MT field
ID
0
1
2
3

MT
STBC
SM
SVD
SDMA

4.4.6.16 Stream Indicator for EXCH (SI)SI means Stream Indicator for EXCH. The number of stream is 1 to 4.
Table 4.28 SI field

ID
SI
0
1
1
2
2
4
3 Reserved
4.4.6.17 MIMO type for EXCH (SR)SR means Stream Request for EXCH. The number of stream is 1 to 4. This value and MR should
be decided by RSSI, SINR etc.
Table 4.29 SR field

ID
SR
0
1
1
2
2
4
3 Reserved
4.4.6.18 Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH (BI)BI means Bandwidth Indicator for EXCH. BI indicates range of applicative SCH bandwidth. BIlower 5bits “NLBI” denotes initial number of applicative SCH bandwidth. BI upper 5bits “NUBI”
denotes last number of applicative SCH bandwidth.
Figure 4.63 shows concept of BI. In this example, ECB (Effective Channel Bandwidth) is 27MHz.
The total number of SCH is 30 in this case. Center frequency fc is guard carrier of SCH16. Case

A-GN4.00-03-TS

283

A shows that SCH9 to SCH13 are effective. Case B shows that SCH1 to SCH22 are effective.
Number of effective SCH “NSCH” is as follows,
N SCH  NUBI  N LBI   1,where N SCH  1,..., NUBI , NUBI  N LBI
MAP, ACK, V should be calculated by “NSCH”. If AMR is low MCS, the amount of control
information may be limited because AMI must be lower than MCS of AMR. In this example, BIshould indicate the range of SCH that can select low ANCH MCS such as Case A.

EBW = 27MHz

CenterFrequency fc

SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SCH10
SCH11
SCH12
SCH13
SCH14
SCH15
SCH16
SCH17
SCH18
SCH19
SCH20
SCH21
SCH22
SCH23
SCH24
SCH25
SCH26
SCH27
SCH28
SCH29
SCH30

Case ABI lower 5bit

BI upper 5bit

SCH1
SCH2
SCH3
SCH4
SCH5
SCH6
SCH7
SCH8
SCH9
SCH10
SCH11
SCH12
SCH13
SCH14
SCH15
SCH16
SCH17
SCH18
SCH19
SCH20
SCH21
SCH22
SCH23
SCH24
SCH25
SCH26
SCH27
SCH28
SCH29
SCH30

BI lower 5bit

BI upper 5bit

Case B

Figure 4.63 Concept of BI

A-GN4.00-03-TS

284

4.4.7 PHY Control Layer for ADECCH
This section shows the information elements, e.g. the Advanced Downlink ECCH Control
Information (ADECI) carried on ADECCH and explains each field in the ADECI. There are totallyten different formats for ADECI and the fields defined in the ADECI formats are described as
below:
4.4.7.1 ADECI format 0
ADECI format 0 is used for scheduling of physical uplink data channel. The following informationis transmitted by means of the ADECI format 0.
4.4.7.1.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation
It indicates the differentiation between format 0 and format 1A by 1 bit. Table 4.30 shows thevalues of this filed.
Table 4.30 Flag for Format0/Format1A Differentiation
Flag for
Indication
Format0/Format1A
Differentiation
0
ADECI format 0.
1
ADECI format 1A
4.4.7.1.2 Hopping flag
It indicates whether the MS shall perform AUEDCH frequency hopping by 1 bit. Table 4.31 shows
the values of this field.
Table 4.31 Hopping Flag
Hopping
Flag
0
1

Indication
AUEDCH frequency hopping
No AUEDCH frequency hopping

4.4.7.1.3 Resource unit assignment and hopping resource allocation
It indicates the resource allocation for AUEDCH and this field shall support to indicate the

A-GN4.00-03-TS285

resource allocation for different cases: AUEDCH frequency hopping or not..
4.4.7.1.4 Modulation and coding scheme and redundancy version
It indicates the modulation order (QPSK/16QAM/64QAM), transport block size and redundancy
version by 5 bit.
4.4.7.1.5 Advanced New Data Indicator (ANDI)ANDI is toggled for each new transport block by 1 bit. For example, if the ANDI is “0” for atransport block (invariance for intial and retransmission), in the next new transport block, the
ANDI turns to the reverse state as “1”.
4.4.7.1.6 TPC command for scheduled AUEDCH
It impacts the power control for AUEDCH by 2 bit. Table 4.32 shows the values of this field.
Table 4.32 Mapping of TPC Command Field to Absolute and Accumulated Values*
TPC Command
Field inADECI format

Accumulated[dB]**

Absolute [dB] only
ADECI format 0**

0

-1

-4

1
2
3

0
1
3

-1
1
4

0/3

*: This table also applies to ADECI format 3 (refer to section ).
**: The meaning of this value is discussed in the power control part.
4.4.7.1.7 Cyclic shift for DM RS
It impacts the demodulation pilot for AUEDCH by 3 bits.
4.4.7.1.8 UL index
It applies to UL/DL slot configuration 0 for multiple uplink slot scheduling by 2 bits. Table 4.33
shows the values of this field.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

286

Table 4.33 ULIndex
UL Iindex

Indication*

00

Reserved

10

Only the first uplink slot is scheduled

01

Only the second uplink slot is scheduled

11

Both the first and second slots are scheduled* if ADECI format 0 is transmitted in slot n, the first/second uplink slot denotes a valid uplink slot n+x, where x is
the first/second smallest value greater than or equal to 4.

4.4.7.1.9 Downlink assignment index for uplink control signaling
It indicates the total number of slots with ADEDCH transmissions by 2 bits.Table 4.34 shows thevalues of this field.
Table 4.34 Downlink Assignment Index for Uplink Control Signaling
DAI
MSB, LSB

Value
of DAI

Number of Slots with ADEDCH Transmission and withADECCH Indicating DL Semi-persistent Scheduling Release

0,0

1

1 or 5 or 90,1

2

2 or 6

1,0

3

3 or 71,1

4

0 or 4 or 8

4.4.7.1.10 CQI request
It triggers whether MS shall perform aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting or not. Table 4.35 shows thevalue of this field.
Table 4.35 CQI RequestCQI Request

Indication0

Not performing aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting1

Performing aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI reporting

In addition, ADECI format 0 transmitted in the slot n indicates uplink scheulding information in theslot n+k, where k is shown in Table 4.36. Further, for UL/DL configuration 0, k can also be set to
7 if the condition as defined in this section is satisfied.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

287

Table 4.36 value k
UL/DL
DL Slot Number nConfiguration 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
0

4 6

1

6

2
3

4 6
4

6

4
7 7

4
4

7 7

5

4.4.7.2 ADECI format 1
ADECI format 1 carries DL scheduling information for SIMO with bitmap resource allocation
indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 1.
4.4.7.2.1 Resource allocation header
It indicates whether resource allocation type 0 or type 1 applies for ADEDCH by 1 bit.. Table 4.37
shows the values of this filed.
Table 4.37 Resource Allocation Header
Resource
Indication
Allocation
Header0
Resource allocation type 0
1
Resource allocation type 1
4.4.7.2.2 Resource unit assignment
It indicates the resource unit assignment for ADEDCH and shall support both the resource
allocation for type 0 and type 1.
4.4.7.2.3 Modulation and coding scheme
It indicates the modulation order and transport block size for ADEDCH by 5 bits.
4.4.7.2.4 HARQ process number
It indicates the Hybrid-ARQ process number for ADEDCH by 4 bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

288

4.4.7.2.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.2.6 Redundancy version
It indicates the redundancy version index for ADEDCH by 2 bits respectively corresponding to
redundancy version 0/1/2/3.
4.4.7.2.7 TPC command for AUANCH
It impacts the transmission power of AUANCH with 2 bits. Table 4.38 shows the values of thisfiled.
Table 4.38 Mapping of TPC Command for AUANCHTPC Command Field in
ADECI format
1A/1B/1D/1/2A/2/3

Adiusted Power
[dB]

0

-1

1

0

2

1

3

3

4.4.7.2.8 Downlink assignment index in downlink control signaling
It indicates the accumulative number of assigned ADEDCH transmission with corresponding
ADECCH(s) up to the present slot transmitted to the corresponding MS within all the M slot(s)and applies for detection of missing DL grants for optional UL/DL slot configuration 1-3 by 2 bits.
4.4.7.3 ADECI format 1A
ADECI format 1A carries DL scheduling information for SIMO with compacted resource allocation
indication and it shall support the transmission of the downlink paging, ATCCH response anddynamic ABCCH information scheduling. The following information is transmitted by means of the
ADECI format 1A scrambling with C-MSID.
4.4.7.3.1 Flag for format0/format1A differentiation

A-GN4.00-03-TS

289

Refer to section 4.4.7.1.1.
4.4.7.3.2 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
It indicates whether localized virtual resource units or distributed virtual resource units are
assigned for ADEDCH: value 0 indicates localized and value 1 indicates distributed VRU
assignment.
4.4.7.3.3 Resource unit assignment
It indicates DL contiguous RUs assignment and shall support for Localized/Distributed VRU
assignment.
4.4.7.3.4 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.3.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.3.6 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.3.7 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.3.8 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.3.9 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
In addition, the information elements “access sequence index for ATCCH (by 6 bits)” and “maskindex for ATCCH (by 4 bits)” shall be supported in this ADECI format to support the transmission

A-GN4.00-03-TS

290

of ATCCH.
4.4.7.4 ADECI format 1B
ADECI format 1B carries DL scheduling information for closed-loop signal-rank SU-MIMO withpossibly contiguous resource allocation. The following information is transmitted by means of the
ADECI format 1B.
4.4.7.4.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.2.
4.4.7.4.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.3.
4.4.7.4.3 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.4.4 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.4.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.4.6 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.4.7 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.4.8 Downlink Assignment Index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

291

4.4.7.4.9 TPMI information for precoding
It indicates the which codebook index is used for ADEDCH corresponding to the single-layertransmission. The number of this information bits are listed in Table 4.39.
Table 4.39 Number of Bits for TPMI Information
Number of Antenna Ports Number
at BS
of Bits
2

2

4

4

4.4.7.4.10 PMI confirmation for precoding
It indicates whether the precoding is selected according to the latest PMI or the indicated TPMI.
4.4.7.5 ADECI format 1C
ADECI format 1C carries DL scheduling information for paging, ATCCH response and dynamic
BCCH transmission in ADEDCH. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI
format 1C.
4.4.7.5.1 Gap value
It indicates the gap value when the virtual resouce unit is mapping to the physical resouce unit by
1 bits.
4.4.7.5.2 Resource unit assignment
It indicates the resouce unit assignment according to the type 2 resource allocation for ADEDCH.
4.4.7.5.3 Transport block size index
It indicates the transport block size for the ADEDCH scrambled with SI-MSID, RA-MSID, P-MSID
by 5 bits.
4.4.7.6 ADECI format 1D

A-GN4.00-03-TS

292

ADECI format 1D carries DL scheduling information for MU-MIMO with compacted resource
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 1D.
4.4.7.6.1 Localized/Distributed VRU assignment flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.2.
4.4.7.6.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.3.3.
4.4.7.6.3 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.6.4 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.6.5 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.6.6 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
4.4.7.6.7 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.6.8 Downlink assignment index for DL control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.6.9 TPMI information for precoding
Refer to section 4.4.7.4.9.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

293

4.4.7.6.10 Downlink power offset
It indicates the downlink power offset value  power-offset used in power control for the multi-user
MIMO transmission scheme of the ADEDCH by 1 bit . Table 4.40 shows the value of this field.
Table 4.40 Mapping of Downlink Power Offset Field in ADECI format 1D to the  power-offset Value

Downlink Power Offset Field power-offset [dB]0-10log10(2)1

04.4.7.7 ADECI format 2
ADECI format 2 carries DL scheduling information for close loop SU-MIMO with bitmap resource
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 2.
4.4.7.7.1 Resource allocation header
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.1.
4.4.7.7.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.2.
4.4.7.7.3 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.7.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.7.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

294

4.4.7.7.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag
It indicates the transport block to codeword mapping by 1 bit when the two transport blocks areenabled. Table 4.41 shows the value of this field.
Table 4.41 Transport Block to Codeword Mapping (two transport blocks enabled)
Transport Blockto Codeword
Swap Flag Value

Codeword 0(enabled)

Codeword 1(enabled)

0transport block 1 transport block 2

1transport block 2 transport block 1

4.4.7.7.7 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.
4.4.7.7.8 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.7.9 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
Notes that the previous three information (modulation and coding scheme, ANDI, redundancy
version) shall support for the transport block 1 and 2.
4.4.7.7.10 Precoding information
It indicates the precoding information for ADECI format 2 by the certain bits as indicated in Table
4.42.

Table 4.42 Number of Bits for Precoding Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

295

Number of Antenna Ports at BS

Number of Bits for Precoding Information

2

3

4

6

4.4.7.8 ADECI format 2A
ADECI format 2A carries DL scheduling information for open loop SU-MIMO with bitmap resource
allocation indication. The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 2A.
4.4.7.8.1 Resource allocation header
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.1.
4.4.7.8.2 Resource unit assignment
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.2.
4.4.7.8.3 TPC command for AUANCH
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.7.
4.4.7.8.4 Downlink assignment index for downlink control signaling
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.8.
4.4.7.8.5 HARQ process number
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.4.
4.4.7.8.6 Transport block to codeword swap flag
Refer to section 4.4.7.7.6.
4.4.7.8.7 Modulation and coding scheme
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.3.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

296

4.4.7.8.8 ANDI
Refer to section 4.4.7.1.5.
4.4.7.8.9 Redundancy version
Refer to section 4.4.7.2.6.
Notes that the previous three information (modulation and coding scheme, ANDI, redundancy
version) shall support for the transport block 1 and 2.
4.4.7.8.10 Precoding information
It indicates the precoding information for ADECI format 2A by the certain bits as indicated inTable 4.43.
Table 4.43 Number of Bits for Precoding Information
Number of Antenna Ports at BS

Number of Bits for Precoding Information

2

0

4

2

4.4.7.9 ADECI format 3
ADECI format 3 carries TPC command of multiple users for UL power control (2 bits per user).
The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 3. Notes that the size of 3
should equal to ADECI format 0.
4.4.7.9.1 TPC command
It indicates the absolute and accumulated values for the AUANCH and AUEDCH power
adjustment by 2 bits (refer to Section 4.4.7.1.6).
4.4.7.10 ADECI format 3A
ADECI format 3A carries TPC command of multiple users for UL power control (single bit peruser). The following information is transmitted by means of the ADECI format 3A. Notes that thesize of 3A should equal to ADECI format 1A.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

297

4.4.7.10.1 TPC command
It indicates the values for the AUANCH and AUEDCH power adjustment by 1 bit . Table 4.44
shows the value of this field.
Table 4.44

Mapping of TPC Command Field in ADECI format 3A to  PUSCH Values
TPC Command Field in
ADECI format 3A

Adjusted Power [dB]

0

-1

1

1

4.4.8 Summary of PHY Frame Format
Figure 4.64 and Figure 4.65 show all PHY frame formats.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

298

SignalSymbolData Symbol

ANCH/ICCH
(DL)

CI
(2)

SD
(2)

ANCH/ICCH
(UL)

CI
(2)

APC
(1)

Reserved(5)

ANCH/ECCH
(DL)

CI
(2)

MAP
(72)

SD APC PC(2) (1) (4)

ACK
(36)

ANCH/ECCH(UL OFDM)

CI
(2)

RCH
(7)

APC PC(1) (1)ACK(36)

V MI MR HC(20) (16) (16) (1)Reserved(64)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)

ANCH/ECCH(UL SC)CI(2)

RCH APC PC(1) (1)
(7)

ACK
(36)

V MI MR(20) (16) (16)Reserved(6)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)APC(1)

Reserved(3)

EXCH/EDCH(UL/DL)

MAC Frame(ICCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(ICCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)V MI MR HC Reserved CRC TAIL
(7)(16) (6)(7) (16) (16) (1)HC(1)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(EDCH)

CSCH/TCH
(DL)

MI
(4)

CI
(2)

MR
(4)

SD
(2)

PC
(1)

CSCH/TCH
(UL)

MI
(4)

CI
(2)

MR
(4)

PC
(1)

CSCH/CDCH
(DL)

MI
(4)

CI
(2)

MR
(4)

SD
(2)

PC
(1)

CSCH/CDCH
(UL)

MI
(4)

CI
(2)

MR
(4)

PC
(1)

ACK
(1)

Reserved(7)

Reserved
(9)

ACK
(1)

Reserved(6)

Reserved(8)

MAC Frame(ACCH+TCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(ACCH+TCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(CDCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(CDCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)Figure 4.64 ICH PHY Frame Format for protocol version 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

299

SignalSymbolData Symbol
ANCH/ICCH
(DL)

AMI
(4)

CI
(2)

SD
(2)

APC
(1)

Reserved(7)

ANCH/ICCH
(UL)

AMI
(4)

CI
(2)

APC
(1)

AMR
(4)

ANCH/ECCH
(DL)

AMI
(4)

CI SD APC PC HC AMR MT(2) (2) (1)(1) (4) (2)MIMR

ANCH/ECCH
(UL)

AMI
(4)

CI APC PC(2) (1) (1)MR

SI SR RCH
(2) (2) (7)

AMR
(4)

HC AMR MT(1) (4) (2)

MI

EMI
(8)

SI SR BI(2) (2) (2)

CRC
(16)

TAIL
(6)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(ICCH)

Reserved(1)

EXCH/EDCH(UL/DL)
EXCH/EDCH(UL/DL)for EMB-MIMO

MAC Frame(ICCH)

MAP, ACK, V,
Reserved

CRC TAIL(16) (6)

MAP, ACK, V,
Reserved

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(EDCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)MAC Frame(EDCH)

CRC TAIL(16) (6)Figure 4.65 ICH PHY Frame Format for protocol version 2

4.5 MAC Layer Structure and Frame Format
4.5.1 Overview
4.5.1.1 Format Regulations
Figure 4.66 shows basic format regulations used for in this specification. The bit in single octet ishorizontally aligned, and numbered from 1 to 8. Multiple octets are vertically aligned, and thenumbered is put from 1 to n.
Bit 8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1
Octet 1
Octet 2:Octet nFigure 4.66 Format Regulations

A-GN4.00-03-TS

300

The transmission is started from Bit 8 in Octet 1.
The format shown in Figure 4.67 is used when the list of a specific information types is inapplication. The bit row that shows each information is horizontally aligned.
Information Name
Bit 8 7 6 5 4

3 2

1

Figure 4.67 Format that shows List of Information TypeThe format shown in Table 4.45 is used to explain the meaning of an individual bit. The meaningof the specific bit of 0 or 1 is tabulated and shown.
Table 4.45 Format for Explanation of Bit
Bit 1
0
1

4.5.1.2 MAC Frame Composition
Figure 4.68 shows the outline of MAC frame composition procedure. The figure gives an example
of data transmission. Firstly, as much as possible upper layer data are combined. The data length,referred to as Ln, indicates each combined data when combination is performed. On the other
hand, upper layer data exceeding PHY data unit size is fragmented. Then, sequence number N,
which identifies each data transmission unit, is added. Finally, MAC header is to the MAC frames.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

301

UpperLayer Data

Ln
NInternal Data
Unit

Upper
Layer Data Combining
Upper
Layer Data

Upper
Layer Data

Put into PHY Data
Unit.
MAC
PayloadSegmentation
Add MAC Header

MAC
Frame

Figure 4.68 Procedure to Construct MAC FrameAt the reception side, upper layer data is reconstructed according to the MAC header.
4.5.2 MAC Frame Format

MAC Header

L

MAC
Frame

B
CD
MD
QI
N

Figure 4.69 shows a general MAC frame structure and the order of bits and octets in the MAC
frame. The MAC payload ends in byte boundary. The fraction bit of the PHY payload is PAD bit.
PAD bits are from 0 bit to 7 bits. PAD is filled by 0. Transmission and reception are carried out
from the upper bit. The first transmission and reception begin from the Octet 1.
Upper Layer Data or MAC Control
Information

PAD

MAC Payload

Figure 4.69 A General MAC Frame Structure (Included MAC Header)According to the order of bits and octets that is described above, MAC frame composition isshown in Figure 4.70. Refer to Section 0 for detail.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

302

Bit

8
B

7

6
CD

5

4

3

MD/F

E
E

2

1

QI

Octet 1

N(MSB)

Octet 1aN(LSB)

Octet 1b

L/IX (MSB)

Octet 2

L/IX (LSB)
E

Octet 2aIX (MSB)

Octet 3IX (LSB)

Octet 3aUpper Layer Data, MAC Control Information

Octet 4…

Figure 4.70 Bit Order in MAC Frame

4.5.2.1 MAC Frame Structure
4.5.2.1.1 ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
Figure 4.71 shows the configuration of ICCH, EDCH, and CDCH. They contain a MAC header
and MAC payloads.
ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
MAC Header

MAC Payload

Figure 4.71 Configuration of ICCH, EDCH and CDCH
4.5.2.1.2 TCH
Figure 4.72 shows the configuration of TCH. TCH does not have a MAC header but contains
voice data.
TCH
Voice Data

Reserved

Figure 4.72 Configuration of TCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS303

4.5.2.1.3 ACCH
ACCH is an accompanying channel. Control messages on ACCH can be transmitted with user
traffic simultaneously.
4.5.2.1.3.1 Frame Structure
Figure 4.73 shows the control message of ACCH, and its relation with Layer 2 frame.
Control Message

Layer 2 Frame

Data

8

…

24

8

24

1 ACCH…
Unit: Bits

Figure 4.73 Relation between Control Message and Layer 2 Frame

4.5.2.1.3.2 ACCH Layer 2 Frame Signal Structure
8

7

6

Reserved

E

5

4

C

3

2

RIL

1
IL

Octet 1N

Octet 1a (C=1)

Information Field (Control Message)

Octet 2 (C=0)

MSB

Data Length 1
Data Length 2

Information Field (Control Message)

Octet 2 (C=1, IL=1x)
LSB

Octet 2a (C=1, IL=1x)
Octet 3Octet 4

Figure 4.74 Layer 2 Frame Signal Structure of ACCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

304



Information Link Bit (IL)BitDescription

2

1

0

0

Middle Frame

0

1

End Frame

1

0

Leading Frame

1

1

Undivided Frame

Remaining Information Length Indication Bit (RIL)
Bit

Description

4

3

0

0

Control Message length is no octet.(No message)

0

1

Control Message length is one octet.

10Control Message length is two octets.

1

1

Control Message length is three octets.

Control Message Bit (C)Bit

Description0

It indicates that the MAC payload is unnumberedcontrol information.

1

It indicates that the MAC payload is numberedcontrol information.

 Sequence Number (N)When C=1, Sequence Number (N) is appended as Octet 1a. Following figure shows information
element N.
Bit 8

7

6

5

4
N

3

2

1
Octet 1aA-GN4.00-03-TS305

 Data Length
When IL=1x and C=1, Data Length is appended as Octet 2. Data Length field indicates MAC
payload data length. It is shown by a byte unit. It can be expanded by using extension bit (E)depending on the value. Following figure shows information element Data Length. The bit E=0 if
the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and thesecond octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described 7 bits. In this case, twooctets (15 bits) is used. Octet 2 shows upper 7 bits and Octet 2a shows lower 8 bits.
Bit 8
E

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Data Length 1

MSB

Octet 2

Data Length 2

LSB

Octet 2a Information Field
The message transferred on ACCH is considered QCS-ID=1.
When C=0, the message is stored in Octet 2~4. (3 Octets)
Bit 8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Information Field

Octet 2

Information Field

Octet 3

Information Field

Octet 4

Otherwise, the message is stored in Octet 3~4. (2 Octets)
Bit 8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Information Field

Octet 3

Information Field

Octet 4

A-GN4.00-03-TS

306

4.5.2.2 MAC Header
There are four basic types of different MAC frame headers as shown below:
Header of the MAC frame which carries,
1. the first segment of the segmented (Refer to Section 4.5.3.1) data, or the unsegmented data.
That is when B=1, and CD=x1. The case of combining (Refer to Section 4.5.3.3) is includedin this type. (Refer to Figure 4.75).
2. the second or later segment of the segmented data, and its MAC frame length is the sameas PHY payload length. That is when B=0, F=1, and CD=x1. (Refer to Figure 4.76).
3. the second or later segment of the segmented data, and its MAC frame length is shorter
than the PHY payload length. That is when B=0, F=0, and CD=x1. (Refer to Figure 4.77).
4. unnumbered control information. That is when B=1 and CD=00. (Refer to Figure 4.78).
Details of each element in these figures are described in Section 4.5.2.2.1.
MAC Header
B

CD MD QIN

MAC Payload
L

DATA
L

Figure 4.75 MAC Frame Format (1)MAC Header
B

CD

F

QI

N

MAC Payload
IX

DATA

Figure 4.76 MAC Frame Format (2)PHY Payload Length
MAC Header
B

CD

F

QI

N

MAC Payload
L

IX

DATA

Figure 4.77 MAC Frame Format (3)A-GN4.00-03-TS

307

PHY Payload Length
MAC Header
B

CD

MD

MAC Payload
L

QI

DATA
L

Figure 4.78 MAC Frame Format (4)Table 4.46 shows the list of the information element included in the header of the MAC frame.
Table 4.46 Information Element List in MAC Header
Information
Element
Name
Frame
Division

Sign

B

Information
Length1 bit

Explanation
It indicates the first frame of the set of divided
segments or the frame of the second segments orInformation

later.

Identifier
Control
Information
or DataCD

2 bitsIt identifies control information or data. It stands forthe control information when the field is 00 or 01.
It stands for the data when the field is 11.
CD is referred by the MAC frame in case when B=1.
CD does not have specific meaning in case when
B=0.

Data Part
SharingMD

1 bit

It indicates that the MAC payload contains single user
data or multiple user data.

Identifier of
the Payload
LengthF

1 bit

It indicates that the data part length L equals to MAC
payload length.

QCS-ID

QI

4 bits

It indicates the QCS-ID.

Sequence
NumberN

8 or 16 bits

It indicates the sequence number.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

308

Information
Element
Name

Index

Data Part
LengthData Lengthof User
Information
Area

Sign

IX

Information
LengthExplanation

8 or 16 bits

It indicates the number of bytes of upper layer datathat has already been sent in the earlier MAC frames.
Basically, it indicates the location of the upper layer
data that the MAC payload is filled up.

L

8 or 16 bitsLn

8 or 16 bits

DATA

It indicates data length contained in the MAC payload
in case when MD=0.
It indicates the total number of data lengths containedin the MAC payload in case when MD=1.
It indicates each length of multiple user data when
MD=1.
Upper layer data is included in the MAC payload.

4.5.2.2.1 Each Field of MAC Header
4.5.2.2.1.1 Frame Division Information (B)B field shows the first frame in data transmission by dividing upper layer data into two or more
MAC frames. It is used to restructure the divided transmission data.
Table 4.47 Frame Division Information
Bit 1
0

The second frame or later when the upper
layer data is divided.

1

The first frame when the upper layer data is
divided or undivided frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS309

4.5.2.2.1.2 Data Type (CD)CD field indicates whether the control information or upper layer data is included in the MAC
payload. CD is referred by the MAC frame in case when B=1. CD is invalid and shall be set zeroin case when B=0.
Table 4.48 Data TypeBit

Identification

2

1

0

0

It indicates that the MAC payload is unnumbered control information.

0

1

It indicates that the MAC payload is numbered control information.

1

0

Reserved1

1

It indicates that the MAC payload is upper layer data.

4.5.2.2.1.3 Data Part Sharing (MD)An identifier shows whether the MAC payload is shared by multiple upper layer data. Table 4.49
shows the definition of the MD field.
This information element is omitted when B=0.
Table 4.49 Data Part Sharing
Bit 1
0Single upper layer data is included in a MAC payload.

1

Multiple upper layer data are included in a MAC payload.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

310

4.5.2.2.1.4 Bit of Payload Length Identification (F)An identifier indicates whether the MAC payload length is specified by L field or not, because the
MAC frame length is the same as the PHY payload length. The bit definition of F field is as shownin Table 4.50.
This information element is omitted when B=1.
Table 4.50 Bit of Payload Surplus Judgment
Bit 1
0

The MAC payload is specified by L field.

1

Because PHY payload length is the same as
the MAC frame length, the length of the MAC
payload is not specified by L field.

4.5.2.2.1.5 QCS-ID (QI)
This number identifies the quality service sessions. QCS-ID is assigned for every session andmanaged between MS and BS. The length of this field is 4 bits. When control information which
does not distinguish QCS is used, this value is set to 0 (QCS-ID=1). Otherwise it is set to any of
the number from 1 to 15 to specify each QCS.
4.5.2.2.1.6 Sequence Number (N)This is a series of continuous numbers to identify the data. N is supervised for each user andincremented by upper layer data unit or PHY data unit (CRC unit) for each QCS.
The area of index can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit
E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In thiscase, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 1b shows lower 8 bits.
Increment Timing
1. In case of combining (Refer to Section 4.5.3.3), N is incremented by PHY data unit.
2. In case of segmentation (Refer to Section 0), N is incremented by upper layer data unit.
3. In case of concatenation (Refer to Section 4.5.3.4), N is incremented by upper layer
data unit.
4. In other cases than combining segmentation or concatenation, N is incremented by
PHY data unit (= upper layer data unit).

A-GN4.00-03-TS

311

Table 4.51 Relation CD Field and Sequence Number
CD Field

Sequence Number

Unnumbered Control Information

It is no sequence number.
Octet 1a and 1b are omitted.

Numbered Control Information
Upper Layer Data

Sequence number is 7 or 15 bits.
Octet 1a and 1b are used.

4.5.2.2.1.7 Index (IX)
IX shows the numbers of the sent bytes from the beginning of the upper layer data. It also
indicates the position of the upper layer data that this MAC payload is filled up.
The area of index can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. Figure4.79 shows information element IX, The bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In thiscase, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value
cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1 shows upper 7
bits and Octet 2 shows lower 8 bits.
This information element is omitted when B=1.
Bit 8

7

6

E

5

4

3

2

1

INDEX 1INDEX 2Octet 1
Octet 2

Figure 4.79 Format of Index Field

Table 4.52 Explanation of the Extension Bit of Octet 1
Bit 80

Octet 2 (INDEX 2) is omitted.

1

Octet 2 (INDEX 2) is used.

4.5.2.2.1.8 Data Part Length (L)L field indicates data length contained in the MAC payload when MD=0. It indicates the total
number of data lengths contained in the MAC payload when MD=1. The data part length is shownby a byte unit.
The area of data part length can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value.
Figure 4.80 shows information element L. The bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

312

In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if thevalue cannot be described 7 bits. In this case, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 1 shows upper 7
bits and Octet 2 shows lower 8 bits.
This information element is omitted when F=1.
Bit 8

7

6

E

5

4

3

2

Data Length 1
Data Length 2

1
Octet 1
Octet 2

Figure 4.80 Data Part Length / User Data Length

Table 4.53 Explanation of the Extension Bit of Octet 1
Bit 80

Octet 2 (data length 2) is omitted.

1

Octet 2 (data length 2) is used.

4.5.2.2.1.9 User Data Length (Ln)
When one MAC payload includes upper layer data for multiple upper layer data, this information
element shows each upper layer data length. The format of the element uses the same data part
length. Refer to Figure 4.80 and Table 4.53. This information element is omitted when MD=0.
4.5.2.2.1.10 Information Area (DATA)This is the dedicated data area for the MAC frame. It includes upper layer data, MAC control
protocol and access establishment phase control protocol information.
4.5.2.3 MAC Payload
There are two types of MAC payload as shown below:
 Upper Layer Data
 MAC Control Information
4.5.2.3.1 Upper Layer Data
When CD field in MAC header is upper layer data, upper layer data is included in MAC payload.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

313

4.5.2.3.2 MAC Control Information
When CD field in MAC header is either unnumbered MAC control information or numbered MAC
control information, MAC control information is included in MAC payload.
Satisfying following conditions, leading 2 bytes of upper layer data indicates network layer
protocol type.
(1) CD=01 (Numbered Control Information)(2) QI is other than zero
When an upper layer data is segmented (Refer to section 4.5.3.1), the protocol type is only put on
the first segment (Figure 4.81). This protocol type is a part of encrypted region.

Upper Layer Data

Protocol type

Upper Layer Data

Upper Layer Data
24

Leading Segment
MAC header

Protocol type

Upper Layer Data

MAC frame
Figure 4.81 Relation between MAC Frame and Upper Layer Data with Protocol Type4.5.3 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation
4.5.3.1 Upper Layer Data Segmentation
Figure 4.82 shows the example, when the upper layer data which has data length of L bytes issegmented. In this example, the length of the last segment of the data segments is shorter than
the PHY payload. At the reception side, data is reconstructed based on the information of L andIX.
The segmented data can be transmitted by not only single TDMA frame but also multiple TDMA
frames.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

314

L byte

IX

DATA
2/n

B=0
CD
F=1
QI
N

IX

L

DATA
1/n

B=0
CD
F=1
QI
N

B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N

Data from Upper
Layer

IX

Ln

B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N




DATA
n/n

Figure 4.82 MAC Frame Segmentation

4.5.3.2 MAC Frame Segmentation in case of Retransmission
If the same bandwidth to precede retransmission cannot be allocated, this MAC frame will besegmented into multiple segments according to the allocated bandwidth for retransmission. N and
MD of the retransmitted MAC frame use the same N and MD of the original MAC frame in the first
segment. In the following segment(s), N will be the same and B will be set to 0.
Figure 4.83 shows the example of MAC retransmitting frame which is divided into two segments.
In this example, frame length of the first segment of the MAC frame is the same as the PHY
payload length. The length of the next segment of the MAC frame is shorter than the PHY
payload length.
In case of Figure 4.83, the length of the second segmented frame is shorter than the PHY
payload length, where F=0. IX shows the number of the data has already been sent from thehead of the MAC payload to be retransmitted. IX=L0 as shown in Figure 4.83 displays that MAC
header is created by using the same rule, when the number of segmentation increases.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

315

DATA

L

MAC Frame(Transmission Failed)

B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N

L byteDATA 1L

MAC Frame 1(Retransmission)

B=1
CD
MD=0
QI
N

L0 byte

IX =
L0

L‟

MAC Frame 2(Retransmission)

B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N

L‟ = L – L0 byte
DATA 2

Figure 4.83 Data with MD=0 segmented in case of Retransmission

4.5.3.3 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload
Data length (L1, L2…) of each data is added respectively when MD=1 as shown in Figure 4.84
when multiple upper layer data shares one MAC payload. L is the sum of data length with all datan

included. L=  L x in this case.
x 1n

The format L   Lx will be applied when transmission carries forward to the N-th data.
x 1L‟ = L1 + L2 + L3 + ……. + Ln byte
L2 byte

B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N
L

L1 byte
L1

DATA
1

L2

DATA
2

Ln byte


Ln

DATA
n

Figure 4.84 Combining Multiple Upper Layer Data into Single MAC Payload
When retransmission is performed, if the same bandwidth as preceding transmission cannot beallocated, this MAC frame will be segmented into multiple segments according to the allocatedbandwidth for retransmission. Same N and MD of the MAC frame to be retransmitted will be used

A-GN4.00-03-TS

316

(Transmission Failed)L

MAC Frame

B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N

in the first segment. And N will be the same in the following segment and B will be 0.
Figure 4.85 shows the example of retransmitting MAC frame containing multiple upper layer data
divided into two segments. In this example, frame length of the first segment of the MAC frame isthe same as the PHY payload length. Length of the second segment of the MAC frame is shorter
than the PHY payload length.
In case of Figure 4.85, length of the second segmented frame is defined to be shorter than the
PHY payload length. Hence, F=0. IX shows the number of data sent from the head of the MAC
payload to be retransmitted. IX=L‟ as shown in Figure 4.85. MAC header is created using thesame rule when the number of segmentation increases.
This feature is negotiated in information element Communication Parameter and MS
Performance.

L1

L = L1 + L2 + L3
byte
DATA [byte]
L2 DATA
1

L3

2

DATA
3

L2 DATA2

L‟‟ = L – L‟
byte
L3
2

DATA

IX=L‟

DATA
1

L‟‟

Segmented MAC Frame 2(Retransmission)

L1

B=0
CD
F=0
QI
N

L

Segmented MAC
Frame 1
(Retransmission)

B=1
CD
MD=1
QI
N

L‟ = L1 + L2„ byte

DATA
3

Figure 4.85 Data with MD=1 segmented in case of Retransmission

4.5.3.4 MAC Frame Concatenation
MAC frame concatenation is permitted with the following conditions. MAC frame concatenation
here stands for multiple MAC frame to be included in a PHY data unit. Subsequent 24bits of lastconcatenated MAC frame are set to all 0. Satisfying following conditions, further MAC frame canbe concatenated.


PHY Payload Length – Current total MAC Frame Length  4 bytes
Twenty-four leading bits of trailing MAC frame is not all zero.

Figure 4.86 shows an example when MAC frames are concatenated in a PHY payload. In the

A-GN4.00-03-TS

317

example, 55 bytes upper layer data is followed by 150 bytes data. In a TDMA frame, PHY data
unit can transmit 43 bytes data when MCS is BPSK-1/2. In first TDMA frame, 40 bytes
segmented data can be transmitted. Then transmission of the rest of 15 bytes segmented data
will be continued to next TDMA frame.
In the next TDMA frame, 24 bytes data can be transmitted in addition to the rest of 15 bytes
segmented data, due to the fact that the difference between PHY payload length and first MAC
frame length is bigger than 4 bytes. Other conditions are satisfied in the sample case.
Data

Data

Data

40 bytes

15 bytes

150 bytes

Upper Layer Data

43 bytes
MAC Frame 1

B=1

CD=11

MD=0

QI

N=1

L=55

DATA
40 bytes

43 bytes
MAC Frame 2

B=0

CD=11

F=0

QI

4 bytes

N=1

L=15 IX=40 DATA
15byte

B=1

CD=11 MD=0 QI

N=2

L=150

3 bytesDATA
21 byteFigure 4.86 Example of MAC Frame Concatenation

4.5.4 Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation
The Segmentation, Combining and Concatenation function is handled in MSL2.
Figure 4.87 below depicts the MSL2 PDU structure where:
The PDU sequence number carried by the MSL2 header is independent of the SDU
sequence number (i.e. MAC-sublayer3 sequence number);
A red dotted line indicates the occurrence of segmentation;-

Because segmentation only occurs when needed and concatenation is done insequence, the content of an MSL2 PDU can generally be described by the following
relations:- {0; 1} last segment of SDUi + [0; n] complete SDUs + {0; 1} first segment of SDUi+n+1 ;or- 1 segment of SDUi .

A-GN4.00-03-TS

318

MSL2 SDU

n

n+1

n+2

n+3

...

...

MSL2
headerMSL2
header

MSL2 PDU

Figure 4.87: MSL2 PDU Structure

4.5.5 MAC Control Layer
The relationship among the MAC control information, MAC frame and the PHY frame is shown in
Figure 4.88. At the beginning of the MAC payload, protocol identifier and the message type areincluded. The other control information can be added in the remaining fields.
PHY Frame

PHY Header

MAC FrameBCD

PHY Payload

MD

QI

N

CRC

L

Message
Type

ProtocolIdentifier

MAC Header

Bit

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

TAIL

Control Data Field

MAC Payload

1

Bit

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

Figure 4.88 Relation among MAC Control Information, MAC Frame and PHY Frame
The MAC control and the access establishment phase control are performed by exchanging themessages in the MAC frame, which are described in this chapter. MAC control messages always
include the protocol identifier and the message type. Other information elements can be added intime of need. Table 4.54 shows the protocol identifier that is used in the MAC layer.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

319

Table 4.54 Protocol Identifier
Control Type

Protocol Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

1

MAC Control

0 0 0 0 0

0 0

1

Access Establishment Phase Control

0 0 0 0 0

0 1

04.5.5.1 MAC Control Protocol
MAC control signals are defined in this section. The state of the reception side is informed totransmission side by transmitting the message described in this section.
The message provides MAC control signal in this paragraph. Because it is control information,
CD of the MAC header is 00 or 01. Table 4.55 shows the list of the MAC control protocol
messages.
Table 4.55 MAC Control Protocol Message List
Message Name

Message TypeBit 8 7 6 5 4

3 2

1

RR

P 0 0 0 0

0 0

1

RNR

P 0 0 0 0

0 1

0

SREJ

0 0 0 0 0

1 0

1

REJ

0 0 0 0 0

1 1

1

FRMR

0 0 0 0 0

1 0

0

4.5.5.1.1 Receive Ready (RR)
This message is used for reception confirmation of the received data and for the reception side toreceive new data. This message includes sequence number N(R) that is to be received as N+1.
Sequence number N(S), which indicates a sequence number that is to be sent, may be added to
RR. When message length is between 4 to 6 octets, it includes N(S).
Both of N(R) and N(S) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The
bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In thiscase, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 3a and 4a show upper 7 bits and Octet 3b and 4b show
lower 8 bits.
RR has P (Poll) bit in its second octet. When transmission side requests RR to reception side asa reception confirmation, P=1 must be set. RR with P=1 should not be sent until RR with P=0
reception or T1 timer timeout. See section 4.5.5.2.3.1 for more details.
Figure 4.89 shows the RR message format.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

320

Bit

8
0
P
E

7

6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: RR
0
0
0
0
0
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)

E

Sequence Number N(S) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(S) (LSB)111

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3aOctet 3bOctet 4aOctet 4b

Figure 4.89 RR Message Format

4.5.5.1.2 Receive Not Ready (RNR)
When the reception side cannot receive any data temporarily, then the reception side will informthe following message. It is impossible to receive any data by using this message. Sequencenumber N(R), which indicates a sequence number that is to be received, should be added to
RNR. When message length is Between 4 to 6 octets, it includes N(S).
Both of N(R) and N(S) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The
bit E=0 if the value can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used,
and the second octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In thiscase, two octets (15 bits) is used. Octet 3a and 4a show upper 7 bits and Octet 3b and 4b show
lower 8 bits.
RNR has P (Poll) bit in its second octet. RNR with P=1 is sent when a node which is in busy state
confirms if RNR has reached to opposite node or not. Figure 4.90 shows the RNR message
format.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
Octet 1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
Message Type: RNR
Octet 2
P
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
E
Octet 3aSequence Number N(R) (LSB)
E

Sequence Number N(S) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(S) (LSB)

Octet 3bOctet 4aOctet 4b

Figure 4.90 RNR Message Format

A-GN4.00-03-TS

321

4.5.5.1.3 Frame Reject (FRMR)
Reception side notifies that the received frame is rejected because the reception side cannot
receive the expected data. Figure 4.91 shows the FRMR message. Table 4.56 shows the list of
rejected reasons.
Bit

8
0
0

7

6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: FRMR
0
0
0
0
1
0
Reject Reason1
1
0

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3Figure 4.91 FRMR Message Format

Table 4.56 Reject Reason List
Reject Reason

Reject Reason Field
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2

1

Undefined Protocol Identifier0 0 0 0 0

0 0

1

Undefined Message Type0 0 0 0 0

0 1

0

Undefined CD Field

0 0 0 0 0

0 1

1Incorrect Data Part Length(L)0 0 0 0 0

1 0

0Incorrect Index(IX)

0 0 0 0 0

1 0

1Incorrect Sequence Number(N)0 0 0 0 0

1 1

0Over the limit of retransmission times

0 0 0 0 0

1 1

1Other Error

1 1 1 1 1

1 1

1

4.5.5.1.4 Selective Reject (SREJ)SREJ message is sent when retransmission is requested to specify the sequence number. Figure
4.92 shows the SREJ message.
N(R) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit E=0 if the value
can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second
octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets(15 bits) is used. Octet 3a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 3b shows lower 8 bits.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

322

Bit

8
0
0
E

7

6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: SREJ
0
0
0
0
1
0
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)11
1

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3aSequence Number N(R) (LSB)

Octet 3b

Figure 4.92 SREJ Message Format

4.5.5.1.5 Reject (REJ)
This message is used to request the retransmission for the specified frame and the following
frames after specified sequence number. Figure 4.93 shows the REJ message.
N(R) can be expanded by using extension bit (E) depending on the value. The bit E=0 if the value
can be described within 7 bits. In this case, only the first octet (7 bits) is used, and the second
octet is omitted. The bit E=1 if the value cannot be described within 7 bits. In this case, two octets(15 bits) is used. Octet 3a shows upper 7 bits and Octet 3b shows lower 8 bits.
Bit

8
0
0
E

7

6
5
4
3
2
Protocol Identifier: MAC Control Protocol
0
0
0
0
0
0
Message Type: REJ
0
0
0
0
1
1
Sequence Number N(R) (MSB)
Sequence Number N(R) (LSB)111

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3aOctet 3b

Figure 4.93 REJ Message Format

4.5.5.2 Control Operation Elements
4.5.5.2.1 Poll bit
RR and RNR have a poll bit (called “P bit”). The P bit provides the following function. P bit set at“1” is used by the data link layer entity to poll the response frame from its peer‟s data link layer
entity.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

323

4.5.5.2.2 Variables
4.5.5.2.2.1 The range of a sequence number and variable
The range of a sequence number and variable described in this section is from 0 to 32767. The
value wraps around within this range. Because sequence number N field in MAC header length is
15 bits including expanded octet, a maximum sequence number is a modulo value of 32768.
4.5.5.2.2.2 Send state variable V(S)
Data link layer entity has a send state variable V(S). V(S) indicates the sequence number thatshould be transmitted next. V(S) is increased by one for each numbered frame transmission.
However, V(S) must not exceed the value of adding the maximum number of window size toV(A).
4.5.5.2.2.3 Acknowledge state variable V(A)
Data link layer entity has an acknowledge state variable V(A). V(A) indicates the sequencenumber that should be acknowledged next by its peer. (V(A)-1 is equal to N(S) of the numberedframe acknowledged last.) The value of V(A) is updated by the correct N(R) value acknowledgedby the RR/RNR frame transmitted from its peer. The correct N(R) value is in the range ofV(A)≤N(R)≤V(S).
4.5.5.2.2.4 Send sequence number N(S)
Numbered frame have a send sequence number, N(S) indicates the sequence number oftransmitted frame. N(S) is set to V(S) prior to transmission of numbered frame(s).
4.5.5.2.2.5 Receive state variable V(R)The data link layer entity has a receive state variable V(R). V(R) indicates the sequence numberof the numbered frame that should be received next. V(R) is set at the newest sequence number
added by 1 which can be continuously received by starting from current V(R).
4.5.5.2.2.6 Receive sequence number N(R)RR/RNR frames have receive sequence numbers for data frames that should be received next.
Prior to RR/RNR frame transmission, N(R) is set so that it becomes equal to the newest V(R).
N(R) indicates the data link layer entity which sent such N(R) correctly received all data frames
having numbers up to N(R)-1.
4.5.5.2.3 Timers
4.5.5.2.3.1 Response acknowledge timer T1
T1 timer starts when RR/RNR frame with P=1 was received, and stops when receiving its

A-GN4.00-03-TS324

response frame or REJ/SREJ frame. When the data link layer entity detects T1 timer‟s time-out
retry out, it sends FRMR frame.
4.5.5.2.3.2 Response transfer timer T2
T2 timer is used to delay sending RR/RNR frame for receiving normal numbered frame. When T2
timer stopped and the data link layer entity receives numbered frame, it starts T2 timer. When T2
timer expires, the data link layer entity sends RR/RNR response frame with P=0. When T2 timer
is active, although it receives numbered frame, T2 timer goes on. When it receives command
frame with P=1, T2 timer is stopped.
4.5.5.2.3.3 Peer station busy supervisory timer T3
T3 is the timer to supervise the busy state of opposite side. When the data link layer entity
receives RNR frame, T3 timer is started. When T3 timer expires, the data link layer entity send
RR/RNR frame in order to check peer state. While T3 timer is in active, if the data link layer entity
receives RNR frame then restarts T3 timer, if it receives RR frame then stops T3 timer.
4.5.5.2.3.4 Link alive check timer T4
Satisfying one or more following conditions, the data link layer entity starts T4 timer.
- No data to send
- Outstanding- My station is busy and outstanding- Receive RR/REJ/SREJ when the data link layer entity has no data to send
Satisfying one or more following conditions, the data link layer entity stops T4 timer.
- V(S) equals to N(R) in received RR frame- Receive newer numbered frame except for retransmission- Start T3 timer
When T4 time out occurs, the data link layer entity sends RR/RNR frames.
When the data link layer entity detects T4 timer‟s time-out retry out, it sends FRMR frame.
4.5.5.3 Access Establishment Phase Control Protocol
Refer to Chapter 7.
4.6 Optional MAC Layer Structure and sub-layer
4.6.1 Overview
MAC layer is composed of sublaye 1, sublaye 2 and sublaye 3.
4.6.2 MAC sub-layer1 (MSL1)
The main services and functions of the MSL1 include:

A-GN4.00-03-TS

325

-

-

Mapping between function channels and transport channels;
Multiplexing/demultiplexing of MSL1 SDUs belonging to one or different function
channels into/from transport blocks (TB) delivered to/from the physical layer ontransport channels;
scheduling information reporting;Error correction through HARQ;
Priority handling between function channels of one MS;
Priority handling between MSs by means of dynamic scheduling;
Transport format selection;-

Padding.

A MSL1 consists of a MSL1 header, zero or more MSL1 Service Data Units (MSL1 SDU), zero,or more MSL1 control elements, and optionally padding.
A MSL1 PDU header consists of one or more MSL1 PDU subheaders; each subheader
corresponds to either a MSL1 SDU, a MSL1 control element or padding.
A MSL1 PDU subheader consists of the six header fields R/R/E/FCID/F/L but for the lastsubheader in the MSL1 PDU and for fixed sized MSL1 control elements. The last subheader inthe MSL1 PDU and subheaders for fixed sized MSL1 control elements consist solely of the four
header fields R/R/E/FCID. A MSL1 PDU subheader corresponding to padding consists of the four
header fields R/R/E/FCID.

R
F

R

E

FCID
L

Oct 1

R

Oct 2

F

R

E

FCID
L

Oct 2

L

R/R/E/FCID/F/L sub-header with
7-bits L field

Oct 1

Oct 3

R/R/E/FCID/F/L sub-header with
15-bits L field

Figure 4.94: R/R/E/FCID/F/L MSL1 subheader

R

R

E

FCID

Oct 1

R/R/E/FCID sub-header

Figure 4.95: R/R/E/FCID MSL1 subheader
The MSL1 header consists of the following fields:
A-GN4.00-03-TS

326

-

-

-

FCID: The function Channel ID field identifies the function channel instance of thecorresponding MSL1 SDU or the type of the corresponding MSL1 control element or
padding.
L: The Length field indicates the length of the corresponding MSL1 SDU.The size of the
L field is indicated by the F field;
F: The Format field indicates the size of the Length field as indicated in Table 4.59. The
size of the F field is 1 bit. If the size of the MSL1 SDU is less than 128 bytes, the valueof the F field is set to 0, otherwise it is set to 1;
E: The Extension field is a flag indicating if more fields are present in the MSL1 header

or not. The E field is set to "1" to indicate another set of at least R/R/E/FCID fields. The
E field is set to "0" to indicate that either a MSL1 SDU, a MSL1 control element or
padding starts at the next byte;
R: Reserved bit, set to "0".
The MSL1 header and subheaders are octet aligned.
Table 4.57 Values of FCID for ADSCH
Index

FCID Values

00000

ACCCH

00001-01010

Identity of the function channel

01011-11011

Reserved

11111

Padding

Table 4.58 Values of FCID for AUSCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

327

IndexFCID Values

00000

ACCCH

00001-01010

Identity of the function channel

01011-11001

Reserved

11010

Advanced Transmission Power
Margin Notification Report

11011

C-MSID

11100

Truncated UL Data Size
Notification

11101

Short UL Data Size Notification

11110

Long UL Data Size Notification

11111

Padding

Table 4.59 Values of F field:
Index

Size of Length field (in bits)

0

7

1

15

4.6.3 MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2)
MSL2 includs three kinds PDU, TMD PDU, UMD PDU and AMD PDU.
The main services and functions of the MSL2 include:

A-GN4.00-03-TS

328

-

Transfer of upper layer PDUs;
Error Correction through ARQ (only for AM data transfer);
Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of MSL2 SDUs (only for UM and AM datatransfer);
Re-segmentation of MSL2 data PDUs (only for AM data transfer);
Reordering of MSL2data PDUs (only for UM and AM data transfer);
Duplicate detection (only for UM and AM data transfer);Protocol error detection (only for AM data transfer);
MSL2 SDU discard (only for UM and AM data transfer);

4.6.3.1 TMD PDU
TMD PDU consists only of a Data field and does not consist of any MSL2 headers.
4.6.3.2 UMD PDU
UMD PDU consists of a Data field and an UMD PDU header.
UMD PDU header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every UMD PDU) and an
extension part (fields that are present for an UMD PDU when necessary). The fixed part of the
UMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of a FI, an E and a SN. The extension part of
the UMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An UM MSL2 entity is configured by high layer to use either a 5 bit SN or a 10 bit SN. When the 5
bit SN is configured, the length of the fixed part of the UMD PDU header is one byte. When the
10 bit SN is configured, the fixed part of the UMD PDU header is identical to the fixed part of the
AMD PDU header, except for D/C, RF and P fields all being replaced with R1 fields. The
extension part of the UMD PDU header is identical to the extension part of the AMD PDU header(regardless of the configured SN size).
An UMD PDU header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field elements
are present in the UMD PDU, in which case an E and a LI are present for every Data field
element except the last. Furthermore, when an UMD PDU header consists of an odd number of
LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.

4.6.3.3 AMD PDU

A-GN4.00-03-TS

329

AMD PDU is a kind of PDU of MSL2 and consists of a Data field and an AMD PDU header.
AMD PDU header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every AMD PDU) and an
extension part (fields that are present for an AMD PDU when necessary). The fixed part of the
AMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of a D/C, a RF, a P, a FI, an E and a SN. The
extension part of the AMD PDU header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An AMD PDU header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field elements
are present in the AMD PDU, in which case an E and a LI are present for every Data field
element except the last. Furthermore, when an AMD PDU header consists of an odd number of
LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.

4.6.3.4 AMD PDU segment
AMD PDU segment consists of a Data field and an AMD PDU segment header.
AMD PDU segment header consists of a fixed part (fields that are present for every AMD PDU
segment) and an extension part (fields that are present for an AMD PDU segment whennecessary). The fixed part of the AMD PDU segment header itself is byte aligned and consists ofa D/C, a RF, a P, a FI, an E, a SN, a LSF and a SO. The extension part of the AMD PDU
segment header itself is byte aligned and consists of E(s) and LI(s).
An AMD PDU segment header consists of an extension part only when more than one Data field
elements are present in the AMD PDU segment, in which case an E and a LI are present forevery Data field element except the last. Furthermore, when an AMD PDU segment header
consists of an odd number of LI(s), four padding bits follow after the last LI.

4.6.3.5 State variables parameter and timers
All state variables and all counters are non-negative integers.
All state variables related to AM data transfer can take values from 0 to 1023.
The transmitting side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following state variables:a) VT(A) – Acknowledgement state variableThis state variable holds the value of the SN of the next AMD PDU for which a positive
acknowledgment is to be received in-sequence, and it serves as the lower edge of thetransmitting window. It is initially set to 0, and is updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity receives
a positive acknowledgment for an AMD PDU with SN = VT(A).
b) VT(MS) – Maximum send state variable
A-GN4.00-03-TS

330

This state variable equals VT(A) + AM_Window_Size, and it serves as the higher edge of thetransmitting window.
c) VT(S) – Send state variableThis state variable holds the value of the SN to be assigned for the next newly generated AMD
PDU. It is initially set to 0, and is updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity delivers an AMD PDU
with SN = VT(S).
d) POLL_SN – Poll send state variableThis state variable holds the value of VT(S)-1 upon the most recent transmission of a MSL2 data
PDU with the poll bit set to “1”. It is initially set to 0.
The transmitting side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following counters:a) PDU_WITHOUT_POLL – Counter
This counter is initially set to 0. It counts the number of AMD PDUs sent since the most recent
poll bit was transmitted.
b) BYTE_WITHOUT_POLL – Counter
This counter is initially set to 0. It counts the number of data bytes sent since the most recent poll
bit was transmitted.
c) RETX_COUNT – Counter
This counter counts the number of retransmissions of an AMD PDU (see subclause 5.2.1). Thereis one RETX_COUNT counter per PDU that needs to be retransmitted.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following state variables:a) VR(R) – Receive state variableThis state variable holds the value of the SN following the last in-sequence completely received
AMD PDU, and it serves as the lower edge of the receiving window. It is initially set to 0, and is
updated whenever the AM MSL2 entity receives an AMD PDU with SN = VR(R).
b) VR(MR) – Maximum acceptable receive state variableThis state variable equals VR(R) + AM_Window_Size, and it holds the value of the SN of the first
AMD PDU that is beyond the receiving window and serves as the higher edge of the receiving
window.
c) VR(X) – t-Reordering state variableThis state variable holds the value of the SN following the SN of the MSL2 data PDU which
triggered t-Reordering..
d) VR(MS) – Maximum STATUS transmit state variableThis state variable holds the highest possible value of the SN which can be indicated by“ACK_SN” when a STATUS PDU needs to be constructed. It is initially set to 0.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

331e) VR(H) – Highest received state variableThis state variable holds the value of the SN following the SN of the MSL2 data PDU with thehighest SN among received MSL2 data PDUs. It is initially set to 0.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following constant:a) AM_Window_Size
This constant is used by both the transmitting side and the receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity
to calculate VT(MS) from VT(A), and VR(MR) from VR(R). AM_Window_Size = 512.
The receiving side of each AM MSL2 entity shall maintain the following timers:a) t-PollRetransmit
This timer is used by the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity in order to retransmit a pollb) t-Reordering
This timer is used by the receiving side of an AM MSL2 entity and receiving UM MSL2 entity inorder to detect loss of MSL2 PDUs at lower layer. If t-Reordering is running, t-Reordering shallnot be started additionally, i.e. only one t-Reordering per MSL2 entity is running at a given time.
c) t-StatusProhibit
This timer is used by the receiving side of an AM MSL2 entity in order to prohibit transmission of
a STATUS PDU.
4.6.4 MAC sublayer 3 (MSL3)
4.6.4.1 Overview
This subclause provides an overview on services, functions and PDU structure provided by the
MSL 3 sublayer.
The main services and functions of the MSL 3 sublayer for the user plane include:- Header compression and decompression: ROHC only;- Transfer of user data;- In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs at MSL 3 re-establishment procedure for MSL 2 AM;- Duplicate detection of lower layer SDUs at MSL 3 re-establishment procedure for MSL 2 AM;- Retransmission of MSL 3 SDUs at handover for MSL 2 AM;- Ciphering and deciphering;- Timer-based SDU chuck in uplink.
The main services and functions of the MSL 3 for the control plane include:
A-GN4.00-03-TS

332

-

Ciphering and Integrity Protection;
Transfer of control plane data.

4.6.4.2 UL Data Transfer Procedures
At reception of a MSL 3 SDU from upper layers, the MS shall:- start the chuck Timer associated with this MSL 3 SDU (if configured);
For a MSL 3 SDU received from upper layers, the MS shall:- associate the MSL 3 SN corresponding to Next_MSL 3_TX_SN to this MSL 3 SDU;
- perform header compression of the MSL 3 SDU;
- perform integrity protection (if needed), and ciphering (if needed) using COUNT based on
TX_HFN and the MSL 3 SN associated with this MSL 3 SDU respectively;- increment Next_MSL 3_TX_SN by one;
- if Next_MSL 3_TX_SN > Maximum_MSL 3_SN:- set Next_MSL 3_TX_SN to 0;- increment TX_HFN by one;
- submit the resulting MSL 3 Data PDU to lower layer.
4.6.4.3 DL Data Transfer Procedures- chuck the MSL 3 Data PDUs that are received from lower layers due to the re-establishment of
the lower layers;- process the MSL 3 Data PDUs that are received from lower layers due to the re-establishmentof the lower layers, for both AM and UM;- reset the header compression protocol for downlink (if configured) , for both AM and UM;- set Next_ MSL 3_RX_SN, and RX_HFN to 0;- chuck all stored MSL 3 SDUs and MSL 3 PDUs;- apply the ciphering algorithm and key provided by upper layers during the re-establishment
procedure.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

333

Reception of a new
Data

Data out of
window ?

Window

Last

No

No
Yes
new SN >Next_RX_SN

Data in next loop?
No

Window

0

0

No
Yes
RX_HFN++;decipher with RX_HFN andnew SN;
Next_RX_SN = new SN+1

Yes

decipher with
RX_HFN - 1 andnew SN;

Last
Data in last loop?
Yes
decipher with
RX_HFN - 1 andnew SN;decipher with
RX_HFN andnew SN;

new SN <new SN ≥Next_RX_SN

Next_RX_SN

Yes
decipher with RX_HFN andnew SN;
Next_RX_SN = new SN+1;
If Next_RX_SN > Max_SN,
Next_RX_SN =0 ,RX_HFN++;decipher with
RX_HFN andnew SN;

perform header
decompression

perform header
decompression ;discard this SDU;
Yes

discard this SDU;

if the same SN isstored?

Nostore the SDU;
set Last_Submitted_RX_SN to the SN of the last
SDU delivered to upper layers

Data out of window : new SN – Last_Submitted_RX_SN > Reordering_Window or 0 <= Last_Submitted_RX_SN – new SN < Reordering_Window
Data in next loop：Next_RX_SN – new SN > Reordering_Window
Data in last loop：new SN - Next_RX_SN >= Reordering_Window

Figure 4.96 DL Data Transfer Procedures

4.6.4.4 MSL 3 chuck
When the chuckTimer expires for a MSL 3 SDU, or the successful delivery of a MSL 3 SDU is
confirmed by MSL 3 status report, the MS shall chuck the MSL 3 SDU along with thecorresponding MSL 3 PDU. If the corresponding MSL 3 PDU has already been submitted to lower
layers the chuck is indicated to lower layers.
4.6.4.5 Header Compression and Decompression
The header compression protocol is based on the Robust Header Compression (ROHC)
framework. There are multiple header compression algorithms, called profiles, defined for the
ROHC framework. Each profile is specific to the particular network layer, transport layer or upper
layer protocol combination e.g. TCP/IP and RTP/UDP/IP.
The detailed definition of the ROHC channel is specified as part of the ROHC framework. This
includes how to multiplex different flows (header compressed or not) over the ROHC channel, as
well as how to associate a specific IP flow with a specific context state during initialization of thecompression algorithm for that flow.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

334

4.6.4.6 Ciphering and Deciphering
The ciphering function includes both ciphering and deciphering and is performed in MSL 3. For
the control plane, the data unit that is ciphered is the data part of the MSL 3 PDU and the MAC-I.
For the user plane, the data unit that is ciphered is the data part of the MSL 3 PDU; ciphering is
not applicable to MSL 3 Control PDUs.
The ciphering algorithm and key to be used by the MSL 3 entity are configured by upper layers.
Meanwhile, the ciphering function is activated by upper layers. After security activation, theciphering function shall be applied to all MSL 3 PDUs indicated by upper layers for the downlink
and the uplink, respectively.
4.6.4.7 Integrity Protection and Verification
The integrity protection function includes both integrity protection and integrity verification and is
performed in MSL 3 for MSL 3 entities associated with SRBs. The data unit that is integrity
protected is the PDU header and the data part of the PDU before ciphering.
The integrity protection algorithm and key to be used by the MSL 3 entity are configured by upper
layers. Meanwhile, the integrity protection function is activated by upper layers.
As the RADIO CONNECTION message which activates the integrity protection function is itself
integrity protected with the configuration included in this RADIO CONNECTION message, thismessage needs first be decoded by RADIO CONNECTION before the integrity protection
verification could be performed for the PDU in which the message was received.
4.6.4.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
When a MSL 3 entity receives a MSL 3 PDU that contains reserved or invalid values, the MSL 3
entity shall:- chuck the received PDU.
4.6.4.9 Protocol data units, formats and parameters
The MSL 3 Data PDU is used to convey:- a MSL 3 SDU SN; and- user plane data containing an uncompressed MSL 3 SDU; or- user plane data containing a compressed MSL 3 SDU; or- control plane data; and- a MAC-I field for SRBs only;
A-GN4.00-03-TS

335

The MSL 3 Control PDU is used to convey:- a MSL 3 status report indicating which MSL 3 SDUs are missing and which are not following a
MSL 3 re-establishment.
- header compression control information, e.g. interspersed ROHC feedback.
4.6.4.10 Formats
4.6.4.10.1 General
A MSL 3 PDU is a bit string that is byte aligned (i.e. multiple of 8 bits) in length. In the figures in
sub clause 6.2, bit strings are represented by tables in which the most significant bit is theleftmost bit of the first line of the table, the least significant bit is the rightmost bit on the last line of
the table, and more generally the bit string is to be read from left to right and then in the reading
order of the lines. The bit order of each parameter field within a MSL 3 PDU is represented withthe first and most significant bit in the leftmost bit and the last and least significant bit in therightmost bit.
MSL 3 SDUs are bit strings that are byte aligned (i.e. multiple of 8 bits) in length. A compressedor uncompressed SDU is included into a MSL 3 PDU from the first bit onward.
4.6.4.11 Parameters
If not otherwise mentioned in the definition of each field then the bits in the parameters shall beinterpreted as follows: the left most bit string is the first and most significant and the right most bitis the last and least significant bit.
Unless otherwise mentioned, integers are encoded in standard binary encoding for unsigned
integers. In all cases the bits appear ordered from MSB to LSB when read in the PDU.
4.6.4.12 State variables
This sub clause describes the state variables used in MSL 3 entities in order to specify the MSL 3
protocol.
All state variables are non-negative integers.
The transmitting side of each MSL 3 entity shall maintain the following state variables:a)Next_ TX_SN
The variable Next_ TX_SN indicates the MSL 3 SN of the next MSL 3 SDU for a given MSL 3
entity.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

336

b)
TX_HFNThe variable TX_HFN indicates the HFN value for the generation of the COUNT value used for
MSL 3 PDUs for a given MSL 3 entity.
The receiving side of each MSL 3 entity shall maintain the following state variables:c)Next_ RX_SN
The variable Next_ RX_SN indicates the next expected MSL 3 SN by the receiver for a given
MSL 3 entity.
d)
RX_HFNThe variable RX_HFN indicates the HFN value for the generation of the COUNT value used forthe received MSL 3 PDUs for a given MSL 3 entity.
e) Last_Submitted_ RX_SN
For MSL 3 entities for DRBs mapped on MSL 2 AM the variable Last_Submitted_RX_SN
indicates the SN of the last MSL 3 SDU delivered to the upper layers.
4.6.4.13 Timers
The transmitting side of each MSL 3 entity for DRBs shall maintain the following timers:
chuckTimer
The duration of the timer is configured by upper layers. In the transmitter, a new timer is started
upon reception of an SDU from upper layer.
4.6.4.14

Constantsa) Reordering_Window
Indicates the size of the reordering window. The size equals to 2048, i.e. half of the MSL 3 SN
space, for radio bearers that are mapped on MSL 2 AM.
b) Maximum_MSL 3_SN is:4095 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 12 bit SNs
127 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 7 bit SNs-

31 if the MSL 3 entity is configured for the use of 5 bit SNs

A-GN4.00-03-TS

337

Chapter 5 Common Channel Specification
5.1 Overview
In this chapter, common channel (CCH) to apply to link establishment control is specified.
The structure of PHY layer, logical common channel (LCCH) structural methods and control
message format are clarified.
5.2 Common Channel (CCH)
CCH consists of BCCH, PCH, TCCH and SCCH as shown in Figure 5.1.

CCH

Common Channel
BCCH

Broadcast Control Channel

PCH

Paging Channel

SCCH

Signaling Control Channel

TCCH

Timing Correct Channel

Figure 5.1 CCH Structure
The function of CCH is summarized in Table 5.1.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

338

Table 5.1 Function Description of CCH
ChannelName

Direction

BCCH

DL

PCH

DL

SCCH

Both

TCCH

UL

Function Description
BCCH is a DL channel to broadcast the control informationfrom BS to MS.
PCH is a DL channel to inform the paging information from BS
to MS.
SCCH is both DL and UL channel for LCH assignment. DL
SCCH notifies allocation of an individual channel to MS. And,UL SCCH requests LCH re-assignment to BS.
TCCH is an UL channel to detect UL transmission timing.
Also, MS requires LCH establishment using TCCH.

Figure 5.2 shows the correspondence between PHY PRU and function channel in protocol phase.

Protocol
Phase

PRU

TCCH

Link Establishment Phase
TCCH
UL

CCH

SCCH
CCCH

BCCH
PCH
SCCH

DL

Figure 5.2 PRU, Protocol Phase and Functional Channel Correspondence

A-GN4.00-03-TS339

5.2.1 Logical Common Channel (LCCH)
Rules of the structure of logical common channel (LCCH) are shown in Figure 5.3.
(5× n) ms
Interval time for downlink transmission
5 ms
TDMA frame
UplinkDownlink

2 3 4

1Subchannel of CCH
Slot 1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

1

4

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

1

2 3 4

Downlink LCCH
1

m

2 3 4

1 2 3

Slot for Downlink CCH
Slot for Uplink CCH

Uplink LCCH
1

m

2 3 4

1 2 3

(5× n× m) ms
LCCH superframen is LCCH interval value. Refer to Section 5.2.3.1.
Figure 5.3 Slot and LCCHLCCH has the superframe structure shown in Section 5.2.3. All transmission/reception timing ofslots for controlling intermittent transmission and so forth is generated based on the superframe.

A-GN4.00-03-TS340

5.2.2 Definition of Superframe
The minimum cycle of the DL LCCH that specifies the slot position of all LCCH elements is
specified as the LCCH superframe. As DL LCCH elements, there are three types of LCCH
elements:
They are BCCH, which is used by the appropriate system, all PCH (P1-Pk: Number of groups =k) corresponding to the paging group as well as the SCCH with fixed insertion.
BCCH(A) must be transmitted by the lead slot of the LCCH superframe. The leading position of
the superframe is reported via BCCH transmission. Also, BCCH(B) is defined by something otherthan the superframe lead.
5.2.3 Superframe Structure of DL LCCH
The superframe structure of the DL LCCH that is defined by profile data is informed to each MS
on BCCH.
Depending on the way to select the profile data that defines the structure, the LCCH superframe
can transmit the identical paging group(pi: i = 1 to k) multiple times, but the number of continuoustransmissions (provided by nBS) for one paging call and the number of same paging groups nSG
included in the LCCH superframe are independent. Continuous transmission in response to one
paging call can be concluded within the LCCH superframe, or it can be spread over several
superframes.
If necessary, it is possible to temporarily replace LCCH elements except for BCCH (A), and send
the other LCCH elements.
Otherwise, the frame basic unit must follow the rules below.
(a) Within one frame basic unit, regularly intermittently transmitted BCCH or SCCH appears
first, and PCH is established as the function channel that follows it.
(b) Within one frame basic unit, if nPCH data is greater than or equal to two, the respective
PCHs are continuously established.
Further, during system operation, if profile data is modified, it is necessary to control information
flow and contents so that all MSs can receive those modified contents.
Specific profile data are shown below.
5.2.3.1 LCCH Interval Value (n)LCCH interval value shows the cycle in which BS intermittently transmits an LCCH slot. It is thevalue expressed by the number of TDMA frames (n) within the intermittent transmission cycle.

A-GN4.00-03-TS341

5.2.3.2 Frame Basic Unit Length (nSUB)
This stands for the length of the LCCH superframe, which constitutes consecutive elements of
BCCH, SCCH and PCH. This LCCH superframe constituent element is called the frame basic
unit.
5.2.3.3 Number of Same Paging Groups (nSG)
This stands for the number of times that the same paging group is repeatedly transmitted in one
superframe.
5.2.3.4 PCH Number (nPCH)
This stands for the number of PCH signal elements in a frame basic unit.
5.2.3.5 Paging Grouping Factor (nGROUP)This stands for the number of frame basic units required for one transmission of each PCH
belonging to all paging groups in one superframe.
Furthermore the multiple (nGROUP) of the number of PCHs (nPCH) is specified as the group division
number of PCH information.
However, when the PCH paging groups are mutually related as two LCCH are used, number ofgroup division is calculated as nGROUP× nPCH× 2.
5.2.3.6 Battery Saving Cycle Maximum value (nBS)nBS stands for the number of times that BS continuously transmits the identical reception signal toa certain paging group. The maximum battery saving cycles of MS that are permitted by thesystem depending on nBS are specified.
(Maximum battery saving cycle = 5 ms × n × nSUB × nGROUP × nBS)

A-GN4.00-03-TS342

5.2.3.7 The Relationship Among Profile Data
The relationship among profile data are shown below.
nSUB  nPCH + 1

In the frame basic unit, nPCH + 1 is the lowest frame basic unit
length because BCCH is always assigned.
The number of frame basic units N within an LCCH superframe isgiven by the product of the number of the same paging groups nSG
and the paging grouping factor nGROUP.

N = nSG× nGROUP(Units are frame basic units)
nFRM () nGROUP× nBS
If the number of the same paging groups nSG in the LCCH
superframe is the same as the battery saving cycle maximum
value nBS, there will be an equal sign. In other cases, there will not
be an equal sign.
Left side: Number of frame basic units in LCCH superframe
Right side: Maximum battery saving cycle(The unit is referred to as the frame basic unit.)(5 × n) ms
LCCH superframe
SCCH

PCH2

PCH1

BCCH

PCH8

PCH7

SCCH

PCH6

PCH5

SCCH

PCH4

PCH3

SCCH

PCH2

PCH1

BCCH

LCCH
Downlink

nSUB
nSUB× nGROUPThe diagram above shows an example in which nSG=1, nSUB=3, nPCH=2, nGROUP=4
Figure 5.4 An Example of LCCH Structure

5.2.3.8 Paging Group Calculation Rules
From the information on Paging ID and BCCH, PCH which should be received is computable withthe following formula. Refer to Section 5.5.4 for Paging ID.
[Paging Group formula]
Paging Group = (Paging ID) MOD (nPCH × nGROUP) + 1
Paging ID : Identification information for paging
nPCH: Number of PCHs in the frame basic unit
nGROUP: Paging grouping factor

A-GN4.00-03-TS343

5.2.3.9 Optional Paging Group Calculation Rules
The MS may use Discontinuous Reception (DRX) in idle mode in order to reduce power
consumption. One Paging Occasion (PO) is a slot where there may be P-MSID transmitted on
ADECCH addressing the paging message. One Paging Frame (PF) is one Radio Frame, which
may contain one or multiple Paging Occasion(s). When DRX is used the MS needs only tomonitor one PO per DRX.
PF and PO is determined by following formulae using the DRX parameters provided in System
Information:
PF is given by following equation:
SFN mod T= (T div N)*(MS_ID mod N)
Index i_s pointing to PO from slot pattern will be derived from following calculation:i_s = floor(MS_ID/N) mod Ns
The index i-s position to PO should meet the following subframe pattern: when i_s is 0, the PO
will be in subframe #0; when i_s is 1 and Ns is 2, the PO will be in subframe #5; when i_s is 1 and
Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #1; when i_s is 2 and Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #5
and when i_s is 3 and Ns is 4, the PO will be in subframe #6.
System Information DRX parameters stored in the MS shall be updated locally in the MS
whenever the DRX parameter values are changed in SI.
The following Parameters are used for the calculation of the PF and i_s:
T: DRX cycle of the MS. T is determined by the shortest of the MS specific
DRX value, if allocated by upper layers, and a default DRX value broadcast in system information.
If MS specific DRX is not configured by upper layers, the default value is applied.
nB: 4T, 2T, T, T/2, T/4, T/8, T/16, T/32.
N: min(T,nB)；
Ns: max(1,nB/T)
MS_ID: IMSI mod 1024.
IMSI is given as sequence of digits of type Integer (0..9), IMSI shall in the formulae above beinterpreted as a decimal integer number, where the first digit given in the sequence represents
the highest order digit.
For example:
IMSI = 12 (digit1=1, digit2=2)
In the calculations, this shall be interpreted as the decimal integer "12", not "1x16+2 = 18".
5.2.3.10 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH
Figure 5.5 shows the intermittent transmission timing of ICH according to the ICH offset and the
ICH period. ICH offset indicates the beginning frame of ICH based on the CCH frame. ICH period
indicates the cycle of ICH based on the beginning frame by ICH offset. However, the intermittent
transmission timing of ICH must always be adjusted according to the beginning frame of ICH
based on the CCH frame.
Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.3 for information elements of the ICH offset and the ICH period.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

344

Interval time for downlink transmission

DL
CCH
UL

(5 × n) ms

5 ms
ICH DLUL
ICH offset

ICH period

ICH period

Assigned ICH

n is LCCH interval value. Refer to Section 5.2.3.1.
Figure 5.5 Intermittent Transmission Timing for ICH

5.2.4 Structure of UL LCCHThe UL LCCH is sent from each MS only when needed. It is used as the UL slot 2.5 ms before
the DL LCCH. Refer to Figure 5.3.
5.2.5 Structure of DL LCCH
A standard structural example of the DL LCCH is shown in Figure 5.6.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

345

Downlink
LCCH
BCCH

BC

P1

P2

SC

P3

P4

SC

P5

P6

SC

P7

P8

BC

SCCH
PagingGroup 1
PCH
PagingGroup 2
PCH
PagingGroup 3
PCH
PagingGroup 4
PCH
PagingGroup 5
PCH

SC

SC

SC

P1

P2
P3

P4
P5

PagingGroup 6PCH

P6PagingGroup 7PCH

P7PagingGroup 8PCH

P8

BC: BCCH
Pnum: PCH
SC: SCCH

Figure 5.6 Structural Example of DL LCCH
5.2.6 LCCH Multiplexing
BS can multiply LCCHs within the scope of the physical slot transmission condition. In this case,MS can receive at least one logical common channel transmission from BS. Shown here is astandard structural example that uses two DL LCCHs.

A-GN4.00-03-TS346

5.2.6.1 When PCH Paging Groups Being Independent
The PCH paging group of the LCCHs f1 and f2 are mutually independent, but each DL LCCH
superframe structure is identical. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for n1offset and noffset.
(5 x n) ms
LCCH superframe
f1

BC

P1

P2

SC

P3

...

P4

BC

(5 x noffset) ms
BC

f2

P1

P2

SC

P3

...

P4

BC

LCCH superframe
BC :BCCH
Pnum :PCH
SC :SCCH

Here, an example is shown for the case where two LCCH are the same
absolute slot.

Figure 5.7 Example of Multiplex for Independent LCCH
5.2.6.2 When PCH Paging Groups Being Inter-related
LCCH f1's PCH transmits odd-numbered groups, and f2 transmits even-numbered groups.
(5 x n) ms
LCCH superframe
f1

BC

P1

P3

SC

P5

...

P7

BC

(5 x noffset) ms
f2

BC

P2

P4

SC

P6

P8

...

BC

LCCH superframe
BC :BCCH
Pnum :PCH
SC :SCCH

Here, an example is shown for the case where two LCCH are the same
absolute slot.

Figure 5.8 Example of Multiplex for Inter-related LCCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

347

5.3 PHY Frame Format
The PHY frame formats for CCH are shown in Figure 5.9 to Figure 5.14.
Fixed modulation area
Interleave unit
Scramble area

Control field

TAIL

CRC

CRC calculation area

PHY frame

Figure 5.9 PHY Frame Format for CCH
Figure 5.9 shows that the modulation and the CRC calculation are of PHY format for CCH. CCH
uses the fixed Modulation. Modulation method is BPSK for OFDMA and π / 2 - BPSK for SC,
while the coding rate is 1/2. Interleaving process is done in the entire fixed modulation area. CRC
of the control field is calculated. After CRC addition, the scramble is done from the control field to
CRC.
The value of scramble refers to Table 3.3.
5.3.1 BCCH

162 bits
CI

BS-Info

CCI

MSG ( BCCH )

CRC

TAIL

4

40

4

92

16

6

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1876543218765
…..

Octet

1

2

11

12

Figure 5.10 BCCH Format

A-GN4.00-03-TS

348

5.3.2 PCH

162 bits
CI

BS-Info

CCI

MSG ( PCH )

CRC

TAIL

4

40

4

92

16

6

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1876543218765
…..

Octet

1

2

11

12

Figure 5.11 PCH Format

5.3.3 TCCH
TCCH is a signal pattern. It is defined as timing correct channel at Sections 3.5.5 and 3.6.6.
5.3.4 SCCH
5.3.4.1 DL SCCH

162 bits
CI

BS-Info

CCI

MSG ( SCCH )

CRC

TAIL

4

40

4

92

16

6

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1876543218765
…..

Octet

1

2

11

12

Figure 5.12 DL SCCH Format

A-GN4.00-03-TS349

5.3.4.2 UL SCCH for OFDMA

162 bits

CI

BSID

MSID

MSG ( SCCH )

CRC

TAIL

4

nBL

34

102 - nBL

16

6

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 187654321
…..

Octet

1

2

…
n-1

n

Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL.
Figure 5.13 UL SCCH Format for OFDMA

5.3.4.3 UL SCCH for SC

120 bits

CI

BSID

MSID

MSG ( SCCH )

CRC

TAIL

4

nBL

34

60 - nBL

16

6

Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 187654321
…..

Octet

1

2

…
n-1

n

Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL.
Figure 5.14 UL SCCH Format for SC (without virtual GI extension)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

350

5.4 Control Field Format
5.4.1 Channel Identifier (CI)
CI coding rules are shown in Table 5.2 and Table 5.3.
Table 5.2 CI Coding for DL CCH
Bit
4
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
0

2
1
0
0
1

1
1
0
1
1

BCCH (B)
BCCH (A)
SCCH
PCH

Other

Reserved
Table 5.3 CI Coding for UL CCH

Bit
4
1

3
0

2
1

1
0

SCCH

Other

Reserved

5.4.2 BS Information (BS-Info)
BS-Info must be composed according to the format shown in Figure 5.15.
BS-Info
BSID
System typeOperator ID

1 bit

3 bits

40 bitsnBL bits
System additional ID
Paging area
numbernp bits

Sequence number

BS additionalID(40 - nBL) bits

(nBL - np - 4) bits

Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for nBL and np.
Figure 5.15 BS-Info Format
BS-Info is composed of BSID and BS additional ID. BSID is defined for individual ID of BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS351

5.4.2.1 Base Station ID (BSID)
The area of BSID is indicated in the BSID area bit length (nBL) as "radio channel information
broadcasting" message on BCCH. The following information elements are included in BSID.
5.4.2.1.1 System TypeThe system type is indicated in public system.
Table 5.4 System Type
Bit
1
0
1

Reserved
Public system

5.4.2.1.2 Operator ID
Operator ID length is three bits. The allocation of the bit is separately specified.
5.4.2.1.3 System Additional ID
The system additional ID is composed of the paging area number and the sequence number. The
area of paging area number is indicated in the paging area number length (np) as "radio channel
information broadcasting" message on BCCH.
5.4.2.1.3.1 Paging Area Number
Paging area is identified by paging area number.
5.4.2.1.3.2 Sequence Number
BS is identified by sequence number.
5.4.2.2 BS Additional ID
BS additional ID is an area to notify of the function of each BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS352

5.4.3 Common Control Information (CCI)
CCI is composed of the absolute slot number.
CCI 4 bits
Absolute slot number
2 bitsReserved
2 bitsFigure 5.16 CCI Format
5.4.3.1 Absolute Slot Number
Absolute slot number indicates the number of the slot which the BS sends CCH in.
Table 5.5 Absolute Slot Number
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1st TDMA slot for DL.
2nd TDMA slot for DL.
3rd TDMA slot for DL.
4th TDMA slot for DL.

5.4.4 Mobile Station ID (MSID)
The length of MSID is 34 bits.
MSID

34 bits

Figure 5.17 MSID Format

A-GN4.00-03-TS353

5.5 MSG Field
5.5.1 Message Type List
A list of messages defined in the MSG field is shown in Table 5.6.
Table 5.6 Message for MSG Field
Message for MSG (BCCH)"Radio channel information broadcasting" message"System information broadcasting" message"Optional information broadcasting" message

Reference
5.5.2.1
5.5.2.2
5.5.2.3

Message for MSG (PCH)Reference“No Paging” message"Paging type 1" message"Paging type 2" message"Paging type 3" message"Paging type 4" message

5.5.4.1
5.5.4.2
5.5.4.3
5.5.4.4
5.5.4.5"Paging type 5" message"Paging type 6" message"Paging type 7" message

5.5.4.6
5.5.4.7
5.5.4.8

Message for MSG (SCCH)

Reference"Idle" message"LCH assignment 1" message"LCH assignment 2" message"LCH assignment 3" message"LCH assignment standby" message

5.5.6.1.1
5.5.6.1.2
5.5.6.1.3
5.5.6.1.4
5.5.6.1.5"LCH assignment reject" message"LCH assignment re-request" message

5.5.6.1.6
5.5.6.2.1

A-GN4.00-03-TS354

5.5.2 MSG (BCCH)
The format of message type for BCCH is shown in Table 5.7, and the coding is shown in Table
5.8.
Table 5.7 Format of Message Type for BCCH
Bit

8

Octet

7

1

6

5

4

3

Message type2

1

Reserved

Table 5.8 Message Type Coding for BCCH
Bit
8
0
0
0

7
0
0
0

6
0
1
1
Other

5
1
0
1

"Radio channel information broadcasting" message"System information broadcasting" message"Optional information broadcasting" message
Reserved

5.5.2.1 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
BS must broadcast the radio channel structure information to MS using this message. The
message format is shown in Table 5.9, and the information element explanations are shown in
Table 5.10. Refer to Section 5.2.3 for the relationship between the information elements of thismessage and the superframe.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

355

Table 5.9 "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1

"Radio channel information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0
0
1
Reserved
Message Type
Reserved
LCCH Interval Value n
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP
Paging Area Number Length np
Odd /ReNumber of Same Paging
Battery Saving Cycle
Even
servedGroups nSG
Maximum Value nBS
ID
Control Carrier
Frame Basic Unit Length
PCH Number nPCH
StructurenSUB
noffsetn1offset
ReBroadcasting Status
Global Definition Information PatternservedIndication
Protocol Version
Reserved
BSID Area Bit Length nBL
MCC (Mobile Country Code)MNC (Mobile Network Code)

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Table 5.10 Information Elements in "Radio Channel Information Broadcasting" Message
LCCH Interval Value n (Octet 2)
It shows the DL LCCH slot intermittent cycle.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0

0

1

0

:

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

0

0

1

1

1

:
1

1

1

Reserved
n=1
n=2
n=3
:
n = 20:n = 63

A-GN4.00-03-TS

356

Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP (Octet 3)
It shows the value of PCH information corresponding to the number of group divisions.
Bit
8
0
0
0

7
0
0
0

6
0
0
1

5
0
1
1

1

1

:
1

1

LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)
nGROUP = 1
nGROUP = 2:
nGROUP = 15

(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Paging Area Number Length np (Octet 3)
It shows the bit length of the paging area number included in the BSID.
Refer to Section 5.4.2 for composition of BSID.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Reserved
np = 4
np = 6
np = 8np = 10np = 12
np = 13
np = 14np = 15
np = 16
np = 17
np = 18
np = 19
np = 20
np = 21
np = 22(Note), np must be the same even in a different paging area if handover between paging areas is
executed.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

357

Odd / Even ID (Octet 4)(a) This information element has the following meanings when (1 0) (shows that there is a mutual
relationship between PCH paging group) is set in the control carrier structure (Octet 5)
information element contained in "radio channel information broadcasting" message:
Bit
8
0
1

It shows LCCH which transmits even-numbered paging group.
It shows LCCH which transmits odd-numbered paging group.

(b) In other cases than stated above, it has the following meanings:
Bit
8
0
1

Reserved
Reserved

Number of Same Paging Groups nSG (Octet 4)
It shows the number of PCH slots belonging to the same paging group in the LCCH superframe.
Bit
6
0
0
1

5
0
0
:
1

4
0
1
1

LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)nSG = 1:nSG = 7

Battery Saving Cycle Maximum Value nBS (Octet 4)
It shows the times BS continuously sends the same paging signal to the paging group.
Bit
3
0
0
1

2
0
0
:
1

1
0
1
1

LCCH superframe is not constructed (optional)
nBS = 1:nBS = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS

358

Control Carrier Structure (Octet 5)
It shows the presence or absence of a mutual relationship between paging group and number of
LCCHs used by the relevant BS.
Bit
8
0

7
0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Shows that only 1 LCCH is used.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and each individual LCCH isindependent.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and PCH paging groups are mutuallyrelated.
Reserved

PCH Number nPCH (Octet 5)
It shows the number of PCHs in the frame basic unit.
Bit
6
0
0
1

5
0
0
:
1

4
0
1
1

No PCH (optional)
1 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 1):
7 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 7)

(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Frame Basic Unit Length nSUB (Octet 5)
It shows the length of the LCCH superframe structural element (frame basic unit).
Bit
3
0
0
1

2
0
0
:
1

1
0
1
1

(Optional)
nSUB = 1:
nSUB = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS

359

noffset (Octet 6)
When the value of control carrier structure is (0 1) or (1 0), this information element shows thatthe other control slot has transmitted in one of the absolute slot numbers 1, 2, 3, or 4.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

It shows that the absolute slot number is the 1st slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 2nd slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 3rd slot position for DL.
It shows that the absolute slot number is the 4th slot position for DL.

(Note) The time from the local control slot to the other control slot is given by the following
equation.
t ms = 5 × n1offset + 0.625 × (absolute slot number of other control slot – absolute slot numberof local control slot)
n1offset (Octet 6)
When the value of control carrier structure is (0 1) or (1 0), this information element shows thatthe other control slot has conducted transmission in the TDMA frame after 5 × n1offset ms.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

:

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

n1offset = 0
n1offset = 1
n1offset = 2
n1offset = 3:
n1offset = 63

(Note) The time from the local control slot to the other control slot is given by the following
equation.
t ms = 5 × n1offset + 0.625 × (absolute slot number of other control slot – absolute slot numberof local control slot)
Broadcasting Status Indication (Octet 7)
It shows the presence or absence of information broadcasting messages other than "radio
channel information broadcasting" message sent on the relevant LCCH.
Bit
7
1/0

6
1/0
-

5
1/0
-

"System information broadcasting" message present / absent"Optional information broadcasting" message present / absent
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

360

Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 7)
It shows the relevant pattern number of the present "radio channel information broadcasting"message. When "radio channel information broadcasting" message changes, the new global
definition information pattern is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0

3
0
0
1

1

1

:

2
0
1
0

1
0
0
0

1

0

Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1)Global definition information pattern (2):Global definition information pattern (7)Other

Reserved

Protocol Version (Octet 8)
It shows protocol version supported by BS.
Bit
8
-

7
-

6
-

5
-

4
-

3
-

2
1/0

1
1/0
-

Other

Version 1 present / absent
Version 2 present / absent
Reserved

BSID Area Bit Length nBL (Octet 9)
It shows the BSID area bit length included in the BS information.
Refer to Section 5.4.2.
Bit
5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

3
0
0
0
:
0
Other

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

0

1

nBL = 15nBL = 16nBL = 17:nBL = 40
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

361

Mobile Country Code (Octet 10-11)
It shows the country identification. The code assignment rule shall obey ITU-T E.212. Assigned
decimal digits shall be changed to binary digits in order to be set in this element area.
Mobile Network Code (Octet 11-12)
It shows the network identification. The code assignment rule shall obey ITU-T E.212. Assigned
decimal digits shall be changed to binary digits in order to be set in this element area.
5.5.2.2 "System Information Broadcasting" Message
BS can broadcast system information to MS using this message. The message format is shownin Table 5.11 and explanation of elements is shown in Table 5.12.
Table 5.11 "System Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

"System information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7

6

5

0
1
Message Type

0

Reserved

3

2

1

Reserved
Restriction
Indication

Restriction Class

Reserved

Broadcasting Message
Status Number msys

11
12

4

Broadcasting Reception Indication

A-GN4.00-03-TS

362

Table 5.12 Information Elements in "System Information Broadcasting" Message
Restriction Indication (Octet 2)
It is used to indicate if this message includes restriction information.
Bit
1
0
1

This message does not include restriction information.
This message includes restriction information.

Restriction Class (Octet 3-4)
It shows the restriction class number equal to the last digit in decimal digits of MSID. It is a priority
class from class 10 to Class 15 over others. MS shall NOT start both outgoing call and incoming
call while indicated restriction from BS, except handover and location registration.
Octet 3
Bit
8
-

7
-

6
-

0/1

-

-

Octet 4
Bit
8
-

7
-

6
-

0/1

-

-

5
:
-

4
0/1

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1
-

Class 0 no restriction/restriction
Class 1 no restriction/restriction
Class 2 no restriction/restriction
Class 3 no restriction/restriction

-

-

-

-

Class 7 no restriction/restriction

5
0/1
:
-

4
0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1
-

-

-

-

-

Class 8 no restriction/restriction
Class 9 no restriction/restriction
Class 10 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)
Class 11 no restriction/restriction
Class 12 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)(Reserved)
Class 15 no restriction/restriction (Reserved)

Restriction start condition(1) System Information Broadcasting Message is transmitted and(2) System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Indication=1 and(3) The class of System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Class=1 corresponds MS
class
Restriction clear condition(1) No reception System Information Broadcasting Message between two times reception of
Global Definition Information Pattern or

A-GN4.00-03-TS

363

(2) System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Indication=0 or(3) The class of System Information Broadcasting Message/Restriction Class=0 corresponds MS
class
Broadcasting Message Status Number msys (Octet 11)
It shows the status number of the present "system information broadcasting" message. Thiselement can be used arbitrarily, but when the status changes, the new status is set.
Bit
3
0
0
0
1

2
0
0
1
:
1

1
0
1
0

msys = 0msys = 1
msys = 2:
msys = 7

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 12)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
8
0
0

7
0
0

1

1

-

6
0
1

5
0
0
0

1

0

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

:

Other

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS364

5.5.2.3 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
BS can broadcast optional information to MS using this message. The message format is shownin Table 5.13 and explanation of elements is shown in Table 5.14.
Table 5.13 "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1

"Optional information broadcasting" message
BS → MS (DL)
BCCH
7

6

5

0
1
Message Type

1

2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

4

3

2

1

Reserved

Reserved

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mopt

11
12

Broadcasting Reception Indication

Table 5.14 Information Elements in "Optional Information Broadcasting" Message
Broadcasting Message Status Number mopt (Octet 11)
It shows the status number of the present "system information broadcasting" message. Thiselement can be used arbitrarily, but when the status changes, the new status is set.
Bit
3
0
0
0
1

2
0
0
1
:
1

1
0
1
0
1

mopt = 0
mopt = 1
mopt = 2:
mopt = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS

365

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 12)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
8
0
0

7
0
0

6
0
1

5
0
0
0

:
1

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

Other

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication
Reserved

5.5.3 MSG (Optional BCCH)
5.5.3.1 MSG (BCCH)
System information is divided into the MasterInformationBroadcastingBlock (MIBB) and a number
of SystemInformationBroadcastingBlocks (SIBBs);
The mapping of SIBBs to SI messages is flexibly configurable by schedulingInformation;
The BS may schedule ADSCH transmissions concerning function channels other than BCCH in
the same slot as used for BCCH. The minimum MS capability restricts the BCCH mapped to
ADSCH e.g. regarding the maximum rate.
System information validity and notification of changes:
Change of system information only occurs at specific radio frames, i.e. the concept of amodification period is used. System information may be transmitted a number of times with thesame content within a modification period, as defined by its scheduling. The modification periodboundaries are defined by SFN values for which SFN mod m= 0, where m is the number of radio
frames comprising the modification period. The modification period is configured by system
information.
When the network changes (some of the) system information, it first notifies the MSs about thischange, i.e. this may be done throughout a modification period. In the next modification period,

A-GN4.00-03-TS

366

the network transmits the updated system information. Upon receiving a change notification, theMS acquires the new system information immediately from the start of the next modification
period. The MS applies the previously acquired system information until the MS acquires the new
system information.
The Paging message is used to inform MSs in IDLE MODE and MSs in ACTIVE MODE about asystem information change. If the MS receives a Paging message including thesystemInfoModification, it knows that the system information will change at the next modification
period boundary. Although the MS may be informed about changes in system information, nofurther details are provided e.g. regarding which system information will change.
SystemInformationBlockType1 includes a value tag, systemInfoValueTag, that indicates if achange has occurred in the SI messages. MSs may use systemInfoValueTag, e.g. upon returnfrom out of coverage, to verify if the previously stored SI messages are still valid. Additionally, theMS considers stored system information to be invalid after 3 hours from the moment it was
successfully confirmed as valid, unless specified otherwise.
The MS verifies that stored system information remains valid by either checking a flag in
SystemInformationBlockType1 after the modification period boundary, or attempting to find thesystemInfoModification indication at least modificationPeriodCoeff times during the modification
period in case no paging is received, in every modification period. If no paging message is
received by the MS during a modification period, the MS may assume that no change of system
information will occur at the next modification period boundary. If MS in ACTIVE MODE, during amodification period, receives one paging message, it may deduce from the presence/ absence ofsystemInfoModification whether a change of system information will occur in the next modification
period or not.
5.5.4 MSG (PCH)
The format of message type for PCH is shown in Table 5.15, and the coding is shown in Table
5.16.
Table 5.15 Format of Message Type for PCH
Bit
Octet
1

8

7

6

Message Type

5

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

A-GN4.00-03-TS

367

Table 5.16 Message Type Coding for PCH
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0
1
1

6
0
0
1
1
0
0

5
0
1
0
1
0
1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

Other

No paging"Paging type 1" message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID)"Paging type 2" message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)"Paging type 3" message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)"Paging type 4" message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)"Paging type 5" message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)"Paging type 6" message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits'
Paging ID)
LCH assignment does not include intermitted information of ICH.
"Paging type 7" message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits'
Paging ID)
LCH assignment includes intermitted information of ICH.
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

368

5.5.4.1 “No Paging” Message
Using this message, BS can notify MS of no paging in this PCH.
The message format is shown in Table 5.17, and the explanation of information elements isshown in Table 5.18.
Table 5.17 "No Paging" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"No Paging" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

0
0
Message Type

0

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

Reserved

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.18 Information Elements in "No Paging" Message

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than “radio channel information broadcasting”
message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

369

Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7):Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1

D.C.

6
0
0
1
:
1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS370

5.5.4.2 "Paging Type 1" Message (single paging / 50 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.19, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.20.
Table 5.19 "Paging Type 1" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Paging type 1" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

0
0
Message Type

1

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

MSB

Paging ID
Application Type

LSB

Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.20 Information Elements in "Paging Type 1" Message

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

371

Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

1

-

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

0

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

:

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID (Octet 2 - 8)
Paging ID is specified as a 50 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 8)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Other

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

D.C.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

372

Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
:
1

1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 75.5.4.3 "Paging Type 2" Message (single paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.21, and the explanation of information elements is shown in
Table 5.22.
Table 5.21 "Paging Type 2" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Paging type 2" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

0
1
Message Type

0

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

MSB

Paging ID
Application Type

LSB

Reserved
Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.22 Information Elements in "Paging Type 2" Message

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

373

Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)

:
1

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting message" reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting message" reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID (Octet 2 - 6)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of a 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Other

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

D.C.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

374

Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
:
1

1

5
0
1
0

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 71

5.5.4.4 "Paging Type 3" Message (single paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.23, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.24.
Table 5.23 "Paging Type 3" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Paging type 3" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

0
1
Message Type

1

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

MSB

Paging ID
LSB

Reserved

Application Type

Reserved

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.24 Information Elements in "Paging Type 3" Message

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

375

Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7):Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID (Octet 2 - 4)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Other

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

D.C.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

376

Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
:
1

1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 75.5.4.5 "Paging Type 4" Message (multiplex paging / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.25, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.26.
Besides, this PCH may contain two messages.
Table 5.25 "Paging Type 4" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Paging type 4" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

1
0
Message Type

0

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

MSB

Paging ID
Application Type

LSB
MSB

Paging ID
LSB

Reserved

Application Type

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi

A-GN4.00-03-TS

377

Table 5.26 Information Elements in "Paging Type 4" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)

:
1

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID (Octet 2 - 6, 7 - 11)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6, 11)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
Other

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

378

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other
Bit
7
0
0
0
1

D.C.

6
0
0
1
:
1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS379

5.5.4.6 "Paging Type 5" Message (multiplex paging / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.27, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.28.
Besides, this PCH may contain two messages.
Table 5.27 "Paging Type 5" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Paging type 5" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

1
0
Message Type

1

4

3

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

MSB

Paging ID
LSB

Reserved

Application TypeMSB

Paging ID
LSB

Reserved

Application Type
Reserved

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi
Table 5.28 Information Elements in "Paging Type 5" Message

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

380

Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

1

-

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

0

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

:

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID(Octet 2 - 4, 6 - 8)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5, 9)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Other

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

D.C.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

381

Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
:
1

1

5
0
1
0

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 71

5.5.4.7 "Paging Type 6" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 34 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.29, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.30.
Besides, this PCH may contain a LCH assignment message.

Table 5.29 "Paging Type 6" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

"Paging type 6" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

1
1
Message Type

0

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

Paging ID
Application Type
Temporary LCH Number

LSB

Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
TimingAssignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information

Reserved
TCCH Pattern Number

11
12

3

MSB

9
10

4

Reserved

Power Control Information
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi(Note) Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.2 for information elements of LCH assignment message morethan Octet 6.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

382

Table 5.30 Information Elements in "Paging type 6" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

:

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID(Octet 2 - 6)
Paging ID is specified as a 34 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
Besides, MSID of 34 bits' number can be allocated.
Application Type (Octet 6)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
Other

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

383

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

Bit
7
0
0
0
1

D.C.

6
0
0
1
:
1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 7

A-GN4.00-03-TS384

5.5.4.8 "Paging Type 7" Message (paging and LCH assignment / 24 bits' Paging ID)
Using this message, BS informs that MS received a paging. When MS responds to the paging
from BS, it is necessary to request the link establishment. The message format is shown in Table
5.31, and the explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.32.
Besides, this PCH may contain a LCH assignment message.
Table 5.31 "Paging Type 7" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

"Paging type 7" message
BS → MS (DL)
PCH
7

6

5

1
1
Message Type

1

2

1

Broadcasting Reception Indication

Paging ID
LSB

Reserved
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
TimingApplication Type
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number
Shift Direction Control Information

Reserved

10

TCCH Pattern Number

11

ICH Period

12

3

MSB

8
9

4

Reserved

Power Control Information
ICH Offset
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)

Broadcasting Message
Status Number mi(Note) Refer to Section 5.5.6.1.3 for information elements of LCH assignment message morethan Octet 5.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

385

Table 5.32 Information Elements in "Paging Type 7" Message
Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)
It shows global definition information pattern or local information broadcasting reception indicationof broadcasting information message other than "radio channel information broadcasting"message. Refer to Section 5.5.2.1 for global definition information pattern.
Bit
4
0
0

3
0
0

1

2
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

1

0

-

-

-

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

:

Global definition information pattern indication
Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1):Global definition information pattern (7)Local information broadcasting reception indication"System information broadcasting" message reception
indication"Optional information broadcasting" message reception
indication

Other

Reserved

Paging ID(Octet 2 - 4)
Paging ID is specified as a 24 bits' number, and ID for identifying MS on the paging message.
However, MSID can be allocated when Paging ID is a 34 bits' number.
Application Type (Octet 5)
It indicates application type.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
Other

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

Restoration from sleep state
Voice
Unrestricted digital information
Reserved

Broadcasting Message Status Number mi (Octet 12)
It shows the status number of the broadcasting message when Broadcasting Reception Indication
indicates Local information broadcasting reception indication.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

386

Broadcasting Reception Indication (Octet 1)

Meaning of mi

Global definition information pattern indication

D.C.

Local information broadcasting System information broadcasting msys
reception indication
message reception indication
Optional information broadcasting mopt
message reception indication
Other

Bit
7
0
0
0
1

D.C.

6
0
0
1
:
1

5
0
1
0
1

mi = 0mi = 1
mi = 2:
mi = 75.5.5 MSG (Optional PCCH)
Paging groups :- Precise MS identity is found on PCH;
- DRX configurable via BCCH;- Only one slot allocated per paging interval per MS;- The network may divide MSs to different paging occasions in time;- There is no grouping within paging occasion;- One paging MSID for PCH.
The purpose of this procedure is to transmit paging information to a MS in IDLE MODE and/ or to
inform MSs in IDLE MODE and MSs in ACTIVE MODE about a system information change.
Paging Occasion (PO) :a slot where there may be P-MSID transmitted on ADECCH addressing
the paging message.
Paging Frame (PF) : one Radio Frame, which may contain one or multiple Paging Occasion(s).
The details Paging Group Calculation Rules please refer to the section 5.2.3.9.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

387

5.5.6 MSG (SCCH)
5.5.6.1 DL SCCH
The format of message type for DL SCCH is shown in Table 5.33, and the coding is shown in
Table 5.34.
Table 5.33 Format of Message Type for DL SCCH
Octet

Bit

8

7

1

6

5

4

Message type

3

2

1

Reserved

Table 5.34 Message Type Coding for DL SCCH
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0
1
1

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
Other

5
0
1
0
1
0
1

"Idle" message"LCH assignment 1" message"LCH assignment 2" message"LCH assignment 3" message"LCH assignment standby" message"LCH assignment reject" message
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

388

5.5.6.1.1 "Idle" Message
This message can be transmitted only when there is no information to be transmitted in DL SCCH.
The message format is shown in Table 5.35.
Table 5.35 "Idle" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

"Idle" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

5

0
0
Message Type

0

4

3

2

1

Reserved

Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS389

5.5.6.1.2 "LCH Assignment 1" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.36, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.37.
Besides, this SCCH may contain two messages. Octet 2-6 and Octet 7-11 of messages does notcontain intermittent transmission timing information for ICH (Refer to Section 5.2.3.10). Eachmessage is sent to different MS.
Table 5.36 "LCH Assignment 1" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

0

"LCH assignment 1" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

5

0

0

1

3

2

1

Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
stTiming
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved
TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
TimingPower Control Information
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO(UL)(DL)
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number

Shift Direction Control Information

9
10

4

Reserved

11

TCCH Pattern Number

12

Reserved

Power Control Information
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)

A-GN4.00-03-TS390

Table 5.37 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 1" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4

Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

1

:

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63

LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
80

UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +625us x the number of UL slot

1

Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3, 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

1

1

1

4
0
0
0
:
1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3:
Assignment PRU number = 128

A-GN4.00-03-TS

391

Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4, 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

1

:

4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

1

Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward:
255 steps forward(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) usPower Control Information (Octet 5, 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0

5
1
1

4
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

3
1
1

2
1
1

1
1
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0

0
0

0
0

1
0

:

1
1

0
0

0
0

:

31 steps increase
30 steps increase:
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease(Note) Unit = 3 dB

A-GN4.00-03-TS

392

TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown inAppendix D. "2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 7-11) absent " can be set only to TCCH
pattern of Octet 11.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1

0
1

:
1
1

1
1
Other

Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMACore-sequence number 2 for OFDMACore-sequence number 3 for OFDMACore-sequence number 4 for OFDMACore-sequence number 5 for OFDMACore-sequence number 6 for OFDMACore-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC:
Sub-slot number absent
2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 7-11) absent
Reserved

ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 6, 11)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 6, 11)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS393

5.5.6.1.3 "LCH Assignment 2" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.38, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table ‎5.39.
Besides, this SCCH may contain two messages. The message from Octet 2-7 contains MIMO for
ANCH and intermittent transmission timing information for ICH (Refer to Section 5.2.3.10). And
the message from Octet 8-12 does not contain them. Each message is sent to different MS.
Table 5.38 "LCH Assignment 2" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
1
2
3
4
5

0

"LCH assignment 2" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

5

0

1

0

Reserved

7

ICH Period
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing

12

1

ICH Offset
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO(UL)(DL)
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number

Shift Direction Control Information

10
11

2

Power Control Information

TCCH Pattern Number

93Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
stTiming
Shift Direction Control Information

6

8

4

Reserved

Power Control Information

TCCH Pattern Number

A-GN4.00-03-TS

394

Table 5.39 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 2" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 8)Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4

Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 8)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63:

LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 9)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
80

UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +625us x the number of UL slot

1

Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3, 9)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

1

1

1

4
0
0
0
:
1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3:
Assignment PRU number = 128

A-GN4.00-03-TS

395

Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4, 10)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

1

:

4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

1

Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward:
255 steps forward(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) usPower Control Information (Octet 5, 11)Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0

5
1
1

4
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

3
1
1

2
1
1

1
1
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0

0
0

0
0

1
0

:

1
1

0
0

0
0

:

31 steps increase
30 steps increase:
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease(Note) Unit = 3 dB

A-GN4.00-03-TS

396

TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 12)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown inAppendix D. "2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 8 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH
pattern of Octet 12.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1

0
1

:
1
1

1
1
Other

Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMACore-sequence number 2 for OFDMACore-sequence number 3 for OFDMACore-sequence number 4 for OFDMACore-sequence number 5 for OFDMACore-sequence number 6 for OFDMACore-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC:
Sub-slot number absent
2nd LCH assignment message (Octet 8 - 12) absent
ReservedICH Offset (Octet 6)
The frame used as ICH is indicated by the offset of the TDMA frame from CCH.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

:
1

1

No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

397

ICH Period (Octet 7)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

1

1

:

6
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

1

1

No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames:
16 frames

ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

398

5.5.6.1.4 "LCH Assignment 3" Message
BS uses this message to perform channel assignment in response to MS after a LCH assignment
request from MS is received. The message format is shown in Table 5.40, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.41.
Besides, this SCCH include MSID.
Table 5.40 "LCH Assignment 3" Message

Message type
Direction
Function channel
Bit
Octet
1
2
3

4

:
:
:
8

"LCH assignment 3" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

4

3

2

1

0

0
1
1
Reserved
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
Temporary LCH Number
LCH
Reque
Assignment PRU Number
stTiming
Shift Direction Control Information
Reserved

5Power Control Information

6

TCCH Pattern Number

7

ICH Period

85

ICH Offset
ANCH MIMOANCH MIMO
(UL)
(DL)

MSB

9
MSID

10
11
12

LSB

Reserved

Table 5.41 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment 3" Message

A-GN4.00-03-TS

399

Sub-slot Number (Octet 2)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4

Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

1

:

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63

LCH Request Timing (Octet 3)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
80

UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +625us x the number of UL slot

1

Assignment PRU Number (Octet 3)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

1

1

1

4
0
0
0
:
1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3:
Assignment PRU number = 128

A-GN4.00-03-TS400

Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 4)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

1

:

4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

1

Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward:
255 steps forward(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) usPower Control Information (Octet 5)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0

5
1
1

4
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

3
1
1

2
1
1

1
1
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0

0
0

0
0

1
0

31 steps increase
30 steps increase

:

1
1

0
0

0
0

:

2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease(Note) Unit = 3 dB
TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number that the UL TCCH used as shown inAppendix D. MSID is absent when TCCH pattern number is not "Sub-slot number absent / MSID
present".

A-GN4.00-03-TS

401

Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1

1

:

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1

0

Other

Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMACore-sequence number 2 for OFDMACore-sequence number 3 for OFDMACore-sequence number 4 for OFDMACore-sequence number 5 for OFDMACore-sequence number 6 for OFDMACore-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC:
Sub-slot number absent / MSID present
ReservedICH Offset (Octet 6)
The frame used as ICH is indicated by the offset of the TDMA frame from CCH.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
1

3
0
0
0
0
1

:

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH

ICH Period (Octet 7)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

402

Bit
8
0
0
0
0
1

7
0
0
0
0
1

:

6
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

1

1

No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames:
16 frames

ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (UL) indicates MIMO type for UL ANCH.
Bit
4
0
0
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 7)
ANCH MIMO (DL) indicates MIMO type for DL ANCH.
Bit
2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

SISO
2 layers STBC
4 layers STBC
Reserved

MSID (Octet 8 - 12)
The length of MSID is 34 bits.

A-GN4.00-03-TS403

5.5.6.1.5 "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
BS uses this message to inform BS to standby. The message format is shown in Table 5.42, andthe explanation of information elements is shown in Table 5.43.
Table 5.42 "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
0
1
2
3

"LCH assignment standby" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

5

1
0
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
Reserved
stTiming0

4

7
8

TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing2

1

Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause

Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number

Shift Direction Control Information

9
10

3

Reserved

5
6

4

Reserved

11

TCCH Pattern Number

12

ICH Period

Power Control Information
ICH Offset

A-GN4.00-03-TS

404

Table 5.43 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Standby" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
7
0
0
Sub-slot number 1
0
1Sub-slot number 2
1
0
Sub-slot number 3
1
1
Sub-slot number 4
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

1

:

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63

LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
80

UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +625us x the number of UL slot

1

Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates standby reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
Other

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

Reserved
All BS slots in use
No BS free channel
No free outgoing line on wire side
LCH type disagreement
Traffic restriction
Relevant BS use impossible (zone selection impossible)
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

405

TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown inAppendix D. "LCH assignment message (Octet 7 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH patternof Octet 11.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1

0
1

Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMACore-sequence number 2 for OFDMACore-sequence number 3 for OFDMACore-sequence number 4 for OFDMACore-sequence number 5 for OFDMACore-sequence number 6 for OFDMACore-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC:
Sub-slot number absent
LCH assignment message (Octet 7-12) absent

:
1
1

1
1

Assignment PRU Number (Octet 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

1

1

1

4
0
0
0
:
1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3:
Assignment PRU number = 128

Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

1

:

4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

1

Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward:
255 steps forward

A-GN4.00-03-TS

406

(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) usPower Control Information (Octet 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0
0
1
1

5
1
1

4
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

:

3
1
1

2
1
1

1
1
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0

0
0

0
0

1
0

:
1
1

0
0

0
0

31 steps increase
30 steps increase
2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease(Note) Unit = 3 dB
ICH Offset (Octet 11)
The frame used with ICH is indicated by the offset of CCH from the TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
1

3
0
0
0
0
1

:

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH

A-GN4.00-03-TS

407

ICH Period (Octet 12)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

1

1

:

6
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

1

1

No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames:
16 frames

A-GN4.00-03-TS

408

5.5.6.1.6 "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
BS uses this message to inform that channel setup is not possible in response to a link channel(re-)request from MS. The message format is shown in Table 5.44, and the explanation of
information elements is shown in Table 5.45.
Table 5.44 "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet
1
2
3

"LCH assignment reject" message
BS → MS (DL)
SCCH
7

6

5

1
0
Message Type
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
Reserved
stTiming

1

0

4

7
8

TCCH Pattern Number
Sub-slot Number
LCH
Reque
st
Timing2

1

Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause

Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Assignment PRU Number

Shift Direction Control Information

9
10

3

Reserved

5
6

4

Reserved

11

TCCH Pattern Number

12

ICH Period

Power Control Information
ICH Offset

A-GN4.00-03-TS

409

Table 5.45 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Reject" Message
Sub-slot Number (Octet 2, 7)
Sub-slot number indicates timing used by UL TCCH as shown in Sections 3.5.5 of OFDMA and3.6.6 of SC.
Bit
8
0
0
1
1

7
0
1
0
1

Sub-slot number 1
Sub-slot number 2
Sub-slot number 3
Sub-slot number 4

Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2, 7)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

1

:

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63

LCH Request Timing (Octet 3, 8)
LCH request timing indicates LCCH timing of UL TCCH.
Bit
8
0
1

UL TCCH timing before 625us x the number of UL slots
UL TCCH timing before LCCH Interval value n x frame length (ms) +625us x the number of UL slot

A-GN4.00-03-TS

410

Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates rejected reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0
1
0
1

0

0

1

1

0

Other

Reserved
All BS slots in use
No BS free channel
No free outgoing line on wire side
LCH type disagreement
Traffic restriction
Relevant BS use impossible (zone selection
impossible)
Reserved

TCCH Pattern Number (Octet 6, 11)
TCCH pattern number indicates the core-sequence number of UL TCCH used as shown inAppendix D. "LCH assignment message (Octet 7 - 12) absent " can be set only to TCCH patternof Octet 12.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1
1

1
1

:

6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1

0
1

Core-sequence number 1 for OFDMACore-sequence number 2 for OFDMACore-sequence number 3 for OFDMACore-sequence number 4 for OFDMACore-sequence number 5 for OFDMACore-sequence number 6 for OFDMACore-sequence number 1 for SC
Core-sequence number 2 for SC
Core-sequence number 3 for SC
Core-sequence number 4 for SC
Core-sequence number 5 for SC
Core-sequence number 6 for SC:
Sub-slot number absent
LCH assignment message (Octet 7-12) absent

A-GN4.00-03-TS

411

Assignment PRU Number (Octet 8)
Assignment PRU number indicates assigned number for PRU.
Bit
7
0
0
0

6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

1

1

1

4
0
0
0
:
1

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

Assignment PRU number = 1
Assignment PRU number = 2
Assignment PRU number = 3:
Assignment PRU number = 128

Shift Direction Control Information (Octet 9)
Shift direction control information indicates control information of UL transmission timing for MS.
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

1

1

1

1

:

4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

1

1

Stay
1 step forward
2 steps forward
3 steps forward:
255 steps forward(Note) Unit = -4 × 30 / (512 + 64) usPower Control Information (Octet 10)
Power control information indicates control information of UL transmission power for MS.
Bit
6
0
0

5
1
1

4
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
1
1

3
1
1

2
1
1

1
1
0

0
0
0
1
1

1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0

0
0

0
0

1
0

31 steps increase
30 steps increase

:

1
0
0
1
0
0
(Note) Unit = 3 dB:

2 steps increase
1 step increase
Hold
1 step decrease
2 steps decrease:
31 steps decrease
32 steps decrease

A-GN4.00-03-TS

412

ICH Offset (Octet 11)
The frame used with ICH is indicated by the offset of CCH from the TDMA frame.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH offset.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no offset" is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0

1

1

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

1

:

No offset
TDMA frame after 1 frame from CCH
TDMA frame after 2 frames from CCH
TDMA frame after 3 frames from CCH:
TDMA frame after 15 frames from CCH

ICH Period (Octet 12)
The cycle of the TDMA frame that ICH uses is indicated.
Refer to Section 5.2.3.10 for intermittent transmission timing of ICH period.
When intermittent transmission timing information of ICH is not needed, "no scheduling" is set.
ICH Offset  ICH Period – 1 frame
Bit
8
0
0
0
0

7
0
0
0
0

1

1

6
0
0
1
1

5
0
1
0
1

1

1

:

No scheduling
2 frames
3 frames
4 frames:
16 frames

A-GN4.00-03-TS

413

5.5.6.2 UL SCCH
The format of message type for UL SCCH is shown in Table 5.46, and the coding is shown in
Table 5.47.
Table 5.46 Format of Message Type for UL SCCH
Bit

8

Octet

7

1

6

Message Type

5

4

3

2

1

Reserved

Table 5.47 Message Type Coding for UL SCCH
Bit
8
0

7
0

6
1
Other

5
0

"LCH assignment re-request" message
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS414

5.5.6.2.1 "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
MS can use this message for LCH re-assignment after a LCH assignment message from BS is
received. The message format is shown in Table 5.48, and the explanation of information
elements is shown in Table 5.49.
Table 5.48 "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
Message type:
Direction:
Function channel :
Bit
8
Octet

"LCH Assignment re-request" message
BS ← MS (UL)
SCCH
7

6

5
0

2

0
1
Message Type
Reserved

3

Reserved

0

1

4

3

2

1

Reserved
Temporary LCH Number
Cause

TDMA Slot

4

Table 5.49 Information Elements in "LCH Assignment Re-request" Message
Temporary LCH Number (Octet 2)
Temporary LCH number indicates temporary number to establish link channel.
Bit
6
0
0
0

5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

1

1

1

:
1

1

1

Temporary LCH number = 0
Temporary LCH number = 1
Temporary LCH number = 2:
Temporary LCH number = 63

A-GN4.00-03-TS

415

Cause (Octet 3)
Cause indicates re-request reason.
Bit
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Other

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Reserved
Assignment PRU use not possible
Assignment PRU non-corresponding MS
Assignment Scheduling term not possible
Request for assignment PRU
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (UL)
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (DL)
Notified MIMO Type use not possible (UL & DL)
Reserved

TDMA Slot (Octet 4)This information element indicates the TDMA slot that MS can use.
Bit
8
1/0

7
1/0
-

6
1/0
-

5
1/0
-

1st TDMA slot can be / not used.
2nd TDMA slot can be / not used.
3rd TDMA slot can be / not used.
4th TDMA slot can be / not used.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

416

Chapter 6 Channel Assignment
6.1 Overview
This chapter describes the link establishment control, the channel assignment control and theconnection control specification for radio-link. In Section 6.2, link establishment control is
described. Channel assignment control is described in Section 6.3; and connection control is
described in Section 6.4. Section 6.4 also defines the two channel access modes called “Fastaccess channel based on MAP mode (FM-Mode)” and “high Quality channel based on carrier
sensing mode (QS-Mode)”. FM-Mode is used for high-speed packet access. PRUs of EXCH areshared among MSs in FM-Mode. QS-Mode is used mainly for applications which require
guaranteed bandwidth or low latency. One PRU is dedicatedly assigned to one MS while the data
traffic is continued in QS-Mode. Radio state management is defined in Section 6.5; andparameters introduced in this chapter are summarized in Section 6.9.
6.2 Link Establishment Control
The sequences of incoming call and outgoing call are shown in Figure 6.1 and Figure 6.2.
MS
CCH

BS
ICH

CCH
PCH

ICH
Paging of coming callinformation

Request for linkchannelestablishment

TCCH
SCCH

Confirmation of

Allocate a channel

ICCH

channel assign
Communicating

Figure 6.1 Incoming Call Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS

417

The sequence of an incoming call is initiated by BS‟s transmitting PCH to MS. PCH includes
information on the MS being paged. By receiving the PCH from BS, MS is informed of theincoming call, and is requested to respond to the PCH. The MS indicated by the PCH transmits
TCCH as “LCH assignment request” message in UL CCH. MS shall choose one pattern using
random logic from 24 patterns consisting of Sub-slot (4 patterns) and Core-sequence number (6patterns). Upon the reception of TCCH by the BS, the BS transmits DL SCCH to notify theallocation of a communication channel to the MS. DL SCCH transports information not only on
the allocated channel but also on the transmission power and transmission timing that the MS
should use. Note that the BS can only recognize the MS by TCCH rather than MSID. After
receiving the channel allocation in response to the transmitted TCCH in the assigned
communication channel, the MS transmits the allocation confirmation to the BS with the rectified
transmission power and transmission timing.
MS
CCH

BS
ICH

CCH

ICH

Start anapplication
Request for link channel

TCCH

establishment
SCCH
Confirmation of

Allocate a channel

ICCH

channel assign
Communicating

Figure 6.2 Outgoing Call Sequence
Outgoing call sequence is initiated by MS‟s transmitting TCCH in UL CCH. MS chooses one offour sub-slots within a slot to transmit the TCCH in the UL CCH. The details on the sub-slots aredefined in Chapter 3. Not like the incoming call sequence, outgoing sequence can be initiated in
an arbitrary UL CCH. Outgoing call sequence after the transmission of TCCH is the same as theincoming call sequence.
Even when the BS receives two or more TCCHs from two or more MSs simultaneously, the BS
can allocate a communication channel to each MS, as long as the BS can recognize and identify
each TCCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

418

Figure 6.3 shows relation between LCH Assignment Request (TCCH) and LCH Assignment(SCCH). MS sends 2.5 ms or n * 5 + 2.5 ms before from downlink SCCH. Therefore, when a MS
sends LCH Assignment Request at timing (1), then the BS responses its LCH Assignment(SCCH) at timing (2) or (3).

LCCH interval n

(2)

(3)

TCCH

TCCH

Up

SCCH

SCCH

Down

2.5ms

(1)
SCCH

TCCH

Figure 6.3 Relation between LCH Assignment Request (TCCH) and LCH Assignment (SCCH)
6.3 Channel Assignment Control
BS always performs UL carrier sensing on communication channels before they are allocated toMS. If a communication channel is regarded vacant by carrier sensing for a fixed period of time
(four or more frames), it can be allocated to MS in DL SCCH after receiving the TCCH. At theallocated communication channel, the MS carries out DL carrier sensing for a fixed period of time
(four or more frames) to confirm if the communication channel is vacant or not, by measuring thesignal power. If the signal power is lower than defined threshold level, the MS transmits “linksetup request” message in the communication channel.
When two or more MSs transmit the TCCH with the same pattern and the same sub-slot, thecommunication channel allocation in DL SCCH can be received by two or more MSs. In such acase, multiple MSs may transmit “link setup request” message simultaneously in the samecommunication channel. Assume that BS detects the “link setup request” message from one ofthese MSs, and that BS returns the “LCH assignment” message to the MS, then other MSs will
not be able to receive the “link setup request” messages intended to them. Then these MSs,
which did not receive the “link setup request” messages, will retransmit the “LCH assignment
request” message on UL CCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

419

MS
CCH

BS
ICH

CCH

ICH
UplinkTCCH

carrier sense

SCCH
Downlink
carrier sense
ICCH
Communicating

Figure 6.4 Channel Assign Control

6.4 Connection Control
6.4.1 FM-Mode
6.4.1.1 Connection Control
Figure 6.5 shows the overview of the FM-Mode. The figure shows two MSs [MS1 and MS2]
accessing ICHs based on FM-Mode controlled by the BS. BS indicates the PRUs to MSs in active
state through the MAP field in DL ECCH. When MS receives the MAP field, it receives theinformation of which PRUs can be used for communication. Then MS uses these PRUs forcommunication with the BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

420

BS
Indication

Downlink
ECCH

Indication

MAP

Downlink
ECCH

MAP
Indication

Indication

Reference
Reference
AccessAccess

ICH

MS1

MS2

Figure 6.5 Connection Control of FM-Mode

For more information on the relationship between the MAP field and PRUs for FM-Mode, refer to
Section 4.4.6.8.
BS assigns EXCHs to MS by sending MAP field on ECCH. Figure 6.6 shows an example of
EXCHs assignment to two MSs. In this figure, MAP in the ANCH refers to the EXCH assigned to
the MS with MAP. MS1 and MS2 are sharing the same PRUs for EXCH in this figure.
1 frameMS1 ANCH

MAP

EXCH

MS2 ANCH

MS1

MAP

MAP

MAP

MS2

MS1

MAP

MAP

MS1

MS2

MS1

MS2

MAP

Figure 6.6 An Example of EXCH Assignment to Two MSs

A-GN4.00-03-TS

421

6.4.1.1.1 Access Timing
6.4.1.1.1.1 Overview
According to the slot number of allocated ANCH and the MS‟s processing capability, accesstiming to use EXCH after the reception of MAP field is defined.
Access timings, exactly timing 1 and timing 2, are negotiated by messages and information
elements in Access Establishment Phase. In addition, they are related on the number of slot in aframe. This section describes a definition of timing and a relation between their timing and frame
structure.
6.4.1.1.1.2 5ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 5ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the next TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
Figure 6.7 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for 5ms
frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the next TDMA frame after the MAP
is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.8 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for 5ms
frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second nextTDMA frame after
the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL TDMA
slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.

ANCH

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

DL
UL

Time
Access frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

422

ANCH

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

DL
UL

Time
Access frame
Figure 6.7 Timing 1 for 5ms frame

ANCH

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

DL
UL

Time
Access frame

ANCH

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

DL
UL

Time
Access frame
Figure 6.8 Timing 2 for 5ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS423

6.4.1.1.1.3 2.5ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 2.5ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the fourth TDMA frame.
Figure 6.9 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for
2.5ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.10 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for
2.5ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the fourth next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL
TDMA slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.

ANCH

DL
UL

Time

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

Access frame

ANCH

DL
UL

Time

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

Access frame
Figure 6.9 Timing 1 for 2.5ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

424

ANCH

DL
UL

Time

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

Access frame

ANCH

DL
UL

Time

EXCH

DL
UL

Time

Access frame
Figure 6.10 Timing 2 for 2.5ms frame

6.4.1.1.1.4 10ms frame unit
MS should control timing 1 and 2 for ANCH as following in 10ms frame unit.
- Timing 1 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the next TDMA frame.
- Timing 2 : Informations on ANCH should be reflected in the second TDMA frame.
Figure 6.11 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 1 for
10ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the next TDMA frame after
the MAP is received on the DL ANCH.
Figure 6.12 describes an example of relative timing of EXCH to ANCH in case of timing 2 for
10ms frame unit, in which the allocated EXCH is used by the MS in the second next TDMA frame
after the MAP is received on the DL ANCH. In the figures, ANCH can be allocated in any of DL
TDMA slots. The access frame in the figures indicates the TDMA frame where the communication
access on the allocated EXCH is possible.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

425

ANCH

EXCH

DL

Time

UL

DL

Time

UL
Access frame

ANCH

EXCH

DL

Time

UL

DL

Time

UL
Access frame
Figure 6.11 Timing 1 for 10ms frame

ANCH

EXCH

DL

Time

UL

DL

Time

UL
Access frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS

426

ANCH

EXCH

DL

Time

UL

DL

Time

UL
Access frame
Figure 6.12 Timing 2 for 10ms frame

6.4.1.1.1.5 MS processing capabilities
Table 6.1 shows processing capabilities of different MSs.
Table 6.1 MS Processing Capabilities
MS
processing
capabilities
High↑

Level 0Level 1
Level 2
Level 3↓
Low

Level 4

Explanation
Processing completes during the guard time between TDD UL and DL.
(51.67 us). MS can access the frame right after the MAP reception, it
does not depend on the ANCH position.
MS can complete its processing within 1 TDMA slot (625 us), thentransmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 1 TDMA slot but within 2
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 2 TDMA slots but within 3
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.
MS cannot complete its processing within 3 TDMA slots but within 4
TDMA slots, then transmit data in the UL TDMA slot.

The access timing is decided as shown in Table 6.2 by the processing capability of MS and the
TDMA slot number of allocated ANCH. When TDMA frame structure is 2.5ms frame unit or thenumber of DL slot is under 4 slots, TDMA slot number of allocated ANCH adopts from the fourth
to the first slot, in order. Example, when the number of DL slot is 2 slots, access timing for these
UL slot is that first DL slot adopts a condition of “The Third Slot” and second DL slot adopts a
condition of “The Fourth and Subsequent Slots”.
EXCH can be allocated to MS with a capability of timing 1 based on timing 2 when ANCH
scheduling control is used as explained in Section 9.5.4.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

427

Table 6.2 Access Timing
MS Processing
Capability

The First
Slot

The Second
Slot

The Third
Slot

The Fourth andSubsequent Slots

Level 0Timing 1

Timing 1

Timing 1

Timing 1

Level 1

Timing 1

Timing 1

Timing 1

Timing 2

Level 2

Timing 1

Timing 1

Timing 2

Timing 2

Level 3

Timing 1

Timing 2

Timing 2

Timing 2

Level 4

Timing 2

Timing 2

Timing 2

Timing 2

6.4.1.1.2 Bandwidth Request by MS
When MS requests bandwidth to the BS, MS informs the transmit data size to BS using the RCH
field in UL ANCH. According to the requested data size from the MS, BS reserves the bandwidthand informs bandwidth allocation through the MAP field on the DL ANCH.

MAP

ANCH

DL
UL

Time
RCH

EXCH

DL
Time

UL

Figure 6.13 Bandwidth Allocation in Accordance with MS‟s Request

6.4.1.1.3 DL EXCH Holding Duration
DL EXCH will not be released during DL EXCH holding duration to avoid ANCH assignment byneighboring BSs, even when the DL EXCH is not used for information transmission. Figure 6.14
shows the relationship between the valid EXCH transmission and DL EXCH holding duration.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

428

Less than DL EXCH
holding duration

DL EXCH holding duration

Release
EXCHs

DL
Time

UL

Figure 6.14 Maintenance Condition of DL EXCH

The hatched TDMA frames indicate EXCH which is used for information transfer. The plain
frames indicate DL EXCH which is not used for information transfer to any MSs in active state. In
these frames, BS may send idle burst on DL EXCH.
BS counts the number of frames from the last reception or transmission. When the count reaches
DL EXCH holding duration, BS releases the allocated EXCH. BS will reset the count if data has
been received or transmitted within DL EXCH holding duration.
6.4.1.2 Channel Selection
BS always carries out UL carrier sensing for unused PRUs in the entire bandwidth. The result ofcarrier sensing information will be used for channel selection.
6.4.1.2.1 Vacant PRU Judgment by UL Carrier Sensing
UL carrier sensing is carried out for UL EXCH monitoring time. Maximum value of UL carrier
sensing will be used for the judgment of the vacant PRUs. UL EXCH monitoring time should be
longer than DL EXCH holding duration. Based on this relationship, the neighbor BSs will avoid
using the PRUs which are occupied. BS should monitor continuously for the UL EXCH monitoringtime on all PRUs which the BS does not use in order to decide whether PRUs are vacant or
occupied by other BSs. If the UL EXCH monitoring time is shorter than DL EXCH holding duration,then the neighbor BSs may regard a PRU which is actually occupied by EXCH, as a free PRU.
Collisions will be caused if PRU is allocated to other MSs. Therefore, the UL EXCH monitoringtime should be longer than the DL EXCH holding duration.
DL EXCH holding duration

Release
EXCHs

DL
Time

UL

Figure 6.15 EXCH Release Timing

A-GN4.00-03-TS

429

6.4.1.2.2 ANCH Allocation
BS allocates a vacant PRU for ANCH based on carrier sensing result when it receives ”LCH
assignment request” message on the UL TCCH from a MS. It then transmits “LCH assignment
response” message using DL SCCH in order to inform which PRU is assigned for ANCH to theMS. The BS‟s decision on whether or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI
threshold for ANCH selection”. The MS shall measure the power level on assigned PRU when it
receives “LCH assignment response” message. The state of MS will move from idle state toactive state if the result of the DL carrier sensing is lower than “DL RSSI threshold for ANCH
selection”. The MS will send “LCH assignment re-request” message to the BS on the UL SCCH if
the result of the DL carrier sensing is higher than “DL RSSI threshold for ANCH selection”. Whenthe BS receives “LCH assignment re-request” message from the MS, it will carry out the channel
selection procedure except for the previously allocated PRU.
When the average SINR of a PRU is lower than “ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR threshold” in“extension function response” message, that condition is informed to BS using CQI. Details aredescribed in Section 8.2.5.

6.4.1.2.3 EXCH Allocation
Figure 6.16 shows information about EXCH selection. It means the transmission on selecting
PRUs for EXCH. Based on the UL carrier sensing and the CQI information from the MS, BS
selects PRUs and informs MS by MAP field on ANCH. The BS‟s decision on whether or not a
PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for EXCH selection”. MS calculates
moving average of SINR, which refers to DL SINR calculation time, for each PRU assigned to the
MS. CQI message is generated based on the average SINR calculated by MS.
MSBSDL SINR(assigned EXCH)CQIDL RSSI(non-assigned PRU)UL SINR
MAP

EXCH assignment

Result of UL
Carrier Sensing

Figure 6.16 Notification of EXCH Channel Selection Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

430

The result of UL carrier sensing is used as the UL radio information when BS allocates vacant
PRUs. Instead of allocating low-quality PRUs for the MS, BS will replace these with thehigher-quality PRUs based on the CQI information. PRU, of which the UL carrier sensing result is
lower than “UL RSSI threshold for EXCH selection”, is selected as a candidate PRU for allocation.
PRU refused by CQI is not allocated by BS for the MS.
When the vacant PRU is used, judgment of vacancy will be done by making use of result of the
UL carrier sensing as shown in Section 6.4.1.2.1.
BS calculates moving average of SINR, which refers to UL SINR calculation time, for every used
PRU. When BS selects active PRU, it prioritizes PRUs which have high average SINR values.
The refused PRUs notified in the CQI information are excluded from the selection.
6.4.2 QS-Mode
6.4.2.1 Channel Selection
BS always carries out UL carrier sensing for unused PRUs in the entire bandwidth. The result ofcarrier sensing information will be used for channel selection.
6.4.2.1.1 CSCH Allocation
When BS receives “LCH assignment request” message from the MS on the UL TCCH, it will
allocate a vacant PRU and sends “LCH assignment response” message to MS on DL SCCH. The
BS‟s decision on whether or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for
CSCH selection”. DL carrier sensing will be carried out on the designated PRU when MS receives“LCH assignment response” message. If the result of the DL carrier sensing is lower than “DL
RSSI threshold for CSCH selection”, the state of MS will move from idle state to active state. If
the result of the DL carrier sensing is higher than “DL RSSI threshold for CSCH selection”, theMS will send “LCH assignment re-request” message to the BS on the UL SCCH. BS will carry out
the channel selection procedure except for the previously allocated PRU when the BS receives“LCH assignment re-request” message.
When the average SINR of a PRU is lower than “ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR threshold” in“extension function response” message, that condition is informed to BS by CQI. Details aredescribed in Section 8.2.5.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

431

6.5 Radio State Management
Figure 6.17 describes the radio states of MS. MS has three states. They are idle state, active
state and sleep state.
ReleaseSession

Idle

Initiateconnection

ReleaseConnection(release session)

ActiveReleaseConnection(keep session)

Sleep
Re-establish
connection

Figure 6.17 State Transition of MS

Table 6.3 States of MS
State Name
Idle
ActiveSleep

Radio
Connection
State
Nothing
One or more
Nothing

QCS StateState of MS

Nothing
One or more
One or more

MS is waiting for paging messages.
Data exchange with BS using ICH.
MS keeps QCS, but no ICH is established.

A-GN4.00-03-TS432

6.5.1 Idle State
Idle state is a state without radio connection and QCS.
In idle state, MS receives its own “paging” messages only on its PCH group. In time of incoming
call or out-going call, MS in idle state is assigned an ICH from BS by SCCH and triggered toactive state. The figure shows the sequence of an MS to move from idle state to active state.

MS

BS

Idle
TCCH
SCCH
ICCH
ICCH
ActiveCommunicating

Figure 6.18 Move to Active StateMS transmits “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH to request ICH allocation. BS selects
the vacant PRU from the result of the UL carrier sensing and informs the number of the allocated
ICH through “LCH assignment response” message on DL SCCH. The BS‟s decision on whether
or not a PRU is vacant is made with regard to “UL RSSI threshold for ICCH selection”. MS carries
out the DL carrier sensing on the specified PRU when it receives “LCH assignment response”
message. MS will start transmission to the BS on this PRU if the result of the carrier sensing islower than “DL RSSI threshold for ICCH selection”. Then the PRU is used as ICCH. It isconsidered that the radio connection between MS and BS is established when BS receives UL
ICCH. MS will then perform initial radio settings to establish QCS and move itself to active state.

A-GN4.00-03-TS433

6.5.2 Active State
Active state is a state with one or more than one radio connections and QCSs.
In this state, MS can have one or more than one radio connections and QCSs. MS and BS can
exchange data using the radio connections. BS supervises data transmission and the reception. If
there is no data transmission and reception during sleep transfer time, BS releases all radio
connections but holds QCS connections, and the state of MS moves to sleep state.
The change from active state to sleep is executed according to the following procedure.
MS
ActiveBS

Connection release(sleep state )Connection release acknowledge

Tx OffTx OffSleep

Figure 6.19 Move to Sleep State
When MS transmits UL data or receives DL data, data communication supervision timer is started.
If there is data transmission or reception before timer expires, the timer will be restarted
automatically. When data is not transmitted and received during sleep transfer time, data
communication supervision timer will expire, and MS will send “connection release (sleep state)”message. BS transmits “connection release acknowledge” message when it receives themessage. MS and BS will then release radio connection, and move to sleep state as shown in
Figure 6.19.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

434

MS
ActiveBS

Connection release(Idle state )Connection release acknowledge

Tx OffTx Off

Idle

Figure 6.20 Move to Idle StateMS releases radio connection and QCS by “connection release (Idle state)” message when MS in
active state has no data to exchange and it becomes unnecessary to maintain radio connection.
MS will then move to idle state as shown in Figure 6.20.
6.5.3 Sleep State
Sleep state is a state which does not have radio connection but has QCS.
There is connection information between the BS and MS, despite that radio connection will be
released. MS receives “paging” messages on PCH in sleep state. MS then transmits “LCH
assignment request” message on TCCH to request ICH allocation. After MS re-establishes radio
connection to BS and recovers QCS connection, it will move to active state and communication
will be restarted.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

435

MS

BS

Sleep
PCH
TCCH
SCCH
ICCH
ICCH
ActiveCommunicating

Figure 6.21 Recovery from Sleep State by DL Data Generation

When it becomes unnecessary for MS to maintain QCS, it releases QCS and moves itself to idle
state.
6.6 Optional Radio State Management
A MS is in Active state when an radio connection has been established. If this is not the case, i.e.
no radio connection is established, the MS is in IDLE state.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

436

Active
Connection release

Connection
establishment

Idle

Figure 6.22 Recovery from Sleep State by DL Data Generation

6.6.1 Idle State- A MS specific DRX may be configured by upper layers.
- MS controlled mobility;- The MS:- Monitors a Paging channel to detect incoming calls, system information change;- Performs neighbouring cell measurements and cell (re-)selection;- Acquires system information.
6.6.2 Active State- Transfer of unicast data to/from MS.
- At lower layers, the MS may be configured with a MS specific DRX.
- Network controlled mobility.
- The MS:- Monitors a Paging channel and/ or System Information Broadcasting Block Type 1
contents to detect system information change;- Monitors control channels associated with the shared data channel to determine if datais scheduled for it;- Provides channel quality and feedback information;

A-GN4.00-03-TS

437

- Performs neighbouring cell measurements and measurement reporting;- Acquires system information.
6.7 ICH continuation transmission
ICH continuation transmission is expected to improve linkbudget. The receiver, both of BS andMS, receives same ANCH and EXCH during several frames. The control of this function as startand stop can be required by both of BS and MS. The information elements for this function areadded in ANCH/CSCH Switching Request, ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication and ANCH/CSCH
Switching Re-request.
Figure 6.23 shows to ICH continuation transmission is switched from inactive to active by each
MS and BS.

MS

BSNormal transmission

ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation

MS

BS
Normal transmission
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication

ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ICH Continuation Transmission

ICH Continuation Transmission

Figure 6.23 Control ICH Continuation transmission

6.8 Optional Random access procedure
The MS Access and establish the link to the network by optional Random Access (RA) procedure.
There are four messages for four steps of RA procedure and one message maps on one step.
The contention based random access procedure is described below:
The four steps of the contention based random access procedures are:1) Random Access Sequence on ATCCH in uplink:
There are two possible groups defined and one is optional. If both groups are
configured the size of message 3 and the pathloss are used to determine which group aaccess sequence is selected from. The group to which a access sequence belongs
provides an indication of the size of the message 3 and the radio conditions at the MS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

438

2)
-

3)
-

The access sequence group information along with the necessary thresholds arebroadcast on system information.
Random Access Response generated by MSL1 on ADSCH:
Semi-synchronous with message 1;
No HARQ;
Addressed to RA-MSID on ADECCH;
Conveys at least RA access sequence identifier, Timing Alignment information, initial
UL grant and assignment of Temporary C-MSID (which may or may not be madepermanent upon Contention Resolution);
Intended for a variable number of MSs in one ADSCH message.
First scheduled UL transmission on AUSCH:
Uses HARQ;
Size of the transport blocks depends on the UL grant conveyed in step 2 and is at least
80 bits.
For initial access:Conveys the high layer Connection Request generated by the high layer layer andtransmitted via ACCCH
For high layer Connection Re-establishment procedure:- Conveys the high layer Connection Re-establishment Request generated by the highlayer layer and transmitted via ACCCH;-

After handover, in the target cell:- Conveys the ciphered and integrity protected high layer Handover Confirm generated
by the high layer layer and transmitted via ADCCH;- Conveys the C-MSID of the MS (which was allocated via the Handover Command);

-

4)
-

For other events:- Conveys at least the C-MSID of the MS.
Contention Resolution on DL:
Not synchronised with message 3;
HARQ is supported;
Addressed to:- The Temporary C-MSID on ADECCH for initial access and after radio link failure;- The C-MSID on ADECCH for MS in high layer_CONNECTED;-HARQ feedback is transmitted only by the MS which detects its own MS identity, as

A-GN4.00-03-TS

439

provided in message 3, echoed in the Contention Resolution message;
The Temporary C-MSID is promoted to C-MSID for a MS which detects RA success and does notalready have a C-MSID; it is dropped by others. A MS which detects RA success and already has
a C-MSID, resumes using its C-MSID.
6.9 Summary of Parameters
Parameters used in Chapter 6 are summarized in Table 6.4 and Table 6.5.
Table 6.4 Parameters Related to Time Interval
Name

Description

UL EXCH Monitoring TimeTime interval during which BS continues UL carrier sensing
preceding EXCH allocation

DL EXCH Holding Duration

Time interval during which BS holds EXCH even if the EXCH is
not used for information transmission.

UL SINR Calculation TimeTime interval for which BS calculates moving average of ULSINR.

DL SINR Calculation TimeTime interval for which MS calculates moving average of DL
SINR.

Sleep Transfer TimeTime interval which MS waits before moving to sleep state
after the last transmission or reception took place.
Table 6.5 Parameters related to RSSI and SINR

Name

Description

UL RSSI Threshold for ANCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding ANCH allocation

DL RSSI Threshold for ANCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding ANCH allocation

UL RSSI Threshold for EXCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding EXCH allocation

UL RSSI Threshold for CSCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding CSCH allocation

DL RSSI Threshold for CSCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding CSCH allocation

A-GN4.00-03-TS

440

UL RSSI Threshold for ICCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to UL carrier
sensing result preceding ICCH allocation

DL RSSI Threshold for ICCH Selection

RSSI threshold which is compared to DL carrier
sensing result preceding ICCH allocation

ANCH/CSCH switch UL SINR Threshold

If UL SINR is lower than this threshold, BS Origin
ANCH/CSCH switch is triggered.

ANCH/CSCH switch DL SINR Threshold

If DL SINR is lower than this threshold, MS Origin
ANCH/CSCH switch is triggered.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

441

Chapter 7 Message Format and Information Elements
7.1 Overview
In this chapter, message formats in the access establishment phase after link assignment phaseare described. Information elements for each message are also defined. These messages aretransmitted or received on function channel such as ICCH, ACCH, EDCH or CDCH and themessages are mapped on MAC payload.
7.2 Message Format
7.2.1 Format Regulations
Figure 7.1 shows the basic message format. The protocol identifier is shown in the first octet, andmessage type is shown in the second octet. Message information are assigned from the 3rd octet.
These message information are described in Section 7.3.
The protocol identifier is defined in Section 4.5.4. Table 7.1 shows the protocol identifier, which isdefined as access establishment phase control.
Moreover, information element in message is shown as M or O. M is used in mandatory case in
the message. O is used in optional case in the message.
Bit

8

7

6

1/0

1/0

1/0

0

1/0

1/0

5
4
Protocol Identifier
1/0
1/0
Message Type
1/0
1/0

3

2

1

1/0

1/0

1/0

1/0

1/0

1/0

Message Information

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3~Figure 7.1 Message Format

Table 7.1 Protocol Identifier
Protocol TypeAccess Establishment Phase Control

Protocol Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

A-GN4.00-03-TS442

7.2.2 Message Type
Table 7.2 shows the message types.
Table 7.2 Message Type List
Message Name

Reference

Link Setup Request
Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
Extension Function Response
Link Setup Request (SC)
Connection Request
Connection Response
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
TDMA Slot Limitation Request
Additional LCH Confirmation
Additional LCH Indication
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Request Indication
Additional QCS Response
Additional QCS Rejection
Additional QCS Re-request
Connection Release
Connection Release Acknowledgement
QCS Release
QCS Release Acknowledgement
Authentication Information (1)Authentication Information (2)CQI ReportCQI Report Indication
Encryption Key Indication
QCS Status Enquiry Response
QCS Status Enquiry Request

7.2.2.1
7.2.2.3
7.2.2.4
7.2.2.5
7.2.2.2
7.2.2.6
7.2.2.7
7.2.2.8
7.2.2.9
7.2.2.10
7.2.2.11
7.2.2.12
7.2.2.13
7.2.2.16
7.2.2.17
7.2.2.18
7.2.2.19
7.2.2.20
7.2.2.21
7.2.2.22
7.2.2.23
7.2.2.24
7.2.2.25
7.2.2.26
7.2.2.27
7.2.2.28
7.2.2.14
7.2.2.15
7.2.2.29
7.2.2.30
7.2.2.31

Message Type Bit Assign
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
0 0 1 0 1 0 1 1
0 0 1 0 1 1 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 0
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 0
0 1 1 0 0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0 0 1 1 0

A-GN4.00-03-TS443

7.2.2.1 Link Setup Request
This message is used for confirmation of BS assigned channel and notification of MSID. In
addition, MS may notify channel type, and MS performance according to the requirement of
network. (Note 1) This message is used in only OFDM mode.
Table 7.3 Link Setup Request Message Contents
Message Type: Link Setup Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH
Information Element

Reference Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

MSID

7.3.3.13

UL

M

6~9

Protocol Version

7.3.3.14

UL

M

3

Extension Function Sequence 7.3.2.3

UL

M

1

Channel Type7.3.2.1ULO

1(Note 2)(Note 3)

MS Performance

7.3.3.12

UL

O

11~

(Note 3)Extension Function Number

7.3.3.11

ULO

3(Note 3)(Note 1) This message is not recommended to be transmitted dividedly in the MAC layer. The
option information element that cannot be transmitted by "Link setup request" message
should be send by "Extension function request" message.
(Note 2) MS notifies the available physical channel type for itself. BS notifies the physical channel
actually assigned for the communication.
(Note 3) It is necessary to specify the execution of sequence by "extension function request"
message, when it is impossible for data to be transmitted by “link setup request”
message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS444

7.2.2.2 Link Setup Request (SC)This message is used for confirmation of BS assigned channel and notification of MSID. Thismessage is used in SC mode. Response message for the Link Setup Request (SC) is same as
OFDM.
Table 7.4 Link Setup Request (SC) Message Contents
Message Type: Link Setup Request (SC)Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

MSID (SC)7.3.3.23

UL

M

5/6/8

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS445

7.2.2.3 Link Setup Response
This message is used for confirmation of channel type, communication parameter, etc.
Table 7.5 Link Setup Response Message Contents
Message Type: Link Setup Response
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH
Information Element

Reference Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

MSID

7.3.3.13

DL

M

6~9

Protocol Version

7.3.3.14

DL

M

3

Extension Function Sequence 7.3.2.3

DL

M

1

Channel Type7.3.2.1DLO

1(Note 1)

Communication Parameter

7.3.3.6

DL

O

11~

(Note 2)

(Note 1) BS responds indispensably when channel type is transmitted with “link setup request”
message.
(Note 2) BS responds indispensably when MS performance is transmitted with “link setup
request” message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS446

7.2.2.4 Extension Function Request
This message is used for request of extension function.
Table 7.6 Extension Function Request Message Contents
Message Type: Extension Function Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH
Information Element

Reference Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Channel Type7.3.2.1ULO

1(Note 1)MS Performance

7.3.3.12

UL

O

11~

(Note 1)

Extension Function Number

7.3.3.11

ULO

3(Note 1)

Source BS-info

7.3.3.20

UL

O

7(Note 2)

Power Report

7.3.3.24

ULO

3(Note 1) MS is indispensably transmitted when not transmitting with “link setup request” message.
(Note 2) When channel type shows handover, MS is indispensably transmitted.

A-GN4.00-03-TS447

7.2.2.5 Extension Function Response
This message is used for notification of area Information and notification of CCH superframe
configuration.
Table 7.7 Extension Function Response Message Contents
Message Type: Extension Function Response
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH
Information Element

Reference Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Channel Type7.3.2.1DLO

1(Note 1)

Communication Parameter

7.3.3.6

DL

O

11~

(Note 2)

CCH Superframe
Configuration

7.3.3.5DLO

13(Note 3)

Area Information

7.3.3.1DLO

10(Note 4)(Note 1) BS responds indispensably when channel type is transmitted with “extension function
request” message.
(Note 2) BS responds indispensably when MS performance is transmitted with “extension
function request” message.
(Note 3) Only when global definition information pattern sent by MS and global definition
information pattern maintained by BS is different, data is transmitted by BS.
(Note 4) Only when area information status number sent by MS and area information status
number maintained by BS is different, data is transmitted by BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

448

7.2.2.6 Connection Request
This message is used for notification of QoS, notification of connection type, etc.
Table 7.8 Connection Request Message Contents
Message Type: Connection Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Connection Type7.3.2.2

UL

M

1

Authentication Information 2

7.3.3.3

ULO

3~(Note 1)

QoS

7.3.3.17

ULO

3(Note 2)QCS Information

7.3.3.16

UL

O

4(Note 3)

Power Report

7.3.3.24

ULO

3

QCS Status
7.3.3.18
ULO
4~34(Note 4)(Note 1) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory.
(Note 2) In case of outgoing call, this information element is mandatory, otherwise omitted.
(Note 3) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory,
otherwise omitted.
(Note 4) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory,
otherwise omitted or only specifies QCSID 1.

A-GN4.00-03-TS449

7.2.2.7 Connection Response
This message is used for notification of QoS and connection-ID.
Table 7.9 Connection Response Message Contents
Message Type: Connection Response
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

QCS Information

7.3.3.16

DL

O

4(Note 1) (Note 4)

Connection-ID

7.3.3.7DL

O

3(Note 1)

Authentication Information 1

7.3.3.2DLO

3~(Note 3)

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

DL

O

4~34

(Note 5)Result of Location Registration 7.3.2.4

DL

O

1

(Note 2)Cause

7.3.3.4DL

O

4(Note 1)

MSID

7.3.3.13

DL

O

6~9

(Note 6)(Note 1) Connection is disconnected when connection-ID and QCS information is omitted. At thistime, the cause of disconnection will be shown as no connection-ID or no QCS
information.
(Note 2) Result of location registration is mandatory when connection type in “connection request”
message is location registration or outgoing call with location registration(Note 3) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory.
(Note 4) In case of outgoing call, handover or sleep restoration, this information element is
mandatory.
(Note 5) In case of handover or sleep restoration, this information element is mandatory, In caseof outgoing call omitted or only specifies QCSID 1, otherwise (=location registration)
omitted.
(Note 6) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set inConnection Response message, MS shall set the value in both this information element
and MSID field in SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall beavailable at the next transmission timing of LCH Request message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

450

7.2.2.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
This message is used for notification that MS has received “ANCH/CSCH switching indication”
message.
Table 7.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation Message Contents
Message Type
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Scheduling Information

7.3.3.19

ULO

5

Remark(Note)(Note)This information element is omitted when scheduling term in scheduling information shows
one TDMA frame.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

451

7.2.2.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
This message is used to request of handover or switching channel from BS to MS, change ascheduling, MIMO type for ANCH or control ICH Continuation Transmission.
Table 7.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication Message Contents
Message Type
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

PRU Information

7.3.3.15

DL

O

4(Note 1)

Scheduling Information

7.3.3.19

DL

O

5(Note 2)Connection-ID

7.3.3.7DL

O

3(Note 3)

MIMO Information

7.3.3.27

DL

O

3(Note 4)

ICH Continuation

7.3.3.28

DL

O

3(Note 5)

Transmission Information(Note 1) This information element is omitted when the message is sent as handover indication.
(Note 2) Scheduling term is considered to be one TDMA frame when the scheduling informationis omitted.
(Note 3) The Connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 4) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 5) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.

A-GN4.00-03-TS452

7.2.2.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
This message is used to request of handover or switching channel from MS to BS, change MIMO
type for ANCH or control ICH Continuation Transmission.
Table 7.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Request Message Contents
Message Type
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Cause

7.3.3.4

UL

M

4

Connection-ID

7.3.3.7

ULO

3(Note 1)

Target BS-info

7.3.3.21

UL

O

7(Note 2)MIMO Information

7.3.3.27

UL

O

3(Note 3)

ICH Continuation

7.3.3.28

ULO

3(Note 4)

Transmission Information(Note 1) The connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 2) MS notifies target BS-info by this information element when target BS is determined.
(Note 3) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 4) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.

A-GN4.00-03-TS453

7.2.2.11 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
This message is used to refuse request of ANCH/CSCH switching.
Table 7.13 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection Message Contents
Message Type
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Cause

7.3.3.4DL

M

4Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS454

7.2.2.12 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
This message is used to re-request of handover or switching channel from MS to BS, retry tochange MIMO type for ANCH or retry to control ICH Continuation Transmission, when MS has
rejected ANCH/CSCH switching indication from BS.
Table 7.14 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request Message Contents
Message Type
: ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthRemarkProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Cause

7.3.3.4

UL

M

4

Connection-ID

7.3.3.7

ULO

3(Note 1)

Target BS-info

7.3.3.21

UL

O

7(Note 2)MIMO Information

7.3.3.27

UL

O

3(Note 3)

ICH Continuation
Transmission Information

7.3.3.28

ULO

3(Note 4)(Note 1) The connection-ID is specified when the QCS of switched channel is specified. The
message is transmitted by switching the PRU when the connection-ID is omitted.
(Note 2) MS notifies target BS-info by this information element when target BS is determined.
(Note 3) MIMO Information is omitted when MIMO is not supported.
(Note 4) ICH Continuation Transmission Information is omitted when ICH Continuation
Transmission Information is not supported.

A-GN4.00-03-TS455

7.2.2.13 TDMA Slot Limitation Request
This message is used when MS requests a specific slot to be assigned. When the number of slot
is over 4 in the system, this message should not be used
Table 7.15 TDMA Slot Limitation Request Message Contents
Message Type: TDMA Slot Limitation Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

TDMA Slot Specification

7.3.2.5

UL

M

1Remark

7.2.2.14 CQI Report
This message is used to send CQI data that MS measures to BS.
Table 7.16 CQI Report Message Contents
Message Type: CQI Report
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

CQI

7.3.3.8

UL

O

12Power Report

7.3.3.24

ULO

3

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS456

7.2.2.15 CQI Report Indication
This message is used to direct the transmission of CQI.
Table 7.17 CQI Report Indication Message Contents
Message Type: CQI Report Indication
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Map Origin

7.3.3.22

DLO

3

Report Indication

7.3.3.25

DL

O

3

Remark

7.2.2.16 Additional LCH Confirmation
This message is used to notify that assigned channel is available for communication.
Table 7.18 Additional LCH Confirmation Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional LCH Confirmation
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS457

7.2.2.17 Additional LCH Indication
This message is used for notification of channel type and PRU information at adding
connection-ID.
Table 7.19 Additional LCH Indication Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional LCH Indication
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

PRU Information

7.3.3.15

DL

M

4

Channel type

7.3.2.1DL

M

1Remark

7.2.2.18 Additional QCS Request
This message is used to request additional QoS.
Table 7.20 Additional QCS Request Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional QCS Request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

QoS

7.3.3.17

ULO

3

QCS Information

7.3.3.16

UL

O

4

Connection type

7.3.2.2

UL

M

1

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS

458

7.2.2.19 Additional QCS Request Indication
This message is used to direct MS to send “additional QCS request” message.
Table 7.21 Additional QCS Request Indication Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional QCS Request Indication
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

QoS

7.3.3.17

DLO

3

QCS Information

7.3.3.16

DL

O

4

Connection Type7.3.2.2

DL

M

1Remark

7.2.2.20 Additional QCS Response
This message is used for notification of QCS information, Connection-ID etc.
Table 7.22 Additional QCS Response Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional QCS Response
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

QCS Information

7.3.3.16

DL

O

4

Connection-ID

7.3.3.7

DLO

3

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

DL

M

4~34

Remark(Note)(Note) When the additional LCH is unnecessary, connection-ID is omitted.

A-GN4.00-03-TS459

7.2.2.21 Additional QCS Rejection
This message is used to reject additional QoS.
Table 7.23 Additional QCS Rejection Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional QCS Rejection
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Cause

7.3.3.4DL

M

4Remark

7.2.2.22 Additional QCS Re-request
This message is used for re-request of extra QCS, when MS has rejected “additional LCH
indication” message from BS.
Table 7.24 Additional QCS Re-request Message Contents
Message Type
: Additional QCS Re-request
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Cause

7.3.3.4

UL

M

4Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS

460

7.2.2.23 Connection Release
This message is used to release connection-ID. It is also used to make connection-ID a sleep
state in addition.
Table 7.25 Connection Release Message Contents
Message Type: Connection Release
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

Disconnection Type7.3.3.9

Both

M

3~*

Cause

7.3.3.4

Both

O

4

Remark

MSID
7.3.3.13DL
O
6~9(Note)(Note) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set in Connection
Release message, MS shall set the value in both this information element and MSID fieldin SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall be available at thenext transmission timing of LCH Request message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

461

7.2.2.24 Connection Release Acknowledgement
This message is used to confirm release connection and the state of QoS.
Table 7.26 Connection Release Acknowledgement Message Contents
Message Type: Connection Release Acknowledgement
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

Both

M

4~34

Remark

MSID
7.3.3.13DL
O
6~9(Note)(Note) This information element is used to indicate temporary ID value. If this is set in Connection
Release Acknowledge message, MS shall set the value in both this information element
and MSID field in SCCH afterwards. Note that the value used for scrambling shall beavailable at the next transmission timing of LCH Request message.
7.2.2.25 QCS Release
This message is used to release QCS.
Table 7.27 QCS Release Message Contents
Message Type: QCS Release
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

QCS Information

7.3.3.16

Both

M

4

Cause

7.3.3.4

Both

O

4

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS462

7.2.2.26 QCS Release Acknowledgement
This message is used to confirm release of QCS, and the state of QoS.
Table 7.28 QCS Release Acknowledgement Message Contents
Message Type: QCS Release Acknowledgement
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

Both

M

4~34

Remark

7.2.2.27 Authentication Information 1
This message is used to authenticate MS.
Table 7.29 Authentication Information 1 Message Contents
Message Type: Authentication Information 1
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Authentication Information 1

7.3.3.2

DL

M

3~*

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS463

7.2.2.28 Authentication Information 2
This message is used to authenticate MS.
Table 7.30 Authentication Information 2 Message Contents
Message Type: Authentication Information 2
Significance: Local
Direction: UL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

UL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

UL

M

1

Authentication Information 2

7.3.3.3

UL

M

3~*

Remark

7.2.2.29 Encryption Key Indication
This message is used to transmit encryption key to MS.
Table 7.31 Encryption Key Indication Message Contents
Message Type: Encryption Key Indication
Significance: Local
Direction: DL
Function Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

DL

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

DL

M

1

Encryption Key Set

7.3.3.10

DL

O

3~*

Encryption Key Information

7.3.3.26

DL

O

6

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS464

7.2.2.30 QCS Status Enquiry Response
This message is used to notify its own status of QCS or as a response to “QCS status enquiry
request” message.
Table 7.32 QCS Status Enquiry Response Message Contents
Message Type: QCS Status Enquiry Response
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

Both

M

4~34

Cause

7.3.3.4

Both

O

4

Remark

7.2.2.31 QCS Status Enquiry Request
This message is used to confirm QCS status. Response to the transmission of “QCS status
enquiry response” message will be mandatory if this message is received.
Table 7.33 QCS Status Enquiry Request Message Contents
Message Type: QCS Status Enquiry Request
Significance: Local
Direction: BothFunction Channel : ICCH/EDCH/CDCH/ACCH
Information Element

Reference

Direction

Type

LengthProtocol Identifier

7.2.1

Both

M

1

Message Type

7.2.2

Both

M

1

QCS Status

7.3.3.18

Both

M

4~34

Remark

A-GN4.00-03-TS

465

7.3 Information Element Format
7.3.1 Format Regulations
The Bit 1 is considered single octet information element, while the Bit 0 is considered multiple
octet information elements.
Figure 7.2 shows the single octet information element format. The information element identifier isshown in the Bit 7~5, and information element contents are shown Bit 4~1.
Bit

8
Type
1

7
6
5
Information Element
Identifier:
1/0
1/0
1/0

4

3

2

1

Information Element Contents
1/0

1/0

1/0

Octet 1

1/0

Figure 7.2 Single Octet Information Element Format
Figure 7.3 shows the multiple octet information element format. The information element identifier
is shown in Octet 1, and the length of the information contents is shown in Octet 2. The
information contents are assigned from Octet 3 on.
Bit

8
Type
0

7
1/0

1/0

1/0

6

5
4
3
2
Information Element Identifier:
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
Length
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0
1/0

1
1/0
1/0

Information Element Contents

Octet 1
Octet 2Octet 3~Figure 7.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Format

A-GN4.00-03-TS

466

7.3.2 Single Octet Information Element Identifier
Table 7.34 shows the single octet information element identifiers.
Table 7.34 Single Octet Information Element Identifier List
Information Name

Information Identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1Channel Type1 0 0 1 ----Connection Type1 0 1 0 ----Extension Function Sequence

1 0 1 1 ----Result of Location Registration

1 1 0 0 ----TDMA Slot Specification

1 1 0 1 ----7.3.2.1 Channel Type
This information element is used to notify channel type.
Octet
1

Bit

8
Type
1

7

6
5
Channel Type

0

0

1

4
AssignChannelType32

PhysicalChannel Type

1
Reserved

Assign Channel Type (Octet 1)Bit
4
0 ANCH
1 CSCH
Physical Channel Type (Octet 1)
Bit
3
2
0/1 ANCH absent/present
0/1 CSCH absent/present
Figure 7.4 Channel Type

A-GN4.00-03-TS

467

7.3.2.2 Connection Type
This information element is used to notify connection type.
Octet
1

Bit

8
Type
1

7

6
5
Connection Type
0
1
0

4

3
2
Connection Type1

Connection Type (Octet 1)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
Unallocated (unassigned) number0001Outgoing call00
10Incoming call00
1
1
Location registration
01
0
0
Handover01
0
1
Restoration from sleep state0110Outgoing call with location registration
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.5 Connection Type7.3.2.3 Extension Function SequenceThis information element is used so that BS orders the start of extension function sequence to
MS.
Bit
Octet

8

1

Type
1

7
6
5
Extension Function
Sequence
0
1
1

4
Start
Indication

3

2

1

Reserved

Start Indication (Octet 1)
Bit
40 Extension function sequence absent
1 Extension function sequence present
Figure 7.6 Extension Function Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS

468

7.3.2.4 Result of Location Registration
This information element is used to notify result of the location registration.
Bit
Octet

8

1

Type
1

7
6
5
Result of Location
Registration
1
0
0

4

3

2

1

Result of Location Registration

Result of Location Registration (Octet 1)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
- Class of retry possible
0
0
0
0 OK
0
0
0
1 NG (Network trouble)00
1
0 NG (Temporary failure)001
1 NG (Timer expired)01
0
0 NG (Protocol error)
01
0
1 NG(Others)
1- Class of retry impossible
10
0
0 NG (User not contracted)
100
1 NG (Authentication error)
10
1
0 NG (Service un-implemented)
10
1
1 NG (Others)
1
1
0
0 NG (Call state and message mismatch)
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.7 Result of Location Registration

A-GN4.00-03-TS

469

7.3.2.5 TDMA Slot Specification
This information element is used to request to switch the connection of the specified slot toanother slot. When the number of slot is over 4 in the system, this information element should not
be used.
Octet
1

Bit

8
Type
1

Slot Number (Octet 1)
Bit
8
7
6
5
- 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 0/1 -7
6
5
TDMA Slot Specification
1
0
1

4

3

2

1

Slot Number

TDMA Slot 1 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 2 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 3 uncontrollable / controllable
TDMA Slot 4 uncontrollable / controllable
Figure 7.8 TDMA Slot Specification

A-GN4.00-03-TS

470

7.3.3 Multiple Octet Information Element Identifier
Table 7.35 shows the multiple octet information element identifiers.
Table 7.35 Multiple Information Element Identifier List
Information name

Information identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Area Information

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1

Authentication Information 10 0 0 0 0 0 1 0

Authentication Information 20 0 0 0 0 0 1 1

Cause

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

CCH Superframe Configuration

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1

Communication Parameter0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0

Connection-ID

0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1

CQI

0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

Disconnection Type0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1

Encryption Key Set

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0

Extension Function Number

0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1

MS Performance0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0

MSID

0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1

Protocol Version

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0

PRU Information

0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1

QCS Information

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

QoS

0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1

QCS Status

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0

Scheduling Information

0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1

Source BS-info

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0

Target BS-info

0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1

MAP Origin

0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0Power Report0 0 0 1 0 1 1 1

Report Indication

0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0

A-GN4.00-03-TS

471

Information name

Information identifier
Bit 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

Encryption Key Information

0 0 0 1 1 0 0 1

MIMO Information

0 0 0 1 1 0 1 0

ICH Continuation Transmission

0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1

Reserved

0 0 Other

Option0 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS472

7.3.3.1 Area Information
This information element is used so that MS can judge the communication area of BS.
Octet
1
2
3

Bit

8

7

0

0

6

5
4
3
Area information00
00Area Information Content Length101

Handover Process Level
Handover Destination Zone Selection Level
Target BS Search Level

7

9

0

Standby Zone Hold Level

5

8

1

Standby Zone Selection Level

4

6

2

ANCH/CSCH Switching FER Threshold Value
ANCH/CSCH Switching SINR Threshold Value
Area Information
Status Number

Reserved

Standby Zone Selection Level (Octet 3)
It specifies the threshold value level (CCCH) at which MS selects BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV(Note) 1 dB unit

A-GN4.00-03-TS

473

Standby Zone Holding Level (Octet 4)Specifies the threshold value level (CCCH) at which MS again selects BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV(Note) 1 dB unit
Handover Process Level (Octet 5)
It specifies the threshold value level (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS performs handover.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV(Note) 1 dB unit
Handover Destination Zone selection Level (Octet 6)
It specifies the threshold value level (C CCH) at which MS selects handover destination BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV(Note) 1 dB unit
Target BS Searching Level (Octet 7)
It specifies the threshold value level (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS searches handover destination
BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
1
0 80 dBuV
:
:
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0 30 dBuV
:
:
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0 10 dBuV(Note) 1 dB unit

A-GN4.00-03-TS

474

ANCH/CSCH Switching FER Threshold Value (Octet 8)
It specifies the number of errors of the 240 slots. And FER threshold value (ANCH/CSCH) shows
the number of errors at which the channel switching function of MS is activated.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Number of slot errors n = 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Number of slot errors n = 1
:
:
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0 Number of slot errors n = 240
Other
Reserved
ANCH/CSCH Switching SINR Threshold Value (Octet 9)
It specifies the SINR threshold value (ANCH/CSCH) at which MS performs channel switching
because of reception quality degradation.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0 SINR = -10 dB
:
:
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1 SINR = -1 dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 SINR = 0 dB
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 SINR = 1 dB
0

0

1

0
1
Other

0

0

0

SINR = 40 dB
Reserved

Area Information Status Number (Octet 10)
It shows the status number of area information reported by this information element.
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 No Area Information
00
1 Status number 1::
1
1
1 Status number 7
Figure 7.9 Area Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS475

7.3.3.2 Authentication Information 1
This information element is used to transmit authentication data, etc.
Bit
Octet

8

1

0

2

7

6
5
4
3
2
Authentication Information 1
0
0
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information 1 Content Length10Authentication Data 13~(Note) The content of authentication data is not specified here.
Figure 7.10 Authentication Information 1

Authentication Data 1 (Authentication Message Type) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Authentication method Request
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 Authentication method Response
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 Authentication method Acknowledge
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0 Transparent control information
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1 Encryption Indication
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 Encryption Request
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1 Re-Authentication Request
Other
Reserved
7.3.3.2.1 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Request)
Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Request)
0
0
0
0

2

1

0

1

A-GN4.00-03-TS476

7.3.3.2.2 Authentication Data 1 (Authentication method Acknowledge)
Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3
4

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Acknowledge)
0000Authentication method

2

1

1

1

Authentication method

5
Authentication method(Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -

2
0/1
-

1
0/1 Authentication Method 1 absent/present- Authentication Method 2 absent/present- Authentication Method 3 absent/present--

Authentication Method 8 absent/present

Authentication method(Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
- 0/1
- 0/1 - 0/1 :
0/1 (Note) BS notifies MS of authentication method.

Authentication Method 9 absent/present
Authentication Method 10 absent/present
Authentication Method 11 absent/present
Authentication Method 16 absent/present

7.3.3.2.3 Authentication Data 1 (Transparent control information)
Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3
4~

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type(Transparent control information)0001Authentication Information

2

1

0

0

Authentication Information (Octet 4~)
Authentication Information is transmitted between MS and network transparently via BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

477

7.3.3.2.4 Authentication Data 1 (Encryption Indication)

Octet

Bit

8

7

0

0

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Encryption Indication)0001
Encryption Method

3
4

2

1

0

1

Encryption Method

5

Random Number

6~21
Encryption Method (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 :
-

3
-

2
-

1
-

-

-

0/1 Encryption Method 8 absent/present

Encryption Method (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 :
-

3
-

2
-

1
-

-

-

0/1 Encryption Method 16 absent/present

Encryption Method 1 absent/present
Encryption Method 2 absent/present
Encryption Method 3 absent/present

Encryption Method 9 absent/present
Encryption Method 10 absent/present
Encryption Method 11 absent/present

Random Number (Octet 6~21)
Challenge value for challenge and response authentication check. This is a random value.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

478

7.3.3.3 Authentication Information 2
This information element is used to transmit authentication data etc.
Bit
Octet

8

1

0

2
3~

7

6
5
4
3
2
Authentication Information 2
0
0
0
0
0
1
Authentication Information 2 Content Length11Authentication Data 2(Note) The content of authentication data is not specified here.
Figure 7.11 Authentication Information 2

Authentication Data 2 (Authentication Message Type) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0 Reserved
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1 Authentication method Request
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0 Authentication method Response
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1 Authentication method Acknowledge
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0 Transparent control information
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1 Encryption Indication
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0 Encryption Request
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1 Re-Authentication Request
Other
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS479

7.3.3.3.1 Authentication Data 2 (Authentication method Response)
Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3
4

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Authentication method Response)00
00Authentication method

2

1

1

0

Authentication method

5
Authentication method(Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -

2
0/1
-

1
0/1 Authentication Method 1 absent/present- Authentication Method 2 absent/present- Authentication Method 3 absent/present--

Authentication method(Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
- 0/1
:
0/1 -

2
0/1
-

1
0/1 Authentication Method 9 absent/present- Authentication Method 10 absent/present- Authentication Method 11 absent/present--

Authentication Method 8 absent/present

Authentication Method 16 absent/present

A-GN4.00-03-TS480

7.3.3.3.2 Authentication Data 2 (Transparent control information)

Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3
4~

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type(Transparent control information)0001Authentication Information

2

1

0

0

Authentication Information (Octet 4~)
Authentication Information is transmitted between MS and network transparently via BS.

7.3.3.3.3 Authentication Data 2 (Re-Authentication Request)

Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Re-Authentication Request)
0
0
0
1

2

1

1

1

2

1

1

0

7.3.3.3.4 Authentication Data 2 (Encryption Request)
Bit
Octet

8

7

0

0

3
4
5
6~21

6
5
4
3
Authentication Message Type
(Encryption Request)
00
01
Encryption Method
Encryption Method
Response Value

A-GN4.00-03-TS

481

Encryption Method (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 :
-

3
-

2
-

-

-

Encryption Method 1 absent/present
Encryption Method 2 absent/present
Encryption Method 3 absent/present
Encryption Method 4 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 8 absent/present

Encryption Method (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 :
-

3
-

2
-

1
-

-

-

1
-

Encryption Method 9 absent/present
Encryption Method 10 absent/present
Encryption Method 11 absent/present
Encryption Method 12 absent/present
0/1 Encryption Method 16 absent/present

Response Value (Octet 6~21)
Response value for challenge and response check.
7.3.3.4 Cause
The information element is used to describe the reason and location of message generation.

Octet
1

Bit

8

7

4

5

4

3

2

1

0
0
1
Cause Content Length

0

0

Cause
0

0

2
3

6

CodingStandard

0

Location
Cause ValueReserved
Reserved

Coding Standard (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
0
0 XGP
1
1 Specific to the local network standard
Other
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

482

Location (Octet 3)
Bit
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
Other

3
0
1
0
1

MS
BS
Network
Other
Reserved

Cause Value (Octet 4)Bit
8 7 6 5 4 3
0 0 0 - - 0 0 0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1

1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1

- 0 0
0 0
1 0 - 0 0
0 0
0 0
0 1
1 1
Other

0
1
0
1
1
0
1

0

1 0

0

1 1

1

0 0

1

0 1

1

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1

2
- Normal class
0 Normal disconnect
Response to QCS status enquiry request
1 Others- Resource busy class
1 No vacant PRU (include no slot available)
0 No available PRU
1 No route to specified transit network
0 No connection-ID
1 No QCS information
0 Equipment abnormal
1 Others- Resource down class
1 Temporary failure
0 Network out of order
1 Others- Service not available class
1 Requested function not responding
1 Service or option not implemented, unspecified (include nochannel adding function at BS side)- Invalid message (e.g.: Parameter out of range) class
1 Assigned PRU non corresponding
0 No channel adding function- Procedure error class
1 Message abnormal
0 Information element abnormal
1 Sequence abnormal
0 Timer expiration
1 Other procedure error classReserved
Figure 7.12 Cause

A-GN4.00-03-TS

483

7.3.3.5 CCH Superframe Configuration
This information element is used to notify superframe configuration of CCH.
Bit
Octet

8

1

0

7

6
5
4
3
2
CCH Superframe Configuration
0
0
0
0
1
0
CCH Superframe Configuration Content Length

2

1
1

3
4

Reserved
LCCH Interval Value n
Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP
Paging Area Number Length np

5

Reserved

6

Control Carrier
Structure

7
8

Battery Saving Cycle
Maximum Value nBS
Frame Basic Unit LengthnSUB

Reserved
Broadcasting Status
Global Definition Information
Indication
Pattern
Protocol Version

Reserved

910

Number of Same Paging
Groups nSG
PCH Number nPCH

Reserved

1112
13

BSID Area Bit Length nBL
MCC (Mobile Country Code)MNC (Mobile Network Code)LCCH Interval Value n (Octet 3)
It shows the DL LCCH slot intermittent cycle.
Bit
6
0
0
0
0

5
0
0
0
0

4
0
0
0
0

0

1

0

1

1

1

3
0
0
0
0

2
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1

1

0

0

1

1

1

:
:

Reserved
n=1
n=2
n=3
:
n = 20:n = 63

A-GN4.00-03-TS

484

Paging Grouping Factor nGROUP (Octet 4)
It shows the value of PCH information corresponding to the number of group divisions.
Bit
8
0
0
0

7
0
0
0

1

1

6
0
0
1

5
0
1
1

1

1

:

LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)nGROUP = 1
nGROUP = 2:
nGROUP = 15

(Note) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging group
number does not exceed 127.
Paging Area Number Length np (Octet 4)
It shows the bit length of the paging area number included in BSID.
Bit
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

3
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

Reserved
np = 4
np = 6
np = 8np = 10np = 12
np = 13
np = 14np = 15
np = 16
np = 17
np = 18
np = 19
np = 20
np = 21
np = 22(Note 2) np must be the same even in a different paging area if handover between paging areas is
executed.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

485

Number of Same Paging Groups nSG (Octet 5)
It shows the number of PCH slots belonging to the same paging group in the LCCH superframe.
Bit
6
0
0
1

5
0
0
:
1

4
0
1
1

LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)nSG = 1:nSG = 7

Battery Saving Cycle Maximum Value nBS (octet 5)
It shows the times that BS continuously sends the same paging signal to the paging group.
Bit
3
0
0
1

2
0
0
:
1

1
0
1
1

LCCH superframe is not constructed (option)nBS = 1:nBS = 7

Control Carrier Structure (Octet 6)
It shows the presence or absence of a mutual relationship between paging group and number of
LCCHs used by the relevant BS.
Bit
8
0

7
0

0

1

1

0

1

1

Shows that only 1 LCCH is used.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and each individual LCCH isindependent.
Shows that 2 LCCHs are used, and PCH paging groups are mutuallyrelated.
Reserved

PCH Number nPCH (Octet 6)
It shows the number of PCHs in the frame basic unit.
Bit
6
0
0
1

5
0
0
:
1

4
0
1
1

No PCH (optional)
1 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 1):
7 PCH slots in frame basic unit (nPCH = 7)

(Note 3) If LCCH is multiplexed, the values of nPCH and nGROUP will be set so that the paging
group number does not exceed 127.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

486

Frame Basic Unit Length nSUB (Octet 6)
It shows the length of the LCCH superframe structural element (frame basic unit).
Bit
3
0
0
1

2
0
0
:
1

1
0
1

(Optional)
nSUB = 1:
nSUB = 7

1

Broadcasting Status Indication (Octet 8)
It shows the presence or absence of information broadcasting messages other than “radio
channel information broadcasting” message sent on the relevant LCCH.
Bit
6
1/0

5
1/0
-

4
1/0
-

“System information broadcasting” message present / absent“Optional information broadcasting” message present / absent
Reserved

Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 8)
It shows the relevant pattern number of the present “radio channel information broadcasting”
message. When “radio channel information broadcasting” message changes, the new global
definition information pattern is set.
Bit
4
0
0
0

3
0
0
0

1

1

2
0
0
1

1
0
0
0

1

0

:
Other

Global definition information pattern (0)Global definition information pattern (1)Global definition information pattern (2):Global definition information pattern (7)Reserved

Protocol Version (Octet 9)
It shows protocol version supported by BS.
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other

2
1/0

1
1/0
-

Version 1 present / absent
Version 2 present / absent
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

487

BSID Area Bit Length nBL (Octet 10)
It shows the BSID area bit length included in the BS information.
Bit
5
0
0
0

4
0
0
0

1

1

3
0
0
0
:
0
Other

2
0
0
1

1
0
1
0

0

1

nBL = 15nBL = 16nBL = 17:nBL = 40
Reserved

Mobile Country Code (Octet 11-12)
It is used to indicate a mobile phone operator along with Mobile Network Code.
Mobile Network Code (Octet 12-13)
It is used to indicate a mobile phone operator along with Mobile Country Code.
Figure 7.13 CCH Superframe Configuration

A-GN4.00-03-TS

488

7.3.3.6 Communication Parameter
This information element is used to notify MCS, map timing etc.
Bit
Octet

8

1

0

2
3
4

7

6

5
4
3
2
Communication parameter
0
0
0
0
1
1
Communication parameter Content Length

OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for ULOFDM MCS for DL
OFDM MCS for DL

6

8
9
10
11
12

0

OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL

5

7

1

Map
Timing
EXCH Timing
Retransmission
Times(Note)
HARQ Method
Reserved

MAP Origin
Window Size

Reserved
CombineSequence
NumberExpansion

Full
SubReError Correct Encoding
carrierservedMode
Antenna Switch
Number of Layers (DL)(DL)
SDMA Stream Number
Information
MIMO (DL)(Note) MS notifies BS the maximum value that can correspond by MS performance. BS decides
the retransmission time, and indicates it by communication parameter.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

489

OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 0/1
Other
SC MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
SC MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 Other

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

3
-

2
-

1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

3
-

2
-

1
-

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
Reserved
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present

64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
π/2- BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
π/2- BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
π/4- QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
π/4- QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
8PSK [ 3/4 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present

64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

490

OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 6)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 -

3
-

2
-

1

Other

-

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
Reserved
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present

64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

Map Timing (Octet 7)Bit
80 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 7)
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32

EXCH Timing (Octet 8)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Level 000
1 Level 10
1
0 Level 20
1
1 Level 3
1
0
0 Level 4
Other
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

491

Window Size (Octet 8)
Bit
5
4
3
0
0
0 Reserved00
1 Window size pattern 10
10 Window size pattern 2::1
1
1 Window size pattern 7
MAC Combine (Octet 8)Bit
20 MAC Combine absent
1 MAC Combine present
Sequence Number Expansion (Octet 8)Bit
1
0 Sequence Number Expansion absent
1 Sequence Number Expansion present
Retransmission Times (Octet 9)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 No Retransmission00
1 Once010 Twice::1
1
1 7 times
Full Subcarrier Mode (Octet 9)
Bit
50/1 Full Subcarrier Mode function absent / present
Error Correction Encoding (Octet 9)
Bit
4
3
2
0/1 - Convolutional encoding (Mandatory) absent/present- 0/1 - Turbo coding (Optional) absent/present- 0/1 Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

492

HARQ Method (Octet 10)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - CC-HARQ absent/present- 0/1 - IR-HARQ (Optional) absent/present- 0/1 Reserved
Antenna Switch (DL) (Octet 10)
Bit5
4
0/1 - Switching each slot absent / present- 0/1 Switching each frame absent / present
Number of Layers (DL) (Octet 10)
Bit
3
2
1
0/1 - 2 layers absent / present- 0/1 - 4 layers absent / present- 0/1 Reserved
SDMA Stream Number Information (Octet 11)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Reserved000
1 SDMA Stream Number Information = 100
10 SDMA Stream Number Information = 2
:
:
1
1
0
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 12
Other
Reserved
MIMO (DL) (Octet 12)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0/1 - Expansion of bit (Note 1)- 0/1 - STBC absent / present- 0/1 - SM absent / present- 0/1 - EMB absent / present
Other
Reserved(Note 1) If Bit 8 is set “1”, MS and BS should consider next octet as expanded MIMO Information.
Figure 7.14 Communication Parameter

A-GN4.00-03-TS493

7.3.3.7 Connection-ID
This information element is used to notify connection-ID.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2

6

5
4
3
Connection-ID0001Connection-ID Content Length

Connection-ID

3
Connection-ID (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
:
1
1
1
1

2

1

1

1

Reserved

Connection-ID 1
Connection-ID 2
Connection-ID 3:
Connection-ID 16
Figure 7.15 Connection-ID

7.3.3.8 CQIThis information element is used to notify the CQI to BS that is measured by MS.
Bit
Octet
1
2

8

7

6

5

0

0

0

0
1
CQI Content Length

3

2

1

0

0

0

RMAP (MSB)

3::
RMAP (LSB)

11
12

4
CQI

MAP Origin

Reserved

RMAP is the number based on MAP origin. MS notifies the status of PRU as CQI, as requested
by BS. CQI information is composed of RMAP. RMAP notifies the status of PRU.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

494

RMAP (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
-

5
0/1
-

4
0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

RMAP (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1

5
-

4
-

3
-

2
-

1
-

5
0/1
-

4
0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

Map Origin (Octet 12)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
1
1

4
0
1
0

:
RMAP (Octet 11)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1-

1

Accept/Refuse PRU 1
Accept/Refuse PRU 2
Accept/Refuse PRU 3
Accept/Refuse PRU 4
Accept/Refuse PRU 5
Accept/Refuse PRU 6
Accept/Refuse PRU 7
Accept/Refuse PRU 8

Accept/Refuse PRU 9
Accept/Refuse PRU 10
Accept/Refuse PRU 11:

Accept/Refuse PRU 65
Accept/Refuse PRU 66
Accept/Refuse PRU 67
Accept/Refuse PRU 68
Accept/Refuse PRU 69
Accept/Refuse PRU 70
Accept/Refuse PRU 71
Accept/Refuse PRU 72

SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32
Figure 7.16 CQI

A-GN4.00-03-TS495

7.3.3.9 Disconnection Type
This information element is used to notify disconnected connection-ID, etc.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2
3~*

Continuation

6

5
4
3
Disconnection type00
10Disconnection Type Content Length
Connection-ID

2

1

0

1

Disconnection
Type

Reserved

Continuation (Octet 3)Bit
8
0 Last octet
1 Continuation (Note)(Note) When continuation is set to 1, other connection-ID and disconnection type is followed to
the next octet.
Connection-ID (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
:
1
1
1
1

Connection-ID 1
Connection-ID 2
Connection-ID 3:
Connection-ID 16

Disconnection Type (Octet 3)
Bit
3
2
0
0 Release connection and transit to sleep state0
1 Release connection and transit to idle state
Others Reserved
Figure 7.17 Disconnection Type

A-GN4.00-03-TS496

7.3.3.10 Encryption Key Set
This information element is used to report the key for performing encryption.
Octet

Bit

1

8

7

0

0

2

6

5
4
3
Encryption key set0010
Encryption Key Set Content Length

2

1

1

0

Encryption Key

3~*

Figure 7.18 Encryption Key Set
7.3.3.11 Extension Function NumberThis information element is used to notify global definition information pattern and area
information number.
Octet
1
2
3

Bit

8
0

7

6
5
4
3
2
Extension Function Number
0
0
0
1
0
1
Extension Function Number Content Length

Global Definition Information
Pattern

Area Information
Status Number

1
1Reserved

Global Definition Information Pattern (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Global definition information pattern 00010 Global definition information pattern 1
:
:
1
1
1
0 Global definition information pattern 7
Other
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

497

Area Information Status Number (Octet 3)
Bit
4
3
2
0
0
0 No area information
00
1 Area information status number 1::
1
1
1 Area information status number 7
Figure 7.19 Extension Function Number

A-GN4.00-03-TS

498

7.3.3.12 MS PerformanceThis information element is used to notify MCS, EXCH timing, etc.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

6

5
4
3
MS Performance
001
1
MS Performance Content Length2

OFDM MCS for DL

6

10
11

0

OFDM MCS for DL

5

9

0

OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL

4

8

1

OFDM MCS for UL / SC MCS for UL

3

7

2

EXCH Timing
Synthesizer

Self-owned Bandwidth
Error Correct Encoding

HARQ Method
Window Size

RF Number

Full
Subcarrier
Mode

Antenna Switch
Number of Layers (UL)
(UL)
Retransmission Times
Com- Sequence
Number(Note)
bine Expansion
MIMO (UL)(Note) MS notifies BS the maximum value that can correspond by MS performance. BS decides
the retransmission time, and indicates it by communication parameter.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

499

OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 OtherSC MCS for UL (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
SC MCS for UL (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 Other

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

3
-

2
-

1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

3
-

2
-

1
-

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present

256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
π/2 BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
π/2 BPSK 3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
π/4 QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
π/4 QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
8PSK [ 3/4 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present

64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present
256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

500

OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1
OFDM MCS for DL (Octet 6)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 Other

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

3
-

2
-

1
-

Modulation class [Puncturing rate, Efficiency]
BPSK [1 , 0.5] absent/present
BPSK [3/4 , 0.67] absent/present
QPSK [1 , 1] absent/present
QPSK [4/6 , 1.5] absent/present
16QAM [1 , 2] absent/present
16QAM [4/6 , 3] absent/present
64QAM [3/4 , 4] absent/present
64QAM [6/10 , 5] absent/present

256QAM [4/6 , 6] absent/present
256QAM [8/14 , 7] absent/present
Reserved

EXCH Timing (Octet 7)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Level 000
1 Level 10
1
0 Level 20
1
1 Level 3
1
0
0 Level 4
Other
Reserved
Self-owned Bandwidth (Octet 7)
Bit
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0
0 1 SCH00
0
0
1 2 SCHs000
10 3 SCHs
:
:
1
1
1
1
1 32 SCHs

A-GN4.00-03-TS

501

Synthesizer (Octet 8)
Bit
8
7
0
0 No center frequency switching capability (Note 1)0
1 Center frequency switching time class 1 (Note 2)
1
0 Center frequency switching time class 2 (Note 3)
1
1 Center frequency switching time class 3(Note 1) BS shall always assign same band to the MS.
(Note 2) When adjacent slots are used within/beyond a frame, BS shall assign same band to theMS.
(Note 3) When adjacent slots next to each other across the TX/RX or RX/TX switching timing areused, BS shall assign same band to the MS.
Error Correction Encoding (Octet 8)
Bit
6
5
4
0/1 - Convolutional encoding (Mandatory) absent/present- 0/1 - Turbo coding (Optional) absent/present- 0/1 Reserved
RF Number (Octet 8)
Bit
3
2
0
0 RF number 1
0
1 RF number 2
1
0 RF number 3
1
1 RF number 4
Full Subcarrier Mode (Octet 8)
Bit
1
0/1 Full Subcarrier Mode function absent / present

A-GN4.00-03-TS

502

HARQ Method (Octet 9)
Bit
8
7
6
0/1 - CC-HARQ absent/present- 0/1 - IR-HARQ (Optional) absent/present- 0/1 Reserved
Antenna Switch (UL) (Octet 9)Bit
5
4
0/1 - Switching each slot absent / present- 0/1 Switching each frame absent / present
Number of Layers (UL) (Octet 9)
Bit
3
2
1
0/1 - 2 layers absent / present- 0/1 - 4 layers absent / present- 0/1 Reserved
Window Size (Octet 10)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 Reserved00
1 Window size pattern 10
10 Window size pattern 2::1
1
1 Window size pattern 7
Retransmission Times (Octet 10)
Bit
5
4
3
0
0
0 No Retransmission00
1 Once010 Twice::1
1
1 7 times
MAC Combine (Octet 10)
Bit
2
0 MAC Combine absent
1 MAC Combine present

A-GN4.00-03-TS503

Sequence Number Expansion (Octet 10)
Bit
1
0 Sequence Number Expansion absent
1 Sequence Number Expansion present
MIMO (UL) (Octet 11)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0/1 - Expansion bit (Note 1)- 0/1 - STBC absent / present- 0/1 - SM absent / present- 0/1 - EMB absent / present
Other
Reserved(Note 1) If Bit 8 is set “1”, MS and BS should consider next octet as expanded MIMO Information.
Figure 7.20 MS Performance

A-GN4.00-03-TS504

7.3.3.13 MSID
This information element is used to notify MSID.
Bit
Octet

8

7

6

1

0

0

0

0

MSID Indicator
0
0

2
3

5

4

3

2

1

MSID
0
1
1
MSID Content Length

0

1

(MSB)

MSID

MSID

4

MSID

5

MSID

6
MSID

7

(LSB)

Reserved

Bit
Octet

8

7

6

1

0

0

0

2
3

5

3

2

1

MSID
0
1
1
MSID Content Length

0

1

MSID Indicator
0
0
1

(MSB)

MSID

MSID

4

MSID

5
6

4

MSID

(LSB)

Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

505

Bit
Octet
1

8

7

6

4

3

2

1

0
1
1
MSID Content Length

0

1

MSID
0

0

0

2
3

5

MSID Indicator
0
1
0

(MSB)
MSID

4

MSID

5

MSID

6

MSID

7

MSID

8
9

MSID

MSID

(LSB)

Reserved

MSID Indicator (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 34 bits MSID
00
1 24 bits MSID
01
0 50 bits MSID
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.21 MSID

A-GN4.00-03-TS506

7.3.3.14 Protocol Version
This information element is used to notify protocol version.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

6

5
4
3
Protocol Version
0
0
1
1
Protocol Version Content Length

2

2

1

1

0

Protocol Version Number

3
Protocol Version Number (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other

2
0/1

1
0/1 Version 1 absent / present- Version 2 absent / present
Reserved

Figure 7.22 Protocol Version

7.3.3.15 PRU Information
This information element is used to specify additional PRU.
Octet
1

Bit

8

7

0

0

2
3
4

Map
Timing(Note)

65
4
3
PRU Information
00
1
1
PRU Information Content Length
Map Origin (Note)PRU Number

2

1

1

1

Reserved
Reserved(Note) Map timing and map origin are considered to be undefined, when assign channel type in“link setup request” message or “extension function response” message is CSCH.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

507

Map Timing (Octet 3)Bit
80 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
1
1

3
0
1
0
1

SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32PRU Number (Octet 4)Bit
8 7 6 5 4
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0
0 0 0 0 0:
1 1 1 1 1

3
0
0
1

2
0
1
0

1

1

PRU 1
PRU 2
PRU 3
:
PRU 128

Figure 7.23 PRU Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

508

7.3.3.16 QCS Information
This information element is used to notify QCS-ID.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

6

5
4
3
QCS Information01
00
QCS Information Content Length

2

2

1

0

0

Connection Status

3

Connection Status

4

Connection Status (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0/1 - QCS-ID 1 connection absent/present- 0/1 - QCS-ID 2 connection absent/present- 0/1 - QCS-ID 3 connection absent/present::- 0/1 QCS-ID 8 connection absent/present(Note) Octet 3, Bit 8 (QCS-ID=1(for control)) is always set to 1 on sender. (Don‟t care forreceiver)
Connection Status (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
0/1 - 0/1 - 0/1 :
-

3
-

2
-

-

-

1
-

QCS-ID 9 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 10 connection absent/present
QCS-ID 11 connection absent/present:
0/1 QCS-ID 16 connection absent/present

Figure 7.24 QCS Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS509

7.3.3.17 QoSThis information element is used to notify QoS.
Bit
Octet

8

7

6

1

0

0

0

2

5

4

QoS
1
0
QoS Content Length

Reserved

3

3

2

1

0

0

1

QoS Number

QoS Number (Octet 3)Bit
4 3 2 10 0 0 0 LAC
0 0 0 1 PLC
0 0 1 0 nl-VRC
0 0 1 1 al-VRC
0 1 0 0 Ld-BE
0 1 1 0 Voice
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.25 QoS
7.3.3.18 QCS Status
This information element is used to notify QCS Status.
Octet

Bit

8

7

6

5
4
3
2
1
QCS Status
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
2
QCS Status Content Length
3
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
4
Reserved
QoS Number
5
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
6
Reserved
QoS Number::
33
QCS-ID
Connection-ID
34
Reserved
QoS Number(Note) Omit the setting of QCS-ID=1 on sender. And receiver ignores setting of QCS-ID=1.
(Note) Omit the setting of unused QCS(s).
A-GN4.00-03-TS

510

QCS-ID (Octet 3~33)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 QCS-ID 1000
1 QCS-ID 200
1
0 QCS-ID 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 QCS-ID 16(Note) Omit the setting of QCS-ID=1 on sender. And receiver ignores setting of QCS-ID=1.
Connection-ID (Octet 3~33)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Connection-ID 1
000
1 Connection-ID 2
00
1
0 Connection-ID 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 Connection-ID 16
QoS Number (Octet 4~34)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 QoS Number 1
00
0
1 QoS Number 2
00
1
0 QoS Number 3
:
:
1
1
1
1 QoS Number 16
Figure 7.26 QCS Status

A-GN4.00-03-TS

511

7.3.3.19 Scheduling Information
This information element is used to notify scheduling information.
Octet
1

Bit

8

7

0

0

2
3

6

5
4
3
Scheduling Information01
00
Scheduling Information Content Length

Scheduling Term

2

1

1

1

Reserved
Active Frame

4

Active Frame

5
Scheduling Term (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0
1 TDMA frame
000
1
2 TDMA frames
00
1
0
3 TDMA frames
:
:
1
1
1
1
16 TDMA frames
Active Frame (Octet 4)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
-

4
0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

Frame 1 not active/active
Frame 2 not active/active
Frame 3 not active/active
Frame 4 not active/active
Frame 5 not active/active
Frame 6 not active/active
Frame 7 not active/active
Frame 8 not active/active

A-GN4.00-03-TS

512

Active Frame (Octet 5)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0/1 0/1 0/1 0/1
-

4
0/1
-

3
0/1
-

2
0/1
-

1
0/1

Frame 9 not active/active
Frame 10 not active/active
Frame 11 not active/active
Frame 12 not active/active
Frame 13 not active/active
Frame 14 not active/active
Frame 15 not active/active
Frame 16 not active/active

Figure 7.27 Scheduling Information

7.3.3.20 Source BS-infoThis information element is used to notify source BS-info before performing handover.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2
3
4
5
6
7

(MSB)

6

5
4
3
Source BS-info01
01
Source BS-info Content Length

2

1

0

0

BS-infoBS-infoBS-infoBS-infoBS-info(LSB)

Figure 7.28 Source BS-info

A-GN4.00-03-TS

513

7.3.3.21 Target BS-infoThis information element is used to notify BS-info of handover schedule.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2
3

(MSB)

6

5
4
3
Target BS-info01
01
Target BS-info Content Length

2

1

0

1

BS-infoBS-info4

BS-info5

BS-info6

BS-info7(LSB)(Note) This information element is used to notify BS-info before performing handover.
Figure 7.29 Target BS-info

7.3.3.22 MAP Origin
This information element is used to notify MAP origin.
Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2
3

Map
Timing

6

5
4
3
MAP Origin
01
0
1
MAP Origin Content Length
Map Origin

2

1

1

0

Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

514

Map Timing (Octet 3)Bit
80 Timing 1
1 Timing 2
Map Origin (Octet 3)
Bit
7
6
5
4
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
:
1
1
1
1

3
0
1
0

SCH 1
SCH 2
SCH 3
:
SCH 32

1

Figure 7.30 MAP Origin

7.3.3.23 MSID (SC)This information element is used to notify MSID in Link Setup Request (SC) message. This
information element has particular structure in order to reduce the message size.
Bit
Octet

8

7

6

1
2

MSID Indicator
0
0
0

5
4
3
Protocol version Number
(MSB)

1

MSID

MSID

3

MSID

4

MSID

5
6

2

MSID

(LSB)

Reserved

Start
Indication

A-GN4.00-03-TS

515

Bit
Octet

8

7

6

1

5
4
3
Protocol version Number

MSID Indicator
0
0
1

2

(MSB)

2

1

MSID

MSID

3

MSID

4
MSID

(LSB)

8

7

6

0

MSID Indicator
1
0

5

Start
Indication

Reserved

Bit
Octet
1
2

5
4
3
Protocol version Number
(MSB)

1

MSID

MSID

3

MSID

4

MSID

5

MSID

6

MSID

7
MSID

8
Protocol Version Number (Octet 1)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
Other

2

2
-

(LSB)

Reserved

Start
Indication

1
0/1 Version 1 absent / present
Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

516

MSID Indicator (Octet 2)
Bit
8
7
6
0
0
0 34 bits MSID
00
1 24 bits MSID
01
0 50 bits MSID
Other
Reserved
Start Indication (Octet 6/5/8)
Bit
4
0 Extension function sequence absent
1 Extension function sequence present

Bit
Octet

8

7

1

0

0

2
3

Map
Timing6

5
4
3
Protocol Version Number
01
0
1
MAP Origin Content Length
Map Origin

2

1

1

0

Reserved

Figure 7.31 MSID (SC)A-GN4.00-03-TS

517

7.3.3.24 Power Report
This information element is used to notify ANCH transmission power margin by MS.
Octet

Bit

1

8

7

0

0

6

5
4
3
Power Report01
01Power Report Content Length

2

2

1

1

1

Transmission Power Margin

3
Transmission Power Margin (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
4
3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
1
0
1
0
0
Other
(Note) 1dB unit

2
0
0

1
0
1

0

0

0 dB
1 dB
:
80 dB
Reserved

Figure 7.32 Power Report
7.3.3.25 Report Indication
This information element is used to indicate of transmitting each CQI Report and Power Report,
or both.
Octet
1

Bit

8

7

0

0

2
3

ReportIndication
Content

65
43Report Indication01
10Report Indication Content Length

2

1

0

0

Reserved

A-GN4.00-03-TS

518

Report Indication Content (Octet 3)
Bit
8
70/1 - CQI Request absent/present- 0/1 Power Report Request absent/present
Figure 7.33 Report Indication

7.3.3.26 Encryption Key Information
This information element is used to notify encryption key information.
Bit
Octet

8

1

0

2

7

6
5
4
3
2
Encryption Key Information
0
0
1
1
0
0
Encryption Key Information Content Length

1
1

Key Lifetime

6

Key Lifetime (Octet 6)
Key Lifetime notifies MS of encryption key lifetime.
Figure 7.34 Encryption Key Information
7.3.3.27 MIMO Information
This information element is used to negotiate or change MIMO type for ANCH.
Bit
Octet
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
MIMO Information
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
MIMO Information Content Length
23

ANCH MIMO(UL)ANCH MIMO
(DL)

1
0

SDMA Stream Number
Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

519

ANCH MIMO (UL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
0
0 SISO0
1 2 layers STBC
1
0 4 layers STBC
1
1 Reserved
ANCH MIMO (DL) (Octet 3)
Bit
6
5
0
0 SISO0
1 2 layers STBC
1
0 4 layers STBC
1
1 Reserved
SDMA Stream Number Information (Octet 3)
Bit
4
3
2
1
0
0
0
0 Reserved000
1 SDMA Stream Number Information = 100
10 SDMA Stream Number Information = 2
:
:
1
1
0
0 SDMA Stream Number Information = 12
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.35 MIMO Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

520

7.3.3.28 ICH Continuation Transmission Information
This information element is used to start and stop ICH Continuation Transmission .
Octet
1
2
3

Bit

8

7

6
5
4
3
2
1
ICH Continuation Transmission Information
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
ICH Continuation Transmission Information Content Length

ICH Transmission Times (UL)ICH Transmission Times (DL)ICH Transmission Times (UL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Once (disable)
00
0
1 Twice
0
0
1
0
~
1
0
0
1 10 times
Other
Reserved
ICH Retransmission times (DL) (Octet 3)
Bit
8
7
6
5
0
0
0
0 Once (disable)
00
0
1 Twice
0
0
1
0
~
1
0
0
1 10 times
Other
Reserved
Figure 7.36 ICH Continuation Transmission Information

A-GN4.00-03-TS

521

7.3.4 Information Element Rules
7.3.4.1 Error processThis section describes about error processing of messages and information elements in Access
Establishment Phase Control.
7.3.4.1.1 Protocol Identifier
When the message which has not protocol identifier “Access Establishment Phase Control” isreceived, receiver shall ignore the message.
7.3.4.1.2 Incomplete message
When the message of which actual length is shorter than expected is received, receiver shall
ignore the message.
7.3.4.1.3 Unexpected message type or message sequence error
When unexpected message is received, receiver shall ignore the message and no state transition
occurs.
7.3.4.1.4 Mandatory information element error
7.3.4.1.4.1 Missing mandatory information element
When the message which does not include mandatory information element(s) is received,
receiver shall ignore the message and no state transition occurs.
7.3.4.1.4.2 Invalid mandatory information element
When the message which includes invalid mandatory information element(s) is received, themessage shall be ignored at reception side, and no state transition carried out.
When the message which has longer data length than expected one is received, reception side
shall ignore extra content(s).
When the message which has shorter data length than expected one is received, the message isidentified as a message which contains contents error.

A-GN4.00-03-TS522

7.3.4.1.4.3 Unexpected mandatory information element
When the message which has unexpected mandatory information element(s) is received, receiver
shall ignore the unexpected information element(s).
Other information elements shall be adopted if they are expected ones.
7.3.4.1.4.4 Unrecognized mandatory information element
When the message which has unrecognized mandatory information element(s) is received,
receiver shall ignore the unrecognized information element(s).
Other information elements shall be adopted if they are recognized one.
7.3.4.1.5 Optional information element error
When a message which contains one or more invalid optional information elements is received,
receiver acts only for information elements which contains valid contents.
When a information element which has longer content length than expected one is received, theinformation element is valid until the content length which is expected.
When a information element which has shorter content length than expected one is received, theinformation is recognized as error information element.
7.3.4.2 Information elements orderThis section describes about the order of each information element for message transmission andreception, as follows.
<In case of message transmission>
Information elements are set from smaller information element code. Single octet information
element is judged by filling the lower four bits with zero.
< In case of message reception >Receiver does not care information element order.
(Note) Even if reception information elements are not set from smaller information element code,
receiver always recognize as correct information elements.

A-GN4.00-03-TS523

7.3.4.3 Duplicated information elements
This section describes about the operation when duplicated information elements are set in themessage, as follows.
<In case of message reception>
Receiver shall process only acceptable duplicated information elements from the top, and ignore
subsequent unacceptable duplicated information elements.
(Note) The number of duplication of information elements is only one in the current standard.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

524

Chapter 8 Sequence
8.1 Overview
In this section, the standard control sequences between BS and MS are described. The names ofmessages transmitted and received between MS and BS are defined in Chapter 7.
8.2 Sequence
8.2.1 Outgoing Call
Figure 8.1 shows sequence of an outgoing call.
The control order is as follows:[1]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment by transmitting “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH to
BS, and BS assigns a LCH by sending/transmitting “LCH assignment response” message on
SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start ofcommunication by sending/transmitting “link setup request” message when it judges that theassigned channel is not interfered and available. MS also notifies BS the communication ability,
MSID etc in this message. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication bysending/transmitting “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified by “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is outgoingcall.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

525

MS

BS

Idle or Sleep StateLCH Assignment RequestTCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request

ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (outgoing call) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
Authentication Information (2)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Encryption Key Indication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Connection Response(Note 3)(Note 3)(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 4) (Note 5)

Active State
Communication

Figure 8.1 Outgoing Call Sequence

Note 1 When these control messages are transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the
MAC header is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 This message is optional.
Note 4 When connection type is outgoing call with location registration, the sequence becomes asimilar sequence with that of an outgoing call. At this time, the result of location registration
is notified with “connection response” message.
Note 5 In case of having received Connection Response message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.

A-GN4.00-03-TS526

8.2.2 Incoming Call
Figure 8.2 shows incoming call sequence.
The control order is as follows:[1] Paging and LCH Assignment Request and Response
Paging message is sent on PCH from BS. MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending“LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH, and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH
assignment response” message on SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start ofcommunication by sending “Link Setup Request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of thecommunication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication bysending “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is an incoming
call.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

527

MS

BS

Idle or Sleep State
PagingLCH Assignment Request

PCH
TCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request
Extension Function Response
Connection Request (incoming)
Authentication Information (1)Authentication Information (2)Encryption Key Indication
Connection Response

ICCH
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
ICCH/ ACCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 3)

Active State
Communication
Figure 8.2 Incoming Call Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 In case of having received Connection Response message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

528

8.2.3 Release
8.2.3.1 Connection Release
8.2.3.1.1 Connection Release from MS
Figure 8.3 shows the sequence of connection release from MS.
“connection release” message is used when connection-ID is released.
MS

BS

Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
Connection Release

Idle or Sleep State

Figure 8.3 Connection Release from MS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 In case of having received Connection Release Acknowledgement message including
MSID information element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID
information element afterwards.

A-GN4.00-03-TS529

8.2.3.1.2 Connection Release from BS
Figure 8.4 shows the sequence of connection release from BS. “connection release” message isused when connection-ID is released.
MS

BS

Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note 1) (Note 2)
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Release Acknowledge EDCH/CDCH (Note 1)
Connection Release

Idle or Sleep State

Figure 8.4 Connection release from BS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 In case of having received Connection Release message including MSID information
element, MS shall use temporary ID value which is set in MSID information element
afterwards.
8.2.3.2 QCS Release
8.2.3.2.1 QCS Release Triggered by MS
Figure 8.5 shows the sequence of QCS release triggered by MS.
“QCS release” message is used when QCS information is released.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

530

MS

BS

Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
QCS Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH (Note)
QCS Release

Idle State
Figure 8.5 QCS Release Triggered by MS Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.2.3.2.2 QCS Release Triggered by BS
Figure 8.6 shows the sequence of QCS release triggered by BS.
When QCS is released, “QCS release” message is used.
MS

BS

Active State
Communication
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
QCS Release Acknowledgement EDCH/CDCH
QCS Release(Note)(Note)

Idle State
Figure 8.6 QCS Release Triggered by BS Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

531

8.2.4 Location Registration
Figure 8.7 shows the location registration sequence. Location registration is activated when MS
moves to others paging area, or is powered at a different paging area. Home Location Register(HLR) control in network executes the location registration control. MS sends the location
registration data on ICCH before the call connection. The control order is as follows:[1]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[2] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start ofcommunication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of thecommunication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS the function to use in this communication bysending “link setup response” message.
[3] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when this message is necessary.
[4] Connection Request
MS notifies the kind of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is “location
registration”.
[5] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[6] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[7] Connection Response
Connection-ID is omitted and the result of location registration is notified in a “connection
response” message. Moreover, cause value in cause information element is set to noconnection-ID, and connection is disconnected.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

532

MS

BS

Idle or Sleep StateLCH Assignment RequestTCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request

ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (location registration) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Authentication Information (1)ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (2)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Response (location registration) EDCH/CDCH(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 3)

Idle or Sleep State
Figure 8.7 Location Registration Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Connection-ID is omitted when the result of location registration is notified. In addition,
cause value in cause information element is set to no connection-ID and connection is
disconnected.

A-GN4.00-03-TS533

8.2.5 ANCH/CSCH Switching
8.2.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS
Figure 8.8 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching sequence triggered by MS.
When BS receives “ANCH/CSCH switching request” message, it transmits “ANCH/CSCH
switching indication” message to MS and MS performs required functions as channel switching,
ICH Continuation Transmission and MIMO.
BS
Original
ChannelMS

Added
ChannelCommunication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation

ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note 1) (Note3)(Note 1) (Note3)(Note 1)
(Note 2)

Active State
Communication

Figure 8.8 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by MS Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on by ICCH, while communicating in FM-Mode. Thismessage is transmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.

A-GN4.00-03-TS534

8.2.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS
Figure 8.9 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching sequence triggered by BS.
BS transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS When it detects thecommunication quality degradation and MS performs required functions as channel switching,
ICH Continuation Transmission and MIMO.
BS
Original
ChannelMS

Added
ChannelCommunication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation

ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note 1) (Note 3)(Note 4)(Note 1)
(Note 2)

Active State
Communication

Figure 8.9 ANCH/CSCH Switching Triggered by BS Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message istransmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.

A-GN4.00-03-TS535

8.2.5.3 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection
Figure 8.10 shows the sequence of ANCH/CSCH switching rejection sequence.
BS transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching rejection” message to MS when BS receive “ANCH/CSCH
switching request“ message from MS.

BS
Original
ChannelMS

Added
ChannelCommunication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection

ICCH/ACCH (Note 1) (NoteEDCH/CDCH 2)
ICCH/ACCH(Note 1)
EDCH/CDCH

Active State
Communication

Figure 8.10 ANCH/CSCH Switching Rejection Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message istransmitted on with ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 3 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.

A-GN4.00-03-TS536

8.2.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
Figure 8.11 shows the sequence of “ANCH/CSCH switching re-request” message triggered byBS.
BS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS when it detects the communication
quality degradation transmits. MS then transmits “ANCH/CSCH switching re-request” message
instead of performing channel switching.
BS
Original
ChannelMS

Added
ChannelCommunication
Active State
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Re-request
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
ANCH/CSCH Switching Confirmation

ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note 1) (Note3)(Note 1) (Note3)(Note 1) (Note3)(Note 1)
(Note 2)

Active State
Communication

Figure 8.11 ANCH Switching Re-request Sequence
Note 1 This message is transmitted on ICCH while communicating in FM-Mode. This message istransmitted on ACCH or CDCH while communicating in QS-Mode.
Note 2 This message is mandatory when communicating in ANCH/CSCH scheduling mode
(intermittent transmission).
Note 3 When ICH Continuation Transmission is required, ICH Continuation Transmission
Information should be set.
Note 4 When MIMO is supported, MIMO Information should be set.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

537

8.2.6 Handover
8.2.6.1 Normal Handover Triggered by BS
Figure 8.12 shows the normal handover sequence triggered by BS.
The control order is as follows:[1] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
BS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message and indicates handover on detecting
the communication quality degradation. MS shuts down the power and conduct transmission
on receiving “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message.
[2]LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[3] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies start of thecommunication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of thecommunication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[4] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[5] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[6] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[7] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[8] Connection Response
BS notifies MS of Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

538

MS
Old channel New channel

Serving BS

Target BS

Communication
Active
State

Idle
State

Idle
State

ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment RequestTCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request

ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (Handover) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Authentication Information (2)ICCH/ ACCH
Encryption Key Indication
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Connection Response(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1)
(Note 1)

ActiveState
Communication
Figure 8.12 Normal Handover Triggered by BS Sequence

Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.

A-GN4.00-03-TS539

8.2.6.2 Normal Handover Triggered by MS
Figure 8.13 shows the normal handover sequence triggered by MS.
The control order is as follows:[1] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
MS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching request“ message when it detects the communication
quality degradation, and BS indicates handover by sending “ANCH/CSCH switchingindication“ message. MS shuts down the power and conduct transmission on receiving“ANCH/CSCH switching indication“ message.
[2] LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[3] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. When MS notifies the start ofcommunication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of thecommunication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[4] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message.
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[5] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[6] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[7] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[8] Connection Response
BS notifies MS Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

540

MS
Old Channel New Channel

Serving BS

Target BS

Communication
Active
State

Idle
State

Idle
State

ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment RequestTCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request

ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (Handover) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (2) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Encryption Key Indication
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Response
EDCH/CDCH(Note 3)(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1)
(Note 1)

ActiveState
Communication
Figure 8.13 Normal Handover Triggered by MS Sequence
Note 1 When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header
is set as 00 or 01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Normal handover is performed when MS cannot find any target BS-info or communication
quality degradation.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

541

8.2.6.3 Seamless Handover
Figure 8.14 shows the seamless handover sequence.
The control order is as follows:[1]TDMA Slot Limitation Request
To search BS in the surrounding, MS transmits “TDMA slot limitation request“ message to BS
and makes the slot vacant. Then MS searches for other BSs in the surrounding.
[2] ANCH/CSCH Switching Request and Response
MS sends “ANCH/CSCH switching request“ message and indicates target BS to serving BS.
Serving BS requests slot to target BS, and target BS responds slot to serving BS. Serving BS
then sends “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message to MS and indicates handover totarget BS.
[3] LCH Assignment Request and Response
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request“ message on TCCH,
and BS assigns a LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH.
[4] Link Setup Request and Response
MS performs carrier sensing for the assigned LCH channel. MS notifies the start ofcommunication by sending “link setup request” message when it judges that this assigned
channel is not interfered and available. In this message, MS also notifies BS of thecommunication ability, MSID etc. BS notifies MS of the function to use in this communication
by sending “link setup response” message.
[5] Extension Function Request and Response
When the extra function of this LCH is necessary to be negotiated or changed, the content of
the function change is notified with “extension function request and response” message
This message can be omitted if it is not necessary. It is notified with “extension function
request” message when necessary.
[6] Connection Request
MS notifies the type of QoS connection to BS. The connection type in this case is handover.
[7] Authentication
The authentication information is transmitted between BS and MS when it is necessary in thissequence. The authentication method is not specified in this document.
[8] Encryption Key Indication
BS transfers the encryption key to MS.
[9] Connection Response
BS notifies MS of Connection-ID, QCS information, etc.
[10]Connection Release
After MS performed handover and transited to the active state, MS or BS sends “connection
release” message and radio connection is released.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

542

MS
Old Channel New Channel

Serving BS

Target BS

Communication
Active
State

Idle
State
TDMA Slot Limitation Request

ICCH/ACCH
EDCH/CDCH

ICCH/ ACCH
ANCH/CSCH Switching Request (Target BS-Info) EDCH/CDCH(Note 1)
(Note 3)
Slot Request

ICCH/ ACCH Slot Response
ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication EDCH/CDCH
LCH Assignment RequestTCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Link Setup Request

ICCH
ICCH

Link Setup Response
Extension Function Request

ICCH
Extension Function Response
ICCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Request (Handover) EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (1)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Authentication Information (2)EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Encryption Key Indication
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Connection Response
EDCH/CDCH(Note 1)
(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1) (Note 2)(Note 1)
(Note 1)

ActiveState
Communication
Connection Release

ICCH/
EDCH/CDCH(Note 1) (Note 4)

Idle
State
Figure 8.14 Seamless Handover Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS

543

Note 1 When control data is transmitted with DCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is set as 00 or
01.
Note 2 This is one example for the authentication sequence.
Note 3 Seamless handover is done when there is target BS-info and the communication quality
degrades.
Note 4 After MS performed handover and transit to active state, MS or BS sends “connection
release” message and radio connection is released.
8.2.7 Link Channel Establishment
8.2.7.1 Link Channel Assignment
Figure 8.15 shows LCH assignment response sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS sends “LCH assignment response” message on SCCH when it cannot assign LCH.
MS

BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Response

TCCH
SCCH

Figure 8.15 Link Channel Assignment Response Sequence
8.2.7.2 Link Channel Assignment Standby
Figure 8.16 shows LCH assignment request, standby and response sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH, when BS
cannot assign LCH temporarily, BS suspends assignment of LCH, and BS sends “LCH
assignment standby” message on SCCH. When BS is ready to assign LCH, BS assigns LCH by“LCH assignment response” message SCCH.
MSBSLCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Standby

TCCH
SCCH

LCH Assignment Response

SCCH

Access Establishment Phase
Figure 8.16 Link Channel Assignment Standby Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS544

8.2.7.3 Link Channel Re-request Sequence
Figure 8.17 shows LCH assignment re-request sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
After BS assigns LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message, MS sends “LCH
assignment re-request” message when it requests the assigned LCH to change to another LCH(e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc). Then, BS assigns another LCH by sending “LCH assignment
response” message.
MSBS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Response
LCH Assignment Re-request
LCH Assignment Response

TCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH

Access Establishment Phase
Figure 8.17 Link Channel Assignment Re-request Sequence

8.2.7.4 Link Channel Request Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request
Figure 8.18 shows LCH request standby and LCH assignment re-request sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS suspends assignment of LCH when it cannot assign LCH temporarily and sends “LCH
assignment standby” message on SCCH. BS assigns LCH by “LCH assignment response”
message on SCCH when it is ready to assign LCH. When MS requests assigned LCH to change
to other LCH (e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc), MS sends “LCH assignment re-request” message.
BS will then assign another LCH by sending “LCH assignment response” message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

545

MS

BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Standby
LCH Assignment Response
LCH Assignment Re-request
LCH Assignment Response

TCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH
SCCH

Access Establishment Phase
Figure 8.18 Link Channel Assignment Standby and Link Channel Assignment Re-request
Sequence
8.2.7.5 Link Channel Assignment Rejection
Figure 8.19 shows LCH assignment rejection sequence.
MS requests LCH assignment to BS by sending “LCH assignment request” message on TCCH.
BS sends “LCH assignment reject” message on SCCH when it cannot assign LCH.
MS

BS
LCH Assignment Request
LCH Assignment Reject

TCCH
SCCH

Figure 8.19 Link Channel Assignment Rejection Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS546

8.2.8 Additional QCS
8.2.8.1 Additional QCS
Figure 8.20 shows the additional QCS sequence.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS assigns new QCS
by sending “additional QCS response” message.
MS
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Response

BS
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)

Figure 8.20 Additional QCS Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message
when it received “additional QCS request” message from MS, according to the state ofcommunication.
8.2.8.2 Additional QCS Request Indication
Figure 8.21 shows the additional QCS request indication sequence.
BS indicate to transmit “additional QCS request” message to MS. MS sends “additional QCS
request” message when it requests new QCS. BS assigns new QCS by sending “additional QCS
response” message.
BS

MS

ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request Indication EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Response
EDCH/CDCH(Note)

Figure 8.21 Additional QCS Request Indication Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message
when it received “additional QCS request” message from MS, according to the state ofcommunication.

A-GN4.00-03-TS547

8.2.8.3 Additional QCS Rejection
Figure 8.22 shows additional QCS rejection sequence.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
QCS rejection” message as response when it cannot assign specified QCS.
BSMS
Additional QCS Request
Additional QCS Rejection

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH

Figure 8.22 Additional QCS Sequence
8.2.8.4 Additional QCS with Extra LCH
Figure 8.23 the sequence to obtain the additional QCS with extra LCH.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
LCH indication” message when it needs LCH assignment in order to assign new QCS. MS sends“additional LCH confirmation” message to new added channel and establishes new LCH. BS thenassigns new QCS on this LCH.
BS
Original
Added
MS
ChannelChannel
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Request
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional LCH Indication
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
Additional LCH Confirmation
ICCH/ ACCH
Additional QCS Response
EDCH/CDCH (Note)

Figure 8.23 Additional QCS made through increasing LCH Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message on
receiving “additional QCS request” message, according to the state of communication.

A-GN4.00-03-TS548

8.2.8.5 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH
Figure 8.24 shows the sequence to obtain the additional QCS with re-request of extra LCH.
MS sends “additional QCS request” message when it requests new QCS. BS sends “additional
LCH indication” message when it needs LCH assignment in order to assign new QCS. MS sends“LCH assignment re-request” message when it requests assigned LCH to change to another LCH(e.g.: DL carrier sensing NG, etc). Then, BS assigns another LCH by sending “LCH assignment
response” message. MS sends “additional LCH confirmation” message to new added channel
and establishes new LCH. BS then assigns new QCS on this LCH.
Original
ChannelMS
Additional QCS Request
Additional LCH Indication
Additional QCS Re-request
Additional LCH Indication
Additional LCH Confirmation
Additional QCS Response

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH

BS

Added
Channel(Note)(Note)(Note)(Note)(Note)(Note)

Figure 8.24 Additional QCS with Re-request of Extra LCH Sequence
Note BS sends “additional LCH indication” message or “additional QCS response” message, on
receiving “additional QCS request” message, according to the state of communication.

A-GN4.00-03-TS549

8.2.9 Status Check
Status check is used to check Connection-ID and QCS-ID in BS and MS.
8.2.9.1 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS
Figure 8.25 shows status check triggered by MS sequence.
MS sends “QCS status enquiry request” message to BS to check the status, and BS answers thestatus by sending “QCS status enquiry response” message.
MS

BS
QCS Status Enquiry Request
QCS Status Enquiry Response

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH (Note)

Figure 8.25 QCS Status Check Triggered by MS
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.

8.2.9.2 QCS Status Check Triggered by BS
Figure 8.26 shows status check triggered by BS sequence.
BS sends “QCS status enquiry request” message to MS to check the status, and MS answers thestatus by sending “QCS status enquiry response” message.
BSMS
QCS Status Enquiry Request
QCS Status Enquiry Response

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note)(Note)

Figure 8.26 QCS Status Check Sequence Triggered by BS
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.

A-GN4.00-03-TS550

8.2.10 CQI Transmission
8.2.10.1 CQI Report
Figure 8.27 shows CQI report from MS sequence. MS sends “CQI report” message to BS
autonomously.
MS

BS
CQI Report

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note)

Figure 8.27 CQI Report Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.

8.2.10.2 CQI Report Indication
Figure 8.28 shows “CQI request” message from BS sequence.
BS sends “CQI report indication” message to MS, and MS answers the CQI by sending “CQI
report” message.
BSMS
CQI Report IndicationCQI Report

ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH
ICCH/ ACCH
EDCH/CDCH(Note)(Note)

Figure 8.28 CQI Report Indication Sequence
Note When control data is transmitted with EDCH/CDCH/ICCH, the CD bit of the MAC header is
set as 00 or 01.
8.3 Radio Connection Management Sequence
The radio connection management sequence is optional.
Radio connection control includes the following main functions: Paging;
 Establishment/ modification/ release of Radio connection, including e.g.
assignment/ modification of MS identity, establishment/ modification/ release of
SRB1 and SRB2, access class barring;

A-GN4.00-03-TS

551









Initial security activation, i.e. initial configuration of AS integrity protection (CP)and AS ciphering (CP, UP);Radio connection mobility including e.g. intra-frequency and inter-frequency
handover, associated security handling, i.e. key and/ or algorithm change,
specification of radio context information transferred between network nodes;
Establishment/ modification/ release of RBs carrying user data (DRBs);
Radio configuration control including e.g. assignment/ modification of ARQ
configuration, HARQ configuration, DRX configuration;
QoS control including assignment/ modification of semi-persistent configuration
information for DL and UL, assignment/ modification of parameters for UL rate
control in the MS, i.e. allocation of a priority and a prioritised bit rate (PBR) for
each RB;
Recovery from radio link failure;

8.3.1 Paging

MS

BSPagingFigure 8.29 Paging

The paging information is provided to upper layers, which in response may initiate Radio
connection establishment, e.g. to receive an incoming call.
BS initiates the paging procedure by transmitting the Paging message at the MS's paging
occasion. BS may address multiple MSs. BS may also indicate a change of system information in
the Paging message.
8.3.2 Radio connection establishment

A-GN4.00-03-TS

552

MS

BS

Radio ConnectionRequest

Radio ConnectionSetup

Radio ConnectionSetupComplete

Figure 8.30 Radio connection establishment

The purpose of this procedure is to establish an Radio connection. Radio connection
establishment involves SRB1 establishment.
Upon initiation of the procedure, the MS shall check ACB: SIBB1 provides cellBarred indicator; no timer. Used before camp.
 SIbb2 provides OriginatingCalls / EmergencyCalls and Originating Signaling ‟sACB.
 mobile terminating access is always allowed except for T302 running.
 if access to cell is barred, MS shall inform upper layers about the failure toestablish the Radio connection and that access barring is applicable if barring alleviation, MS shall inform upper layers about it.
The Radio connection Request message includes a MS Identity, establishment Cause for BS to
identify whether it is emergency connection and the priority of the requested connection.
The Radio connection Setup message includes the dedicated radio resource configuration for theradio connection, which may includes the radio bearer ids and corresponding configurations to be
added and released，and the configuration for MAC layer.
8.3.2.1 Radio connectionSetupComplete
The Radio connectionSetupComplete message includes possible registered core network
information, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS553

8.3.3 Radio connection reconfiguration
MS

BS

RadioConnectionReconfiguration

RadioConnectionReconfigurationComplete

Figure 8.31 Radio connection reconfiguration, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to modify an Radio connection, e.g. to establish/ modify/ releaseRBs, to perform handover, to setup/ modify/ release measurements.
BS may initiate the Radio connection reconfiguration procedure to a MS in ACTIVE MODE. BS
applies the procedure as follows:- the mobilityControlInfo is included only when AS-security has been activated, and SRB2 withat least one DRB are setup and not suspended;- the establishment of RBs (other than SRB1, that is established during Radio connection
establishment) is included only when AS security has been activated.

The Radio connectionReconfiguration message includes the possible measurement configuration,
possible mobility information and possible dedicated radio resource configuration, and may
includes the security information for handover.
The Radio connectionReconfigurationComplete message is just a message for confirmation, notincluding the meaningful content.

A-GN4.00-03-TS554

8.3.4 Radio connection re-establishment
MS

BS

RadioConnectionReestablishmentRequest
RadioConnectionReestablishment

RadioConnectionReestablishmentComplete

Figure 8.32 Radio connection re-establishment, successful

The purpose of this procedure is to re-establish the Radio connection, which involves theresumption of SRB1 operation and the re-activation of security.
A MS in ACTIVE MODE, for which security has been activated, may initiate the procedure inorder to continue the Radio connection. The connection re-establishment succeeds only if theconcerned cell is prepared i.e. has a valid MS context. In case BS accepts the re-establishment,
SRB1 operation resumes while the operation of other radio bearers remains suspended. If AS
security has not been activated, the MS does not initiate the procedure but instead moves to
IDLE MODE directly.
BS applies the procedure as follows:- to reconfigure SRB1 and to resume data transfer only for this RB;- to re-activate AS security without changing algorithms.
The MS shall only initiate the procedure when AS security has been activated. The MS initiates
the procedure when one of the following conditions is met:
- upon detecting radio link failure; or- upon handover failure; or- upon integrity check failure indication from lower layers; or- upon an Radio connection reconfiguration failure;
Upon initiation of the procedure, the MS shall:- stop timer T310, if running;- start timer T311;
A-GN4.00-03-TS555

- suspend all RBs except SRB0;- reset MSL1;- apply the default physical channel configuration;- apply the default semi-persistent scheduling configuration;- apply the default MSL1main configuration;- perform cell selection in accordance with the cell selection process;
The Radio connectionReestablishmentReques message includes a MS Identity, reestablishment
Cause for BS to identify whether it is due to reconfiguration Failure, handover Failure, or other
Failure.
The Radio connectionReestablishment message includes the dedicated radio resource
configuration for the radio connection, which may includes the radio bearer ids and corresponding
configurations to be added and released，and the configuration for MAC layer.
The Radio connectionReestablishmentComplete message is just a message for confirmation, notincluding the meaningful content.
8.3.5 Radio connection release
MS

BS

Radio ConnectionRelease

Figure 8.33 Radio connection release, successful
The purpose of this procedure is to release the Radio connection, which includes the release of
the established radio bearers as well as all radio resources.
BS initiates the Radio connection release procedure to a MS in ACTIVE MODE.
The Radio connection Release message includes the release cause, possibly Redirected Carrier
Information and possibly Mobility Control Information for Idle Mode.
8.3.6 Radio Link Failure
Upon receiving N310 consecutive "out of sync" indications from lower layers , start timer T310
(T1).

A-GN4.00-03-TS

556

upon T310 expiry, consider radio link failure to be detected. If AS security has not been activated,start T311(T2) and initiate the connection re-establishment procedure .
Upon T311 expiry, the MS shall perform the actions upon leaving ACTIVE MODE.
8.4 Optional Mobility sequence
Measurements to be performed by a MS for mobility are classified:- Intra-frequency BS measurements;- Inter-frequency BS measurements;
For each measurement type one or several measurement objects can be defined (ameasurement object defines e.g. the carrier frequency to be monitored).
For each measurement object one or several reporting configurations can be defined (a reporting
configuration defines the reporting criteria). Three reporting criteria are used: event triggered
reporting, periodic reporting and event triggered periodic reporting.
The association between a measurement object and a reporting configuration is created by ameasurement identity. By using several measurement identities (one for each measurement
object, reporting configuration pair) it is possible:
To associate several reporting configurations to one measurement object and;To associate one reporting configuration to several measurement objects.
The measurements identity is as well used when reporting results of the measurements.
Measurement commands are used by BS to order the MS to start measurements, modify
measurements or stop measurements.
In BS ACTIVE MODE state, network-controlled MS-assisted handovers are performed andvarious DRX cycles are supported.
In BS IDLE MODE state, cell reselections are performed and DRX is supported.
8.4.1 Mobility Management in IDLE State
8.4.1.1 Cell selection- The MS may search each carrier in turn (“initial cell selection”) or make use of stored
information to shorten the search (“stored information cell selection”).
- The MS seeks to identify a suitable cell; if it is not able to identify a suitable cell it seeks to
identify an acceptable cell. When a suitable cell is found or if only an acceptable cell is found it
camps on that cell and commence the cell reselection procedure:- An acceptable cell is one for which the measured cell attributes satisfy the cell selection criteria

A-GN4.00-03-TS

557

and the cell is not barred;
Transition to IDLE MODE:- On transition from ACTIVE MODE to IDLE MODE, a MS should camp on the last cell for which
it was in ACTIVE MODE or a cell/any cell of set of cells or frequency be assigned by radio
connection aignalling in the state transition message.
Recovery from out of coverage:- The MS should attempt to find a suitable cell in the manner described for stored information or
initial cell selection above. If no suitable cell is found on any frequency or RAT the MS shouldattempt to find an acceptable cell.
8.4.1.2 Cell reselection
MS in IDLE MODE performs cell reselection. The principles of the procedure are the following:- The MS makes measurements of attributes of the serving and neighbour cells to enable thereselection process:- There is no need to indicate neighbouring cell in the serving cell system information to enable
the MS to search and measure a cell i.e. BS relies on the MS to detect the neighbouring cells;- For the search and measurement of inter-frequency neighbouring cells, only the carrier
frequencies need to be indicated;- Measurements may be omitted if the serving cell attribute fulfils particular search ormeasurement criteria.
- Cell reselection identifies the cell that the MS should camp on. It is based on cell reselection
criteria which involves measurements of the serving and neighbour cells:- Intra-frequency reselection is based on ranking of cells;- For inter-frequency neighbouring cells, it is possible to indicate layer-specific cell reselection
parameters (e.g., layer specific offset). These parameters are common to all neighbouring cells
on a frequency;- An NCL can be provided by the serving cell to handle specific cases for intra- andinter-frequency neighbouring cells. This NCL contains cell specific cell reselection parameters(e.g., cell specific offset) for specific neighbouring cells;- Black lists can be provided to prevent the MS from reselecting to specific intra- andinter-frequency neighbouring cells;- Cell reselection can be speed dependent;- Cell reselection parameters are applicable for all MSs in a cell, but it is possible to configure

A-GN4.00-03-TS

558

specific reselection parameters per MS group or per MS.
- Cell access restrictions, which consist of access class (AC) barring and cell reservation (e.g. forcells "reserved for operator use") applicable for mobiles in idle state.
8.4.2 Mobility Management in active state
8.4.2.1 General
The Mobility Support for MSs in active state handles all necessary steps for relocation/handoverprocedures, like processes that precede the final HO decision on the source network side (control
and evaluation of MS and BS measurements taking into account certain MS specific area
restrictions), preparation of resources on the target network side, commanding the MS to the new
radio resources and finally releasing resources on the (old) source network side. It contains
mechanisms to transfer context data between BSs, and to update node relations on C-plane andU-plane.
In active state, BS-controlled MS-assisted handovers are performed and various DRX cycles
are supported:
The MS makes measurements of attributes of the serving and neighbour cells to enable theprocess:- There is no need to indicate neighbouring cell to enable the MS to search and measure a celli.e. BS relies on the MS to detect the neighbouring cells;- For the search and measurement of inter-frequency neighbouring cells, at least the carrier
frequencies need to be indicated;- Network signals reporting criteria for event-triggered and periodical reporting;- An NCL can be provided by the serving cell by radio connection dedicated signaling to handle
specific cases for intra- and inter-frequency neighbouring cells. This NCL contains cell specificmeasurement parameters (e.g. cell specific offset) for specific neighbouring cells;- Black lists can be provided to prevent the MS from measuring specific neighbouring cells.
Depending on whether the MS needs transmission/reception gaps to perform the relevantmeasurements, measurements are classified as gap assisted or non-gap assisted. A non-gap
assisted measurement is a measurement on a cell that does not require transmission/reception
gaps to allow the measurement to be performed. A gap assisted measurement is a measurement
on a cell that does require transmission/reception gaps to allow the measurement to be
performed. Gap patterns (as opposed to individual gaps) are configured and activated by radio
connection.

A-GN4.00-03-TS559

8.4.2.2 HandoverMS

Serving BS

Target BS

ChannelCommunication
ActiveState

Measurement Control
Measurement report

ADCCH
ADCCH
ADCCH Handover Request
Handover Request

RConnection Reconf. Including mobility control

ACK

information

SN Status Transfer

Synchronization

ADCCH

UL Allocation & TA

ADCCH

RConnection Recof. Complete

ADCCH

MS Context
ReleaseCommunication

Figure 8.34 BS HO
Below is a more detailed description of the BS HO procedure, as shown in Figure 8.34:
0 The MS context within the source BS contains information regarding roaming restrictions which
where provided either at connection establishment or at the last TA update.
1 The source BS configures the MS measurement procedures according to the area restriction
information. Measurements provided by the source BS may assist the function controlling theMS's connection mobility.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

560

2 MS is triggered to send MEASUREMENT REPORT by the rules set by i.e. system information,
specification etc.
3 Source BS makes decision based on MEASUREMENT REPORT and RRM information tohand off MS.
4 The source BS issues a HANDOVER REQUEST message to the target BS to prepare the HO
at the target side.
5 Admission Control may be performed by the target BS dependent on the received E-RAB QoS
information to increase the likelihood of a successful HO, if the resources can be granted bytarget BS.
6 Target BS prepares HO with L1/L2 and sends the HANDOVER REQUEST ACKNOWLEDGE
to the source BS.
7 The target BS generates the radio connection message to perform the handover, i.e Radio
connectionReconfiguration message including the mobilityControlInformation, to be sent by thesource BS towards the MS. The source BS performs the necessary integrity protection andciphering of the message.
8 The source BS sends the SN STATUS TRANSFER message to the target BS to convey the
uplink MSL 3 SN receiver status and the downlink MSL 3 SN transmitter status for which MSL
3 status preservation applies. The uplink MSL 3 SN receiver status includes at least the MSL 3
SN of the first missing UL SDU and may include a bit map of the receive status of the out of
sequence UL SDUs that the MS needs to retransmit in the target cell, if there are any such
SDUs. The downlink MSL 3 SN transmitter status indicates the next MSL 3 SN that the target
BS shall assign to new SDUs, not having a MSL 3 SN yet. The source BS may omit sending
this message if none of the E-RABs of the MS shall be treated with MSL 3 status preservation.
9 After receiving the Radio connection Reconfiguration message including themobilityControlInformation , MS performs synchronisation to target BS and accesses the target
cell via ATCCH, following a contention-free procedure if a dedicated ATCCH access sequence
was indicated in the mobilityControlInformation, or following a contention-based procedure if no
dedicated access sequence was indicated. MS derives target BS specific keys and configures
the selected security algorithms to be used in the target cell.
10 The target BS responds with UL allocation and timing advance.
11 When the MS has successfully accessed the target cell, the MS sends theRadioconnectionReconfigurationComplete message (C-MSID) to confirm the handover, alongwith an uplink Buffer Status Report, whenever possible, to the target BS to indicate that thehandover procedure is completed for the MS. The target BS verifies the C-MSID sent in theRadioconnectionReconfigurationComplete message. The target BS can now begin sending
data to the MS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

561

12 Upon reception of the MS CONTEXT RELEASE message, the source BS can release radio
and C-plane related resources associated to the MS context. Any ongoing data forwarding may
continue.
8.4.3 Measurements
Measurements to be performed by a MS for intra/inter-frequency mobility can be controlled by BS,
using broadcast or dedicated control. In IDLE MODE state, a MS shall follow the measurement
parameters defined for cell reselection specified by the BS broadcast. The use of dedicatedmeasurement control for IDLE MODE state is possible through the provision of MS specificpriorities . In ACTIVE MODE state, a MS shall follow the measurement configurations specified
by radio connection signaling directed from the BS.
Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements and inter-frequency neighbour (cell)measurements are defined as follows:- Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements: Neighbour cell measurements performed by the
MS are intra-frequency measurements when the current and target cell operates on the same
carrier frequency. The MS shall be able to carry out such measurements without measurement
gaps.
- Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements: Neighbour cell measurements performed by
the MS are inter-frequency measurements when the neighbour cell operates on a different
carrier frequency, compared to the current cell. The MS should not be assumed to be able tocarry out such measurements without measurement gaps.
- Whether a measurement is non gap assisted or gap assisted depends on the MS's capability
and current operating frequency. The MS determines whether a particular cell measurement
needs to be performed in a transmission/reception gap and the scheduler needs to knowwhether gaps are needed:- Same carrier frequency and cell bandwidths (Scenario A): an intra-frequency scenario; notmeasurement gap assisted.
- Same carrier frequency, bandwidth of the target cell smaller than the bandwidth of the current
cell (Scenario B): an intra-frequency scenario; not measurement gap assisted.
- Same carrier frequency, bandwidth of the target cell larger than the bandwidth of the current
cell (Scenario C): an intra-frequency scenario; not measurement gap assisted.
- Different carrier frequencies, bandwidth of the target cell smaller than the bandwidth of thecurrent cell and bandwidth of the target cell within bandwidth of the current cell (Scenario D): aninter-frequency scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Different carrier frequencies, bandwidth of the target cell larger than the bandwidth of the

A-GN4.00-03-TS

562

current cell and bandwidth of the current cell within bandwidth of the target cell (Scenario E): aninter-frequency scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Different carrier frequencies and non-overlapping bandwidth, (Scenario F): an inter-frequency
scenario; measurement gap-assisted scenario.
- Measurement gaps patterns are configured and activated by Radio connection signaling.
8.4.3.1 Intra-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements
In a system with frequency reuse = 1, mobility within the same frequency layer (i.e. between cellswith the same carrier frequency) is predominant. Good neighbour cell measurements are needed
for cells that have the same carrier frequency as the serving cell in order to ensure good mobility
support and easy network deployment. Search for neighbour cells with the same carrier
frequency as the serving cell, and measurements of the relevant quantities for identified cells areneeded.
NOTE: To avoid MS activity outside the DRX cycle, the reporting criteria for neighbour cellmeasurements should match the used DRX cycle.
8.4.3.2 Inter-frequency neighbour (cell) measurements
Regarding mobility between different frequency layers (i.e. between cells with a different carrier
frequency), MS may need to perform neighbour cell measurements during DL/UL idle periods thatare provided by DRX or packet scheduling.
8.4.3.3 measurement configuration
The measurement configuration includes the following parameters:
1. Measurement objects: The objects on which the MS shall perform the measurements.
- For intra-frequency and inter-frequency measurements a measurement object is a single
carrier frequency. Associated with this carrier frequency, BS can configure a list of cell
specific offsets and a list of „blacklisted‟ cells. Blacklisted cells are not considered in event
evaluation or measurement reporting.
2. Reporting configurations: A list of reporting configurations where each reporting
configuration consists of the following:- Reporting criterion: The criterion that triggers the MS to send a measurement report. Thiscan either be periodical or a single event description.

A-GN4.00-03-TS563

- Reporting format: The quantities that the MS includes in the measurement report andassociated information (e.g. number of cells to report).
3. Measurement identities: A list of measurement identities where each measurement identity
links one measurement object with one reporting configuration. By configuring multiple
measurement identities it is possible to link more than one measurement object to the same
reporting configuration, as well as to link more than one reporting configuration to the samemeasurement object. The measurement identity is used as a reference number in themeasurement report.
4. Quantity configurations: One quantity configuration is configured for intra-frequency
measurements, one for inter-frequency measurements and one per RAT type. The quantity
configuration defines the measurement quantities and associated filtering used for all event
evaluation and related reporting of that measurement type. One filter can be configured per
measurement quantity.
5. Measurement gaps: Periods that the MS may use to perform measurements, i.e. no (UL,DL) transmissions are scheduled.
8.4.3.4 Measurement reportingMS

BS

MeasurementReport

Figure 8.35 Measurement reporting
The purpose of this procedure is to transfer measurement results from the MS to BS , as shownin Figure 8.35.
For the measId for which the measurement reporting procedure was triggered, the MS shall set
the measResults within the MeasurementReport message, and submit the MeasurementReportmessage to lower layers for transmission, upon which the procedure ends.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

564

Chapter 9 Access Phase
9.1 Overview
In this chapter, service channel specification in access phase is described. This is the phase after
the establishment of access and the phase for several communication controls and thecommunication service. Voice and data communication is realized by the service channel on
those established radio link channel. Section 9.5 - 9.7 are written for reference, andsupplementary information.
9.2 Retransmission Control Method
9.2.1 ARQ
9.2.1.1 Procedure of ARQ
PHY layer recognizes the PHY data unit (CRC section) for every user based on the informationon the PRU assigned by MAC layer. ARQ is performed by the PHY data unit. This section
describes (selective repeat) SR type ARQ. In SR type ARQ, a resending control part resends theerror data in the following procedure: The receiving side will transmit NACK if CRC error is
detected after receiving data. The transmitting side recognizes the reason by which the error has
occurred and resends the data.
9.2.1.2 Setting the Timing for Transmission of the ACK Field in CDCH
Figure 9.1 shows the send timing of ACK. The ACK field is set at 7.5 ms after CDCH received
data.
CDCH

5 ms
Down
Time
Up
Error confirmation is carried out by CRC andACK /NACK is returned.

Figure 9.1 ACK Sending Timing

A-GN4.00-03-TS565

9.2.1.3 Timing of Retransmission
Figure 9.2 shows ARQ re-sending timing when the right of communication is continuously granted
to MS. MS will transmit NACK of CDCH after 7.5 ms, if the data error of 2 is detected. BS
recognizes an error on receiving NACK and, re-sends 2‟ to MS on DL CDCH after 7.5 ms.
5 ms

CDCH

1‟
2

1

3‟
3

4

4‟
2

2‟
5

Down
Time
Up

If a CRC error occurs, NACK will be transmitted after 7.5 ms
and it will be resent after the 7.5 ms.

Figure 9.2 ARQ Retransmission Timing

9.2.1.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission
The example of resending an ARQ is introduced in this section.
Figure 9.3 shows the example of resending in case that the same data serve as an error
continuously. Data are re-sent to the specified retry count. Moreover, continuous data aretransmitted except for resending.
Figure 9.4 shows the example of resending in case that continuous different data serve as anerror. Since resending control is carried out by the same time relation, even if data 2 and 3 arecontinuous data, they are resent independently.
5 ms

CDCH

A
1

2

N
3

A
4

A
2

N
5

A
6

A
2

A
7

Down
Time
Up

(A : ACK N : NACK)

Figure 9.3 Example of ARQ Retransmission 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

566

5 ms
CDCH
A
1

2

N
3

N
4

A
2

A
3

A
5

A
6

A
7

Down
Time
Up

(A : ACK N : NACK )Figure 9.4 Example of ARQ Retransmission 2

9.2.1.5 Example of Sequence
Figure 9.5 shows the example of UL ARQ sequence.

MS

BS

Uplink Data1

CRC Error

NACK

Uplink Data1(Retransmission)

ACK

Uplink Data2

Figure 9.5 Example of UL

A-GN4.00-03-TS

567

9.2.1.6 About the Switch of ARQ and the Adaptive Modulation
This section describes the way to switch ARQ and adaptive modulation. Transmission sidechanges modulation class when the CRC error exceeds the defined limit of X times. Upper layer
decides the limit of X according to QoS etc.
9.2.2 HARQ
9.2.2.1 Procedure of HARQ
PHY Layer receives a set of PHY header and a set of PHY payload units on a TDMA frame,
identifies the users for these data units according to the MAP information provided by the MAC
and performs HARQ on the received PHY data units. Chase combining is described as follows as
one method of HARQ. Figure 9.6 shows the block diagram of the HARQ receiver. HARQ
procedure is described as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.

FFT operation is performed on the received base band signal The user signal is detected by
FFT operation.
De-interleaving operation is performed and buffered on the detected user signal. No
maximum ratio combining is done for the first time. De-interleaving operation is only applied
after retransmitted data for NACKs is received.
The buffer is released if no error is detected. The ACK field is set accordingly on the ANCH
channel‟s PHY Header. The transmission timing of this ANCH is explained in the next
chapter.
The reception buffer will not be released if an error is detected. The buffered data will be
kept in the buffer until the reception of the retransmitted data. [Retransmission timing of theretransmitted data will be explained later.]. The NACK is set for the erroneous data in the
ACK field of the PHY header and transmitted on the ANCH channel. The timing of the
ANCH channel transmission is the second TDMA frame after the current frame.
NACK will be transmitted to the transmitting side if an error is detected. When theretransmitted data is received, the FFT operation is performed on the received signal andthen de-Interleaving operation is conducted to the detected user signal. The de-Interleaved
data is combined with the buffered data. The Error correction is performed on the combined
data and then error detection will be performed. The process from FFT operation to error
detection will be done when HARQ condition is satisfied. The condition is described in
Section 9.2.2.3.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

568

ACK or NACK Transmission

Base Band
Reception Signal

SecondDemodulation

De-interleaving

ACK(PHY Header)

Maximal Ratio
CombiningFirst
Demodulation(Error Correction)

Error
Detection

Reception
Buffer Pool

Figure 9.6 Reception of Block Diagram of HARQ

9.2.2.2 Retransmission Rule in FM-Mode
When EXCHs are retransmitted in FM-mode, the retransmission is done with the following rule.
 EXCHs in the same slot as the first transmission are used in HARQ retransmission.
 EXCHs with smaller logical PRU number are firstly used for HARQ retransmission
and remaining EXCHs are used for new data transmission.
 The number of EXCH used for retransmission does not change in HARQ
retransmission. When the original data size is one/two EXCHs, retransmission data
size is also one/two EXCHs, respectively.
Figure 9.7 shows an example of retransmission control. PHY data unit size does not change andthe data is transmitted first in a slot in HARQ retransmission. It also shows the relationshipbetween logical PRU assignment and symbol mapping method.
In the first transmission, Data 1 is transmitted by EDCH 1 which combined EXCH 1 and EXCH 2.
Data 2 is transmitted by EDCH 2 which combined EXCH 3 and EXCH 4. Data 3 is transmitted by
EDCH 3 which combined EXCH 5 and EXCH 6. And Data 4 is transmitted by EDCH 4 which
consists of only EXCH 7. Data 2 and Data 4 are retransmitted when an error occurs incommunication of EDCH 2 and EDCH 4. By the first and the second rule, Data 2 is retransmitted
by EDCH 1 which combined EXCH 1 and EXCH 2. According to the first, the second and the third
rule, Data 4 is retransmitted by EDCH 3 which consists of EXCH 5. EXCH 3, EXCH 4, EXCH 6,
and EXCH 7 which are not used by retransmission will then combine each other to from EDCH 2
and EDCH 4. Data 5 and Data 6 which are ready for transmission for the first time, will be sent by
EDCH 2 and EDCH 4.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

569

Logical PRU assignment
Retransmission

Slot 1

EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4EDCH 1(Data 1) EDCH 2(Data 2)

EXCH 1 EXCH 2 EXCH 3 EXCH 4EDCH 1(Data 1) EDCH 2(Data 5)

Slot 2

EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7
EDCH 3(Data 3)

EXCH 5 EXCH 6 EXCH 7
EDCH 3(Data 6)
EDCH 4(Data 4)

EDCH 3(Data 4)

Time Axis

Time Axis

Frequency Axis

Retransmission

TDMA Slots

TDMA Slots

Symbol Mapping Method
Time Axis

Time Axis

Frequency Axis

Retransmission

TDMA Slots

TDMA Slots

Figure 9.7 Example of Retransmission Control

A-GN4.00-03-TS570

9.2.2.3 HARQ Approval Condition
It is necessary to assign enough number of PRU to retransmit PHY data unit. The same MCS andslot shall be used for the retransmission of the PHY data unit. If these conditions are not satisfied,
HARQ information will be released.
As an example, assume that ANCH, EXCH1, EXCH2, EXCH3 and EXCH4 are allocated for auser. When NACK is received for a particular MAC frame, and two EXCHs are required forretransmission, MAC will then request PHY layer to use the first two EXCHs given by the MAP
field for the retransmission.
When the NACK is received for multiple MAC frames simultaneously, the first MAC frame will beallocated to the first few available EXCHs which are indicated by MAP field.
When the NACK is received for multiple MAC frames simultaneously, MAC will then try to allocate
EXCHs for the transmission of all the MAC frames. MAC will allocate as many EXCHs as
possible for frame transmission in case that sufficient EXCHs are not available.
Remaining MAC frames will be retransmitted by MAC-ARQ in the future.
9.2.2.4 HARQ Cancel Condition
HARQ cancel condition and the process are shown in Table 9.1. These conditions have a priority
numbered from 1 to 5. If some conditions occurred at the same time, higher priority condition
should be taken into use.
Table 9.1 Summary of HARQ Cancel Condition
No.

Condition

Outline of Process

1

Received ANCH is CRC error or ICCH
format.

The HARQ retransmission data in the frame
should be cleared, and notify the other side that
ANCH is CRC error by HC=1.

2

Received ANCH is set HC=1.

The HARQ retransmission data in the frame
should be cleared

3

There is no PRU in the slot which has
the HARQ retransmission data.

The HARQ retransmission data in the slot
should be cleared.

4

There is the difference of MI between
before and after retransmission.

The HARQ retransmission data in the MI
applicable to slot should be cleared.

5

There are not enough number of PRU
for HARQ retransmission data unit.

The PHY data unit which can not be
retransmitted should be cleared.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

571

9.2.2.5 Setting the Timing for the Transmission of the ACK Field in the ANCH
This section will describe the timing setting for the transmission of the ACK field on the ANCH.
EXCHs are receiving data during the DL part of the current TDMA frame. After that, the received
data will be forwarded to perform various operations like receiving block diagram in Figure 9.6.
Therefore, it is impossible to send the ACK for the received data in the UL part of the next TDMA
frame. The ACK or NACK for received data will be sent on the UL part of the TDMA frame after
the next one.
The example when ANCH is at the first slot is shown in Figure 9.8 and the example when ANCH
is at the 4th slot is shown in Figure 9.9.
5 ms
ANCH

Transmission
ReceptionTime

ACK Field Setting

EXCH

Transmission
Reception

Time

Demodulation Processing& CRC Detection

Figure 9.8 ACK Setting Timing When ANCH at the First Slot

A-GN4.00-03-TS

572

5 ms
ANCH

Transmission
ReceptionTime

ACK Field Setting

EXCH

Transmission
Reception

Time

Demodulation Processing& CRC Detection

Figure 9.9 ACK Setting Timing When ANCH at the Last Slot

A-GN4.00-03-TS573

9.2.2.6 Timing of Retransmission
The timing of the retransmission of HARQ is different. It depends on the performance of MS.
Therefore, negotiation has to happen between the MS and BS before the connection isestablished.
9.2.2.6.1 HARQ Retransmission Timing for High Performance MS

NACK

MAP

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

DL
UL

MAP
ACK

ANCH

DL
UL

EXCH

Figure 9.10 shows the HARQ timing for the high performance MS. This figure shows the
allocation of EXCH on all the TDMA frames for the MS. In this case, the responses can be sent or
received in the adjacent TDMA frames. Firstly, MS detect an error on DL Slot 1‟ (refer to thefigure). Next, NACK is sent after 7.5 ms on the ANCH. Then, BS allocates the required EXCHs
after receiving the NACK. The EXCHs will be intimated to MS through MAP of ANCH after 7.5 msfrom the time of reception of the NACK. In the next TDMA frame, the BS will then retransmit theData 1‟ to MS. MS will keep the HARQ information until it receives the MAP information in casethat the BS cannot allocate the EXCHs for Data 1‟ temporarily. MS receives the Data 1‟ after 5 ms,
that is, in the next TDMA frame after receiving the MAP from BS.
Here, HARQ information stands for the ACK/NACK discrimination at the data sending node andthe I/Q pattern [Erroneous data set, which will be used at the time of chase combining, is stored
in the buffer] when error happens. BS detected error for the UL Data 1 as shown in the diagram.
NACK will be sent to MS after 12.5 ms. At the same time, BS will allocate the required EXCHs
and informs it to MS through the MAP field of the ANCH in the same DL data TDMA frame. After
2.5 ms, the MS will retransmit the Data 1 according to the MAP field received from BS. In casewhen BS cannot allocate EXCHs for the MS for retransmission, it will keep HARQ information
until the resources are available for allocation. MS will wait till it receives MAP from BS retransmit
the Data 1 immediately after 2.5 ms.

3‟

4‟

1‟

5‟

NACK

1‟
1

2‟
2

3

1

4

5

Figure 9.10 HARQ Retransmission Timing with Early Response in case of 5ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS574

9.2.2.6.2 HARQ Retransmission Timing for Low Performance MS

NACK

MAP

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

MAP
ACK

DL
UL

MAP
ACK

ANCH

DL
UL

EXCH

Figure 9.11 shows the HARQ timing for the low performance MS. This figure shows the allocationof EXCH on all the TDMA frames for the MS.
Firstly, MS detected an error on DL Slot 1‟. Next, NACK is sent after 7.5 ms on the ANCH. Then,
BS allocates the required EXCHs on receiving the NACK. They will be intimated to MS through
MAP of ANCH after 7.5 ms from the time of reception of the NACK. The BS will retransmit theData 1‟ to MS after 10 ms. MS will keep the HARQ information until it receives the MAP
information if the BS cannot allocate the EXCHs for Data 1‟ temporarily. MS receives the Data 1‟
after 10 ms that is, in the second TDMA frame, after receiving the MAP from the BS. BS detects
error for the UL Data 1 as shown in the diagram. NACK will be sent to MS after 12.5 ms.
Meanwhile, BS will allocate the required EXCHs and inform it to MS through the MAP field of the
ANCH in the same DL data TDMA frame. After 7.5 ms, the MS will retransmit the Data 1
according to the MAP field received from BS. In case when BS cannot allocate EXCHs for the MS
for retransmission, it will keep HARQ information until the resources are available for allocation.
MS will wait till it receives MAP from BS to retransmit the Data 1 immediately after 7.5 ms.

3‟

4‟

5‟

1‟

NACK

1‟
1

2‟
2

3

4

1

5

Figure 9.11 HARQ Retransmission Timing with Slow Response in case of 5ms frame

A-GN4.00-03-TS575

9.2.2.7 Example of HARQ Retransmission

ANCH

DL
UL

EXCH

Example of HARQ retransmission is as shown in the below.
In Figure 9.12, the example of retransmitting the Data 1 repeatedly when the error happens
continuously is shown. In the Figure 9.12, the upper part shows the detail of ANCH and the lower
part shows the detail of EXCH. The retransmission of the Data 1 will be repeated until theretransmission counter [As specified] becomes 0. In between two retransmission periods of Data
1, the EXCHs can be used to transmit other data if the BS allocates EXCHs through the MAP.
In Figure 9.13, the example of retransmitting the Data 1 and Data 2 when error happens to bothdata is shown. Both Data 1 and Data 2 are subject to the same rule for retransmission. That is,
Data 1 is retransmitted after 2.5 ms from the time of receiving the NACK. On the other hand, Data
2 is retransmitted in a similar way but independently.

DL
UL

MA

1

MA

2

MN

3

MA

1

MA

4

MN

5

MA

1

MA

6

MN

7

ANCH

DL
UL

EXCH

Figure 9.12 Example of HARQ Retransmission 1

DL
UL

MA

1

MA

2

MN

3

MN

1

MA

2

MA

4

MA

5

MA

6

MA

7

Figure 9.13 Example of HARQ Retransmission 2

A-GN4.00-03-TS576

9.2.2.8 Example of Sequence
Figure 9.14 and Figure 9.15 show the example of the sequence of UL HARQ.
UL example 1 is an example of normal HARQ sequence when the error occurs.
UL example 2 is a sequence example when the error occurs after MCS is changed at the nexttransmission timing. In this case, the data 1 is usually demodulated because it does not meet the
HARQ approval requirement, and the buffering data for HARQ should be cleared at that timing.
MS

MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1

BS
CRC error.

NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1 (Retransmission)

After HARQ processing, demodulation
processing is carried out. CRC OK.

ACK Transmission
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 2

Figure 9.14 Example of UL 1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

577

MS

BS
MI : MCS 1
UL Data 1

CRC Error

NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 2
UL Data 2
NACK Transmission
MI : MCS 2
UL Data 2 (Re-transmission)
ACK Transmission

HARQ Cancelled, buffereddata for UL Data 1 iscleared.And CRC Error
After HARQ processing,demodulation processing iscarried out. And CRC OK

Figure 9.15 Example of UL 2

9.2.2.9 Switch of HARQ and the Adaptive Modulation
This section describes to the way to switch HARQ and adaptive modulation. When the CRC error
occurs repeatedly, transmission side changes modulation class and retransmits data by
MAC-ARQ.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

578

9.2.2.10 Increment Redundancy (IR) Method
IR-HARQ is used as a HARQ method. Figure 9.16 shows the block diagram of the IR-HARQ
receiver. IR-HARQ procedure is as follows:
1.
2.

3.
4.

5.
6.

FFT processes the baseband reception signal and the user signal is detected.
De-interleaving processes detected user signal and the result data is buffered. The processof maximum ratio combining is not performed for the first time. Depending on the buffer size
and the base codeword length, maximum ratio combining is used only when the total
received data exceeds IR length (NIR).
The buffer is released if no error is detected. The ACK field is set accordingly on the PHY.
The reception buffer is not released if an error is detected. The buffered data is kept in thebuffer until the retransmitted data is received. [Retransmission timing of the retransmitted
data is described later.]. The NACK is set for the erroneous data in the ACK field of the PHY
header and transmitted on the ANCH. The timing of the ANCH transmission is the second
from the current TDMA frame.
The previous sequential signal is transmitted when the transmitter receives NACK. If totaltransmitted data exceeds NIR, the data transmitted previously is retransmitted.
When the retransmitted data is received, FFT processed the received signal andde-interleaving processes the detected user signal. The de-interleaved data is concatenatedto the buffered data if total transmitted data is less than or equal to NIR. If total transmitted
data exceeds NIR, the de-interleaved data is combined with the buffered data as CC. Figure
9.17 shows the example of IR-HARQ retransmission procedure. The error correction
processes the combined data first and error detection is performed afterwards.
ACK(PHY Header)

ACK or NACK Transmission

Base Band
Reception Signal

SecondDemodulation

De-interleave

Concatenationand Maximal
Ratio Combining

First
Demodulation(Error Correction)

Error
Detection

Reception
Buffer Pool

Figure 9.16 Reception Block Diagram of IR-HARQ

A-GN4.00-03-TS

579

Based Encoded Codeword Length
Transmitted

NIR

The First
Transmission
DecodedThe Second
Transmission

Transmitted

DecodedTransmitted

The Third
Transmission
Combined
DecodedFigure 9.17 IR-HARQ Retransmission Procedure
9.2.2.11 Retransmission CountHARQ retransmission time is separately specified. When the condition of HARQ retransmission issatisfied, the number of HARQ retransmission is counted.
9.3 Optional Retransmission Control Method
9.3.1 HARQ
The HARQ within the MSL1 sublayer has the following characteristics:- N-process Stop-And-Wait;-

HARQ transmits and retransmits transport blocks;-

In the downlink:- Asynchronous adaptive HARQ;- Uplink ACK/NAKs in response to downlink (re)transmissions are sent on AUANCH or
AUEDCH;
A-GN4.00-03-TS

580

- ADECCH signals the HARQ process number and if it is a transmission or retransmission;- Retransmissions are always scheduled through ADECCH.
- In the uplink:- Synchronous HARQ;- Maximum number of retransmissions configured per MS (as opposed to per radio
bearer);- Downlink ACK/NAKs in response to uplink (re)transmissions are sent on ADHICH;- HARQ operation in uplink is governed by the following principles (summarized in Table
9.1-1):
1) Regardless of the content of the HARQ feedback (ACK or NACK), when a ADECCH
for the MS is correctly received, the MS follows what the ADECCH asks the MS to doi.e. perform a transmission or a retransmission (referred to as adaptive
retransmission);2) When no ADECCH addressed to the C-MSID of the MS is detected, the HARQ
feedback dictates how the MS performs retransmissions:- NACK: the MS performs a non-adaptive retransmission i.e. a retransmission on thesame uplink resource as previously used by the same process;- ACK: the MS does not perform any UL (re)transmission and keeps the data in the
HARQ buffer. A ADECCH is then required to perform a retransmission i.e. a
non-adaptive retransmission cannot follow.
-

Measurement gaps are of higher priority than HARQ retransmissions: whenever an HARQ
retransmission collides with a measurement gap, the HARQ retransmission does not takeplace.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

581

Table 9.2: UL HARQ Operation
HARQ feedback

ADECCHseen by the MS

seen by the MS

ACK or NACKNewTransmission

New transmission according to
ADECCHACK or NACK

Retransmission

Retransmission according to ADECCH(adaptive retransmission)

MS behaviour

No (re)transmission, keep data in
ACK

None

HARQ buffer and a ADECCH isrequired to resume retransmissions

NACK

None

Non-adaptive retransmission

9.3.2 ARQ
The ARQ within the MSL2 has the following characteristics:- ARQ retransmits MSL2 PDUs or MSL2 PDU segments based on MSL2 status reports;-

Polling for MSL2 status report is used when needed by MSL2;- MSL2 receiver can also trigger MSL2 status report after detecting a missing MSL2 PDU or
MSL2 PDU segment.
9.3.2.1 ARQ Retransmission procedure
The transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity can receive a negative acknowledgement (notificationof reception failure by its peer AM MSL2 entity) for an AMD PDU or a portion of an AMD PDU by
the following:- STATUS PDU from its peer AM MSL2 entity.
When receiving a negative acknowledgement for an AMD PDU or a portion of an AMD PDU by a
STATUS PDU from its peer AM MSL2 entity, the transmitting side of the AM MSL2 entity shall:

A-GN4.00-03-TS

582

When receiving a negative
acknowledgement

No

the SN of the corresponding AMD PDU falls
within the range VT(A) <= SN < VT(S)Yesconsider the AMD PDU or the portion of the
AMD PDU for which a negative
acknowledgement was received forretransmission.

if the AMD PDU is considered for retransmission
for the first timeNo

Yes
set the RETX_COUNT associated with the
AMD PDU to zeroincrement the
RETX_COUNTNo
if RETX_COUNT = maxRetxThresholdYes
indicate to upper layers thatmax retransmission has beenreachedEnd

Figure 9.18 STATUS PDU

When retransmitting an AMD PDU, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall:

A-GN4.00-03-TS583

retransmitting an
AMD PDU

if the AMD PDU can entirely fit within the total sizeof MSL2 PDU(s) indicated by lower layer at theparticular transmission opportunityNo

Yes
deliver the AMD PDU as it is except
for the P field (the P field should be
set according to sub clause “polling”
to lower layer

segment the AMD PDU, form a new AMD PDU
segment which will fit within the total size of
MSL2 PDU(s) indicated by lower layer at theparticular transmission opportunity and deliver
the new AMD PDU segment to lower layer.

End

Figure 9.19: STATUS PDU

When retransmitting a portion of an AMD PDU, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall:- segment the portion of the AMD PDU as necessary, form a new AMD PDU segment which
will fit within the total size of MSL2 PDU(s) indicated by lower layer at the particulartransmission opportunity and deliver the new AMD PDU segment to lower layer.
When forming a new AMD PDU segment, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall:- only map the Data field of the original AMD PDU to the Data field of the new AMD PDU
segment;- set the header of the new AMD PDU segment- set the P field according to sub clause “polling”

9.3.2.2 Polling
Upon assembly of a new AMD PDU, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall use thepolling in the below cases:
A-GN4.00-03-TS584

- PDU_WITHOUT_POLL >= pollPDU- BYTE_WITHOUT_POLL >= pollByte- If both the transmission buffer and the retransmission buffer becomes empty(excluding transmitted MSL2 data PDU awaiting for acknowledgements) after the transmission of
the MSL2 data PDU- If no new MSL2 data PDU can be transmitted after the transmission of the MSL2 data
PDU (e.g. due to window stalling)
To include a poll in a MSL2 data PDU, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall:-

set the P field of the MSL2 data PDU to "1";-

set PDU_WITHOUT_POLL to 0;-

set BYTE_WITHOUT_POLL to 0;

After delivering a MSL2 data PDU including a poll to lower layer and after incrementing of VT(S) if
necessary, the transmitting side of an AM MSL2 entity shall:- set POLL_SN to VT(S) – 1 ;-start t-PollRetransmit or restart t-PollRetransmit

9.3.2.3 Status report
An AM MSL2 entity sends STATUS PDUs to its peer AM MSL2 entity in order to provide positive
and/or negative acknowledgements of MSL2 PDUs (or portions of them).
High layer configures whether or not the status prohibit function is to be used for an AM MSL2
entity.
Triggers to initiate STATUS reporting include:- Polling from its peer AM MSL2 entity:-

Detection of reception failure of an MSL2 data PDU:STATUS PDU consists of a STATUS PDU payload and a MSL2 control PDU header.
MSL2 control PDU header consists of a D/C and a CPT field.
The STATUS PDU payload starts from the first bit following the MSL2 control PDU header, and it
consists of one ACK_SN and one E1, zero or more sets of a NACK_SN, an E1 and an E2, andpossibly a set of a SOstart and a SOend for each NACK_SN. When necessary one to sevenpadding bits are included in the end of the STATUS PDU to achieve octet alignment.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

585

D/C

CPT
ACK_SN
ACK_SNE1
NACK_SN
E1
E2
NACK_SN
NACK_SN
E1
E2
SOstartSOstart
SOend
SOend
SOend
NACK_SN
...

Oct 1
Oct 2
Oct 3
Oct 4
Oct 5
Oct 6
Oct 7
Oct 8
Oct 9

Figure 9.20: STATUS PDU

9.4 QCS and Connection
Figure 9.21 shows the relation between connection and QCS. The connection is related to unit
radio resource. The radio resource is composed of CSCH or the pair of ANCH and EXCH. One
connection accommodates one or more QCS. QoS is controlled for each QCS. One MS can have
two or more connections. Detail of QoS is described in the following section. The connection is
identified by connection-ID. The QCS is identified by QCS-ID.

QCSID=1 is only used for message.
It is assigned per Connection ID.

Connection #1
MS

BS
Connection #2

QCS-ID=2 ~16 is used for user data.
(ex. data, voice and others.)

Figure 9.21 Connection and QCS
The relation between connection and QCS is shown in Figure 9.21
A-GN4.00-03-TS

586

The value 1 of QCS-ID is used to transmit the connection and QCS control information. The value
2 to 16 of QCS-ID is used to transmit the upper layer data. The MAC control protocol is appliedwith all QCS-ID.
This QCS-ID assignment is applied per connection.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

587

9.4.1 Service ClassXGP system defines the service class as shown in Table 9.3. The service class is not defined in
an individual packet but in the individual flow. The negotiation of the service class is performed
according to the message when the connection is established.
These service class have a relation to QoS number. Refer to 7.3.3.17 for detail.
Table 9.3 Service Class
Service class name

Explanation

Private Line Class

Dedicated line service is provided. A wirelessbandwidth more than constancy is always secured toapply to the service with a random generation of the(PLC)

packet. It is guaranteed that the packet reaches theaccepting station at the service rate within the decidedtime.

The situation in lack of the packet is not permitted andthe prohibition is applied to real-time service. In orderno Packet loss and Variable Rateto correspond to the change in burst volume ofClass
information, it is possible to make wireless bandwidth(nl -VRC)
change according to the data amount. This class
guarantees the maximum delay value.

allowable Packet
Variable Rate Class(al-VRC)loss

Low - Delay Best Effort Class(Ld-BE)The situation in lack of the packet is permitted, and thepermission is applied to real-time service. It is possible
andto make wireless bandwidth change according to thedata amount to correspond to the change in burst
volume of information. This class guarantees the
maximum delay value.
This class is applied to non-real-time service. It is
possible to make wireless bandwidth change
according to the data amount. Time delay is shorter
than LAC, and the packet loss is not allowed.

Leave Alone Class(LAC)

It is applied to non-real-time service. Best effort
service that does not guarantee wireless bandwidthand does not allow packet loss is supported. The
maximum possible bandwidth is allocated.

Voice Class

Dedicated line service is provided. A wireless
A-GN4.00-03-TS

588

Service class name

Explanation(Voice)bandwidth more than constancy is always secured toapply to the service with a random generation.
The quality of bandwidth and delay time is guaranteed
by TCH which is defined for voice only channel.

9.4.2 QoS Parameter
Table 9.4 shows the parameter guaranteed in each QoS service class.
Table 9.4 Service Class and Quality Parameter
QoS parameter
Forwarding
delay

JitterTraffic parameter
FER

Guarantee
bandwidth

Average
Bit Rate

Traffic
Priority

PLC

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

nl-VRC,
al-VRC

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

LD-BE

-

-

No

No

Yes

Yes

LAC

-

-

No

No

No

Yes

Voice

Yes

-

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes

Yes : Possible to specify it.
No : Impossible to specify it.
- : Irrelevance9.4.2.1 Forwarding Delay
The forwarding delay provided by this parameter is guaranteed in PLC of real-time service.
9.4.2.2 Jitter
It refers to difference between the maximum delay value and the minimum delay value, as ell as
the maximum jitter values.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

589

9.4.2.3 Frame Error Rate (FER)
In real-time service, it provides the FER that service allows according to this parameter.
9.4.2.4 Guarantee Bandwidth
The system guarantees the bandwidth provided by this parameter.
It aims to transmit data without causing the delay when data transmission is needed by securing
a necessary bandwidth without fail.
9.4.2.5 Average Bit Rate
It is a bit number of the data transmitted to a wireless section near the unit time. It provides for the
bit number of the data taken out of the made queue of each user (mean value). In Private LineClass, the average bit rate becomes the same as the guaranteed maximum bit rate because thedata volume is constant.
A wireless bandwidth is prevented from being occupied when data is generated in the burst asservice provide output bit rate with high priority.
9.4.2.6 Traffic Priority
This parameter is used when data in the same QoS class is given priority for process. For
instance, when data requested for re-sending is made prior to usual data, the traffic priority is
specified high.

A-GN4.00-03-TS590

9.5 Access Phase Control
9.5.1 Power Control
PC field of DL and UL PHY frame header is used for the power control. MS is able to control the
UL transmission power according to the PC field data from BS (Refer to Sections 4.4.6.3 and4.4.6.4). This power control method is mandatory, because it must be implemented for OFDMA.
BS is also able to control DL transmission power according to the PC field data from MS (Refer to
Section 4.4.6.4). This power control method is optional as it is only used to decrease theinterference between cells.
Figure 9.22 shows the power control diagram.
PC Value
Transmission Side
Reception
Level
Measurement

PC Value
Decision

PC Value
Reception SideICH Transmission

PC Value
Transmission

Transmission
Power Control

PC

Figure 9.22 Power Control Block Diagram
The PC field transmission side sets the value to PC based on reception level of pilot symbol(Refer to Figure 9.23). This standard does not specify the timing relation between reception level
and PC value.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

591

PC=0
PC=1

Reception Level

Target Level

Figure 9.23 Reception Level and PC Value
The relation between the reception level and value of PC is shown below.
 Reception level > Target level
PC=0
 Reception level <= Target level
PC=1
9.5.2 Timing Control
SD field of DL PHY frame is used for the timing control. According to the SD field data from BS,
MS is able to control the UL transmission timing (Refer to Section 4.4.6.2).
Figure 9.24 shows the timing control diagram. BS aligns symbol timing between MS and MS byusing SD field. BS decides SD value based on reception symbol timing. MS changes
transmission timing according to SD.
BS
TimingMeasurement

SD Value
DecisionMS
ICH Transmission

SD Value
Transmission

TimingAlignment

SD

Figure 9.24 UL Timing Control Block Diagram

A-GN4.00-03-TS

592

Figure 9.25 shows the time relationship of the reception burst and the target burst.

Target burst Timing
dt1
Reception Burst Timing 1
dt2
Reception Burst Timing 2
Time
Figure 9.25 Time Difference Between Target Timing and Reception Timing
BS decides SD value as shown in Figure 9.26 when dt is defined as the difference between
reception burst timing and target burst timing.

SD=”01”

SD=”00”

SD=”11”

SD=”10”
Value of dt

Threshold 1

Threshold 2
Target Timing (dt = 0)Threshold 3

Figure 9.26 dt and SD Value

A-GN4.00-03-TS593

9.5.3 Link Adaptation Control
9.5.3.1 MCS Switching
9.5.3.1.1 Decision of Transmission MCS
The MCS for the data transmission in the later TDMA frame will be decided based on the MR in
the received PHY header. When the MS requests one of the MCS values by using MR, the BS
may use any of the MCS values that is available including those below the requested MCS value.
Then the decided MCS for the DL data transmission in that TDMA frame will be set in MI field of
the DL PHY header. Figure 9.27 shows the example of selecting MCS for transmission by using
received MR on the PHY header.
MI = 5MI = 3

TransmissionReception
MR = 3

MR = 5Figure 9.27 Example of MI Transmission When Switch Time Is 7.5 ms

9.5.3.1.2 Decision of The Reception of Demodulation MCS
According to the received MI, demodulation will be done in the received data of the adaptive
modulation area.
9.5.3.1.3 Setup of Modulation Method in MR Field for Transmission
The average SINR for all the symbols received for the user is calculated during this process. The
calculating of smoothing etc. might be applied to SINR. The modulation method to be set in the
MR field will be decided from this SINR value for the time being. Figure 9.28 shows the way to set
MR field based on the SINR value for the time being.
a)
b)
c)

When the SINR value for the time being is less than A1, BPSK (R=1/2, Efficiency=0.5)
modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A1 to A2, QPSK (R=1/2,
Efficiency=1) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A2 to A3, QPSK (R=3/4,
Efficiency=1.5) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

594

d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)

When the SINR value for the time being is between A3 to A4, 16QAM (R= 1/2,
Efficiency=2) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A4 to A5, 16QAM (R=3/4,
Efficiency=3) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A5 to A6, 64QAM (R=4/6,
Efficiency=4) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A6 to A7, 64QAM (R=5/6,
Efficiency=5) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is between A7 to A8, 256QAM (R=6/8,
Efficiency=6) modulation method is selected for setting MR field.
When the SINR value for the time being is above A8, 256QAM (R=7/8, Efficiency=7)
modulation method is selected for setting MR field.

Modulation
Method

256QAM
R = 7/8i

256QAMR = 6/8h64QAMR = 5/6

g64QAM
R = 4/6

f

16QAM
R = 3/4e

16QAM
R = 1/2d

QPSK
R = 3/4c

QPSK
R = 1/2
BPSK
R = 1/2ba

SINR Value
A1

A2

A3

A4

A5

A6

A7

A8

Figure 9.28 Method of Modulation Method Selection According to SINR Value

A-GN4.00-03-TS595

9.5.4 ANCH/CSCH Scheduling Control
Figure 9.29 shows numbering rule regarding ANCH/CSCH active frame. Both MS and BS use
specified frames. It is called ANCH/CSCH active frame. Scheduling term is repeated during DL
LCCH transmission period.
Downlink LCCH Transmission Period
CCH

UL
DL
Scheduling Term
1 TDMA Frame

ANCH/
CSCH

UL
DL
F1

F2

Fn

F1

F2

F1

F2

Figure 9.29 ANCH/CSCH Active Frame Number
ANCH/CSCH active frame is changed by “ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message from BS in
active state. Figure 9.30 and Figure 9.31 shows the change sequence of ANCH/CSCH active
frame.

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching indication

ANCH/CSCH switching confirmation
Figure 9.30 BS Origin ANCH/CSCH Scheduling Change

A-GN4.00-03-TS

596

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching request
ANCH/CSCH switching indication

ANCH/CSCH switching confirmation
Figure 9.31 MS Origin ANCH/CSCH Scheduling Change

MS changes ANCH/CSCH active frame when MS receives ANCH/CSCH switching indication
message. ANCH/CSCH switching indication message contains the following information.
 destination logical PRU number.
which is the same as the source PRU or is a different PRU
 ANCH/CSCH scheduling term
 ANCH/CSCH frame specification
MS sends ANCH/CSCH switching confirmation message after MS changes ANCH/CSCH active
frame.
When MS receives indication message which has unsupported value of scheduling term, period
and scheduling itself, MS can request another scheduling term, period or reject the scheduling.
The rejection of scheduling can be used only when there is the necessity for the guaranteedbandwidth such as voice data.
9.5.5 Interference Avoidance Control
9.5.5.1 ANCH/CSCH Disconnect Detection
At the BS or MS, if the ANCH/CSCH reception is impossible for N successive times, the
ANCH/CSCH will be released as the reception side regards the ANCH/CSCH to be disconnected.
Figure 9.32 shows a sequence when ANCH/CSCH disconnection is detected at the BS side. If
the N successive ANCH/CSCH disconnection does not happen, the BS will regard ANCH/CSCH
to be connected. The ANCH will be released if the ANCH/CSCH is failed for the connection for N
times continuously. It means transmission and reception on the ANCH/CSCH is ceased.
Disconnection is detected in the same procedure at the MS. Both BS and MS regard it as an idle
state after ANCH/CSCH is released.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

597

MS

BS
ANCH
ANCH
ANCH
ANCH
ANCH
Tx OffDet.
Release

Tx OffDet.
Release
Idle State

Figure 9.32 Detection of ANCH/CSCH Disconnection

9.5.5.2 ANCH/CSCH Switching
MS supervises the average SINR on the DL ANCH while BS supervises the average SINR on the
UL ANCH. When the radio condition deteriorates, ANCH/CSCH will be changed to another PRU.
Average SINR is calculated according to the average SINR calculation time for ANCH/CSCH.
The measurement result older than the average SINR calculation time for the ANCH/CSCH is notincluded in the calculation average SINR.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

598

9.5.5.2.1 MS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching
When average SINR becomes lower than ANCH/CSCH switching DL SINR threshold, MStransmits ANCH/CSCH switching request message to BS. As soon as BS received the message,
it selects the PRU from an unused PRU with CS concerned according to the channel selection
algorithm. After the destination PRU was selected, BS notifies the destination PRU number bysending ANCH/CSCH switching indication message to MS. MS disconnects original PRU when it
receives ANCH/CSCH switching indication message. Then DL carrier sensing for the PRU to be
switched is carried out. The transmission and reception of ANCH/CSCH start if the carrier
sensing result is less than DL RSSI threshold for ANCH selection (DL RSSI threshold for CSCH
selection). BS judges the ANCH/CSCH switching to be success when it manages to receive UL
ANCH/CSCH. BS then disconnects original ANCH/CSCH.
Figure 9.33 shows MS origin ANCH/CSCH switching sequence. The wide arrow shown in the
figure describes radio management message, and the small arrow shows radio transmission andreception.

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching request
ANCH/CSCH switching indication
Carrier sence

Release

ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH

ANCH/CSCH switching confirmation
ANCH/CSCH
ReleaseFigure 9.33 MS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching

A-GN4.00-03-TS599

9.5.5.2.2 BS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching
BS selects the destination PRU from an unused PRU with BS concerned according to thechannel selection algorithm when average SINR is lower than ANCH/CSCH switching UL SINR
threshold. BS then transmits radio management message "ANCH/CSCH switching indication"that contains the destination PRU number to MS. The same process will be carried out after that
as MS trigged ANCH/CSCH switching.
Figure 9.34 shows BS originated ANCH/CSCH switching sequence. The wide arrow shown in the
figure describes radio management message, and the small arrow shows radio transmission andreception.

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching indication
Carrier sence

Release

ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH

ANCH/CSCH switching confirmation
ANCH/CSCH
ReleaseFigure 9.34 BS Origin ANCH/CSCH Switching

A-GN4.00-03-TS600

9.5.5.2.3 Retransmission of ANCH/CSCH Switching Indication
UL transmission for original ANCH/CSCH is only able to be detected until retransmission timer
expiration when BS transmits ANCH/CSCH switching indication message, BS then judges that
ANCH/CSCH switching indication message did not reach MS and it retransmits ANCH/CSCH
switching indication message.

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching indication
ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH

Retransmission Timer

ANCH/CSCH switching indication
Retransmission Timer
Figure 9.35 Retransmission of ANCH Switch Indication

When retrying count for ANCH/CSCH retransmission indication is over, ANCH/CSCH switching
operation is finished and the original communication is continued.
9.5.5.2.4 Switchback Operation
BS continues original ANCH/CSCH transmission and reception after the transmission of
ANCH/CSCH switching indication message transmission because MS carries out switch backprocessing in case ANCH/CSCH switching fails. When the following conditions are satisfied at
MS side, the switchback operation is carried out.
When the DL carrier sensing result at the destination PRU exceeds the DL RSSI
threshold for ANCH selection (DL RSSI threshold for CSCH selection).
When DL ANCH/CSCH is not detected at destination PRU.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

601

Figure 9.36 shows the switch back operation. The figure describes a sequence when carrier
sensing at MS side for a BS-informed PRU is OK BS tries to transmit ANCH/CSCH at destination
PRU, but it cannot receive DL ANCH/CSCH, therefore switchback operation is started.

MS

BS
ANCH/CSCH switching indication
Carrier sence

Release

ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH

Establishment
Wating Timer

Establish
ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH
ReleaseEstablish
ANCH/CSCH
ANCH/CSCH

ReleaseFigure 9.36 ANCH/CSCH Switchback

In the figure MS does carrier sensing at destination PRU and the result is OK. ANCH/CSCH isthen established at destination PRU. Switchback operation will be started if DL ANCH/CSCH is
not received at destination PRU. MS releases the destination PRU and establishes ANCH/CSCH
at original PRU. BS will know that the switch of ANCH/CSCH fails if it receives UL ANCH/CSCH
at original PRU. In this case, BS continues ANCH transmission and reception at original PRU.

A-GN4.00-03-TS602

9.5.6 Handover Control
There are two kinds of handover procedure definition for XGP.
One is normal handover, of which the processing is started after all the radio connections with BS
are disconnected.
The other is seamless handover, of which the processing is started with no need to disconnect
the BS in connection. Seamless handover can be carried out with less overhead.
When MS is handed over to BS, connection establishment procedure is conducted in thesame way. MS transmits LCH assignment request message to BS-B which is selected by
MS according to each procedure. After MS receives LCH assignment message from BS-B,
MS carries out transmission by changing radio state from idle to active and connecting
ANCH/CSCH. After connection is established to BS-B, resource release operation is carriedout from network side of BS-A.
BS-A : The BS from which the MS is handed over.
BS-B : The BS to which the MS is being handed over.

9.5.6.1 Normal HandoverMS starts connection establishment processing after stopping CCH capture and ICH
transmission/reception. The conditions to start normal handover are describes as follows.
When DL ANCH/CSCH disconnection is detected at less RSSI value for DL
ANCH/CSCH than the threshold of handover processing level.
When the RSSI value of UL ANCH/CSCH is less than threshold of handover processing
level.
When BS cannot assign PRU to be switched although ANCH/CSCH switching conditionis satisfied.

“ANCH/CSCH switching indication” message is transmitted from BS to MS in case when BS
starts normal handover. MS starts normal handover when it receives the message. Once of MS
starts normal handover, it will not transmit any signal to BS to inform the start of handoverprocessing.
MS starts the search for destination BS after transmission stops. The result of the search fordestination BS is arranged in order of RSSI value from the highest one on. When the handoverprocess starts, destination BS is chosen from the list which is created as a result of the search fordestination BS. The BS which has indicated the highest RSSI value should be given the highest
priority over all others for destination BS choice.

A-GN4.00-03-TS603

9.5.6.2 Seamless Handover
MS searches for destination BS while maintaining the connection to the original BS. Destination
BS is chosen from information based on search result. The conditions to start seamless handover
are as follows:when SINR of DL ANCH/CSCH becomes less than seamless handover SINR threshold.
when SINR of UL ANCH/CSCH becomes less than seamless handover processing
SINR.

When the condition to start MS originated seamless handover is satisfied, LCH assignment
request message will be transmitted from the MS to destination BS if MS has available
destination BS list.
If MS does not have available destination BS list, MS transmits ANCH/CSCH switching request[No destination BS list] message to the original BS to search for destination BS. When BS
receives ANCH/CSCH switching request [No destination BS list], it allocates all EXCHs to the MS.
If there is no EXCH allocation for the MS, the MS starts destination BS search processing at all
TDMA slots except for the TDMA slot which ANCH/CSCH is allocated. In this case, The BS
searching process is carried out to all relative slots except for the TDMA slot to which
ANCH/CSCH is allocated. After the searching process for destination BS is completed, LCH
assignment request message is transmitted to the destination BS.
When MS receives LCH assignment reject message from destination BS, MS re-selectdestination BS from its own destination BS list, then seamless handover process is carried out
again.
When MS receives LCH assignment message from destination BS, ANCH/CSCH transmission
and reception starts at destination BS without disconnecting radio link. When radio resource
allocation is received from destination BS through MAP in DL ANCH/CSCH, radio link between
original BS is disconnected.

A-GN4.00-03-TS604

9.6 MAC Layer Control
9.6.1 Window Control
In XGP, window control is carried out. Delivery confirmation is done by the RR message. Window
position is updated according to the sequence number contained in the RR message. Datatransmission stops when the transmission data reaches the window size. Figure 9.37 shows theexample of the window size equal to 4. In the figure, the arrow stands for the available area totransmit the data. The number in the figure is the sequence number. The circle that is shown in
the left side of the figure shows the case that a RR message is received when the sequencenumber N contained in the RR message is 2. In this case, the data in the window can betransmitted when N is a number between 2 and 5. The circle shown in the right side of the figure
shows the case that a RR message is received with N as 4. In this case, the data in the window
can be transmitted when N is a number between 4 and 7.

RR
Window(Possible to Send)
2

N

2

3
4

3
4

N

5

RR
5

7

6
Window(Possible to Send)

Figure 9.37 Window Control

Window size is defined by negotiation between MS and BS when the connection is established.
Though the name of element for negotiation is window size, window size itself is a parameter andeach window size parameter is related with the transmitting acknowledge timing and maximum
receiving unit without receiving acknowledge.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

605

Figure 9.38 shows the example of the window control sequence when the window size is 4. In the
figure, MS transmits the data until the end of the window size when becomes 5 after MS receives
RR with N as 2. Since the transmission data reaches the window size, data transmission issuspended until the delivery confirmation is received. When MS receives the RR with N as 4, thewindow position is updated. Then the data transmission is resumed.
MS

BS
Data (N=0)
RR (N=1)
Data (N=1)
RR (N=2)
Data (N=2)
Data (N=3)
Data (N=4)
Data (N=5)
Stop
RR (N=4)
Data (N=6)

Figure 9.38 Window Control Sequence

A-GN4.00-03-TS

606

9.6.2 Flow Control
Flow control in the radio section is carried out by the notification of busy status using RNR
message of the MAC control protocol and window control which is described in Section 9.6.1.
Figure 9.39 shows an example of flow control using the RNR message. In the figure, busy state
occurs in MS when MS receives data with sequence number N as 1. MS then sends RNR
message with N as 2 in order to suspend data transmission from BS. MS sends RR message
with N as 2 afterwards to notify BS to resume data transmission when it recovers from the busy
state. BS then resumes data transmission.

MS

BS
Data (N=1)
Busy

Ready

RNR (N=2)

RR (N=2)
Data (N=2)
RR (N=3)
Data (N=3)

Figure 9.39 RNR Used in Flow Control

RNR message may not reach to the opposite side in case of bad radio condition.
Figure 9.40 shows an example that MS has transmitted RNR to BS, while RNR fails to reach BS.
The figure shows the case of window size as 4. BS continues to transmit DL data within its
window size to MS. The sender BS suspends data transmission when the DL data transmission
reached the window boundary. Even though the RNR does not reach BS, data transmission canbe suspended as if busy state occurs on the reception side.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

607

MS

BS
RR (N=1)
Data (N=1)
Busy

RNR (N=2)
Data (N=2)
Data (N=3)
Data (N=4)

Ready

RR (N=5)
Data (N=5)

Figure 9.40 Failure of RNR reception

A-GN4.00-03-TS

608

9.6.3 Retransmission Control by SR Method
Reception side sends SREJ message with designation sequence number when it requests
retransmission of a certain data. Transmission side retransmits specified data on receiving thisSREJ message.
The reception side may transmit REJ message instead of SREJ when there are many data to be
retransmitted. Transmission side resumes transmission from the data specified by sequencenumber on receiving this REJ message.
The transmission side should hold the transmitted data until corresponding received confirmation
message (RR/RNR) is received.
Figure 9.41 shows example of SREJ operation.
Transmission
Side

Reception
Side Data, N=1
1
2
3

6
3
7

2

Data, N=2
Data, N=3
Data, N=4

4
5

1

3
4

Data, N=5

Data, N=6
Data, N=3
Data, N=75637SREJ, N=3

Figure 9.41 Sequence of SREJ

Reception side should start SREJ retransmission timer when MAC sends SREJ message. The
timer should be stopped when the timer is expired. SREJ is transmitted again when the timer is
expired. But, FRMR will be transmitted and the ARQ operation will be cancelled if the SREJ
retransmission count exceeds the limitation.
Figure 9.42 shows an example of SREJ retry operation.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

609

Reception Side

Transmission Side
Data (N=5)
Data (N=6)
Data (N=7)
SREJ (N=6)
Data (N=8)

SREJ Retransmission TimerTO

SREJ (N=6)

TO

SREJ (N=6)

TO

FRMR

SREJ Retransmission Timer

SREJ Retransmission Timer

Figure 9.42 MAC-ARQ SREJ Retry Operation

RR should be sent if reception side receives retransmitted data.
Figure 9.43 shows an example of MAC-ARQ operation.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

610

Reception Side

Transmission Side
Data (N=5)
Data (N=6)
Data (N=7)
SREJ (N=6)

SREJ Retransmission TimerTO
SREJ Retransmission Timer

SREJ (N=6)
Data (N=6)

Stop
RR (N=8)

Figure 9.43 ARQ Succession

9.6.4 Notification and Recovery of Error Condition
When abnormal situation occurs, restoration process will be carried out by transmitting FRMR
message.
FRMR message will be transmitted in following cases.






Sequence Number Error
A frame which has unexpected sequence number is detected.
Invalid Frame Reception
When the MAC frame length does not meet for the regulation specified.
Abnormal Frame Reception
When MAC frame with header not specified in this specification is detected.
Over the retransmission times
This error is detected when the number of retransmission times exceeds the limit orwhen the number of timer restart exceeds the limit.
Other Error
This error is detected when undefined error occurred.

Transmission is re-started when new data come from upper layer.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

611

9.7 Encryption Field
Encryption is applied only to MAC payload. Encryption management is done before the CRC
addition.
MAC Frame

MAC Header

MAC Payload
Encryption Field

Figure 9.44 Encryption Field
9.8 Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS)
Semi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) is kind of scheduling of using pre-configured grant.
When Semi-Persistent Scheduling is enabled by high layer, the following information is provided:- Semi-Persistent Scheduling C-MSID;- Uplink Semi-Persistent Scheduling interval semiPersistSchedIntervalUL and number of
empty transmissions before implicit release implicitReleaseAfter, if Semi-Persistent
Scheduling is enabled for the uplink;- Whether twoIntervalsConfig is enabled or disabled for uplink;- Downlink Semi-Persistent Scheduling interval semiPersistSchedIntervalDL and number ofconfigured HARQ processes for Semi-Persistent SchedulingnumberOfConfSPS-Processes, if Semi-Persistent Scheduling is enabled for the downlink;
When Semi-Persistent Scheduling for uplink or downlink is disabled by high layer, thecorresponding configured grant or configured assignment shall be discarded.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

612

Chapter 10 Global Mode
10.1 Introduction
XGP Global Mode is an optional mode that introduces some advanced features from 3GPP LTE
specifications to improve the system performance and offer better services to the future PHS
users.
Global Mode is constructed on the same mobile communication structure as XGP. It is feasible tooperate Original PHS, XGP and the optional Global Mode in the co-existing network in somespecific conditions and to supply same services within the same area.
XGP Global Mode, which refers to only TDD part of 3GPP technical specifications, specifies the
air interface including the physical layer, medium access control layer and radio connection
related specifications.
XGP Global Mode supports three releases of 3GPP TDD LTE, including Release 8, 9 and 10.
XGP Global Mode based on Release 10 is specified as an evolution of the XGP Global Mode
based on Release 8 and 9, Therefore, XGP Global Mode based on Release 10 has backward
compatibility with XGP Global Mode based on Release 8 and 9 in the sense that

Release 8/9 terminal can work in a Release 10 system;

Release 10 terminal can work in a Release 8/9 system.

The XGP Global Mode based on Release 8 is described in section 10.4, the XGP Global Mode
based on Release 9 is described in section 10.5 and the XGP Global Mode based on Release 10
is described in section 10.6.
In addition to those 3GPP compatible specifications, the XGP unique feature is firstly described in
section 10.3.

10.2 Abbreviations and Acronyms for Global Mode
AS

Access Stratum

AMBR

Aggregate Maximum Bit Rate

A-GN4.00-03-TS

613

CA

Carrier Aggregation

CDD

Cyclic Delay Diversity

CIF

Carrier Indicator Field

CMAS

Commercial Mobile Alert Service

CQI

Channel Quality Indication

CDD

Cyclic Delay Diversity

CSG

Closed Subscriber Group

CSI

Channel State Information

DCI

Downlink Control Information

DFTS-OFDM DFT Spread OFDMDL-SCH

Downlink Shared Channel

ETWS

Earthquake and Tsunami Warning System

E-UTRAN

Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access

GBR

Guarnteed Bit Rate

MBSFN

Multimedia Broadcast multicast service Single Frequency Network

OOB

Out of Band

PBCH

Physical Broadcast Channel

PCFICH

Physical Control Format Indicator Channel

PDCCH

Physical Downlink Control Channel

PDSCH

Physical Downlink Shared Channel

PDU

Protocol Data Units

PHICH

Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator Channel

PMCH

Physical Multicast Channel

PRACH

Physical Random Access Channel

PUCCH

Physical Uplink Control Channel

PUSCH

Physical Uplink Shared Channel

PWS

Public Warning System

RAT

Radio Access Technology

A-GN4.00-03-TS

614

RLC

Radio Link Control

ROHC

Robust Header Compression

SN

Sequence Number

SRB

Signaling Radio Bearer

SSAC

Service Specific Access Control

UCI

Uplink Control Information

UL-SCH

Uplink Shared Channel

10.3 XGP unique optional featureThis section describes XGP original feature specified optionally for Global Mode. By considering
the total operation balance, this feature of unique PWS may or may not be introduced in the
Global Mode network.
10.3.1 Public Waning System (PWS)
10.3.1.1 Overview
The characteristic of PWS in XGP is preventing UE from reading the repetitions of ETWS
messages by informing UE the IE ETWSValueTag in Paging.
10.3.1.2 Reception of the Paging message by the UE
The UE which supports unique PWS feature in XGP will handle the IE “etws-Indication” as
described below in this subclause, instead of just the relevant portion in the procedure describedin 5.3.2.3 of [39].
1> if the etws-Indication is included, and UE is ETWS capable
2> if IE ETWSValueTag is not included, or
2> if IE ETWSValueTag is included and it indicates the ETWS message broadcasting in
the cell has been updated.
3>re-acquire SystemInformationBlockType1 immediately, i.e., without waiting until thenext system information modification period boundary;3>if the schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType10 is present:

A-GN4.00-03-TS

615

4>acquire SystemInformationBlockType10;
3> if the schedulingInfoList indicates that SystemInformationBlockType11 is present:4>acquire SystemInformationBlockType11;
10.3.1.3 Actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 message
Details of actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType1 are described in 10.6 of[39].
10.3.1.4 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType10 message
Details of actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType10 are described in 10.6 of[39].
10.3.1.5 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType11 message
Details of actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType11 are described in 10.6 of[39].
10.3.1.6 Actions upon reception of SystemInformationBlockType12 message
Details of actions upon reception of the SystemInformationBlockType12 are described in 10.6 of[39].
10.3.1.7 Paging message update
In order to support the PWS feature in XGP Global Mode, Paging-v9e0-IEs-XGP is introduced
into Paging message. “etwsValueTag” field in Paging-v9e0-IEs-XGP indicates if the ETWS
message broadcasting in the cell has been updated.
Paging message update-- ASN1START…
Paging-v890-IEs ::=SEQUENCE {lateNonCriticalExtension
OCTET STRING(CONTAINING Paging-v9e0-IEs-XGP)
OPTIONAL, -- Need OP
nonCriticalExtension
Paging-v920-IEs
OPTIONAL}
A-GN4.00-03-TS

616

…
Paging-v9e0-IEs-XGP ::=etwsValueTag}…
-- ASN1STOPSEQUENCE {INTEGER (0..31) ,10.4 Specification - referring to “Release 8 of 3GPP”
References:
Release 8 of 3GPP technical specifications that XGP Global Mode refers to are listed below:[1] TS 36.101 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.101/36101-8h0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission
and reception, <Ver 8.17.0 (2012-03)>[2] TS 36.104 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.104/36104-8c0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission andreception, <Ver 8.12.0 (2011-06)>[3] TS 36.201 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.201/36201-830.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE physical layer; General description,<Ver 8.3.0 (2009-03)>[4] TS 36.211 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.211/36211-890.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation, <Ver
8.9.0 (2009-12)>[5] TS 36.212 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.212/36212-880.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding, <Ver
8.8.0 (2009-12)>[6] TS 36.213 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.213/36213-880.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures, <Ver 8.8.0(2009-09)>[7] TS 36.214 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.214/36214-870.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements, <Ver 8.7.0(2009-09)>[8] TS 36.300 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.300/36300-8c0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2, <Ver 8.12.0 (2010-04)>
A-GN4.00-03-TS

617

[9] TS 36.304 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.304/36304-8a0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle
mode, <Ver 8.10.0 (2012-03)>[10] TS 36.321 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.321/36321-8c0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol
specification, <Ver 8.12.0 (2012-03)>[11] TS 36.322 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.322/36322-880.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol
specification, <Ver 8.8.0 (2010-06)>[12] TS 36.323 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.323/36323-860.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP) specification, <Ver 8.6.0 (2009-06)>[13] TS 36.331 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.331/36331-8g0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification, <Ver 8.16.0 (2011-12)>
Note: The version number of 3GPP specification document can be read as the latest one in thesame release if the document number is updated.
10.4.1 System Overview
10.4.1.1 System Structure
XGP Global Mode is assumed to be operated in the system which consists of MS, BS and Relay
Station (RS) which relays communications between BS and MS.
MS is called as User Equipment (UE) and BS is called as E-UTRAN NodeB (eNB) while RS iscalled as Relay Node (RN) in the reference document.
Details of system structure for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4 of [8].
10.4.1.2 Interface Definition
The system has „Um‟ interface and “X2” Interface.
“Um” interface is interface point between MS and BS.
“X2” interface is interface point between BS and BS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

618

Details of interface are described in section 19 and 20 of [8].
10.4.1.3 Frequency structure
System bandwidth is defined as total bandwidth including guard bandwidth and effective channel
bandwidth. Guard bandwidth is defined as the bandwidth to prevent interference to/from theadjacent system.
XGP Global Mode supports system bandwidths as shown in Table 5.6-1 of [1]. Details ofEffective Channel Bandwidth and Guard Bandwidth are described in section 5.6 of [1].
10.4.1.4 Access Method
The multiple access method for the XGP Global Mode is based on OFDM with a CP in thedownlink, and on Single-Carrier Frequency Division Multiple Access (SC-FDMA) with a CP in the
uplink.
Details of access method are described in section 5 of [8] and section 4.2.1 of [3].
10.4.1.5 Frame Structure
Downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with 10ms duration for XGP
Global Mode. Each radio Frame of length 10ms consists of two half-frames of length 5ms each.
Each half-frame consists of five slots of length 1ms.
Slot is called as subframe in the reference document.
XGP Global Mode uses type 2 Frame Structure defined in section 4.2 of [4]. Among all the UL-DL
configurations shown in Table 4.2-2 of [4], XGP Global Mode may be configured with UL-DL
configuration 0, 1, 2 or 6. The Special subframe configuration of XGP Global Mode may be
configuration 5 or 7 shown in Table 4.2-1 of [4].
10.4.1.6 Physical Resource Unit (PRU)
DL Physical resource Unit is defined as consecutive ML OFDM symbols in the time domain and
NL subcarriers consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
UL Physical resource Unit is defined as MU consecutive SC-FDMA symbols in the time domain
and NU consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain.
Details of DL Physical Resource Unit and UL Physical Resource Unit of XGP Global Mode are
A-GN4.00-03-TS

619

described in section 6.2 and section 5.2 of [4] respectively.
10.4.1.7 MAC and Radio Connection for Global Mode
MAC layer for XGP Global Mode is split into three sub-layers: MAC sub-layer1(MSL1), MAC
sub-layer2(MSL2) and MAC sub-layer3(MSL3).
MAC sub-layer1 performs the functions: Channel Mapping, Multiplexing/De-multiplexing of MAC
SDUs, scheduling information reporting, Error correction through HARQ, Padding, etc.
MAC sub-layer2 performs the functions: Transfer of upper layer PDUs, Error Correction through
ARQ, Concatenation, segmentation and reassembly of SDUs, Re-segmentation of PDUs,
Duplicate detection, etc.
MAC sub-layer3 performs the functions: Header compression and decompression, Transfer ofuser and control data, In-sequence delivery of upper layer PDUs, Duplicate detection of lower
layer SDUs, Ciphering and deciphering, etc.
Radio connection performs the function: Broadcast, Paging, Radio connection management,
Mobility functions, MS measurement reporting and control.
Details of general descriptions of MAC and Radio Connection are described in section 6 and 7 of
[8].
10.4.1.8 Protocol Model
Protocol Model for XGP Mode specifies protocol stack for the user-plane and control-plane.
Protocol stack for the user-plane includes MAC sub-layer1, MAC sub-layer2 and MAC sub-layer3.
Protocol stack for the control-plane includes MAC sub-layer1, MAC sub-layer2, MAC sub-layer3
and Radio connection sub-layer.
Protocol Model of XGP Global Mode is described in section 4.3 of [8].
10.4.1.9 RF characteristics
RF characteristics for XGP Global Mode include operating bands, transmitter characteristics,
receiver characteristics and performance requirement of the BS and MS.
Details of RF characteristics of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are described in [2] and [1]respectively.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

620

10.4.1.9.1 Operating bands
This subsection defines the operating band, channel bandwidths per operating band and channelraster for XGP Global Mode.
10.4.1.9.2 Operation bands of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are recommended as
defined in section 5 of [2] and [1] respectively. Besides, the XGP Global Mode must support
other operating bands defined by the operation country/region.Transmitter characteristics
This subsection defines transmit power, transmit signal quality, output RF spectrum emissions(the emission within the channel bandwidth, the OOB emissions and the far out spurious
emission domain) for XGP Global Mode.
Details of BS transmitter characteristics and MS transmitter characteristics for XGP Global Modeare described in section 6 of [2] and [1] respectively.
10.4.1.9.3 Receiver characteristics
This subsection defines reference sensitivity power level, maximum input level and blocking
characteristics for XGP Global Mode.
The reference sensitivity power level is the minimum mean power applied to the antenna ports.
Maximum input level is defined as the maximum mean power received at the antenna port. The
blocking characteristic is a measure of the receiver's ability to receive a wanted signal at its
assigned channel frequency.
Details of BS receiver characteristics and MS receiver characteristics for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 7 of [2] and [1] respectively.
10.4.1.9.4 Performance requirement
This subsection contains performance requirements for the physical channels of XGP Global
Mode. The performance requirements include two parts: single-antenna port performance andtransmit diversity performance.
Details of performance requirements of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 8 of [2] and [1] respectively.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

621

10.4.2 Physical Channel Specification
10.4.2.1 Overview
Physical channel specification for XGP Global Mode specifies scrambling, modulation, layer
Mapping, precoding, mapping to resource elements and channel coding of DL OFDM PHY layerand UL SC PHY layer.
Details of physical layer overview are described in [3] and section 5.1 and 6.1 of [4].
10.4.2.2 The General Conditions for OFDM PHY Layer
The general conditions for OFDM PHY layer specify downlink transmission scheme based on
OFDM and OFDM resource structure.
Details of the general conditions for OFDM PHY layer are described in section 6.2 of [4] andsection 5.1 of [8].
10.4.2.3 The General Conditions for SC PHY Layer
The general conditions for SC PHY layer specify uplink SC transmission method and SC
resource structure.
For XGP Global Mode, the uplink transmission scheme is based on single-carrier FDMA, more
specifically DFTS-OFDM.
Details of the general conditions for SC PHY layer are described in section 5.2 of [4] and section
5.2 of [8].
10.4.2.4 DL OFDM PHY Layer
10.4.2.4.1 General structure for downlink physical channels
Downlink physical channels include advanced downlink EDCH, advanced Broadcast Control
Channel, advanced downlink ECCH, advanced downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel andadvanced downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel.
General structure for downlink physical channels includes Scrambling, Modulation, Layer
Mapping, Precoding, Mapping to resource elements and Channel Coding.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

622

Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Layer Mapping, Precoding, Mapping to resource elements for
DL physical channels are described in section 6.3 of [4].
10.4.2.4.2 Channel Coding
DL Channel Coding for XGP Global Mode specifies CRC calculation, Code block segmentationand code block CRC attachment, Tail biting convolutional coding, Turbo coding, Rate matching,
Code block concatenation and Channel coding for advanced downlink EDCH, advanced
Broadcast Control Channel, advanced downlink ECCH, advanced downlink ECCH Format
Indicator Channel and advanced downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel.
Details of DL Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving for Global Mode are described in
section 5.1 and 5.3 of [5].
10.4.2.4.3 Advanced Downlink EDCH
Advanced Downlink EDCH for XGP Global Mode transmits user traffic data from BS to MS.
Advanced Downlink EDCH for Global Mode is called as physical downlink shared channel(PDSCH) in the reference document.
Details of physical downlink shared channel are described in section 6.4 of [4].
10.4.2.4.4 Advanced Broadcast Control Channel
Advanced Broadcast Control Channel for XGP Global Mode broadcasts the system control
information from BS to MS.
Advanced Broadcast Control Channel for Global Mode is called as physical broadcast channel inthe reference document.
Details of physical broadcast channel are described in section 6.6 of [4].
10.4.2.4.5 Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel for XGP Global Mode carries information
about the number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of advanced downlink ECCH in a
subframe.
Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel for Global Mode is called as physicalcontrol format indicator channel defined in the reference document.
Details of physical control format indicator channel are described in section 6.7 of [4].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

623

10.4.2.4.6 Advanced Downlink ECCH
Advanced Downlink ECCH for XGP Global Mode carries scheduling assignments and other
downlink control information.
Advanced Downlink ECCH for Global Mode is called as physical downlink control channel in thereference document.
Details of physical downlink control channel are described in section 6.8 of [4].
10.4.2.4.7 Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel for XGP Global Mode carries the Hybrid-ARQ
ACK/NACK information.
Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel for Global Mode is called as physical hybrid
ARQ indicator channel defined in the reference document.
Details of Advanced Downlink Hybrid-ARQ Indicator Channel are described in section 6.9 of [4].
10.4.2.4.8 Pilots
DL pilots for XGP Global Mode specify BS-specific pilots and MS-specific pilots.
Pilots for Global Mode are called as reference signals in the reference document. BS-specificpilots are called as Cell-specific reference signals while MS-specific pilots are called as
UE-specific reference signals.
Details of reference signals are described in section 6.10 of [4].
Power control of DL pilots is described in section 5 of [6]10.4.2.4.9 Synchronization signals
Synchronization signals for XGP Global Mode are used for downlink synchronization.
Synchronization signals consist of primary synchronization signal and secondary synchronization
signal.
Details of synchronization signals for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.11 of [4].

A-GN4.00-03-TS624

10.4.2.5 UL SC PHY Layer
10.4.2.5.1 General structure for uplink physical channels
Uplink physical channels include advanced uplink EDCH, advanced uplink ANCH and advanced
Timing Correct Channel.
General structure for uplink physical channels includes Scrambling, Modulation, Layer Mapping,
Precoding, Mapping to resource elements and Channel Coding.
Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Layer Mapping, Precoding, Mapping to resource elements for
UL physical channels are described in section 5.3 and 5.4 of [4].
10.4.2.5.1 Channel Coding
UL Channel Coding for XGP Global Mode specifies CRC calculation, Code block segmentation
and Code block CRC attachment, Tail biting convolutional coding, Turbo coding, Rate matching,
Code block concatenation and Channel coding for advanced uplink EDCH, advanced uplink
ANCH and advanced Timing Correct Channel .
UL Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.1 and 5.2 of [5].
10.4.2.5.2 Advanced Uplink EDCH
Advanced uplink EDCH for XGP Global Mode transmits user traffic data from MS to BS.
Advanced uplink EDCH for Global Mode is called as physical uplink shared channel in thereference document.
Details of physical uplink shared channel are described in section 5.3 of [4].
10.4.2.5.3 Advanced Uplink ANCH
Advanced Uplink ANCH for XGP Global Mode carries uplink control information.
Advanced uplink ANCH is called as physical uplink control channel in the reference document.
Details of physical uplink control channel are described in section 5.4 of [4].
10.4.2.5.4 Advanced Timing Correct Channel
Advanced Timing Correct Channel for XGP Global Mode is used to request connection of

A-GN4.00-03-TS625

individual channel from MS to BS, and to correct transmission timing and transmission power
according to measurement result at the channel concerned.
Advanced Timing Correct Channel for Global Mode is called as physical random access channel
in the reference document.
Details of physical random access channel are described in section 5.7 of [4].
10.4.2.5.5 Pilots
UL Pilots for Global Mode includes Demodulation pilots and Sounding pilots. Demodulation Pilots
are associated with transmission of advanced Uplink ANCH or advanced Uplink EDCH. ULSounding Pilots are not associated with transmission of advanced Uplink ANCH or advanced
Uplink EDCH. The same set of base sequences is used for Demodulation pilots and Sounding
pilots.
UL Pilots are called as UL reference signals in the reference document.
Details of UL reference signals are described in section 5.5 of [4].
10.4.2.6 Modulation mapper
The modulation mapper takes binary digits, 0 or 1, as input and produces complex-valued
modulation symbols as output. Modulation mapper for XGP Global Mode includes BPSK, QPSK,16QAM and 64QAM.
Modulation mapper for XGP Global Mode is described in section 7.1 of [4].
10.4.2.7 Pseudo-random sequence generation
Pseudo-random sequence generation for Global Mode is described in section 7.2 of [4].
10.4.3 Individual Channel Specification
10.4.3.1 Functional Channel Composition
DL functional control channels for XGP Global Mode consist of Advanced Downlink ECCH(ADECCH), Advanced Downlink ECCH Format Indicator Channel and Advanced Downlink Hybrid
ARQ Indicator Channel.
UL functional control channel is Advanced Uplink ANCH consisting of Scheduling Request
A-GN4.00-03-TS

626

Channel, ACK/NACK Channel and CQI Channel.
Traffic channels for XGP Global Mode consist of Advanced Downlink EDCH and Advanced
Uplink EDCH.
10.4.3.2 Mapping to physical channels
Functional channels mapping to physical channels are described in section 4 of [5].
10.4.3.3 PHY control procedures
10.4.3.3.1 Advanced Downlink ECCH procedures
Advanced Downlink ECCH procedures for XGP Global Mode specify MS procedure fordetermining advanced downlink ECCH assignment and advanced downlink ECCH control
information procedure.
Details of advanced Downlink ECCH procedures for Global Mode are described in physicaldownlink control channel procedures defined in section 9 of [6].
10.4.3.3.2 Advanced Downlink EDCH related procedures
Advanced Downlink EDCH related procedures for XGP Global Mode specify MS procedure forreceiving the advanced Downlink EDCH, MS procedure for reporting CQI and ACK/NACK
information.
Details of advanced Downlink EDCH related procedures for Global Mode are described inphysical downlink shared channel related procedures defined in section 7 of [6].
10.4.3.3.3 Advanced Uplink ANCH related procedures
Advanced Uplink ANCH related procedures for XGP Global Mode specify MS procedure fordetermining advanced Uplink ANCH assignment and uplink HARQ timing.
Details of advanced Uplink ANCH related procedures for Global Mode are described in physicaluplink control channel procedures defined in section 10 of [6].
10.4.3.3.4 Advanced Uplink EDCH related procedures
Advanced Uplink EDCH related procedures for XGP Global Mode specify MS procedure fortransmitting the Advanced Uplink EDCH, Sounding procedure, HARQ procedure, anddetermination of Modulation order, redundancy version and transport block size.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

627

Details of advanced Uplink EDCH related procedures for XGP Global Mode are described inphysical uplink shared channel related procedures defined in section 8 of [6].
10.4.3.3.5 UL Power Control
Uplink power control controls the transmit power of the different uplink physical channels. UL
Power control for XGP Global Mode specifies uplink power control of advanced Uplink EDCH,
uplink power control of advanced Uplink ANCH and uplink power control of Sounding Pilots.
Details of UL Power Control are described in section 5.1 of [6] and UE measurement capabilities
are defined in section 5.1 of [7].
10.4.3.4 MAC Layer Control
10.4.3.4.1 Overview
General aspects of MAC layer control structure for Global Mode are described in section 4.3 of[8].
10.4.3.4.2 MAC sub-layer1
MAC sub-layer1 for XGP Global Mode specifies MAC sub-layer1 entities, MAC sub-layer1
procedures (maintenance of uplink time alignment, DL and UL traffic channel transfer, MAC
reconfiguration, and MAC reset), and MAC sub-layer1 PDUs for traffic channels and Random
Access Response.
MAC sub-layer1 is called as Medium Access Control layer in the reference document.
Details of Medium Access Control layer are described in [10].
10.4.3.4.3 MAC sub-layer2
MAC sub-layer2 for XGP Global Mode specifies MAC-layer2 entities, services expected from
MAC sub-layer1 by MAC sub-layer2, services provided to MAC sub-layer3 by MAC sub-layer2,
MAC sub-layer2 functions, and MAC sub-layer2 PDUs.
MAC sub-layer2 is called as RLC (Radio Link Control) layer in the reference document.
Details of RLC (Radio Link Control) layer are described in [11].
10.4.3.4.4 MAC sub-layer3
MAC sub-layer3 for XGP Global Mode specifies the Radio Resource Control protocol for the radio
A-GN4.00-03-TS

628

interface between MS and BS, the radio related information transported in a transparent container
between source BS and target BS upon inter-BS handover, and the radio related informationtransported in a transparent container between a source or target BS and another system uponinter RAT handover.
MAC sub-layer3 is called as Packet Data Convergence layer in the reference document.
Details of Packet Data Convergence layer are described in [12].
10.4.4 Common Channel Specification
10.4.4.1 Common control channel Composition
Common control channel consists of advanced Broadcast Control channel (BCCH), Paging
Control channel (PCCH) and Radom Access channel (RACH).
10.4.4.2 Common control channel reception
This subsection specifies advanced BCCH and PCCH reception.
Details of advanced BCCH reception are described in section 5.5 of [10].
Details of PCCH reception are described in section 5.6 of [10].
10.4.4.3 Paging Group Calculation Rules
Paging Group Calculation Rules for XGP Global Mode specifies the Paging Frame and Paging
Occasion calculation rules for the MS in IDLE state.
One Paging Occasion is a subframe where may include addressing information of the paging
message. One Paging Frame is a Radio Frame, which may contain one or multiple Paging
Occasion(s).
Details of Paging Group Calculation rules for Global Mode are described in section 7 of [9].
10.4.5 Channel Assignment
10.4.5.1 Radio State Management
Radio State Management for XGP Global Mode consists of Active state and IDLE state. A MS is

A-GN4.00-03-TS

629

in Active state when a radio connection has been established. If this is not the case, i.e. no radio
connection is established, the MS is in IDLE state.
Radio State is called as RRC protocol states or UE states in the reference document.
Active state is called as RRC_CONNECTED and IDLE state is called as RRC_IDLE in thereference document.
Details of Radio State Management for Global Mode are described in section 7.2 of [8].
10.4.5.2 Random Access procedure
Random Access (RA) procedure for XGP Global Mode is used by the MS to access and establish
a link to the network. Random access procedure consists of random access initialization, random
access resource selection, random access Preamble transmission and random access response
reception.
Details of Random Access procedure are described in section 6 of [6] and section 5.1 of [10].
10.4.6 Message Format and Information Elements
10.4.6.1 ADECI format
ADECI format is used to schedule Advanced Downlink EDCH and Advanced uplink EDCH andindicate UL power.
ADECI is called as Downlink control information (DCI) in the reference document.
Details of DCI format are described in 5.3.3 of [6].
10.4.6.2 MSG (BCCH)BCCH for XGP Global Mode is a downlink channel for broadcasting system control information.
MSG transmitted in BCCH is called as system information in the reference document.
Details of system information are described in section 5.2 of [13].
10.4.6.3 MSG (PCCH)
PCCH for XGP Global Mode is a downlink channel that transfers paging information and system

A-GN4.00-03-TS

630

information change notifications. This channel is used for paging when the network does notknow the location cell of the UE. Paging Occasion (PO) and Paging Frame (PF) are used for UE
to monitor the PCCH.
MSG transmitted in PCCH is called as paging in the reference document.
Message format of PCCH for Global Mode is described in section 7 of 3GPP [9].
10.4.7 Sequence
10.4.7.1 Radio Connection Management Sequence
Radio Connection Management sequence for Global Mode consists of Paging, radio connection
release and radio link failure.
Details of radio connection management sequence are described in section 5.3 of [13].
10.4.7.1.1 Paging
The paging sequence for XGP Global Mode is used to transmit paging information to a MS in
IDLE state and/ or to inform MSs in IDLE state and MSs in Active state about a system
information change. And it can also be used for responding the Radio connection establishment,
e.g. to receive an incoming call.
Details of paging sequence are described in section 5.3.2 of [13].
10.4.7.1.2 Radio connection establishment
The Radio connection establishment sequence for XGP Global Mode is used to establish a Radio
connection. Radio connection establishment involves signaling radio bearer establishment. The
Radio connection Request message includes a MS Identity, establishment Cause for BS and the
dedicated radio resource configuration from physical layer to MAC sub-layer3 for the radio
connection.
The Radio connection establishment sequence is called as RRC(Radio Resource Control)
connection establishment sequence in the reference document.
Details of RRC connection establishment sequence are described in section 5.3.3 of [13].
10.4.7.1.3 Radio connection reconfiguration
The Radio connection reconfiguration sequence for XGP Global Mode is used to modify a Radio
A-GN4.00-03-TS631

connection. The function includes to establish/modify /release radio bearers, to perform handover,and to setup/ modify/ release measurements.
The Radio connection reconfiguration sequence is called as RRC (Radio Resource Control)
connection reconfiguration sequence in the reference document.
Details of RRC connection reconfiguration sequence are described in section 5.3.5 of [13].
10.4.7.1.4 Radio connection re-establishment
When one of the following conditions for XGP Global Mode is met: upon detecting radio link
failure, or upon handover failure, or upon integrity check failure indication from lower layers, orupon a Radio connection reconfiguration failure, the MS initiates the Radio connection
re-establishment sequence in case security between MS and BS has been activated. The
purpose of this procedure is to re-establish the Radio connection, which involves the resumptionof signaling radio bearer operation and the re-activation of security.
The Radio connection re-establishment sequence in 3GPP is called as RRC (Radio Resource
Control) connection re-establishment sequence in reference document.
Details of RRC connection re-establishment sequence are described in section 5.3.7 of [13].
10.4.7.1.5 Radio connection release
The Radio connection Release sequence for XGP Global Mode is used to release the Radio
connection of a MS in Active state, which includes the release of the established radio bearers aswell as all radio resources. The Radio connection Release message includes the release cause,
possibly Redirected Carrier Information and possibly Mobility Control Information for Idle Mode.
The radio connection release sequence is called as RRC (Radio Resource Control) connection inreference document.
Details of radio connection release sequence are described in section 5.3.8 of [13].
10.4.7.1.6 Radio Link Failure
The radio link failure sequence for XGP Global Mode is use to monitor the radio link availability. It
is divided into two phase: one is that UE based on timer and counting to perform upon radio
problem detection and leads to radio link failure detection; Another is started upon radio link
failure detection or handover failure, UE performs connection re-establishment sequence or leads
to IDLE state.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

632

Details of Radio Link Failure sequence are described in section 5.3.11 of [13].
10.4.7.2 Mobility sequence
10.4.7.2.1 Mobility Management in Idle State
Mobility Management for XGP Global Mode in IDLE state includes Cell selection and Cell
reselection.
The Cell selection process allows the UE to select a suitable cell where to camp on in order toaccess available services.
The Cell reselection procedure allows the UE to select a more suitable cell and camp on it.
Details of Cell selection and Cell reselection are described in section 5.2 of [9].
10.4.7.2.2 Mobility Management in Active State
The Mobility Management in Active state for XGP Global Mode handles all necessary steps forrelocation/handover procedures, like processes that precede the final HO decision on the source
network side, preparation of resources on the target network side, commanding the MS to the
new radio resources and finally releasing resources on the (old) source network side.
Details of mobility management in Active state are described in section 10.1.2 of [8].
10.4.7.3 Measurements
Measurements for XGP Global Mode include intra-frequency measurement and inter-frequency
measurement. The measurements to be performed by a MS for intra/inter-frequency mobility canbe controlled by BS, using broadcast or dedicated control. In IDLE state, a MS shall follow themeasurement parameters defined for cell reselection specified by the BS broadcast. In Active
state, a MS shall follow the measurement configurations specified by radio connection signaling
directed from the BS.
Details of Measurements for Global Mode are described in section 5.5 of [13].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

633

10.4.8 Access Phase
10.4.8.1 Retransmission Control Method
10.4.8.1.1 HARQ
The characteristic of HARQ in XGP includes N-process Stop-And-Wait and HARQ transmits andretransmits transport blocks. In the downlink, Asynchronous adaptive HARQ is used. In the uplink,synchronous HARQ is used.
Details of HARQ for Global Mode are described in section 5.3 and section 5.4 of [10].
10.4.8.1.2 ARQ
The characteristics of ARQ in XGP Global Mode include ARQ retransmits MSL2 PDUs or MSL2PDU segments based on MSL2 status reports, Polling for MSL2 status report is used whenneeded by MSL2 and MSL2 receiver can also trigger MSL2 status report after detecting a missing
MSL2 PDU or MSL2 PDU segment.
Details of ARQ for Global Mode are described in section 5.2 of [11].
10.4.8.2 Semi-Persistent SchedulingSemi-Persistent Scheduling (SPS) in XGP Global Mode is a kind of scheduling of using
pre-configured grant. And it is enabled by high layer.
Details of Semi-Persistent Scheduling are described in 5.10 of [10].
10.5 Specification - referring to “Release 9 of 3GPP”
References:
Release 9 of 3GPP technical specifications that XGP Global Mode refers to are listed below:[14]. TS 36.101 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.101/36101-9b0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission
and reception, <Ver 9.11.0 (2012-03)>[15].TS 36.104 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.104/36104-9b0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission andreception, <Ver 9.11.0 (2012-03)>

A-GN4.00-03-TS

634

[16]. TS 36.201 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.201/36201-910.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE physical layer; General description,<Ver 9.1.0 (2010-03)>[17]. TS 36.211 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.211/36211-910.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation, <Ver
9.1.0 (2010-03)>[18]. TS 36.212 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.212/36212-940.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding, <Ver
9.4.0 (2011-09)>[19]. TS 36.213 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.213/36213-930.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures, <Ver 9.3.0(2010-10)>[20]. TS 36.214 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.214/36214-920.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements, <Ver 9.2.0(2010-06)>[21]. TS 36.300 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.300/36300-990.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2, <Ver 9.9.0 (2011-12)>[22] TS 36.304 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.304/36304-9a0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle
mode, <Ver 9.10.0 (2012-03)>[23]. TS 36.321 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.321/36321-960.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol
specification, <Ver 9.6.0 (2012-03)>[24]. TS 36.322 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.322/36322-930.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol
specification, <Ver 9.3.0 (2010-10)>[25]. TS 36.323 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.323/36323-900.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP) specification, <Ver 9.0.0 (2010-01)>[26].TS 36.331 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.331/36331-9a0.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification, <Ver 9.10.0 (2012-03)>
Note: The version number of 3GPP specification document can be read as the latest one in thesame release if the document number is updated.

A-GN4.00-03-TS635

10.5.1 Overview
10.5.1.1 Overall architecture
XGP Global Mode is assumed to be operated in the system that consists of MS, BS and Relay
Station (RS) which relays communications between BS and MS.
MS is called as User Equipment (UE) and BS is called as E-UTRAN NodeB (eNB) while RS iscalled as Relay Node (RN) in the reference document.
Overview of Functional Split, Interfaces, Radio Protocol architecture, Synchronization and IP
fragmentation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4 of [21].
Compared to section 10.3, specification in section 10.4 includes a set of enhancement or
optimization features. Such enhancement or optimization features are Evolved MBMS (eMBMS),
Dual-layer beamforming, Positioning Public Warning System (PWS), Home eNodeB specification(Femto-cell) Self Organizing Networks (SON).
10.5.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1
Layer 1 for XGP Global Mode is Physical layer.
Overview of Downlink Transmission Scheme, Uplink Transmission Scheme, Transport Channels
and E-UTRAN physical layer model for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5 of [21].
10.5.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2
Layer 2 for XGP Global Mode consists of MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer.
The Medium Access Control (MAC) layer in section 10.4 is referred to as the MAC sub-layer1(MSL1) in the XGP Global Mode protocol structure in section 10.3. And, so does Radio Link
Control (RLC) layer as MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2), and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)
layer as MAC sub-layer3 (MSL3).
Overview of layer 2 for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6 of [21].]

A-GN4.00-03-TS636

10.5.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3Radio Resource Control (RRC) in section 10.4 is referred to as the Radio connection in XGP
Global Mode protocol structure in section 10.3.
Overview of RRC layer for XGP Global Mode is described in section 7 of [21] which specifies
Services and Functions, RRC protocol states & state transitions, Transport of NAS messages andSystem Information.
10.5.1.5 E-UTRAN identities
E-UTRAN identities include E-UTRAN related UE identities and Network entity related Identities.
Overview of E-UTRAN identities for XGP Global Mode is described in section 8 of [21].
10.5.1.6 ARQ and HARQ
Overview of HARQ principles and ARQ principles for XGP Global Mode is described in section 9of [21].
10.5.1.7 Mobility
Mobility for XGP Global Mode includes Intra E-UTRAN, Inter RAT, Mobility between E-UTRAN
and Non-3GPP radio technologies, Area Restrictions, Mobility to and from CSG and Hybrid cells,
Measurement Model and Hybrid Cells.
Overview of mobility for XGP Global Mode is described in section 10 of [21].
10.5.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control
Scheduling and Rate Control for XGP Global Mode includes Basic Scheduler Operation,
Measurements to Support Scheduler Operation, Rate Control of GBR and UE-AMBR, CQI
reporting for Scheduling and Explicit Congestion Notification.
Overview of Scheduling and Rate Control for XGP Global Mode is described in section 11 of [21].
10.5.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED
DRX in RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is in order to enable reasonable UE battery
consumption.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

637

Overview of DRX in RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is described in section 12 of [21].
10.5.1.10 QoS
QoS for XGP Global Mode includes Bearer service architecture, QoS parameters and QoS
support in Hybrid Cells.
Overview of QoS for XGP Global Mode is described in section 13 of [21].
10.5.1.11 Security
Security for XGP Global Mode includes Security termination points, State Transitions and Mobility,
AS Key Change in RRC_CONNECTED and Security Interworking.
Overview of Security for XGP Global Mode is described in section 14 of [21].
10.5.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects
Radio Resource management aspects for XGP Global Mode include RRM functions, RRM
architecture and Load balancing control.
Overview of Radio Resource management aspects for XGP Global Mode is described in section
16 of [21].
10.5.1.13 Operation bands
Operation bands of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are recommended as defined in section 5of [15] and [14] respectively. Besides, the XGP Global Mode must support other operating bands
defined by the operation country/region.
10.5.1.14 UE capabilities
Overview of UE capabilities for XGP Global Mode is described in section 18 of [21].
10.5.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimization
Support for self-configuration and self-optimization for XGP Global Mode includes UE Support for
self-configuration and self-optimization, Self-configuration, Self-optimization.
Details of Support for self-configuration and self-optimization for XGP Global Mode are describedA-GN4.00-03-TS638

in section 22 of [21].
10.5.2 Physical layer
10.5.2.1 General description
10.5.2.1.1 Relation to other layers
The physical layer interfaces the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer and the Radio Resource
Control (RRC) Layer.
General protocol architecture around physical layer and service provided to higher layers for XGP
Global Mode are described in section 4.1 of [16].
10.5.2.1.2 General description of Layer 1
General description of Layer 1 includes Multiple Access, Physical channels and modulation,
Channel coding and interleaving, Physical layer procedures and physical layer measurements.
General description of layer 1 for XGP Global mode is described in section 4.2 of [16].
10.5.2.2 Frame Structure
Downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with 10ms duration for XGP
Global Mode. Each radio Frame of length 10ms consists of two half-frames of length 5ms each.
Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 1ms.
XGP Global Mode uses type 2 Frame Structure defined in section 4.2 of [17]. Among all the
UL-DL configurations shown in Table 4.2-2 of [17], XGP Global Mode may be configured withUL-DL configuration 0, 1, 2 or 6. The Special subframe configuration of XGP Global Mode may
be configuration 5 or 7 shown in Table 4.2-1 of [17].
10.5.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation
10.5.2.3.1 Overview
An uplink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information
originating from higher layers. Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), Physical Uplink Control
Channel (PUCCH) and Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) are defined for XGP Global
Mode.
A-GN4.00-03-TS639

An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but does not carry information originatingfrom higher layers. Reference signals are defined for XGP Global Mode.
Detailed overview of uplink physical channels and Physical signals are described in section 5.1 of[17].
10.5.2.3.2 Slot structure and physical resources
UL RB
The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers andUL
N symbSC-FDMA symbols. Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element. A

physical resource block is defined as

UL
N symbconsecutive SC-FDMA symbols in the time domainRBand N sc consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain
Details of Resource grid, Resource element and Resource block for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.2 of [17].
10.5.2.3.3 Physical uplink shared channel
The baseband signal representing the physical uplink shared channel for XGP Global Mode isdefined in terms of the following steps: Scrambling, Modulation, Transform precoding and
Mapping to physical resources.
Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Transform precoding and Mapping to physical resources for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [17].
10.5.2.3.4 Physical uplink control channel
The physical uplink control channel, PUCCH, carries uplink control information. PUCCH for XGP
Global Mode is not transmitted in the UpPTS field.
The physical uplink control channel supports multiple formats as shown in Table 5.4-1 of [17].
Details of PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b, PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b and Mapping to physicalresources for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.4 of [17].
10.5.2.3.5 Reference signals
Demodulation reference signal and Sounding reference signal are supported in XGP Global

A-GN4.00-03-TS

640

Mode.
Details of Generation of the reference signal sequence, Demodulation reference signal andSounding reference signal are described in section 5.5 of [17].
10.5.2.3.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation
SC-FDMA baseband signal generation of all uplink physical signals and physical channels except
the physical random access channel are described in section 5.6 of [17] for XGP Global Mode.
10.5.2.3.7 Physical random access channel
Time and frequency structure of physical random access channel, Preamble sequence
generation and Baseband signal generation for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.7 of[17].
10.5.2.3.8 Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued SC-FDMA baseband
signal for each antenna port for XGP Global Mode is shown in section 5.8 of [17].
10.5.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation
10.5.2.4.1 Overview
A downlink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information
originating from higher layers. Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Physical Broadcast
Channel (PBCH), Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH), Physical Control Format Indicator Channel(PCFICH), Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) and Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel (PHICH) are defined for XGP Global Mode.
A downlink physical signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer
but does not carry information originating from higher layers. Reference signals andSynchronization signal are defined for XGP Global Mode.
Detailed overview of downlink physical channels and physical signals are described in section 6.1
of [17].
10.5.2.4.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements
DL RB
The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers andA-GN4.00-03-TS

641

DL
N symbOFDM symbols. Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element.

Resource blocks are used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource
elements. Physical and virtual resource blocks are defined. Resource-element groups are used
for defining the mapping of control channels to resource elements.
Details of Resource grid, Resource elements, Resource blocks and Resource-element groups for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of [17].
10.5.2.4.3 General structure for downlink physical channels
General processing steps of a downlink physical channel for XGP Global Mode include
Scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping, Precoding and Mapping to resource elements.
Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping, Precoding and Mapping to resource
elements of a downlink physical channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of[17].
10.5.2.4.4 Physical downlink shared channel
The physical downlink shared channel for XGP Global Mode shall be processed and mapped toresource elements as described in Section 6.3 of [17] with the exceptions stated in section 6.4 of[17].
10.5.2.4.5 Physical broadcast channel
Details of Scrambling,

Modulation, Layer mapping and Precoding, Mapping to resource

elements of a physical broadcast channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.6 of[17].
10.5.2.4.6 Physical Multicast Channel
The physical multicast channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as
described in Section 6.3 of [17] with the following exceptions stated in section 6.5 of [17].
10.5.2.4.7 Physical control format indicator channel
The physical control format indicator channel for XGP Global Mode carries information about the
number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of PDCCHs in a subframe.
Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping and Precoding, Mapping to resource elementsof a physical control format indicator channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.7 of
A-GN4.00-03-TS

642

[17].
10.5.2.4.8 Physical downlink control channel
The physical downlink control channel for XGP Global Mode carries scheduling assignments andother control information.
Details of PDCCH formats, PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping andprecoding and Mapping to resource elements of a physical downlink control channel for XGP
Global Mode are described in section 6.8 of [17].
10.5.2.4.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel
The PHICH for XGP Global Mode carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NACK.
Details of Modulation, Resource group alignment, layer mapping and precoding of PHICH for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.9 of [17].
10.5.2.4.10 Reference signals
Four types of downlink reference signals (Cell-specific reference signals, MBSFN reference
signals, UE-specific reference signals, Positioning reference signals) are defined for XGP Global
Mode.
Details of Cell-specific reference signals, MBSFN reference signals, UE-specific reference signals,
Positioning reference signals for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.10 of [17].
10.5.2.4.11 Synchronization signals
Synchronization signals for XGP Global Mode include Primary synchronization signal andSecondary synchronization signal.
Details of sequence generation and Mapping to resource elements of Primary synchronization
signal and Secondary synchronization signal for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.11of [17].
10.5.2.4.12 OFDM baseband signal generation
OFDM baseband signal generation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6.12 of [17].
10.5.2.4.13 Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the downlink complex-valued OFDM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

643

baseband signal for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.13 of [17].
10.5.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving
10.5.2.5.1 Generic procedures
Generic coding procedures include CRC calculation, Code block segmentation and code block
CRC attachment, Channel coding, Rate matching and Code block concatenation for XGP Global
Mode.
Details of generic coding procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [18].
10.5.2.5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information
10.5.2.5.2.1 Uplink shared channel
Coding procedures of uplink shared channel include Transport block CRC attachment, Codeblock segmentation and code block CRC attachment, Channel coding of UL-SCH, Rate matching,
Code block concatenation, Channel coding of control information, Data and control multiplexing
and Channel interleaver for XGP Global Mode.
Details of coding procedures of uplink shared channel for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.2.2 of [18].
10.5.2.5.2.2 Uplink control information on PUCCH
Chanel coding procedures of uplink control information on PUCCH for XGP Global Mode include
Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK, Channel coding for UCI scheduling request, Channel coding
for UCI channel quality information and Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and
HARQ-ACK.
Details of Chanel coding procedures of uplink control information on PUCCH for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 5.2.3 of [18].
10.5.2.5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data
Coding steps of Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data include Channel
coding of control information, Control information mapping and Channel interleaver.
Details of coding step of Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data for XGP
Global Mode are described in section 5.2.4 of [18].
A-GN4.00-03-TS644

10.5.2.5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information
10.5.2.5.3.1 Broadcast channel
Coding steps of downlink broadcast channel for XGP Global Mode include Transport block CRC
attachment, Channel coding and Rate matching.
Details of coding steps of downlink broadcast channel for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.3.1 of [18].
10.5.2.5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel
Coding steps of downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel for XGP Global
Mode include Transport block CRC attachment, Code block segmentation and code block CRC
attachment, Channel coding, Rate matching and Code block concatenation.
Details of coding steps of downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.2 of [18].
10.5.2.5.3.3 Downlink control information
Coding steps of DCI formats (Format 0, 1, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 2, 2A, 2B, 3, 3A) for XGP Global Mode
include CRC attachment, Channel coding and Rate matching.
Detailed of coding steps of DCI formats for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.3 of[18].
10.5.2.5.3.4 Control format indicator
Channel Coding of control format indicator for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.4 of[18].
10.5.2.5.3.5 HARQ indicator (HI)Channel Coding of HARQ indicator for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.5 of [18].
10.5.2.6 Physical layer procedures
10.5.2.6.1 Synchronization procedures
Synchronization procedures for XGP Global Mode include Cell search and Timing
A-GN4.00-03-TS645

synchronization (Radio link monitoring and Transmission timing adjustments).
Details of Synchronization procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4 of [19].
10.5.2.6.2 Power control
10.5.2.6.2.1 Uplink power control
Detailed power control of physical uplink shared channel, physical uplink control channel andSounding Reference Symbol for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [19].
10.5.2.6.2.2 Downlink power allocation
Downlink power allocation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [19].
10.5.2.6.3 Random access procedure
Random access procedure includes physical non-synchronized random access procedure andRandom Access Response Grant.
Details of Random access procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6 of [19].
10.5.2.6.4 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures
Physical downlink shared channel related procedures include UE procedure for receiving thephysical downlink shared channel, UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI),
precoding matrix indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI) and UE procedure for reporting
ACK/NACK.
10.5.2.6.4.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel
UE procedures for receiving different transmission scheme of the PDSCH include Single-antenna
port scheme, Transmit diversity scheme, Large delay CDD scheme, Closed-loop spatial
multiplexing scheme, Multi-user MIMO scheme, Resource allocation and Modulation order andtransport block size determination.
UE procedures for receiving different transmission scheme for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 7.1 of [19].

A-GN4.00-03-TS646

10.5.2.6.4.2 UE procedure for reporting channel quality indication (CQI), precoding matrix
indicator (PMI) and rank indication (RI)
UE procedures for reporting CQI/PMI/RI include aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH
and periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH.
Details of UE procedures for reporting CQI/PMI/RI for XGP Global Mode are described in section
7.2 of [19].
10.5.2.6.4.3 UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK
ACK/NACK bundling and ACK/NACK multiplexing are supported by higher layer configuration for
XGP Global Mode.
Details of UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK for XGP Global Mode are described in section
7.3 of [19].
10.5.2.6.5 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures
Physical uplink shared channel related procedures for XGP Global Mode include Resource
Allocation for PDCCH DCI Format 0, UE sounding procedure, UE ACK/NACK procedure, UE
PUSCH Hopping procedure, Modulation order, redundancy version and transport block size
determination and UE Transmit Antenna Selection.
Details of Physical uplink shared channel related procedures for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 8 of [19].
10.5.2.6.6 Physical downlink control channel procedures
Physical downlink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode include UE procedure fordetermining physical downlink control channel assignment and PDCCH validation forsemi-persistent scheduling.
Details of physical downlink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 9 of [19].
10.5.2.6.7 Physical uplink control channel procedures
Physical uplink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode include UE procedure fordetermining physical uplink control channel assignment and uplink ACK/NACK timing.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

647

Details of physical uplink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 10 of [19].
10.5.2.7 Measurements
10.5.2.7.1 UE measurement capabilities
UE measurement capabilities for XGP Global Mode are defined in section 5.1 of [20].
10.5.2.7.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities
E-UTRAN measurement abilities for XGP Global Mode are defined in section 5.2 of [20].
10.5.3 MAC layer – MSL1
10.5.3.1 General
10.5.3.1.1 MAC architecture
MAC architecture for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4.2 of [23].
10.5.3.1.2 Services
MAC layer services provided to upper layers and expected from physical layer for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 4.3 of [23].
10.5.3.1.3 Functions
Functions supported by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [23].
10.5.3.1.4 Channel structure
10.5.3.1.4.1 Transport Channels
The transport channels used by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.5.1 of[23].
10.5.3.1.4.2 Logical Channels
The logical channels used by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.5.2 of[23].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

648

10.5.3.1.4.3 Mapping of Transport Channels to Logical Channels
Mapping of Transport Channels to logical channels for XGP Global Mode is described in section
4.5.3 of [23].
10.5.3.2 MAC procedures
10.5.3.2.1 Random Access procedure
Random Access procedure for XGP Global Mode includes Random Access Procedure
initialization, Random Access Resource selection, Random Access Preamble transmission,
Random Access Response reception, Contention Resolution and Completion of the Random
Access procedure.
Details of Random Access procedure for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [23].
10.5.3.2.2 Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment
Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [23].
10.5.3.2.3 DL-SCH data transfer
DL-SCH data transfer procedure for XGP Global Mode includes DL Assignment reception, HARQ
operation, Disassembly and demultiplexing.
Details of DL-SCH data transfer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [23].
10.5.3.2.4 UL-SCH data transfer
UL-SCH data transfer procedure for XGP Global Mode includes UL Grant reception, HARQ
operation, Multiplexing and assembly, Scheduling Request, Buffer Status Reporting and Power
Headroom Reporting.
Details of UL-SCH data transfer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.4 of [23].
10.5.3.2.5 PCH reception
PCH reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.5 of [23].
10.5.3.2.6 BCH reception
BCH reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.6 of [23].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

649

10.5.3.2.7 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Discontinuous Reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.7 of [23].
10.5.3.2.8 MAC reconfiguration
MAC reconfiguration procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.8 of [23].
10.5.3.2.9 MAC Reset
MAC Reset procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.9 of [23].
10.5.3.2.10 Semi-Persistent SchedulingSemi-Persistent Scheduling procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.10 of [23].
10.5.3.2.11 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous MAC layer protocol data for XGP Global Modeis described in section 5.11 of [23].
10.5.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters10.5.3.3.1 Protocol Data Units
A MAC PDU is a bit string that is byte aligned in length. MAC PDU and MAC control elements for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.1 of [23].
10.5.3.3.2 Formats and parameters
MAC header for DL-SCH and UL-SCH, MAC header for Random Access Response and MAC
payload for Random Access Response are described in section 6.2 of [23].
10.5.3.4 Variables and constants
MAC layer variables and constants for XGP Global Mode include RNTI values, Backoff
Parameter values, PRACH Mask Index values, Subframe_Offset values, TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE
value, DELTA_PREAMBLE values and HARQ RTT Timer.
Details of MAC layer variables and constants for XGP Global Mode are described in section 7 of
[23].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

650

10.5.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2
10.5.4.1 General
10.5.4.1.1 RLC architecture
Functions of the RLC layer are performed by RLC entities. An RLC entity can be configured toperform data transfer in one of the following three modes: Transparent Mode (TM),
Unacknowledged Mode (UM) or Acknowledged Mode (AM).
Details of RLC architecture for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.2 of [24].
10.5.4.1.2 Services
RLC layer services provided to upper layers and expected from lower layers are described in
section 4.3 of [24].
10.5.4.1.3 Functions
Functions supported by RLC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [24].
10.5.4.1.4 Data available for transmission
Details of data available for transmission in the RLC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 4.5 of [24].
10.5.4.2 Procedures
10.5.4.2.1 Data transfer procedures
RLC layer Data transfer procedures for XGP Global Mode include TM data transfer, UM datatransfer and AM data transfer.
Details of RLC layer data transfer procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1
of [24].
10.5.4.2.2 ARQ procedures
ARQ procedures for XGP Global Mode include Retransmission, Polling and Status reporting.
Details of ARQ procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.2 of [24].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

651

10.5.4.2.3 SDU discard procedures
SDU discard procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [24].
10.5.4.2.4 Re-establishment procedure
RLC layer Re-establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.4 of [24].
10.5.4.2.5 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous RLC layer protocol data for XGP Global Mode is
described in section 5.5 of [24].
10.5.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.5.4.3.1 Protocol data units
RLC PDUs can be categorized into RLC data PDUs and RLC control PDUs.
Details of RLC data PDU and RLC control PDU for XGP Global Mode are described in section
6.1 of [24].
10.5.4.3.2 Formats and parameters
The formats and parameters of RLC PDUs for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of[24].
10.5.4.4 Variables, constants and timers
RLC layer variables, constants, timers and configurable parameters for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 7 of [24].
10.5.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3
10.5.5.1 General
10.5.5.1.1 PDCP architecture
PDCP structure and PDCP entities for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.2 of [25].

A-GN4.00-03-TS652

10.5.5.1.2 Services
PDCP layer services provided to upper layers and expected from physical layer for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 4.3 of [25].
10.5.5.1.3 Functions
PDCP layer supported functions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [25].
10.5.5.1.4 Data available for transmission
Details of data available for transmission in the PDCP layer for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 4.5 of [25].
10.5.5.2 PDCP procedures
10.5.5.2.1 PDCP Data Transfer Procedures
UL PDCP Data Transfer Procedures and DL PDCP Data Transfer Procedures are described in
section 5.1 of [25]10.5.5.2.2 Re-establishment procedure
PDCP layer Re-establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [25].
10.5.5.2.3 PDCP Status Report
PDCP Status Report procedure for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [25].
10.5.5.2.4 PDCP discard
PDCP discard procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.4 of [25].
10.5.5.2.5 Header Compression and Decompression
PDCP layer Header Compression and Decompression procedures for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.5 of [25].
10.5.5.2.6 Ciphering and Deciphering
PDCP layer Ciphering and Deciphering procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.6 of [25].

A-GN4.00-03-TS653

10.5.5.2.7 Integrity Protection and Verification
PDCP layer Integrity Protection and Verification procedures for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 5.7 of [25].
10.5.5.2.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous PDCP layer protocol data for XGP Global Modeis described in section 5.8 of [25].
10.5.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.5.5.3.1 Protocol data units
PDCP PDUs can be categorized into PDCP data PDUs and PDCP control PDUs.
Details of PDCP data PDU and PDCP control PDU for XGP Global Mode are described in section
6.1 of [25].
10.5.5.3.2 Formats
Different PDCP PDUs are supported for XGP Global Mode: Control plane PDCP Data PDU, User
plane PDCP Data PDU with long PDCP SN , User plane PDCP Data PDU with short PDCP SN,
PDCP Control PDU for interspersed ROHC feedback packet and PDCP Control PDU for PDCP
status report.
Detailed formats of PDCP PDUs for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of [25].
10.5.5.3.3 Parameters
PDCP layer parameters for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of [25].
10.5.5.4 Variables, constants and timers
PDCP layer variables, constants and timers for XGP Global Mode are described in section 7 of
[25].

A-GN4.00-03-TS654

10.5.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer
10.5.6.1 General
10.5.6.1.1 Architecture
RRC layer architecture for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4.2 of [26].
10.5.6.1.2 Services
RRC services provided to upper layers and expected from lower layers for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 4.3 of [26].
10.5.6.1.3 Functions
RRC layer supported functions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [26].
10.5.6.2 Procedures
10.5.6.2.1 General
General RRC requirements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [26].
10.5.6.2.2 System information
10.5.6.2.2.1 Introduction
System information is divided into the MasterInformationBlock (MIB) and a number ofSystemInformationBlocks (SIBs).
Scheduling of System information, System information validity and notification of changes,
Indication of ETWS notification and Indication of CMAS notification for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.2.1 of [26].
10.5.6.2.2.2 System information acquisition
System information acquisition for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2.2 of [26].

A-GN4.00-03-TS655

10.5.6.2.2.3 Acquisition of an SI message
Acquisition of an SI message for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2.3 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3 Connection control
10.5.6.2.3.1 Introduction
RRC connection control procedures include RRC connection control, Security and Connectedmode mobility.
Overview of connection control procedure is described in section 5.3.1 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.2 Paging
Paging initiation procedure and Reception procedure of the Paging message by the UE for XGP
Global Mode are described in [22] and section 5.3.2 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.3 RRC connection establishment
RRC connection establishment procedures for XGP Global Mode include Initiation, Actions
related to transmission of RRC Connection Request message, Reception of the RRC Connection
establishment related messages, Cell re-selection, Timer expiry, Abortion of RRC connection
establishment and Handling of SSAC related parameters.
RRC connection establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.3 of[26].
10.5.6.2.3.4 Initial security activation
Initial security activation procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.4 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.5 RRC connection reconfiguration
RRC connection reconfiguration procedures include Initiation procedure, Reception of RRC
Connection Reconfiguration related message, Reconfiguration failure procedure, Timer expiry
procedure, etc.
RRC connection reconfiguration procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.5of [26].

A-GN4.00-03-TS656

10.5.6.2.3.6 Counter check
Counter check procedures include Initiation procedure and Reception of the Counter Check
message procedure.
Counter check procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.6 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.7 RRC connection re-establishment
RRC connection re-establishment procedures include Initiation procedure, reception of the RRC
Connection Re-establishment related messages, Timer expiry procedure and etc.
RRC connection re-establishment procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.3.7 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.8 RRC connection release
RRC connection release procedures include Initiation procedure, Reception of the RRC
Connection Release message and Timer expiry procedure.
RRC connection release procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.8 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.9 RRC connection release requested by upper layers
RRC connection release requested by upper layers for XGP Global Mode is described in section
5.3.9 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.10 Radio resource configuration
Radio resource configuration procedures include SRB addition/ modification/ release, MAC mainreconfiguration, Semi-persistent scheduling reconfiguration, Physical channel reconfiguration andRadio Link Failure Timers and Constants reconfiguration.
Radio resource configuration procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.10 of[26].
10.5.6.2.3.11 Radio link failure related actions
Radio link failure related actions include Detection of physical layer problems in
RRC_CONNECTED, Recovery of physical layer problems and Detection of radio link failure.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

657

Radio link failure related actions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.11 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.12 UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED
UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.12of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.13 UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request
UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request for XGP Global Mode is described in section
5.3.13 of [26].
10.5.6.2.3.14 Proximity indication
Initiation and Actions related to transmission of Proximity indication message for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 5.3.14 of [26].
10.5.6.2.4 Inter-RAT mobility
Inter-RAT mobility procedures include Handover to E-UTRA procedure,
procedure and Inter-RAT cell change order to E-UTRAN.

Mobility from E-UTRA

Inter-RAT mobility procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.4 of [26].
10.5.6.2.5 Measurements
Measurements for XGP Global Mode include Measurement configuration, performing
measurements, Measurement report triggering, Measurement reporting and Measurement related
actions.
Measurements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.5 of [26].
10.5.6.2.6 Other procedures
DL and UL information transfer, UE capability transfer and UE information request procedures aredescribed in section 5.6 of [26]. Generic RRC layer error handling for XGP Global Mode is
described in section 5.7 of [26].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

658

10.5.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.5.6.3.1 RRC messages
General RRC message structure and RRC Message definitions for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 6.2 of [26].
10.5.6.3.2 RRC information elements
RRC information elements include System information blocks, Radio resource control information
elements, Security control information elements, Mobility control information elements,
Measurement information elements and other information elements.
RRC information elements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of [26].
10.5.6.3.3 RRC multiplicity and type constraint values
RRC multiplicity and type constraint values for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6.4 of[26].
10.5.6.4 Variables and constants
RRC layer UE variables, Counters, Timers and Constants for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 7 of [26].
10.5.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax
Structure of encoded RRC messages, Basic production, extension and Padding for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 8 of [26].
10.5.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations
10.5.6.6.1 Specified configurations
Logical channel configurations and specified SRB configurations for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 9.1 of [26].

A-GN4.00-03-TS659

10.5.6.6.2 Default radio configurations
Default SRB configurations, Default MAC main configuration, Default semi-persistent schedulingconfiguration, Default physical channel configuration and Default values timers and constants aredescribed in section 9.2 of [26].
10.5.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes
Radio information related interactions between network nodes include Inter-node RRC messages,
Inter-node RRC information element definitions, Inter-node RRC multiplicity and type constraint
values and Mandatory information in AS-Config.
Radio information related interactions between network nodes for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 10 of [26].
10.5.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements
UE capability related constraints and Processing delay requirements for RRC procedures aredescribed in section 11 of [26].
10.6 Specification - referring to “Release 10 of 3GPP”
References:
Release 10 of 3GPP technical specifications that XGP Global Mode refers to are listed below:[27]. TS 36.101 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.101/36101-a90.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) radio transmission
and reception, < V10.9.0 (2012-12)>[28].TS 36.104 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.104/36104-a90.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Base Station (BS) radio transmission andreception, < V10.9.0 (2012-12)>[29]. TS 36.201 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.201/36201-a100.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); LTE physical layer; General description, <V10.0.0 (2012-12)>[30]. TS 36.211 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.211/36211-a60.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical channels and modulation, <V10.6.0 (2012-12)>[31]. TS 36.212 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.212/36212-a70.zip,

A-GN4.00-03-TS

660

Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Multiplexing and channel coding, <V10.7.0 (2012-12)>[32]. TS 36.213 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.213/36213-a80.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer procedures, < V10.8.0(2012-12)>[33]. TS 36.214 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.214/36214-a10.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Physical layer; Measurements, < V10.0.0(2012-12)>[34]. TS 36.300 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.300/36300-a90.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA) and Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio
Access Network (E-UTRAN); Overall description; Stage 2, <Ver a.9.0 (2012-12)>[35] TS 36.304 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.304/36304-a60.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); User Equipment (UE) procedures in idle
mode, <Ver a.6.0 (2012-06)>[36]. TS 36.321 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.321/36321-a70.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Medium Access Control (MAC) protocol
specification, <Ver a.7.0 (2012-12)>[37]. TS 36.322 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.322/36322-a00.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol
specification, <Ver a.0.0 (2010-12)>[38]. TS 36.323 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.323/36323-a20.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Packet Data Convergence Protocol(PDCP) specification, <Ver a.2.0 (2012-12)>[39].TS 36.331 http://www.3gpp.org/ftp/Specs/archive/36_series/36.331/36331-a80.zip,
Evolved Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (E-UTRA); Radio Resource Control (RRC); Protocol
specification, <Ver a.8.0 (2012-12)>
Note: The version number of 3GPP specification document can be read as the latest one in thesame release if the document number is updated.
10.6.1 Overview
10.6.1.1 Overall architecture
XGP Global Mode is assumed to be operated in the system that consists of MS, BS and Relay
Station (RS) which relays communications between BS and MS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

661

MS is called as User Equipment (UE) and BS is called as E-UTRAN NodeB (eNB) while RS iscalled as Relay Node (RN) in the reference document.
Overview of Functional Split, Interfaces, Radio Protocol architecture, Synchronization and IP
fragmentation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4 of [34].
Release 10 of 3GPP extends the features of Release 8 and 9 in order to exceed or at least meet
the IMT-Advanced requirements. New features include Carrier Aggregation (CA), enhanced
MIMO technologies, enhanced UL transmission and enhanced inter-cell interference coordination
techniques for heterogeneous networks (relays, picos and femtos).


Carrier Aggregation (CA)In Carrier Aggregation (CA), two or more Component Carriers (CCs) are aggregated in order tosupport wider transmission bandwidths up to 100MHz. CA feature will allow a more flexible use ofdiverse spectrum allocations available in an operator network. Existing band allocations to anindividual operator often consists of spectrum fractions in various frequency bands. Therefore
offering the possibility to aggregate multiple non-continuous bands is also important as achieving
highest data rates.
CA is supported for both contiguous and non-contiguous CCs with each CC limited to a maximumof 110 Resource Blocks in the frequency domain using the Rel-8/9 numerology, as illustrated in
Figure 10.6.1.1-1.
Band 1
Carrier 1

Carrier 2

Carrier 3fAggregated carrier 1 and carrier 2

Scenario type A: Intra-Band, ContiguousBand 1
Carrier 1

Carrier 2

Carrier 3fAggregated carrier 1 and carrier 3

Scenario type B: Intra-Band, Non-ContiguousBand 1

Band 2Carrier 1

Carrier 2fAggregated carrier 1 and carrier 2

Scenario type C: Inter-Band, Non-Contiguous

Figure 10.6.1.1-1 Contiguous and Non-Contiguous Carrier Aggregation
A-GN4.00-03-TS

662



Enhanced Inter-cell Interference Coordination and Hetrogeneous Network (eICIC/HetNet)

For Release 10 networks, enhanced interference coordination methods are needed when the socalled Heterogeneous Networks (HetNets) are rolled out. As shown in Figure 10.6.1.1-2, these
are networks which are built up by a macro cell to ensure coverage, and by pico cells, femto cells
and relay stations to illuminate shaded regions or to enhance the data rate in hot spots.

S1

S1

MME/S-GW

u

S1

U

X2

Femto eNB

u

Ba

u

U

ckh
aul

Pico eNB

U

lin
k

Un

u

U

Macro eNB

k
in
sl
u
U

es

cc

A
Relay eNB

Figure 10.6.1.1-2 Deployment of Heterogeneous Network
All cells are using the same frequency and more severe interference scenarios could exist
compared to single layer deployments. In order to cope with these new challenges, the concept ofalmost blank subframes (ABS) was introduced for the Time-domain ICIC. The frame image isshown in Figure 10.6.1.1.-3.
Macro

Pico

CRS

Normal subframes

Protected subframes

Almost blank subframe

Figure 10.6.1.1-3 Time-domain ICICEnhanced MIMO technologies (MIMO Enhancement)

Enhanced MIMO technologies can support eight downlink layers and four uplink layers each at
the maximum, which can improve spectrum efficiency, cell edge performance and average data
A-GN4.00-03-TS

663

rates. Besides, the Single User (SU)-MIMO has been introduced in uplink side as well. Somerequirements of Uplink-MIMO are described in section 6 and 7 of [27].
Enhanced UL transmission (Non-Contiguous SC-FDMA)

Multi-cluster assignment of DFTS-OFDM is supported in Realease 10 while only contiguous
SC-FDMA is supported in Release 8. In Release 10, the uplink transmission scheme is extended
by allowing non-contiguous SC-FDMA with two clusters, i.e. the uplink transmission is not
anymore restricted to the use of consecutive subcarriers, but non-contiguous two clusters may beallocated.
10.6.1.2 Physical layer – Layer 1
Layer 1 for XGP Global Mode is Physical layer.
Overview of Downlink Transmission Scheme, Uplink Transmission Scheme, Transport Channels
and E-UTRAN physical layer model for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5 of [34]. In
details, CA is described in section 5.5 of [34], enhanced DL MIMO technology is described in
section 5.1.5 of [34], enhanced UL MIMO technology is described in section 5.2.6 of [34],enhanced UL transmission is described in section 5.2.1 of [34], and enhanced inter-cellinterference coordination is described in section 16.1.5 of [34].
10.6.1.3 MAC, RLC, and PDCP layers - Layer 2
Layer 2 for XGP Global Mode consists of MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer.
The Medium Access Control (MAC) layer in section 10.5 is referred to as the MAC sub-layer1(MSL1) in the XGP Global Mode protocol structure in section 10.3. And, so does Radio Link
Control (RLC) layer as MAC sub-layer2 (MSL2), and Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP)
layer as MAC sub-layer3 (MSL3).
Overview of layer 2 for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6 of [34].
In case of CA, the multi-carrier nature of the physical layer is only exposed to the MAC layer forwhich one HARQ entity is required per serving cell. Overview of Layer 2 Structure for UL/DL withCA configured for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6.4 of [34].
10.6.1.4 RRC layer – Layer 3Radio Resource Control (RRC) in section 10.5 is referred to as the Radio connection in XGP
Global Mode protocol structure in section 10.3.
Overview of RRC layer for XGP Global Mode is described in section 7 of [34] which specifies
A-GN4.00-03-TS

664

Services and Functions, RRC protocol states & state transitions, Transport of NAS messages andSystem Information.
When CA is configured, the UE only has one RRC connection with the network. At RRC
connection establishment/re-establishment/handover, one serving cell provides the NAS mobility
information (e.g. TAI), and at RRC connection re-establishment/handover, one serving cellprovides the security input. This cell is referred to as the Primary Cell (PCell). Depending on UE
capabilities, Secondary Cells (SCells) can be configured to form together with the PCell a set ofserving cells. Overview of main services and functions of the RRC sublayer with CA configured
for XGP Global Mode is described in section 7.5 of [34].
10.6.1.5 E-UTRAN identities
E-UTRAN identities include E-UTRAN related UE identities and Network entity related Identities.
Overview of E-UTRAN identities for XGP Global Mode is described in section 8 of [34].
10.6.1.6 ARQ and HARQ
Overview of HARQ principles and ARQ principles for XGP Global Mode is described in section 9of [34].
10.6.1.7 Mobility
Mobility for XGP Global Mode includes Intra E-UTRAN, Inter RAT, Mobility between E-UTRAN
and Non-3GPP radio technologies, Area Restrictions, Mobility to and from CSG and Hybrid cells,
Measurement Model and Hybrid Cells.
Overview of mobility for XGP Global Mode is described in section 10 of [34].
When CA is configured, the "current cell" above refers to any serving cell of the configured set ofserving cells. Overview of mobility with CA configured for XGP Global Mode is described in
section 10.1.3 of [34].
10.6.1.8 Scheduling and Rate Control
Scheduling and Rate Control for XGP Global Mode includes Basic Scheduler Operation,
Measurements to Support Scheduler Operation, Rate Control of GBR and UE-AMBR, CQI
reporting for Scheduling and Explicit Congestion Notification.
Overview of Scheduling and Rate Control for XGP Global Mode is described in section 11 of [34].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

665

When CA is configured, a UE may be scheduled over multiple serving cells simultaneously but at
most one random access procedure shall be ongoing at any time. Cross-carrier scheduling with
the Carrier Indicator Field (CIF) allows the PDCCH of a serving cell to schedule resources onanother serving cell but with some restrictions. Overview of Scheduling and Rate Control with CA
configured for XGP Global Mode is described in section 11.1 of [34].
To enable reasonable UE battery consumption when CA is configured, an activation/deactivation
mechanism of SCells is supported (i.e. activation/deactivation does not apply to PCell). Overview
of activation/deactivation mechanism with CA configured for XGP Global Mode is described in
section 11.2 of [34].
10.6.1.9 DRX in RRC_CONNECTED
DRX in RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is in order to enable reasonable UE battery
consumption.
Overview of DRX in RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is described in section 12 of [34].
In CA, whenever a UE is configured with only one serving cell (i.e. PCell) Rel-8/9 DRX applies. In
other cases, the same DRX operation applies to all configured and activated serving cells (i.e.
identical active time for PDCCH monitoring). Overview of DRX in RRC_CONNECTED with CA
configured for XGP Global Mode is described in section 12 of [34].
10.6.1.10 QoS
QoS for XGP Global Mode includes Bearer service architecture, QoS parameters and QoS
support in Hybrid Cells.
Overview of QoS for XGP Global Mode is described in section 13 of [34].
10.6.1.11 Security
Security for XGP Global Mode includes Security termination points, State Transitions and Mobility,
AS Key Change in RRC_CONNECTED and Security Interworking.
Overview of Security for XGP Global Mode is described in section 14 of [34].

A-GN4.00-03-TS666

10.6.1.12 Radio Resource Management aspects
Radio Resource management aspects for XGP Global Mode include RRM functions, RRM
architecture and Load balancing control.
Overview of Radio Resource management aspects for XGP Global Mode is described in section
16 of [34].
In case of time domain ICIC, subframe utilization across different cells are coordinated in timethrough backhaul signalling or OAM configuration of so called Almost Blank Subframe patterns.
The Almost Blank Subframes (ABSs) in an aggressor cell are used to protect resources insubframes in the victim cell receiving strong inter-cell interference. Almost blank subframes are
subframes with reduced transmit power (including no transmission) on some physical channels
and/or reduced activity. Overview of Radio Resource management for time domain ICIC for XGP
Global Mode is described in section 16.1.5 of [34].
10.6.1.13 Operation bands
Operation bands of BS and MS for XGP Global Mode are recommended as defined in section 5of [27] and [28] respectively. Besides, the XGP Global Mode must support other operating bands
defined by the operation country/region.
10.6.1.14 UE capabilities
Overview of UE capabilities for XGP Global Mode is described in section 18 of [34].
10.6.1.15 Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation
Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation for XGP Global Mode includes UE Support for
self-configuration and self-optimisation, Self-configuration, Self-optimisation.
Details of Support for self-configuration and self-optimisation for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 22 of [34].
10.6.1.16 Deployment Scenarios for CA
Table J.1-1 of [34] shows some of the potential deployment scenarios for CA. Overview of thepotential CA deployment scenarios for XGP Global Mode is described in annex J.1 of [34].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

667

10.6.2 Physical layer
10.6.2.1 General description
10.6.2.1.1 Relation to other layers
The physical layer interfaces the Medium Access Control (MAC) layer and the Radio Resource
Control (RRC) Layer.
General protocol architecture around physical layer and service provided to higher layers for XGP
Global Mode are described in section 4.1 of [29].
10.6.2.1.2 General description of Layer 1
General description of Layer 1 includes Multiple Access, Physical channels and modulation,
Channel coding and interleaving, Physical layer procedures and physical layer measurements.
General description of layer 1 for XGP Global mode is described in section 4.2 of [29].
10.6.2.2 Frame Structure
Downlink and uplink transmissions are organized into radio frames with 10ms duration for XGP
Global Mode. Each radio Frame of length 10ms consists of two half-frames of length 5ms each.
Each half-frame consists of five subframes of length 1ms.
XGP Global Mode uses type 2 Frame Structure defined in section 4.2 of [30]. Among all the
UL-DL configurations shown in Table 4.2-2 of [30], XGP Global Mode may be configured withUL-DL configuration 0, 1, 2 or 6. The Special subframe configuration of XGP Global Mode may
be configuration 5 or 7 shown in Table 4.2-1 of [30].
10.6.2.3 Uplink Physical Channels and Modulation
10.6.2.3.1 Overview
An uplink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information
originating from higher layers. Physical Uplink Shared Channel (PUSCH), Physical Uplink Control
Channel (PUCCH) and Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) are defined for XGP Global
Mode.
An uplink physical signal is used by the physical layer but does not carry information originating

A-GN4.00-03-TS

668

from higher layers. Demodulation reference signal and Sounding reference signal are defined for
XGP Global Mode.
Detailed overview of uplink physical channels and Physical signals are described in section 5.1 of[30].
10.6.2.3.2 Slot structure and physical resources
UL RB
The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers andUL
N symbSC-FDMA symbols. Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element. A

physical resource block is defined as

UL
N symbconsecutive SC-FDMA symbols in the time domainRBand N sc consecutive subcarriers in the frequency domain
Details of Resource grid, Resource element and Resource block for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.2 of [30].
10.6.2.3.3 Physical uplink shared channel
The baseband signal representing the physical uplink shared channel for XGP Global Mode isdefined in terms of the following steps:


Scrambling

modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued symbols



Layer mapping

The complex-valued modulation symbols for each of the codewords to be transmitted aremapped onto one or two layers. Layer mapping for transmission on a single antenna port is thesame as the previous releases. Layer mapping for spatial multiplexing is newly introduced tosupport enhanced UL MIMO (i.e. higher order UL MIMO).
transform precoding to generate complex-valued symbols



precoding of the complex-valued symbols

Precoding for spatial multiplexing is only used in combination with layer mapping for spatial
multiplexing, which is newly introduced to support enhanced UL MIMO.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

669



mapping of precoded complex-valued symbols to resource elements

generation of complex-valued time-domain SC-FDMA signal for each antenna port

The details of above steps are described in section 5.3 of [30].
10.6.2.3.4 Physical uplink control channel
The physical uplink control channel, PUCCH, carries uplink control information. PUCCH for XGP
Global Mode is not transmitted in the UpPTS field.
The physical uplink control channel supports multiple formats, including PUCCH formats 1, 1a
and 1b, PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b, and PUCCH format 3. PUCCH format 3 is newly
introduced in this release to support CA.
PUCCH formats 1, 1a and 1b are described in section 5.4.1 of [30]. PUCCH formats 2, 2a and 2b
are described in section 5.4.2 of [30]. PUCCH format 3 is described in section 5.4.2A of [30].
PUCCH mapping to physical resources for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.4.3 of [30].
10.6.2.3.5 Reference signals
Two types of UL reference signals are supported in XGP Global Mode.


Demodulation reference signal (DMRS), associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH;

Sounding reference signal (SRS), not associated with transmission of PUSCH or PUCCH.

Details of Generation of the reference signal sequence, Demodulation reference signal andSounding reference signal are described in section 5.5 of [30].
10.6.2.3.6 SC-FDMA baseband signal generation
SC-FDMA baseband signal generation of all uplink physical signals and physical channels except
the physical random access channel are described in section 5.6 of [30] for XGP Global Mode.
10.6.2.3.7 Physical random access channel
Time and frequency structure of physical random access channel, preamble sequence generation
and baseband signal generation for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.7 of [30].
10.6.2.3.8 Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the complex-valued SC-FDMA baseband
signal for each antenna port for XGP Global Mode is shown in section 5.8 of [30].
A-GN4.00-03-TS670

10.6.2.4 Downlink Physical Channels and Modulation
10.6.2.4.1 Overview
A downlink physical channel corresponds to a set of resource elements carrying information
originating from higher layers. Physical Downlink Shared Channel (PDSCH), Physical Broadcast
Channel (PBCH), Physical Multicast Channel (PMCH), Physical Control Format Indicator Channel(PCFICH), Physical Downlink Control Channel (PDCCH) and Physical Hybrid ARQ Indicator
Channel (PHICH) are defined for XGP Global Mode.
A downlink physical signal corresponds to a set of resource elements used by the physical layer
but does not carry information originating from higher layers. Reference signals andSynchronization signal are defined for XGP Global Mode.
In this Global mode, a subset of the downlink subframes in a radio frame on a carrier supporting
PDSCH transmission can be configured as MBSFN subframes by higher layers. This feature isfor overhead reduction when enhanced DL MIMO technology is used. The details are describedin section 6.1 of [30].
10.6.2.4.2 Slot structure and physical resource elements
DL RB
The transmitted signal in each slot is described by a resource grid of N RB N sc subcarriers andDL
N symbOFDM symbols. Each element in the resource grid is called a resource element.

Resource blocks are used to describe the mapping of certain physical channels to resource
elements. Physical and virtual resource blocks are defined. Resource-element groups are used
for defining the mapping of control channels to resource elements.
Details of Resource grid, Resource elements, Resource blocks and Resource-element groups for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of [30].
10.6.2.4.3 General structure for downlink physical channels
The baseband signal representing a downlink physical channel is defined in terms of the following
steps:
 scrambling of coded bits in each of the codewords to be transmitted on a physical channel;
 modulation of scrambled bits to generate complex-valued modulation symbols; mapping of the complex-valued modulation symbols onto one or several transmission layers;
5, 6, 7 and 8 layers are added for enhanced DL MIMO in this release of XGP Global Mode.
A-GN4.00-03-TS

671



precoding of the complex-valued modulation symbols on each layer for transmission on theantenna ports;
In this Global Mode, precoding for spatial multiplexing using antenna ports with UE-specificreference signals is only used in combination with layer mapping for spatial multiplexing. Spatial
multiplexing using antenna ports with UE-specific reference signals supports up to eight antenna
ports. Codebooks for 1~8 layer CSI reporting are newly introduced in this release of XGP Global
Mode.



mapping of complex-valued modulation symbols for each antenna port to resource elements;
generation of complex-valued time-domain OFDM signal for each antenna port;

The details of above steps for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of [30].
10.6.2.4.4 Physical downlink shared channel
The physical downlink shared channel for XGP Global Mode shall be processed and mapped toresource elements as described in Section 6.3 of [30] with the exceptions stated in section 6.4 of[30].
10.6.2.4.5 Physical broadcast channel
Details of Scrambling,

Modulation, Layer mapping and Precoding, Mapping to resource

elements of a physical broadcast channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.6 of[30].
10.6.2.4.6 Physical Multicast Channel
The physical multicast channel shall be processed and mapped to resource elements as
described in Section 6.3 of [30] with the following exceptions stated in section 6.5 of [30].
10.6.2.4.7 Physical control format indicator channel
The physical control format indicator channel for XGP Global Mode carries information about the
number of OFDM symbols used for transmission of PDCCHs in a subframe.
Details of Scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping and Precoding, Mapping to resource elementsof a physical control format indicator channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.7 of[30].
10.6.2.4.8 Physical downlink control channel
The physical downlink control channel for XGP Global Mode carries scheduling assignments andA-GN4.00-03-TS672

other control information.
Details of PDCCH formats, PDCCH multiplexing and scrambling, Modulation, Layer mapping andprecoding and Mapping to resource elements of a physical downlink control channel for XGP
Global Mode are described in section 6.8 of [30].
10.6.2.4.9 Physical hybrid ARQ indicator channel
The PHICH for XGP Global Mode carries the hybrid-ARQ ACK/NACK.
Details of Modulation, Resource group alignment, layer mapping and precoding of PHICH for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.9 of [30].
10.6.2.4.10 Reference signals
Five types of downlink reference signals are defined for XGP Global Mode.
Cell-specific reference signals (CRS)MBSFN reference signals

UE-specific reference signals (DM-RS)

Positioning reference signals (PRS)

CSI reference signals (CSI-RS)

To support enhanced DL MIMO, compared with release 8/9, downlink reference signal structure
has been enhanced by DM RS targeting PDSCH demodulation and CSI-RS targeting channel
state information (CSI) estimation (for CQI/PMI/RI reporting when needed). DM RS for PDSCH
demodulation is UE-specific, i.e. the PDSCH and the demodulation reference signals intended fora specific UE are subject to the same precoding operation. In contrast CSI-RS are cell specific,
sparse in the frequency and time domain and punctured into the data region of normal subframes.
CSI reference signals are transmitted on one, two, four or eight antenna ports.
Details of all above reference signals for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.10 of [30].
10.6.2.4.11 Synchronization signals
Synchronization signals for XGP Global Mode include Primary synchronization signal andSecondary synchronization signal.
Details of sequence generation and Mapping to resource elements of Primary synchronization
signal and Secondary synchronization signal for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.11
A-GN4.00-03-TS673

of [30].
10.6.2.4.12 OFDM baseband signal generation
OFDM baseband signal generation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6.12 of [30].
10.6.2.4.13 Modulation and upconversion
Modulation and upconversion to the carrier frequency of the downlink complex-valued OFDM
baseband signal for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.13 of [30].
10.6.2.5 Channel coding, multiplexing and interleaving
Channel coding scheme is a combination of error detection, error correcting, rate matching,interleaving and transport channel or control information mapping onto/splitting from physicalchannels.
10.6.2.5.1 Generic procedures
Generic coding procedures include CRC calculation, Code block segmentation and code block
CRC attachment, Channel coding, Rate matching and Code block concatenation for XGP Global
Mode.
Details of generic coding procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [31].
10.6.2.5.2 Uplink transport channels and control information
10.6.2.5.2.1 Uplink shared channel
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of a maximum of two transport blocks everytransmission time interval (TTI) per UL cell. The following coding steps can be identified for eachtransport block of an UL cell:

Add CRC to the transport block

Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

Channel coding of data and control information

Rate matching

Code block concatenation

A-GN4.00-03-TS

674



Multiplexing of data and control information



Channel interleaver

Details of coding steps of uplink shared channel for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.2.2 of [31].
10.6.2.5.2.2 Uplink control information on PUCCH
Chanel coding procedures of uplink control information on PUCCH for XGP Global Mode include
Channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK, Channel coding for UCI scheduling request, Channel coding
for UCI channel quality information and Channel coding for UCI channel quality information and
HARQ-ACK.
To support CA, channel coding for UCI HARQ-ACK carried on PUCCH format 3 is newly added inthis release of XGP Global Mode.
Details of Chanel coding procedures of uplink control information on PUCCH for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 5.2.3 of [31].
10.6.2.5.2.3 Uplink control information on PUSCH without UL-SCH data
When control data are sent via PUSCH without UL-SCH data, the following coding steps can be
identified:

Channel coding of control information

Control information mapping

Channel interleaver

Details of coding steps are described in section 5.2.4 of [31].
10.6.2.5.3 Downlink transport channels and control information
10.6.2.5.3.1 Broadcast channel
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of a maximum of one transport block everytransmission time interval (TTI) of 40ms. The following coding steps can be identified:

Add CRC to transport block

Channel coding

A-GN4.00-03-TS

675



Rate matching.

Details of coding steps of downlink broadcast channel for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.3.1 of [31].
10.6.2.5.3.2 Downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel
Data arrives to the coding unit in the form of a maximum of two transport blocks everytransmission time interval (TTI) per DL cell. The following coding steps can be identified for eachtransport block of a DL cell:

Add CRC to transport block

Code block segmentation and code block CRC attachment

Channel codingRate matching

Code block concatenation.

Details of coding steps of downlink shared channel, Paging channel and Multicast channel for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.2 of [31].
10.6.2.5.3.3 Downlink control information
A DCI transports downlink or uplink scheduling information, requests for aperiodic CQI reports,
notifications of MCCH change or uplink power control commands for one cell and one RNTI.
Coding steps of DCI include Information element multiplexing, CRC attachment, Channel coding
and Rate matching. Detailed of coding steps of DCI for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.3.3 of [31].
To support different transmission modes or purposes, different DCI formats are defined, including
DCI format 0, 1, 1A, 1B, 1C, 1D, 2, 2A, 2B, 2C, 3, 3A, 4. Format 2C and 4 are newly introduced inthis release of XGP Global Mode to support enhanced DL and UL MIMO.
10.6.2.5.3.4 Control format indicator
Channel Coding of control format indicator for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.4 of[31].

A-GN4.00-03-TS676

10.6.2.5.3.5 HARQ indicator (HI)Channel Coding of HARQ indicator for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.5 of [31].
10.6.2.6 Physical layer procedures
10.6.2.6.1 Synchronisation procedures
Synchronisation procedures for XGP Global Mode include Cell search, Timing synchronization(Radio link monitoring and Transmission timing adjustments), and Timing for Secondary Cell
Activation / Deactivation. Timing for Secondary Cell Activation / Deactivation is defined for CA
scenario.
Details of Synchronisation procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4 of [32].
10.6.2.6.2 Power control
10.6.2.6.2.1 Uplink power control
Detailed power control of physical uplink shared channel, physical uplink control channel andSounding Reference Symbol for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [32].
10.6.2.6.2.2 Downlink power allocation
Downlink power allocation for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [32].
10.6.2.6.3 Random access procedure
Random access procedure includes physical non-synchronized random access procedure andRandom Access Response Grant.
Details of Random access procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6 of [32].
10.6.2.6.4 Physical downlink shared channel related procedures
Physical downlink shared channel related procedures include UE procedure for receiving thephysical downlink shared channel, UE procedure for reporting CSI and UE procedure forreporting HARQ-ACK/NACK.
10.6.2.6.4.1 UE procedure for receiving the physical downlink shared channel
There are 7 DL transmission schemes defined for XGP Global mode: single-antenna port scheme,

A-GN4.00-03-TS

677

Transmit diversity scheme, Large delay CDD scheme, Closed-loop spatial multiplexing scheme,
Multi-user MIMO scheme, Dual layer transmission scheme and Up to 8 layer transmission
scheme. The details are described in section 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.1.4, 7.1.5, 7.1.5A and 7.1.5B of[32]. Up to 8 layer transmission scheme is introduced in this release of XGP Global Mode.
Three resource allocation (RA) types including two non-contiguous RA types and one contiguous
RA type are described in section 7.1.6.1-7.1.6.3 of [32].
To support cross-carrier scheduling in CA scenario, PDSCH starting position can be configured
by higher-layer signaling, which is described in section 7.1.6.4 of [32].
Modulation order and transport block size determination is described in section 7.1.6.5 of [32].
To support the UE configured with CA, storing soft channel bits are described in section 7.1.6.6 of[32].
10.6.2.6.4.2 UE procedure for reporting Channel State Information (CSI)
UE procedures for reporting CQI/PMI/RI include aperiodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUSCH
and periodic CQI/PMI/RI Reporting using PUCCH.
Details of UE procedures for reporting CQI/PMI/RI for XGP Global Mode are described in section
7.2 of [32].
Two CSI sets are defined for supporting eICIC, which is described in section 7.2.3 of [32].
10.6.2.6.4.3 UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK
ACK/NACK bundling and ACK/NACK multiplexing are supported by higher layer configuration for
XGP Global Mode. To support CA, new procedures for ACK/NACK multiplexing are introduced.
Details of UE procedure for reporting ACK/NACK for XGP Global Mode are described in section
7.3 of [32].
10.6.2.6.5 Physical uplink shared channel related procedures
Physical uplink shared channel related procedures for XGP Global Mode include Resource
Allocation, UE sounding procedure, UE ACK/NACK procedure, UE PUSCH Hopping procedure,
UE Reference Symbol procedure, Modulation order, redundancy version and transport block size
determination and UE Transmit Antenna Selection.
There are two types of UL resource allocation, including contiguous RA and non-contiguous RA.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

678

Non-contiguous RA indicates to a scheduled UE two sets of resource blocks with each set
including one or more consecutive resource block groups. Non-contiguous RA is newly
introduced in this release of XGP Global Mode.
A UE shall transmit Sounding Reference Symbol (SRS) on per serving cell SRS resources basedon two trigger types: Periodic trigger and Aperiodic trigger. Aperiodic trigger is newly introduced inthis release of XGP Global Mode for enhanced UL MIMO.
Details of Physical uplink shared channel related procedures for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 8 of [32].
10.6.2.6.6 Physical downlink control channel procedures
Physical downlink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode include UE procedure fordetermining PDCCH assignment, PHICH assignment, control format indicator (CFI) assignment
and PDCCH validation for semi-persistent scheduling.
To support cross-carrier scheduling in CA scenario, new procedures for PDCCH assignment are
introduced in this release of XGP Global Mode.
Details of physical downlink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 9 of [32].
10.6.2.6.7 Physical uplink control channel procedures
Physical uplink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode include UE procedure fordetermining physical uplink control channel assignment and uplink ACK/NACK timing. New
procedures for determining physical uplink control channel assignment are introduced in thisrelease of XGP Global Mode to support CA
Details of physical uplink control channel procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 10 of [32].
10.6.2.7 Measurements
10.6.2.7.1 UE measurement capabilities
UE measurement capabilities for XGP Global Mode are defined in section 5.1 of [33].
10.6.2.7.2 E-UTRAN measurement abilities
E-UTRAN measurement abilities for XGP Global Mode are defined in section 5.2 of [33].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

679

10.6.3 MAC layer – MSL1
10.6.3.1 General
10.6.3.1.1 MAC architecture
MAC architecture for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4.2 of [36].
In case of CA, if the UE is configured with one or more SCells, there are multiple DL-SCH andthere may be multiple UL-SCH per UE; one DL-SCH and UL-SCH on the PCell, one DL-SCH andzero or one UL-SCH for each SCell. Detail of MAC architecture for XGP Global Mode is
described in section 4.2.1 of [36].
10.6.3.1.2 Services
MAC layer services provided to upper layers and expected from physical layer for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 4.3 of [36].
10.6.3.1.3 Functions
Functions supported by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [36].
10.6.3.1.4 Channel structure
10.6.3.1.4.1 Transport Channels
The transport channels used by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.5.1 of[36].
10.6.3.1.4.2 Logical Channels
The logical channels used by MAC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.5.2 of[36].
10.6.3.1.4.3 Mapping of Transport Channels to Logical Channels
Mapping of Transport Channels to logical channels for XGP Global Mode is described in section
4.5.3 of [36].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

680

10.6.3.2 MAC procedures
10.6.3.2.1 Random Access procedure
Random Access procedure for XGP Global Mode includes Random Access Procedure
initialization, Random Access Resource selection, Random Access Preamble transmission,
Random Access Response reception, Contention Resolution and Completion of the Random
Access procedure.
Details of Random Access procedure for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [36].
10.6.3.2.2 Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment
Maintenance of Uplink Time Alignment for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [36].
10.6.3.2.3 DL-SCH data transfer
DL-SCH data transfer procedure for XGP Global Mode includes DL Assignment reception, HARQ
operation, Disassembly and demultiplexing.
Details of DL-SCH data transfer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [36].
10.6.3.2.4 UL-SCH data transfer
UL-SCH data transfer procedure for XGP Global Mode includes UL Grant reception, HARQ
operation, Multiplexing and assembly, Scheduling Request, Buffer Status Reporting and Power
Headroom Reporting.
Details of UL-SCH data transfer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.4 of [36].
Details of Power Headroom Reporting of a UE that supports CA for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.4.6 [36].
10.6.3.2.5 PCH reception
PCH reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.5 of [36].
10.6.3.2.6 BCH reception
BCH reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.6 of [36].
10.6.3.2.7 Discontinuous Reception (DRX)
Discontinuous Reception procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.7 of [36].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

681

10.6.3.2.8 MAC reconfiguration
MAC reconfiguration procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.8 of [36].
In case of CA, details of MAC reconfiguration upon SCell addition/removal for XGP Global Modeare described in section 5.8 [36].
10.6.3.2.9 MAC Reset
MAC Reset procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.9 of [36].
10.6.3.2.10 Semi-Persistent SchedulingSemi-Persistent Scheduling procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.10 of [36].
In case of CA, Semi-Persistent Scheduling is supported on the PCell only.
10.6.3.2.11

Activation/Deactivation of SCells

In case of CA, the network may activate and deactivate the configured SCells. The PCell isalways activated. Details of Activation/Deactivation mechanism for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.13 [36].
10.6.3.2.12 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous MAC layer protocol data for XGP Global Modeis described in section 5.11 of [36].
10.6.3.3 Protocol Data Units, formats and parameters10.6.3.3.1 Protocol Data Units
A MAC PDU is a bit string that is byte aligned in length. MAC PDU and MAC control elements for
XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.1 of [36].
The Extended Power Headroom MAC control element for a UE that supports CA for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 6.1.3.6a [36].
The Activation/Deactivation MAC control element for a UE that supports CA for XGP Global Modeare described in section 6.1.3.8 [36].
10.6.3.3.2 Formats and parameters
MAC header for DL-SCH and UL-SCH, MAC header for Random Access Response and MAC
payload for Random Access Response are described in section 6.2 of [36].
A-GN4.00-03-TS

682

10.6.3.4 Variables and constants
MAC layer variables and constants for XGP Global Mode include RNTI values, Backoff
Parameter values, PRACH Mask Index values, Subframe_Offset values, TTI_BUNDLE_SIZE
value, DELTA_PREAMBLE values and HARQ RTT Timer.
Details of MAC layer variables and constants for XGP Global Mode are described in section 7 of
[36].
10.6.4 Radio Link Control (RLC) layer – MSL2
10.6.4.1 General
10.6.4.1.1 RLC architecture
Functions of the RLC layer are performed by RLC entities. An RLC entity can be configured toperform data transfer in one of the following three modes: Transparent Mode (TM),
Unacknowledged Mode (UM) or Acknowledged Mode (AM).
Details of RLC architecture for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.2 of [37].
10.6.4.1.2 Services
RLC layer services provided to upper layers and expected from lower layers are described in
section 4.3 of [37].
10.6.4.1.3 Functions
Functions supported by RLC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [37].
10.6.4.1.4 Data available for transmission
Details of data available for transmission in the RLC layer for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 4.5 of [37].
10.6.4.2 Procedures
10.6.4.2.1 Data transfer procedures
RLC layer Data transfer procedures for XGP Global Mode include TM data transfer, UM datatransfer and AM data transfer.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

683

Details of RLC layer data transfer procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1
of [37].
10.6.4.2.2 ARQ procedures
ARQ procedures for XGP Global Mode include Retransmission, Polling and Status reporting.
Details of ARQ procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.2 of [37].
10.6.4.2.3 SDU discard procedures
SDU discard procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [37].
10.6.4.2.4 Re-establishment procedure
RLC layer Re-establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.4 of [37].
10.6.4.2.5 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous RLC layer protocol data for XGP Global Mode is
described in section 5.5 of [37].
10.6.4.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.6.4.3.1 Protocol data units
RLC PDUs can be categorized into RLC data PDUs and RLC control PDUs.
Details of RLC data PDU and RLC control PDU for XGP Global Mode are described in section
6.1 of [37].
10.6.4.3.2 Formats and parameters
The formats and parameters of RLC PDUs for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of[37].
10.6.4.4 Variables, constants and timers
RLC layer variables, constants, timers and configurable parameters for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 7 of [37].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

684

10.6.5 Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) layer – MSL3
10.6.5.1 General
10.6.5.1.1 PDCP architecture
PDCP structure and PDCP entities for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.2 of [38].
10.6.5.1.2 Services
PDCP layer services provided to upper layers and expected from physical layer for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 4.3 of [38].
10.6.5.1.3 Functions
PDCP layer supported functions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [38].
10.6.5.1.4 Data available for transmission
Details of data available for transmission in the PDCP layer for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 4.5 of [38].
10.6.5.2 PDCP procedures
10.6.5.2.1 PDCP Data Transfer Procedures
UL PDCP Data Transfer Procedures and DL PDCP Data Transfer Procedures are described in
section 5.1 of [38]10.6.5.2.2 Re-establishment procedure
PDCP layer Re-establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2 of [38].
10.6.5.2.3 PDCP Status Report
PDCP Status Report procedure for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3 of [38].
10.6.5.2.4 PDCP discard
PDCP discard procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.4 of [38].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

685

10.6.5.2.5 Header Compression and Decompression
PDCP layer Header Compression and Decompression procedures for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.5 of [38].
10.6.5.2.6 Ciphering and Deciphering
PDCP layer Ciphering and Deciphering procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.6 of [38].
10.6.5.2.7 Integrity Protection and Verification
PDCP layer Integrity Protection and Verification procedures for XGP Global Mode are describedin section 5.7 of [38].
10.6.5.2.8 Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous protocol data
Handling of unknown, unforeseen and erroneous PDCP layer protocol data for XGP Global Modeis described in section 5.8 of [38].
10.6.5.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.6.5.3.1 Protocol data units
PDCP PDUs can be categorized into PDCP data PDUs and PDCP control PDUs.
Details of PDCP data PDU and PDCP control PDU for XGP Global Mode are described in section
6.1 of [38].
10.6.5.3.2 Formats
Different PDCP PDUs are supported for XGP Global Mode: Control plane PDCP Data PDU, User
plane PDCP Data PDU with long PDCP SN , User plane PDCP Data PDU with short PDCP SN,
PDCP Control PDU for interspersed ROHC feedback packet and PDCP Control PDU for PDCP
status report.
Detailed formats of PDCP PDUs for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.2 of [38].
10.6.5.3.3 Parameters
PDCP layer parameters for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of [38].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

686

10.6.5.4 Variables, constants and timers
PDCP layer variables, constants and timers for XGP Global Mode are described in section 7 of
[38].
10.6.6 Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer
10.6.6.1 General
10.6.6.1.1 Architecture
RRC layer architecture for XGP Global Mode is described in section 4.2 of [39].
10.6.6.1.2 Services
RRC services provided to upper layers and expected from lower layers for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 4.3 of [39].
10.6.6.1.3 Functions
RRC layer supported functions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 4.4 of [39].
10.6.6.2 Procedures
10.6.6.2.1 General
General RRC requirements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.1 of [39].
10.6.6.2.2 System information
10.6.6.2.2.1 Introduction
System information is divided into the MasterInformationBlock (MIB) and a number ofSystemInformationBlocks (SIBs).
Scheduling of System information, System information validity and notification of changes,
Indication of ETWS notification and Indication of CMAS notification for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.2.1 of [39].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

687

10.6.6.2.2.2 System information acquisition
System information acquisition for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2.2 of [39].
10.6.6.2.2.3 Acquisition of an SI message
Acquisition of an SI message for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.2.3 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3 Connection control
10.6.6.2.3.1 Introduction
RRC connection control procedures include RRC connection control, Security and Connectedmode mobility.
Overview of connection control procedure is described in section 5.3.1 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.2 Paging
Paging initiation procedure and Reception procedure of the Paging message by the UE for XGP
Global Mode are described in [35] and section 5.3.2 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.3 RRC connection establishment
RRC connection establishment procedures for XGP Global Mode include Initiation, Actions
related to transmission of RRC Connection Request message, Reception of the RRC Connection
establishment related messages, Cell re-selection, Timer expiry, Abortion of RRC connection
establishment and Handling of SSAC related parameters.
RRC connection establishment procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.3 of[39].
10.6.6.2.3.4 Initial security activation
Initial security activation procedure for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.4 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.5 RRC connection reconfiguration
RRC connection reconfiguration procedures include Initiation procedure, Reception of RRC
Connection Reconfiguration related message, Reconfiguration failure procedure, Timer expiry
procedure, etc.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

688

RRC connection reconfiguration procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.5of [39].
A UE that supports CA, may be configured with one or more SCells in addition to the PCell thatwas initially configured during connection establishment. Details of RRC connection
reconfiguration procedures of a UE that supports CA for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 5.3.1 [39].
10.6.6.2.3.6 Counter check
Counter check procedures include Initiation procedure and Reception of the Counter Check
message procedure.
Counter check procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.6 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.7 RRC connection re-establishment
RRC connection re-establishment procedures include Initiation procedure, reception of the RRC
Connection Re-establishment related messages, Timer expiry procedure and etc.
RRC connection re-establishment procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.3.7 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.8 RRC connection release
RRC connection release procedures include Initiation procedure, Reception of the RRC
Connection Release message and Timer expiry procedure.
RRC connection release procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.8 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.9 RRC connection release requested by upper layers
RRC connection release requested by upper layers for XGP Global Mode is described in section
5.3.9 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.10 Radio resource configuration
Radio resource configuration procedures include SRB addition/ modification/ release, MAC mainreconfiguration, Semi-persistent scheduling reconfiguration, Physical channel reconfiguration andRadio Link Failure Timers and Constants reconfiguration.
Radio resource configuration procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.10 of[39].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

689

Cell management for a UE that supports CA including e.g. addition/ modification/ release of
SCell(s), details of Cell management procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.3.10.3a, 5.3.10.3b [39].
For the UE configurations for Time-domain ICIC to measure "protected" resources of the serving
cell, RRM/RLM measurement resource restriction is signalled to the UE. Details of time domain
measurement resource restriction for serving cell for XGP Global Mode are described in section
5.3.10.8 [39].
10.6.6.2.3.11 Radio link failure related actions
Radio link failure related actions include Detection of physical layer problems in
RRC_CONNECTED, Recovery of physical layer problems and Detection of radio link failure.
Radio link failure related actions for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.3.11 of [39].
The measurements are based on the time domain measurement resource restriction, if
configured.
10.6.6.2.3.12 UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED
UE actions upon leaving RRC_CONNECTED for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.3.12of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.13 UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request
UE actions upon PUCCH/ SRS release request for XGP Global Mode is described in section
5.3.13 of [39].
10.6.6.2.3.14 Proximity indication
Initiation and Actions related to transmission of Proximity indication message for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 5.3.14 of [39].
10.6.6.2.4 Inter-RAT mobility
Inter-RAT mobility procedures include Handover to E-UTRA procedure, Mobility from E-UTRA
procedure and Inter-RAT cell change order to E-UTRAN.
Inter-RAT mobility procedures for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.4 of [39].
10.6.6.2.5 Measurements
Measurements for XGP Global Mode include Measurement configuration, performing
A-GN4.00-03-TS690

measurements, Measurement report triggering, Measurement reporting and Measurement related
actions.
Measurements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 5.5 of [39].
When CA is configured, the "current cell" above refers to any serving cell of the configured set ofserving cells. And Event A5 and Event A6 had been introduced for CA configured UE. Detail ofmobility with CA configured for XGP Global Mode is described in section 5.5 of [39].
For the UE to measure "protected" resources to measure "protected" resources of serving cell
and/or neighbour cells, RRM measurement resource restriction is signalled to the UE. Details oftime domain measurement resource restriction for RRM measurement for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 5.5 [39].
10.6.6.2.6 Other procedures
DL and UL information transfer, UE capability transfer and UE information request procedures aredescribed in section 5.6 of [39]. Generic RRC layer error handling for XGP Global Mode is
described in section 5.7 of [39].
10.6.6.3 Protocol data units, formats and parameters10.6.6.3.1 RRC messages
General RRC message structure and RRC Message definitions for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 6.2 of [39].
10.6.6.3.2 RRC information elements
RRC information elements include System information blocks, Radio resource control information
elements, Security control information elements, Mobility control information elements,
Measurement information elements and other information elements.
RRC information elements for XGP Global Mode are described in section 6.3 of [39].
10.6.6.3.3 RRC multiplicity and type constraint values
RRC multiplicity and type constraint values for XGP Global Mode is described in section 6.4 of[39].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

691

10.6.6.4 Variables and constants
RRC layer UE variables, Counters, Timers and Constants for XGP Global Mode are described in
section 7 of [39].
10.6.6.5 Protocol data unit abstract syntax
Structure of encoded RRC messages, Basic production, extension and Padding for XGP Global
Mode are described in section 8 of [39].
10.6.6.6 Specified and default radio configurations
10.6.6.6.1 Specified configurations
Logical channel configurations and specified SRB configurations for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 9.1 of [39].
10.6.6.6.2 Default radio configurations
Default SRB configurations, Default MAC main configuration, Default semi-persistent schedulingconfiguration, Default physical channel configuration and Default values timers and constants aredescribed in section 9.2 of [39].
10.6.6.7 Radio information related interactions between network nodes
Radio information related interactions between network nodes include Inter-node RRC messages,
Inter-node RRC information element definitions, Inter-node RRC multiplicity and type constraint
values and Mandatory information in AS-Config.
Radio information related interactions between network nodes for XGP Global Mode aredescribed in section 10 of [39].
10.6.6.8 UE capability related constraints and performance requirements
UE capability related constraints and Processing delay requirements for RRC procedures aredescribed in section 11 of [39].

A-GN4.00-03-TS

692

Annex X: Regional Condition
X.1 Scope
The XGP standard should accommodate some requirements in accordance with regional or local
regulations. The conditions for regional case are described here in this annex.
X.2 The Radio BandThe XGP operation band is mainly allocated from 1 GHz to 3 GHz for global deployment, in which
the typical BWA and legacy PHS bands are included. Regional condition is described in thissection.
X.2.1 Taiwan Condition
In Taiwan, the legacy PHS can be migrated to XGP over its existing 1.9 GHz TDD band.
X.3 The Effective Isotropic Radiated Power (EIRP)In some regions, XGP system is configured as a Low-tier system. For such low-tier system, thetransmitter power of the BS should be restricted within certain amount in accordance to regional
regulations.
X.3.1 Taiwan Condition
The EIRP of BS for 1.9 GHz TDD band should be restricted as less than or equal to 32 Watt.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

693

Appendix A: Full Subcarrier Mode
A.1 Overview
Full subcarrier mode defines the way to allocate DC carrier and guard carrier for the purpose of
improving data throughput. Note that full subcarrier mode is used only in DL.
A.2 Definition of Full Subcarrier Mode
Figure A.1 shows full subcarrier mode in several ECBWs as examples. As shown in the figure, allsubcarriers in ECBW except central subcarrier shall be used as data subcarriers.

SCH
number

1

2

3

5

4

16.2 MHz78

9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18D

8.1 MHzD

3.6 MHz

1.8 MHz

6

D

D

PRU
D : DC carrier
Subcarrier number 13
Subcarrier number 1
Figure A.1 Full Subcarrier Mode

A-GN4.00-03-TS

694

Appendix B: Modulation
B.1 BPSK(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak) symbols by the serial/parallel converter and thenchanged to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal input to(Ak) (binary/binary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion from (Ak) to (Ik, Qk)
is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series

an-1

an

↓
Symbol Time Series

an+1

↓
(an )
↓
Ak
Ak

Ik

1
1
0
-1
(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.

Qk
0
0

Q

0

1

I

Figure B.1 BPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

695

B.2 π/2 - BPSK
(1) The serial signal input is converted to (A2k) or (A2k+1) symbols by the serial/parallel
converter and then changed to corresponding signals (I2k, Q2k) or (I2k+1, Q2k+1) by theencoder. Conversion from serial signal input to (A2k) or (A2k+1) (binary/binary conversion) is
performed as noted below, and conversion from (A2k) to (I2k, Q2k) or from (A2k+1) to (I2k+1,
Q2k+1) is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

a2n-1

A2k

I2k

1
0

a2n
↓
(a2n)

a2n+1
↓
(a2n+1)

↓
A2k

↓
A2k+1

Q2k
1
-1

A2k+1

I2k+1

1
0

0
0
Q2k+1

0
0

-1
1

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.

Q
0

0

1

1

I

: symbol of even number(2,4,…): symbol of odd number(1,3,5,…)Figure B.2 π/2 -BPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

696

B.3 QPSK(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk) symbols by the serial/parallel converter andthen changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal
input to (Ak, Bk) (binary/quaternary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion
from (Ak, Bk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

an-1

an
an+1
↓
↓
(an, an+1)
↓
↓
Ak

Bk

Ak

Bk

Ik

Qk

1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0

1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2
-1/√2

1/√2
-1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
Q
01

11

I

00

10
Figure B.3 QPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

697

B.4 π/4 - QPSK
(1) The serial signal input is converted to (A2k, B2k) or (A2k+1, B2k+1) symbols by theserial/parallel converter and then changed to corresponding signals (I2k, Q2k) or (I2k+1, Q2k+1)
by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal input to (A2k, B2k) or (A2k+1, B2k+1)(binary/quaternary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion from (A2k,B2k) to(I2k, Q2k) or conversion from (A2k+1, B2k+1) to (I2k+1, Q2k+1) is performed according to thetable below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

a4n-1

A2k

B2k

Ik

Qk

1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0

1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2
-1/√2

1/√2
-1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2

a4n
a4n+1
↓
↓
(a4n, a4n+1)

a4n+2
a4n+3
↓
↓
(a4n+2, a4n+3)

↓
A2k

↓
B2k

↓
A2k+1

A2k+1

B2k＋1

1
1
0
0

1
0
1
0

↓
B2K+1
Ik

Qk
1
0
0
-1

0
-1
1
0

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
01

Q

01

11

00

11

00

I

10
10

:symbol of even number(2,4,…):symbol of odd number(1,3,5,…)Figure B.4 π/4 - QPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

698

B.5 8PSK(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck) symbols by the serial/parallel converter andthen changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal
input to (Ak, Bk, Ck) (binary/quaternary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion
from (Ak, Bk, Ck) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

an-1

an
↓

an+1
an+2
↓
↓
(an, an+1, an+2)
↓
↓
↓

Ak

Bk

Ck

Ak

Bk

Ck

Ik

Qk

1
1
1
1
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
1
0

1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1/√2
1/√2
0
-1/√2
0
-1

0
1/√2
-1/√2
-1
1/√2
1
0

0

0

0

-1/√2

-1/√2

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
Q
010
011

110

001
111

I

000
101
100

Figure B.5 8PSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

699

B.6 16QAM(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) symbols by the serial/parallel converter
and then changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal
input to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) (binary/16ary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion
from (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

an-1

an
↓

an+1
an+2
↓
↓
(an, an+1, an+2,

↓
Ak

↓
Bk

an+3
↓
an+3)

↓
Ck

↓
Dk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ik

Qk

1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
0
0

1
0
0
1
1
0

3/√10
3/√10
3/√10
3/√10
1/√10
1/√10

3/√10
1/√10
-1/√10-3/√10
3/√10
1/√10

1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

1/√10
1/√10
-1/√10-1/√10-1/√10-1/√10-3/√10-3/√10-3/√10-3/√10-1/√10-3/√103/√101/√10-1/√10-3/√103/√101/√10-1/√10-3/√10A-GN4.00-03-TS

700

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.
Q
0111

0101

1101

1111

0110

0100

1100

1110

0010

0000

1000

1010

0011

0001

1001

1011

I

Figure B.6 16QAM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

701

B.7 64QAM(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) symbols by the serial/parallel
converter and then changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion fromserial signal input to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) (binary/64ary conversion) is performed as noted
below, and conversion from (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to thetable below.

Binary Data Time

an

an+1

an+2

an+3

an+4

an+5

Series↓Symbol Time Series

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

(an, an+1, an+2, an+3, an+4, an+5)

↓
Ak

↓
Bk

↓
Ck

↓
Dk

↓
Ek

↓
Fk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Ik

Qk

1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1
1

1
1
0

1
1
1

1
0
0

7/√42
7/√42
7/√42

7/√42
5/√42
3/√42

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

7/√42
7/√42
7/√42
7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
5/√42
5/√42
5/√42
5/√42

1/√42
-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
0
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
1
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1

5/√42
5/√42
5/√42
3/√42
3/√42
3/√42
3/√42

-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42

A-GN4.00-03-TS

702

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

3/√42
3/√42
3/√42
3/√42
1/√42
1/√42
1/√42
1/√42
1/√42

-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42

1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

1/√42
1/√42
1/√42
-1/√42-1/√42-1/√42-1/√42-1/√42-1/√42-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1

1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

-1/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42
7/√42

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
0
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1

-5/√42-5/√42-5/√42-5/√42-5/√42-5/√42-5/√42

5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42

A-GN4.00-03-TS

703

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42

7/√42
5/√42
3/√42
1/√42
-1/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
Q
011111 011101 010101 010111 110111 110101 111101 111111
011110 011100 010100 010110 110110 110100 111100 111110
011010 011000 010000 010010 110010 110000 111000 111010
011011 011001 010001 010011 110011 110001 111001 111011

I

001011 001001 000001 000011 100011 100001 101001 101011
001010 001000 000000 000010 100010 100000 101000 101010
001110 001100 000100 000110 100110 100100 101100 101110
001111 001101 000101 000111 100111 100101 101101 101111
Figure B.7 64QAM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

704

B.8 256QAM(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk, Gk, Hk) symbols by theserial/parallel converter and then changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder.
Conversion from serial signal input to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk, Gk, Hk) (binary/256ary conversion)is performed as noted below, and conversion from (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk, Gk, Hk) to (Ik, Qk) is
performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

an
↓
↓
Ak

an+1 an+2
an+6 an+7↓↓↓↓↓(an, an+1, an+2, …, an+6, an+7)
↓
Bk

↓
Ck

↓
…

↓
Gk

↓
Hk

A-GN4.00-03-TS

705

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

-5/√170-5/√170

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

-11/√170-5/√170

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

-5/√170-7/√170

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

-11/√170-7/√170

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

-7/√170-5/√170

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

-9/√170-5/√170

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

-7/√170-7/√170

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

-9/√170-7/√170

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

-5/√170-3/√170

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

-11/√170-3/√170

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

-5/√170-1/√170

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

-11/√170-1/√170

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

-7/√170-3/√170

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

-9/√170-3/√170

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

-7/√170-1/√170

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

-9/√170-1/√170

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

-3/√170-5/√170

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

-13/√170-5/√170

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

-3/√170-7/√170

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

-13/√170-7/√170

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

-1/√170-5/√170

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

-15/√170-5/√170

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

-1/√170-7/√170

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

-15/√170-7/√170

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

-3/√170-3/√170

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

-13/√170-3/√170

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

-3/√170-1/√170

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

-13/√170-1/√170

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

-1/√170-3/√170

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

-15/√170-3/√170

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

-1/√170-1/√170

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

-15/√170-1/√170

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

-5/√170-11/√170

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

-11/√170-11/√170

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

-5/√170-9/√170

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

-11/√170-9/√170

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

-7/√170-11/√170

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

-9/√170-11/√170

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

-7/√170-9/√170

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

-9/√170-9/√170

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

-5/√170-13/√170

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

-11/√170-13/√170

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

-5/√170-15/√170

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

-11/√170-15/√170

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

-7/√170-13/√170

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

-9/√170-13/√170

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

-7/√170-15/√170

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

-9/√170-15/√170

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

-3/√170-11/√170

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

-13/√170-11/√170

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

-3/√170-9/√170

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

-13/√170-9/√170

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

-1/√170-11/√170

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

-15/√170-11/√170

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

-1/√170-9/√170

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

-15/√170-9/√170

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

-3/√170-13/√170

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

-13/√170-13/√170

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

-3/√170-15/√170

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

-13/√170-15/√170

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

-1/√170-13/√170

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

-15/√170-13/√170

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

-1/√170-15/√170

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

-15/√170-15/√170

A-GN4.00-03-TS

706

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

-5/√1705/√170

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

-11/√1705/√170

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

-5/√1707/√170

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

-11/√1707/√170

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

-7/√1705/√170

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

-9/√1705/√170

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

-7/√1707/√170

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

-9/√1707/√170

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

-5/√1703/√170

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

-11/√1703/√170

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

-5/√1701/√170

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

-11/√1701/√170

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

-7/√1703/√170

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

-9/√1703/√170

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

-7/√1701/√170

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

-9/√1701/√170

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

-3/√1705/√170

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

-13/√1705/√170

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

-3/√1707/√170

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

-13/√1707/√170

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

-1/√1705/√170

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

-15/√1705/√170

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

-1/√1707/√170

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

-15/√1707/√170

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

-3/√1703/√170

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

-13/√1703/√170

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

-3/√1701/√170

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

-13/√1701/√170

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

-1/√1703/√170

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

-15/√1703/√170

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

-1/√1701/√170

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

-15/√1701/√170

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

-5/√17011/√170

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

-11/√170

11/√170

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

-5/√1709/√170

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

-11/√1709/√170

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

-7/√17011/√170

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

-9/√17011/√170

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

-7/√1709/√170

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

-9/√1709/√170

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

-5/√17013/√170

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

-11/√17013/√170

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

-5/√17015/√170

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

-11/√17015/√170

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

-7/√17013/√170

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

-9/√17013/√170

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

-7/√17015/√170

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

-9/√17015/√170

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

-3/√17011/√170

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

-13/√170

11/√170

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

-3/√1709/√170

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

-13/√1709/√170

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

-1/√17011/√170

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

-15/√170

11/√170

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

-1/√1709/√170

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

-15/√1709/√170

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

-3/√17013/√170

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

-13/√17013/√170

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

-3/√17015/√170

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

-13/√17015/√170

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

-1/√17013/√170

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

-15/√17013/√170

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

-1/√17015/√170

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

-15/√17015/√170

A-GN4.00-03-TS

707

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

0

5/√170-5/√170

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

0

11/√170-5/√170

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

1

5/√170-7/√170

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

1

11/√170-7/√170

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

0

7/√170-5/√170

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

0

9/√170-5/√170

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

7/√170-7/√170

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

1

9/√170-7/√170

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

0

5/√170-3/√170

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

0

11/√170-3/√170

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

1

5/√170-1/√170

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

1

11/√170-1/√170

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

0

7/√170-3/√170

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

0

9/√170-3/√170

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

7/√170-1/√170

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

1

9/√170-1/√170

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

0

3/√170-5/√170

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

0

13/√170-5/√170

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

1

3/√170-7/√170

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

1

13/√170-7/√170

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

0

1/√170-5/√170

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

0

15/√170-5/√170

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

1

1/√170-7/√170

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

1

15/√170-7/√170

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

0

3/√170-3/√170

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

0

13/√170-3/√170

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

1

3/√170-1/√170

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

1

13/√170-1/√170

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

0

1/√170-3/√170

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

0

15/√170-3/√170

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

1/√170-1/√170

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

1

15/√170-1/√170

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

0

5/√170-11/√170

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

0

11/√170-11/√170

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

1

5/√170-9/√170

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

1

11/√170-9/√170

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

0

7/√170-11/√170

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

0

9/√170-11/√170

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

1

7/√170-9/√170

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

1

9/√170-9/√170

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

0

5/√170-13/√170

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

0

11/√170-13/√170

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1

5/√170-15/√170

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1

11/√170-15/√170

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

0

7/√170-13/√170

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

0

9/√170-13/√170

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

1

7/√170-15/√170

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1

9/√170-15/√170

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

0

3/√170-11/√170

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

0

13/√170-11/√170

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

1

3/√170-9/√170

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

1

13/√170-9/√170

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

0

1/√170-11/√170

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

0

15/√170-11/√170

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

1

1/√170-9/√170

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

1

15/√170-9/√170

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

0

3/√170-13/√170

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

0

13/√170-13/√170

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1

3/√170-15/√170

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

1

13/√170-15/√170

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

1/√170-13/√170

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

0

15/√170-13/√170

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1

1/√170-15/√170

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1

15/√170-15/√170

A-GN4.00-03-TS

708

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Gk

Hk

Ik

Qk

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

5/√1705/√170

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

11/√1705/√170

1

1

0

0

0

0

0

1

5/√1707/√170

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

11/√1707/√170

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

0

7/√1705/√170

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

9/√1705/√170

1

1

0

0

0

0

1

1

7/√1707/√170

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

9/√1707/√170

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

0

5/√1703/√170

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

11/√1703/√170

1

1

0

0

0

1

0

1

5/√1701/√170

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

11/√1701/√170

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

0

7/√1703/√170

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

9/√1703/√170

1

1

0

0

0

1

1

1

7/√1701/√170

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

9/√1701/√170

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

0

3/√1705/√170

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

13/√1705/√170

1

1

0

0

1

0

0

1

3/√1707/√170

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

13/√1707/√170

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

0

1/√1705/√170

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

15/√1705/√170

1

1

0

0

1

0

1

1

1/√1707/√170

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

15/√1707/√170

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

0

3/√1703/√170

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

13/√1703/√170

1

1

0

0

1

1

0

1

3/√1701/√170

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

13/√1701/√170

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

0

1/√1703/√170

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

15/√1703/√170

1

1

0

0

1

1

1

1

1/√1701/√170

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

15/√1701/√170

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

0

5/√17011/√170

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

0

11/√17011/√170

1

1

0

1

0

0

0

1

5/√1709/√170

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

1

11/√1709/√170

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

0

7/√17011/√170

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

0

9/√17011/√170

1

1

0

1

0

0

1

1

7/√1709/√170

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

1

9/√1709/√170

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

0

5/√17013/√170

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

0

11/√17013/√170

1

1

0

1

0

1

0

1

5/√17015/√170

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

1

11/√17015/√170

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

0

7/√17013/√170

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

0

9/√17013/√170

1

1

0

1

0

1

1

1

7/√17015/√170

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

1

9/√17015/√170

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

0

3/√17011/√170

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

0

13/√17011/√170

1

1

0

1

1

0

0

1

3/√1709/√170

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

1

13/√1709/√170

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

0

1/√17011/√170

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

0

15/√17011/√170

1

1

0

1

1

0

1

1

1/√1709/√170

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

1

15/√1709/√170

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

0

3/√17013/√170

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

0

13/√17013/√170

1

1

0

1

1

1

0

1

3/√17015/√170

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

1

13/√17015/√170

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

0

1/√17013/√170

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

0

15/√17013/√170

1

1

0

1

1

1

1

1

1/√17015/√170

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

1

15/√17015/√170

A-GN4.00-03-TS

709

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.
Q
01111111 01111101 01110101 01110111 01010111 01010101 01011101 01011111 11011111 11011101 11010101 11010111 11110111 11110101 11111101 11111111

01111110 01111100 01110100 01110110 01010110 01010100 01011100 01011110 11011110 11011100 11010100 11010110 11110110 11110100 11111100 11111110

01111010 01111000 01110000 01110010 01010010 01010000 01011000 01011010 11011010 11011000 11010000 11010010 11110010 11110000 11111000 11111010

01111011 01111001 01110001 01110011 01010011 01010001 01011001 01011011 11011011 11011001 11010001 11010011 11110011 11110001 11111001 11111011

01101011 01101001 01100001 01100011 01000011 01000001 01001001 01001011 11001011 11001001 11000001 11000011 11100011 11100001 11101001 11101011

01101010 01101000 01100000 01100010 01000010 01000000 01001000 01001010 11001010 11001000 11000000 11000010 11100010 11100000 11101000 11101010

01101110 01101100 01100100 01100110 01000110 01000100 01001100 01001110 11001110 11001100 11000100 11000110 11100110 11100100 11101100 11101110

01101111 01101101 01100101 01100111 01000111 01000101 01001101 01001111 11001111 11001101 11000101 11000111 11100111 11100101 11101101 11101111
I
00101111 00101101 00100101 00100111 00000111 00000101 00001101 00001111 10001111 10001101 10000101 10000111 10100111 10100101 10101101 10101111

00101110 00101100 00100100 00100110 00000110 00000100 00001100 00001110 10001110 10001100 10000100 10000110 10100110 10100100 10101100 10101110

00101010 00101000 00100000 00100010 00000010 00000000 00001000 00001010 10001010 10001000 10000000 10000010 10100010 10100000 10101000 10101010

00101011 00101001 00100001 00100011 00000011 00000001 00001001 00001011 10001011 10001001 10000001 10000011 10100011 10100001 10101001 10101011

00111011 00111001 00110001 00110011 00010011 00010001 00011001 00011011 10011011 10011001 10010001 10010011 10110011 10110001 10111001 10111011

00111010 00111000 00110000 00110010 00010010 00010000 00011000 00011010 10011010 10011000 10010000 10010010 10110010 10110000 10111000 10111010

00111110 00111100 00110100 00110110 00010110 00010100 00011100 00011110 10011110 10011100 10010100 10010110 10110110 10110100 10111100 10111110

00111111 00111101 00110101 00110111 00010111 00010101 00011101 00011111 10011111 10011101 10010101 10010111 10110111 10110101 10111101 10111111

Figure B.8 256QAM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

710

B.9 16PSKThe signal space diagram for 16PSK is shown in Figure B.9. 16PSK is only used for training
sequences for SC.
Ak
Ik
Qk
a
b
c
d

1
0.923879533
0.707106781
0.382683432

00.382683432
0.707106781
0.923879533

e
f
g
h

0
-0.382683432-0.707106781-0.923879533

10.923879533
0.707106781
0.382683432

i
j
k
l
m
n

-1
-0.923879533-0.707106781-0.382683432
00.382683432

0-0.382683432-0.707106781-0.923879533-1-0.923879533

op0.707106781
0.923879533-0.707106781-0.382683432

Q
f

e

d

g
c
h

b

i

a

I

j
p
k
o
l

m

n

Figure B.9 16PSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

711

B.10 Optional Modulation Method
B.10.1 BPSK
(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak) symbols by the serial/parallel converter and thenchanged to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal input to(Ak) (binary/binary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion from (Ak) to (Ik, Qk)
is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series

an-1

an

↓
Symbol Time Series

an+1

↓
(an )
↓
Ak
Ak

Ik

Qk

1 2
1 2
1
1 2
1 2
0
(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.

Q

0

I

1

Figure B.10.1

BPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

712

B.10.2 QPSK
(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk) symbols by the serial/parallel converter andthen changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion from serial signal
input to (Ak, Bk) (binary/quaternary conversion) is performed as noted below, and conversion
from (Ak, Bk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to the table below.
Binary Data Time Series↓
Symbol Time Series

an-1

an
an+1
↓
↓
(an, an+1)
↓
Ak

↓
Bk

Ak

Bk

Ik

Qk

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2
-1/√2

1/√2
-1/√2
1/√2
-1/√2

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
Q
10

00

I

11

01
Figure B.10.2

QPSK

A-GN4.00-03-TS

713

B.10.3 16QAM(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) symbols by the serial/parallel
converter and then changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion
from serial signal input to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) (binary/16ary conversion) is performed as noted
below, and conversion from (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to the tablebelow.

Binary Data Time Series

an-1↓
Symbol Time Series

an

an+1

an+2

an+3

↓

↓
↓
(an, an+1, an+2,
↓
↓
Bk
Ck

↓

↓
Ak

an+3)
↓
Dk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ik

Qk

0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1

1 10

1 10

1 10

3

3

10

1 10

3

10

3

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1
1

1
1

1
1

0
1

10

10

1 10

 1 101 10

 3 103

10

 1 103

10

 3 10 1 101 10

 1 103

 3 101 10

 3 103

 1 10 1 10 1 10 3 10 3 10 1 10 3 10 3 1010

10

A-GN4.00-03-TS

714

(2) The signal space diagram is shown in figure below.
Q
1011

1001

0001

0011

1010

10 0 0

0000

0010

1110

1100

0100

0110

1111

1101

0101

0111

I

Figure B.10.3 16QAM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

715

B.10.4 64QAM(1) The serial signal input is converted to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) symbols by the serial/parallel
converter and then changed to corresponding signals (Ik, Qk) by the encoder. Conversion fromserial signal input to (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) (binary/64ary conversion) is performed as noted
below, and conversion from (Ak, Bk, Ck, Dk, Ek, Fk) to (Ik, Qk) is performed according to thetable below.

Binary Data Time
Series

an

an+1

an+2

an+3

an+4

an+5

↓
Symbol Time Series

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

(an, an+1, an+2, an+3, an+4, an+5)

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

↓

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Ak

Bk

Ck

Dk

Ek

Fk

Ik

Qk

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
0

0
1

3/√42
3/√42

3/√42
1/√42

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

1/√42
1/√42
3/√42
3/√42
1/√42
1/√42
5/√42
5/√42
7/√42

3/√42
1/√42
5/√42
7/√42
5/√42
7/√42
3/√42
1/√42
3/√42

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0

7/√42
5/√42
5/√42
7/√42
7/√42
3/√42
3/√42
1/√42

1/√42
5/√42
7/√42
5/√42
7/√42
-3/√42-1/√42-3/√42
A-GN4.00-03-TS

716

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

1/√42
3/√42
3/√42
1/√42
1/√42
5/√42
5/√42
7/√42
7/√42

-1/√42-5/√42-7/√42-5/√42-7/√42-3/√42-1/√42-3/√42-1/√42

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

5/√42
5/√42
7/√42
7/√42
-3/√42-3/√42-1/√42-1/√42-3/√42-3/√42-5/√42-7/√42-5/√42-7/√42
3/√42
1/√42
3/√42
1/√42
5/√42
7/√42

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

-1/√42-1/√42-5/√42-5/√42-7/√42-7/√42-5/√42-5/√42-7/√42-7/√42

5/√42
7/√42
3/√42
1/√42
3/√42
1/√42
5/√42
7/√42
5/√42
7/√42

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1

0
0
1
1
0
0
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0

-3/√42-3/√42-1/√42-1/√42-3/√42-3/√42-1/√42-3/√42-1/√42-3/√42-1/√42-5/√42-7/√42-5/√42

A-GN4.00-03-TS

717

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1

1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1

1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1

-1/√42-5/√42-5/√42-7/√42-7/√42-5/√42-5/√42-7/√42-7/√42-7/√42-3/√42-1/√42-3/√42-1/√42-5/√42-7/√42-5/√42-7/√42(2) The signal space diagram is shown in the figure below.
Q
101111 101101 100101 100111 000111 000101 001101 001111
101110 101100 100100 100110 000110 000100 001100 001110
101010 101000 100000 100010 000010 000000 001000 001010
101011 101001 100001 100011 000011 000001 001001 001011

I

111011 111001 110001 110011 010011 010001 011001 011011
111010 111000 110000 110010 010010 010000 011000 011010
111110 111100 110100 110110 010110 010100 011100 011110
111111 111101 110101 110111 010111 010101 011101 011111
Figure B.10.4

64QAM

A-GN4.00-03-TS

718

Appendix C: Training Sequence
C.1 OFDM Training Sequence
The training sequence for OFDM is shown in Table C.1, Table C.2 and Table C.3. These tables
are referred to in Section 3.4.2.
Table C.1 Training Pattern (1 – 4)
Subcarrier
NumberCore-Sequence
Core-Seq 1
Core-Seq 2
Core-Seq 3
I
Q
I
Q
I
Q
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
-1
1
-1
1
1
-1
3
1
1
-1
1
1
-1
4
1
1
-1
1
-1
-1
5
-1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
6
-1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
9
1
1
-1
1
1
1
10
-1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
11
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
12
1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
15
1
1
1
1
-1
1
16
1
-1
1
1
-1
1
17
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
18
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
19
1
1
1
1
-1
1
20
-1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
21
1
-1
1
1
1
-1
22
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
23
1
1
1
-1
1
-1
24
-1
1
1
-1
1
1
Note: In case of QPSK, 1 → 1/√2 , -1 → -1/√2Core-Seq 4
I
Q
0
0
1
1
1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
0
0
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

719

Table C.2 Training Pattern (5 - 8)
Subcarrier
NumberCore-Sequence
Core-Seq 5
Core-Seq 6
Core-Seq 7
I
Q
I
Q
I
Q
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
3
-1
1
-1
-1
1
1
4
-1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
5
1
1
-1
1
1
-1
6
1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
7
-1
1
1
1
-1
-1
8
1
-1
1
-1
1
1
9
1
-1
-1
1
1
1
10
-1
-1
1
-1
1
1
11
1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
12
1
1
-1
-1
-1
1
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
1
1
1
1
1
-1
15
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
16
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
17
1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
18
-1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
19
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
20
1
1
-1
1
-1
1
21
1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
22
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
23
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
24
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
Note: In case of QPSK, 1 → 1/√2 , -1 → -1/√2Core-Seq 8
I
Q
0
0
1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
-1
-1
0
0
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

720

Table C.3 Training Pattern (9 – 12)
Subcarrier
NumberCore-Sequence
Core-Seq 9
Core-Seq 10
Core-Seq 11
I
Q
I
Q
I
Q
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
2
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
-1
3
1
-1
1
-1
1
1
4
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
5
1
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
6
-1
1
-1
1
1
1
7
1
1
-1
1
1
1
8
-1
1
1
1
-1
-1
9
-1
-1
1
1
1
-1
10
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
11
-1
-1
-1
1
1
1
12
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
13
0
0
0
0
0
0
14
1
1
1
-1
-1
-1
15
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
16
-1
1
-1
-1
-1
-1
17
-1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
18
1
1
1
-1
-1
1
19
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
1
20
1
1
1
-1
1
1
21
1
1
-1
-1
1
1
22
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
23
1
-1
1
1
-1
1
24
-1
-1
-1
-1
1
-1
Note: In case of QPSK, 1 → 1/√2 , -1 → -1/√2Core-Seq 12
I
Q
0
0
-1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
1
0
0
1
1
1
-1
-1
1
-1
-1
1
1
-1
1
-1
1
1
-1
1
-1
1
-1
1
1

A-GN4.00-03-TS

721

Offset value for OFDM training sequence is shown in Table C.4. This table is referred to in
Section 3.4.2.
Table C.4 Offset Value for OFDM Training Sequence
System Bandwidth [MHz]

2.5

5

10

20

FFT Size

64

128

256

512

Offset Value 1(X sample)

0

0

0

0

Offset Value 2(X sample)

32

64

128

256

Offset Value 3(X sample)

32

64

128

Offset Value 4(X sample)

96

192

384

Offset Value 5(X sample)

32

64

Offset Value 6(X sample)

96

192

Offset Value 7(X sample)

160

320

Offset Value 8(X sample)

224

448

Offset Value 9(X sample)

16

32

Offset Value 10(X sample)

48

96

Offset Value 11(X sample)

160

Offset Value 12(X sample)

224

Offset Value 13(X sample)

288

Offset Value 14(X sample)

352

Offset Value 15(X sample)

416

Offset Value 16(X sample)

480

Offset Value 17(X sample)

16

Offset Value 18(X sample)

48

Offset Value 19(X sample)

80

Offset Value 20(X sample)

112

Training signals of the offset value are calculated by following equation.
θ=2π x (SubcarrierNumber[1 to 24]-13) x Offsetvalue/FFTsize(I,Q)=(ICore-Seq,QCore-Seq)*(cosθ,sinθ)(C.1)

For example, Table C.5 shows the calculated results when core-sequence number is 1 and FFTsize is 512 and offset sample is 128.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

722

Table C.5 The Calculated Example When Core-sequence Number is 1, FFT Size Is 512 andOffset Sample is 128
Subcarrier
Number1

Core-Sequence
Core-Seq 1
I
Q
0
0

Using
Guard Carrier
I
Q
1
-1

Offset Sample
128
I
Q
1
-1

2

-1

1

-1

1

-1

-1

3

1

1

1

1

-1

-1

4

1

1

1

1

1

-1

5

-1

1

-1

1

-1

1

6

-1

-1

-1

-1

1

-1

7

1

1

1

1

-1

-1

8

-1

1

-1

1

1

1

9

1

1

1

1

1

1

10

-1

-1

-1

-1

1

-1

11

1

-1

1

-1

-1

1

12

1

-1

1

-1

-1

-1

13

0

0

0

0

0

0

14

-1

-1

-1

-1

1

-1

15

1

1

1

1

-1

-1

16

1

-1

1

-1

-1

-1

17

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

18

1

1

1

1

-1

1

19

1

1

1

1

-1

-1

20

-1

-1

-1

-1

-1

1

21

1

-1

1

-1

1

-1

22

-1

1

-1

1

-1

-1

23

1

1

1

1

-1

-1

24

-1

1

-1

1

1

1

Note: In this case, “1” => “1/√2” , “-1” => “-1/√2”
As shown in Table C.5, if guard carrier with subcarrier number 1 is used, it will be copied tosubcarrier number 12 of core-sequence. Then, this calculation is carried out per PRU.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

723

C.2 SC Training Sequence
Training sequences of the length when N is 16 for the pilot block S9 of CSCH are shown in Table
C.6. This is also referred to in Section 3.6.2. Training sequences of the length when N is 16 areshown in Table C.7. Parameters to generate training sequences for N as 32, 64, 128 and 256 areshown in Table C.8 to Table C.11, respectively. Using these parameters, training sequence oflength N, [t(1),t(2),…,t(n),..,t(N)], is defined as follows:t(n) = exp(jπr((n-1)2-k2)/N)*b(k+1),where k = (n-1) MOD m(C.2)

Training sequences for SC are referred to in Section 3.6.2.
Table C.6 Training Sequence for Pilot with Signal of CSCH (N=16)
Core-Sequence Number

SymbolNumber

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

2

A1

A1

A1

A1

A0

A0

A0

A0

3

A0

A0

A2

A4

A1

A1

A5

A5

4

A3

A7

A5

A3

A3

A7

A3

A7

5

A4

A4

A0

A4

A6

A6

A6

A6

6

A1

A1

A5

A1

A2

A2

A2

A2

7

A4

A4

A2

A0

A7

A7

A3

A3

8

A3

A7

A1

A3

A5

A1

A5

A1

9

A0

A0

A0

A0

A4

A4

A4

A4

10

A1

A1

A1

A1

A4

A4

A4

A4

11

A0

A0

A2

A4

A5

A5

A1

A1

12

A3

A7

A5

A3

A7

A3

A7

A3

13

A4

A4

A0

A4

A2

A2

A2

A2

14

A1

A1

A5

A1

A6

A6

A6

A6

15

A4

A4

A2

A0

A3

A3

A7

A7

16
A3 A7 A1 A3 A1 A5 A1 A5
Note: Ai is on the 8PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

724

Table C.7 Training Sequence (N=16)
Core-Sequence Number

SymbolNumber

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

2

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

3

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

4

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A5

A5

5

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

6

A3

A3

A5

A5

A7

A7

A3

A3

7

A4

A6

A2

A6

A2

A4

A4

A6

8

A7

A5

A7

A3

A5

A3

A3

A1

9

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

10

A5

A5

A1

A1

A5

A5

A5

A5

11

A0

A4

A4

A4

A4

A0

A0

A4

12

A5

A1

A5

A5

A1

A5

A1

A5

13

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

14

A7

A7

A5

A5

A3

A3

A7

A7

15

A4

A2

A6

A2

A6

A4

A4

A2

16
A3 A5 A3 A7 A5 A7 A7 A1
Note: Ai is on the 8PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)
Table C.8 Training Sequence (N=32)
Core-Sequence Number
Parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

m

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

4

r

1

1

3

3

5

5

7

7

b(1)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(2)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(3)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(4)
A0 A4 A0 A4 A0 A4 A0 A4
Note: Ai is on the 8PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

725

Table C.9 Training Sequence (N=64)
Core-Sequence Number
Parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

m

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

r

1

1

3

3

5

5

7

7

b(1)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(2)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(3)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(4)

A0

A2

A0

A2

A0

A2

A0

A2

b(5)

A0

A4

A0

A4

A0

A4

A0

A4

b(6)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(7)

A0

A4

A0

A4

A4

A0

A4

A0

b(8)
A0 A2 A0 A2 A0 A2 A0 A2
Note: Ai is on the 8PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)
Table C.10 Training Sequence (N=128)
Core-Sequence Number
Parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

m

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

8

r

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

b(1)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(2)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(3)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(4)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(5)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(6)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(7)

A0

A0

A0

A0

A8

A8

A8

A8

b(8)
A0 A0 A0 A0 A0 A0 A0 A0
Note: Ai is on the 16PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/8)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

726

Table C.11 Training Sequence (N=256)
Core-Sequence Number
Parameters

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

m

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

16

r

1

3

5

7

9

11

13

15

b(1)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(2)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(3)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(4)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(5)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(6)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(7)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(8)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(9)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(10)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A4

A4

A4

A4

b(11)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A8

A8

A8

A8

b(12)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

b(13)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A12

A12

A12

A12

b(14)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A4

A4

A4

A4

b(15)

A0 A0 A0 A0

A8

A8

A8

A8

b(16)
A0 A0 A0 A0 A8A8A8A8
Note: Ai is on the 16PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/8)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

727

Offset value for SC training sequence is shown in Table C.12. This table is referred to in Section
3.6.2.
Table C.12 Offset Value for SC Training Sequence
Sequence Size: N[symbol]

16

16

32

64

128

256

(Table C.6) (Table C.7)
Offset Value 1 [symbol] 0

0

0

0

0

0

Offset Value 2 [symbol] 4

8

16

32

64

128

Offset Value 3 [symbol] 2

4

8

16

32

64

Offset Value 4 [symbol] 6

12

24

48

96

192

Offset Value 5 [symbol]

8

16

32

Offset Value 6 [symbol]

40

80

160

Offset Value 7 [symbol]

24

48

96

Offset Value 8 [symbol]

56

112

224

A-GN4.00-03-TS

728

Appendix D: TCCH Sequence
D.1 OFDM TCCH Sequence
TCCH sequence for OFDM is shown in Table D.1. This table is referred to in Sections 3.5.5 and3.5.6.
Table D.1 TCCH Sequence for OFDM
Subcarrier
Number

TCCH Sequence Number for OFDM
1

2

3

4

5

6

1

0

0

0

0

0

0

2

A7

A1

A5

A7

A7

A3

3

A5

A1

A3

A5

A7

A5

4

A1

A3

A5

A7

A5

A1

5

A3

A1

A5

A1

A3

A3

6

A1

A3

A7

A7

A7

A5

7

A3

A5

A7

A5

A3

A7

8

A5

A1

A5

A1

A3

A5

9

A1

A7

A3

A3

A5

A3

10

A5

A1

A5

A7

A3

A7

11

A5

A5

A5

A5

A3

A1

12

A7

A7

A7

A3

A1

A7

13

0

0

0

0

0

0

14

A7

A5

A7

A7

A3

A7

15

A1

A3

A7

A3

A1

A3

16

A5

A7

A1

A1

A3

A5

17

A7

A5

A5

A7

A7

A1

18

A7

A7

A1

A7

A1

A3

19

A1

A1

A1

A7

A5

A3

20

A1

A1

A7

A1

A5

A5

21

A1

A1

A7

A3

A5

A3

22

A3

A3

A3

A3

A5

A3

23

A1

A1

A5

A5

A7

A3

A7

A3

A1

24
A3
A1
A7
Note: Ai is on the QPSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

729

D.2 SC TCCH sequence
TCCH sequence for SC is shown in Table D.2. This table is referred to in Section 3.6.6.
Table D.2 TCCH Sequence for SC
Core-Sequence Number

SymbolNumber

1

2

3

4

5

6

1

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

2

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

3

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

4

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

A1

5

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

6

A3

A3

A5

A5

A7

A7

7

A4

A6

A2

A6

A2

A4

8

A7

A5

A7

A3

A5

A3

9

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

10

A5

A5

A1

A1

A5

A5

11

A0

A4

A4

A4

A4

A0

12

A5

A1

A5

A5

A1

A5

13

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

A0

14

A7

A7

A5

A5

A3

A3

15

A4

A2

A6

A2

A6

A4

16
A3 A5 A3 A7 A5 A7
Note: Ai is on the 8PSK constellation. Ai = exp(jπ*i/4)

A-GN4.00-03-TS

730

Appendix E: Network Interface Requirements
E.1 Overview
In this appendix, the network functions, which are required in XGP, are described. The networkmodel for XGP is shown in Figure E.1. Despite that its network interface for packet layer should
be kept flexible, the XGP network itself should be regarded as Next Generation Network (NGN).

Figure E.1 Network Model for XGP

E.2 Network Functions
The following functions are defined by the XGP radio access network: 1) paging-function, 2)Home location register (HLR)-function, 3) Handover (HO)-function, 4) Authentication,authorization and accounting (AAA)-function. Each function is descried as followings.
E.2.1 Paging Function
XGP keeps the paging function as Original PHS has. Paging area consists of several BS and MS,
which will either enter the area or switch BS in the area, and register its location to location
register. When the MS is paged, all BSs in this paging area can be applied in transmitting thepaging message.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

731

E.2.1.1 Paging Area
Paging area is an area consisting of several BSs. The BS belonging to one paging area must
share the same features about channel structure, system information, etc. Every BS is included ina certain paging group. Network controls the BS and its paging area number.

GW
BS2

BS4

BS3

BS1

Paging Area 2

Paging Area 1

Figure E.2 Structure of Paging Area
E.2.1.2 The Recognition of Paging Area
The MS can distinguish a paging area from BSID which is transmitted by BS. Paging area
number is indicated by nP bits in BSID shown in Figure E.3.
BS-Info 40 bits
BSID nBL bits
System TypeOperator ID

1 bit

3 bitsSystem Additional ID
Paging Area
Numbernp bits

BS Additional

Sequence NumberID
40 - nBL bitsnBL - np - 4 bits

Figure E.3 Broadcasting of System Information by Common Channel
BS notifies the superframe structure of the XGP system, the transceiver timing of LCCH, etc. of
the whole paging area to MS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS732

E.2.1.3 Paging GroupMS determines its own paging group and receives PCH of the paging group. The information on
MS, including MSID, etc, are notified by PCH. Intermittent control for MS as shown in Figure E.4
is possible. In this example, the paging group of this MS is assigned to 2, and MS only receives
the PCH 2 for paging.
LCCH Superframe
Send Timing of BS

B P P S P P S P

B P P S

C 1

C 1

2

C 3

4

C 5

2

C

Receive Timing of MS
P X: PCH X, BC: BCCH, SC: SCCH,
Figure E.4 An Intermittent Receipt of PCH (When It Belongs to PCH 2)
E.2.1.4 Incoming Call
If the MS in a paging area has incoming-call from a network, BS will report an incoming message
to MS using PCH. On the other hand, MS receives an incoming message from the PCH of thepaging group to which the MS belongs. Then radio link is established to BS and theacknowledgement to the incoming message is returned.
E.2.2 Home Location Register (HLR) Function
Home location register (HLR), has the function to control the location information for each MS.
When the power of MS is on, or when the MS is moved into another paging area, the location
registration will be activated to report the paging area, where MS is now standby. HLR controls all
MS location. When an MS is paged, HLR will control the paging message to the paging area,
where this MS has made the last location registration.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

733

E.2.3 Handover Functions
Handover function in XGP realizes the switch of MS link connection from one BS to another BS.
When an MS is carried from the original BS to the destination BS, temporary link with the MS isestablished to both BSs. Meanwhile, a new network link to the destination BS is established. Bytransferring the information such as IP session and user authentication information to thedestination BS network, the old link for original BS in network will be disconnected.

Figure E.5 Handover Function of XGP network

E.2.4 Authentication Authorization Accounting (AAA) Function
Network has the authentication authorization and accounting function for MS or equipment
terminals, which access the network. This authentication function is classified to equipments,
users and services, according to the system service criteria.
E.2.4.1 Authentication Procedure
The authentication procedures depend on system and operation. One of the examples is descriedin this section.
Figure E.6 shows the authentication procedure. BS relays communication with MS andauthentication server in order to perform authentication for the device. BS receives anauthentication random number from authentication server and notifies the number to MS. MS
then received the authentication demand message, performs authentication operation using theauthentication random number, and notifies the result to BS. The authentication result received
from MS is compared with the authentication value received from authentication server, and isused to judge the propriety of authentication. These rules depend on the authentication operation.

A-GN4.00-03-TS734

BS moves to next process, when authentication of MS is successful. BS releases the connection
when authentication of MS is failed.
MS

Authentication
Calculator Modules

Authentication Server

BS

Authentication
Information

Authentication
Information

Authentication
Information

Authentication
Calculator Modules

Authentication Result

Authentication Result: Outside of a stipulated range

Figure E.6 Authentication Procedure
E.2.4.2 Authentication Timing
When MS performs location registration, incoming call, outgoing call and handover authenticationis started by transmitting authentication demanded message from BS to network.
The authentication information transmitted by BS is exchanged between network and MS.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

735

Appendix F: Improvement for CCH linkbudget
F.1 Overview
In this appendix, the improvement for a linkbudget of CCH, Dual CCH and CCH Continuation
Transmission, is described with examples because their usage are depended on system. Either
or both of these function can be used in same system.
Both of BS and MS can improve a linkbudget by receiving both CCH under this environment.
F.2 Dual CCH
Figure F.1 shows example for Dual CCH in case of allocated on each ends. their differences, theleft side is CCH allocation in same slot, the other is CCH allocation in another slots. SCH number
n is depended on System Bandwidth. Each CCH parameter should be same. This CCH allocation
as SCH and slot is depended on system configuration.

SCH1

CCH

SCH1

SCH2
~
SCH n

CCH

SCH2
~

~

~

~

CCH
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

~
SCH n

~

~

~

~

CCH
Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3 Slot 4

Figure F.1 Example allocations of Dual CCH
F.3 CCH Continuation Transmission
Figure F.2 shows example allocations of CCH Continuation Transmission. Two CCHs forContinuation Transmission are set in the figure. A linkbudget improves by increasing the numberof their CCHs. This number is depended on system configuration.
Note that system should consider a compatibility between version 1 and 2 because the protocol
version 1 does not support this function. Therefore, CCH allocation of version 1 and 2 should
separate. This function applies only CCH allocation for protocol version 2. And their CCH shouldbe also continuous allocation.

A-GN4.00-03-TS

736

1

1

1

1

2

12

3

1

1

1

1

2

132

3

1

1

2

2

12

3

1

1

1

2

2

12

3

1

1

1

12

2

132

3

1

1

1

1

2

2

3

1

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=206/240

15ms
Deleting Bit Position for
Rm=220/256

2Deleting Bit Position
and 238/256
C
DL for Rm=220/256

3

LCCH Interval Value

C

C

C

UL

Deleting Bit Position for Rm=220/256, 238/256 and 251/256
CCH for protocol verson 1

CCH for protocol verson 2

Figure F.2 Example allocations of CCH Continuation Transmission

Reference Document List
1-1: XGP Forum Document B-GN0.00-01-TS ”Public personal Handy–phone System : General
Description”

A-GN4.00-03-TS

737

ARIB STD-T95

Change History
VersionDate

HistoryVer. 1.0

December 12th, 2007

Approved by the 68th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 1.1

June

6th, 2008

Approved by the 70th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 1.2

March

18th, 2009

Approved by the 73rd ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 1.3

December 16th, 2009

Approved by the 75th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 2.0

July

7th, 2011

Approved by the 80th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 2.1

February

14th, 2012

Approved by the 83rd ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 2.2

December 18th, 2012

Approved by the 86th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 3.0

July

3rd, 2013

Approved by the 88th ARIB Standard AssemblyVer. 3.1

March

18th, 2014

Approved by the 91st ARIB Standard Assembly

C-1

ARIB STD-T95

Change History List of Standards Ver.1.1
No.

Item No.

Title

Page

1

Attachment 2

List of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights

AT2-2,3

Change Summary
Addition of IPR list

Change History List of Standards Ver.1.2
No.

Item No.

Title

Page

Change Summary1

Attachment 2

AT2-4～6

Addition of IPR list

2

Reference

List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsList of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights

AT2-7,8

Addition of IPR list

Change History List of Standards Ver.1.3
No.

Item No.

Title

1

Attachment 2

2

Attachment 3

List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsNext Generation
PHS specifications

Page
AT2-7

Change Summary
Addition of IPR list－

Full replacement.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.01 Rev
04.

Title

Page

Change Summary
Revised.
Correspond to the change of standard
organization name and the update of
XGP Forum Technical Standard
Ver.02 Rev 02.
Revised.
Correspond to the revise of original
Japanese regulation.
Revised.
Correspond to the change of standard
organization name and the update of
XGP Forum Technical Standard

Change History List of Standards Ver.2.0
No.

Item No.

1

Chapter 1

Chapter 1 General
Descriptions

2

2

Chapter 2

3～193

Chapter 3

Technical
Requirements forRadio Facilities
Physical and MAC
Layer Specifications

20

C-2

ARIB STD-T95

Ver.02 Rev 02.
4

Chapter 4

5Chapter 5

6

Attachment 2

7

Attachment 3

Japanese specificmatters
Measurement
MethodList of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsNext Generation
PHS specifications

21
22
AT2-8

Revised.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Revised.
Correspond to the update of thisstandard version.
Addition of IPR list－

Full replacement.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.02 Rev
02.

Page

Change Summary
Revised.
Correspond to the change of the nameof the XGP Forum Specifications from
“Next Generation PHS” to “XGP”.

Change History List of Standards Ver.2.1
No.

Item No.

Title

1Contents

Contents

ii

2

Chapter 1

General Descriptions

1, 2

3

Chapter 2

3, 10

4

Chapter 3

5Chapter 4

Technical
Requirements forRadio Facilities
Physical and MAC
Layer Specifications
Japanese specificmatters

6

Attachment 2

7

Reference

8

Attachment 3

List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsList of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights
XGP specifications

20, 2122

AT2-9～
93
AT2-97～
103

Revised.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.02 Rev
03.
Addition of IPR list
Addition of IPR list－

Full replacement.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.02 Rev
03.

Page

Change Summary－

Revised.
Correspond to the change of the name

Change History List of Standards Ver.2.2
No.
1

Item No.
Contents

Title
Front cover andIntroduction

C-3

ARIB STD-T95

2

Chapter 3

Physical and MAC
Layer Specifications

20

3

Attachment 2

AT2-94～96

4Reference

5

Attachment 3

List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsList of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights
XGP specifications

AT2-107of this standard from “NextGeneration PHS” to “XGP”.
Revised.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.02 Rev
04.
Addition of IPR list
Addition of IPR list－

Full replacement.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.02 Rev
04.

Title

Page

Change Summary

Technical
Requirements forRadio Facilities
List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsList of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights
XGP specifications

3~19

Change History List of Standards Ver.3.0
No.

Item No.

1

Chapter 2

2

Attachment 2

3

Reference

4

Attachment 3

AT2-97～
106
AT2-117～118－

Revised.
Correspond to the revise of original
Japanese regulation.
Addition of IPR list
Addition of IPR list
Full replacement.
Correspond to the update of XGP
Forum Technical Standard Ver.03

Change History List of Standards Ver.3.1
No.

Item No.

Title

Page

1

Attachment 2

AT2-107

Addition of IPR list

2

Reference

List of Essential
Industrial Property
RightsList of Essential
Industrial Property
Rights

AT2-120

Addition of IPR list

C-4

Change Summary

OFDMA/TDMA TDD
Broadband Wireless Access System(XGP)
ARIB STANDARD
ARIB STD-T95 Version 3.1
Version 1.0
Version 1.1
Version 1.2
Version 1.3
Version 2.0
Version 2.1
Version 2.2
Version 3.0
Version 3.1

December
June
March
DecemberJuly
February
December
July
March

12th
6th
18th
16th
7th
14th
18th
3rd
18th

2007
2008
2009
2009
2011
2012
2012
2013
2014

Published by
Association of Radio Industries and Businesses
11F, Nittochi Building,
1-4-1 Kasumigaseki, Chiyoda-ku, Tokyo 100-0013, JapanTEL 03-5510-8590
FAX 03-3592-1103
Printed in JapanAll rights reserved